Complete Compiled Specification.pdf - Peck Ormsby Construction

SL&A ARCHITECTS 

A R C H I T E C T U R E 

PLANNING 

I N T E R I O R S 

634 S 400 WEST 

S U I T E 2 0 0 

S A L T L A K E C I T Y 

U T A H 8 4 1 0 1 

T E L E P H O N E : 

8 0 1 . 3 2 2 . 5 5 5 0 

F A C S I M I L E : 

801 . 3 2 2 . 5 5 5 7 

PROJECT MANUAL 

FOR 

SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

CLASSROOM ADDITION 

550 E 900 North 

Lehi, Utah 84043 

OWNER: 

Alpine School District 

490 North State Street 

Lindon, Utah 84042 

CMGC: 

Peck Ormsby Constgruction 

Thanksgiving Point North, Suite 100 

2989 W Maple Loop 


March 2, 2009

PROJECT MANUAL 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 

Section 00010 – Notice to Subcontractors 

Section 00100 – Instructions to Bidders 

Section 00300 – Bid Form 

Section 00350 – Forms 

Section 00500 – Project Schedules 

Section 00700 – General Conditions 

Section 00800 – Supplementary General Conditions 

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

Section 01010 – Summary of Work 

Section 01030 – Alternates 

Section 01035 – Modification Procedures 

Section 01040 – Project Coordination 

Section 01050 – Field Engineering 

Section 01090 – Definitions and Standards 

Section 01100 – Products and Substitutions 

Section 01155 – Application for Payment 

Section 01200 – Project Meetings 

Section 01300 – Submittals 

Section 01400 – Testing and Laboratory Service 

Section 01500 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 

Section 01700 – Contract Closeout 

Section 01731 – Cutting and Patching 

Section 01740 – Warranties and Bonds 

Section 01782 – Operational and Maintenance Data 

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK 

Section 02001 – General Site Construction Requirements 

Section 02002 – Site Clearing 

Section 02003 – Earth Moving 

Section 02004 – Excavation Support Protections 

Section 02005 – Asphalt Paving 

Section 02006 – Concrete Paving 

Section 02007 – Site Signage 

Section 02008 – Water Utility Piping 

Section 02009 – Storm Utility Drain Piping 

Section 02010 – Subdrainage 

Section 02050 – Selective Demolition 

Section 02810 – Underground Irrigation Systems 

Section 02830 – Fences and Gates 

Section 02900 – Landscaping 

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 

Section 03300 – Concrete Work 

SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLASSROOM ADDITION 

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 

Section 04200 – Unit Masonry 

DIVISION 5 – METALS 

Section 05120 – Structural Steel 

Section 05200 – Steel Joists and Joist Girders 

Section 05300 – Steel Deck 

Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing 

Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications 

Section 05810 – Expansion Joint Systems 

DIVISION 6 – WOOD 

Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry 

Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry 

Section 06402 – Interior Architectural Millwork 

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

Section 07210 – Building Insulation 

Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems 

Section 07270 – Firestopping 

Section 07411 – Manufactured Roof Panels 

Section 07430 – Composite Panels 

Section 07511 – Built-Up Asphalt Roofing 

Section 07542 – Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing 

Section 07600 – Flashing and Sheet Metal 

Section 07720 – Roof Accessories 

Section 07900 – Joint Sealants 

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 

Section 08100 – Hollow Metal Door and Frames 

Section 08200 – Wood Doors 

Section 08305 – Access Doors 

Section 08400 – Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 

Section 08700 – Finish Hardware 

Section 08800 – Glass and Glazing 

Section 08950 – Insulated Translucent Sandwich Panel Wall/Roof System 

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 

Section 09250 – Gypsum Board Assemblies 

Section 09300 – Tile 

Section 09510 – Acoustical Ceilings 

Section 09650 – Resilient Flooring 

Section 09680 – Carpet 

Section 09900 – Painting 

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 

Section 10100 – Visual Display Boards 



Section 10170 – Solid Phenolic Plastic Toilet Compartments 

Section 10350 – Flagpoles 

Section 10425 – Signage 

Section 10520 – Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories 

Section 10800 – Toilet and Bath Accessories 

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 

Section 11132 – Projection Screens 

Section 11451 – Appliances 

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 

Section 12492 – 2” Horizontal Aluminum Blinds 

Section 12670 – Entrance Mats 

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

Not Used 

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS 

Not Used 

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 

Section 15010 – General Provisions 

Section 15030 – System Commissioning 

Section 15042 – Testing 

Section 15043 – Balancing 

Section 15050 – Basic Materials & Methods 

Section 15180 – Insulation 

Section 15400 – Plumbing 

Section 15500 – Fire Protection 

Section 15700 – Heating-Cooling 

Section 15800 – Air Distribution 

Section 15900 – Building Management and Control System (BMCS) 

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 

Section 16050 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 

Section 16115 – Cable Tray 

Section 16120 – Wires and Cables 

Section 16130 – Raceways 

Section 16140 – Switches and Receptacles 

Section 16425 – Switchboards 600 V & Below 

Section 16470 – Panelboards 

Section 16475 – Motor Controllers 

Section 16478 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppression 

Section 16500 – Lighting 

Section 16530 – Lighting Controls 

Section 16550 – Occupancy Sensed Lighting Control 

Section 16723 – Fire Alarm Systems 

Section 16760 – Integrated Electronic Communication Network 



Section 16740 – Telephone and Data Wiring 

Section 16771 – Classroom Sound Reinforcement, Projectors and Smartboards 

Section 16780 – Television Program Distribution 

Section 16781 – Security Intrusion Detection and Access Control System 

APPENDIX A 

Geotechnical Report 



DIVISION 0 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 

Section 00010 – Notice to Subcontractors 

Section 00100 – Instructions to Bidders 

Section 00300 – Bid Form 

Section 00350 – Forms 

Section 00500 – Project Schedules 

Section 00700 – General Conditions 

Section 00800 – Supplementary General Conditions 


DIVISION TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00010 – NOTICE TO SUBCONTRACTORS 

A. Notice is hereby given that 

Peck Ormsby Construction Company 




Phone 801-766-1700, Fax 801-766-1715 

will receive Bid Proposals from subcontractors on or before 2:00 PM, MDT, Thursday, March 26, 

2009 for the construction of: 

Sego Lily Elementary School Classroom Addition 

550 E 900 North 

Lehi, Utah 

For the following scope of Work: 

1. Divisions 2 thru 16. 

B. Bids shall be submitted in accordance with Contract Drawings, Specifications, Addenda and all other 

Contract Documents as prepared by SL&A Architects. Bids may be hand delivered or faxed to the 

CM/GC or emailed to juddpeck@peckormsby.com . 

C. Alpine School District and Peck Ormsby Construction Company (CM/GC) reserve the right to reject 

any and all proposals with or without cause for any reason determined by the District and CMGC, in 

its sole subjective determination, to be in the District’s best interest and to waive any bidding 

informality. Award or rejection in whole or any part of this project is contingent upon budget. 

D. Contract Documents may be examined and copies obtained on or around 12:00 PM, Wednesday, 

March 11, 2009, at the office of Peck Ormsby Construction. A $150.00 refundable deposit is required 

per each set of Documents. Documents will also be available at the following locations: 

1. Intermountain Contractor Plan Rooms 

1743 W. Alexander, SLC, Phone 972-4400 

313 E. 1200 S, Orem, Phone 224-4333 

2. Mountainlands Area Plan Rooms 

583 W. 3560 South, Suite 4, SLC, Phone 288-1188 

1116 S. State, Orem, Phone 226-2437 

1925 W. 5200 South, Roy 

3. Sheet Metal Contractor Association 

179 W. Haven Ave, South Salt Lake, Phone 486-8449 

E. Any questions directed to the Architect during the bidding phase must be faxed to the Architect’s 

office (801-322-5557) or emailed (rfisher@slaarch.com). 

F. Successful subcontractors will be required to enter into a Contract Agreement with Peck Ormsby 

Construction Company. 

END OF SECTION 

SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLASSROOM ADDITION MARCH 2, 2009 

NOTICE TO SUBCONTRACTORS 00010 - 1


NOTICE TO SUBCONTRACTORS 00010 - 2

SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

1.01 SECURING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings, specifications and other contract documents may be obtained at the office of the 

Contractor by complying with the conditions as stipulated in the “Notice to Subcontractors.” 

1.02 PROPOSALS 

A. Before submitting a proposal, each bidder shall carefully examine the drawings, 

specifications and other contract documents, shall visit the site of work, shall fully inform 

himself/herself as to all existing conditions and limitations, and shall include in the proposal 

the cost of all items included in the contract. 

B. It shall be the responsibility of the bidder to see that his/her proposal is received on or before 

the closing time indicated in the “Notice to Subcontractors.” Any proposal received after the 

scheduled closing time for receipt of bids shall be returned to the bidder. 

C. Each bidder shall inform himself/herself fully of the conditions relating to construction of the 

project and the employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful 

bidder of the obligation to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions 

of the Contract. 

1.03 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. The Work consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, services, equipment and 

appliances required for the fabrication, delivery and erection of all items of work. 

1.04 WITHDRAWAL OF BID 

A. Bids may be withdrawn by the bidder either personally or by written request prior to, but not 

after, the time fixed for opening the bids. Bids submitted and opened may not be withdrawn, 

and must remain fixed and in force as submitted for a period of forty-five (45) days after the 

date for opening the bids. 

1.05 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS 

A. If any person contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed Contract is in doubt as to the 

true meaning of any part of the drawings, specifications or other proposed Contract 

Documents, he/she may submit to the Architect, a written request for an interpretation or 

corrections thereof. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt 

delivery. Any interpretation or correction of the proposed Documents will be made only by 

Addendum duly issued, and a copy of such Addendum will be mailed or delivered to each 

person receiving a set of such Documents. The Owner will not be responsible for any oral 

instructions of the proposals received other than items which are included in addenda, 

additional written instructions or subsequent written change orders. 

1. Written requests may be faxed or emailed to SL&A Architects: 

a. Fax: (801) 322-5557 

b. Email: rfisher@slaarch.com 

B. It is the responsibility of each bidder to ascertain that he/she is in possession of a complete 

set of Contract Documents by comparing page numbers against indexes. Before submitting 

bids, the subcontractor may wish to check with the CMGC or Architect to determine the 

status of any addenda or additional instructions. No post-bidding claims of incomplete sets of 

drawings, specifications, addenda, etc. will be considered. 

C. Should discrepancies appear in the drawings or specifications which are not clarified 

or altered by the addenda, then it will be assumed that the subcontractor has bid the 


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 1

project using the most expensive method and/or material. 

1.06 ADDENDA OR BULLETINS 

A. Any addenda or bulletins issued during the time of bidding, or forming a part of the 

Documents loaned to the bidder for the preparation of his bid, shall be covered in the bid and 

shall be made a part of the Contract. 

1.07 AGREEMENT 

A. The form of Agreement shall be a Contract between General Contractor and Subcontractor. 

1.08 AWARD OR REJECTION OF BIDS 

A. The Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder complying with these 

instructions and with the Notice to Subcontractors. 

1.09 APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS 

A. The Owner reserves the right to approve all subcontractors whose services may be used by 

the General Contractor in prosecution of the work. Such subcontractors may be required to 

submit a statement of their financial responsibilities, bonding limit, current workload, and 

experience before approval is given. 

1.10 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER 

A. Any subcontractor bidding on this project must be an equal opportunity employer and must 

agree to abide by all aspects of the following statement: 

1. The Contractor agrees to abide by the provisions of Title VI and VII of the Civil Rights 

Act of 1964 (42USC2000c) which prohibits discrimination against any employee or 

applicant for employment or any applicant or recipient of services on the basis of 

race, religion, color or national origin and further agrees to abide by Executive Order 

No. 11246 as amended which prohibits discrimination on the basis of sex, 45CFR90 

which prohibits discrimination on the basis of age, and Section 504 of the 

Rehabilitation Act of 1973; or the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 

(42USC12101) which prohibits discrimination on the basis of disability. Also, 

Contractor agrees to abide by Utah’s Executive Order, dated June 30, 1989, which 

prohibits sexual harassment in the work place. 

1.11 COST BREAKDOWN 

A. The Subcontractor shall, before starting his/her work, submit to the General Contractor, a 

cost breakdown showing the cost of various Sub-subcontractors of the work according to 

specification headings. The General Contractor will then submit to the Architect a breakdown 

of the trades, equaling the contract price. This breakdown will be used as the basis for the 

payment of monthly estimates. 

1.12 PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS 

A. Due to the price volatility of some materials and products, the Owner will consider payment 

for early delivery of materials delivered to the Project Site and securely stored at the site. 

Subcontractors are requested to note on their bids, any discount in bid if an early payment is 

made, with the understanding that the material must be on site prior to payment. 

1.13 INSURANCE POLICIES 



A. Prior to signing the contract, the Subcontractor shall obtain Contractor’s Liability Insurance 

and other policies as stipulated in the General Conditions. Such policies shall be properly 

executed and shall have the approval of the Owner before proceeding. 

B. Fire insurance shall be secured by the Board of Education. 

1.13 TIME OF COMPLETION 

A. The Subcontractor agrees to complete the work required by the Contact, per the included 

schedule and as follows: 

1. All work on the Sego Lil Elementary School Classroom Addition in Lehi, Utah shall be 

completed per the CMGC Contract Agreement with the Owner. 

Date of Substantial Completion: December 31, 2009. 

B. The completion of work means total completion with no outstanding punch list items. 

1.14 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Prior to the bid opening, bidders wishing to obtain approval on brands and suppliers other 

than those specified by name, shall submit their requests together with full descriptive 

technical data and samples, to be received by the Architect not less than seven (7) calendar 

days before the bid opening. The material or methods substituted shall in every way perform 

equally to those specified, and shall fit into the space and system designated. The 

Subcontractor shall assume full responsibility for any effect on other items or portions of the 

structure influenced by these substitutions. Approval by the Architect will be in the form of an 

addendum to the specifications issued to all perspective bidders indicating that additional 

brand or brands are approved as equal to those specified. 

B. The bidder’s proposal shall be in strict accordance with the drawings and specifications; 

however, at the time of the bid opening, and attached to the Bidder’s Proposal, unless 

otherwise specified, the Subcontractor may offer a substitute for any material, apparatus, 

equipment or process indicated or specified which he considers equal in every respect to 

those specified. The offer shall include the difference in cost of each item, if any. If the 

Subcontractor does not offer any substitute in the manner required by this section, or if a 

substitute so offered is not deemed by the Architect to be equal or acceptable to that 

indicated or specified, then the Subcontractor shall furnish, erect or install the material, 

apparatus, equipment or process indicated or specified by name. 

C. The Contract will be signed on the basis of the Base Bid without reference to substitutes. The 

acceptance, if any, of substitutes will be made by Change Order. 

1.15 TAXES 

A. The Subcontractor shall comply with all Social Security laws, Worker’s Compensation laws 

and local laws. The Subcontractor shall obtain all licenses required by local, state and federal 

administrative authorities. 

B. The Alpine School District will take advantage of the Tax Exempt Law effective January 1, 

1996. The Tax Exempt Form TC-721 must be used by the vendor when purchasing 

construction materials for this project. 






SECTION 00300 - BID FORM 

TO: Peck Ormsby Construction Company 



Lehi, UT 84043 

PROJECT: Sego Lily Elementary School Classroom Addition 

550 E 900 North 

Lehi, Utah 

NAME OF BIDDER: ________________________________ DATE: ______________________ 

Gentlemen: 

The undersigned, in compliance with your invitation for bids, having examined the Drawings and 

Specifications and related documents and the site of the proposed work and being familiar with all of the 

conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project, including the availability of labor, hereby 

propose to furnish all labor, materials and supplies as required for the Project in accordance with the Contract 

Documents as specified and within the time set forth and at the price stated below. This price is to cover all 

expenses incurred in performing the work required under the Contract Documents of which this proposal is a 

part. 

ADDENDA: 

I/We acknowledge receipt of the following addenda: ___/___ /___ /___ 

SPECIFICATION SECTIONS BIDDING: 

Section & Description Installed? Bid Amount 

_________________________________ _______ $ ________________ 

_________________________________ ________ $ ________________ 

_________________________________ ________ $ ________________ 

BASE BID: 

Dollars ($ ) (In the case of discrepancy, written amount shall govern) 

ALTERNATE BIDS, if applicable to our trade: 

Alternate No. 1: Door Hardware 


Alternate No. 2: 80 Mils PVC Roof Membrane 



BID FORM 00300 - 1

COMPLETION DATE: 

The project completion date is December 31, 2009. All work, including all punch list items must be 

complete by December 31, 2009. 

This bid shall remain good for 45 days after bid opening. 

Liquidated damages for this portion of the work are $500.00 per calendar day. 

The undersigned Contractors License Number for Utah is . 

BOND: 

At the option of the owner or general contractor a Performance and Payment Bond may be required. The 

undersigned agrees to execute the contract within five (5) days and if requested deliver Performance and 

Payment Bond in the prescribed form in the amount of 100% of the contract price for faithful performance of 

the contract. 

Cost of Payment and Performance Bond $ _________________ or Not bondable __________ 

(bond cost will be added to total bid) 

SUBSTITUTIONS: 

The following substitutions of materials and/or equipment are proposed: 

Item Manufacturer and Description Addition Deduction 

____________ _________________________ $___________ $______________ 

____________ _________________________ $___________ $______________ 

____________ _________________________ $___________ $______________ 

TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: 

_________________________________________________ 

Corporation, Partnership, Individual, etc.) 

Respectfully Submitted, 

___________________________________________ 

Name of Bidder 

___________________________________________ 

___________________________________________ 

Authorized Signature 


BID FORM 00300 - 2

SECTION 00350 - FORMS 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.01 EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE 

A. The Alpine School District will take advantage of the new Tax Exempt Law effective January 

1, 1996. The Tax exempt Form TC-721, included herein, must be used by the vendor when 

purchasing construction materials for all Alpine School District projects. 

1.02 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be issued on AIA Document G704. 

1.03 BID FORM 

A. Subcontractor bids shall be submitted on the Bid Form included herein. 


FORMS 00350 - 1


FORMS 00350 - 2

Utah State Tax Commission 

Exemption Certificate 

(Sales, Use, Tourism and Motor Vehicle Rental Tax) 

Name of business or institution claiming exemption (purchaser) Telephone Number 

Street Address City State ZIP Code 

Authorized Signature Name (please print) Title 

Name of Seller or Supplier: Date 

TC-721 

Rev. 1/09 

The person signing this certificate MUST check the applicable box showing the basis for which the exemption is being claimed. 

Questions should be directed (preferably in writing) to Taxpayer Services, Utah State Tax Commission, 210 N 1950 W, Salt Lake City, UT 84134. 

Telephone (801) 297-2200, or toll free 1-800-662-4335. 

!"#$"%#&'$!#%()&#*'+%),)*-%'#%"#%('#%-.#*"//)&&)"$ 

Keep it with your records in case of an audit. 

For purchases by government, Native American tribes and public schools, use form TC-721G. 

❑ 

RESALE OR RE-LEASE 

Sales Tax License No. ________________ 

I certify I am a dealer in tangible personal property or services that 

is for resale or re-lease. If I use or consume any tangible personal 

property or services I purchase tax free for resale, or if my sales are 

of food, beverages, dairy products and similar confections 

dispensed from vending machines (see Rule R865-19S-74), I will 

report and pay sales tax directly to the Tax Commission on my next 

sales and use tax return. 

❑ LEASEBACKS 

I certify the tangible personal property leased satisfies the following 

conditions: (1) the property is part of a sale-leaseback transaction; (2) 

sales or use tax was paid on the initial purchase of the property; and, 

(3) the leased property will be capitalized and the lease payments will 

be accounted for as payments made under a financing arrangement. 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

AGRICULTURAL PRODUCER 

I certify the items purchased will be used primarily and directly in a 

commercial farming operation and qualify for the Utah sales and use 

tax exemption. 

COMMERCIAL AIRLINES 

I certify the food and beverages purchased are by a commercial 

airline for in-flight consumption; or, any parts or equipment 

purchased are for use in aircraft operated by common carriers in 

interstate or foreign commerce. 

COMMERCIALS, FILMS, AUDIO AND VIDEO TAPES 


I certify that purchases of commercials, films, prerecorded video 

tapes, prerecorded audio program tapes or records are for sale or 

distribution to motion picture exhibitors, or commercial television or 

radio broadcasters. If I subsequently resell items to any other 

customer, or use or consume any of these items, I will report any tax 

liability directly to the Tax Commission. 

FILM, TELEVISION, VIDEO 

I certify that purchases, leases or rentals of machinery or equipment 

will be used by a motion picture or video production company 

for the production of media for commercial distribution. 

POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITY 

Sales Tax License No. __________________________ 

I certify our company has been granted a “Certification of Pollution 

Control Facilities” as provided for by Utah Code §§19-2-123 through 

19-2-127 and as explained in Tax Commission Rule R865-19S-83 

by either the Air Quality Board or the Water Quality Board. I further 

certify each item of tangible personal property purchased under this 

exemption is qualifying machinery or equipment for this purpose. 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

MEDICAL EQUIPMENT 

I certify the equipment or device checked below is prescribed by a 

licensed physician for human use. 

❑ Durable Medical Equipment primarily used to serve a medical 

purpose, is not worn in or on the body, and is for home use 

only. (Sales of spas and saunas are taxable.) 

❑ Mobility Enhancing Equipment primarily used to improve 

movement, is for use in a home or motor vehicle, and is not 

used by persons with normal mobility. 

❑ Prosthetic Device used to replace a missing body part, to 

prevent or correct a physical deformity, or support a weak 

body part. This is also exempt if purchased by a hospital or 

medical facility. (Sales of corrective eyeglasses and contact 

lenses are taxable.) 

❑ Disposable Home Medical Equipment or Supplies that 

cannot withstand repeated use and purchased by, for, or on 

behalf of a person other than a health care facility, health care 

provider or office of a health care provider. The equipment 

and supplies must be eligible for payment under Title XVIII, 

federal Social Security Act, or the state plan for medical 

assistance under Title XIX, federal Social Security Act. 

OUT-OF-STATE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 

I certify this tangible personal property will be shipped out of state 

and will become part of real property located in a state that does not 

have a sales tax or allow credit for tax paid to Utah. 

CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS PURCHASED FOR AIRPORTS 

I certify the construction materials are for a new airport owned or 

operated by a city in Davis, Utah, Washington or Weber County. I 

further certify the construction materials will be installed or 

converted into real property owned by and located at the airport. 

CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS PURCHASED FOR RELIGIOUS 

AND CHARITABLE ORGANIZATIONS 

I certify the construction materials purchased are on behalf of a 

religious or charitable organization. I further certify the purchased 

construction materials will be installed or converted into real 

property owned by the religious or charitable organization. 

Name of religious or charitable organization: 

________________________________ 

Sales Tax Exemption No. _____________________________ 

Name of project: _______________________ 

DIRECT MAIL 


I certify I will report and pay the sales tax for direct mail purchases 

on my next Utah Sales and Use Tax Return.

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

ENERGY-RELATED EQUIPMENT 


I certify the machinery or equipment leased or purchased will be 

used to create or expand the operations of a renewable energy 

production facility, a waste energy production facility, or a facility 

that produces fuel from biomass energy. 

FUELS, GAS, ELECTRICITY 


I certify all natural gas, electricity, coal, coke, and other fuel 

purchased will be used for industrial use only and not for residential 

or commercial purposes. 

MUNICIPAL ENERGY 


I certify the natural gas or electricity purchased: is for resale; is 

prohibited from taxation by federal law, the U.S. Constitution, or the 

Utah Constitution; is for use in compounding or producing taxable 

energy; is subject to tax under the Motor and Special Fuel Tax Act; 

is used for a purpose other than as a fuel; is used by an entity 

exempted by municipal ordinance; or is for use outside a municipality 

imposing a municipal energy sales and use tax. The normal 

sales tax exemptions under Utah Code §59-12-104 do not apply to 

the Municipal Energy Sales and Use Tax. 

STEEL MILL 


I certify the rolls, rollers, refractory brick, electric motors or other 

replacement parts will be used in the furnaces, mills or ovens of a steel 

mill as described in Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) 3312. 

RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT OF COAL-TO-LIQUID, OIL 

SHALE AND TAR SANDS TECHNOLOGY 


I certify the tangible personal property purchased will be used in 

research and development of coal-to-liquids, oil shale, and tar 

sands technology. 

MAILING LISTS 


I certify the printed mailing lists or electronic databases are used to 

send printed material that is delivered by U.S. mail or other delivery 

service to a mass audience where the cost of the printed material is 

not billed directly to the recipients. 

SEMICONDUCTOR FABRICATING, PROCESSING, OR 

RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT MATERIAL 


I certify the fabricating, processing, or research and development 

materials purchased are for use in research or development, manufacturing, 

or fabricating of semiconductors. Failure to report these 

purchases on the information line of the semiconductor manufacturer’s 

sales and use tax return may subject the semiconductor manufacturer 

to a penalty equal to the lesser of $1,000 or 10 percent of the sales and 

use tax that would have been imposed if the exemption had not applied. 

To be valid this certificate must be filled in completely, including a check mark in the proper box. 

A sales tax license number is required only where indicated. 

Please sign, date and, if applicable, include your license or exemption number. 

NOTE TO SELLER: Keep this certificate on file since it must be available for audit review. 

NOTE TO PURCHASER: Keep a copy of this certificate for your records. You must notify the seller of cancellation, modification, or limitation of the 

exemption you have claimed. 

If you need an accommodation under the Americans with Disabilities Act, contact the Tax Commission at (801) 297-3811 or TDD (801) 297-2020. 

Please allow three working days for a response. 

!"#$"%#&'$!#%()&#*'+%),)*-%'#%"#%('#%-.#*"//)&&)"$ 

Keep it with your records in case of an audit. 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

❑ 

LOCOMOTIVE FUEL 

I certify this fuel will be used by a railroad in a locomotive engine. 

MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT AND NORMAL OPERATING 

REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT PARTS USED IN A MANUFAC- 

TURING FACILITY OR MINING ACTIVITY 


I certify the machinery and equipment and normal operating repair or 

replacement parts purchased have an economic life of three years or 

more and are for use in a Utah manufacturing facility described within 

the SIC Codes of 2000-3999, in a qualifying scrap recycling operation, 

or in a cogeneration facility placed in service on or after May 1, 2006, 

or in an establishment described in NAICS 212, Mining (except Oil and 

Gas), or NAICS 213113, Support Activities for Coal Mining, NAICS 

213114, Support Activities for Metal Mining, or NAICS 213115, 

Support Activities for Nonmetallic Minerals (except Fuels) Mining. The 

mining exemption also includes equipment used in research and 

development. Failure to report these purchases on the information 

line of the sales and use tax return may subject the filer to a penalty 

equal to the lesser of $1,000 or 10 percent of the sales and use tax 

that would have been imposed if the exemption had not applied. 

RELIGIOUS OR CHARITABLE INSTITUTION 

Sales Tax Exemption No. _____________________________ 

I certify the tangible personal property or services purchased will be 

used or consumed for essential religious or charitable purposes. 

This exemption can only be used on purchases totaling $1,000 

or more, unless the sale is pursuant to a contract between the 

seller and purchaser. 

SKI RESORT 


I certify the snow-making equipment, ski slope grooming equipment 

or passenger rope-ways purchased are to be paid directly with 

funds from the ski resort noted on the front of this form. 

TOURISM/MOTOR VEHICLE RENTAL 

I certify the motor vehicle being leased or rented will be temporarily 

used to replace a motor vehicle that is being repaired pursuant to a 

repair or an insurance agreement; the lease will exceed 30 days; 

the motor vehicle being leased or rented is registered for a gross 

laden weight of 12,001 pounds or more; or, the motor vehicle is 

being rented or leased as a personal household goods moving van. 

This exemption applies only to the tourism tax (up to 7 percent) and 

the short-term motor vehicle rental tax (Transportation Corridor 

Funding – 2.5 percent) – not to the state, local, transit, zoo, hospital, 

highways, county option or resort sales tax. 

TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT, MACHINERY OR 

SOFTWARE 


I certify these purchases or leases of equipment, machinery, or 

software, by or on behalf of a telephone service provider, have a 

useful economic life of one or more years and will be used to enable 

or facilitate telecommunications; to provide 911 service; to maintain 

or repair telecommunications equipment; to switch or route 

telecommunications service; or for sending, receiving, or transporting 

telecommunications service.

SECTION 00500 – PROJECT SCHEDULES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Refer to the following Preliminary Construction Schedule for tentative dates of when work will 

be expected to be completed. (Schedule will be issued via addendum.) 

B. Refer to the Schedule of Responsibility for Temporary Facilities and General Conditions 

Services for subcontractor requirements with respect to the services indicated. 

1.02 SCHEDULE OF RESPONSIBILITY FOR TEMPORARY 

FACILITIES AND GENERAL CONDITIONS SERVICES 

Note: “…as required” means by the contract documents, or required by regulations, or required in order to 

execute the Subcontractor’s work, or reasonably required of the Subcontractor by the General Contractor. 

DESCRIPTION PROVIDED, MAINTAINED & REMOVED BY 

1. Temporary Fencing Site Fencing Contractor 

2. Drinking Water Each Subcontractor 

3. Additional temporary power drop Electrical Subcontractor 

(connect & disconnect) distribution 

System and panels per Section 

01500 

4. Temporary Power Electrical Subcontractor 

5. Temporary Interior Lighting per Access Lighting by GC 

Section 01500 and Utah OSHA Task Lighting by each trade 

6. Temporary Task Lighting beyond Each Subcontractor, as required by their work 

The requirements of Section 01500 

And Utah OSHA 

7. Two (2) each Temporary Freeze- Mechanical Subcontractor 

Proof Hose Bibs at Ground Level 

8. Temporary Fire Extinguisher General Contractor for his field office, and each 

Subcontractor as needed 

9. Temporary Roof Access Each Subcontractor, as required for their work 

10. Safety Barricades, Methods and Each Subcontractor as required; for example, 

Equipment as required by Utah perimeter rails at the roof (if required) shall be by 

OSHA except as noted otherwise the Roofing Subcontractor, and barricades or 

herein closures required at a floor penetration for duct- 

work shall be by the Mechanical Subcontractor. 

11. Site Dust Control Subcontractor during Demolition Operations 


PROJECT SCHEDULES 00500 - 1

12. Snow Removal from Access Roads General Contractor 

and On-site Parking Areas 

13. Snow Removal from Subcontractor Each Subcontractor as required – Snow removal 

Storage areas, Staging Areas, from concrete forms and metal deck areas to 

Office Areas and Work Areas receive concrete shall be by the Concrete 

Subcontractor. 

14. Telephone Service General Contractor will provide at least one 

accessible telephone in the General Contractor’s 

Field office for the Subcontractor’s use for local, 

credit card, or collect calls. Telephones in 

Subcontractor’s project trailers/offices shall be 

provided by Subcontractors. 

15. Dumpsters for Trash Each Subcontractor to provide for their own use 

16. Broom Cleaning and Daily Cleanup Each Subcontractor for their area and trade 

17. Removal of Window Labels and Glass and Glazing Subcontractor 

and Erection Marks, and Final 

Window Cleaning 

18. Removal of all waste, debris, boxes, Each Subcontractor 

etc., from work areas and loading 

of these items into dumpsters or 

other designated trash containers 

on site on a daily basis 

19. Control of dust, noise and debris Responsible Subcontractor 

caused by a Subcontractor’s work, 

dust partitions, protection of 

existing and installed products 

20. Temporary heating of building to 50 Owner Controlled Allowance 

degrees F after it is enclosed 

21. Temporary enclosures, weather Each Subcontractor, as required, except as noted 

protection and heating for 

Subcontractor’s work. Protection 

of equipment and supplies 

22. Temporary Toilets General Contractor 

23. Building Permits None are required 

24. Mechanical and Electrical Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors as 

Connection Fees needed - All required fees to be reimbursed by the 

Owner 

25. Survey General Contractor 

26. Layout Each Subcontractor, as required 

27. Temporary Site Dewatering Each Subcontractor, as required 



28. Temporary Field Office, Storage Each Subcontractor, as required 

Vans, Parking Arrangements, 

Secure Fenced Storage Area 

(if space is available), etc. 

29. Water Hoses and Extension Cords Each Subcontractor 

30. Temporary Shoring, Cribbing, Each Subcontractor, as required 

Bracing and Slope Protection 

31. Unloading and Conveying Each Subcontractor 

of Material 

32. Scaffolding, Staging, Planking Each Subcontractor, as required 

and Plywood Roof Protection 

33. Engagement of Testing Laboratory Owner 

Services for the testing of soils, 

concrete and asphalt paving 

34. Night Watchman or Security Service None will be provided 

35. As-Built Drawings, accurately Each Subcontractor, on a weekly basis 

showing position and elevation 

of Subcontractor’s installed work 

36. All other items not specifically Each Subcontractor, as required 

described herein as being provided 

by General Contractor 






SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. AIA Document A201-1997 “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction” is, by 

reference herein, incorporated into the project. A copy is available for review at the Architect’s 

office. 


GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 - 1


GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 - 2

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 

The supplementary General Conditions contain amendments and additions to the A.I.A. General Conditions. 

Where any part of the A.I.A. General conditions is modified or voided by the Supplementary General 

Conditions, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. 

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACTOR 

Under 3.3 “Supervision and Construction Procedures, “add the following: 

3.3.5 “Owner will establish lot lines, restrictions, and a permanent bench mark. All other grades, lines, 

levels, and bench marks shall be established and maintained by the Contractor.” 

3.3.6 “Contractor shall provide and maintain well-built batter boards at corners. He shall establish and 

safeguard bench marks in at least two widely separated places. As work progresses, he shall 

establish exact locations of partitions on rough floors as a guide to the various trades.” 

3.3.7 “Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels, and dimensions indicated on the drawings, and shall 

report all inconsistencies to the Architect before commencing work.” 

Under 3.5, “Warranty,” add the following: 

3.5.2 “The Contractor shall guarantee his work of the entire project for a period of one year after date of 

substantial completion unless otherwise required. He shall at his own expense, replace or adjust 

any of his work which may require it during that time, and he shall pay for all repair or replacement 

or other work occasioned by such operation.” 

3.5.3 “If within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as 

may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the 

Contract Documents, any of the work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the 

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the 

Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such 

condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.” 

Under 3.18 “Indemnification,” add the following: 

3.18.4 “Indemnities” shall be defined for the purposes of their Article: 

Alpine School District and while acting within the scope of their duties as such: Any member of 

its Board of Education or advisory committees, or any of its elected or appointed officials, or 

any of its employees or authorized volunteers, and the Architect or his representative.” 

ARTICLE 4 – ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT: 

Under 4.7 “Claims and Disputes,” add the following: 

4.7.10 The owner will not be responsible for expenses incurred during delays on the project, if any. 

ARTICLE 7 – CHANGES IN THE WORK: 

Under 7.2 “Change Orders,” add the following: 

7.2.3 In addition, if the proposal includes a time extension, a justification therefore shall also be furnished. 

The proposal, together with the price breakdown and time extension justification, shall be furnished 

within thirty (30) days of the date first requested by the Architect. 


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-1

In such proposals, profit and overhead shall be computed as follows: 

Subcontractor’s profit and overhead shall not exceed 10% of total direct costs. 

The Construction Manager/General Contractor’s profit and overhead on work performed by his 

own crews shall not exceed 10% of total direct costs. 

The Construction Manager/General Contractor’s profit and overhead on work performed by his 

subcontractor shall not exceed 5% of total direct costs. 

On credit changes, profit and overhead on the originally estimated work will not have to be 

returned to the Owner. 

Percentage fees represent the total fees to be paid for change orders. The Construction 

Manager/General Contractor’s fee submitted as part of this bid will not be added to the fees 

listed above. 

ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS: 

IF IN CONFLICT, THIS WOULD SUPERSEDE ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE OF THE AIA DOCUMENT A201 

“GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION” 

ALL COSTS FOR INSURANCE SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE BID AMOUNT 

Under 11.1 “Contractor’s Liability Insurance,” add the following: 

11.1.4 “To protect against liability, loss or expense arising from damage to property or injury of any person 

or persons incurred in any way out of, in connection with, or resulting from the work provided 

hereunder, Contractor shall obtain at its own expense from reliable insurance companies 

acceptable to Owner’s Business Official and authorized to do business in the State in which the 

work is to be performed, and shall maintain in force during the entire period of this Contract, the 

following or equivalent insurance:” 

Worker’s Compensation Insurance providing staturatory benefits and Employers’ Liability 

Insurance to a limit of $1,000,000. 

Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, including premises-operations; explosion; collapse 

and underground hazards; blanket contractual; broad form property damage; independent 

contractors; and personal injury including employees with limits not less than $1,000,000 

combined single limit per occurrence. 

Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance including owned, hired, and non-owned 

automobiles with limits not less than $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence. 

Contractor using its own aircraft, or employing aircraft in connection with the work performed 

under this Contract shall maintain aircraft liability insurance with a combined single limit 

applying to bodily injury and property damage liability not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence. 

Any policy required by this section may be arranged under a single policy for the full limit required, 

or by a combination of underlying policies with the balance provided by an Excess or Umbrella 

Liability policy. 

Owner may accept equivalent self-insured programs in lieu of insurance upon specific approval of 

Owner’s Business Official. 



Irrespective of the requirements as to insurance to be carried by Contractor as provided herein, 

insolvency, bankruptcy, or failure of any insurance company to pay all claims accruing, shall not be 

held to relieve contractor of any obligations hereunder. 

The following shall be listed as additional insured’s under each of the policies required to be 

purchased and maintained by contractor, with the exception of Worker’s Compensation: 

“Alpine School District and while acting within the scope of their duties as such: any member of 

its Board of Education or advisory committees, or any of its elected or appointed officials, or 

any of its employees or authorized volunteers, and Architect or his representatives.” 

Each policy so required shall be primary to the aforesaid insured’s listed above, and shall apply to 

the full policy limits prior to any other insurance coverage which the aforesaid insured’s may have in 

the event of claim under any of said policies, but, only with respect to work being performed by 

Contractor on behalf of the aforesaid insured’s. 

Before the work is commenced, certificates evidencing that satisfactory coverage of the type and 

limits set forth above are in effect, shall be furnished to the Owner. Such insurance policies shall 

contain provisions that no alterations, cancellation, or material change therein shall become 

effective except upon thirty (30) days prior written notice to Owner’s Business Official as evidenced 

by return of registered or certified letter sent to Owner’s Business Official. 

Any and all deductibles in the above described policies shall be assumed by, for the account of, 

and at sole risk of Contractor. 

Under 11.3 “Property Insurance,” add the following: 

11.3.12 “Owner shall provide “all risk” property insurance to protect Owner, as well as all Contractors, 

subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors with respect to work performed hereunder at Owner’s own 

cost and expense, according to the policy forms currently in force with insurance carriers selected 

by Owner’s Risk Manager. Such “all risk” insurance shall not cover the perils of earthquake or flood, 

or extend to cover Contractors’, subcontractors’, or sub-subcontractors’ equipment or vehicles. 

Owner’s Risk Manager will furnish, upon request, all parties in interest with copies of said policies 

authenticated by authorized agents of the insurers.” 

The above described policies shall be subject to a total deductible of $1,000,000 per loss 

occurrence, which shall be assumed by all insured’s in proportion to their share of the total 

amount of an insured loss occurrence. 

Any insured property loss is to be adjusted with the Owner’s Business Official, and may be 

payable to the Owner’s Business Official as trustee for the insured’s, their interests may 

appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable loss payable clause. 

Contractor and Owner hereby waive all rights against each other for damages caused by perils 

insured against under the property insurance provided by Owner, except such rights as 

Contractor may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner’s Business Official 

as trustee. 

If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for special hazards be included in the 

property insurance policy, the Owner’s Business Official shall, if possible, include such 

insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate change order. 

11.3.13 “The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and 

shall protect the Owner’s property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. He 

shall make good any such damage, injury, or loss, except such as may be directly due to errors in 

the Contract Documents or caused by agents or employees of the Owner, or as may be insured by 



the Owners as required by the Property insurance Article of these Supplementary General 

Conditions. He shall adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Contract 

Documents.” 

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work 

and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and municipal safety laws and 

building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises 

where the work is being performed. He shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as 

required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for the protection 

of workers and the public, and shall post danger signs warning against hazardous conditions. 

Under 11.4 “Performance Bond and Payment Bond,” add the following: 

11.4.3 “The Contractor shall include in his bid, as part of the quoted total, all costs involved in securing and 

furnishing the following bonds based on the completed cost of the Contract: 

A full 100% Performance Bond covering the faithful execution of the Contract; and 

A full 100% Payment Bond of all obligations arising thereunder. 

ADDITIONAL ARTICLES: Add the following articles: 

ARITCLE 15 – INCIDENTAL WORK: 

All minor details of work which are not shown on the plans, as well as such items which are not specifically 

mentioned in the specifications, but are obviously necessary for the proper completion of the work, shall be 

considered as incidental, and as being a part of and included with the work for which prices are given in the 

proposal, and no extra compensation shall be allowed the Contractor for the performance thereof. 

ARTICLE 16 – CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY: 

The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent who shall be in attendance at the project site during 

the process of work. The Superintendent shall be satisfactory and approved by the Architect. The Architects 

decision concerning the competency of the Superintendent will be final. 

The Superintendent shall not be changed throughout the duration of the project, except with the consent of 

the Architect, or unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in 

his employ. 

The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and all communications given to the Superintendent shall 

be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communication will be confirmed in writing. Other 

communications will be so confirmed on written request in each case. 

ARTICLE 17 – RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR: 

The Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor and every subcontractor agrees to be bound by the terms 

of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and the drawings and specifications as far as applicable to his 

work. Nothing in the Article shall create any obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the 

payment of any sums to any subcontractor. 

ARTICLE 18 – SALES TAX SAVINGS: 

Alpine School District is tax exempt in accordance with the new Utah State Tax Law that went into effect 

January 1, 1996. Do not include state sales tax on products, materials, etc. 



DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

Section 01010 – Summary of Work 

Section 01030 – Alternates 

Section 01035 – Modification Procedures 

Section 01040 – Project Coordination 

Section 01050 – Field Engineering 

Section 01090 – Definitions and Standards 

Section 01100 – Products and Substitutions 

Section 01155 – Application for Payment 

Section 01200 – Project Meetings 

Section 01300 – Submittals 

Section 01400 – Testing and Laboratory Service 

Section 01500 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 

Section 01700 – Contract Closeout 

Section 01731 – Cutting and Patching 

Section 01740 – Warranties and Bonds 

Section 01782 – Operational and Maintenance Data 



SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Requirements of Division 0 “Bidding Requirements” and Division 1 “General Requirements” 

apply to every section contained in the Project Manual, and shall govern the execution of 

Work required by the Contract Documents. 

B. Furnish everything necessary for and incidental to proper and satisfactory completion of all 

Work specified and indicated or shown in the Contract Documents. 

C. It is the intent of the Owner to issue a “Notice to Proceed” as soon as bidding and contract 

negotiations can be completed on or around March 31, 2009, with construction starting 

shortly thereafter. 

1.02 PROJECT 

1.03 CODES 

A. Location: This project is located at the existing Sego Lily Elementary School at 550 E 900 

North, Lehi, Utah. 

B. The project includes a classroom and administration suite addition of approximately 20,400 

square feet and a remodel of the existing administration suite, which is about 1,750 square 

feet. Some of the work identified in the Contract Documents will impact other areas of the 

existing building, which will require coordination with faculty and staff, protection of occupants 

and scheduling work after school hours. 

The project will need to be phased as indicated in the Phasing drawing and adjusted as 

determined by the CM/GC to accommodate the school. Parking for faculty and staff, plus the 

trades, and staging areas are identified in the Phasing drawing, but are subject to change 

where requested by the Owner, as determined by the CM/GC, or to better accommodate the 

school. 

The date for substantial completion is December 31, 2009, which may be adjusted in the 

CM/GC contract, as determined by the actual start date. 

Construction is load-bearing masonry (Atlas brick) with steel joists and deck. Steel columns 

and beams are also used in a few areas. The roof system is a single-ply membrane over 

insulation. 

The project includes a new boiler/chiller/air handler for the addition and a fire sprinkler 

system, also for the addition and the remodeled area of the existing school. 

C. Alternates: This project includes alternates, which are identified in Division 1 Section 

“Alternates” and on the Drawings. 

A. Law of place of building governs. Conform to applicable requirements of the latest editions of 

the International Building Code, International Building Code Standards, International 

Mechanical Code, International Plumbing Code, National Electrical Code, National Fire 

Protection Association requirements, local ordinances, and UOSHA requirements applicable 


SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1

to this project, unless a higher standard is called for, without additional cost to the Owner. 

B. Comply with ICC/ANSI A-117.1-2003, American National Standard “Accessible and Usable 

Building and Facilities,” and with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990 

“Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities” as amended. 

1.04 CONTRACT LIMITS 

A. Work included in this project is generally limited to the area north of the existing building and 

to the remodeled area, with some additional work required in other areas of the site and the 

building as identified throughout the construction documents. Any damage due to 

construction activity to existing structures and site improvement is the responsibility of the 

contractor/subcontractors to repair at no additional cost to the Owner. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

2.01 The District has prequalified contractors and suppliers as indicated below. These are the only 

subcontractors that will be allowed to bid on the project for work from their respective trades. 

A. Refer to Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry” for approved masonry contractors. 

B. Refer to Division 6 Section “Interior Architectural Millwork” for approved mills. 

C. Approved Mechanical Contractors: 

1. Quest Mechanical, 801-374-1762 , PO Box 2045, Provo, Utah 

2. Professional Plumbing 801-794-3636 , 1242 East 1060 North, Springville, Utah 

a. Cofran Climate Systems, 801-794-2413, 1012 North 1100 East, Spanish 

Fork, Utah 

3. US Mechanical, 801-785-6028 , 383 South Main, Pleasant Grove, Utah 

4 Western States Mechanical, 801-489-5117 , 995 South 1960 West, Springville, 

Utah 

5. PHE Mechanical Contracting, 801-566-3389 , 4225 West Nike Drive Suite B, West 

Jordan, Utah 

D. Approved Electrical Contractors 

1. Tri-Phase Electric, 801-756-6008 , 775 East 930 South, American Fork, Utah 

2. Arco Electric, 801-566-1695 , 597 West 9320 South, Sandy, Utah 

3. Sage Electric, 801-465-7960 , 1639 West American Way #4, Payson, Utah 

4. Cutler Electric, 801-489-1351 , 1417 East 150 South, Springville, Utah 

5. Morris Electric, 801-489-8501 , 275 West 900 North, Springville, Utah 

6. Taylor Electric, 801-413-1300 , 1018 West Beardsley Piace #A, Salt Lake, Utah 

7. All Phase Electric, 801-561-7301 , 95 West 9560 South, Sandy, Utah 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 



SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2

SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Intent herewith is to give the bidders a general description of products, systems and 

construction involved in all parts of the project, that are designated as alternate bid items. 

Each and every item described herein, and all work required therefore and appurtenant 

thereto, is specified elsewhere in this project manual. 

B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the alternates listed below, 

independent of the order in which they are listed. 

C. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory object and similar items 

incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the 

Alternate. 

1.02 DEFINITIONS 

A. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for 

certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or 

deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in 

either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, 

systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. 

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to 

ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the 

project. 

B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each 

party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have 

been accepted, rejected, or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete 

description of negotiated modifications to Alternates. 

C. Schedule: A “Schedule of Alternates” is included at the end of this Section. Specification 

Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods 

necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

Not Used 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES 

A. Alternate No. 1 – Door Hardware 

Refer to Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware” for alternate door hardware. 


ALTERNATES 01030 - 1

B. Alternate No. 2 – 80 Mil Single-Ply (PVC) Roof Membrane 

Refer to Division 7 Section “Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing for requirements for an 80 mil 

membrane with a 30-year warranty. 



ALTERNATES 01030 - 2

SECTION 01035 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 


1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing 

Contract modifications. 

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 

1. Division 1 Section “Submittals” for requirements for the Contractor’s Construction 

Schedule. 

2. Division 1 Section “Application for Payment” for administrative procedures governing 

applications for payment. 

3. Division 1 Section “Products and Substitutions” for administrative procedures for 

handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 

1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 

A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving an adjustment 

of the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Architect on AIA form G710, 

Architect’s Supplemental Instructions. 

1.04 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS 

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposal changes in the Work that will require adjustment 

to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect, with detailed description 

of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if 

necessary. 

1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider 

them instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change. 

2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 15 days of receipt of the 

proposal request, submit to the Architect for the Owner’s review an estimate of cost 

necessary to execute the proposed change. 

a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along 

with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish 

survey data to substantiate quantities. 

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of 

trade discounts. 

c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will 

have on the Contract Time. 

B. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Request: When latent or other unforseen 

conditions require modifications on the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by 

submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 

1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change 

on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the 

effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 

2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the 

total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to 


MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035 - 1

substantiate quantities. 

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade 

discounts. 

4. Comply with requirements in Section “Products and Substitutions” if proposed change 

in the Work requires the substitution of one product or system for a product or system 

not specified. 

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests. 

1.05 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 

A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total agreement on 

the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction 

Change Directive on AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in 

the Work, for subsequent inclusions in a Change Order. 

1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change 

in the Work and designate the method to be followed to determined change in the 

Contract Sum or Contract Time. 

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by 

the Construction Change Directive. 

1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data 

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 

1.06 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 

A. Upon the Owner’s approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a 

Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Contractor on AIA Form G701, as provided in 

the Conditions of the Contract. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 




MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035 - 2

SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION 




Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Minimum administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordination of work on 

the project include but are not limited to the following: 

1. Coordination. 

2. Limitations for use of site. 

3. General installation provisions. 

4. Cleaning and protection. 

B. Field engineering is included in Section “Field Engineering”. 

C. Requirements for the Contractor’s Construction Schedule are included in Section “Submittals”. 

1.03 COORDINATION 

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these 

Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate 

construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are 

dependant upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 

1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependant on installation of other 

components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities 

in the sequence required to obtain the best results. 

2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components 

to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. 

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 

B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special 

procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and 

attendance at meetings. 

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate Contractors where coordination 

of their Work is required. 

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative 

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of 

the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Preparation of schedules. 

2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 

3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 

4. Progress meetings. 

5. Project Close-out activities. 

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with 

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 

1.04 LIMITATIONS ON USE OF THE SITE 


PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 1

A. General: Limitations on usage as well as specific requirements that impact site utilization are 

indicated on the drawings and by other contract documents. In addition to these limitations 

and requirements administer allocation of available space so as to produce the best overall 

efficiency in performance of the total work of the project. Schedule deliveries so as to 

minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. 

1.05 SUBMITTALS 

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings where close and careful 

coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by 

separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of 

space for efficient installation of different components. 

1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 

2. Indicate required installation sequences. 

3. Comply with requirements contained in Section “Submittals.” 

4. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Requirements” and Division 16 

Section “Electrical General Provisions” for specific coordination Drawings 

requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. 


Not Used 


3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS 

A. Installer’s Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major unit of work to inspect 

the substrate to receive work and conditions under which the work is to be preformed. The 

Installer shall report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Contractor. Do not proceed 

with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to 

the Installer. 

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and 

recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more 

explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. 

C. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation. Reject damaged 

or defective items. 

D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work. Secure work true 

to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances. Arrange joints in exposed work to 

obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to the Architect for final 

decision. Allow for expansion and building movement. 

E. Install each unit-of-work during weather conditions and project status, which will ensure the 

best possible results in coordination with the entire work. Isolate each unit of work from 

incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration. 

F. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work 

to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. 

G. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. 

H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the 



necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 

I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at 

standard mounting height recognized within the industry for the particular application 

indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. 

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. General: During handling and installation of work at the project site, clean and protect work in 

progress and adjoining work on the basis of continuous maintenance. Apply protective coating 

on installed work where it is required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at the 

time of substantial completion. 

B. Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as frequently as necessary through the 

remainder of the construction period. Refer to Section 01700 - Project Closeout, for final 

cleaning requirements. 

C. Limiting Exposure of Work: Supervise performance of the work in such a manner which will 

ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, 

dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction period. 






SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering 

services, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 

1. Land survey Work. 

2. Layout of Structures. 

B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 


A. Surveyor: Engage a Registered Land Surveyor registered in the State of Utah, to perform 

land-surveying services required. 

B. Certificate: Submit a certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer 

certifying that the location and elevation of improvements comply with the Contract 

Documents. 

C. The Owner will provide survey control points. These control points shall be for the use of the 

contractor and his subcontractors in laying out their work. 


Not Used 


3.01 PERFORMANCE 

A. Identify existing control points, property line corner stakes, and general building lines. 

1. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building 

foundations, column grids and locations, partitions, floor levels and control lines. 

2. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, 

stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by 

instrumentation and similar appropriate means. 

3. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing 

structures, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected 

by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and 

markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to 

properly locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions 

within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 

1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels provided 

for their use. 

2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb. 



FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 1


FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 2

SECTION 01090 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. Definitions: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions. 

1. Directed: Terms such as "directed,” "requested,” "authorized,” "selected,” "approved,” 

"required,” and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect,” "requested by the 

Architect,” and similar phrases. However, no implied meaning shall be interpreted to 

extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction 

supervision. 

2. Approve: The term "approved," where used in conjunction with the Architect's action 

on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the duties and 

responsibilities of the Architect as stated in General and Supplementary Conditions. 

Such approval shall not release the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill Contract 

requirements unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 

3. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project site, 

ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations." 

4. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including the 

actual "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, 

working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations." 

5. Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete and ready for the 

intended use." 

B. Specification Format and Content Explanation: 

1. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections 

based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format and MASTER 

FORMAT numbering system. 

C. Drawing Symbols: 

1. Graphic symbols: Where not otherwise noted, symbols are defined by the National 

CAD Standard, Version 2.0. 

2. Mechanical/Electrical Drawings: Graphic symbols used on mechanical and electrical 

Drawings are generally aligned with symbols recommended by ASHRAE. Where 

appropriate, they are supplemented by more specific symbols recommended by 

technical associations including ASME, ASPE, IEEE, and similar organizations. Refer 

instances of uncertainty to the Architect for clarification before proceeding. 

D. Industry Standards: 

1. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more 

stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same 

force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such 

standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Individual 

Sections indicate which codes and standards the Contractor must keep available at 

the Project Site for reference. 

2. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a referenced standard is not specified, 

comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents. 

3. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, 

and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or 

quality levels, the most stringent requirement will be enforced, unless the Contract 

Documents indicate otherwise. Refer requirements that are different, but apparently 

equal, and uncertainties as to which quality level is more stringent to the Architect for 

a decision before proceeding. 


DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 01090-1


4. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to 

be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. 

Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 

a. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required 

construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the 

publication source. 

b. Although copies of standards needed for enforcement of requirements also 

may, be included as part of required submittals, the Architect reserves the 

right to require the Contractor to submit additional copies as necessary for 

enforcement of requirements. 

5. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards 

are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the 

Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the 

trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or 

other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. 

a. A copy of the CSI directory of Construction Industry Associations, Societies, 

and Institutes, and Abbreviations is on file in the office of the Architect. 


DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 01090-2

SECTION 01100 - PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 


1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 

A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 


A. "Products" is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the work. 

B. "Materials" is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, 

finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed, or applied to form units of work. 

C. "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or 

manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, 

piping, etc.). 

D. The term, "Provide,” in these Construction Documents, means furnish and install, complete 

and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. 

1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. The requirements for substitutions do not apply to specified Contractor options on products 

and construction methods. Revisions to Contract Documents, where requested by Owner, 

Architect, or Engineer, are "changes" not "substitutions." Requested substitutions, which have 

been accepted prior to Contract Date, are included in Contract Documents, and are not 

subject to requirements for substitutions. 

B. Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and order issued by 

governing authorities do not constitute "substitutions"; and do not constitute a basis for 

change orders, except as provided for in Contract Documents. Otherwise, contractor's 

requests for changes in products, materials, and methods of construction required by Contract 

Documents are considered requests for "substitutions,” and are subject to requirements of this 

section. 


A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, provide products, 

materials, or equipment of a singular generic kind, from a single source. 

B. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor's 

selection of a product of material, select an option which is compatible with other products and 

materials already selected (which may have been from among options for those other 

products and materials). Total compatibility among options is not assured by limitations within 

Contract Documents, but must be provided by Contractor. Compatibility is a basic general 

requirement of product/material selections. 

1.05 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Submit three (3) copies, fully identified for product or method being replaced by substitution, 


PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01100 - 1

including related specification section and drawing number(s), and fully documented to show 

compliance with requirements for substitutions. 

B. Include product data/drawings, description of methods, samples where applicable, 

Contractor's detailed comparison of significant qualities between specified item and proposed 

substitution, statement of effect on construction time and coordination with other affected 

work, cost information or proposal. 

C. All proposed substitutions must be submitted to Owner for review. 


2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCE 

A. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by 

Contract Document requirements and governing regulations, and are not controlled by 

industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects. 

B. Visual Matching: Where matching with an established sample is required, final judgment of 

whether a product proposed by Contractor matches sample satisfactorily is Architect's 

judgment. 

C. Visual Selection: Except as otherwise indicated, where specified product requirements include 

"... as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures..." or words of similar effect, the 

selection of manufacturer and basic product (complying with requirements) is Contractor's 

option, and subsequent selection of color, pattern, and texture is Architect's selection. 

D. Products that include a color, pattern and texture selection have, in many cases, been 

selected and approved by the Owner. Where specification sections designate a specific 

manufacturer’s product, and the specification also allows other manufacturers to provide 

products subject to compliance with requirements of that section, the color(s), texture(s) and 

pattern(s) of the specified product also constitute requirements that must be met. Other 

products may be incorporated in the project provided they meet the design intent of the 

specified product including the color(s), texture(s) and pattern(s) of that product. Compliance 

with the design intent shall be determined by the Architect subject to the Owner’s approval. 

Any product or material not submitted prior to the bid as a proposed substitution, or submitted 

as a proposed substitution, but not receiving approval, may be submitted after the bid during 

the submittal process, but is done so with the risk of rejection. Should a product be rejected, 

then the Contractor shall provide the product specified at no additional cost to the Owner and 

with no change in the Contract Time. 

1. The intent of this paragraph is not to restrict competitive bidding nor to exclude 

manufacturers that offer products of equal or better quality than those specified, but to 

meet the design aesthetic and intent that has been approved by the Owner. The 

decision to approve or reject an alternate product will be based upon how closely the 

proposed alternate(s) matches the color(s), texture(s) and pattern(s) of the specified 

products, and also the combined appearance of all products together. Minor 

variations in appearance will be allowed, however, the Architect and the Owner are 

the sole judges of what constitutes a minor variation. 


A. Conditions: Contractor's request for substitution will be received and considered when 

extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required, and changes are in keeping with 

general intent of Contract Documents; when timely, fully documented and properly submitted; 

and when one or more of the following conditions is satisfied, all as judged by Architect. 



1. Where required product, material, or method cannot be provided within Contract 

Time, but not as a result of Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly or to 

coordinate various activities properly. 

2. Where required product, material, or method cannot be provided in a manner which is 

compatible with other materials of the work, or cannot be properly coordinated 

therewith, or cannot be warranted as required, or cannot be used without adversely 

affecting Owner's insurance coverage on completed work, or will encounter other 

substantial noncompliances which are not possible to otherwise overcome except by 

making requested substitution, which Contractor thereby certifies to overcome such 

noncompatibility, noncoordination, nonwarranty, noninsurability, or other 

noncompliance as claimed. 

3. Where required product, material, or method cannot receive required approval by a 

governing authority, and requested substitution can be so approved. 

4. Where substantial advantage is offered Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy 

conservation, or other valuable considerations, after deducting offsetting 

responsibilities Owner may be required to bear, including additional compensation to 

Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other work by Owner 

or separate contractors, and similar considerations. 

5. All proposed substitutions shall be approved by OWNER and Architect. 

B. Work-Related Submittals: Contractor's submittal of (and Architect's/Engineer's review of) shop 

drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of 

Contract Documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor 

approval thereof. 

2.03 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: Provide products which comply with requirements, and which are undamaged and 

unused at time of installation, and which are complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety 

guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended use 

and effect. 


Not applicable. 






SECTION 01155 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 




Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor’s 

Construction Schedule, List of Subcontractors, and Submittal Schedule. 

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the 

Contractor’s Construction Schedule, List of Subcontractors, and Submittal Schedule. 

B. The Contractor’s Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are included in Section 

“Submittals.” 

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor’s 

Construction Schedule. 

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative 

schedules and forms, including: 

a. Contractor’s construction schedule. 

b. Application for Payment form. 

c. List of subcontractors. 

d. Schedule of allowances. 

e. List of products. 

f. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 

g. Schedule of submittals. 

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date, but in no 

case later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial 

Application for Payment. 

3. Sub-Schedule: Where the Work is separated into phases that require separately 

phased payments; provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each 

phase of payment. 

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the 

format for the Schedule of Values. 

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: 

a. Project name and location. 

b. Name of Architect. 

c. Project number. 

d. Contractor’s name and address. 

e. Date of Submittal. 

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate 

the following for each item listed: 

a. Generic name. 

b. Related Specification Section. 

c. Name of subcontractor. 

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. 


APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01155 - 1

e. Name of supplier. 

f. Change Order (numbers) that have affected value. 

g. Dollar value. 

h. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted 

to total 100 percent. 

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued 

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Break principal 

subcontract amounts down into several line items. 

4. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract 

Sum. 

5. For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or 

equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide 

separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each 

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 

6. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only 

to the extent that such items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment. 

Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications of Payment shall be complete 

including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. 

a. At the Contractor’s option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that 

are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line 

items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense. 

7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change 

Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 

1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as 

certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 

1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial 

Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 

B. Payment Application Times: The data to submit initial application for payment is at the 

Contractor’s discretion, and subsequent applications for payment every 30 days thereafter. 

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the 

form for Application for Payment. 

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and 

execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete 

applications will be returned without action. 

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor’s Construction 

Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior 

to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. 

E. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by 

means ensuring receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien 

and similar attachments, when required. 

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording 

appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the 

Architect. 

F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment submit waivers of mechanics 

liens from subcontractors for sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period 



covered by the previous application. 

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for 

retainage, on each item. 

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 

3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must 

submit waivers. 

4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor’s waiver of 

mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application. 

a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from 

every entity involved with performance of Work covered by the application 

who could lawfully be entitled to a lien. 

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, 

acceptable to Owner. 

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or 

coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 

1. List of subcontractors. 

2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 

3. Schedule of Values. 

4. Contractor’s Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 

5. Schedule of principal products. 

6. Submittal Schedule coordinated with Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 

7. List of Contractor’s staff assignments. 

8. List of Contractor’s principal consultants. 

9. Copies of building permits. 

10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of 

the Work. 

11. Initial progress report. 

12. Report of pre-construction meeting. 

13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 

14. Data needed to acquire Owner’s insurance. 

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of 

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any 

Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of 

designated portions of the Work. 

I. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application 

include: 

1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. 

2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. 

3. Maintenance instructions. 

4. Meter readings. 

5. Start-up performance reports. 

6. Change-over information related to Owner’s occupancy, use, operation and 

maintenance. 

7. Final cleaning. 

8. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety. 

9. Advice on shifting insurance coverage. 

10. Final progress photographs. 

11. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect’s Certificate of 

Substantial Completion. 

J. Final Payment Application: Administrative action and submittals which must precede or 



coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following: 

1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 

2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 

3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. 

4. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue 

delay. 

5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. 

6. Certified property survey. 

7. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. 

8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 

9. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 

10. Change of door locks to Owner’s access. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable) 




SECTION 01200 – PROJECT MEETINGS 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings 

including, but not limited to: 

1. Pre-Construction Conference 

2. Coordination Meetings. 

3. Progress Meetings. 

B. Construction schedules are specified in another Division 1 Section. 

1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 

A. Attend a pre-construction conference and organizational meeting, scheduled by Owner, at 

project site or other convenient location no later than 5 days after execution of the Agreement 

and prior to commencement of construction activities. Conduct the meeting to review 

responsibilities and personnel assignments. 

B. Attendees: The Owner, Architect, and their consultants, the Contractor and its 

superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, and other concerned parties 

shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and authorized to 

conclude matters relating to the Work. 

C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as: 

1. Tentative construction schedule. 

2. Critical Work sequencing. 

3. Designation of responsible personnel. 

4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 

5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 

6. Distribution of Contract Documents. 

7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 

8. Preparation of record documents. 

9. Use of the premises. 

10. Office, Work and storage areas. 

11. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 

12. Safety procedures, first aid, security, housekeeping, working hours. 

1.04 SUBCONTRACTOR COORDINATION MEETINGS 

A. Conduct Project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties 

involved. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other 

purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special pre-installation meetings. 

B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination of 

planning for the construction activities involved. 

C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others 


PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 1

affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 

1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS 

A. Architect to conduct progress meetings at the project site at weekly intervals. Architect to 

notify Owner and contractor of schedule meeting dates. Dates of meetings will coordinate 

with preparation of payment request. 

B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect, each 

subcontractor, supplier or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in 

planning, coordination or performance of future activities shall be represented at these 

meetings by persons familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to 

progress. 

C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review 

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as 

appropriate to the current status of the Project. 

1. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. 

Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor’s Construction 

Schedule, whether on time or ahead of or behind schedule. Determine how 

construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties 

involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that 

current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 

2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including such items as: 

a. Interface requirements. 

b. Time. 

c. Sequences. 

d. Deliveries. 

e. Off-site fabrication problems. 

f. Access. 

g. Site utilization. 

h. Temporary facilities and services. 

i. Hours of Work. 

j. Hazards and risks. 

k. Housekeeping. 

l. Quality and Work standards. 

m. Change Orders. 

n. Documentation of information for payment requests. 

D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each progress meeting date, distribute copies of 

minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties who should have been 

present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting 

and report. 

1. Schedule Updating: Revise the construction schedule after each progress meeting 

where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised 

schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 

PART 3 – GENERAL (Not Applicable) 



PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 2

SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for 

performance of the Work, including: 

1. Contractor’s construction schedule. 

2. Submittal schedule. 

3. Daily construction reports. 

4. Shop drawings. 

5. Product Data. 

6. Samples. 

B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents 

for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 

1. Permits. 

2. Applications for payment 

3. Performance and payment bonds. 

4. Insurance certificates. 

5. List of Subcontractors. 

C. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section “Applications for Payment.” 

D. Inspection and test reports are included in Section “Testing and Laboratory Service.” 

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of 

construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of 

related construction activities to avoid delay. 

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other 

submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the 

Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently 

for coordination. 

a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring 

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 

3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a 

result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 

a. Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be 

delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will 

promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be 

delayed for coordination. 

b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial 

submittal. 

c. Allow two weeks for reprocessing each submittal. 

d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to 


SUBMITTALS 01300-1

transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to 

permit processing. 

B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for 

identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title 

block. 

1. Provide a space approximately 4"x5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop 

Drawings to record the Contractor’s review and approval markings and the action 

taken. 

2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action 

taken. 

a. Project Name. 

b. Date. 

c. Name and address of Architect. 

d. Name and address of Contractor. 

e. Name and address of Subcontractor. 

f. Name and address of Supplier. 

g. Name of manufacturer. 

h. Number and title appropriate Specification Section. 

i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 

Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals 

received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 

1. Identify each submittal with a submittal number consisting of a chronological 

submittal number followed by the Specification Section number and an alphabetical 

submission designation letter. Designate initial submission with an “A”. Example: 2- 

03300-A indicates second submittal for the project, item submitted is in section 

03300, and it is the first submittal for the item. 

2. On the transmittal record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or 

separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including 

minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor’s certification that information 

complies with Contract Document requirements. 

3. Indicate required return date on transmittal form. For submittals needed prior to 

allotted review period specified above, mark clearly on transmittal form: “URGENT” 

and indicate return date. 

4. Transmittal Form: Use the Sample form at the end of this Section for transmittal of 

submittals. 

D. Resubmittals: indicate original submittal number with letter designation in alphabetical order 

for each resubmittal. “B” for first resubmittal, “C” for second resubbmittal and so forth. 

1.04 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart type Contractor’s 

construction schedule. Submit within 5 days of the date established for “Commencement of 

the Work”. 

1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a 

continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same 

breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the “Schedule of Values”. 

2. Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent 

increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate 

Actual Completion. 

3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other 


SUBMITTALS 01300-2

eproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 

4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties 

involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; 

include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in 

proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related 

portions of the Work. 

5. Coordinate the Contractor’s construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of 

subcontractors, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other 

schedules. 

6. Indicate completion in advance of the data established for Substantial Completion. 

Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect’s 

procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 

B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is 

affected by requirements for phased completion to permit Work by separate Contractors and 

partial occupancy by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion. 

C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, 

including testing and installation. 

D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for 

each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced 

or integrated with other activities. 

E. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a two item cost correlation line, 

indicating “precalculated” and “actual” costs. On the line show dollar-volume of Work 

performed as of the date used for preparation of payment requests. 

1. Refer to Section “Applications for Payment” for cost reporting and payment 

procedures. 

F. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the 

Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. 

Post copies in the Project field office. 

1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same 

locations. Delete parties from distribution when they are no longer involved in 

construction activities. 

G. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have 

been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each 

meeting. 

1.05 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS 

A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at 

the site; and submit duplicate copies to the Architect at weekly intervals: 

1. List of subcontractors at the site. 

2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 

3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 

4. Accidents and unusual events. 

5. Meetings and significant decisions. 

6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 

7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 

8. Emergency procedures. 

9. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 


SUBMITTALS 01300-3

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS 

10. Change orders received, implemented. 

11. Services connected, disconnected. 

12. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 

13. Partial completions, occupancies. 

14. Substantial Completions authorized. 

A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise 

indicate deviations from the Contract Document. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or 

copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared 

without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. 

B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, 

patterns, templates, and similar drawings. Include the following information: 

1. Dimensions. 

2. Identification of products and materials included. 

3. Compliance with specified standards. 

4. Notation of coordination requirements. 

5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 

6. Sheet size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop 

Drawings on 8 !”x11, 11"x17", or 24"x36" sheets. 

7. Initial Submittals and Re-submittals: Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of prints for the 

Architect’s review. The Architect will keep two sets (three if a consultant needs to 

review the submittal) and return the remainder. 

8. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken 

in connection with construction. 

C. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and 

integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during 

fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended. 

1. Preparation of coordination Drawings is specified in section “Project Coordination” 

and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or 

Product Data. 

2. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show 

sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of 

space. 

1.07 PRODUCT DATA 

A. Collect Product Data into single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product 

Data includes printed information such as manufacturer’s installation instructions, catalog 

cots, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams 

and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard 

printed data is not suitable for use, submit as “Shop Drawings”. 

1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data 

includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark 

copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: 

a. Manufacturer’s printed recommendations. 

b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 

c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. 

d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 

e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 

f. Notation of coordination requirements. 


SUBMITTALS 01300-4

2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract 

Documents has been confirmed. 

3. Submittals: Submit six (6) copies of each required submittal. The Architect will retain 

two copies, three if a consultant review is required, and will return the other copies 

marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. 

a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents provisions is observed, the 

submittal may serve as the final submittal. 

4. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, 

manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction 

activities. Show distribution on transmittal form. 

a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data is in 

the installer’s possession. 

b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with 

construction. 

1.08 ARCHITECT’S ACTION 

A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is 

required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, 

and return promptly. 

1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor’s responsibility. 

B. Action Stamp: The Architect, or Architect’s Consultant will stamp each submittal with a 

uniform, self-explanatory action stamp or attach a letter indicating similar information. The 

stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken: 

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked “Reviewed, no exceptions 

noted”, that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it 

complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend 

upon that compliance. 

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked “Reviewed, exceptions 

noted”, that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it 

complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the 

Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 

a. When marked “Resubmittal required”, resubmission is for record, 

clarification, or for purposes of confirming the information contained in the 

submittal. The submittal shall be considered as not acceptable until such 

time as the written response is accepted by the Architect. 

b. When marked “Resubmittal not required”, no further submittal action is 

required. 

3. Return for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked “Rejected, resubmittal required”, 

do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including 

purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal 

in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to 

obtain a different action mark. 

a. Do not permit submittals marked : “Rejected, resubmittal required” to be used 

at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 

4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, 

special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked 

“Resubmittal Not required”. 

C. Where a cover page, or other single page has been stamped, the action indicated shall apply 

to the entire submittal, unless noted otherwise. 


SUBMITTALS 01300-5





SUBMITTALS 01300-6

SECTION 01400 - TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES 





1.02 DESCRIPTION: 

A. From time to time during the progress of the work, testing is required to be performed to 

determine that materials provided for the work meet the specified requirements. Such testing 

includes, but is not necessarily limited to fill material for the site, welding, bolting, concrete, 

and masonry grout. 

1.03 WORK INCLUDED: 

A. Selection of Testing Laboratory: The Owner will select a prequalified, independent testing 

agency. 

B. Payment for Initial Testing Services: The Owner will pay for all initial services of the testing 

agency as further described in Part 2 of this Section. 

1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS: 

A. Requirements for testing are described in various sections of these Specifications. Where no 

testing requirements are described, but testing is specified, the testing is to be performed 

under current recognized standards. 

1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS: 

A. Testing, when required, will be in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, and 

with selected standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials. 

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING LABORATORY: 

A. The testing laboratory will be qualified to the Owner's approval in accordance with ASTM 

E-329 "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel 

Used in Construction". 

1. The testing laboratory is only required to have testing facilities for work included in 

this project. 

2. Testing machines shall have been calibrated at intervals not exceeding 12 months by 

devices of accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. 

1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING: 

A. Promptly process and distribute all required copies of test reports and related instructions to 

ensure all necessary retesting and/or replacement of materials with the least possible delay to 

progress of the work. 



TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICE 01400-1

2.01 PAYMENT FOR TESTING SERVICES 

A. Initial Services: The Owner will pay for all initial testing services. 

B. Retesting: When the initial tests indicate noncompliance with the Contract Documents, all 

subsequent retesting occasioned by the noncompliance shall be performed by the same 

agency, and the costs thereof will be paid by the Contractor. 

2.02 CODE COMPLIANCE TESTING (SPECIAL INSPECTI0NS): 

A. Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by a plan approval authority, and 

made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of, and shall be paid for by 

the Owner. 

2.03 TESTING REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS: 

A. Inspection or testing performed to fulfill other requirements within these specifications, shall 

be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 

2.04 CONTRACTOR'S CONVENIENCE TESTING: 

A. Inspection or testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole 

responsibility of the Contractor. 


3.01 COOPERATION WITH TESTING AGENCY: 

A. Representatives of the testing agency shall have access to the work at all times. Provide 

facilities for such access in order that the agency may properly perform its functions. 

3.02 SCHEDULES FOR TESTING: 

A. By advance discussion with the testing agency selected by the Contractor, determine the time 

required for the testing agency to perform its tests and to issue each of its findings. 

Provide all required time within the construction schedule. 

B. When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction, coordinate all 

such changes of schedule with the testing agency as required. 

3.03 TAKING SPECIMENS: 

A. All specimens and samples for testing will be taken by the testing agency, all sampling 

equipment and personnel will be provided by the testing agency, and all deliveries of 

specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing agency. 



TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICE 01400-2

SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. The work required under this section consists of all temporary construction and related items 

necessary to complete the work indicated within the Contract Documents. 

1.02 OFFICE FACILITIES 

A. Provide a field office for the duration of the project. This office and its facilities shall be 

accessible to the Owner and Architect or their representatives. Field office shall be 

appropriately heated and cooled. Provide table to layout drawings and provide sufficient, 

accessible filing space for documents. 

1.03 TOILET FACILITIES 

A. Provide toilet facilities for workmen during the course of construction. Comply with applicable 

health codes. 

1.04 SCAFFOLDING AND RUNWAYS 

A. Provide and maintain for the duration of the work, as required, all scaffolding, hoists, false 

work, staging, for performance of the work under this contract, except as may be otherwise 

specified in the several specifications sections bound herein. 

B. All scaffolding, runways and the like shall comply with the requirements of applicable local, 

state and federal statutes, laws and ordinances, including safety rules and regulations of 

authorities and insurance carriers having jurisdiction. 

1.05 PROTECTION 

A. Provide adequate protection for all persons, all parts of work, and all materials furnished for 

and installed therein not expressly covered under other sections of these documents. 

B. Immediately following the initial delivery and storage of combustible materials at the site of the 

work, and throughout the construction period thereafter, supply and maintain suitable and 

adequate means of fire protection about flammable structures or grouping of combustible 

materials incident to the Work. 

C. Maintain all protection media in place and in good order until removal thereof is approved by 

Architect or until immediately prior to final inspection of work. 

1.06 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES 

A. Provide temporary dust-tight enclosures as required to protect facilities and delivered 

materials from weather, thievery, and vandalism. 

B. At the end of the day's work, close and secure temporary enclosures. 

1.07 DUST ABATEMENT 

A. Provide necessary equipment and methods to eliminate dust in all areas of construction and 

facility during the entire term of the contract. Excess dirt or materials that are deposited 

! 


CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-1

1.08 WATER 

beyond the contract limits shall be immediately cleaned up and removed from the area. 

A. Water is available at the project site. Coordinate with the Owner’s maintenance personnel for 

access. Provide hoses, valves, etc. required for access. 

1.09 POWER 

A. Power will be provided by the CMGC through arrangements made with the Owner. 

1.10 HEATING AND COOLING 

A. Temporary heating and cooling required for construction and operation of the facility until 

acceptance of the Owner shall be paid by the Contractor. Coordinate with Division 15, to 

ensure proper operation and timely start up. Repair or replace damaged or worn items at no 

additional cost to the Owner. 




! 


CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-2

SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 


1.01 SCOPE 

A. This section includes requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to, Cleaning, 

Record Drawings, Warranties, Operations and Maintenance Manuals, Owner personnel 

instruction, Systems startup, Extra Materials, Removal of Temporary Facilities, and Final 

Inspection. 

1.02 WARRANTIES 

A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Warranties and Bonds.” 

1.03 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data.” 

1.04 OWNER'S PERSONNEL INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Arrange with Owner for timing and operational instructions for Owner's personnel by factory 

trained manufacturer's agents. When such is a part of the equipment furnished, complete all 

such requirements as a condition of release of final payment. 

B. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 for specific instruction requirements. 

1.05 SYSTEMS START-UP 

A. Prior to substantial completion and final inspection all mechanical, plumbing, electrical, fire 

detection and alarm, and other systems shall be proved by being placed in operation. Make all 

necessary adjustments and modifications to ensure complete operation of systems. 

B. Refer to Division 15, and Division 16 for specific requirements of systems startup. 

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Review requirements for extra materials specified in the technical specification sections. 

B. Submit to the Owner's designated representative extra materials. The Owner's representative 

will sign the transmittal letter indicating receipt of materials. Copies of transmittal letters shall 

be bound and submitted with warranties. 

1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Maintain complete "as-built" record set of Contract Documents. Job Superintendent shall be 

responsible to see that any changes or modifications shall be recorded the same day these 

changes are made. Concealed items shall be identified in the "record documents," with 

sufficient detail and dimensions to facilitate location of items after concealment. 

B. At the completion of the project, review "record documents" for completeness and accuracy 

and submit to the Architect. 

1.08 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

! 

! 


CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-1

A. Prior to final inspection and complimentary with completion of Work, remove mobile 

construction office, storage trailers, temporary toilet facilities and other temporary controls not 

specified to remain. 

1.09 FINAL INSPECTION 

A. Refer to Section 00700 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. A final 

inspection will be scheduled when all construction has been completed, the Architect has 

accomplished his final inspection, issued a "punch list", and all deficiencies have been 

corrected. The project must be complete and operational before final inspection is performed. 

B. The final inspection will be made by representatives of the Owner, Architect, Contractor, and 

appropriate subcontractors and suppliers. 


2.01 MATERIALS 

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or 

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially 

hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 


3.01 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply 

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution 

regulations. 

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each 

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and 

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s written instruction. 

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for 

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction 

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, 

litter, and other foreign substances. 

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and 

other foreign deposits. 

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even textured 

surface. 

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from 

Project site. 

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. 

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free 

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid 

disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces 

to their original condition. 

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, 

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar 

spaces. 

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; 

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 

! 

! 



j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and 

windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring 

materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent 

materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and 

surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired 

or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 

1) Do not paint over “UL” and similar labels, including mechanical and 

electrical nameplates. 

m. Wipe surface of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, 

and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar 

droppings, and other foreign substances. 

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 

o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains 

resulting from water exposure. 

p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed 

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 

q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during 

construction. 

r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full 

efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours 

of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor 

fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 

t. 

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make final inspection and rid 

Project of rodents, insects and other pests. Prepare a report. 

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or 

excess materials on Owner’s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous 

materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of 

lawfully. 


! 

! 



! 

! 



SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for 

alterations. 

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting 

and patching individual parts of the Work. 

a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to 

Divisions 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and 

patching mechanical and electrical installations. 


A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other 

Work. 

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation 

of other Work. 


A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before 

the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the 

following information: 

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why 

they cannot be avoided. 

2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to 

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance 

and other significant visual elements. 

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 

5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities 

that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long 

service will be disrupted. 

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural 

elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement 

with original structure. 



CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1

A. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a 

manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased 

maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 

2. Control systems. 

3. Communication systems. 

4. Electrical wiring systems. 

B. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a 

manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to 

perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or 

safety. 

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 

2. Membranes and flashings. 

3. Equipment supports. 

4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 

5. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence 

of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied 

spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. 

Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory 

manner. 



A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use 

materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, 

will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. 


3.01 EXAMINATION 

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be 

performed. 

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including 

compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 PREPARATION 

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. 



B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide 

protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during 

cutting and patching operations. 

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to 

adjoining areas. 

D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, 

bypass such services before cutting to minimize interruption of services to occupied areas. 

3.03 PERFORMANCE 

A. General: Employ qualified workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and 

patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of 

other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original 

condition. 

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar 

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or 

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with 

original Installer's written recommendations. 

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering 

and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with 

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed 

surfaces. 

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamondcore 

drill. 

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections 

where required by cutting and patching operations. 

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be 

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent 

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations 

following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 

Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these 

Specifications. 

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate 

integrity of installation. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration 

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate indicated evidence of 

patching and refinishing. 






SECTION 01740 – WARRANTIES AND BONDS 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and 

bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard warranties on 

products and special warranties. 

1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor’s special warranty of 

workmanship and materials. 

2. General closeout requirements are included in Section “Contract Closeout.” 

3. Specific requirements of warranties for the Work and products and installations that 

are specific to be warranted are included in the individual Sections of Division 2 

through 16. 

4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to 

Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 

5. Specific requirements for Bonds are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 

through 16. 

B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties 

do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor 

does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special 

warranties with the Contractor. 


A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual 

manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to 

the Owner. 

B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract 

Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater 

rights for the Owner. 

1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and 

replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be 

removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. 

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected 

by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated 

warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. 

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace 

or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract 

Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective 

Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion 

of its anticipated useful service life. 


WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740- 1

D. Owner’s Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied 

warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available 

under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interrupted as limitations on time in which the 

Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies. 

1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit 

selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special 

warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, 

until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing 

to do so. 


A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial 

Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a 

commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the 

Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the 

Architect. 

1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the 

Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, 

submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion 

of that designated portion of the Work. 

B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and 

subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains 

appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a 

draft to the Owner; submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 

1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for specific content 

requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. 

C. Form of Submittal: At final Completion compile three copies of each required warranty and 

bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or 

manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table 

of contents of the Project Manual. 

D. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered 

loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 

81/2”x11” paper. 

1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. 

Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the 

product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and 

telephone number of the installer. 

2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title 

“WARRANTIES AND BONDS,” the project title or name, and the name of the 

Contractor. 

3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, 

provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in 

each required manual. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). 



WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740- 2

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

PART 1 GENERAL 


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 


1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and 

maintenance manuals, including the following: 

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 

2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and 

finishes and systems and equipment. 


1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual 

requirements for products in those Sections. 


A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular 

interaction. 

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 


A. Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect 

will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect’s comments. Submit 4 copies 

(3 copies bound and 1 copy unbound) of each corrected manual within 15 days of 

receipt of Architect’s comments. 


A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by 

more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate 

information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. 


2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY 

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 

1. List of documents. 

2. List of systems. 

3. List of Equipment. 

4. Table of contents. 


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation 

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. 

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For 

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. 

D. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and 

maintenance manual. 

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, 

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in 

the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE 

Guideline 4, “Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building 

Systems”. 

2.02 MANUALS, GENERAL 

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for 

each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a 

system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 

1. Title page. 

2. Table of contents. 

3. Manual contents. 

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 

1. Subject matter included in manual. 

2. Name and address of Project. 

3. Name and address of Owner. 

4. Date of submittal. 

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 

6. Name and address of Architect. 

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed 

to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project 

Manual. 

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to 

accommodate data, include comprehensive table ot contents for all volumes in each 

volume of the set. 

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by 

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, 

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, red buckram binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate 

contents, sized to hold 8! by 11 inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold 

label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize 

sheets. 

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, 

organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related 

components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential 

information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. 

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title “OPERATION AND 

MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Project title or name, and subject matter of 

contents. Indicate volume number for multiple volume sets. 

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each 



tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of 

equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification 

Section number and title of Project Manual. 

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose 

diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8! by 11 inch, 20 lb/sq. ft. white bond paper. 

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. 

a. If oversized drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text 

pages and use as foldouts. 

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in 

labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate 

locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, 

descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 

2.03 OPERATION MANUALS 

A. Contents: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in 

individual Specification Sections and the following information: 

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 

3. Operating standards. 

4. Operating procedures. 

5. Operating logs. 

6. Wiring diagrams. 

7. Control diagrams. 

8. Piped system diagrams. 

9. Precautions against improper use. 

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 

B. Descriptions: Include the following: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer’s name. 

3. Equipment identification with serial number and renewal dates. 

4. Equipment function. 

5. Operating characteristics. 

6. Limiting conditions. 

7. Performance curves. 

8. Engineering data and tests. 

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable. 

1. Startup procedures. 

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 

3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 

4. Regulation and control procedures. 

5. Instructions on stopping. 

6. Normal shutdown instructions. 

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls 

as installed. 

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for 

identification. 



2.04 PRODUCTS MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. 

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials 

and sources, and warranties and bonds, as directed below. 

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and 

arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and 

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference 

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable. 

1. Product name and model number. 


3. Color, pattern, and texture. 

4. Material and chemical composition. 

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 

5. Repair instructions. 

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and 

related services. 

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties and bonds. 

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 

2.05 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include 

source information, manufacturer’s maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, 

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance 

service contacts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the 

manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For 

each product, list name, address, and telephone number of installer or supplier and 

maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in 

Project Manual. 

C. Manufacturer’s Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturer’s maintenance documentation 

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including 

disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential 



maintenance procedures: 

1. Test and inspection instructions. 

2. Troubleshooting guide. 

3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly 

instructions. 

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 

6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. 

E. Maintenance and Service Schedule: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of 

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine 

maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, 

quarterly, semiannually, and annual frequencies. 

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturer’s forms of recording 

maintenance. 

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with 

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturer’s maintenance documentation and local 

sources of maintenance materials and related services. 

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and 

telephone number of service agent. 

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and list circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 


3.01 MANUAL PREPARATION 

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that 

provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care 

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance 

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of 

equipment not part of a system. 

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare 

information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 

D. Manufacturer’s Data: Where manuals contain manufacturer’s standard printed data, include 

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each 

product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a 

tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. 

Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers’ standard printed data are not available 

and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of 

equipment or systems. 



E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the 

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence 

and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings 

to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance 

manuals. 




DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK 

Section 02001 – General Site Construction Requirements 

Section 02002 – Site Clearing 

Section 02003 – Earth Moving 

Section 02004 – Excavation Support Protections 

Section 02005 – Asphalt Paving 

Section 02006 – Concrete Paving 

Section 02007 – Site Signage 

Section 02008 – Water Utility Piping 

Section 02009 – Storm Utility Drain Piping 

Section 02010 – Subdrainage 

Section 02050 – Selective Demolition 

Section 02810 – Underground Irrigation Systems 

Section 02830 – Fences and Gates 

Section 02900 – Landscaping 



SECTION 02001 GENERAL SITE CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Includes But Not Limited to 

1. General procedures and requirements for Site Work. 

PART 2 EXECUTION 


A. Site Verification Of Conditions 

1. 48 hours minimum prior to performing any work on site, contact Blue Stakes to 

arrange for utility location services. 

2. Perform minor, investigative excavations to verify location of various existing 

underground facilities at sufficient locations to assure that no conflict with the 

proposed work exists and sufficient clearance is available to avoid damage to 

existing facilities. 

3. Perform investigative excavating 5 days minimum in advance of performing any 

excavation or underground work. 

4. Upon discovery of conflicts or problems with existing facilities, notify Architect by 

phone or fax within 24 hours. Follow telephone or fax notification with letter and 

diagrams indicating conflict or problem and sufficient measurements and details 

to evaluate problem. 

5. Notify Owner of utilities a minimum of 48 hours prior to any work taking place. 


A. Protection 

1. Spillage - 

a. Avoid spillage by covering and securing loads when hauling on or adjacent 

to public streets or highways. 

b. Remove spillage and sweep, wash, or otherwise clean project, streets, and 

highways. 

2. Dust Control - 

a. Take precautions necessary to prevent dust nuisance, both on-site and 

adjacent to public and private properties. 

b. Correct or repair damage caused by dust. 

3. Erosion Control - 

a. Take precautions necessary to prevent erosion and transportation of soil 

downstream, to adjacent properties, and into on-site or off-site drainage 

systems. 

b. Develop, install, and maintain an erosion control plan if required by law. 

c. Repair and correct damage caused by erosion. 

4. Existing Plants And Features - Do not damage tops, trunks, and roots of existing 

trees and shrubs on site which are intended to remain. Do not use heavy 

equipment within branch spread. Interfering branches may be removed only with 

permission of Architect. Do not damage other plants and features which are to 

remain. 

5. Protect site from fire caused by welding, cutting, smoking, or other sources of 

ignition. 


GENERAL SITE CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 02001 - 1

B. If specified precautions are not taken or corrections and repairs made promptly, Owner 

may take such steps as may be deemed necessary and deduct costs of such from 

monies due to Contractor. Such action or lack of action on Owner's part does not 

relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper protection of the Work. 

2.3 REPAIR / RESTORATION 

A. Adjust existing covers, boxes, and vaults to grade. 

B. Replace broken or damaged covers, boxes, and vaults. 

C. Independently confirm size, location, and number of covers, boxes, and vaults which 

require adjustment. 

2.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Notify Architect 48 hours prior to performing excavation or fill work. 

B. If work has been interrupted by weather, scheduling, or other reason, notify 

Architect/Engineer 24 hours minimum prior to intended resumption of grading or 

compacting. 

C. Owner reserves right to require additional testing to re-affirm suitability of completed 

work including compacted soils which have been exposed to adverse weather 

conditions. 

END OF SECTION 02001 


GENERAL SITE CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 02001 - 2

SECTION 02002 - SITE CLEARING 




Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass. 

2. Clearing and grubbing. 

3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 

4. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 

5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 

6. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 


1. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary 

utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection 

facilities and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures. 

2. Division 1 Section "Field Engineering" for verifying utility locations and for recording field 

measurements. 

3. Division 2 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site 

improvements. 

4. Division 2 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site 

grading. 


A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and 

clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than 

underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 

inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil 

materials. 

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected 

during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of 

groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP 

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials used and indicated to remain Owner's property, 

cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 


SITE CLEARING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02002 - 1


A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, 

adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused 

by site clearing. 

B. Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Submittals," identifying and accurately 

locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 1 Section "Project Coordination." 

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied 

or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities 

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on 

property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. 

C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's 

premises where indicated. 

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site 

clearing. 

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control 

measures are in place. 



A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during 

construction. 

B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. 

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 


SITE CLEARING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02002 - 2

2.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and 

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, 

according to a sediment and erosion control plan, specific to the site that complies with 

EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction whichever is more 

stringent. 

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction 

until permanent vegetation has been established. 

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during 

removal. 

2.3 TREE PROTECTION 

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. 

Remove fence when construction is complete. 

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 

2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 

3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. 

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and 

excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to 

expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 

2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected 

and covered with soil. 

3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with emulsified 

asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 

4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. 

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction 

operations, in a manner approved by Architect/Engineer. 

1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of 

proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 

2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined 

by Architect/Engineer. 

2.4 UTILITIES 

A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures 

before site clearing, when requested by Contractor. 

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site 

clearing. 

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 


SITE CLEARING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02002 - 3

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 

2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless 

permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary 

utility services according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 

2.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new 

construction. 

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 

2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner 

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 

3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 

inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 

4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 

5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. 

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material 

unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), 

and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 

2.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING 

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. 

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with 

underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, 

and other waste materials. 

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. 

Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 12 inches (1800 mm). 

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 

3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 

4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for re-spreading deeper topsoil. 


SITE CLEARING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02002 - 4

2.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to 

facilitate new construction. 

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of 

existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces 

vertically. 

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. 

2.8 DISPOSAL 

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, 

and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's 

property. 

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable 

materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them 

to recycling facilities. 



SITE CLEARING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02002 - 5

! 

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

!

SECTION 02003 - EARTH MOVING 




Conditions and Division 1 Summary of Work Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses. 

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 

3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 

4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 

5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. 

6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 

7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 

8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits 

for buried utility structures. 


1. Division 1 Section "Modification Procedures" for quantity allowance provisions related to 

unit-price rock excavation and authorized additional excavation. 

2. Division 1 Section “Submittals” for recording preexcavation and earthwork progress. 

3. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary 

controls, utilities, and support facilities. 

4. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for protecting and trimming trees to remain. 

5. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and 

beneath the slab-on-grade. 

6. Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities 

and buried mechanical and electrical structures. 

7. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control 

measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of 

above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 

8. Division 2 Section "Excavation Support Protections" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling 

of excavations. 

9. Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for drainage of foundations, slabs-on-grade, walls and 

landscaped areas. 

1.3 UNIT PRICES 

A. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to 

exceed the following. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved 

materials. 

1. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 1

2. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. 

3. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against 

grade. 

4. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or 

exterior waterproofing treatments. 

5. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. 

6. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm) 

wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide. 


A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to 

support sides of pipe. 

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. 

B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving. 

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. 

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. 

E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary 

flow of pore water. 

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and 

dimensions indicated. 

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond 

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation 

and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices 

and changes in the Work. 

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 

m) in length. 

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated 

lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as 

remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. 

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. 

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders 

of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) 

for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment 

equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram 

hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic 

excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock 

bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force 

of not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf (83 

kN); measured according to SAE J-1179. 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 2

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157kW) 

flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf (216-kN) breakout force 

with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732. 

I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders 

of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration 

resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm) when tested by an independent 

geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586. 

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical 

and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or 

below the ground surface. 

K. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt 

pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a 

cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. 

L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or 

backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. 

M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground 

services within buildings. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 

2. Geotextile. 

3. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 

4. Geofoam. 

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results 

for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material 

proposed for fill and backfill. 

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil 

material proposed for fill and backfill. 

C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction 

and site improvements, including finish surfaces, which might be misconstrued as damage 

caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according 

to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according 

to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. 

B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 1 Section "Project Coordination." 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 3


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless 

permitted in writing by Architect/Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary 

utility services according to requirements indicated. 

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 

3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. 

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be 

removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 


2.1 SOIL MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not 

available from excavations. 

B. Satisfactory Soils: AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3, or a 

combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 4 inches (75 mm) in any 

dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. 

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according 

to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups. 

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of 

optimum moisture content at time of compaction. 

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed 

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch 

(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. 

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed 

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 3/4-inch 

sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. 

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed 

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 3/4-inch 

sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. 

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed 

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch 

(25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. 

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; 

ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5mm) 

sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 

I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and 

natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1inch 

(25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve. 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 4

J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. 

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 

2.2 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL 

A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Low-density, self-compacting, flowable concrete material as 

follows: 

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 

3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/8-inch (10-mm) nominal maximum aggregate 

size. 

4. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869. 

5. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 

6. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 

B. Produce low-density, controlled low-strength material with the following physical properties: 

1. As-Cast Unit Weight: 30 to 36 lb/cu. ft. (480 to 576 kg/cu. m) at point of placement, when 

tested according to ASTM C 138/C 138M. 

2. Compressive Strength: 80 psi (550 kPa), when tested according to ASTM C 495. 

C. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 80-psi (550-kPa) 

compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for 

marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, 

continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape 

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 

mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with 

metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal 

detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows: 

1. Red: Electric. 

2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 

4. Blue: Water systems. 

5. Green: Sewer systems. 



A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by 

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork 

operations. 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 5

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, 

debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 

Section "Site Clearing." 

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 

Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. 

D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against 

freezing temperatures or frost. 

3.2 DEWATERING 

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared 

subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. 

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water 

accumulation. 

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to 

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage 

ditches. 

3.3 EXPLOSIVES 

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL 

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of 

surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include 

rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time 

will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials 

and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 

2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent 

construction without exceeding the following dimensions: 

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. 

b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. 

c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast 

against grade. 

d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without 

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. 

e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. 

f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 

mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide. 

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be 

classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross 

sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 6

prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract time may be authorized 

for rock excavation. 

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; 

underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with 

soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. 

a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not 

classified as rock excavation is earth excavation. 

2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and 

subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without 

exceeding the following dimensions: 

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. 

b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. 

c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast 

against grade. 

d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without 

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. 

e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. 

f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 

mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide. 

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES 

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 

mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and 

removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. 

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms 

to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 

2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile 

cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced 

material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility 

Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or 

minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing 

surfaces. 

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS 

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, 

and subgrades. 

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES 

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below 

frost line. 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 7

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or 

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than 

top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit. 

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of 

pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels 

of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp 

objects along trench subgrade. 

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flatbottomed, 

multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe 

and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of 

trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped 

sand backfill. 

3. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other 

unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to 

allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other 

unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION 

A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. 

B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with 

compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired 

equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or 

saturated subgrades. 

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons 

(13.6 tonnes). 

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as 

determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. 

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract 

provisions for unit prices. 

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or 

construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION 

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of 

concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 8

concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when 

approved by Architect. 

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by 

Architect. 

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS 

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. 

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of 

remaining trees. 

3.11 BACKFILL 

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, 

waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 

3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 

4. Removing concrete formwork. 

5. Removing trash and debris. 

6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 

7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL 

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding 

course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, 

and bodies of conduits. 

C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings 

with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in 

Division 3 Section Concrete Work. 

D. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 

inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase 

piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing 

roadway subbase. 

E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material or satisfactory soil, free of particles larger 

than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or 

conduit. 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 9

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both 

sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement 

of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. 

F. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a 

height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 

G. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. 

H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. 

I. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final 

subgrade elevation. 

J. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 

inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 

3.13 SOIL FILL 

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill 

material will bond with existing material. 

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 

3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 

4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 

5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL 

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before 

compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain 

frost or ice. 

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that 

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified 

dry unit weight. 

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS 

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for 

material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in 

loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. 

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and 

uniformly along the full length of each structure. 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 10

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight 

according to ASTM D 698: 

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 

inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 97 

percent. 

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and 

compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 

3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below 

subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 

percent. 

3.16 GRADING 

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply 

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface 

tolerances. 

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish 

subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 

3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested 

with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge. 

3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES 

A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 

1. Install separation geotextile where required on prepared subgrade according to 

manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 

3. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 

4. Place subbase and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a 

single layer. 

5. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness 

in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick 

or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick. 

6. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, 

lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit 

weight according to ASTM D 698. 

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent 

lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 11

materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 

percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 

3.18 DRAINAGE COURSE 

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabson-grade 

as follows: 

1. Install subdrainage geotextile as required on prepared subgrade according to 

manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 

2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single 

layer. 

3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers 

of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less 

than 3 inches (75 mm) thick. 

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not 

less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing 

agency to perform field quality-control testing. 

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with 

subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with 

requirements. 

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed 

to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing 

subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when 

approved by Architect/Engineer. 

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, 

ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following 

locations and frequencies: 

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill 

layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building 

slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 

feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 

150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of 

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth 

required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 


EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 12


A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep 

free of trash and debris. 

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed 

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent 

construction operations or weather conditions. 

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect/Engineer; 

reshape and recompact. 

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, 

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, 

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 

3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS 

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, 

trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. 

B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. 

Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 

1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally 

dispose of it off Owner's property. 



EARTH MOVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02003 - 13

! 


! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

!

SECTION 02004 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 




Conditions and Division 1 Summary of Work, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Division 1 Section "Project Coordination" for recording preexisting conditions and 

excavation support and protection system progress. 

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities 

and support facilities. 

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of 

supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and 

superimposed and construction loads. 

1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including 

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using 

performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 

3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, 

structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 

4. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements. 


A. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system. 

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply 

with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed 

by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

C. Coordinate first paragraph below with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Field 

Engineering" Qualification Data: For qualified land surveyor and professional engineer. 

D. Other Informational Submittals: 


EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 

M MARCH 2, 2009 

02004 - 1

1. Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that 

might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of, or the 

performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins. 

2. Record Drawings: Identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface 

structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. 

a. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points. 


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Review methods and procedures related to excavation support and protection system 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

a. Geotechnical report. 

b. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions. 

c. Proposed excavations. 

d. Proposed equipment. 

e. Monitoring of excavation support and protection system. 

f. Working area location and stability. 

g. Coordination with waterproofing. 

h. Abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system. 


A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner 

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to 

provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of 

proposed interruption of utility. 

2. Do not precede with interruption of utility without Architect's, Construction Manager's and 

Owner's written permission. 

B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent 

existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points 

to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 

1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey 

benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for 

comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in 

elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent 

construction. 



EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 

M MARCH 2, 2009 

02004 - 2

SECTION 02005 - ASPHALT PAVING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 

2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 

3. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 

4. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay. 

5. Asphalt surface treatments. 

6. Pavement-marking paint. 

7. Traffic-calming devices. 

8. Imprinted asphalt. 


1. Division 2 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition, removal, and recycling of 

existing asphalt pavements, and for geotextiles that are not embedded within courses of 

asphalt paving. 

2. Division 2 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for 

aggregate pavement shoulders. 

3. Division 2 Section "Concrete Paving" for joint sealants and fillers at paving terminations. 

1.3 UNIT PRICES 

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices and as defined in Division 1. 

1.4 DEFINITION 

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical 

and performance properties. 

1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job 

mix proposed for the Work. 

2. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. 


ASPHALT PAVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 1

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces. 

Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities. 

C. Samples: For each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches minimum if used. 

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless 

otherwise indicated: 

1. Each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches minimum. 

2. Each type and color of preformed traffic-calming device. 

3. Each pattern and color of imprinted asphalt and precut marking material. 

E. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and Installer. 

F. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer. 

G. Material Test Reports: For each paving material. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide copy of manufactures experience for verification of 

qualifications. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Imprinted-asphalt manufacturer's authorized installer who is trained and 

approved for installation of imprinted asphalt required for this Project. 

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated. 

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable 

requirements of city and DOT for asphalt paving work. 

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in 

standard specifications do not apply to this Section. 

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site 

1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not 

limited to, the following: 

a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of 

plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt. 

b. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. 

c. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic 

during installation period and for remainder of construction period. 

d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, 

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid 

delays. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken 

and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of 

manufacture, and directions for storage. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 2

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range 

required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively 

damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following 

conditions are not met: 

1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. Not used if paving takes place 

within 48 hours of final grading and final compaction of road base. 

2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 

3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910. 

4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of 

placement. 

5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. 

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a 

minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials 55 deg F for waterbased 

materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. 

C. Imprinted Asphalt Paving: Proceed with coating imprinted pavement only when air temperature 

is at least 50 deg F and rising and will not drop below 50 deg F within 8 hours of coating 

application. Proceed only if no precipitation is expected within two hours after applying the final 

layer of coating. 


2.1 AGGREGATES 

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous 

installations. 

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, 

crushed blast-furnace slag. 

C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared 

from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 

1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total 

aggregate mass. 

D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242 or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other 

inert material. 

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS 

A. Asphalt Cement: AC 20 per ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material except use ductility at 

39.2 deg. F., >5 for AC 20 and delete the loss on heating requirement on residue from “Thin- 

Film Oven Test”. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 3

B. Prime Coat: Not required if paving is done within 48 hours of final compaction. 

C. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or 

AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and 

consistency for application. 

D. Fog Seal: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or 

AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable 

grade and consistency for application. 

E. Water: Potable. 

F. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency. 

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, 

liquid, or wettable powder form. 

B. Sand: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. 

C. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack, rot, 

and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications. 

D. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690 or AASHTO M 324, Type I Type II or III Type IV, hot-applied, 

single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant. 

E. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying 

with AASHTO M 248, Type N, Type F, and Type S; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952. 

1. Color: White, Yellow, Blue, and As indicated. 

F. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint. 


G. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, 

complying with FS TT-P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than 45 minutes. 


H. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint. 


I. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1. 

J. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2 

inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots on 

underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate. 

1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 20-inch minimum length. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 4

2.4 MIXES 

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having 

jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt 

Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements: 

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where 

Project is located. Provide mix with the following characteristics: 

a. Number of compaction blows each end of specimen: 50. 

b. Satiability based on ASTM D5581: 1200 minimum. 

c. Flow in 0.01-inch units per ASTM D5581: 10-18. 

d. Voids in mineral aggregate VMA: 14. 

e. The percentage of bituminous material by weight added to aggregate will be 

between 4% and 7% of the weight of the bituminous mixture. 

2. Surface Course: 3-inch minimum compacted thickness and as indicated on the drawings 

with aggregate meeting the following gradation table 

! inch 100 

" inch 74-99 

3/8 inch 69-91 

No. 4 49-65 

No. 8 33-47 

No. 16 21-35 

No. 50 6-18 

No. 200 2-6 

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, Type 1. 



A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving. 

B. Verify that the road base has been properly compacted and is at the correct line, grade, and 

slope. 

C. Verify that the road base thickness is as indicated on the project plans. 

D. Verify that sufficient depth at curbs, walks, lips and other vertical edges is available to place the 

required thickness of compacted asphalt. 

E. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft 

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 

2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons 

or other vehicle with similar axel weight. 

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as 

determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. 

F. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 5

G. Verify that utilities, traffic loop detectors, and other items requiring a cut and installation beneath 

the asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired flush with 

adjacent asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt. 

3.2 PATCHING 

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement 

section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into 

adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. 

Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new 

subgrade. 

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat 

concrete pieces firmly. 

1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slab until slab is stabilized or, if necessary, 

crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly. 

2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal 

patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut 

excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form 

new subgrade. 

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt 

paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. 

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 

D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch 

and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. 

E. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, 

compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with 

adjacent surfaces. 

3.3 REPAIRS 

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface 

course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements. 

1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick. 

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 

1/4 inch. 

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 

2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush 

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 

3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush 

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 6

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material 

from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 

B. Herbicide Treatment: Not used. 

C. Prime Coat: Not use if paving takes place not more than 48 hours after final compaction and 

grading of road bases. If paving must be delayed significantly, re-grade and re-compact road 

base or apply Prime Coat. Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base 

course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not 

flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure. 

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over 

surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. 

Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have 

evaporated. 

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. 

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. 

yd. 

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. 

3. Remove and replace items damaged by overspray or clean affected surfaces as directed 

by architect at no additional cost to owner. 

3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING 

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place 

asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation 

of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 

1. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift if design thickness is less than 3inches. 

If design thickness is more than 3-inches, place in multiple lifts with a minimum 

thickness of 1.5-inches and a maximum thickness of 3-inches. 

2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 

3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of 

one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and 

tears in asphalt-paving mat. 

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser 

width are required. 

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to 

overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing 

asphalt surface course. 

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools 

to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent 

segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 7

3.6 JOINTS 

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct 

joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix 

asphalt course. 

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 

2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 

3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 

4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes 

work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" 

method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving 

Operations.". 

5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive 

displacement. 

6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. 

3.7 COMPACTION 

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without 

excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate 

compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. 

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and 

outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, 

and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. 

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hotmix 

asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix 

asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 

1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927 

or AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. 

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still 

warm. 

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to 

proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. 

F. Place asphalt so that final compacted asphalt is even with lip of gutter on curbs that drain away 

from the curb and gutter (open face or depressed curb and gutter). Place asphalt so that final 

compacted asphalt is 1/4-inch above lip of gutter on curbs that carry water (slope of parking lot 

is towards the curb). In transition areas, use extra care to make sure that no ponds, bird baths, 

or depressions are left after paving. 

G. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and 

replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface 

smoothness. 

H. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and 

hardened. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 8

I. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become 

marked. 

3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the 

following tolerances: 

1. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness 

within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied 

transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 

1. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 

2. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. 

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 

C. After paving is complete, pour water on paved areas and identify ponds, bird baths, and 

depressions. Identify the same at open face and transition sections of curb and gutter. 

Remove and replace asphalt, curb and gutter, road base, and or sub-base as necessary to fix 

ponds, bird baths, or depressions at no additional cost to owner. 

3.9 SURFACE TREATMENTS 

A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. to existing asphalt pavement and 

allow to cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal. 

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow 

curing. 

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface. 

3.10 PAVEMENT MARKING 

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified 

with Architect/Engineer. 

B. Allow paving to age for 7 days minimum days before starting pavement marking. 

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. 

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions 

indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide 

a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 

1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. 

E. Color 

1. White: Parking stalls and pedestrian crossings. 

2. Blue: Handicap insignia at appropriate stalls. 

3. Red: Fire lanes and no parking areas. 

4. White: Directional arrows. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 9

3.11 WHEEL STOPS 

A. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels 

embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond 

to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined 

according to ASTM D 3549. 

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for 

compliance with smoothness tolerances. 

D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and 

compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168. 

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four 

samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to 

ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications. 

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples 

according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. Cores will also be measured for 

compacted thickness. The owner and architect may also direct additional cores to be 

taken at locations of their choosing to verify final pavement thickness. 

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, 

with no fewer than 3 cores taken. 

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear 

method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or 

ASTM D 2726. 

c. Coordinate the time and locations of all holes so that cores may be filled. 

E. The contractor will replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken. 

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements 

indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. 

3.13 DISPOSAL 

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and 

legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 

1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site. 




MARCH 2, 2009 

02005 - 10

SECTION 02006 - CONCRETE PAVING 



1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Summary of Work section, apply to this 

Section. 

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 

1. Driveways and roadways. 

2. Parking lots. 

3. Curbs and gutters. 

4. Walkways. 

5. Unit paver base. 



1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for general building applications of concrete. 

2. Division 2 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and 

subbase course. 

A. Cementitious Materials: cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended 

hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace 

slag. 


A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. 

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture 

designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or 

other circumstances warrant adjustments. 

C. Samples: 10-lb sample of exposed aggregate. 

D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency. 

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test 

results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on 

comprehensive testing of current materials: 


CONCRETE PAVING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 1

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious 

expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity. 

F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following 

materials complies with requirements: 

1. Cementitious materials. 

2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 

3. Fiber reinforcement. 

4. Admixtures. 

5. Curing compounds. 

6. Applied finish materials. 

7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 

8. Joint fillers. 

G. Field quality-control test reports. 

H. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who 

complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed 

Concrete Production Facilities." 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to 

ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to 

ASTM E 548. 

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing 

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification 

program. 

C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless 

modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 

D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform 

material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 

E. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate 

typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as 

directed by Architect. 

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be 

constructed. 

3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction. 

4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a 

standard for judging the completed pavement. 

5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by 

Architect. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 2

6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at 

time of Substantial Completion. 

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with 

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Coordination." 

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design 

and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete 

pavement construction practices. Require representatives, including the 

following, of each entity directly concerned with concrete pavement, to attend 

conference: 

a. Contractor's superintendent. 

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. 

c. Ready-mix concrete producer. 

d. Concrete pavement subcontractor. 


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for 

other construction activities. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

2.2 FORMS 

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements 

apply to product selection: 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may 

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products 

specified. 

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, 

but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 

one of the manufacturers specified. 

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type 

materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less. 

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond 

with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent 

treatments of concrete surfaces. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 3

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel 

wire into flat sheets. 

B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. 

C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed. 

D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed 

bars; assembled with clips. 

E. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. 

F. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. 

G. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to 

length with ends square and free of burrs. 

H. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 

1. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt 

joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting 

operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. 

I. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, 

and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. 

Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from 

steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, 

and as follows: 

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base 

material will not support chair legs. 

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymercoated 

wire bar supports. 

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, 

brand, and source throughout the Project: 

1. Portland Cement and as specified in Division 3 except that for exterior concrete, 

the minimum compressive strength is 4000 psi at 28 days. 

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. 

Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at 

least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar pavement applications and service 

conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 

C. Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with 

deleterious reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gapgraded 

coarse aggregate as follows: 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 4

1. Aggregate Sizes: 3/4 to 1 inch nominal. 

2. Aggregate Source, Shape, and Color and as required by the architect. 

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 

F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible 

with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride 

ions by mass of cementitious material. 

2.5 CURING MATERIALS 

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, 

Type G. 

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, 

weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry. 

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlappolyethylene 

sheet. 

C. Water: Potable. 

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for 

application to fresh concrete. 

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, 

Class B. 

F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, 

Class B. 

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated 

cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 

B. Color stain: Match Architect's sample or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's 

full range of stains. 

C. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, 

abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery 

aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 

percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. 

D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene 

butadiene. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 5

E. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of 

humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application 

temperature and of grade to requirements, and as follows: 

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing and types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding 

hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 

F. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid-set retarder with color dye, for 

horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening 

of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch. 

G. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of 

portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, color pigments, and plasticizing admixture. 

Use color pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with 

cement. 

1. Color: Match Architect's/Engineer’s sample or as selected by Architect/Engineer 

from manufacturer's full range. 

H. Rock Salt: Sodium chloride crystals, kiln dried, coarse gradation with 100 percent 

passing 3/8-inch sieve and 85 percent retained on a No. 8 sieve. 

2.7 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, 

complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I or II or AASHTO M 248, Type N or F. 

1. Color: White, Yellow, Blue. 

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready 

mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes. 

1. Color: White, Yellow, Blue. 

C. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1. 

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES 

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and 

strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field 

experience. 

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed 

concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method. 

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi 

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45 

3. Select slump limit from options in subparagraph below or revise to suit Project. 

4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 6

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normalweight 

concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 

1. Air Content: 5-8 percent nominal maximum aggregate size. 

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by 

weight of cement. 

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

1. Use water-reducing admixture, high-range, water-reducing admixture, highrange, 

water-reducing and retarding admixture, plasticizing, and retarding 

admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 

2. Specify admixtures as part of submittal. Verify that admixtures proposed do not 

adversely affect stained concrete and will not modify colors of stain. 

3. Coordinate acceptability of admixtures with architect. 

F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other 

than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements as follows: 

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent. 

2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 

3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 

percent, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 

G. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended 

rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. where specified and approved in mix submittal. 

H. Color Stain: Add stain to concrete per manufacturers recommendations and to meet 

color required by architect and owner on areas of stained concrete. 

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete 

according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged 

and used in the Work. 

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and 

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 

deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete 

according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type 

batch machine mixer. 

1. For concrete mixes of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, 

but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of 

batch is released. 

2. For concrete mixes larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for 

each additional 1 cu. yd. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 7



3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating 

Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, 

and amount of water added. 

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements 

for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. 

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatictired 

equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 

15 tons or similar axel weight vehicle. 

3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 

inch require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earth 

Moving." 

C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have 

been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 


A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing 

concrete. 

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for 

pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous 

progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete 

placement. 

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation 

from concrete without damage. 

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, 

and supporting reinforcement. 

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing 

materials. 

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in 

position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 8

3.5 JOINTS 

D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining 

pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining 

widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep 

them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or 

replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of 

adjacent mats. 

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to 

line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints 

at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously 

placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement 

and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour 

unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise 

indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 

3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed 

against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 

4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with 

keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into 

concrete. 

5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where 

indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete 

bonding to one side of joint. 

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete 

curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where 

indicated. 

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 

3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished 

surface if joint sealant is indicated. 

4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not 

indicated. 

5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is 

required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 

6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or 

other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been 

placed on both sides of joint. 

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into 

areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth 

of the concrete thickness, as follows: 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 9

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and 

finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat 

grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover 

marks on concrete surfaces. 

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with 

shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into 

concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface 

and before developing random contraction cracks. 

3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints 

where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent 

concrete bonding to one side of joint. 

E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial 

floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying 

surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel 

reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit 

installation of their work. 

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing 

concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. 

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. 

Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required 

finish elevation and alignment. 

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing 

concrete. 

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. 

F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. 

G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do 

not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 

H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment 

supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with 

an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or 

side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and 

consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, 

dowels, and joint devices. 

I. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement 

and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated 

bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and 

screed. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 10

1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes 

without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by 

Architect. 

J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. 

K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and 

uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. 

Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or 

spreading surface treatments. 

L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter 

placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed 

requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, 

finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, 

remove and replace with formed concrete. 

M. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit 

revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. 

Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required 

for formed pavement. 

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent 

displacement of paver machine during operations. 

N. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate 

equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day 

compressive strength. 

O. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete 

work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing 

actions, or low temperatures. 

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, 

uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture 

temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of 

placement. 

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents 

or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix 

designs. 

P. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather 

conditions exist: 

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F 

at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to 

control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount 

of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not 

exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. 

Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 11

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING 

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. 

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has 

disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float 

surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to 

power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. 

Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 

3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES 

1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished 

concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 

2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across floatfinished 

concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fineline 

texture. 

3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating 

float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, 

perpendicular to line of traffic. 

4. Coordinate with Architect/Engineer the locations of each type of finish. 

A. Monolithic Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in pavement 

surfaces as follows: 

1. Immediately after float finishing, spray-apply chemical surface retarder to 

pavement according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and 

remove when ready to continue finishing operations. 

3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface 

with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom. 

4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing 

cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. 

B. Seeded Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single 

layer of aggregate uniformly on pavement surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic 

concrete, and float finish to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch. 

1. Spray-apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's 

written instructions. 

2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and 

remove sheeting when ready to continue finishing operations. 

3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface 

with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom. 

4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing 

cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. 

C. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate 

finish on pavement surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as 

follows: 

1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. dampened slip-resistive aggregate over 

pavement surface in 2 applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a 

steel trowel, but do not force below surface. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 12

2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of slip-resistive aggregate over 

pavement surface with mechanical spreader, allow absorbing moisture, and 

embedding by power floating. Follow power floating with a second slip-resistive 

aggregate application, uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles 

to first application to ensure uniform coverage, and embed by power floating. 

3. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate 

manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 

4. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and 

water to expose nonslip aggregate. 

D. Rock-Salt Finish: After initial floating, uniformly spread 5 lb/100 sq. ft. rock salt over 

pavement surface. 

1. Cover pavement surface with 1-mil-thick polyethylene sheet and remove sheet 

when concrete has hardened and 7-day curing period has elapsed. 

2. Embed rock salt into plastic concrete, power float concrete, and trowel finish. 

3. After 7-day curing period, saturate concrete with water and broom-sweep surface 

to dissolve remaining rock salt. 

E. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake 

materials to pavement surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as 

follows: 

1. Uniformly spread dry-shake hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft. unless greater 

amount is recommended by manufacturer to match pavement color required. 

2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake hardener over 

pavement surface with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and 

embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second dry-shake 

hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles 

to first application to ensure uniform color, and embed by power floating. 

3. After final floating, apply a hand-trowel finish followed by a broom finish to 

concrete. 

4. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake hardener 

manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 

F. Coordinate the locations of finishes with the architect and owner prior to placing 

concrete. 

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or 

hot temperatures. 

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. 

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or 

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during 

finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after 

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from 

concrete surface. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 13

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, 

curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 

1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days 

with the following materials: 

a. Water. 

b. Continuous water-fog spray. 

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover 

concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive 

covers. 

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining 

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides 

and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. 

Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material 

and waterproof tape. 

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or 

roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to 

heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of 

coating and repair damage during curing period. 

3.10 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES 

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 

2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 

3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot-long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 

4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 

5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 

6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 

inch. 

7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 

Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 

8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 

9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 

10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 

3.11 PAVEMENT MARKING 

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been 

verified with Architect/Engineer. 

B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 14 days and be dry before starting pavement 

marking. 

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. 

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions 

indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to 

provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 14

1. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting 

agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according 

to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or 

5000 sq. ft. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. 

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests 

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly 

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite 

sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 

Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite 

sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 

40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each 

composite sample. 

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one 

set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 

2 specimens at 28 days. 

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 

specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. 

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive 

compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no 

compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more 

than 500 psi. 

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect/Engineer, concrete manufacturer, 

and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall 

contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of 

concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design 

compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, 

compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device 

may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or 

rejection of concrete. 

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of 

concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, 

or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 15

G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not 

comply with specified requirements. 

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to 

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

3.13 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that 

does not comply with requirements in this Section. 

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect/Engineer, when necessary to determine 

magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement 

areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. 

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days 

after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean 

as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. 

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign 

material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled 

for Substantial Completion inspections. 




MARCH 2, 2009 

02006 - 16

SECTION 02007- SITE SIGNAGE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Providing post-mounted site traffic signage where indicated. 

B. Related Documents: Conditions of the Contract, General Requirements, and Drawings apply 

to the Work of this Section. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Asphalt Paving: Section 02005 

2. Concrete Paving: Section 02006 

3. Pavement Markings: Section 02005 


A. General: Submit the following: 

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data for each type of sign and post indicated. 

C. Manufacturer’s installation instruction, for information only. 


A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience in the manufacturing of traffic 

signage of the type specified for this Project. 

B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the City Building Code, latest edition, and other 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY 

A. Deliver materials in factory packages with factory labels attached. 

B. Cover and protect material in transit and at job site. Damaged or defaced material will be 

rejected and shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide traffic sign with post where shown on the Drawings and as specified. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Signs: 0.080 aluminum sheet. 

B. Posts: Galvanized Steel flanged channels weighing 4 pounds per foot, length as required for 

proper mounting height and scheduled foundation embedment depth. 

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Clamps: Cadmium or galvanized steel. Bolts shall be a minimum 

of 5/16" in diameter. Clamps shall be two-piece assemblies of at last 14 gage steel or shall be 

an adjustable steel strap bracket. 

D. Concrete for foundations: 2500 psi minimum, complying with Section 03300. 


SITE SIGNAGE 02007 - 1

E. Concrete for mow strip: 3000 psi minimum, complying with Section 03300. 

2.3 SCHEDULE 

A. Stop Sign: 30" reflective sheeting. 

B. Handicapped Parking Sign Type 1: 12" x 18", 18 gage steel sheet with baked enamel finish. 

Sign to have handicapped symbol and text reading "Accessible Parking". 

C. Handicapped Parking Sign Type 2: 12" x 18", 18 gage steel sheet with baked enamel finish. 

Sign to have handicapped symbol and text reading "Accessible Parking”. 

D. Fire Lane Sign: 12" x 18", 18 gage steel sheet with baked enamel finish. Sign to have text 

reading "No Parking – Fire Lane". 

E. Unauthorized Parking Sign: 17” x 22”, 18 gage steel sheet with baked enamel finish. Text as 

indicated on Drawings. 

F. Do not Enter Sign: 12” x 18”, 18 gage steel sheet with baked enamel finish. Sign to have text 

reading “Do Not Enter”. 

G. One Way Only Sign: 12” x 18”, 18 gage steel sheet with baked enamel finish. Sign to have 

text reading “One Way Only”. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil 

and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. 

B. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of sign pole 

base at grade. Secure and brace forms and foundation tube, sleeve, or anchor bolts in 

position, to prevent displacement during concreting. 

C. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. 

Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use nonstaining curing 

compound. 

D. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and 

uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of 

concrete base. Construct exposed concrete surface (mow strip) in landscape areas with 

grass or hardscape areas (asphalt or concrete). In landscape areas without grass, do not 

construct mow strip. 

3.3 INSTALLATION 

A. Install signs in accordance with manufacturer's drawings, shop drawings, and specifications. 

B. Install sign posts and sign panels plumb, level, and square and in proper planes with other 

work. 



C. Anchor sign panels securely to sign posts, using fasteners suitable for application and as 

recommended by manufacturer. 


A. Verify that signs are installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Tolerances: 

1. Out of level: ± 1/8". 

2. Out of plumb: ± 1/4". 


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. 




! 


! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

!

SECTION 02008 – WATER UTILITY PIPING 





B. Codes and Standards: 

1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of National Standard 

Plumbing Code pertaining to selection and installation of potable water system materials 

and products. 

2. Water Purveyor Compliance: Comply with requirements of Purveyor supplying water to 

project, obtain required permits and inspections. 

3. NFPA Compliance: Install fire water systems in accordance with NFPA 24 "Standard for 

Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances". 

4. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations 

pertaining to hydrants, including hose unit threading and similar matching of connections. 

5. UL Compliance: Provide fire hydrants that comply with UL 246 "Hydrants for 

Fire-Protection Service", and are listed by UL. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes pressure water pipes and fire systems outside the building, with the 

following components: 

1. Special fittings for expansion and deflection. 

2. Pipes and valves. 

3. Fire Hydrants. 


A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 

B. DI: Ductile Iron pressure pipe. 


A. Pressure Rating: 175 psi static water pressure for all pipes and fittings. Pipe joints shall be 

water tight. 



1. Special pipe fittings. 

2. Fire hydrants 


WATER UTILITY PIPING 02008 - 1

3. Valves. 

4. Valve boxes and appurtenances. 

5. Pipes. 

6. Disinfection reports and practices 

7. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions 

for fire water system materials and products. 

8. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for fire water system materials 

and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in 

maintenance manual. 

B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 

1. Thrust Blocks: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and forces for thrust blocks for 

each size of pipe and type of bend. 

C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same 

trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping and sewer system piping. Indicate 

interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. 

D. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less 

than 1 inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate 

manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing 

system piping. 

E. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Do not store plastic pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. 

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. 


A. Interruption of Water Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others 

unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide 

temporary service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of 

proposed interruption of service. Coordinate interruptions during weekly meetings and at 

pre-construction meeting. 

2. Do not precede with interruption of service without Architect's, Construction Manager's, 

and Owner's written permission. 


2.1 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Underground –Type Plastic Line Markers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, 

continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils 



thick. Provide blue tape with black printing reading "CAUTION WATER LINE BURIED 

BELOW". 

B. Nonmetallic Piping Label: If nonmetallic piping is used for water service, provide engraved 

plastic laminate, label permanently affixed to main electrical meter panel stating "THIS 

STRUCTURE HAS A NONMETALLIC WATER SERVICE". 

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS 

A. Refer to Part 3 "3.4 - Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining 

materials. 

B. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, 

and capacities indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by 

Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and 

equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in potable 

water systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is 

Installer's option. 

C. Piping: Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, with 

joining method as indicated. 

D. Ductile Iron Pipe: Polyethylene wrapped Ductile Iron Class 350, with cement mortar lining 

complying with AWWA C104. 

1. Fitting: Ductile iron AWWA C110; cement lined AWWA C104; and rubber-gasket joints, 

AWWA C111. 

E. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88; type K, soft-annealed temper (for 3/4" to 2" diameter pipe). 

F. PVC Pipe: Ultra Blue AWWA C909 Class 200 Pipe for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, 

elastomeric seals. 

1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for 

gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 

2. Fittings NPS 10 and Larger: Ductile-iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, 

for push-on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets. 

2.3 WATER METER 

A. Water Meter, Meter Set and lid will be provided by water purveyor after payment of connection 

fees. 

B. Contractor to supply concrete meter box and accessories needed to make installation of water 

meter. 

2.4 VALVES 

A. Gate Valves: UL-listed, 175 psi working pressure for 12" and smaller, 150 psi for sizes larger 

than 12". Threaded, flanged, hub, or other end configurations to suit size of valve and piping 

connection. Inside screw type for use with indicator post, iron body bronze mounted, non- rising 

stem, solid wedge disc. 



B. Check Valves: UL-listed, 175 psi working pressure for 2" through 12", 150 psi for sizes larger 

than 12". Swing type, iron body bronze mounted with metal-to-metal or rubber-faced checks. 

Threaded, flanged, or hub end, to suit size and piping connections. 

2.5 FIRE HYDRANT 

A. Provide cast-iron body fire hydrants, compression type, opening against pressure and closing 

with pressure, base valve design, 200 psi working pressure, with 1/4" gage tapping and bronze 

plug in standpipe, conforming to the latest edition of AWWA C-502, "Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants." 

B. Features: Provide the following features: 

1. Size: 5" valve opening. 

2. Direction to Open Hydrant: Left. 

3. Size and Shape of Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon 1-1/2" point to flat. 

4. Hose Nozzles: 2-1/2" National Standard Thread cap and chain. 

5. Pumper Nozzles: 5" National Standard Thread cap and chain. 

6. Depth of Trench: 4'-6". 

7. Connnection to Main: 6" mechanical joint. 


A. Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, wyes, crosses, plugs, caps, bends, valves, and 

hydrants. After installation, apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding 

material to surfaces of ferrous anchorages. 

B. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: Steel, ASTM A 506. 

C. Rods: Steel, ASTM A 575. 

D. Rod Couplings: Malleable-iron, ASTM A 197. 

E. Bolts: Steel, ASTM A 307. 

F. Cast-Iron Washers: Gray-iron, ASTM A 126. 

G. Thrust Blocks: Concrete, 3,000 psi. 

2.7 CONCRETE 

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 

4. Water: Potable. 

B. Thrust Blocks, Hydrant Supports, and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi 

minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 




3.1 Examination: Examine areas and conditions under which potable water system's materials and 

products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 

3.2 EARTHWORK 

A. Excavation trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." 


A. Identification: During back-filling/top-soiling of underground fire water piping systems, install 

continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" 

below finished grade. If pvc pipe is used, install a tracer wire along the top of the pipe, secured 

with tape, and extending to fire hydrants and valves. 

B. Pipe and pipe fittings: 

1. Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600 "Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron 

Water Mains and Their Appurtenances". 

2. Depth of Cover: Provide minimum depth of cover over underground piping in accordance 

with NFPA 24, Figure A-8-11 "Recommended Depth of Cover Above Top of Underground 

Yard Mains" or 60" below finish grade, whichever is greater. 

C. Piping Specialties: 

1. Pipe Line Strainers: Install as indicated, with valved blowoff piped to drain. 

D. Meters: Install as indicated with shutoff valve on either side of meter and valved bypass full line 

size. 

E. Valves: Provide post indicator for control valves. 

1. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve ahead of each hydrant. 

F. Hydrants: Install fire hydrants in accordance with AWWA M17 "Installation, Operation, and 

Maintenance of Fire Hydrants". 

1. Location: Install fire hydrants minimum of 40'-0" from building outside wall, as indicated, 

or if not shown. 

2. Face hydrants towards drive. 

3. Place hydrants so that base of hydrant is even to 6-inches above adjacent top back of 

curb. 

3.4 PIPING APPLICATIONS 

A. Pipe: 



1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600 "standard for installation of 

ductile-iron water mains and their appurtenances" and in accordance with instructions 

from water purveyor. 

2. Copper Tube: Install in accordance with CDA "Copper Tube Handbook". 

3. PVC Pressure pipe, PVC pressure fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

B. Depth of Cover: Provide minimum cover over piping of 12" below average local frost depth or 

42" below finished grade, whichever is greater. 

C. Water Main Connection: Arrange and pay for tap in water main, of size and in location as 

indicated, from water Purveyor. 

D. Water Service Termination: Terminate potable water piping 5'-0" from building foundation in 

location and invert as indicated. Provide temporary pipe plug for piping extension into building. 

1. Mark location with surface marker. 

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and 

arrangement of underground water pipes. Location and arrangement of piping layout take 

design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where 

specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of 

pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 

C. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, 

jacking, or a combination of both. 

D. Install piping according to the following: 

1. Install piping with restrained joints at tee fittings and at horizontal and vertical changes in 

direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint 

system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors. 

2. Install piping with line and grade as indicated or below frost line if not inidcated. 

3. Install ductile-iron pressure piping according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 

4. Install ductile-iron special fittings according to AWWA C600. 

5. Install PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 or ASTM D 2774 and 

ASTM F 1668. 

6. Install PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668. 

3.6 INSTALLATION OF VALVES 

A. Install valves with stems pointing up. Provide valve box over underground valves. 

3.7 INSTALLATION OF WATER METER AND VAULT 

A. Install Water Meter and Vault to comply with City Water Department Standards. 



3.8 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section "Piping, Valves, Gates and 

Specialties." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's 


B. Join pressure piping according to the following: 

1. Join ductile-iron pressure piping according to AWWA C660 or AWWA M41 for push-on 

joints. 

2. Join ductile-iron special fittings according to AWWA C660 or AWWA M41 for push-on 

joints. 

3. Join PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 for gasketed joints. 

4. Join PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2855 for solvent-cemented joints. 

C. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings. 


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered, and after thrust blocks have 

sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline with water 24-hrs prior to testing, and apply test pressure to 

stabilize system. 

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 200 psi for 2-hrs, or at 50 psi above maximum static 

pressure if it is greater than 150 psi. 

1. Test fails if leakage exceeds 2-qts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints irrespective of pipe 

diameter. 

2. Increase pressure in 50 psi increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold 

at test pressure for one hour, decrease to 0 psi. Slowly increase again to test pressure 

and hold for one more hour. 

C. Operating Tests: Open and close all valves and hydrants under system water pressure. Check 

dry barrel hydrants for proper drainage. 

1. For systems with fire pumps, run pumps during operating tests. 

3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Disinfection of Potable Water System: Flush pipe system with clean potable water until no dirty 

water appears at point of outlet. Fill system with water-chlorine solution containing at least 50 

ppm of chlorine. Valve off system and let stand for 24- hrs minimum. Flush with clean potable 

water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. 

1. Repeat procedure if contamination is present in bacteriological examination. 

B. Disinfection of Water Mains: Flush and disinfect in accordance with AWWA C651 "Standard for 

Disinfecting Water Mains". 

1. Contractor shall submit written verification to Project Manager stating, Disinfection has 

been completed in strict compliance with specification for this project and with jurisdiction 

having authority over water system. 




A. Flushing: Flush underground mains and lead-in connections to sprinkler risers before 

connection is made to sprinklers, standpipes, or other fire protection system piping. 

1. Flush at flow rate not less than that indicated in NFPA 24, or at hydraulically calculated 

water demand rate of the system, whichever is greater. 

B. Adjusting: adjust fire hydrants to face street and be have base 2-6 inches above adjacent curb 

and gutter. 

3.12 CLOSING ABANDONED WATER SYSTEMS 

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in 

place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may 

result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: 

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch-thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 

2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable 

methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. 

B. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 




SECTION 02009 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 




Conditions and Division 1 Project Summary Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure storm drainage outside the building, with the 



2. Backwater valves. 

3. Cleanouts. 

4. Drains. 

5. Corrosion-protection piping encasement. 

6. Precast concrete manholes. 


A. HDPE: (ADS) High density polyethylene pipe. 

B. RCP: Reinforced concrete pipe. 


A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). 

Pipe joints shall be at least silt tight, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Force-Main, Pressure-Piping Pressure Rating: At least equal to system operating pressure but 

not less than 50 psig (345 kPa). 




2. Backwater valves. 

3. Drains. 

4. Channel drainage systems. 

5. Storage and leaching chambers. 


1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. 


STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 1

2. Catch Basins and Stormwater Inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

frames, covers, and grates. 

3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames and 

covers, design calculations, and concrete design-mix report. 


trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial 

relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures. 

D. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. 


C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 

D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging 

instructions. 


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied 

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after 

arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption 

of service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Construction Manager's written 

permission. 



A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. 

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy classes. 

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. 

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 2

2.3 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant 

fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 

C. Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel 

corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber 

sleeve. 

1. Couplings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 2-1/8-inch- (54-mm-) wide shield 

with 2 bands. 

2. Couplings for NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide shield 

with 4 bands. 

3. Couplings for NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide shield 

with 4 bands. 

D. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings, NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: With 

ASTM A 666, Type 301 or Type 304, stainless-steel shield; 2 or more stainless-steel bands and 

tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 

1. Couplings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3 inches (76 mm). 

2. Couplings for NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4 inches (102 mm). 

E. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings, NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN 300 and DN 375): 

With ASTM A 666, Type 301 or Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands and 

tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 

1. Couplings: 5-1/2-inch- (140-mm-) wide shield with 6 bands. 

F. Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, two-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel 

bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 

1. Couplings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 2-1/8-inch- (54-mm-) wide 

housing with 2 bolts. 

2. Couplings for NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 3-1/8-inch- (80-mm-) wide 


3. Couplings for NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide 


G. Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, rigid, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type 

mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal 

tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 

1. Couplings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): Sleeve with two bands. 

2.4 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. HDPE Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C969, with built-in bells for gasketed joints. 

1. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): SDR 35. 

2. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): SDR 42. 

3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 3

2.5 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Piping in paragraph below is available in 5 classes and 3 wall thicknesses, and in NPS 12 to 

NPS 144 (DN 300 to DN 3600). Not all classes and wall thicknesses are available. Joints are 

gasket type. 

B. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), with bell-and-spigot 

or ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets. 

1. Class I, Wall A. 

2. Class II, Wall A. 

3. Class III, Wall A. 

4. Class IV, Wall B. 

5. Class V, Wall C. 

2.6 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS 

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining 

underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and 

corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 

B. Sleeve Materials: 

1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 

2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe 

materials being joined. 

C. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and 


D. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, 

corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening 

mechanism on each end. 

E. Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell 

of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 

F. Nonpressure-Type Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or transition-type 

mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal 

tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 

2.7 CORROSION-PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT 

A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 

1. Form: Sheet or tube. 

2. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness. 

3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness or high-density, 

crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum thickness. 

4. Material: High-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum 

thickness. 

5. Color: Black. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 4

2.8 MANHOLES 

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced 

concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 

1. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, 

as required to prevent flotation. 

3. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm) 

minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or 

base section with integral floor. 

4. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness and lengths to provide depth 

indicated. 

5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is 

indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 

6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 

7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole 

walls, for each pipe connection. 

8. Steps: Individual FRP ladder, Individual FRP steps, ASTM A 615/A 615M, 1/2-inch (13mm) 

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP , wide enough to allow worker 

to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or 

anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if 

total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 48 inches (1500 mm). 

9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter 

matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring 

manufacturer. 

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, to 

match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 

11. Protective Coating: Plant-applied, coal-tar, epoxy-paint; 10-mil 15-mil (0.38-mm) 

minimum thickness applied to exterior surfaces. 

12. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225mm) 

riser with 4-inch- (102-mm-) minimum width flange and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter 

cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording 

equivalent to "STORM SEWER." 

a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Protective Coating: Foundry-applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide 

paint; 15-mil (0.38-mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless 

otherwise indicated. 

B. Designed Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A- 

16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions 

indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 

1. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add concrete to 

manhole, as required to prevent flotation. 


3. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole 

walls, for each pipe connection. 

4. Steps: Individual FRP ladder, Individual FRP steps, ASTM A 615M, 1/2-inch (13-mm) 

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP ASTM A , 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel 

reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place 

both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor 

steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth 

from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 5



manufacturer. 

6. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, to 

match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 

7. Protective Coating: Plant-applied, coal-tar, epoxy paint minimum thickness applied to 

surfaces. 

8. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225mm) 

riser with 4-inch- (102-mm-) minimum width flange and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter 

cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording 

equivalent to "STORM SEWER." 

2.9 CONCRETE 

a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. 


paint; 15-mil (0.38-mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless 







B. Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious 

materials ratio. 

1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 

2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel. 

C. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 

0.58 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 

1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, plain. 

2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel. 

2.10 CATCH BASINS 

A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced 

concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 

1. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm) 

minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or 

base section with integral floor. 

2. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and 

lengths to provide depth indicated. 






MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 6

5. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape 

matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring 

manufacturer. 

6. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 229-mm) 

total thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate. 

7. Steps: Individual FRP ladder, Individual FRP steps, or ASTM A 615M, 1/2-inch (13-mm) 

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP [ASTM A 615/A 615M, 1/2-inch (13mm) 

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP wide enough to allow worker to 

place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or 


total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm) . 

8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe 

connecting to base section. 

B. Designed Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced concrete; 

designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural 

loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 

1. Joint Sealants: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 

2. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape 

matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring 

manufacturer. 


total thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate. 

4. Steps: Individual FRP ladder, Individual FRP steps, ASTM A 615/A, 1/2-inch (13-mm) 

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel reinforcing 

rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP , wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 

step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into 

sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor 

of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm) . 

5. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe 

connecting to base section. 

C. Cast-in-Place Concrete, Catch Basins: Construct of reinforced concrete; designed according to 

ASTM C 890 for structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 

1. Bottom, Walls, and Top: Reinforced concrete. 

2. Channels and Benches: Concrete. 

3. Steps: Individual or FRP ladder, Individual FRP steps, ASTM A 615M, 1/2-inch (13-mm) 

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, ASTM A 615M, 1/2-inch (13-mm) 

steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to 

place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or 


total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 

D. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural 

loading. Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings. 

1. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural 

loading. Include 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4-inch (102mm) 

minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter flat grate with small square or 

short-slotted drainage openings. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 7

1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.11 STORMWATER INLETS 

A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility 

standards. 

B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to 

utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. 

C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and 

dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. 

D. Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to utility standards. 

E. Curb Inlets: Vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions indicated. 

F. Gutter Inlets: Horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavyduty 

frames and grates. 

G. Combination Inlets: Vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions 

indicated. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. 

H. Frames and Grates: Dimensions, opening pattern, free area, and other attributes indicated. 

2.12 STORMWATER DETENTION STRUCTURES 

A. Cast-in-Place Concrete, Stormwater Detention Structures: Construct of reinforced-concrete 

bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), 

heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 

1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation. 


total thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and cover. 

3. Steps: Individual or FRP ladder Individual FRP steps, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, 

deformed, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP 

ASTM A, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP wide 

enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral 

slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400mm) 

intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of structure to finished grade is less 

than [60 inches (1500 mm). 

B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron castings designed for 

heavy-duty service. Include 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4inch 

(102-mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include 

indented top design with lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into cover. 

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Paint: SSPC-Paint 16. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 8

B. PE Sheeting: ASTM D 4397, with at least 8-mil (0.2-mm) thickness or other equivalent, 

impervious material. 


3.1 EARTHWORK 

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." 


A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may 

be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure 

sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Unshielded flexible or rigid couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. 

b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible or rigid couplings for pipes with 

different OD. 

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space 

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 

2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints. 

B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe 

fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, 


C. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size 

range: 

1. NPS 3 (DN 80): Hub-and-spigot, Extra-HeavyService class, cast-iron soil pipe and 

fittings; gaskets; and gasketed, calking materials; and calked joints. 

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; shielded, stainless-steel heavyduty, 

shielded, stainless-steel heavy-duty, cast-iron unshielded couplings; and coupled 

joints. 

3. NPS 3 (DN 80): ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 

4. NPS 3 (DN 80): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, silttight, soiltight couplings, 

and coupled joints. 

5. NPS 3 (DN 80): PVC water-service pipe; PVC Schedule 40, water-service-pipe fittings; 

and solvent-cemented joints. 

6. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed 

joints. 

7. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 4 (DN 100) Class 1, 2, 3, nonreinforced-concrete sewer pipe and 

fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

8. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Hub-and-spigot, Extra-Heavy Service class, castiron 

soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed calking materials; and calked joints. 

9. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; shielded, 

stainless-steel, heavy-duty, shielded, stainless-steel, heavy-duty, cast-iron couplings; and 

coupled joints. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 9

10. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, 

standard special-joint bands, and banded joints. 

11. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; 

gaskets; and gasketed joints. 

12. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, 

silttight, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 

13. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and 

gasketed joints. 

14. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): Class 1, 2, 3, nonreinforced-concrete sewer 

pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

15. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Hub-and-spigot, Extra-Heavy Service class, castiron 

soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed, calking materials; and calked joints. 

16. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; shielded, 

stainless-steel, heavy-duty, shielded, stainless-steel, heavy-duty, cast-iron couplings; and 


17. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): NPS 14 (DN 350) ductile-iron culvert pipe, 

ductile-iron standard, or compact fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

18. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, standard, 

special-joint bands, and banded joints. 

19. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): ABS, SDR 42, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets, 

and gasketed joints. 

20. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings in 

NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) and corrugated PE pipe and fittings in NPS 12 

(DN 300), silttight, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 

21. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and 


22. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, 

gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

23. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Nonreinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, 


24. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): NPS 12 (DN 300) reinforced-concrete sewer pipe 

and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

25. NPS 15 (DN 375): Hub-and-spigot, Extra-Heavy Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and 

fittings; gaskets; and gasketed calking materials; and calked joints. 

26. NPS 15 (DN 375): Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; shielded, stainless-steel 

heavy-duty, shielded, stainless-steel, heavy-duty, cast-iron couplings; and coupled joints. 

27. NPS 15 (DN 375): NPS 16 (DN 400) ductile-iron culvert pipe, ductile-iron standard[ or 

compact] fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

28. NPS 15 (DN 375): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, standard special-joint bands, 

and banded joints. 

29. NPS 15 (DN 375): Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight soiltight couplings, and 


30. NPS 15 (DN 375): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

31. NPS 15 (DN 375): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed 

joints. 

32. NPS 15 (DN 375): Fiberglass Type 2, 2 or 4, 4, Class II, III, IV, V, sewer RTRP, Type 1, 

1 or 2, 2, RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

33. NPS 15 (DN 375): Nonreinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and 


34. NPS 15 (DN 375): Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed 

joints. 

35. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Ductile-iron culvert pipe, ductile-iron 

standard[ or compact] fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

36. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard, 




MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 10

37. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, 

standard, special-joint bands, and banded joints. 

38. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and 


39. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, 


40. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Fiberglass Type 2, 2 or 4, 4, Class II, III, IV, V 

sewer RTRP, Type 1, 1 or 2, 2 RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

41. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Nonreinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, 


42. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, 


43. NPS 42 to NPS 64 (DN 1050 to DN 1600): Ductile-iron culvert pipe, ductile-iron 

standard or compact fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

44. NPS 42 to NPS 64 (DN 1050 to DN 1600): Corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard, 




46. NPS 42 to NPS 60 (DN 1050 to DN 1500): Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight, 

soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 

47. NPS 42 to NPS 60 (DN 1050 to DN 1500): Fiberglass Type 2, 2 or 4, 4 Class II, III, IV, V, 

sewer RTRP, Type 1, 1 or 2, 2 RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 







D. Force-Main Pressure Piping: Not Applicable 



arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout 

take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where 

specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken 

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, 

and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, 

and other installation requirements. 

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch 

connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. 

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of 


E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, 


F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 11

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of as noted on plans, 


2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at 

changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's 

proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors. 

3. Install piping with 36-inch (915-mm) minimum cover. 

4. Install piping below frost line. 

5. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and 

Fittings Handbook." 

6. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI C310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil 

Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 

7. Install ductile-iron culvert piping according to ASTM A 716. 

8. Install ductile-iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 

9. Install corrugated steel piping according to ASTM A 798/A 798M. 

10. Install corrugated aluminum piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M. 

11. Install ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 

12. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to CPPA's "Recommended Installation 

Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings." 

13. Install PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 

14. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 

15. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 

16. Install fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 and ASTM F 1668. 

17. Install nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's 

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." 

18. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's 

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." 

G. Install force-main pressure piping according to the following: 




2. Install piping with 36-inch (915-mm) minimum cover. 

3. Install piping below frost line. 




ASTM F 1668. 


H. Install corrosion-protection piping encasement over the following underground metal piping 

according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105: 

1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. 

2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. 

3. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings. 



A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section "Piping, Valves, Gates and 

Specialties." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's 


B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 12

1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast 

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. 

2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast 

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints. 

3. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI C310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil 

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints. 

4. Join ductile-iron culvert piping according to AWWA C600 for push-on joints. 

5. Join ductile-iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 

6. Join corrugated steel sewer piping according to ASTM A 798/A 798M. 

7. Join corrugated aluminum sewer piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M. 

8. Join ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 2751 for elastomericseal 

joints. 

9. Join corrugated PE piping according to CPPA 100 and the following: 

a. Use silttight couplings for Type 2, silttight joints. 

b. Use soiltight couplings for Type 1, soiltight joints. 

10. Join PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for solventcement 

joints. 

11. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomericseal 

joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric gasket joints. 

12. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal 

joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 

13. Join fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 for elastomeric-seal joints. 

14. Join nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M) and 

ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasket joints. 

15. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation 

Manual" for rubber-gasket joints. 

16. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible, or rigid couplings. 

C. Join force-main pressure piping according to the following: 


joints. 


joints. 



D. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings. 

3.5 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. Install horizontal-type backwater valves in piping where indicated. 

B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valve type in piping and in manholes where 

indicated. 

C. Install terminal-type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 13

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION 

A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil 

pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions 

to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 

1. Use light-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 

2. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. 

3. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 

4. Use extra-heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads areas. 

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches 

(450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade. 

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 

3.7 DRAIN INSTALLATION 

A. Install type of drains in locations indicated. 

1. Use light-duty, top-loading classification drains in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 

2. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification drains in paved foot-traffic areas. 

3. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification drains in vehicle-traffic service areas. 

4. Use extra-heavy-duty, top-loading classification drains in roads areas. 

B. Embed drains in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides. 

C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated. 

D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface. 

E. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints. 

F. Embed trench sections in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides. 

3.8 MANHOLE INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. 

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections according to ASTM C 891. 

C. Construct cast-in-place manholes as indicated. 

D. Install PE sheeting on earth where cast-in-place-concrete manholes are to be built. 

E. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

F. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. 

Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 14

3.9 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION 

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. 

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 

3.10 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION 

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. 

B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. 

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated. 

D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated. 

E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated. 


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. 

3.12 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface. 

C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, 

fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer. 

D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around 

bottom and sides. 

E. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated. 

F. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints. 

G. Embed channel sections in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides. 

3.13 STORMWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. Chamber Systems: Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install system and backfill 

according to chamber manufacturer's written instructions. Include storage and leaching 

chambers, filtering material, and filter mat. 

B. Piping Systems: Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install piping system, filter fabric, 

and backfill according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 15

3.14 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 




1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- (203-mm-) thick, brick masonry 

bulkheads. 



B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required 

and use one procedure below: 

1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 

2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches (915 mm) below final 

grade. Fill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted 

dirt. Fill to top with concrete. 

C. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." 

3.15 PAINTING 

A. Clean and prepare concrete manhole surfaces for field painting. Remove loose efflorescence, 

chalk, dust, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen surface as required to remove glaze. 

Paint the following concrete surfaces as recommended by paint manufacturer: 

1. Cast-in-Place-Concrete Manholes: All exterior, except bottom. 

2. Precast Concrete Manholes: All exterior interior. 

B. Prepare ferrous frame and cover surfaces according to SSPC-PA 1 and paint according to 

SSPC-PA 1 and SSPC-Paint 16. Do not paint surfaces with foundry-applied, corrosion-resistant 

coating. 


A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for 

installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground 

structures. 

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 

2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground 

structures. 


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. 

Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion 

of Project. 

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 

2. Defects requiring correction include the following: 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 16

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. 

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder 

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. 

c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. 

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. 

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are 

within allowances specified. 

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. 

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or 

repaired, for leaks and defects. 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 

2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours 

advance notice. 

4. Submit separate report for each test. 

5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities 

having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: 

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. 

c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M). 

6. Force-Main Storm Drainage Piping: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, 

supports, and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the 

maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig (1035 kPa) . 

a. Ductile-Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section. 

b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within 

allowances specified. 

3.18 CLEANING 

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water. 




MARCH 2, 2009 

02009 - 17

! 


! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

!

SECTION 02010 - SUBDRAINAGE 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following: 

1. Foundations. 

2. Underslab areas. 

3. Plaza decks. 

4. Retaining walls. 

5. Landscaped areas. 


A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 

B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. 

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 

D. PP: Polypropylene plastic. 

E. PS: Polystyrene plastic. 

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 

G. Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water. 



1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. 

2. Solid-wall pipe and fittings. 

3. Drainage conduits. 

4. Drainage panels. 

5. Geotextile filter fabrics. 

B. Approval of waterproofing manufacturer's service agent for use of drainage panels against and 

for waterproofing membrane protection. 


SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 1



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 

product selection: 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 

manufacturers specified. 

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

manufacturers specified. 


A. Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and 

joining materials. 

2.3 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS 

A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: 

1. NPS 6 (DN 150) and Smaller: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for 


2. NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: ASTM F 667; AASHTO M 252, Type CP; or 

AASHTO M 294, Type CP; corrugated; for coupled joints. 

3. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. 

B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints. 

C. Perforated Clay Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 700, Standard- and Extra-Strength classes, 

unglazed, socket-and-spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 

1. Gaskets: ASTM C 425, rubber. 

D. Perforated Concrete Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 444 (ASTM C 444M), Type 1, and applicable 

requirements in ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M), Class 2, socket-and-spigot ends for gasketed 

joints. 

1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 

2.4 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS 

A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751. 

1. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 

2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 

B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy classes, hub-and-spigot 

ends, gray, for gasketed joints. 


SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 2

1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, of thickness matching class of pipe. 

C. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, 

for coupled joints. 

1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. 

D. PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled 

joints. 

1. Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. 

E. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell-and-spigot ends, for gasketed 

joints. 

1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 

2.5 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS 

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining 

underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and 

corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 

1. Sleeve Materials: 

a. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 

b. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 

c. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 

d. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe 


2. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and 

corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 

3. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, 

corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening 


2.6 CLEANOUTS 

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M; with round-flanged, cast-iron housing; and secured, 

scoriated, Medium-Duty Loading class, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule and 

countersunk, brass cleanout plug. 

B. Copper-Alloy Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M; with round-flanged, cast-iron housing with 

clamping device; and scoriated, Medium-Duty Loading class, copper-alloy cover. Include 

countersunk, brass cleanout plug. 

C. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 


SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 3

2.7 DRAINAGE CONDUITS 

A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with cuspated, molded-plastic 

drainage core wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. 

1. Nominal Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 

a. Minimum In-Plane Flow: 30 gpm (114 L/min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when 

tested according to ASTM D 4716. 




3. Filter Fabric: PP geotextile. 

4. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet 

connection. 

B. Multipipe Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with interconnected, corrugated, 

perforated-pipe core molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 1248 and wrapped in 

geotextile filter fabric. 

1. Nominal Size: 6 inches (152 mm) high by approximately 1-1/4 inches (31 mm) thick. 









4. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile. 


connection. 

6. Couplings: HDPE. 

C. Single-Pipe Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with perforated corrugated core 

molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 3350 and wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. 








SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 4

3. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven, PP geotextile. 


connection. 

5. Couplings: Corrugated HDPE band. 

D. Mesh Fabric Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with plastic-filament drainage 

core wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. Include fittings for bends and connection to drainage 

piping. 

1. Nominal Size: 6 inches (2-mm) high by approximately 0.9 inch (23 mm) thick. 

a. Minimum In-Plane Flow: 2.4 gpm (9.1 L/min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when 


2. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile made of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both. 

Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested 


E. Ring Fabric Drainage Conduits: Drainage conduit with HDPE-rings-in-grid-pattern drainage 

core, for field-applied geotextile filter fabric. Include fittings for bends and connection to 

drainage piping. 

1. Nominal Size: 0.5 m high by 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 



2. Nominal Size: 1 m high by 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 

a. Minimum In-Plane Flow: 164 gpm (621 L/minat hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when 


3. Filter Fabric: Specified in Part 2 "Geotextile Filter Fabrics" Article. 

2.8 DRAINAGE PANELS 

A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panels: Prefabricated geocomposite, 36 to 60 inches (915 to 1525 

mm) wide with drainage core faced with geotextile filter fabric. 

1. Drainage Core: Three-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded PP or PS. 

a. Minimum Compressive Strength 18,000 lbf/sq. ft. (862 kPa) when tested according 

to ASTM D 1621. 

b. Minimum In-Plane Flow Rate: 7 gpm/ft. (87 L/min. per m) of unit width at hydraulic 

gradient of 1.0 and compressive stress of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according 


2. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface 

drainage, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; 

complying with the following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: 

a. Survivability: Class 2. 

b. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve, maximum. 


SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 5

c. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum. 

3. Filter Fabric: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from 

polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with the 

following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: 

a. Survivability: Class 2. 

b. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve, maximum. 

c. Permittivity 0.2 per second, minimum. 

4. Film Backing: Polymeric film bonded to drainage core surface. 

B. Mesh Fabric Drainage Panels: Prefabricated geocomposite with drainage core faced with 


1. Drainage Core: Open-construction, resilient, approximately 0.4-inch- (10.2-mm-) thick, 

plastic-filament mesh. 

a. Minimum In-Plane Flow Rate: 2.4 gpm/ft. (30 L/min. per m) of unit width at 

hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested 


2. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both. Flow 

rates range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested according 


C. Net Fabric Drainage Panels: Prefabricated geocomposite with drainage core faced with 


1. Drainage Core: 3-dimensional, PE nonwoven-strand geonet, approximately 0.25-inch- 

(6-mm-) thick. 

a. Minimum In-Plane Flow Rate: 5 gpm/ft. (62 L/min. per m) of unit width at hydraulic 

gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to 

ASTM D 4716. 




D. Ring Fabric Drainage Panels: Drainage-core panel for field application of geotextile filter fabric. 

1. Drainage Core: 3-dimensional, HDPE rings in grid pattern, approximately 0.1 inch (25 

mm) thick. 

a. Minimum In-Plane Flow Rate: 50 gpm/ft. (625 L/min. per m) of unit width at 

hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested 


E. Fabric-Covered Insulated Drainage Panels: Extruded PS board insulation complying with 

ASTM C 578; fabricated with shiplap edges and with one side having grooved drainage 

channels faced with geotextile filter fabric. 

1. Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density and 25-psig (172-kPa) minimum 



SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 6

2. Type VI, 1.8-lb/cu. ft. (29-kg/cu. m) minimum density and 40-psig (276-kPa) minimum 


3. Minimum In-Plane Flow Rate: 9 gpm/ft. (112 L/min. per m) of unit width when tested 





F. Noncovered Insulated Drainage Panels: Extruded PS board insulation complying with 

ASTM C 578; fabricated with rabbeted edges and with one side having ribbed drainage 

channels. 

1. Type VI, 1.8-lb/cu. ft. (29-kg/cu. m) minimum density and 40-psig (276-kPa) minimum 


2. Type VII, 2.2-lb/cu. ft. (35-kg/cu. m) minimum density and 60-psig (414-kPa) minimum 




G. Expanded PS Insulated Drainage Panels: PS bead board insulation; panels are 4 inches (102 

mm) thick by 48 inches (1220 mm) wide and faced with geotextile filter fabric. 

1. Density: 2 lb/cu. ft. (32 kg/cu. m). 

2. Compressive Strength: 800 lbf/sq. ft. (38 kPa). 






2.9 SOIL MATERIALS 

A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in 

Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." 

2.10 ROOFING FELTS 

A. ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt -saturated roofing felt. 

2.11 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS 

A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 

110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m) when tested according to 

ASTM D 4491. 

1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament or woven, monofilament 

or multifilament. 

2. Style(s): Flat sock. 


SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 7



A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be 

installed. 

B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground 

structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and 

damage of services. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 EARTHWORK 

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." 


A. Underground Subdrainage Piping: 

1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 

2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints. 

3. Perforated clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 

B. Underslab Subdrainage Piping: 

1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 

2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings and loose, bell-and-spigot joints. 

3. Perforated clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 

4. Perforated concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

C. Header Piping: 

1. ABS pipe and fittings solvent-cemented joints. 

2. Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Extra-Heavy class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 

3. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 

4. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 

3.4 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS 

A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping: 

1. At Grade in Earth: Cast-iron cleanouts. 

2. At Grade in Paved Areas: Cast-iron cleanouts. 

B. In Underslab Subdrainage Piping: 

1. In Equipment Rooms and Unfinished Areas: Cast-iron cleanouts. 

2. In Finished Areas: Copper-alloy cleanouts. 


SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 8

3.5 LANDSCAPING DRAINAGE INSTALLATION 

A. Provide trench width to allow installation of drainage conduit. Grade bottom of trench 

excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. 

B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. 

C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, 

to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). 

D. Install drainage conduits as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for landscaping 

subdrainage with horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between conduit and trench 

walls. Wrap drainage conduits without integral geotextile filter fabric with flat-style geotextile 

filter fabric before installation. Connect fabric sections with adhesive or tape. 

E. Add drainage course to top of drainage conduits. 

F. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage conduit to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. 

G. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. 

H. Place layer of roofing felt over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 

mm). 

I. Fill to Grade: Place satisfactory soil fill material over drainage course. Place material in loosedepth 

layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish 

grade. 


A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with 

unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, 

seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other 

requirements indicated. 

1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum 

slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum 

slope of 0.5 percent. 

3. Plaza Deck Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum 

slope of 1.0 percent. 

4. Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater 

piping system, install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 

percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 

However, when water discharges through wall weep holes, pipe may be installed with a 

minimum slope of zero percent. 

5. Landscaping Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum 

slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise 

indicated. 

6. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 

7. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing 

upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. 


SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 9

B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and 

fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. 

C. Install ABS piping according to ASTM D 2321. 

D. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. 

E. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. 

F. Install clay piping according to ASTM C 12 and NCPI's "Clay Pipe Engineering Manual." 

G. Install concrete piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Handbook." 


A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hub and spigot, with rubber compression gaskets according to 

CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." Use gaskets that match class of pipe and 

fittings. 

B. Join ABS pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2751. 

C. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's 

"Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties." 

D. Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's 

"Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties"; 

or according to ASTM D 2321. 

E. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according 


F. Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose bell-and-spigot 

joints. 

G. Join perforated clay pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 425. 

H. Join perforated concrete pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 443 

(ASTM C 443M). 

I. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special 

couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials 

and dimensions of both pipes. 


A. Cleanouts for Landscaping Subdrainage: 

1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at 

changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. 

2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping 

branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a 

cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) in depth. 


SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 10

Set top of cleanout flush with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in 

nonvehicular-traffic areas. 

3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch 

fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-inplace 

concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top 

of cleanout plug 1 inch (25 mm) above grade. 

B. Cleanouts for Underslab Subdrainage: 

1. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at 

beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in 

direction of flow in piping. 

2. Use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser 

extensions to cleanout flush with top of slab. 

3.9 CONNECTIONS 

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid-wall-piping storm drainage 

system. 

C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation and underslab subdrainage to stormwater 

sump pumps. 



installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. 

1. Install PE warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 

2. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground 

structures. 


A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure 

free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat 

test until results are satisfactory. 

3.12 CLEANING 

A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work 

progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place 

plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. 



SUBDRAINAGE 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02010 - 11

! 


! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

!

SECTION 02050 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes requirements for demolition work. 

1. Verify existing utilities to be removed as well as site features to be demolished with 

Architect. 

B. Demolition includes, but is not limited to, the removal of the following items within the demolition 

limit lines: 

1. Bearing and non-bearing masonry and metal framed walls. 

2. Floor finishes. 

3. Ceilings systems. 

4. Cabinets. 

5. Other interior finishes. 

6. Interior doors and windows. 

C. Related Sections 

1. Division 15: Mechanical and plumbing systems and equipment as indicated on drawings, 

including but not limited to fixtures and plumbing in toilet rooms and break room, 

abandoned waste/vent lines, abandoned ductwork and underslab ductwork. 

2. Division 16: Lighting and electrical systems as indicated on the drawings. Existing light 

fixtures may be used for temporary lighting. 

D. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions 

apply to work in this section. 


A. Schedule: Submit proposed methods and operations of demolition to review prior to start of work. 

Include in schedule coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services as 

required. 

B. Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted without approval from the owner and local 

authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor is responsible to obtain all required permits at 

contractor’s expense. 

C. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference 

with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without 

permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or 

obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulation. 

D. Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. Conduct operations to 

prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons. 

1. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, 

settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 


DEMOLITION 02050 - 1

E. Damage: Promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations. 

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when 

authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during 

interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. 

F. Hazardous Materials Removal: 

1. When hazardous materials are encountered, notify the General Contractor immediately. 


Not used. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Demolition 

1. Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable 

methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply 

with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 

a. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions 

such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 

b. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by 

demolition operations, as directed by Architect or governing authorities. Return 

adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 

B. Coordination with New Construction: Coordinate all demolition work with the new work so that 

products, materials and systems are removed in a timely fashion to accommodate the installation 

of new products, materials and systems. 

C. Cutting Concrete: Saw cut concrete slabs with approved saws at lines and levels indicated on 

drawings. 

D. Capping and Abandonment: Cap all abandoned lines and conduits and drains in accordance with 

requirements of Utility Companies having jurisdiction. Remove abandoned lines, unless 

otherwise noted. 

E. Permits: Contractor is required to obtain a Demolition Permit and Utility Disconnection Permits 

from the City and utility companies. 

1. Record on Record Document location and extent of all capped and abandoned lines 

below grade. 

3.2 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: remove from site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition 

operations and dispose in a legal manner. 

3.3 BACKFILL 



A. Excavated areas associated with the removal of all substructures should be backfilled with a wellgraded 

granular material having a maximum size of 2 inches and not more than 15 percent 

passing a #200 sieve. All earth materials placed in excavated areas should be placed in 

maximum eight inch loose lifts and densified to an in-place unit weight equal to 95% of the 

Maximum Laboratory Density as determined by ASTM D 1557-78. 

1. Refer to Division 2 Section “Earth Moving” for placement and compaction requirements. 






SECTION 02270 EROSION CONTROL 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section covers the work required for erosion control during construction. Any local or 

State Agency requirements will be considered part of these specifications. 

B. Obtain the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit for stormwater 

discharge associated with construction activity. 

C. Obtain a UPDES Storm Water General Permit for Construction Activities (Permit 

#UTR100000) or an alternate individual permit. Applications are available online at 

http://www.waterquality.utah.gov/updes/stormwater.htm. 


2.1 SILT FENCE 

A. Silt fence shall be a woven fabric that meets the following criteria: 

2.2 STRAW BALES 

Property Unit Test Method Values 

Grab Strength lbs ASTMD-4632 90 min 

Grab Elongation % ASTMD-4632 40 max 

Water Flow Rate gal/min/ft 2 ASTMD-4491 15 min 

Ultraviolet Stability% ASTMD-4355 70% min 

A. Straw Bales shall be clean free of dirt, hay, grass or weeds. They shall be bound with twine 

or wire. Bales when placed shall be dry and capable of passing water 

B. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" x 4 feet, hardwood or 4 feet, #4 rebar 


A. Silt fence and/or Bales shall be placed in accordance with plans and details. The placement 

of silt fence and/or bales shall consider drainage paths and intercept drainage prior to leaving 

the site or entering a storm sewer system. Removal of silt and replacement of silt fence 

and/or bales shall be on going through the duration of the project to maintain an effective silt 

removing barrier. 

B. Sediment Basin and/or sinks shall be constructed to dimensions shown on the plans. The 

basins and/or sinks shall be cleaned as required to maintain specified size and depth. 

C. All temporary grading of drainage channels, slopes or fills shall be in accordance with Section 

02003 Earth Moving. 


SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLASSROOM ADDITION March 2, 2009 

EROSION CONTROL 02270 - 1

! 


! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

!

SECTION 02608 –SANITARY SEWERAGE PIPING 




Conditions and Division 1 Summary of Work, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with the 



2. Cleanouts. 

3. Drains. 

4. Precast concrete manholes. 

5. Cast in place manhole bases over existing pipes. 

6. Sewerage Pipes. 


A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 


A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Sewer-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water. Pipe joints 

shall be at least water tight under specified head, unless otherwise indicated. 




2. Cleanout materials. 

3. Pipes. 


1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. Include 

design calculations, and concrete design-mix report for cast-in-place manholes. 


trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial 

relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures. 


SANITARY SEWEAGE PIPING 

MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 1

D. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less 

than 1 inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate 

manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing 

system piping. 

E. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Do not store plastic pipe and fittings in direct sunlight. 


C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities 

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after 

arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of 

proposed interruption of service. Coordinate interruptions during weekly meetings and at 

pre-construction meeting. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's, Construction Manager's, 

and Owner's written permission. 

3. If shutdown will affect city streets, other city utilities, or city sewer line, do not proceed 

without approval from city. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 

product selection: 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include local pre-cast 

manufacturers but are subject to approval of the engineer and architect. 


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. 

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 2

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. 

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 

2.4 DUCTILE-IRON PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Pipe: AWWA C151, for push-on joints. 

B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints. 

C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints. 

D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150 for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, 

elastomeric seals. 

1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for 

gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 

2. Fittings NPS 10 and Larger: Ductile-iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, 

for push-on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets. 

B. PVC Water-Service Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80 pipe, with plain ends for 

solvent-cemented joints with ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80, socket-type fittings. 

C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-andspigot 

ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 

D. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 and Larger: ASTM F 679, T 2 wall thickness, with belland-spigot 

ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 

E. PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794 pipe, with bell-and-spigot ends; 

ASTM D 3034 fittings, with bell ends; and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 

2.6 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS 

A. Use non-pressure type couplings only when pipes can not be connected together with standard 

fittings and typical pipe connections such as bell and spigot. If possible, file the end on existing 

pipes to create spigot type connections to match existing pipe ends for connection to a new bell 

for an extension of the pipe. 

B. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining 

underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and 


C. Sleeve Materials: 

1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber. 

2. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 

3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 3

4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe 


D. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and 


E. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, 

corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening 


F. Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell 

of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 

2.7 PRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS 

A. Reducing or transition, metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining 

underground pressure piping. Include 150-psig minimum pressure rating and ends of same 

sizes as piping to be joined. For pressure pipe, use these couplers when pipes can not be 

extended using existing pipe connections such as bell and spigots. 

B. Tubular-Sleeve Couplings: AWWA C219, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt 

fasteners. 

1. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 

2. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 

3. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material. 

C. Split-Sleeve Couplings: With split sleeve with sealing pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, 

and bolt fasteners. 

1. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 

2. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating. 

3. Gasket Material: O-rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material. 

2.8 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS 

A. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and 

mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed balljoint 

sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250-psig minimum working 

pressure and for offset and expansion indicated. 

B. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with ball joint, flexing section, 

gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating 

for 250-psig minimum working pressure and for up to 15 degrees of deflection. 

C. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: Three-piece assembly of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and 

restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or 

AWWA C153. Include rating for 250-psig minimum working pressure and for expansion 

indicated. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 4

2.9 CLEANOUTS 

A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and 

round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot 

connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 

1. Top-Loading Classification(s): Light, Medium, Heavy, and Extra-heavy duty depending 

on location and expected driving load on cleanout. 

2. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe 

and fittings. 

B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to 

cleanout of same material as sewer piping. Place in grey iron housing with clamping device and 

round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. 

2.10 MANHOLES 

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth 

indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 

1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated and as needed for pipe sizes. 

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, 

as required to prevent flotation. 

3. Base Section: 9-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for 

walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral 

floor. 

4. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 



6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 

7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe 

connection. 

8. Steps: Not used. 



manufacturer. 

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter 

of manhole frame and cover. 

11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch- 

minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with 

lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." 

a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile or ASTM A 48, Class 35 gray iron, 

unless otherwise indicated and to match existing manhole frames and covers. 


paint; 15-mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes Base: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom according to 

ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, 

dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 

1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation. 

2. Excavate around existing pipe where manhole is to be placed. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 5

3. Place new pipe stub at line and grade and stubbed into new manhole location with pipe 

extending towards existing pipes. 

4. Place CMU blocks or other approved support adjacent to pipes to support new barrel 

section. 

5. Set first barrel section on CMU blocks and verify that barrel section is level in all 

directions and is not sitting on pipes. 

6. Make sure that hole is deep enough that the depth of concrete will be 9-inches below 

existing and new pipes. 

7. Place concrete around barrel section and inside barrel section so that the existing and 

new pipes are at least 50% covered with concrete. 

8. Hand form trough as needed. 

9. Let concrete cure and break out of pipes for trough. Grout all troughs smooth and even 

with pipes. 

10. Stack remaining barrel sections and add cone, ring and cover etc. as indicated for 

precast manhole. 

2.11 CONCRETE 






B. Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 


2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. 

C. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 

maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 


2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. 


3.1 EARTHWORK 

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." 


A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may 

be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure 

sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Flexible or rigid couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 6

. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible or rigid couplings for pipes with 

different OD. 

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space 

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 

2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints. 

B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe 

fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, 


C. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size 

range: 

1. PVC sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 

2. Ductile-iron pressure pipe, ductile-iron standard or compact fittings, gaskets, and 


3. PVC pressure, PVC pressure fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 

D. Force-Main Pressure Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range: 

1. PVC Schedule 80, water-service pipe; PVC Schedule 80, water-service-pipe fittings; and 

solvent-cemented joints. 

2. Ductile-iron pressure pipe; ductile-iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and 


3. PVC pressure pipe, PVC pressure fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 



arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping 

layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. 

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken 

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, 

and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, 

and other installation requirements. 

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch 

connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. 

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of 


E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, 


F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at slope indicated. 

2. Install piping with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction for pressure 

pipe. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint 


3. Install piping with cover indicated. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 7

4. Notify engineer of clearance problems that would result in changes to grade and 

alignment. 

5. Install ductile-iron culvert piping according to ASTM A 716. 

6. Install ductile-iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 

7. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 

8. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 

G. Install force-main pressure piping according to the following: 




2. Install piping with line and grade as indicated or below frost line if not indicated. 




ASTM F 1668. 



A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section “PIPING, VALVES, GATES, AND 

SPECIALTIES." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's 


B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 

1. Join ductile-iron culvert piping according to AWWA C600 for push-on joints. 

2. Join ductile-iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 

3. Join PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for solventcement 

joints. 

4. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomericseal 

joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric gasket joints. 

5. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal 

joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 

6. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible or rigid couplings. 

C. Join force-main pressure piping according to the following: 


joints. 


joints. 



D. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings. 


A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use same pipe type 

as sewer line that the cleanout is connected to. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of 

flow in sewer pipe. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 8

1. Use light-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 

2. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. 

3. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 

4. Use extra-heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads areas. 

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 12 inches around 

outside of cover. At contractors option, a square block can be used that is at least 12-inches 

wider that the cover. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade. 

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 

3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. 

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections according to ASTM C 891. 

C. Construct cast-in-place manhole bases as indicated. 

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. 

Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. 

3.8 CONNECTIONS 

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary sewer system. 

B. Connect force-main pressure piping to building's force mains where indicated. 

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove 

section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye 

fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day 

compressive strength of 3000 psi. 

2. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from 

entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that 

may accumulate. 

3.9 CLOSING ABANDONED SEWER DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 




1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch-thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 





MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 9

B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required 

and use one procedure below: 

1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 

2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to 

within 12 inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with 

concrete. 

C. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." 



installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground 

structures. 

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 

2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground 

structures. 


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. 

Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 

2. Defects requiring correction include the following: 

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. 

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder 

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. 

c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. 

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. 

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 

f. Test for infiltration or exfiltration between manholes as follows: 

1) Clean section of sewer line of dirt. Debris, gravel, rocks and other items. 

2) Fill section between manholes with water. Allow water to sit in pipe for not 

less than 3-hours to acclimate to surrounding earth temperature. 

3) Use a water pump to pressurize the sewer pipe section to not less than 5 psi 

and not more than 10 psi. Record starting pressure. 

4) Turn off water pressure and wait 20 minutes. 

5) Refill pipe to same pressure as in step 3 and measure volume required to fill 

pipe to same pressure. 

6) Pipe section passes test if volume required to refill pipe is less than !-gallon 

per 400 feet of 8-inch pipe. Prorate the allowable seepage larger or smaller 

pipes and for shorter or longer distances. 

7) Find and fix leaks in any section that fails to pass test. Fix any visible leaks 

found even if section of pipe passes test. 

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are 

within allowances specified. 

4. Re-inspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. 



MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 10

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or 

repaired, for leaks and defects. 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 

2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' 

advance notice. 

4. Submit separate report for each test. 

C. Test pressure piping to same standard as water pipes in section 02008. 

1. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 

2. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within 

allowances specified. 

3.12 CLEANING 

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. 




MARCH 2, 2009 

02608 - 11

! 


! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

!

SECTION 02630 PIPING, VALVES, GATES, AND SPECIALTIES 


A. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Plans. If the Contractor desires to change any of 

the piping layouts shown on the Plans, he shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, his detailed 

proposed layouts. 

PART 2 EXPOSED PIPING 

1. Any pipe which does not meet specifications or has been rejected shall be removed 

from the jobsite and disposed of by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner. 

2. Where new fittings are to be cut into or attached to existing piping or where 

connections are to be made to existing piping, the Contractor shall furnish and install the 

necessary sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, fittings, etc. needed to accomplish the 

cutting-in or connections, whether specifically indicated on the Plans or not. 

3. Lines under low head shall be laid flat or with a continuous grade so that there will be 

no air traps or humps in them, except at the ends where means for venting shall be 

provided. 

4. In no case shall copper or copper alloy pipe or fittings carrying water or water based 

solutions or slurries be attached to cast iron or steel pipe except by means of a dielectric 

coupling expressly made for this purpose and service. 

5. All pipe which will operate under pressure shall be properly blocked at all fittings where 

the pipeline changes direction, changes size, or ends, using concrete thrust blocks in 

trenches and suitable anchors in structures. Concrete thrust blocks shall be sized so as 

to give bearing against undisturbed vertical earth banks sufficient to absorb the thrust 

from line pressure, allowing an earth bearing of 200 pounds per square foot per foot of 

depth below natural grade to a maximum of 1,000 pounds per square foot. (Earth bearing 

value may be increased, if substantiated by soils analysis.) The line pressure shall be the 

product of the nominal cross sectional area of the pipe and the test pressures as 

specified for each type of pipe. The concrete shall be placed, unless specifically 

indicated otherwise on the Plans, so that the pipe joints and fittings will be accessible. 

1. Where not detailed, exposed pipe shall be installed in straight runs parallel to the axes 

of the structures. Pipe runs shall be horizontal and vertical except that gravity drain lines 

shall be pitched down in the direction of flow not less than 1/8 inch per foot. 

2. No exposed piping shall be erected until all equipment to which the pipe is to be 

attached has been installed and it can be determined where piping and fittings shall be 

located to make a neat efficient arrangement. 

3. The Plans shall be taken as diagrammatic for piping that is not shown in detail. Sizes 

of piping and their locations are indicated, but it is not intended to show every offset and 

fitting nor every structural difficulty that will be encountered during the installation of the 

work. 

4. The alignment of pipes shall be varied from that indicated on the Plans, without extra 

expense to the Owner where necessary to avoid structural or mechanical difficulties or to 

avoid the work of any other trades. The Contractor shall furnish such parts and pieces as 

may be necessary to provide a complete and operable system. 

SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLASSROOM ADDITION 02630 - 1 

PIPING, VALVE, GATES AND SPECIALTIES MARCH 2, 2009

PART 3 BURIED PIPING 

5. Pipework shall be suspended and supported in such manner as to prevent sagging or 

overstressing of pipe and connections and, furthermore, shall be supported so that no 

item of the piping system will transfer any load or stress to any equipment. 

6. Air bleeder cocks shall be installed at all high points in pipe systems and pump cases 

and shall be of the size indicated on the Plans or minimum of 1 inch. Air bleeder cocks 

shall be 1- or 2-inch plug valves in accordance with these Specifications. 

7. Piping shall be made up with a sufficient number of unions or flanged joints to permit 

ready breaking of lines as necessary for inspection and maintenance, in addition to such 

joints as are definitely shown on the Plans. 

8. Pipe and fittings shall be assembled so there will be no distortion or springing of the 

pipelines. Flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other connections shall come together 

at the proper orientation. The fit shall not be made by springing any piping nor shall 

orientation alignment be corrected by taking up on any flange bolts. Flange bolts, union 

halves, flexible connectors, etc. shall slip freely into place. If the proper fit is not 

obtained, the piping shall be altered to fit. 

A. All pipelines laid in open trenches shall conform to applicable parts of DIVISION 2 - Sitework. 

1. Where not otherwise indicated on the Plans, all buried lines shall be laid with a 

minimum of a 4-foot cover without air traps or humps. Where two lines of similar service 

run parallel to each other, they may be laid in the same trench as close together as 

possible and still provide adequate room for jointing. 

2. The laying of the pipe shall be in finished trenches free from water or debris and shall 

be commenced at the lowest point. Pipe shall be laid on an unyielding foundation with 

uniform bearing under the full length of the barrel. If the pipe bears top or bottom 

markings, it shall be placed with the markings in the proper position. All adjustments to 

line and grade shall be made by scraping away or filling in under the pipe. If the joints 

are the type which requires external grouting, banding, or pointing, space shall be 

provided under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid of such shape 

and size as to permit sufficient room for the grouting, banding, or pointing of the joints. 

3. Before excavation is started for any run of underground piping, the Contractor shall 

locate and expose all existing structures, piping, conduit, etc., which intersect the line of 

the piping, to avoid possible damage to these during excavation operations and so that it 

may be determined if there will be any conflicts in location. In the event of conflicts in 

location or grade or both, between new piping and existing piping, the Contractor shall 

make adjustments in location or grade of new piping as directed by the Engineer. These 

adjustments, including additional fittings, shall be made at no additional cost to the 

Owner. 

4. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified, where pipe of any type is to be 

encased in concrete, the encasement shall provide a minimum of 6 inches of concrete 

completely around the pipe, shall fill the bottom of the trench from bank to bank, if not 

formed, and shall be reinforced with four continuous longitudinal reinforcing bars, one in 

each corner of the encasement. Concrete shall be Class C. The length of encasement 

shown on the Plans, or specified, shall be the minimum length, and the encasement shall 

end at each end at a joint in the pipe. Reinforcing bars shall be No. 4 for encasement of 

pipe 36 inches and smaller and No. 6 for encasement of pipe larger than 36 inches. 

5. Where buried cast iron, ductile iron, reinforced concrete, vitrified clay, or similar rigid 

pipe enters a structure, it shall be by means of a coupling or wall piece cast into the wall, 



having a mechanical push-on, or similar flexible joint as specified or shown on the Plans 

at the outside face of the wall. An additional similar joint shall be installed in the line at 

the edge of the structure excavation where the pipe trench leaves undisturbed ground. 

For steel pipe a single joint may be used located not more than 2 feet from the outside 

face of the wall. 

PART 4 CLEANING AND TESTING 

1. The interior of all pipelines, above or below grade, shall be thoroughly cleaned of all 

adhering matter and other debris to the approval of the Engineer. No testing of any 

pipeline shall be started until the cleaning is complete and approved. 

2. Special precautions required in the cleaning of a particular pipeline shall be as stated 

in the various parts of this Division of these Specifications. 

3. All pipelines, above or below grade, shall be tested to the pressures indicated in the 

various parts of this Division of these Specifications. Any piping for which test pressure is 

not specified shall be tested under a pressure of 25 psi above the operating head or as 

directed by the Engineer. 

4. Pipe underground may be tested before backfilling unless otherwise specified, and 

pipes to be encased in concrete or under concrete slabs shall be tested before the 

encasement or slabs are poured. 

5. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary personnel, supplies, equipment, bulkheads, 

and whatever additional equipment is required to make any and all tests specified and 

shall make any and all repairs, including relaying if necessary, to any and all pipelines 

failing to pass the testing requirements of these Specifications. 

6. The Contractor shall give the Architect a list of the scheduled pipeline tests by noon of 

the day preceding the scheduled test or tests. The Contractor shall notify the Architect by 

written memorandum of his readiness (not just his intention) to test a line or portion of 

line. All bulkheads, thrust blocks, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, etc. shall be 

in place before the Contractor's notification of readiness is given to the Architect. After 

testing, all pipes shall be flushed or blown out and left clean. 

7. In testing with water, the test pressure specified shall be the pressure at the lowest 

point in the piping concerned. In testing with water, the lines shall be examined and any 

visible leaks repaired. In testing with air, the lines shall be examined and tested with 

soap suds and any leaks repaired. Testing shall be repeated until the lines are in 

satisfactory condition. 

8. Despite any previous testing, any leaks developing before the end of the one-year 

guarantee period shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional expense to the 

Owner. 

PART 5 SPECIAL PIPING TESTS 

A. Plumbing piping, natural gas piping, and bottled gas piping shall be tested in accordance with 

local and State Codes and Underwriters' requirements. 

PART 6 GAS AND AIR PIPING TESTS 

A. All gas air lines shall be tested with air at the pressure specified under PIPING TEST 

SCHEDULE. 



PART 7 POTABLE WATER LINES 

1. Water pipelines shall be disinfected, prior to being placed in service, by filling the 

pipeline with a chlorine solution, expelling all air from the pipeline, and retaining the 

solution in the pipeline for 24 hours. The strength of the chlorine solution shall be such 

that at the end of the 24-hour period the solution shall contain a chlorine residual of not 

less than 10 ppm at all points in the pipeline. Disinfection of the pipelines shall conform 

to AWWA C 601 except as modified herein. All details of the procedure shall be subject 

to the approval of the Engineer. 

2. The effectiveness of the disinfection of the water lines shall be demonstrated by 

laboratory examination of samples in accordance with AWWA C 601. Should the initial 

treatment fail to result in a disinfected system, the Contractor shall repeat chlorination of 

the system until satisfactory results are obtained, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 

The Owner will furnish the water required for construction and testing, if additional water 

is required due to testing failures the Contractor shall pay for such additional water. 

PART 8 CONNECTIONS TO IN-SERVICE LINES 

A. Existing pipe to which connections are to be made shall be exposed by the Contractor as 

directed by the Engineer, to permit field changes in line, grade, or fittings, if necessary. 

1. All connections to existing lines shall be constructed according to the Plans and 

Specifications. When shutdown of an in-service line is necessary in order to connect to 

the new lines, a conference between the Contractor's representative, the Architect, and 

operating supervisory personnel shall establish the time and procedures to insure that the 

shutdown will be for the shortest possible time. If necessary, shutdowns may be 

scheduled during other than normal working hours, at no additional cost to the Owner. 

PART 8 CAST IRON AND DUCTILE IRON PIPE 

1. Cast iron pipe specified or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be substituted 

with ductile iron pipe. 

2. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A 21.50 and ANSI A 21.51 

(AWWA C 150 and AWWA C 151). Ductile iron pipe fitted with threaded flanges shall 

conform to ANSI 21.15 (AWWA C 115). 

Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, the minimum acceptable rating shall be Class 350. 

PART 9 GROOVED-END DUCTILE IRON PIPE 

A. GENERAL 

1. Grooved-end pipe with mechanical pipe couplings (victaulic type) and fittings may be 

installed in place of flanged systems at aboveground locations and in approved services 

on this project. Grooved-end pipe shall not be used for systems which may be steamed. 

2. Pipe and fittings shall be cut with a radius groove. Method of grooving shall be in 

accordance with mechanical pipe coupling manufacturer's specifications. Pipe to be 

grooved shall have wall thicknesses not less than the minimum recommended by the 

coupling manufacturer for cut-grooving. Connections to valves and flanged-end pipe 

shall be by grooved-end to flanged pipe adapter flange or flanged adapter nipple. 

Grooved pipe and fitting ends shall be lightly coated with lubricant approved by the 

coupling manufacturer prior to placing gasket. Pipe sizes 4-inch through 18-inch nominal 



diameter shall be Class 54, minimum; pipe sizes 20-inch nominal diameter shall be 

Class 55, minimum; pipe sizes 24-inch in nominal diameter shall be Class 56, minimum. 

Grooved-end pipe shall be supported in accordance with manufacturer's 

recommendations. In addition, at least one support shall be used between any two 

couplings. 

3. The Contractor shall submit a listing of services and locations where he proposes to 

use grooved-end pipe prior to start of installation of any grooved-end piping. This listing 

shall be subject to the Engineer's acceptance, and acceptance in writing by the Engineer 

will be required prior to the delivery of any grooved piping materials to the site of the 

Work. 

4. The Contractor shall submit for review complete information showing fittings, gaskets, 

mechanical pipe couplings, grooving of pipe and pipe lining or coating prior to installation 

of any pipe. All materials proposed for use are subject to Engineer's acceptance. 

5. Mechanical pipe couplings and grooved-end pipe shall be installed in accordance with 

the coupling manufacturer's representative's recommendations. 

PART 10 GROOVED-END DUCTILE IRON PIPE 

A. COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS 

PART 11 JOINTS 

1. Grooved-end ductile iron pipe shall be joined by mechanical pipe couplings. 

Mechanical couplings shall be self-centering and shall engage and lock in place the 

grooved pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Couplings shall be 

fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron in accordance with ASTM A 47, 

Grade 32510. Couplings shall be the flexible grooved type for radius grooved pipe. 

2. Coupling assembly shall be securely held together by two or more steel bolts and nuts 

of heat-treated carbon steel. Nuts and bolts shall be in accordance with ASTM A 183 

and ASTM A 194, Grade 2. 

3. Couplings shall hold in place a composition water-sealing gasket designed so that 

internal water pressure serves to increase the seal's water tightness. Sealing gaskets 

shall be chlorinated butyl in accordance with ASTM D 2000, Grade No. 3BA6l5Al4Bl3 

with special heat-resistance test of 16 hours at 350 degrees F and maximum elongation 

change of minus 30 percent. 

4. All pipe fittings used in connection with mechanical pipe couplings shall be radius 

grooved for grooved-end ductile iron pipe. Radius grooved cast iron fittings shall conform 

to the requirements of ANSI B 16.1. The outside surface of pipe between the groove and 

pipe end must be smooth and free from deep pits or swells and shall provide a leak tight 

surface for the gasket. 

A. Where so indicated or specified, joints shall be made with flexible couplings or with mechanical 

couplings for grooved or shouldered end pipe. Unless otherwise noted, joints that are not buried 

in the ground shall be flanged joints. All other joints shall be mechanical joints, or push-on joints. 

Mechanical joint, or push-on joint pipelines shall have flanges where necessary for valves and 

clean out connections. 

PART 12 FLANGED JOINTS 

A. Flanges may be cast integrally with the pipe, in which case they shall conform to ANSI B 16.1 

as to diameter, thickness, drilling, and other characteristics or they may be screwed on the 



threaded ends of the pipe. Screwed-on flanges shall conform to ANSI B 16.1 as to material, 

diameter, thickness, drilling, and other characteristics, but shall have long hubs threaded specially 

for ductile iron pipe. Pipe shall be Class 53, minimum. Screwed-on flanges shall be attached to 

the pipe by the pipe manufacturer, and after attachment the faces of the flanges and the ends of 

the pipe shall be refaced so that the end of the pipe will be even with the face of the flange and 

both will be perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. Bolt holes on the two flanges on a piece of pipe 

shall be in perfect alignment. Bolts shall conform to ANSI B 16.1 except that flanges 

underground, in concrete pipe valve boxes, or in water shall have cast iron bolts and nuts, 

Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, or Everdur bolts and nuts. 

1. Cast iron bolts and nuts shall be made of material having at least 50,000 psi tensile 

strength. The cast iron bolts used with mechanical joints will be acceptable. 

2. Where cap screws or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be provided with tapped 

holes for such cap screws or stud bolts. 

3. Gaskets shall be ring gaskets suitable for the intended application, manufactured by 

Garlock, Cranite, or equal. 

4. All flange bolts shall be cut and finished to project not more than 1/4 inch beyond 

outside face of nut after joint is assembled. 

PART 13 MECHANICAL JOINTS 

A. Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C 111). Bolts shall be 

Core-10 T-bolts or equal. 

PART 14 PUSH-ON JOINTS 

A. Push-on rubber gasket joints shall be in accordance with ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C 111). 

1. Any product which is used to coat, seal, patch or otherwise attach itself to the interior 

surface of any piping material in such a way as to come into contact with the drinking 

water, shall comply with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61. Pipes 

bearing appropriate markings indicating NSF approval and lubricant containers with NSF 

labels will provide sufficient evidence of compliance with this requirement. 

PART 15 RESTRAINED PUSH-ON JOINTS 

A. Restrained push-on joints shall be designed for working pressures of 350 psi for sizes 4-inch 

through 24-inch and 250 psi for sizes 30-inch through 54-inch. The restraining system shall be 

comprised of ductile iron locking segments inserted through slots in the bell face and providing 

positive axial lock between the bell interior surface and a retainer weldment on the spigot end of 

the pipe. An alternate system shall have positive restraint against joint separation by a retainer 

weldment through a boltless system. 

PART 16 FITTINGS 

A. Except as otherwise provided, fittings for cast iron or ductile iron pipe shall be as specified in 

ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA 110), of the same pressure rating and same joint configuration as the pipe 

with which they are used. 

PART 17 PUSH-ON 

A. Push-on rubber gasket joint fittings shall have bodies as specified above with bells 

dimensioned and arranged to match the push-on joints on the pipe. Mechanical joint fittings may 

be used with push-on rubber gasketed joint pipe. 



PART 18 FLEXIBLE FITTINGS 

A. Flexible fittings applicable to cast iron pipe shall be as specified under the PIPING 

SPECIALTIES section of these Specifications. 

PART 19 LINING AND COATING 

A. Except as otherwise specified, all cast iron and ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be smooth 

cement-lined in accordance with ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C 104). Special attention shall be given to 

the lining of fittings. Lining shall be applied to bare metal. All lining shall extend to the faces of 

flanges, to the end of spigots, or to the shoulder of hubs, as the case may be. 

B. In addition, all cast iron and ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be coated inside and outside with 

bituminous material except that pipe which is to be painted shall not be coated on the outside. 

1. Pipe used in sewage or sludge piping systems shall not be cement-lined. 

PART 20 HANDLING OF PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Pipe and fittings shall be carefully handled during loading, unloading, and installation. No pipe 

shall be dropped from cars or trucks to the ground. All pipe shall be carefully lowered to the 

ground by mechanical means. In shipping, pipe and fittings shall be blocked in such manner as 

to prevent damage to castings or cement lining. Any broken or chipped lining shall be carefully 

patched to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where it is impossible to repair broken or damaged 

lining in pipe because of its size, the pipe shall be rejected as unfit for use unless facilities are 

provided for relining pipe in accordance with these Specifications. Pipe shall not be dropped or 

pounded to fit grade. 

B. All mechanical joint or bell and spigot pipe shall be laid with 1/8-inch space between the spigot 

and shoulder of the pocket. 

PART 21 CORROSION PROTECTION 

A. Ductile iron pipe underground shall be protected against external corrosion by loose 

polyethylene sleeves in accordance with AWWA C 105. Optional method “A” per C105 shall be 

used as follows: 

1. Cut a section of polyethylene tube approximately two feet longer than the pipe section. 

Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, or other material that might have accumulated 

on the pipe surface during storage. Slip the polyethylene tube around the pipe, starting 

at the spigot end. Bunch the tube accordion-fashion on the end of the pipe. Pull back 

the overhanging end of the tube until it clears the pipe end. 

2. Dig a shallow bell hole in the trench bottom at the joint location to facilitate installation 

of the polyethylene tube. Lower the pipe into the trench and make up the pipe joint with 

the preceding section of pipe. 

3. Move the cable to the bell end of the pipe and lift the pipe slightly to provide enough 

clearance to easily slide the tube. Spread the tube over the entire barrel of the pipe. 

Note: Make sure that no dirt or other bedding material becomes trapped between the 

wrap and the pipe. 

4.Make the overlap of the polyethylene tube by pulling back the bunched polyethylene 

from the preceding length of pipe and securing it in place using tape, plastic tie straps, or 



PART 22 TESTING 

any other material capable of holding the polyethylene encasement snugly against the 

pipe. 

5. Overlap the secured tube end with the tube end of the new pipe section. Secure the 

new tube end in place. 

6. Take up slack in the tube along the barrel of the pipe to make a snug, bot not tight, fit. 

Fold excess polyethylene back over the top of the pipe. 

7. Secure the fold at several locations along the pipe barrel (approximately every three 

feet.) 

8. Repair all small rips, tears, or other tube damage with adhesive tape. If the 

polyethylene is badly damaged, repair the damaged area with a sheet of polyethylene 

and seal the edges of the repair with adhesive tape. 

9. Carefully backfill the pipe according to the AWWA C600 standard for backfill 

procedure. To prevent damage during backfilling, allow adequate slack in the tube at the 

joint. Backfill should be free of cinders, rocks, boulders, nails, sticks, or other materials 

that might damage the polyethylene. Avoid damaging the polyethylene when using 

tamping devices. 

A. All pipelines for which testing is not otherwise specified shall be tested for water tightness by 

subjecting each section to Hydrostatic Pressure and Leakage Tests in accordance with applicable 

provisions of AWWA C 600, except as modified below. The Contractor shall provide all vents, 

piping, plugs, bulkheads, valves, bracing, blocking, pump, measuring device, and all other 

equipment necessary for making the tests. The Owner will furnish the water required for the first 

test, if more than one test is required then the Contractor shall pay for the water required to make 

the additional tests. Each section of a new line between sectionalizing valves or between the last 

sectionalizing valve and the end of the project shall be tested separately as required in 

AWWA C 600, and/or as modified in these Specifications, except that any such section less than 

500 feet in length may be tested with the adjacent section, if both sections of line have the same 

pipe class rating. No section greater than !-mile in total pipe length shall be tested without 

special written permission of the Engineer. The duration of each test shall be at least 2 hours. 

B. If two or more sections are tested together, the total leakage shall not exceed that allowable for 

the shortest section. 

PART 23 PRESSURE TEST 

A. All pipelines shall be tested by subjecting each section to a pressure, measured at the lowest 

end of the section, of at least 125 percent of the class rating or design pressure of pipe under 

test. 

1. The test may be made before or after backfilling. However, if mechanical compaction 

is to be used in the backfilling operations as spelled out in AWWA C 600, the test shall 

not be made until the backfilling is completed and compacted. All connections, blowoffs, 

hydrants, and valves shall be tested with the main as far as is practicable. 

2. The test section shall be slowly filled with potable water, and all air shall be vented 

from the line. The rate of filling shall be as determined by the Engineer, with at least 

24-hour notice required before tests are scheduled. While the test section is under test 

pressure, a visual inspection for leaks shall be made along the pipeline, and all visible 



PART 24 LEAKAGE TEST 

leaks repaired. The pressure test shall not begin until the pipe has been filled with water 

for at least 24 hours to allow for absorption. 

A. Leakage test shall be made after pressure test has been satisfactorily completed and all 

backfilling and compaction is completed to top of trench. The Contractor shall furnish the 

necessary apparatus, and assistance to conduct the test. 

PART 25 STEEL PIPE 

1. To pass the leakage test, the leakage from the pipeline shall not exceed the leakage 

allowed by AWWA C600 Section 4 Hydrostatic Testing. 

2. Should the test on any section of the pipeline show leakage greater than specified 

above, the Contractor shall locate and repair the defective pipe, fittings, or joint until the 

leakage is within the specified allowance of two-hour duration. All repairs and retests, if 

required, shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 

3. Connections to the existing pipelines or existing valves shall not be made until after 

that section of the new construction has satisfactorily passed the hydrostatic tests. 

A. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans, steel pipe and fittings shall be as 

follows. 

1. Steel pipe 12 inches and smaller in nominal diameter shall be seamless or straight 

seam electric resistance welded pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 53 or 

ASTM A 120. Pipe 6 inches and smaller shall be Schedule 40. Pipe over 6 inches but 

not larger than 12 inches shall be no lighter than Schedule 20. 

2. Steel pipe over 12 inches in nominal diameter shall be in accordance with 

AWWA C 200, except that butt strap, riveted, or swaged joints may not be used. Pipe 

over 12 inches in diameter shall have a wall thickness of not less than 1/4-inch to 72-inch 

diameter and 5/16-inch over 72-inch diameter, unless indicated otherwise on the Plans. 

All pipe shall be black unless indicated otherwise on the Plans or specified to be 

galvanized. If galvanized, it shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 120. The 

working stress for any of the steels specified as acceptable for fabrication of pipe shall 

not exceed 50 percent of the yield point of the steel used. 

3. Wherever Dresser or Victaulic couplings are to be used on pipe 24 inches in diameter, 

or over, having a wall thickness of less than ! inch, stub ends not less than 6 inches long 

and ! inch in thickness shall be provided for insertion into the couplings. 

4. Steel pipe for liquid or gaseous dry chlorine shall be ASTM A 106, Grade A, 

Schedule 80, assembled with 300 psi malleable iron fittings and ammonia type flanges. 

5. Steel pipe and fittings shall be designed in accordance with AWWA Manual M11. 

PART 26 GROOVED-END STEEL PIPE 

A. GENERAL 

1. Grooved-end pipe with mechanical pipe couplings (Victaulic type) and fittings may be 

installed in place of flanged systems at above locations and in approved services on this 

project. Grooved-end pipe shall not be used underground or underwater unless indicated 

otherwise on the Plans. 



2. Pipe and fittings shall be cut grooved. Method of grooving shall be in accordance with 

mechanical pipe coupling manufacturer's specifications. Pipe to be grooved shall have 

wall thicknesses not less than the minimum recommended by the coupling manufacturer 

for cut-grooving. Connections to valves and flanged-end pipe shall be by grooved-end to 

flanged pipe adapter flange or flanged adapter nipple. Grooved pipe and fitting ends 

shall be lightly coated with lubricant approved by the coupling manufacturer prior to 

placing gasket. 

3. Grooved-end pipe shall be supported in accordance with manufacturer's 

recommendations. In addition, at least one support shall be used between any two 

couplings. 

4. The Contractor shall submit for review complete information showing fittings, gaskets, 

mechanical pipe couplings, grooving of pipe and pipe lining or coating prior to installation 

of any pipe. All materials proposed for use are subject to the Engineer's approval. 

5. Mechanical pipe couplings and grooved-end pipe shall be installed in accordance with 

the coupling manufacturer's representative's recommendations. 

PART 27 GROOVED-END STEEL PIPE 

A. COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS 


1. Steel pipe may be grooved-end and joined by mechanical pipe couplings. Mechanical 

couplings shall be self-centering and shall engage and lock in place the grooved pipe and 

pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Coupling housing clamps shall be 

fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings, in accordance with ASTM A 47, 

Grade 32510. Coupling assembly shall be securely held together by two or more steel 

bolts and nuts of heat-treated carbon steel. Nuts and bolts shall be in accordance with 

ASTM A 183 and A 194, Grade 2. 

2. Couplings shall hold in place a composition water-sealing gasket designed so that 

internal water pressure serves to increase the seal's water tightness. 

3. Gaskets for use with cement lined steel pipe shall be captured between the ends of the 

pipe to protect the exposed metal from corrosion. Gaskets shall be Buna-N in 

accordance with ASTM D 2000, Grade No. 4AA615A13B13. 

4. All pipe fittings used in connection with pipe couplings shall be radius grooved. Pipe 

fittings shall be malleable iron castings in accordance with ASTM A 47, Grade II, or 

ductile iron Grade 60-45-10 in accordance with ASTM A 536. 

A. Steel pipe joints shall be screwed, welded, flanged, or flexible joints as is appropriate to the 

pipe size and application, except that galvanized pipe shall not be welded. Welding shall be in 

accordance with AWWA C 206. 

B. Piping shall be made up with a sufficient number of unions, flexible couplings, or flanged joints 

to permit ready breaking of lines for maintenance in addition to any unions or flanges indicated on 

the Plans. The Engineer may direct the location of any unions, flexible couplings, or flanged 

joints, in addition to those indicated on the Plans, at his discretion. 



1. Unions shall be railroad type with bronze-to-iron seat, galvanized if used with 

galvanized pipe. Flanged joints may be used instead of unions. 

C. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans, pipe joints shall be of the type specified 

below. 

PART 29FITTINGS 

1. Pipe smaller than 2 inches shall have screwed joints or flexible couplings. Pipe 

2 inches through 4 inches shall have screwed, flanged, or welded joints, or flexible 

couplings. Pipe larger than 4 inches shall have flanged or welded joints or flexible 

couplings. 

2. Threading shall be done with clean, sharp dies. Pipe threads carelessly made, wavy, 

rough, or chewed shall be rejected. All screwed joints shall be tightly and neatly made up 

with an application of Teflon tape or approved paste compound applied to the male 

threads only, except that liquid and dry chlorine lines and liquid LPG lines shall be made 

up with litharge and glycerine. 

3. Flanges shall come together at the proper orientation with no air gaps between the 

flanges after the gaskets are in place. The fit shall not be made by springing any piping, 

nor shall the orientation alignment be corrected by taking up on any flange bolts. Flange 

bolts shall slip freely into place with absolutely no binding. If the proper fit is not obtained, 

the piping shall be altered. Machined flanges or tapered fillers shall be used to 

accomplish changes in grade or to slope lines for drainage. 

4. All welded joints shall be electric welded. Welding shall be in accordance with 

AWWA C 206. Qualification of welders shall be as covered in AWWA C 206. All testing 

of welders shall be at the Contractor's expense, including cost of test nipples, welding 

rod, and equipment. 

1. Fittings used with screwed pipe shall be 150 pounds malleable iron banded screwed 

fittings in accordance with ANSI B 16.3, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 if 

used with galvanized pipe, or cast iron drainage screwed fittings in accordance with 

ANSI B 16.12, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 if used with galvanized pipe. 

Drainage fittings shall be used with drain lines, and other lines which are required to be 

graded. 

2. Flanged fittings 12 inches and smaller shall be 125 pounds cast iron flanged fittings in 

accordance with ANSI B 16.1 or 150 pounds steel flanged fittings in accordance with 

ANSI B 16.5. Flanged fittings for pipe larger than 12-inch may be as above or may be 

fabricated from sections of steel pipe in accordance with AWWA C 208, with flanges as 

specified in AWWA C 207. 

3. Companion flanges 4 inches and smaller may be 125 pounds screwed cast iron 

companion flanges in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 or 150-pound slip-on or welding neck 

steel flanges in accordance with ANSI B 16.5, except that ammonia type flanges shall be 

used on chlorine liquid or gas piping. Companion flanges for pipe from 4 inches to and 

including 12 inches shall be slip-on or welding neck flanges in accordance with 

ANSI B 16.5. 

4. Companion flanges for pipe larger than 12 inches may be as above or may be steel 

plate or raised hub flanges in accordance with AWWA C 207. 

5. Slip-on flanges shall be attached to pipe by two fillet welds, in accordance with 

AWWA C 207. Welding neck flanges shall be secured by full penetration butt welds 



PART 30 LINING 

without backing rings. After welding in place, the faces of flanges shall be perpendicular 

to the axis of the pipe, or, in the case of fittings, at the proper angle to each other, and 

bolt holes shall be in proper alignment. Flanges shall be shop welded to pipe or fittings 

before lining is applied. 

6. Machined flanges or tapered fillers shall be used to accomplish changes in grade, or to 

slope lines for drainage. 

7. Flange bolts shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.1, except that flanges underground 

or in water shall have Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, or Everdur bolts and nuts. 

8. All flange bolts shall be cut and finished to project not more than 1/4 inch beyond 

outside face of nut after joint is assembled. Where cap screws or stud bolts are required, 

flanges shall be provided with tapped holes for such cap screws or stud bolts. 

9. Gaskets shall be ring gaskets of 1/16-inch Cranite, Garlock, or equal. 

10.Welding fittings for pipe 8 inches and smaller in size shall be butt-welding fittings in 

accordance with ANSI B 16.9, standard wall or standard weight. Welding fittings for pipe 

larger than 8 inches shall be butt-welding fittings in accordance with ANSI B 16.9, or may 

be made up out of sections of pipe welded together, except where smooth bends are 

indicated in air lines. 

11. Fittings made up of sections of pipe welded together shall be made of pipe of at least 

the same wall thickness as the pipe with which used, and bends shall be miter bends, 

fabricated in accordance with AWWA C 208 and as supplemented by AWWA Manual 

No. Mll. Welding of these made-up fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C 206. 

12. Outlets and four branch fittings shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with 

AWWA Manual No. M11. 

A. Except as otherwise provided, lining in steel pipe shall be as follows. 

PART 31 PIPE COATING 

1. CEMENT MORTAR LINING 

a. Steel pipe specified or shown on the Plans to be cement mortar lined may be 

shop lined in accordance with AWWA C 205, or lined after installation by means 

of a pipe lining machine. If a lining machine is used, it must be approved by the 

Engineer and be capable of applying a lining comparable in density and 

smoothness and of the same thickness as the above specified shop applied 

lining. In-place lining shall conform to applicable portions of AWWA C 602. 

A. Aboveground steel pipe shall be painted as provided in DIVISION 9 of these Specifications. 

B. Except as otherwise provided, all buried steel pipe shall be protected by the following coating 

systems applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 

1. Pipe coating shall extend 6 inches above finish grade or finish floor, and shall be neatly 

terminated. 



2. Before coating, pipe surface shall be free of dust, dirt, loose rust, moisture, welding 

residue, oil, and grease. Surface shall then be power tool cleaned or commercial blast 

cleaned to conform to SSPC Specification SP-3 or SP-6. 

PART 32 CEMENT MORTAR COATING 

A. Steel pipe specified or shown to be cement mortar coated shall be coated in accordance with 

AWWA C 205 modified as follows: 

1. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type II, low alkali. 

2. Sand shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C 205 except that the total 

percentage of all deleterious material shall not exceed 3 percent. 

PART 33 COPPER PIPE AND TUBING 

A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on the Plans, copper pipe and tubing shall be as 

follows: copper pipe for the conveyance of water or aqueous solutions shall conform to the 

requirements of ASTM B 88 as detailed below. 

PART 34 ASTM B 88 TUBING 

1. Copper lines shall be neatly supported as shown on the Plans or at such intervals as to 

prevent sagging. Tube shall be cut square with hacksaw or disc cutter and shall be 

reamed full size and burrs removed. If necessary, a sizing tool shall be used to correct 

any distortion. The outside surface of the end of the pipe and the inside surface of solder 

fittings shall be cleaned with steel wool until the metal is bright. Soldering flux shall be 

applied to the cleaned surfaces of pipe and fittings in a thin, uniform, complete coating. 

After the pipe has been inserted in the fitting as far as it will go, the fitting shall be twisted 

on the pipe to help spread the flux uniformly. The fitting shall be heated until it reaches 

the correct temperature to melt the solder. The flame shall then be removed and the 

solder applied to the edge of the fitting or to the solder hole in the fitting, if there is one, 

and the joint completely filled with solder. When the solder has congealed to a plastic 

state, the excess metal shall be removed with a cloth or brush. Joints shall not be 

quenched after soldering. 

2. All copper lines shall be cleaned with high-pressure air after first disconnecting piping 

at instruments, filters, pressure reducers, valve operators, and other special devices. 

3. All copper lines shall be tested in the same manner as the piping system to which they 

connect, except that instrument air lines may be tested by use of a halide torch or other 

device after charging the lines with Freon. 

1. All exposed copper pipe or tubing conforming to ASTM B 88 shall be Type L harddrawn, 

rigid, seamless copper water tubing. 

2. Copper tubing buried in the ground or in plastic conduit shall conform to the same 

specification but shall be Type K soft-annealed. 

3. Fittings shall be Hoke "Gyrolok," Crawford Fitting Company "Swagelok," or equal, or 

solder type forged or wrought copper. Solder shall be ASTM B 32, Alloy Grade 5A. 



4. Copper pipe connected to ferrous pipe or valves, or other non-copper items shall be 

connected by means of dielectric insulating unions or fittings as manufactured by the 

Patrol Valve Company, Mueller Company, or equal. 

5. When making connections to meters or other devices having iron pipe size threaded 

fittings, special thread to tube adapters shall be used. Such adapters shall be Crawford 

Fitting Company "Swagelok," Hoke "Gyrolok," or equal. 

PART 35 PLASTIC PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS 

A. Except as otherwise specified herein, or as called for on the Plans, plastic pipe, tubing, and 

fittings shall be as follows. 

1. Extruding and molding material shall be virgin material containing no scrap, re-grind, or 

rework material except that, where permitted in the referenced standard specifications, 

clean rework material generated from the manufacturer's own operations may be used as 

long as the end product meets the requirements of this specification. Pipe and tubing, 

except for drainage pipe, shall meet the requirements of the National Sanitation 

Foundation Testing Laboratories Inc. and shall bear the "NSF" seal. 

2. All plastic pipe delivered to the jobsite shall be plainly marked as to nominal pipe or 

tubing size, type, class, schedule or pressure rating, and manufacturer. 

3. Fittings shall be of the same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure 

rating, except that drainage waste and vent (DWV) fittings need not be pressure rated; 

and all fittings shall conform to the appropriate ASTM Specification. In general, fittings 

for rigid pipe shall be socket type for solvent or fusion welding, and fittings for nonrigid 

pipe shall be insert or flare fittings as specified or approved by the Engineer. 

4. Transitions from plastic to metal or IPS pipe shall be by molded transition fittings, not 

by threading the plastic pipe. Unions 2-2/2 inches and smaller shall be socket end 

screwed unions, and unions 3 inches and over shall be made up of socket flanges with 

1/8-inch full face soft rubber gasket. Unions shall be located where shown on the Plans 

and elsewhere as directed by the Engineer for adequate access to the piping system for 

inspection and cleaning. 

5. Nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose shall be serrated. 

PART 36 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 

1. PVC pipe shall be Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 as specified, PVC 1120, conforming to 

the requirements of ASTM D 1785 and appendices thereto. Pipe shall be extruded from 

Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454 material as specified in ASTM D 1784. 

2. Fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or D 2467 for pressure fittings, or to D 2665 for 

DWV fittings as is appropriate to the service and pressure requirement. 

3. PVC pipe shall be tested at the pressure listed in the piping schedule. 

PART 37 CLASS 150 PVC PIPE 

A. PVC Class 150 pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2241 except that the pipe shall 

have outside diameters of ductile iron pipe sizes instead of iron pipe sizes. PVC pipe of 4-inch 



through 12-inch diameter shall meet the requirements of AWWA C 900 with pressure class of 150 

and DR of not less than 18. PVC pipe of 14-inch through 36-inch diameter shall meet the 

requirements of AWWA C-905 with pressure rating of not less than DR 18. Each length of pipe 

shall be capable of withstanding without failure 600 psi hydrostatic pressure for a minimum of 

5 seconds. The integral bell shall be tested with the pipe. 

B. Provisions shall be made for contraction and expansion at each joint with a rubber ring and 

integral thickened bell as part of each joint. The rubber ring shall meet the requirements of 

ASTM D 1869. The bell section shall be at least as strong as the pipe barrel. 

1. At least 85 percent of the total footage of pipe shall be furnished in standard lengths of 

20 feet. The remaining footage of pipe may be in random lengths of not less than 10 feet 

long. 

Sizes and their respective dimensions shall be as specified in the following tabulation: 

Nominal Pipe 

Size (Inches) 

4 

6 

8 

10 

12 

Outside Pipe 

Diameter 

(Inches) 

4.80 

6.90 

9.05 

11.10 

13.20 

PART 38 FITTINGS FOR PVC PIPE 

Minimum Pipe 

Wall 

Thickness (Inches) 

0.282 

0.406 

0.532 

0.653 

0.776 

A. Fittings for PVC pipe shall be cast iron fittings as specified under cast iron and ductile iron pipe in 

these Specifications and properly sized for the dimensions of the pipe being used. All fittings for 

joining pipe 4 inches in diameter and larger shall be of the push-on rubber gasket or mechanical 

joint type of joint. 

PART 39 PVC PIPE LEAKAGE TEST 

A. All PVC pipe shall be tested for leakage at 150 psi per AWWA C 605-97, measured at the lowest 

point in the line. Any sections of pipelines indicating more than the allowable leakage shall be 

repaired and retested until the leakage is less than the allowable indicated below. The leakage test 

shall be for a minimum duration of 2 hours. The leakage test shall be made after backfilling. Any 

visible leaks shall also be repaired. 

Pipe Diameter 

Inches 

4 

6 

8 

10 

12 

14 

16 

18 

20 

24 

Allowable Leakage 

Gallons/100 Joints/Hour 

0.33 

0.50 

0.66 

0.83 

0.99 

1.16 

1.32 

1.49 

1.66 

1.99 

PART 40 RUBBER HOSE 



A. Rubber hose shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Plans and specified herein. 

Rubber hose larger than 1-1/2 inches in size shall be Style MHB, as manufactured by the Goodyear 

Rubber Company; P-293 Non-Twist Fire Hose as manufactured by Uniroyal Inc.; equivalent Goodall 

Rubber Company; or equal. Rubber hose !-inch through 1-1/2-inch shall be Wingfoot General 

Purpose as manufactured by Goodyear Rubber Company; P-999 General Purpose Air Hose as 

manufactured by Uniroyal; equivalent Goodall Rubber Company; or equal. Hose ends shall be 

equipped and fitted with appropriate combination clamped nipples and threaded ends to make up 

the assembly shown on the Plans. Hose shall be neoprene or approved oil resistant material and 

suitable for a working pressure of not less than 150 pounds per square inch. 

PART 41 SPECIALTIES 

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, wherever shown on the Plans, as called for in these 

Specifications, or as required for proper operation of equipment, all items specified under this 

heading including gaskets, bolts, caulking materials, hangers, supports, guides, anchors, and such 

incidental materials and equipment as are required to make the items complete and ready for use. 

PART 42 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS 

A. Where shown on the Plans or specified, or elsewhere as approved by the Engineer for the 

Contractor's convenience, flexible couplings shall be furnished and installed. 

B. Flexible couplings shall be galvanized when on galvanized pipe or on pipe which are epoxy or 

cement lined, or when underground. When flexible type couplings are used as expansion joints, the 

ends of the pipe shall be separated to allow for expansion. 

1. For cast iron pipes, flexible couplings shall be Dresser Style 53; Rockwell Series 430; 

Baker Series 228; or equal. 

2. For steel pipes, flexible couplings shall be Dresser Style 38; Rockwell Series 411; or equal, 

except where other Styles are required for special conditions. Where indicated on the Plans, 

flexible couplings shall be suitable for connecting pipes which have different outside 

diameters. 

C. Flanged coupling adapters shall have not less than two anchor studs each. 

. 

PART 43 FITTINGS 

1. Where flexible couplings are installed underground, Type 316 stainless steel bolts shall be 

used. The entire coupling shall be given a 20-mil coat of T.C. Mastic as manufactured by the 

Tape Coat Company, Inc.; Bitumastic No. 50 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc.; or 

equal. 

2. Gaskets for all couplings except those on the air piping system shall be neoprene rubber, 

or equal. Gaskets for couplings in the air piping system shall be suitable for operation at a 

temperature of 250 degrees F. 

3. All flexible couplings shall have tie downs unless directed otherwise with a written note on 

the Plans. 

A. Changes in pipe size on soil and waste lines shall be made with reducing fittings. All changes in 

direction shall be made by use of 45-degree wyes, half wyes, long sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 

1/16 bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks; and short 1/4 bends or 



elbows 3 inches in size or larger may be used on soil or waste lines where the change in direction 

of flow is from horizontal to vertical and on the discharge from water closets. 

PART 44 UNION CONNECTIONS 

A. Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. The use of long 

screws and bushings is not acceptable. 


A. Bell-and-spigot joints shall be firmly packed with oakum and caulked with not less than 1 inch of 

lead or shall be made up with double seal elastomer push-on gaskets. Threaded joints shall be 

American Standard Taper screw threads, clean cut, and made up with graphite and oil or other 

suitable pipe compounds. 

PART 46 VALVES 

A. The Contractor shall furnish all valves where indicated on the Plans, as called for in these 

Specifications, or as required for proper operation of the equipment in general. Unless otherwise 

indicated on the Plans or specified in other sections of these Specifications, valves shall conform to 

the requirements as specified herein. 

1. Valves shall be manufactured by a manufacturer whose valves have had successful 

operational experience in comparable service. 

2. The valve manufacturer shall furnish detailed technical information as required by the 

Engineer for evaluating the quality of the valves and as required by the Contractor for proper 

valve installation. The technical information shall include complete dimensions, weights, and 

material lists. No valve will be approved for installation until the required information has been 

received and approved. 

3. Wherever stainless steel is specified in this section, it shall be AISI Type 316, or Type 304 

unless otherwise specified. Where valve, gate, and operator bolts and nuts are submerged in 

sewage or water, occur in an enclosed space above sewage or water, are installed below the 

tops of walls of structures containing sewage or water and are installed at openings in 

concrete or metal decks, bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel unless specifically noted 

otherwise. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, stainless steel bolts shall be used. 

Underground bolts shall be low-alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C 111, unless 

specifically noted to be otherwise. 

4. The zinc content of bronze or brass used in any valve parts shall not exceed 6 percent. 

The aluminum content of bronze shall not exceed 2 percent. 

5. The method of connection of valves to each piping system shall be as detailed on the 

Plans. In general, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or specified, all valves 3-inch size 

and larger shall have flanged ends or shall be designed for bolting to flanged pipe and all 

valves less than 3-inch size shall have screwed ends. 

6. The Contractor shall furnish to the pipe supplier, after flanged valves and flanged check 

valves are selected, the face-to-face dimensions of all flanged valves and check valves to be 

installed in flanged pipelines so that the pipe may be fabricated to the proper length. 

7. All buried valves shall have cast iron valve boxes. The boxes shall be asphalt varnished, 

or enameled cast iron, adjustable to grade, and installed perpendicularly, centered around 

and covering the upper portions of the valve or valve operator. The box shall not be 

supported in any manner by the valve, valve operator, or the pipe. The top of each valve box 



shall be placed flush with finish grade unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Valve 

boxes shall be two-piece Mueller Company, Tyler Pipe Industries Inc., or equal. 

8. All buried valves and other valves located below the operating deck or level, specified or 

noted to be key operated, shall have an operator shaft extension from the valve or valve 

operator to finish grade or deck level, a 2-inch square AWWA operating nut, and cover or box 

and cover, as may be required. 

9. Except as otherwise specified, all buried valves shall be painted with two coats of asphalt 

varnish in accordance with the requirements of AWWA Standard C 500. This protective 

coating shall be protected from damage until valve is backfilled. After installation the valves 

shall be wrapped with polyethylene as specified for cast iron pipe. 

10. Globe and gate valves shall be installed with stems horizontal or vertical above the pipe, 

except as specifically indicated otherwise. 

11. All butterfly valves and plug valves above grade not specified to have geared operators 

shall be fitted with ell or tee wrench or handles for operation. Wrenches shall be secured to 

the valve head or stem except that if a wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel it 

shall be stowed immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable hanger, bracket, or 

receptacle. 

12. Where proper operation and utilization of equipment and facilities requires installation of 

valves not shown or specified, the Contractor shall provide and install, upon approval by the 

Engineer, valves similar and comparable to valves specified for similar and comparable duty 

in other parts of the project, without additional cost to the Owner. 

PART 47 INSTALLATION OF VALVES 

1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install the 

valves complete in place at the locations indicated on the Plans in accordance with the 

details and these Specifications. 

2. The Contractor shall furnish all incidental materials necessary for installation of the valves 

such as flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, and all other materials 

required for the complete installation. 

3. The Contractor shall provide the necessary concrete bases and blocking to support the 

valves. 

PART 48 GATE VALVES UNDERGROUND 

1. Gate valves for buried installation shall be iron body, resilient seat, non-rising stem, 

conforming to AWWA C 509, with double O-ring stem seal and epoxy coated in conformance 

with AWWA C550. Valves shall open counterclockwise. Valve ends shall be flanged or 

mechanical joint as required for the type of pipe used. Maximum shutoff pressure shall be 

200 psi. Operators shall be suitable for buried service and shall have an operator shaft 

extension to finished grade, a 2-inch square AWWA nut, valve box, and cover. 

PART 49 CHECK VALVES 

A. Except as otherwise specified, shown on the Plans, or approved by the Engineer, check valves 

shall be as follows: Check valves shall be for 150-pound or better service and suitable for operation 

in either horizontal or vertical position. 






! 


! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

!

SECTION 02668 - FIRE WATER SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes fire water systems. 


1. Refer to Division-2 section 02004 "Excavation Support Protections" for excavation 

and backfill required for fire water systems; not work of this section. 

2. Refer to Division-3 section 03300 for concrete work required for fire water systems; 

not work of this section. 

3. Refer to Division-15 section 15500 "Fire Protection" for interior building systems 

including sprinklers and standpipes; not work of this section. 

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 

A. Codes and Standards: 

1. NFPA Compliance: Install fire water systems in accordance with NFPA 24 "Standard 

for Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances". 

B. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to 

hydrants, including hose unit threading and similar matching of connections. 

C. UL Compliance: Provide fire hydrants that comply with UL 246 "Hydrants for Fire-Protection 

Service", and are listed by UL. 

1.3 SUBMITTALS: 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for 

fire water system materials and products. 

B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for fire water system materials 

and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in 

maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 


2.1 IDENTIFICATION: 

A. Underground-Type Detectable Warning Tape: Manufacturer's standard permanent, 

bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 

6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide blue tape with black printing reading "CAUTION WATER LINE 

BURIED BELOW". 

2.2 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: 

A. Provide materials and products complying with NFPA 24 where applicable. Provide sizes 

and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which 

match pipe materials used in fire water piping systems. Where more than one type of 

materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 

B. Piping: Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, 

with joining method as indicated. Minimum size of Fire Main serving Building Fire sprinkler 

system on Fire Hydrants shall be 6 inches in diameter. 


FIRE WATER SYSTEM 02668 - 1

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cement mortar lining complying with AWWA 

C104; Class 51 unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Fittings: Ductile-Iron complying with AWWA C110, cement lined, with 

rubber gaskets conforming to AWWA C111. 

2. PVC Pipe: AWWA C-900, Class 150 unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Fittings: Schedule 80 PVC fittings complying with ASTM 1785. 

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES: 

A. Pipe Line Strainers: UL-listed, 175 psi working pressure, Y-type or basket type, with ends to 

suit piping connections. 

2.4 METERS: 

A. Detector-Type Meters: UL-listed, 175 psi working pressure, with disc meter bypass. 

2.5 VALVES: 

A. Gate Valves: UL-listed, 175 psi working pressure for 12" and smaller, 150 psi for sizes larger 

than 12". Threaded, flanged, hub, or other end configurations to suit size of valve and piping 

connection. Inside screw type for use with indicator post, iron body bronze mounted, non- 

rising stem, solid wedge disc. 

B. Check Valves: UL-listed, 175 psi working pressure for 2" through 12", 150 psi for sizes 

larger than 12". Swing type, iron body bronze mounted with metal-to-metal or rubber-faced 

checks. Threaded, flanged, or hub end, to suit size and piping connections. 

2.6 FIRE HYDRANTS: 

A. Provide cast-iron body fire hydrants, compression type, opening against pressure and closing 

with pressure, base valve design, 200 psi working pressure, with 1/4" gage tapping and 

bronze plug in standpipe, conforming to the latest edition of AWWA C-502, "Dry Barrel Fire 

Hydrants." Conform to Lehi City Standards for Hydrant type. 

B. Features: Provide the following features: 

1. Size: 5" valve opening. 

2. Direction to Open Hydrant: Left. 

3. Size and Shape of Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon 1-1/2" point to flat. 

4. Hose Nozzles: 2-1/2" National Standard Thread, cap and chain. 

5. Pumper Nozzles: 5" National Standard Thread, cap and chain. 

6. Depth of Trench: 4'-6". 

Connection to Main: 6" mechanical joint. 

7. Contractor shall verify exact requirements and features with Lehi City standards. 

2.7 ACCESSORIES: 

A. Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, wyes, crosses, plugs, caps, bends, valves, and 

hydrants. After installation, apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding 

material to surfaces of ferrous anchorages. 

B. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: Steel, ASTM A 506. 

C. Rods: Steel, ASTM A 575. 

D. Rod Couplings: Malleable-iron, ASTM A 197. 

E. Bolts: Steel, ASTM A 307. 



F. Cast-Iron Washers: Gray-iron, ASTM A 126. 

G. Thrust Blocks: Concrete, 2,500 psi. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION: 


A. Identification: During back-filling/top-soiling of underground fire water piping systems, install 

continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" 

below finished grade. 

B. Pipe and pipe fittings: 

1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600 "Standard for Installation 

of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances". 

2. PVC Pipe: Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and provide 

pipe bedding as required by authority having jurisdiction. 

3. Depth of Cover: Provide minimum depth of cover over underground piping in 

accordance with NFPA 24, Figure A-8-11 "Recommended Depth of Cover Above 

Top of Underground Yard Mains" or 60" below finish grade, whichever is greater. 

C. Piping Specialties: 

1. Pipe Line Strainers: Install as indicated, with valved blowoff piped to drain. 

D. Meters: Install as indicated with shutoff valve on either side of meter and valved bypass full 

line size. 

E. Valves: Provide post indicator for control valves. 

1. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve ahead of each hydrant. 

F. Hydrants: Install fire hydrants in accordance with AWWA M17 "Installation, Operation, and 

Maintenance of Fire Hydrants". 

1. Location: Install fire hydrants minimum of 40'-0" from building outside wall, as 

indicated, or if not shown. 

G. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on drawings. 

H. Backfill only after pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and approved by the Architect. 

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 

A. Testing Agency: The Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to 

perform field quality-control testing services specified in this section. Retesting of materials 

failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractors expense. 

B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered, and after thrust blocks have 

sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline with water 24-hrs prior to testing, and apply test pressure 

to stabilize system. 

C. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 200 psi for 2-hrs, or at 50 psi above maximum 

static pressure if it is greater than 150 psi. 

1. Test fails if leakage exceeds 2-qts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints irrespective of 

pipe diameter. 

2. Increase pressure in 50 psi increments and inspect each joint between increments. 

Hold at test pressure for one hour, decrease to 0 psi. Slowly increase again to test 

pressure and hold for one more hour. 



D. Operating Tests: Open and close all valves and hydrants under system water pressure. 

Check dry barrel hydrants for proper drainage. 

1. For systems with fire pumps, run pumps during operating tests. 

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: 

A. Flushing: Flush underground mains and lead-in connections to sprinkler risers before 

connection is made to sprinklers, standpipes, or other fire protection system piping. 

1. Flush at flow rate not less than that indicated in NFPA 24, or at hydraulically 

calculated water demand rate of the system, whichever is greater. 

B. Disinfection of Potable Water System: Flush pipe system with clean potable water until no 

dirty water appears at point of outlet. Fill system with water-chlorine solution containing at 

least 50 ppm of chlorine. Valve off system and let stand for 24- hrs minimum. Flush with 

clean potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. 

1. Repeat procedure if contamination is present in bacteriological examination. 

C. Disinfection of Water Mains: Flush and disinfect in accordance with AWWA C652 

"Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains". 

1. Contractor shall submit written verification to Project Manager stating, Disinfection 

has been completed in strict compliance with specification for this project and with 

jurisdiction having authority over water system 




SECTION 02810 – UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 

1.01 GENERAL 

The requirements of the "General Conditions of the Contract" shall apply to all work of 

this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 

1.02 DESCRIPTION 

A. Scope of Work: 

Provide all labor, materials, transportation, and services necessary to furnish and 

install irrigation systems as shown on the drawings and described herein. 

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE & REQUIREMENTS 

A. Permits and Fees: 

The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all permits and all inspections as 

required. 

B. Manufacturer's Directions: 

Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases 

where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering 

points not shown in the drawings and specifications. 

C. Ordinances and Regulations: 

All local, municipal and state lawns, and rules and regulations governing to any 

portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these 

specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything 

contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above 

rules and regulations or requirements of the same. However, when these specifications 

and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better 

quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and 

regulations, the provisions of these specifications and drawings shall take precedence. 

D. Explanation of Drawings: 

1) Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, 

etc. which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural 

and finished conditions affecting all of this work and plan his work accordingly, 

furnishing such fittings, etc. as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings 

are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall 

be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, 

planting, and architectural features. 

2) All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed 

whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. 

3) The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on 

the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade 

differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have 

been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be 

brought to the attention of the Owner's authorized representative. In the 

event this notification is not performed, the irrigation Contractor shall 

assume full responsibility for any revision necessary. 

________________________________________________________________________ 


UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-1


A. Material List: 

1) The Contractor shall furnish the articles, equipment, materials, or processes 

specified by name in the drawings and specifications. No substitution will 

be allowed without prior written approval by the Owner's Authorized 

Representative. 

2) A complete material list shall be submitted prior to performing any work. 

Material list shall include the manufacturer, model number and description 

of all materials and equipment to be used. Although manufacturer and other 

information may be different, the following is a guide to proper submittal format: 

Item No. Description Manufacturer Model No. 

1 Back flow preventer Febco 835Y 

2 Control Valves Rainbird EFA Series 

3 Quick coupling Valve Rainbird 33D LVC 

Irrigation submittal must be specific and complete. All items must be listed and should include 

solvent/primer, wire, wire connectors, valve boxes, etc. No copies of manufacturer's literature 

(catalog cuts) are required as submittal information. 

3) The Contractor may submit substitutions for equipment and materials listed 

on the irrigation drawings by following procedures as outlined in Section 6 of the 

Irrigation Specifications. 

4) Equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the 

Architect may be rejected and the Contractor required to remove such 

materials from the site at his own expense. 

5) Approval of any item, alternate or substitute indicates only that the product 

or products apparently meet the requirements of the drawings and 

specifications on the basis of the information or samples submitted. 

6) Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of this liability 

under the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee. 

B. Record and As-Built Drawings: 

1) The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date a complete "as-built" 

record set of blueline ozalid prints which shall be corrected daily and show 

every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact 

"as-built" locations, sizes, and kinds of equipment. Prints may be obtained 

from the Architect at cost. This set of drawings shall be kept on site and 

shall be used only as a record set. 

2) These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be the 

basis for measurement and payment for work completed. The Contractor 

shall make neat and legible annotations thereon daily as the work proceeds, 

showing the work as actually installed. These drawings shall be available at all times 

for inspection and shall be kept in a location designated by the Owner's Authorized 

Representative. Should record blueline drawing progress sheets not be available for 

review or not be up-to-date at the time of any observation (refer to Section 10 - Site 

Observation Schedule), it will be assumed no work has been completed and the 

Contractor will be assessed the cost of that site visit at the current billing rate of the 

Owner's Authorized Representative. No other observations shall take place prior to 

payment of that assessment. 

________________________________________________________________________ 



3) The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the record drawings 

progress sheets daily as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually 

installed. For example, should a piece of equipment be installed in a 

location that does not match the plan, the Contractor must indicate that 

equipment has been relocated in a graphic manner so as to match the 

original symbols as indicated in the irrigation legend. The relocated 

equipment and dimensions will then be transferred to the original record 

drawing plan at the proper time. 

4) Before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall transfer all 

information from the "as-built" prints to an ozalid sepia, procured from the 

Owner's Authorized Representative. All work shall be in waterproof India ink and 

applied to the mylar by a technical pen made expressly for use on mylar material. 

Such pen shall be similar to those manufactured by Rapidograph, Kueffell & Esser, or 

Faber Castell. The dimensions shall be made so as to be easily readable even on 

the final controller chart (see Section ?). The original mylar "record drawing" plan 

shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative for approval of prior to 

fabricating the controller chart. 

5) The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference, 

building corners, sidewalk or road intersections, etc., the location of the 

following items: 

a. Connection to existing water lines. 

b. Connection to existing electrical power. 

c. Gate valves. 

d. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimensions max. 100' along 

routing). 

e. Electric control valves. 

f. Routing of control wiring. 

g. Quick coupling valves. 

h. Other related equipment as directed by the Owner's Authorized 


6) On or before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver the 

corrected and completed sepias to the Owner's Authorized Representative. 

Delivery of the sepias will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing 

required information that may be omitted from the prints. 

C. Equipment to be Furnished: 

1) Supply as part of this contract the following: 

a. Two (2) keys for each controller. 

2) The above mentioned equipment shall be turned over to the Owner at the 

conclusion of the project. Before final observation can occur, evidence that 

the Owner has received these items must be shown to the Owner's 

Authorized Representative. 

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings: 

The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and 

storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which 

allows the length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or 

concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or 

damaged will be discarded and, if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 

________________________________________________________________________ 




A. If the Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those 

equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so 

by providing the following information of the Owner's authorized representative for 

review: 

1) Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a 

separate sheet of paper for each item to be substituted. 

2) Provide descriptive catalog literature, performance charts and flow charts for each 

item to be substituted. 

3) Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved. 

B. The Owner's authorized representative shall have the sole responsibility in 

accepting or rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal to those equipment and 

materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications. 

1.07 Guarantee 

A. The guarantee for the sprinkler irrigation system shall be made in accordance with the 

following form. The general conditions and supplementary conditions of these 

specifications shall be filed with the Owner or his representative prior to acceptance of 

the irrigation system. 

B. A copy of the guarantee form shall be included in the operations and maintenance 

manual. 

C. The guarantee form shall be retyped onto the Contractor's letterhead and contain 

the following information: 

GUARANTEE FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM 

We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and installed 

is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in 

accordance with the drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear and unusual 

abuse, or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defects in material or 

workmanship which may develop during the period of one year from the date of 

acceptance and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or 

replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs 

or replacements within a reasonable time, as determined by the Owner, after receipt of 

written notice. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within a 

reasonable time after receipt of written notice from the Owner, we authorize the Owner to 

proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the 

costs and charges therefore upon demand. 

PROJECT: 

LOCATION: 

SIGNED: 

ADDRESS: 

________________________________________________________________________ 



PHONE: DATE OF ACCEPTANCE: 

IRRIGATION PRODUCTS 


A. General: 

Use only new materials of brands and types noted on drawings, specified herein, or 

approved equals. 

B. PVC Pressure Main Line Pipe and Fittings: 

1) Pressure main line piping shall be PVC Schedule 40 with solvent welded joints. PVC 

pipe for irrigation systems serviced from the Local Water District's water system shall 

be white in color. 

2) Schedule 40 pipe shall be made from NSF approved Type I, Grade I, PVC 

compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1784. All pipe must meet 

requirements as set forth in Federal Specifications PS-22-70. 

3) PVC solvent-weld fittings shall be Schedule 40, 1-2, II-I NSF approved conforming to 

ASTM test procedure D2466. 

4) Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent-weld pipe and fittings shall be of type and 

installation methods prescribed by the manufacturer. 

5) All PVC pipe must bear the following markings: 

a. Manufacturer's name 

b. Nominal pipe size 

c. Schedule or class 

d. Pressure rating in P.S.I. 

e. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval 

f. Date of extrusion 

6) All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, 

size, applicable I.P.S. schedule and NSF seal of approval. 

C. PVC Non-Pressure Lateral Line Piping and Fittings: 

1) Non-pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC Class 200 with solvent-weld 

joints in planted areas. PVC pipe for irrigation systems serviced from the Local 

Water District's water system shall be white in color. 

2) Pipe shall be made from NSF approved, Type I, Grade II, PVC compound conforming 

to ASTM resin specification D1784. All pipe must meet requirements set forth in 

Federal Specification PS-22-70 with an appropriate standard dimension ratio. 

3) Except as noted in paragraphs 1 and 2 of Section 2C, all requirements for nonpressure 

lateral line piping and fittings shall be the same as for the solvent-weld 

pressure main line pipe and fittings as set forth in Section 2B of these 

specifications. 

D. Brass and Pipe Fittings: 

1) Where indicated on the drawings, use red brass screwed pipe conforming to Federal 

Specification #WW-P-351. 

2) Fittings shall be red brass conforming Federal Specification #WW-P-351. 

E. Copper Pipe Fittings: 

1) Pipe: Type K, hard tempered 

________________________________________________________________________ 



2) Fittings: wrought copper, solder joint type 

3) Joints shall be soldered with silver solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, 24% 

admium, solidus at 1125ø and liquids at 1145ø F. 

F. Gate Valves: 

1) Gate valves 3" and smaller shall meet the following requirements. 

a. Gate valve shall be 125 lb. SWP bronze gate valve with screw-in bonnet, 

non-rising stem, and solid wedge disc. 

b. Gate valve shall have threaded ends and shall be equipped with a bronze 

handwheel. 

c. Gate valve shall be similar to those manufactured by Nibco or approved 

equal. 

2) All gate valves shall be installed per installation details. 

G. Quick Coupling Valves: 

1) Quick coupling valves shall have a brass, one or two-piece body designed for 

working pressure of 150 P.S.I. 

2) Quick coupling valve shall be operable with a quick coupler key. Key size and type 

shall be as shown on the Drawings. 

3) Quick coupling valves used on domestic water systems shall be equipped with a 

thermoplastic rubber cover yellow in color. 

H. Back flow Prevention Unit: (Domestic Water Systems Only) 

1) Back flow prevention unit shall be of size and type indicated on the irrigation 

drawings. Install backflow prevention unit in accordance with irrigation 

construction details. 

2) Wye strainers at backflow prevention units shall have a bronzed screwed body with 0 

mesh monel screen and shall be similar to Bailey #100B or approved equal. 

3) All pressure main line piping between the point of connection and the backflow 

preventer shall be installed as required by local code. The Contractor shall verify 

with the local governing body as to material type and installation procedures prior to 

start of construction. Submit shop drawing for approval. 

I. Check Valves: 

1) Swing check valves 2" and smaller shall be 200 lb. W.O.G. bronze construction with 

replaceable composition, neoprene or rubber disc and shall meet or exceed Federal 

Specification WW-V-51d, Class A, Type IV. 

2) Anti-drain valves shall be of heavy duty virgin PVC construction with F.I.P. thread 

inlet and outlet. Internal parts shall be stainless steel and neoprene. Anti-drain valve 

shall be field adjustable against draw-out from 5 to 40 feet of head. Anti-drain valve 

shall be similar to the Valcon "ADV" or approved equal. 

J. Control Wiring: 

1) Wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as 

pressure supply or lateral lines wherever possible. 

2) Where more that one (1) wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped 

together at intervals of ten (10) feet. 

3) An expansion curl shall be provided within three (3) feet of each wire connection. 

Expansion curl shall be of sufficient length at each splice connection at each electric 

control, so that in case of repair, the valve bonnet may be brought to the surface 

without disconnecting the control wires. Control wires shall be laid loosely in trench 

without stress or stretching wire conductors. 

________________________________________________________________________ 



4) All splices shall be made with Scotch-Lok #3576 Connector Sealing Packs, 

Rainbird Snap-Tite wire connectors, or approved equal. Make only one splice with 

each connector sealing pack. 

K. Electric Control Valve: 

1) All electric control valves shall be the same size and type shown on the Drawings. 

2) All electric control valves shall have a manual flow adjustment. 

3) Provide and install one control valve box for each electric control valve. 

L. Valve Box: 

1) Use 10" x 10" round box with cover for all gate valves. Extension sleeve shall be PVC 

with minimum size of six (6) inches. 

2) Use jumbo valve box (nominal) rectangular box with cover for all electric control 

valves. Refer to Detail. 

3) Use 10" x 10" deep round plastic valve box for all quick coupling valves, Brooks 

#1100 with snap lock cover or approved equal. 

M. Bubbler Head: 

1) Riser units shall be fabricated in accordance with the installation details. 

2) Riser nipples for all bubblier heads shall be the same size as the riser opening in the 

sprinkler body. 

3) All bubblier heads of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. 

N. Drip Emitters, Emitter Tubing, and Fittings: 

1) Emitter body shall be manufactured of durable plastic construction resistant to ultraviolet 

rays and a highly inert silicone elastometer diaphragm which is resistant to 

chemicals. The emitter shall have a color coded inlet barb to identify flow rate and 

shall be pressure compensating for a rated flow of + 10% over a pressure variant of 

15 to 45 P.S.I. Emitters shall be manufactured by Rainbird. 

2) Non-pressure lateral line piping for drip systems shall be Class 200. 

3) Provide AG Products 3/4" ball valve installed with flexible drip tubing and SMT 3/4" 

MHT by Spin LOC at terminus of each run. Install in 10" x 10" round box. Refer to 

Detail. 

4) Provide filtration and pressure regulation for each drip system. Rrefer to drawing for 

equipment types and sizes required. 

O. Secondary Water Filtration: Provide Clemons Model #1200A filter with galvanized 

housing and stainless steel screen. Upsize filter one pipe size larger than the line to 

the pipe. 

P. Miscellaneous Irrigation Equipment: 

1) Refer to the Drawings for sizes and types of miscellaneous irrigation equipment. 

2) All miscellaneous irrigation equipment shall be as specified or approved equal. 

IRRIGATION - EXECUTION 

3.01 OBSERVATION OF SITE CONDITIONS 

A. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size 

dimensions and receive approval from the Owner's Authorized Representative prior to 

proceeding with work under this Section. 

________________________________________________________________________ 



B. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. The Contractor 

shall be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by his operations or 

neglect. Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations. 

C. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe, so there shall be 

NO interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs, 

and ground covers. 

D. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely 

proceed before starting work on the irrigation system. 


A. Physical Layout: 

1) Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing 

and location of sprinkler heads. 

2) All layout shall be reviewed by the Owner's Authorized Representative prior to 

installation. 

B. Water Supply: 

1) The irrigation system shall be connected to water supply point(s) of connection as 

indicated on the Drawings. 

2) Connections shall be made at the approximate location(s) shown on the Drawings. 

The Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions. 


A. Trenching: 

1) Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Lay pipe 

to an even grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on the 

Drawings and as noted. 

2) Provide for a minimum of eighteen (18) inches cover for all pressure supply lines of 

2 1/2-inch nominal diameter or smaller. 

3) Provide for a minimum of twenty-four (24) inches cover for all pressure supply lines 

of 3-inch nominal diameter or larger. 

4) Provide for a minimum of twelve (12) inches for all non-pressure lines. 

5) Provide for a minimum cover of eighteen (18) inches for all control wiring. 

B. Back filling: 

1) The trenches shall not be back filled until all required tests are performed. 

Trenches shall be carefully back filled with the excavated materials approved for 

backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials, 

free from large clods of earth or stones. Back fill shall be mechanically compacted 

in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting 

areas. Back fill will conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps 

or other surface irregularities. 

2) A fine granular material back fill will be initially placed on all lines. No foreign 

matter larger than one-half (1/2) inch in size will be permitted in the initial backfill. 

3) Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of the Owner's 

Authorized Representative. 

________________________________________________________________________ 



4) If settlement occurs and necessitates adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads, 

lawn, plantings, or other installed work, the Contractor shall make all required 

adjustments without cost to the General Contractor. 

C. Trenching and Back fill Under Paving: 

1) Trenches located under areas where paving, asphaltic concrete, or concrete will be 

installed, shall be back filled with sand (a layer six [6] inches below the pipe and 

three [3] inches above the pipe) and compacted in layers to 95% compaction, using 

manual or mechanical tamping devices. Trenches for piping shall be compacted to 

equal the compaction of the existing adjacent undisturbed soil and shall be left in a 

firm unyielding condition. All trenches shall be left flush with the adjoining grade. 

The Contractor shall set in place, cap and pressure test all piping under paving 

prior to the paving work. 

2) Generally, piping under existing walks is done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic 

driving, but where any cutting or breaking of sidewalks and/or concrete is 

necessary, it shall be done and replaced by the Contractor as a part of the Contract 

cost. Permission to cut or break sidewalks and/or concrete shall be obtained from 

the Owner's Authorized Representative. No hydraulic driving will be permitted 

under concrete paving. 

3) Provide for a minimum cover of eighteen (18) inches between the top of the pipe 

and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping 

installed under asphaltic concrete paving. 

D. Assemblies: 

1) Routing of sprinkler irrigation lines as indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic. 

Install lines (and various assemblies) in such a manner as to conform with the 

details per the Drawings. 

2) Install NO multiple assemblies in plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own 

outlet. 

3) Install all assemblies specified herein in accordance with respective detail. In 

absence of detail drawings or Specifications pertaining to specific items required to 

complete work, perform such work in accordance with best standard practice with 

prior approval of Owner's Authorized Representative. 

4) PVC pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust, and moisture before 

installation. Installation and solvent welding methods shall be as recommended by 

the pipe and fitting manufacturer. 

5) On PVC to metal connections, the Contractor shall work the metal connections first. 

Teflon tape or approved equal, shall be used on all threaded PVC to PVC, and on 

all threaded PVC to metal joints. Light wrench pressure is all that is required. 

Where threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adapters into 

which the pipe may be welded. 

E. Line Clearance: 

1) All lines shall have a minimum clearance of six (6) inches from each other and from 

lines of other trades. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. 

F. Quick Coupler / Gate Valves: 

1) Install quick coupler and gate valves in a separate 10" x 10" round box with cover. 

Where possible, locate valves shall be located in shrub areas. 

2) Each quick coupler and gate valve box is to be branded with "QV" for quick couple 

and "GV" for gate valve 2" letters. Branding unit available from Hydroscape 

Products, Inc., phone number (714) 639-1850. 

________________________________________________________________________ 



G. Electric Control Valves: 

1) Install each electric control valve in a separate valve box. Where possible, electric 

control valves shall be located in shrub areas. Refer to Detail. 

2) Install where shown on the Drawings. Where grouped together, allow at least 

twelve (12) inches between adjacent valve boxes. 

3) Each valve number shall be heat branded on valve box cover with 2" tall letters. 

Branding unit available from Hydroscape Products, Inc., phone number (714) 639- 

1850. 

H. Flushing of System: 

1) After all new sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, all 

necessary diversion work has been completed, and prior to installation of sprinkler 

heads, the control valves shall be opened and full head of water used to flush out 

the system. 

2) Sprinkler heads shall be installed only after flushing of the system has been 

accomplished to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized 


I. Sprinkler Heads: 

1) Install the sprinkler heads as designated on the Drawings. Sprinkler heads to be 

installed in this work shall be equivalent in all respects to those itemized. 

2) Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on the Drawings. In no 

case shall the spacing exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. 

3) All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade of the area to be 

irrigated unless otherwise designated on the plans. 

4) All sprinkler heads are to be installed with purple inserts indicating their use with 

reclaimed water. 

3.04 TEMPORARY REPAIRS 

The Owner's Authorized Representative reserves the right to make temporary repairs as 

necessary to keep the irrigation system equipment in operating condition. The exercise 

of this right by the Owner's Authorized Representative shall not relieve the Contractor of 

his responsibilities under the terms of the guarantee as herein specified. 

3.05 EXISTING TREES 

Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, the Contractor shall use all 

possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation in areas where two (2) 

inch and larger roots occur shall be done by hand. All roots two (2) inches and larger in 

diameter, except directly in the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall 

be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a ditching 

machine is run close to trees having roots smaller than two (2) inches in diameter, the 

wall of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through. 

Roots one (1) inch and larger in diameter shall be painted with two coats of Tree Seal, or 

equal. Trenches adjacent to tree should be closed with in twenty-four (24) hours; and 

where this is not possible, the side of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be kept shaded 

with burlap or canvas. 


________________________________________________________________________ 



A. Adjustment of the System: 

1) The Contractor shall flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance 

and to prevent over spray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. 

2) If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment will provide proper and 

more adequate coverage, the Contractor shall make such adjustments prior to 

planting. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes and degrees of arc 

as required. 

3) Lowering raised sprinkler heads by the Contractor shall be accomplished within ten 

(10) days after notification by the Owner's Authorized Representative or Landscape 

Architect. 

4) All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise 

designated on the Drawings. 

B. Testing of the Irrigation System: 

1) The Contractor shall request the presence of the Owner's Authorized Representative 

in writing at least 48 hours in advance of testing. 

2) Test all pressure lines under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch and 

prove watertight. 

a. Testing of pressure main lines shall occur prior to installation of the electric 

control valves. 

3) All piping under paved areas shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure of 150 

pounds per square inch and proven watertight prior to paving. 

4) Sustain pressure in lines for not less than two (2) hours. If leaks develop, replace 

joints and repeat test until entire system is proven watertight. 

5) All hydrostatic tests shall be made only in the presence of the Owner's Authorized 

Representative. No pipe shall be back filled until it has been observed, tested, and 

approved in writing. 

6) Furnish necessary force pump and all other test equipment. 

7) When the irrigation system is completed, perform a coverage test in the presence of 

the Owner's Authorized Representative to determine if the water coverage for 

planting areas is complete and adequate. Furnish all materials and perform all work 

required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations form the 

Drawings, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the 

Drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the 

Owner's Authorized Representative. This test shall be accomplished before any 

ground cover is planted. 

8) Upon completion of each phase of work, the entire system shall be tested and 

adjusted to meet site requirements. 

3.07 MAINTENANCE 

A. The entire irrigation system shall be under full automatic operation for a period of seven 

(7) days prior to any planting. (With the exception of areas irrigated by drip.) 

B. The Owner's Authorized Representative reserves the right to waive or shorten the 

operation period. 

3.08 CLEAN-UP 

Cleanup shall be made as each portion of work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall 

be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be broomed or washed down, and 

any damage occurring to the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions. 

________________________________________________________________________ 



3.09 FINAL SITE OBSERVATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE 

A. The Contractor shall operate each system in its entirety for the Owner's Authorized 

Representative and the Maintenance Contractor at time of final observation. Any items 

deemed not acceptable by the Owner's Authorized Representative shall be reworked to 

the complete satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized Representative. 

B. The Contractor shall show evidence to the Owner's Authorized Representative that the 

Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required 

before final site observation can occur. 

3.10 SITE OBSERVATION SCHEDULE 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner's Authorized Representative 

in advance for the following observation meetings, according to the time indicated: 

1) Pre-Job Conference - 7 days 

2) Pressure supply line installation and testing - 48 hours 

3) Control wire installation - 48 hours 

4) Lateral line and sprinkler installation - 48 hours 

5) Emitter system installation - 48 hours 

6) Coverage test - 48 hours 

7) Final site observation - 7 days 

B. When site observations have been conducted by a party other than the Owner's 

Authorized Representative, show evidence in writing of when and by whom these 

observations were made. 

C. No site observations will commence without record drawings. In the event the Contractor 

calls for a site visit without record drawings, without completing previously noted 

corrections, or without preparing the system for said visit, he shall be responsible for 

reimbursing the Owner's Authorized Representative at his current hourly billing rate, 

portal to portal (plus transportation costs), for the inconvenience. No further site 

observations will be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received. 

________________________________________________________________________ 



SECTION 02830 - FENCES AND GATES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes fence fabric, frames, gates, anchorage devices and required appurtenances 

for permanent fencing as shown on drawings and specified herein. 

B. Refer to Division 3 Section “Concrete Work” for concrete. 

C. Temporary fencing to be provided as noted on drawings and specified herein. 


A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Submittals” for general requirements. 

B. Submit shop drawings showing layouts, materials size and gage, methods of construction, 

and installation, including sizes and types of all fastening devices. 

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 


A. Verify all dimensions by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of all items is 

required. 

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 

A. Deliver and store materials in dry, protected areas. Protect from rusting and other damage. 

Store on wood blocks. Remove any damaged items from site and replace at no additional 

cost to the Owner. 



A. Chain link fabric: 

1. Steel core wire shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-641-71 A. Mesh type 

to be standard industrial 2" mesh 9 gauge. 

a. Selvage: Knuckled at top and bottom selvage. 

B. Posts, Top Rails, Braces: 

1. Galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A-120, standard weight. 

2. End, corner and pull posts: 2.875-inch OD steel pipe 

3. Line or Intermediate posts: 2.375-inch OD pipe. 

4. Rails: 1.625-inch OD pipe. 

5. Gate Posts: 

a. Gates up to 4’-0”: 2.875-inch OD pipe. 

b. Gates over 4’-0”: 4.0-inch OD Type II steel pipe. 

6. Post braces and truss rods: At each gate, corner, pull, or end post. Provide with 

turnbuckles for adjustment. 


FENCES AND GATES 02830 - 1

C. Accessories: 

1. Reinforced wire: Minimum tensile strength of 75,000 psi. 

2. Tie wire: 9 gage annealed steel, galvanized. 

D. Gates: Swing type as shown on the drawings. Gate fabric and frame same as fence. Hinges 

to be pressed steel or malleable iron to suite gate size, non lift-off type. Provide forked type or 

plunger type latch with integral padlock eye. 

E. Temporary fencing to be galvanized steel pipe post and mesh, with temporary support. 



A. Examine all subsurfaces to receive work and report, in writing, to the Architect any conditions 

detrimental to the work. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any 

subsequent claims to the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance 

of all subsurfaces. 


A. Fence shall be installed on previously prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Comply 

with fence manufacturer's instructions and as specified below. 

B. Post holes shall be of dimensions indicated, and cleared of loose materials. Set posts plumb 

and in alignment. Posts shall be set in concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Thoroughly 

compact concrete so as to be free of voids and pockets. Allow concrete to cure at least 72 

hours before proceeding with installation of fabric. 

C. Provide post caps of the type recommended by the fence manufacturer. 

D. Fabric shall be pulled taut and secured to top and bottom rail, to both sides of each post and 

at intervals not greater than 24" on centers. Fasten to end posts with stretcher bars. 

E. Gates shall be installed to swing freely. Furnish and install all required materials related to 

ensure smooth action and stability. 

3.03 CLEANUP 

A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout.” 



FENCES AND GATES 02830 - 2

SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPING 

GENERAL 

1.01 GENERAL 

A. The terms and definitions stated in these General Conditions shall apply to all sections of 

a. the specifications as set forth fully therein. 

B. The indications on the drawings or the requirements of the specifications and listings 

a. shall be as binding as though shown and/or required by both. 

C. All or part of the work specified herein and/or indicated on the plans, may be completed 

a. by separate Contractors and it shall be the responsibility of each Contractor to determine 

b. the effect of their work upon the work of others. The Contractor, however, is to coordinate 

the various trades under his jurisdiction. 

D. The Contractor shall perform all work in accordance with all applicable building requirements and 

ordinances even though such requirements are not specifically mentioned herein. Any work in 

conflict with such requirements shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's Authorized 

Representative by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not proceed with such work without the 

written approval of the Owner's Authorized Representative. 


A. Contractor shall mean the Contractor or his Sub-Contractor, or his Supplier performing work for the 

Owner's Authorized Representative. 

B. Work shall mean all labor, material, equipment, services, permits and licenses, necessary to furnish 

and/or install in place all materials, equipment and/or appliances specified in any one section and/or 

shown on the plans and/or specifications. 

C. Furnish shall mean to purchase and deliver as directed by the Owner's Authorized Representative, 

all materials, equipment, or appliances specified in any one section and/or shown on the plans 

and/or specifications. 

D. Install shall mean all labor, material, equipment, services necessary to set in place, connect, hook-up 

and/or make ready for operation all materials, equipment and/or appliances furnished by the 

Contractor and/or by others. 

E. Contract shall consist of the written agreement between Contractor and Owner's Authorized 

Representative, Plans, General Conditions, and entire Specification Section for the work being 

performed and what is indicated in one part shall be as binding as if indicated in all parts. 

F. Construction site shall mean the site as indicated by plans and specifications. 

1.03 GUARANTEE 

A. Unless otherwise specified herein, the Contractor, upon completion of the entire work 

described in the Contract, shall provide the Owner's Authorized Representative with a written 

guarantee stating that all work performed as a part to the Contract is fully guaranteed for a period of 

one (1) year from the date of acceptance, and that during said one year period, all defective 

workmanship and/or materials shall be repaired and/or replaced in place, including any work or other 

which has been damaged by such defective workmanship and/or materials and by the repair and/or 

replacement of same, at no additional cost to the Owner's Authorized Representative. 


LANDSCAPING 02900-1

SPECIAL CONDITIONS 

2.01 PERMITS AND SURVEYS 

A. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall establish all lot lines and restrictions. All other lines, 

grades and levels shall be established by the Contractor and he shall verify all dimensions, lines and 

grades indicated on the drawings. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall furnish all surveys. 

Permits and licenses required for execution of the work shall be procured and paid for by the 

Contractor. The Contractor shall give all notices, call for inspections and comply with all laws and 

ordinances bearing on the work. 

2.02 SUPERVISION 

A. The Contractor shall give sufficient supervision to the work, using best skill and attention. When 

absent from job, he will appoint a supervisor capable of discussing minor matters with the Owner's 

Authorized Representative. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications and 

other instructions for the work. Any work indicated in a manner which would make it difficult to 

produce first class work, or any discrepancies or conflicts which appear between drawings and 

specifications and local ordinances or restrictions shall be referred to Owner's Authorized 

Representative for interpretation or correction before proceeding with work. Alleged extras shall be 

presumed to be part of Contract without additional charge unless certified by Owner's Authorized 


B. The maintenance foreman on the job shall be a competent English speaking supervisor, experienced 

in landscape maintenance and capable of discussing matters on the job site. 

C. Workman shall present a neat appearance at all times and shall conduct all work operations and 

dealings with the public in a courteous manner. Workman shall be fully clothed at all times. 

2.03 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Prior to any excavation of the soil, the Contractor shall locate all utilities, cables, conduits, sprinkler 

lines, heads, valves, control wires, sewers, septic tanks and such other utilities as are commonly 

encountered underground and he shall take proper precaution as not to damage or disturb such 

improvements. If a conflict exists between such obstacles and the proposed work, he shall promptly 

notify the Owner's Authorized Representative who will arrange for relocation. Contractor will proceed 

in the same manner if rock layers or any other condition encountered underground makes changes 

advisable. 

B. Notify Landscape Architect in writing of soil or drainage conditions encountered during planting 

operations which are detrimental to the growth of plant material. 

C. The site shall be kept clean and free of excess equipment, materials and rubbish incidental to the 

work during the construction and maintenance period. 

D. The Contractor shall note all existing finish grades prior to commencing work. Restore finish grades 

changed during the course of the work to original contours or intended contours where practical. 

2.04 FINAL INSPECTION 

A. Upon completion of work in its entirety, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Authorized 

Representative who will arrange for final inspection at which time the Contractor shall be present. 

Any assumed or existing variance or omission shall be noted at this time, and the Contractor shall 


LANDSCAPING 02900-2

stipulate when and how said variance will be rectified. When changes, if any, are carried out and the 

areas of work cleaned, the job will be considered completed and the Contract executed. 

2.05 RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORKMANSHIP 

A. Neither completion of the job nor final payment shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for 

guaranteed stated in the Contract, or of responsibility for faulty materials or poor workmanship. The 

Contractor shall promptly remedy any defects which occur during the guarantee period. Notice of 

observed defects will be forwarded to the Contractor by the Owner's Authorized Representative in 

duplicate. Contractor will return one (1) copy of the Contract, noting thereon what action was taken. 

All questions arising under this article shall be decided by the Owner's Authorized Representative. 

2.06 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT 

A. The Owner's Authorized Representative reserves the right to terminate the Contract if in his 

reasonable opinion the Contractor is not performing the Contract as required. Owner's Authorized 

Representative will remunerate Contractor for work to date of termination. 

2.07 INURANCE 

A. Contractor as well as his Contractors, shall not commence work prior to obtaining the following 

necessary insurance policies for compensation and liability insurance to cover his workers and 

installation so as to offer full protection to the owner from any possible damage suit or lien. These 

policies shall be maintained during the life of the Contract and should be produced to the Owner's 

Authorized Representative upon request. 

2.08 COMPLIANCE WITH BUILDING CODES 

A. Work under this contract, plans and specification is to comply with all laws, local municipal and state 

codes, ordinances, rules and regulations governing or relating to the jurisdiction of this project. 

Should the Contractor discover any points of conflict, he shall notify the Landscape Architect at once 

and immediately confirm same in writing. 

2.09 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS 

A. Should the Contractor find discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings or specifications, or 

should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the Landscape Architect, and 

immediately confirm same in writing. 

B. The planting design as indicted on the plans is diagrammatic. Scaled dimensions are approximate. 

Verify all site dimensions prior to proceeding with the work. 

C. Should the Owner's Authorized Representative find it necessary to issue a clarification or change, a 

written Addendum will be delivered to all bidders. 

2.10 ADDENDUM 

A. Any and all Addenda issued by the Owner's Authorized Representative during the time of bidding 

shall form a part of the drawings, specifications and Contract Documents, and shall be included by 

the Contractor in his proposal. 

B. After work has commenced, Field Change Orders or Plan Revisions will be issued to document any 

plan revisions. 

C. For additional work, a purchase order is to be issued to the Contractor prior to the execution of work 


LANDSCAPING 02900-3

other than specified in the Contract. The Contract cannot be amended or added to except by an 

Amendment or Purchase Order signed by the Owner's Authorized Representative. Any work 

performed without such an executed writing shall be presumed to have been included in the Contract 

without additional charge. 

2.11 STATEMENTS OF CONFIRMATION 

The contractor shall submit to the owner's representative, the following items: 

A. Submit, at the time of delivery, invoice statements for organic amendments and fertilizer certifying 

delivery to the site quantities by bulk and/or weight. 

B. Submit supplier's statements of confirmation recording compliance of organic amendments and 

fertilizers with these specifications. 

C. Submit certificates for the following items upon delivery to the job site: 

1) Quantity of commercial fertilizer and organic fertilizer. 

2) Quantity of soil amendments. 

3) Quantity of other soil additives per agronomic soils test report. 

4) Submit written certificate of container or bulk materials. 

5) Submit written certificate of quantity and quality of plant materials. 

3.01 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. Soil preparation and planting, per plan. 


A. General - all materials shall be best available. 

1) Submit color photographs 60 days prior to installation to the Landscape Architect and Owner's 

representative of specified trees, shrubs and vines taken at their sources, for approval. The 

photos shall be of the plant material to be delivered to the job site, and plant material delivered 

shall be of equal or better quality as the photo given as a representative sample. 

2) Do not begin soil preparation and planting until all work such as header installation, walks, 

paving, concrete work, electrical except for fixture location, fencing except where access is 

necessary, drainage work, gas line installation, irrigation work, and any other work required 

under plans and specifications around planting areas is completed and approved. Specimen 

trees twenty (20) inch, and larger box sizes or palm trees are exempt from this rule where 

access might be restricted by construction phases of landscaping or building. All plants and 

planting shall be continually maintained by the Landscape Contractor. 

B. Plant Material - All plants shall be healthy, of normal growth, well rooted, free from disease, insect 

eggs and larvae. The roots shall show no evidence of having been restricted, deformed or root 

bound at any time. 

1) Plants not conforming to the requirements specified, i.e.: rootbound, diseased, having pests, 

or planted in unacceptable soil mix, will be considered defective. Such plants, whether in 

place or not, will be marked as rejected and shall be immediately replaced at no cost (labor 

or materials) to client with new acceptable plants. 

2) Varieties and sizes of plants shall be as stated in the plant list or on the plans. 

3) Under no conditions will there be any substitution of plants or sizes for those listed on the 

accompanying plans, except with the express written consent of the Landscape Architect. 


LANDSCAPING 02900-4

4) All plants shall be true to name and one of each lot shall be tagged with the name and size 

of the plants in accordance with the standards of practice recommended by the American 

Association of Nurserymen. 

5) Special care shall be taken to insure that plants in containers are adequately watered. 

Water for soil preparation, planting and irrigation will be furnished by owner. 

6) Sizes of plant material is to be that normally expected for commercially available nursery 

stock for varieties specified on these plans. 

7) The root system should fill the container, but not be root bound. 

8) If plant quantities are shown on these plans, they are estimates only. The Landscape 

Contractor is responsible for counting circles or other plant symbols used within these plans 

to determine actual material totals. Landscape Contractor shall inform Owner or Landscape 

Architect of any discrepancies between plant circles or symbol quantities versus quantities 

shown in callouts. 

3.03 GENERAL WORK PROCEDURES 

A. Work procedures shall follow best customary practice. 

3.04 WEED CONTROL 

A. Weed before and during preliminary grading and finish grading. All weeds and grasses shall be dug 

out by the roots and removed from site or treated with a systemic herbicide such as Roundup or 

equal. Site shall be maintained and remain weed free until turnover to the Owner's Authorized 


B. Apply pre-emergent weed control such as Ronstar-G, Treflan, Eptan, or equal. 

3.05 SOIL ANALYSIS AND CONDITIONING 

A. Agriculture suitability test report for on site soil, on site topsoil plus backfill recommendations. 

1) The Contractor shall submit a report to the Owner's representative prior to ordering soil 

amendments or plant materials. 

2) Take two (2) samples of site soil at a depth of 6 to 12 inches, within proposed planting areas, 

after completion of grading and prior to weed control and soil preparation. 

3) Submit samples to certified soil testing facility for soil evaluation. 

4) Request testing for agricultural fertility and suitability (Test No. A-05) with written 

recommendations for soil amendments and post-maintenance fertilization programs. 

5) Submit copies of the report to the Landscape Architect and Owner's representative. 

B. Soil in areas to be planted should be thoroughly cultivated with recommended amendments in 

two directions to a depth of 12". For lawn and ground cover areas incorporate 

the recommended amendments to a depth of 4" - 6". For tree, shrub and vine planting areas 

incorporate recommended amendments to a depth of 9", by means of rototiller or approved 

equal. 

C. Import topsoil: 

The Contractor shall have obtained results from soil testing to determine if soil to be imported 

shall be amended. 

1) Furnish the source of imported topsoil to the Owner's representative for approval. Submit 

test results and schedule of recommended soil amendment adjustments to Owner's 

representative for approval. 


LANDSCAPING 02900-5

D. Backfill 

A. The backfill recommended should be thoroughly blended with native soil prior to use for backfill 

purposes. Also, any use of iron sulfate should not contact cement surfaces since severe staining 

could occur. 

All native plant material shall be backfilled with native site soil. 

D. Plant Packet fertilizer: 

Use Nutri-Pak 3 year commercial fertilizer packets placed equally around the plant 6 - 8 inches deep 

near, but not direct contact with roots. 

1) 16-8-8 for trees, shrubs and vines in the following amounts: 

Plant Size No. of 3 year packets 

1 gallon 1 

5 gallon 2 

15 gallon 3 

24" box 4 

30" box 5 

36" box 6 

42" box 7 

48" box 8 

Refer to Nutri-Pak instructions for further information. Contact Evans L. Slater of Cynevan Associates 

(619)323-2250. 

3.06 TREE, SHRUB AND VINE PLANTING 

A. Percolation Testing: 

1) Upon completion of the rough grading of the site, the Owner's Representative shall identify a 

typical location for one of the largest specimen box trees. Landscape Contractor is to confirm 

with Landscape Architect or Owner's Representative for frequency of testing. The contractor 

shall excavate the pit for the tree per the project specifications and details. 

2) With the Owner present, the Contractor shall fill the pit with water to a depth of 12", if 

possible. The length of time required for the water to percolate into the soil, leaving the pit 

empty, will be measured by the contractor and verified by the owner's Representative. 

3) Within six hours of the time the water has drained from the pit the Contractor, with the Owner 

present, shall again fill the pit with water to a depth of 12". If water does not completely 

percolate into the soil within 9 hours, a determination will be made by the Owner as to 

whether or not a drainage system for each tree will be required. Refer to specimen tree and 

palm tree drainage details. 

B. Refer to Planting Details for construction and sizes of plant pits. 

C. Fill soil around ball of plant and water it thoroughly, using back fill of soil as recommended. Back fill 

shall be settled by tamping and refilling to form a shallow basin as wide as the ball, around each 

plant for watering. This is to be prior to ground cover installation. 

D. All plants shall be set so that, when settled, the rootballs are exposed approximately 1 inch above 

finish grade. No native soil will be allowed to cover root ball. 

E. No material shall be planted if the ball is broken or cracked either before or during the process of 


LANDSCAPING 02900-6

planting. 

F. Immediately after planting, stake all trees to prevent damage from wind. Install Guy wires only as 

needed on larger trees. Refer to tree staking and guying details and submit prices for each. 

G. Prepare raised earth basin as wide as ball at each plant for watering prior to ground cover and lawn 

installation. 

H. Grade areas around plants, to finish grade and dispose of excess soil. 

I. Watering - immediately after planting, water shall be applied to each tree and shrub, in such a 

manner as not to disturb backfill, and to the extent that all materials in the planting hole are 

thoroughly saturated. 

J. Before any plants are planted, all planted areas are to have been graded in an acceptable manner to 

assure positive drainage. 

K. All box trees shall be pre-selected by Landscape Architect when deemed necessary to insure quality. 

L. All 1,5, and 15-gallon trees shall be staked per detail. 20" box trees and larger are to be either 

staked or guyed as necessary or as specified by Landscape Architect. 

M. Contractor shall be responsible for stockpiling (by nursery) of tree boxes and insuring they are 

returned to suppliers in good condition. Contractor shall notify nurseries for pick-up. 

N. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all planting until final inspection and approval by 

Landscape Architect and turn over to the Owner's Authorized Representative. 

O. If required, Contractor shall submit with bid unit prices for all landscape materials (should be installed 

prices). 

P. Contractor shall verify location of all underground utilities and services prior to any digging. 

Contractor assumes full responsibility for all damage caused by failure to do so. 

Q. All plant material shall be spotted by Contractor and approved on site by Landscape Architect, prior 

to digging pits, when determined necessary. 

R. Refer to landscape plan and detail for method of separating all shrub/ground cover areas from lawn 

areas. 

S. Where circumstances permit, plant shrubs a minimum of 30" from all landscape light fixtures. 

T. Where circumstances permit, plant no specimen tree closer than five (5) feet to edge of paving, 

headerboard or roof line. Deep root devices are recommended for any specimen trees planted 

closer than ten (10) feet or palms planted closer than four (4) feet to any hardscape, walls or 

building. Use per method specified on "Root Barrier" detail. Consult Landscape Architect prior to 

planting. 

U. Where circumstances permit, plant no shrub closer than eighteen (18) inches to an edge of paving or 

headerboard. 

V. All vines and espaliers to be removed from stake or trellis and fastened to walls with fastening 

method described in the planting notes. 

W. Provide all shrubs which need support with !" square redwood stakes. Once installed, trim top of 


LANDSCAPING 02900-7

take 6" below top of shrub. Use green plastic ties. 

X. Refer to planting details and additional planting notes shown on plans. 

Y. Install deep root arbor guards for trees in turf areas. Use stock # AG8-4 unless otherwise directed. 

3.07 GROUND COVER PLANTING 

A. Ground covers shall be planted sufficiently deep to cover all roots and spaced as specified in ground 

cover list on landscape plan. 

B. Ground cover plants shall have been grown in flats and shall remain in those flats until time for 

transplanting. At time of transplanting, the flat soil shall contain sufficient moisture so that the soil 

does not fall apart when lifting plants from the flat. Each plant shall be planted with its proportionate 

amount of the flat soil in a manner that will insure a minimum of disturbance to the root system. 

C. Ground cover plants shall not be allowed to dry out before or while being planted. Wilted plants will 

not be accepted. 

D. At the time of planting ground cover plants, the earth around each plant shall be firmed sufficiently to 

force out all air pockets. 

3.08 WATERING 

A. Container Material - Plants 

1) Immediately after planting, apply water to each tree, shrub and vine by means of a hose. Apply 

water in a moderate stream in the planting hole until the material about the roots is completely 

saturated from the bottom of the hole to the top of the ground. 

2) Water plants which cannot be watered efficiently with the existing water systems by means of a 

hose. 

3) Apply water in sufficient quantities, and as often as seasonal conditions require to keep the 

ground wet at all times, well below the root system of grass and planting. Do not cause erosion 

damage in watering slopes. 

3.09 PROTECTION OF PROJECT 

A. The Contractor shall carefully and continuously protect and maintain all areas included in the 

contract, including lawn areas, plant materials, etc. until final acceptance of the work by Owner's 

Authorized Representative, for the period of time stated in the contract. 

3.10 INSPECTION 

A. Final inspection shall be called at the end of planting operations and the maintenance period for the 

purpose of determining compliance with plan and specification intent, workmanship and clean-up. 

Owner's Authorized Representatives shall receive written verification of inspection dates, any 

corrections required to work and limits of inspected area before acceptance of corrective work. 

WARRANTIES 

A. The Contractor shall warranty all plant material for a period of 90 days after final inspection and 

acceptance by the Landscape Architect. Landscape Maintenance Contractor is to take appropriate 

action when any tree appears to be in stress. This action is to include soil and tissue samples to 

determine the nature of the problem. 


LANDSCAPING 02900-8

B. The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of written notification by Landscape Architect, remove and 

replace all guaranteed plant material which for any reason fails to meet the requirements of the 

guarantee. Replacement shall be made with plant materials originally specified and shall meet 

original guarantees. 

C. All replacement material shall meet the specifications as the original material approved at the time of 

original installation and shall also be warrantied for the same length of time. 

MAINTENANCE 

A. Contractor shall adhere to the following fertilization specifications during the established maintenance 

period: 

1) If the 16-20-0 is incorporated during planting as recommended, the post-planting maintenance 

can consist primarily of a nitrogen-only fertilizer program. Beginning approximately 30 days after 

planting, ammonium sulfate, which will have an acidifying effect on the soil, should be applied at 

the rate of 5 lbs. Per 1,000 square feet on a monthly basis. However, in order to ensure 

continuing adequate solid phosphorus and potassium nutrition, Best Fertilizer Company 16-6-8 

or equal should be substituted for the ammonium sulfate in early spring and again in late fall at 

the rate of 6 lbs. Per 1,000 square feet. Also, when plants have been well established, the 

frequency of fertilizer applications can be decreased. 

B. The entire project is to be maintained for a period of approximately 60 calendar days, commencing 

from the time Owner's Authorized Representative and Owner's Authorized Representative's 

representative walks Preliminary Walk. 

C. Plant maintenance work shall consist of application of water, weeding, caring for, edging and moving 

of lawns and performing the following final plant establishment work. 

1) During the final maintenance period, all plants and planted areas shall be kept well watered 

and weed free at all times. Weeds, Dallas and Johnson Grass and Bermuda Grass shall be 

removed. 

2) Approximately 30 to 45 days after initial planting, apply a slow release balanced fertilizer to 

both the turf and shrub area at a rate of !# of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. 

3) Contractor shall be responsible for disease and pest control during the maintenance period 

and a record of pesticides used shall be furnished to Owner's Authorized Representative. 

4) Contractor shall raise or lower sprinkler heads to proper level and shall adjust heads as 

needed for full coverage. 

5) In case of negligent or improper maintenance, the Landscape Architect shall state in writing 

to the Contractor his observations and recommendations. Any claim not in writing shall not 

be considered. 

6) All plants that show sign of failure to grow at any time during the life of the contract, including 

the maintenance period, or those plants so injured or damaged as to render them unsuitable 

for the purpose intended, shall be replaced in kind within ten (10) days of written notification, 

at the expense of the Contractor. 

D. The following is a guideline for the water requirements for date palms during the trees establishment 

period (2 to 3 years). Consideration must be given to unseasonably high or low temperatures: 

January 40-50 Gallons Per Day 

February 50-60 Gallons Per Day 

March 60-70 Gallons Per Day 

April 60-70 Gallons Per Day 


LANDSCAPING 02900-9

May 70-80 Gallons Per Day 

June 90-100 Gallons Per Day 

July 100-110 Gallons Per Day 

August 100-110 Gallons Per Day 

September 100-110 Gallons Per Day 

October 90-100 Gallons Per Day 

November 65-75 Gallons Per Day 

December 45-55 Gallons Per Day 

Newly planted trees should receive 80% of the above rates gradually working up to 100% over a 9 month 

period (from planting date). Evapo-transporation rates and contributions of water from other sources 

(lawn or shrub irrigation) should also be factored in to reach water totals. This information is meant to be 

used to check the amount of water within the trees root zone for specific determinations. 


LANDSCAPING 02900-10

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 

Section 03300 – Concrete Work 



SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK 



A. Drawings, and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary 

Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. The extent of concrete work, including formwork and reinforcing steel, is shown on the 

Drawings. 

B. Installation of anchor bolts and installation and grouting of base plates and foundations is 

included under this section. 

C. Refer to Drawings for additional references to concrete work. 

D. New concrete aprons adjacent to building within building limit line are included in this section. 


A. General: Refer to Division 1 Section “Submittals” for general requirements. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for reinforcing steel to the Architect for review prior to 

fabrication. Comply with A/C 315 "Manual of Standard Practice For Detailing Reinforced 

Concrete Structures". Indicate fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing. Include 

bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete 

reinforcement, and special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. 

C. Product Data: Submit data for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, 

patching compounds, curing compounds and others as requested by Architect. 

D. Proposed Mix Design: For each strength and type of concrete specified, submit at least 15 

days prior to start of work. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and 

standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 

1. International Building Code, latest edition. 

2. ACI Standards Publication No. 347R Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 

3. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" 

4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" 

5. ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual. 

6. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice". 

B. Testing Services: Refer to General Requirements. Tests for cast-in-place concrete are 

specified in this section. 

C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of 

work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at 

Contractor's expense. 


CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 1

D. Test Patch Area: Contractor shall prepare a test patch area 10' by 1' of sealed concrete floor 

slab for review and acceptance of finish by Architect. 

E. Power Scrubbing: Do not power scrub floor prior to installation of joint sealant. 

F. Job Conditions: Make provisions for, coordinate with and provide access to all Sub- 

Contractors for the installation of required pipe sleeves, conduit, etc. Core drilling of panels 

will not be allowed without prior written approval from Architect/Engineer. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. Furnish a one (1) year warranty for concrete materials and workmanship. Promptly replace 

defective work as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the owner. Pitting, 

spalling, crazing, and moving shall be considered defective work. 


2.01 FORM MATERIALS 

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other 

acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. 

Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete 

without bow or deflection. If plywood is used for forms, comply with U.S. Product Standard 

PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class 1, Exterior Grade or better, mil-oiled and edgesealed. 

B. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond 

with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments 

of concrete surfaces. 

C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, 

designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide 

units which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2" to surface. 

1. Architectural Concrete: Provide “cone” ties with 1” diameter cones. 

2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, Grade 40 or A706 weldable reinforcing bars as 

notes on plans, deformed. 

B. Welded Wire Fabric (WWF): ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric. 

C. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, plain cold-drawn steel. 

D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, 

supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, and complying with CRSI recommendations, 

unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 

1. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base 

material will not support chair legs. 

2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with 

forms, provide supports with legs which are plastic protected (CRSI, Class I). 

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS 



A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 

1. Type II: All concrete in contact with soil. 

2. Type I: All uses except where Type II is specified. 

3. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise acceptable to 

Architect. 

B. Fly Ash: 15 percent maximum by weight. 

C. Aggregates: ASTM C-33. For exterior exposed concrete, do not use fine or coarse 

aggregates containing spall-causing deleterious substances. 

D. Water: Potable. 

E. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent 

chloride ions. 

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other 

required admixtures. 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be 

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. "Air-Mix" or "Perma-Air," Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co. 

c. "MB-VR" or "Micro-Air," Master Builders, Inc. 

d. "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc. 

e. "Sika AER," Sika Corp. 

G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 


incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co. 

c. "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc. 

d. "Prokrete-N" Prokrete Industries. 

e. "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp. 

H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may 

be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 

a. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem" W.R. Grace 

b. "PSP" Prokrete Industries 

c. "Sikament 300" Sika Corp. 

d. "Eucon 37" Euclid Chemical Co. 

e. "Rheobuild" Master Builders 

I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. 


incorporated in the work include, but are limited to the following: 

a. "Accelguard 80," Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. "Daraset," W.R. Grace & Co. 

c. "Pozzutec 20," Master Builders, Inc. 

J. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 





a. "Pozzolith R" Master Builders 

b. "Eucon Retarder 75" Euclid Chemical Co. 

c. "Daratard 17" W.R. Grace 

d. "Plastiment" Sika Chemical Co. 

K. Calcium Chloride: NOT PERMITTED 

2.04 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Moisture Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171: 

a. Waterproof Paper 

b. Polyethylene Film 

c. Polyethylene-coated Burlap 

B. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing/Sealing Compound: Two coat application. 

1. Products: Provide curing-sealing compound from one of the following manufacturers: 

a. “Ashford Formula,” Curecrete Chemical Co., Springville, UT, (801/489-5663) 

b. “Sealtex 400,” Rocky Mountain Supply Co., Lakewood, CO (303/988-6294). 

C. Expansion Joint Filler: Bituminous impregnated fiberboard, complying with ASTM 1751, 

AASHO M-213. 

D. Joint Sealant: Construction or control joint filler shall be a semi-rigid epoxy with a shore "A" 

hardness of 80 +/-. 

1. Available Products: Provide one of the following products: 

a. "Penatron RM/3003," Accelerated Systems Technology Corp., Riverside, CA 

(714-781-4990). 

b. "Degadur 330," Degussa Corporation, Allendale, N.J. 07401 (201-818- 

3700). 

E. Anti-Spalling Compound: Compound consisting of 50% linseed oil and 50% (by volume) of 

commercial grade kerosene or mineral spirits. Products complying with ASTM D-260, 

FSS-TT-L-190c may be used. 

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: CRD-C 621, factory premixed grout. 



a. "Masterflow 713," Master Builders 

b. "Sonogrout," BASF 

c. "Euco-NS," Euclid Chemical Co. 

d. "Crystex," L&M Construction Chemical Co. 

e. "Sure-Grip Grout," Dayton Superior Corp. 

2. Minimum PSI: 4,000. 

G. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type. 



a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only): 

1) "Superior Concrete Bonder," Dayton Superior Corp. 

2) "Euco Weld," Euclid Chemical Co. 

3) "Weld-Crete," Larsen Products Corp. 

4) "Everweld," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 

b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene: 

1) "Day-Chem Ad Bond," Dayton Superior Corp. 



2) "SBR Latex," Euclid Chemical Co. 

3) "Daraweld C," W.R. Grace & Co. 

4) "Everbond," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 

5) "Acryl-Set," Master Builders, Inc. 

6) "Intralok," W.R. Meadows, Inc. 

7) "Sonocrete," BASF 

H. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp 

surfaces. Provide material "Type", "Grade", and "Class" to suite project requirements. 



a. "Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620" Euclid Chem. Co. 

b. "Epabond," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 

c. "Concresive 1001," Master Builders, Inc. 

d. "Sikudur 32 Hi-Mod," Sika Corp. 

I. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand. 

J. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder cover over prepared base material where indicated 

below slabs on grade. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in 

accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: 

1. Water-resistant barrier consisting of heavy Kraft papers laminated together with 

glass-fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side. 

a. Available Product: "Moistop," Fortifiber Corp. 

2. Vapor Retarder Joint Tape shall be 3M #890 or approved equal glass filament 

acetate tape. 

2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN MIXES 

A. Contractor is to prepare design mixes for each strength of concrete by either laboratory trial 

batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. Use an independent testing 

facility for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 

B. Provide concrete strengths as follows: 

1. Footings and Poured-In-Place Foundation Walls: 3,000 psi 

2. Exterior Slabs On Grade: 4,000 psi 

3. All Other Poured-In-Place Concrete: 3,000 psi 

4. Interior Slab on Grade: 4,000 psi 

5. Maximum water to cement ratio shall not exceed 0.53 for all concrete. 

C. Cement Content: 

1. 3000 psi: 480 pounds per cubic yard 

2. 4000 psi: 560 pounds per cubic yard 

2.06 ADMIXTURES 

A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in 

concrete as required for placement and workability. 

B. Use non-chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures 

below 50 deg F (10 deg C). 

C. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: Use in all pumped concrete, and interior and 

exterior slabs on grade, in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. 



D. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add 

air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of 

placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the 

following limits: 

1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or 

hydraulic pressure: 

a. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) 1-1/2-inch 

max. aggregate. 

b. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 1-inch max. 

aggregate. 

c. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 3/4-inch 

max. aggregate. 

d. 5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure) 1/2-inch 

max aggregate. 

2. Other concrete (not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure) or to receive 

a surface hardener: 2 percent to 4 percent air. 

3. Interior slabs shall not be air entrained. 

E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's 

directions. 

F. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement 

as follows: 

1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3" 

2. Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3" 

3. Concrete Containing HRWR Admixture (super-plasticizer): Not more than 8" after 

addition of HRWR to site-verified 2"-3" slump concrete. 

4. Other Concrete: Not less than 1" and not more than 4" 

2.07 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with ASTM C94 and as specified. 

1. Delete references for allowing additional water to be added to batch for material with 

insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. 

2. When air temperature is between 85 o F (30 o C) and 90 o F (32 o C), reduce mixing and 

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 

90 o F (32 o C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes, and when air 

temperature is about 100°F (38°C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 45 minutes. 


3.01 FORMS 

A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral static and 

dynamic loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. 

Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, 

alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with 

ACI 347R. 

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate 

alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for 

openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, 

blocking screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, and inserts, and other features required in the 



work. 

C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. 

Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 

D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for 

inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. 

E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber 

chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. 

F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work 

of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades 

providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 

G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. 

Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten 

forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and 

maintain proper alignment. 

3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing 

Reinforcing Bars" for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as 

herein specified. Refer to Drawings for additional notes. 

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials, which reduce 

or destroy bond with concrete. 

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and 

support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. 

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, 

space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during 

concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward 

exposed concrete surfaces. 

1. Cast-In-Place Concrete: 

a. Cast against and permanently exposed to earth: minimum cover 3". 

b. Concrete exposed to earth or weather: 

1) #6 through #18 bars: 2" minimum cover. 

2) #5 and smaller bars: 1-1/2" minimum cover. 

E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one 

full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous 

laps in either direction. 

1. Fiber mesh is not an acceptable replacement for wire fabric. 

3.03 JOINTS 

A. Construction Joints: Provide construction joints at the following locations: 

1. Where shown on the Drawings. 

2. At end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a 

period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at 

expansion joints. 



3. Locate construction joints not shown on the Drawings so as not to impair the strength 

of the structure. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in walls, slabs, and between 

walls and footings. 

4. Where load transfer-slip dowel devices are used, install so that one end of each 

dowel bar is free to move. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. 

5. Do not tool edges of construction joints at interior concrete slabs. 

B. Contraction (Control) Joints: Provide contraction (control) joints, sectioning concrete into 

areas as shown on Drawings. If not shown, provide joints at 15 feet on center, locating joints 

under partitions where possible. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 

concrete thickness or a minimum of 1". 

1. Form contraction joints using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or 

diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will 

not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for 

other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, 

diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. 

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain 

required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support 

screed strips using of strike-off templates or compacting type screeds. 

3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES 

A. Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, non-residual form-coating compound 

before reinforcement is placed. 

B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with 

in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance 

with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against 

rusting. 


A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing 

steel and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their 

work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. 

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 

C. Coordinate the installation of joint materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 

D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed 

on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seals or planes 

of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as 

herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. 

E. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 

24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of 



several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 

F. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by 

hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of 

concrete in accordance with ACI 309. 

G. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators 

vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. 

Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not 

insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit 

duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of 

reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. 

H. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, 

within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is complete. 

1. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or 

darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces 

prior to beginning finishing operations. 

3.07 COLD WEATHER PLACING 

A. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by 

frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306, and as herein 

specified. 

B. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 o F (4 o C), uniformly heat 

water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 

50 o F (10 o C), and not more than 80 o F (27 o C) at point of placement. 

1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place 

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 

2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or 

chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 

3.08 HOT WEATHER PLACING 

A. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of 

concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305, and as herein specified. 

B. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 

90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control 

temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. 

Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 

C. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel 

temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in 

concrete. 

D. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 

E. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or 

other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect. 

3.09 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES 



A. Rough Form Finish: For formed surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work. 

1. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections 

exceeding 1/4". 

B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed surfaces exposed to view. 

1. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, 

arranged orderly and symmetrically, with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch 

defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. 

C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to exposed concrete surfaces, which 

have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. 

Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform 

color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the 

rubbing process. 

3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES 

A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor 

topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied 

cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. 

1. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerances for floor flatness (Ff) of 15 and floor 

levelness (Fl) of 13. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After 

leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 

B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other 

finishes as follows: 

1. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or 

inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of 

FF18-FL15. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drain 

as shown. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular 

texture. 

C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab 

surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic tile, paint, or other thin-film 

finish coating system. 

1. Consolidate concrete surface with power driven triple paddle machine to produce a 

hardburnished finish free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and 

with surface leveled to tolerance of FF20-FL17. Grind surface if necessary to 

maintain tolerance and to remove surface defects that would telegraph through 

applied floor covering system. 

D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, 

apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine 

brooming. 

E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, walks, ramps, and 

elsewhere where indicated. 

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with 

fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish 

with Architect before application. 

3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 



temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss 

before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before 

power floating and troweling. 

1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after 

placing and finishing. Weather permitting; keep continuously moist for not less than 

seven (7) days. 

B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover 

curing, or by curing and sealing compound, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 

C. Provide moisture curing by the following methods: 

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 

2. Continuous water-fog spray. 

3. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating 

cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide 

coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive 

covers. 

D. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: 

1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in 

widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by 

waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing 

period, using cover material and waterproof tape. 

E. Provide curing and sealing compound to slabs as follows: Coordinate with installation of joint 

sealers in toppings and slabs. 

1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final 

finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours after surface water sheen has 

disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in 

accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall 

within three (3) hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair 

damage during curing period. 

2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with 

finish materials applied directly to concrete. 

3. Interior floor slabs with sealer finish are to be cured and sealed only with liquid 

membrane forming curing/sealing compound specified. Apply floor sealer in two (2) 

coats at application rates recommended by manufacturer as follows: 

a. Application requirements: The first application at 200 square feet per gallon 

as the curing agent at time of concrete placement. 

b. After application of joint sealant, Contractor shall power scrub floor clean 

before application of second coat. Apply at a rate of 400 square feet per 

gallon 

4. All work must be performed by a factory approved applicator. 

5. Warranty: 

a. Upon completion of the work, as a condition of its acceptance, furnish the 

owner a written warranty signed by an officer of the manufacturer. 

F. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, 

supported slabs, and other similar surfaces by moisture curing, with forms in place for full 

curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods 

specified above, as applicable. 

G. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other 



flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method. 

1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining 

cover, unless otherwise directed. 

H. At all exterior concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks, apply anti-spalling compound in two 

coats with an application rate of 300 square feet per gallon (each coat). 

3.12 REMOVAL OF FORMS 

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and 

similar part of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 o F 

(10 o C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be 

damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are 

maintained. 

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other 

structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained 

at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential 

compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of 

concrete location or members. 

C. Form facing material may be removed four (4) days after placement, only if shores and other 

vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without 

loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 

3.13 REUSE OF FORMS 

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or 

otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply 

new form coating compound as specified for new formwork. 

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, 

remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid 

offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to 

Architect. 

3.14 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage or work by other 

trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. 

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations 

as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct 

elevations, complying with certified diagrams, or templates of manufacturer furnishing 

machines and equipment. 

C. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified 4,000 psi non-shrink grout. 

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS 

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately 

after removal of forms. 

B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods 



and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of 

cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and 

brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after 

bonding compound has dried. 

C. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so 

that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at 

inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. 

Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 

D. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if 

defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include 

color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins, 

and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed 

by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar. 

E. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects, which affect the 

durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. 

F. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for 

smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. 

Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for 

trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. 

1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of 

concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide 

or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections, 

regardless of width; spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other 

objectionable conditions. 

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at 

least 14 days. 

3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of 

surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching 

compound. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary 

underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect and Pace's 

Field Representative. 

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" 

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas 

to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 

3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching 

concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to 

provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and 

finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent 

concrete. 

G. Repair isolated random cracks and holes as follows: 

1. Cracks 3/8" and less in width shall be routed out to sound concrete and filled with 

Permagile T250. 

2. Cracks larger than 3/8" shall be routed out to sound concrete and filled with Sikadur 

Lo Mod. 

3. Small holes up to 3/8" diameter shall be cut out to sound concrete and filled with 

Sikatop 122. 

4. Holes larger than 3/8" shall be cut out to sound concrete and filled with Sikadur Lo 

Mod. 



H. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using 

specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. 

I. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance by the Architect. 

J. At locations where the entire slab thickness is removed and replaced, the new concrete slab 

shall be doweled into the existing adjacent slab. 

3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform initial tests and to submit test reports. 

Cost of retesting or additional testing when initial testing indicates noncompliance, will be 

paid for by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Contract. 

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the 

following, as directed by Architect or Engineer. 

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with 

ASTM C 94. 

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type 

of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 

3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight 

concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each 

day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. 

4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 o F (4 o C) and below, 

and when 80 o F (27 o C) and above; and each time a set of compression test 

specimens are made. 

5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 3 standard cylinders for each 

compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for 

laboratory-cured test specimens, except when field-cure test specimens are required. 

6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 

cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of 

each concrete class placed in one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, one 

specimen tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if 

required. 

7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of 

concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each 

batch if fewer than 5 are used. 

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion 

laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective 

procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. 

9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three 

consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, 

and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive by more than 

500 psi. 

D. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer, 

and Contractor within 24 hours after tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests 

shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name 

of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, 

design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; 

compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. 

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be 

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 



F. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test 

results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained 

in the structure, as directed by the Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine 

adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by such other 

methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional 

testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. The Owner may employ 

another testing laboratory to verify extent of defective work; results of such testing shall be 

made available to Architect and Contractor. 






DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 

Section 04200 – Unit Masonry 



SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes reinforced hollow clay brick and related items necessary to complete the 

work and thin brick for application at the new hallway in the existing building. 

1. This section includes interior and exterior brick sealers. 


1. Refer to Division 3 Section “Concrete Work” for reinforcing, except for horizontal joint 

reinforcement. Furnish and install reinforcement under this section. 

2. Refer to Division 7 Section “Sheet Membrane Waterproofing” for waterproofing 

system installed at masonry exposed to earth. 

C. Materials installed in this section but furnished by other Sections: anchors, bolts, sleeves for 

all piping, electrical conduits, outlet boxes, etc. 

D. Concrete Masonry Units: Substitution of concrete masonry units for brick, where brick 

is not exposed to view is permitted only where indicated in the drawings. 


A. Samples: 

1. Submit two samples of each type of unit masonry specified. 

2. Provide masonry sample panel, 4 ft. x 4 ft., erected with tooling, mortar, color and 

workmanship to represent actual work. Final brick selection shall be made only 

following architect’s review of sample panel. Brick from manufactured material for 

project shall be shipped to site and sample panel erected. No brick shall be shipped 

from manufacturer to site until architect’s acceptance of job panel which has been 

erected from actual material for project. This panel shall replace the sample panel 

and shall remain on site throughout construction, and become the project standard 

for bond, mortar, workmanship, and appearance. 

3. Submit test report and certificate of conformance document for each type and color of 

brick specified on contract documents for architect’s approval. 

4. Test reports shall include: 

a. Compressive strength 

b. 24 hour cold water absorption 

c. 5 hour boil absorption 

d. Saturation Coefficient 

e. Initial Rate of Absorption (I.R.A.) 

f. Efflorescence 

g. Weather classification 

5. Certificate of conformance shall state that brick meets or exceeds applicable ASTM 

specifications indicated herein. 


A. Verify all measurements shown on the drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and 

attachment of all unit masonry is required. 

B. Coordinate with other trades whose work relates to unit masonry installation for the placing of 

all required blocking, sub-framing, backing, furring, etc., to ensure proper location and 


UNIT MASONRY 04200-1

installation. 

C. All tests shall be performed by an independent certified testing laboratory. All tests shall be in 

accordance with ASTM C-67 latest edition. 


A. Deliver and store materials in dry, protected areas. Keep free of stain or other damage. 

Replace any damaged material at no additional cost to Owner. 


2.01 APPROVED MASONRY CONTRACTORS 

A. The following masonry contractors have been prequalified by the District and are the only 

approved subcontractors that will be allowed to bid on this project. 

1. Doyle Hatfield Masonry, 801-423-3755, P.O. Box 1217, Salem, Utah 

2. Eldredge Masonry, 801-766-0573, 2391 West 780 South, Lehi, Utah 

3. Troy Hales Masonry, 801-369-3075, 1429 East 400 North, Spanish Fork, Utah 

4. Mcqueen Masonry, 801-282-3331, 4014 Nike Drive, West Jordan, Utah 

5. Allens Masonry, 801-444-2821, PO Box 69, Farmington, Utah 

6. Harv & Higam Masonry, 801-446-2763, P.O. Box 1137, Draper, Utah 

7. Emco Masonry, 801-489-765, P.O. Box 623, Springville, Utah 

2.02 BRICK 

A. All brick shown on contract documents shall be color, texture as manufactured by: 

1. Interstate Brick, 9780 South 5200 West, West Jordan, Utah 84088-5689 

2. H.C. Muddox, 4875 Bradshaw Road, Sacramento, CA 95827-9793 

3. Gladding, McBean, 601 7 th Street, P.O. Box 97, Lincoln, CA 95648 

B. Dimensions: Width x Height x Length. 

C. Maximum Saturation Coefficient: 0.78. 

D. Minimum IRA: 6 g/30 sq. in. 

E. Maximum IRA: 30 g/30 sq. in. Where IRA exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in., pre-wet brick. 

F. Hollow Brick: ASTM C-652 latest edition, Grade SW, Type HBX or better. 

1. Minimum compressive strength: 6,000 psi. 

2. Hollow Brick Types (refer to drawings) 

a. Type “1” Field Brick: Atlas Brick 8 x 4 x 16 nominal. 

1) Color: Copperstone. 

b. Type “2” Accent Brick: Atlas Brick 8 x 4 x 16 nominal 

1) Color: Ironstone. 

3. Nominal depth (wall thickness) of Atlas Brick is 8-inches except where 6-inch thick 

walls are indicated in the drawings. 

4. At interior brick walls, provide bullnose corners where vertical external corners 

are exposed to view, unless noted otherwise. 

G. Accessories 

1. Brick Sealer: 

a. Interior Masonry Walls: Water based curing and sealing compound, nonyellowing, 

ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. 



2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) 

1) Products: “Luster Seal WB 150,” Euclid Chemical Company 

2) Or approved equal. 

3) Gloss: Low sheen. 

b. Exterior Masonry Products: 

1) Hydrozo Enviroseal 20 (20% silane), BASF 

2) Aqua-Trete BSM 20 

3) Or approved equal. 

A. Provide all masonry shapes and sizes as indicated on the drawings. Units to conform to 

ASTM C-90, grade N-I. Maximum dimension for cells shall be 3". Block shall have uniform 

texture. Weight shall equal 125 pounds or greater and minimum strength of 2000 PSI based 

on net area. Weight shall be light weight (105 PCF). 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I. 

2. Aggregates: Sand, ASTM C-144, except with not less than 5% (by weight) passing a 

No. 8 sieve, and with 95% to 100% (by weight) pass a 3/8" sieve. 

B. Provide masonry units of sufficient strength to obtain composite prism strengths of 1,500 psi 

compression for hollow units at 28 days. 

C. Block Types: 

1. Type “1”: 8” high by 16” long nominal, width to match brick wall, for use where not 

expose to view and where allowed by structural drawings. 

a. Color: Natural gray 

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as 

required to produce required mortar color. 

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C-207, Type S. 

C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C-144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded 

with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 

D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C-404. 

E. Water: Potable. 

F. Minimum Allowable Strength: 2,600 psi at 28 days. 

2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 

A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, 

accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, 


1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 

2. Refer to structural notes for additional requirements. 

3. Mortar Color: As selected by Architect. Colors will be selected to coordinate with the 

brick colors and may include more than one color. 



B. Mortar for Hollow Brick: 

1. Type: S 

2. Portland Cement: 1 part. 

3. Hydrated Lime: ! part. 

4. Aggregate: 4 ! parts sand. 

C. Grout for Hollow Brick: 

1. Portland Cement: 1 part. 

2. Sand: 3 parts. 

3. Pea Gravel: 2 parts (may be omitted for fine grout mix). 

2.06 INSULATION 

A. Provide insulation in exterior masonry wall cells at the entries where the walls are not furred 

out on the interior side of the masonry. 

B. Product: Expanded perlite insulation complying with ATTM C-549; K-valve not more than 

0.38 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature. Treat perlite with silicone for water repellency. 


3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 

A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at end 

of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. 

B. Extended Cover: A minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 

C. Do Not Apply Floor Loads: And/or roof loading until masonry has reached sufficient strength 

to withstand such loadings for at least 13 days after building masonry walls or columns. 

D. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed 

or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. 

E. Support walls for out of plane forces until wall or roofs are placed and sheathed and all 

connections made. 

F. Protect Base: Of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings 

spread on ground and over wall surface. 

G. Protect: Sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. 

3.02 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION 

A. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. 

B. Remove: Any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface 

is dry to the touch. 

C. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. 

D. Perform: The following construction procedures while the work is progressing. Temperature 

ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures existing at time of installation except for 

grout. For grout, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum temperatures. In heating 



mortar and grout materials, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10 degrees F. 

1. 40 DEGREES F TO 32 DEGREES F: 

a. Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 

degrees F and 120 degrees F. 

b. Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures. 


a. Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures 

between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F; maintain temperature of mortar 

on boards above freezing. 

b. Grout: Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F to produce in place grout 

temperature of 70 degrees F at end of work day. 



between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F; maintain temperature of mortar 

on boards above freezing. 



c. Heat: Both sides of walls under construction using salamanders or other heat 

sources, and provide enclosure. 

d. Use Windbreakers: Or enclosures when wind is in excess of 15 mph. 

4. 20 DEGREES F AND BELOW: 


between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. 



c. Masonry Units: Heat masonry units so that they are above 20 degrees F at 

time of laying. 

d. Provide Enclosure: And auxiliary heat to maintain an air temperature of at 

least 40 degrees F for 24 hours after laying units. Do not heat water for 

mortar and grout to above 160 degrees F. 

E. Protect: Completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following manner. 

Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures except for grouted 

masonry. For grouted masonry temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum 

temperatures. 


a. Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with 

weather-resistive membrane. 


a. Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane for at least 24 

hours. 


a. Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive insulating blankets or 

similar protection for at least 24 hours, 48 hours for grouted masonry. 

4. 20 DEGREES AND BELOW: 

a. Except as otherwise indicated, maintain masonry temperature above 32 

degrees F for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric 

heating blankets, infrared lamps or other methods proven to be satisfactory. 

For grouted masonry maintain heated enclosure to 40 degrees F for 48 

hours. 

3.03 CONSTRUCTION (GENERAL) 

A. Make wall straight and plumb with all courses true to line and level, built to dimensions 



shown. Fill cells with reinforcing steel solid with grout. Clean units before laying. Use masonry 

saw for cutting. 

B. Build to preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of cells. Vertically align sufficiently to 

maintain a clean unobstructed vertical opening not less than 3" in all directions. 

C. Lay up units in uniform running bond. 

D. Masonry units shall be laid in a full mortar bed on all surfaces including cross walls. Buttering 

only those edges which show in laying masonry units shall not be allowed. Interlock units at 

wall intersections unless otherwise indicated. Toothing shall not be allowed, unless otherwise 

shown. Tool concave joints in all masonry work, unless noted otherwise. 

E. Miscellaneous workmanship shall comply with the latest edition of the International Building 

Code unless a higher standard is required. 

F. Where masonry is exposed to earth, install vapor retarder from top of footing to one inch from 

top of the concrete slab-on-grade. 

3.04 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Refer to Section 03300 and Structural Notes on the drawings for general requirements. 

B. Splice all bars the minimum shown on the Structural Drawings. 

C. Place reinforcing and dowels before pouring grout. Tie reinforcing to dowels. 

D. Dowel vertical reinforcing bars out of structure below and above with bars of same size and 

spacing with lap length as shown on the structural drawings 

E. Masonry bond beams: Place horizontal bars in 8" deep bond beam units at top and bottom of 

wall and 48" o.c. maximum between. Continue bond beam units and reinforcement 

uninterrupted around corners and across wall intersections. 

F. Place additional vertical bars of same size as normal vertical reinforcement at corners and 

jambs of openings and at beam bearing locations not otherwise detailed. 

3.05 MORTAR 

A. Mix mortar in mechanical type batch mixer. Hand mix only with approval of Architect. Mix for 

not less than 3 minutes after all materials, including water, are in the drum. When mixing by 

hand, mix until mortar is uniformly blended. 

B. Mix in quantities required for immediate use and place before bad loss of slump occurs. 

Retempering after mortar has begun to set will not be allowed. 

3.06 GROUT 

A. Place grout by approved grout pump, capable of handling at least 12 cubic yards per hour of 

the specified aggregate mix, or by other method approved by Architect. Cells shall be grouted 

in lifts not to exceed 4 ft. maximum. Stop grout 1-1/2" below top of course to form key at pour 

joint. All grout to be vibrated in place, without segregation of aggregate, using a mechanical 

or electrical vibrating rod of size recommended by BIA. Do not use mortar for grout. 



3.07 CURING 

A. Provide thorough curing of mortar joints and grout concrete pour. Keep block work damp, but 

not saturated, for at least 4 days to prevent from drying too rapidly during hot or drying 

weather or drying winds. 

3.08 SEALER 

A. Seal interior brick with two coats of brick sealer. Comply with manufacturer’s 

recommendations for preparation, application and coverage. 

B. In an inconspicuous area, apply one coat over a 4-foot by 4-foot area for Owner review and 

approval of sheen. 

C. Exterior Brick Sealer: 

1. Environmental Requirements: 

a. Minimum application temperature is 40 degrees F and rising. 

b. Do not apply in rain or when rain is expected within 12 hours. Do not apply 

below 40 degrees F or when temperatures are expected to fall below 40 

degrees F within 12 hours. 

2. Application: 

a. Stir product thoroughly prior to and periodically during use. Do not dilute. 

b. Apply by low-pressure, non-atomizing spray. 

c. Flood vertical surfaces to saturation by applying from the bottom up with a 

controlled 8 to 12 inches material rundown to ensure maximum penetration 

into substrate. 

d. Clean equipment and tools with hot soapy water. Overspray can be cleaned 

immediately with hot, soapy water. Dried residue can be cleaned with citrus 

degreaser. 

e. Clean up and properly dispose of debris remaining on Project site related to 

application. 

f. Remove temporary coverings and protection from adjacent Work areas. 


A. Cover masonry surfaces with waterproof paper, plastic sheet, or canvas when necessary to 

protect them from rain or from hot, dry weather. Surfaces not being worked on shall be 

protected. 


A. The Owner shall pay for masonry testing. All masonry construction requires special 

inspection. If necessary, re-testing shall be paid for by the Contractor at no additional cost to 

the Owner. 

B. Provide prism test samples in accordance with IBC requirements and in conformance with 

requirements of testing agency and deliver to testing agency. During construction shall 

provide samples for prism tests for every 5,000 of each different type of masonry walls. 

C. Continuous Special Inspection is required on all masonry during placement of reinforcement 

and prior to grouting. Provide copy of all special inspection reports to engineer. 

3.11 MASONRY CLEANING COMPOUND 



A. Clean masonry with an acid compound which is 100% soluble in water and is not injurious to 

hands such as "Sure-kleen". Commercial muriatic acid is not allowed. 

1. Clean existing exterior masonry walls that have become interior walls. 

3.12 CLEANUP 

A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout.” 

B. Clean all exposed masonry thoroughly, working from top downward, with fiber brushes. 

Remove mortar and mortar stains using cleaning compound and rinse thoroughly with water. 

All finished surfaces of finished work shall be unmarked and unmarred. Clean masonry with 

carborundum stone, if necessary. 

C. Follow masonry manufacturer recommendations for cleaning methods and products. 




DIVISION 5 – METALS 

Section 05120 – Structural Steel 

Section 05200 – Steel Joists and Joist Girders 

Section 05300 – Steel Deck 

Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing 

Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications 

Section 05810 – Expansion Joint Systems 



SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 




Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel as shown on the Drawings, 

including schedules, notes and details showing size and location of members, typical 

connections and type of steel required. 

B. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice” and as otherwise 

shown on the Drawings. 

C. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete. 

D. Coordinate structural steel work with trussed girders and steel joists specified in Division 5 

Section “Steel Joists and Joist Girders.” 

E. Miscellaneous metal fabrications are specified in Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications.” 


A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Submittals” for general requirements. 

B. Shop Drawings prepared under supervision of a licensed Structural Engineer, including 

complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, 

procedures, and diagrams. 

1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate 

welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and 

other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the latest edition of the following, except as 

otherwise indicated: 

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Specification for Structural Steel 

Buildings", with "Commentary" and Supplements. 

2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" excluding the 

following: Section 1.5.1, Section 3.3 (first sentence), Section 4.2, Section 4.2.1, 

Section 4.2.2, Section 7.5.4, and Section 7.11.5. 

3. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel". (Specific 

items do not apply when they conflict with the AISC requirements.) 

4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed 

Steel Structural Members". 

5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet 

Piling and Bars for Structural Use." 

6. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by 

the Research Council on Structural Connections. 


STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1

B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in 

accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements. 

1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed 

AWS qualification tests. 

2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility. 

3. Welding may be x-ray inspected. It is the Contractor's responsibility to correct any 

welding proved to be inadequate. 

C. Refer to notes on Drawings for additional references to structural steel requirements. 


A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. 

B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place 

concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay work. 

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members 

off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged 

materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate 

before use. 

D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to 

members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as 

directed. 

E. Steel may be stored on site for long periods of time. Care must be taken to protect from 

ground and weather elements at all times. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.01 GENERAL 

A. Metal Surfaces: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials 

which are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale, seam 

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, 

or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes. 


A. Structural Steel “W” Shapes: ASTM A 992. 

B. Structural Steel Shapes (Not Including “W” Shapes), Plates and Bars: ASTM A36, except 

where other type steel is indicated. 

C. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A-500, Grade C (fy = 46,000 psi). 

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501. 

1. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. 

E. Deformed Bar Anchors: All DBA shall be manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding Company or 

by KSM Welding Systems. 



F. Headed Stud Anchors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold-finished carbon steel with 

dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. 

G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307 or F1554 Grade 36 with ASTM A 563 nuts, Grade A, with 

washers. 

H. High-Strength Bolts: ASTM A 325N. 

I. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and 

nuts. 

1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. 

J. Electrodes for Welding: E-70XX, or as noted otherwise. 

K. Primer Paint: Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint 13. Verify compatibility with 

finish painting. 

1. Color: Grey. 

2.03 FABRICATION 

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to 

greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC 

Specifications, and as indicated on final shop drawings. 

B. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence 

which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 

C. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of 

finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of 

markings, burrs, and other defects. 

D. Connections: 

1. Shop Connections: Weld or bolt, as indicated. 

2. Field Connections: Bolt, except where welding is indicated. 

3. Where steel-to-steel beam connections are not detailed in the Drawings, provide 

standard framed connections with the capacity to support one-half of the total uniform 

load capacity of the given shape for the span and for the steel specified. 

E. Fasteners: Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except 

where unfinished bolts are indicated. 

F. Minimum Welds: All intersecting steel shapes which are not bolted shall be connected by a 

fillet weld all around. Fillet weld sizes that are not shown shall be 1/16" less than the thinnest 

of the connected parts for thicknesses 1/4" and larger. Fillet welds on plates less than 1/4" 

shall be of the same size as the thinnest of the connected part. 

G. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel 

framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final 

shop drawings. 

1. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to 

receive other work. 

2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or 

enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 



2.04 SHOP PAINTING 

A. Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions or members to be embedded 

in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed portions 

and initial 2" of embedded areas only. 

1. Do not paint surfaces that are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type 

connections. 

2. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. 

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. 

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection, and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. 

Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in 

accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 

1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning" 

2. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" 

3. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning" 

C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not 

less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners, 

edges, and exposed surfaces. 

PART 3 EXECUTION 


A. Erector must examine existing foundations and areas and conditions under which structural 

steel work is to be installed, and notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to proper and 

timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected in a manner acceptable to erector. Written verification of all structural connections 

is to be provided. 

3.02 ERECTION 

A. Surveys: Employ a licensed land surveyor, for accurate erection of structural steel. Check 

elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and 

similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to the Architect. Do 

not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating 

adjustments to structural steel work have been approved by the Architect and Structural 

Engineer. 

B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with 

connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and 

connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide 

temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. 

C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking an working platforms as necessary to 

effectively complete work. 

D. Anchor Bolts: Provide additional anchor bolts where required, and other connectors required 

for securing structural steel to foundations and to other in-place work. 

1. Refer to Division 3 of these Specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in 



concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. 

E. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and 

adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure, before permanently 

fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in 

permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in 

elevations and alignment. 

F. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 

G. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of 

structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection, and mean 

temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. 

H. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. 

I. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, 

and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 

1. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in 

secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 

J. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas-cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in 

structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under 

stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance 

when permitted. 

K. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with same material as used for 

shop painting. At completion of concrete work, clean off and touch-up all columns. Touch up 

over all erection markings. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 

3.03 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. The Owner shall engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect 

high-strength bolted connections and welded connections, and to perform tests and prepare 

test reports. The cost of initial testing shall be paid for by the Owner. If necessary, re-testing 

shall be paid for by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 

B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test specimens 

comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations from requirements. 

C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or 

produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. 

D. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Architect 

reserves the right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with 

specified requirements. 

E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have 

indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's 

expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work, and necessary to 

show compliance of corrected work. 



F. Shop-Bolted Connections: Inspect or test in accordance with AISC specifications. 

1. Verify that gaps of installed Direct Tension Indicators are less than gaps specified in 

ASTM F 959, Table 2. 

G. Shop welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows: 

1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and 

locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct 

deficiencies. 

2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 

3. Performed tests of welds as follows. Inspection procedures listed are to be used at 

Contractor's option. 

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection; ASTM E 165. 

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection; ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on 

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not 

acceptable. 

c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality 

level "2-2T". 

d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 

H. Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. 

1. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F 959. Verify that 

gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2. 

I. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows: 

1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and 

locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct 

deficiencies. 

2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 

3. Perform tests of welds as follows: 

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on 

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not 

acceptable. 

c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality 

level "2-2T." 

d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 




SECTION 05200 - STEEL JOIST AND JOIST GIRDERS 




Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Extent of steel joists is shown on Drawings, including basic layout and type of joists and 

girders required. 

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS 

A. The following items are described in the sections indicated. Cooperate as necessary with all 

other trades to ensure proper and adequate provisions for the interface of their work with the 

open-web steel joists, and to ensure timely and orderly progress of the work. 

1. Supporting Structural Steel: Division 5 Section “Structural Steel.” 

2. Steel Deck: Division 5 Section “Steel Deck.” 

3. Metal Fabrications: Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications.” 


A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings for review prior to fabrication, showing layout of 

joist and girder units, special connections, jointing, accessories and deflections. Include mark, 

number, type, location, and spacing of joists and bridging. 

B. Provide calculations for joist girder prior to fabrication. 

C. Provide templates or location drawings for installation of anchor bolts. 

D. Provide written verification that all bolted and welded connections have been installed 

correctly. See Paragraph 1.05 D. below. 


A. General: Provide joists and joist girders fabricated in compliance with Steel Joist Institute (SJI) 

"Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." 

B. Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in 

accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS) "Structural Welding Code - Steel," 

AWS D1.1. 

C. Inspection: Inspect joists and girders in accordance with SJI "Specifications." 

D. Joists and girders welded in place are subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing 

and replacing any portion of steel joists and joist girders for testing purposes will be borne by 

Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Removal and testing costs for deficient work shall 

be the responsibility of the contractor. 

1. Remove and replace work found to be defective, and provide new acceptable work at 

no added cost to the Contract. 


STEEL JOIST AND JOIST GIRDERS 05200 - 1

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. The fabricator of the steel joists and joist girders shall have had not less than five (5) years' 

continuous experience. Fabricator shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute, or a firm 

approved by the Steel Joist Institute. 


A. Protect steel joists and joist girders before, during, and after installation and protect the 

installed work of other trades. Joists may be stored on site for long periods of time. Care must 

be taken to project from ground and weather elements at all times. In the event of damage, 

immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, 

Engineer and Supplier, and at no additional cost to the Contract. 


2.01 GENERAL 

A. Joist Manufacturer: Joist and girders manufactured by Vulcraft Division of Nucor Corporation 

are indicated on Drawings. Other manufacturers complying with the qualifications stated in 

this Specification will be considered for approval prior to bidding. 

B. Materials and fabrication requirements outlined in this section and shown on the Drawings are 

to support the specified loads and comply with requirements outlined in the Quality Assurance 

section of this Specification. 


A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Specifications" for chord and web sections. 

B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36. 

C. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 325 or A 490, heavy hexagon structural bolts 

with nuts and hardened washers. 

D. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with "SJI Specifications." 

1. Color: Manufacturer's standard grey. 


A. General: Fabricate steel joists and girders in accordance with SJI "Specifications." 

B. Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown, for securing other 

work to steel joists and joist girders; however, deduct area of holes from the area of chord 

when calculating strength of member. 

C. Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with SJI 

"Specifications" and load tables. 

D. Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for joists and joist girders, complying 

with "SJI "Specifications". Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at 

walls or beams. 

E. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages including steel bearing plates, to secure joists to 



adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Specifications", unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Header Units: Provide header units to support tail joists at openings in floor or roof system not 

framed with steel shapes. Where header reaction is more than 300 pounds and less than 

1000 pounds, provide diagonal support from header to nearest panel point at bottom chord of 

joist. Weld to top and bottom chord of joist. 

G. Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated 

joints and accessories before application of shop paint. 

Apply one coat of primer paint to steel joists, joist girders and accessories, by spraying, 

dipping, or other method, to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 

mil. 


3.01 ERECTION 

A. Place and secure steel joists and girders in accordance with SJI "Specifications", final shop 

drawings, and as herein specified. 

B. Field Modifications: Do not modify any joist or girder, including holes through the top and 

bottom chords, without the written consent and direction from the manufacturer. 

C. Anchors: Furnish anchor bolts or other devices to be built into concrete and masonry 

construction. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of anchors set in masonry. 

D. Placing Joists: Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and 

secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing 

before permanently fastening. 

E. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during 

construction. 

1. Where "open-web" joists lengths are 40 feet and longer, install a center row of bolted 

bridging to provide lateral stability before slackening of hoisting lines. 

F. Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are 

applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or 

beams. 

3.02 FASTENING 

A. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates where indicated in 

accordance with SJI "Specifications" for type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and 

procedure with placing of joists. 

B. Where detailed, bolt joists and girders to supporting steel framework in accordance with 

details. 

1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for bolted connections of steel joists to steel 

columns, and at other locations where shown, installed in accordance with AISC 

"Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". 

3.03 TOUCH-UP PAINTING 

A. After installation, wire brush welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces, and clean with solvent. 




Paint field-applied bolt heads and nuts and prepared surfaces on joists, joist girders, and steel 

supporting members. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting. 



SECTION 05300 - STEEL DECK 



A. Drawings, and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary 

Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes steel deck units for roof applications. 


A. The following items are described in the indicated sections of these Specifications. Cooperate 

as required with those trades to ensure proper interface of the specified items with the steel 

deck: 

1. Steel Joists and Joist Girders: Division 5 Section “Steel Joists and Joist Girders.” 

2. Metal Fabrications: “Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications.” 


A. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage, details, and conditions 

requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special 

jointing, and other accessories. Any substitutions from material called out on the contract 

documents must be approved by the engineer. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except 

as indicated: 

1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed 

Steel Structural Members". 

2. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". 

3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI) "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and 

Roof Decks". 

B. Qualification of Field Welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in 

accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of AWS. 

1. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing 

and replacing portions of decking for testing purposes will be borne by Owner if welds 

are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and replace with 

new acceptable work at no added cost to the Contract. 

C. The deck fabricator shall be a member of the Steel Deck Institute. 

D. The erector shall have not less than five (5) years' continuous experience in the erection of 

metal decking. 

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Take all means necessary to protect metal decking before, during, and after installation, and 


STEEL DECK 05300 - 1



to protect the installed work of other trades. Joists may be stored on site for long periods of 

time. Care must be taken to project from ground and weather elements at all times. In the 

event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval 

of the Architect, Structural Engineer and Supplier, and at no additional cost to the Contract. 

A. Steel for Painted Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 611, grade as required to comply with SDI 


B. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446, grade as required to comply with SDI 


C. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36. 

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized. 

E. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60. 

F. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in 

accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780. Color: White. 

G. Paint: Manufacturer's baked-on, rust-inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces that 

have been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated. 

1. Color: Manufacturer's standard grey. 

2.02 MANUFACTURER 

A. Metal deck manufactured by Verco Mfg. Co. has been used to establish a quality standard in 

the design of the systems. Other manufacturers having products complying with these 

specifications will be considered for approval. 

1. If VSC Punch Lock System is used as an option, Verco deck must be provided. 

2.03 DECK TYPES 

A. General: Provide Type B, 1-1/2" deep, Gauge of metal deck, as indicated on drawings, metal 

deck with interlocking seams. 

1. Properties: As indicated on drawings. Maximum permissible tensile strength shall be 

55,000 psi. 

2. Finish: Prime painted manufacturer’s standard grey. 


A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush, telescoped, or 

nested 2-inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, 

and width as indicated. 

B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specifications and 

Commentary for steel Roof Deck." 

C. Non-Composite Steel Form Deck: Provide fluted sections of metal deck as permanent forms 

for reinforced concrete slabs. 



D. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips for openings between decking and other 

construction, of not less than 0.045" minimum (18-gauge) sheet steel. Form to provide tight 

fitting closures at open ends of flutes and sides of decking where required for concrete floors. 



A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which metal decking is to be installed, and 

notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner 

acceptable to Installer. 

B. Contractor to provide written inspection and certification of all welds prior to installation of 

roofing system. 


A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's 

recommendations, shop drawings and as specified herein. 

B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends 

accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before permanently fastened. Do not 

stretch or contract side lap interlocks. 

C. Place deck units flat and square, secure to adjacent framing without warp or excessive 

deflection. 

D. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent 

overloading of structural members. 

E. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry. 

F. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work 

projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. 

G. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as 

required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work shown. 

H. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment devices. 

I. Welding: 

1. Weld to all supports perpendicular to corrugations with seven 3/4" diameter minimum 

fusion welds per sheet (36" wide sheet). 

2. Weld to all supports parallel to corrugations with 3/4" diameter minimum fusion welds 

at 12" o.c. 

3. Weld all interlocking side seams between adjacent pieces of deck as follows: 1-1/2" 

long top seam welds at 24" o.c. If VSC Punch Lock System is used, follow Verco 

requirements and spacing shown on the drawings. 

J. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof 

decking, and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a 

complete decking installation. 



K. Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, 

welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel 

members. 

1. Touch up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint, applied in accordance 

with manufacturer's instructions. 

2. Touch up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. 

3. In areas where shop-painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply touch-up paint to 

blend into adjacent surfaces. 




SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Work in this section includes, but is not limited to: 

1. "C" shaped load-bearing steel studs. 

2. Wall and soffit sheathing. 

3. Heavy duty furring channels at aluminum composite system 


1. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel.” 

2. Division 7 Section “Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems” for soffit finishes. 

3. Division 7 Section “Composite Panels.” 

4. Division 7 Section “Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing). 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 

Specification Sections. 

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information and installation instructions for each 

item of cold-formed metal framing, sheathing and accessories. 

C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s written certification that sheathing products meet 



A. Component Design: Calculate structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with 

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel 

Structural Members". 

B. Welding: Use qualified welders and comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3, 

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". 

C. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at 

project site with installers of other work including door and window frames and mechanical 

and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate 

layout and support provisions for interfacing work. 

D. Fire-resistance ratings: Where applicable, provide materials and construction that are 

identical to those of assemblies whose fire-resistance ratings are indicated. 


A. Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer’s original packaging, containers and bundles 

with manufacturer’s brand name and identification intact and legible. 


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1

B. Store sheathing level and protect against contact with damp and wet surfaces, exposure to 

weather, breakage and damage to edges. Provide air circulation under covering and around 

stacks of materials. 

1.06 LIMITATIONS 

A. Do not use sheathing as a base for nailing or mechanical fastening. Fasteners should be 

flush to the face of the board, not countersunk. 

B. Protect sheathing from exposure to water, moisture and condensation per manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 

C. For all installations, design details such as fasteners, sealants and control joints per system 

specifications must be properly installed per system specifications. Openings and 

penetrations must be properly flashed and sealed. Failure to do so will void the warranty. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Materials Warranty: Provide sheathing manufacturer’s standard warranty covering sheathing 

materials for five years from date of substantial completion. 

B. Weathering Warranty: Provide sheathing manufacturer’s standard warranty covering in-place 

exposure damage to sheathing for six months commencing on date of purchase by 

contractor. 



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 

metal framing products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, 

the following: 

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. 

2. Dale Industries Inc. 

3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 

4. Marino Industries Corp. 

5. Superior Steel Studs, Inc. 

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 

sheathing products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the 

following: 

1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 

2.02 METAL FRAMING 

A. System Components: Manufacturers' standard load-bearing steel studs of type, size, shape, 

and gauge as indicated. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's 

standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, 

fasteners, and accessories for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal 

framing system. 

1. Steel Studs: Provide 600S137-43 studs at 16 inches on center, unless noted 

otherwise. 

2. Heavy Duty Furring Channels: 18 gage. 



B. Materials and Finishes: 

1. For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural 

quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570 or A 

611. See drawings for additional requirements. 

2. For 18-gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial 

quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 

611. See drawings for additional requirements. 

3. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525 

for minimum G 60 coating. Finish of installation accessories to match that of main 

framing components, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other fasteners with corrosion-resistant 

plated finish. 

D. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud manufacturer. 

See drawings for additional requirements. 

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and 

repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780. 

2.03 SHEATHING 

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board with Water-Resistant Core for Vertical Roofed Areas: 

Gypsum sheathing board designed as an exterior substrate for a weather barrier, consisting 

of a noncombustible water-resistant core, essentially gypsum, surfaced with glass mats on 

face and back, partially or completely embedded in core, and with unsurfaced square edges. 

Comply with ASTM C 11 77 and requirements indicated below: 

1. Type: Regular/TypeX. 

2. Edge and End Configuration: Unsurfaced square. 

3. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

4. 

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glass-mat gypsum sheathing 

boards that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 

a. Dens-Glass Gold Exterior Sheathing; Georgia-Pacific Corp. 

B. Sheathing Fasteners: ASTM C 954, steel drill screws, Type S-12 fluted tip, a minimum of 1 - 

1/4 inches (32 mm) long, with organic-polymer coating or other corrosion-protective coating. 

C. Fire resistance: 

1. Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 

2. Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 

2.04 BUILDING PAPER 

A. No. 15, non-perforated, asphalt saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type 1 or equal. 


A. Joint tape: 2" wide, 10x10 glass mesh tape. 

B. Joint compound: Manufacturer’s setting-type joint compound. 

C. Screws, metal framing: 



1. Type S-12, bugle head, self-tapping, rust-resistant, fine thread for heavy-steel gauge 

(12 to 22). 

2. Type S, bugle head, rust-resistant sharp point, fine thread for light-gauge metal 

framing or furring. 

D. Sealants, caulk and tape: 

1. Dow Corning 795, Pecora 895, or equivalent. 

2. 2" wide 10 x 10 glass mesh Quick Tape or equivalent 


A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into assemblies prior to erection. 

Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. 

Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. 

B. Fabricate panels in jig templates to hold members in proper alignment and position and to 

assure consistent component placement. 

C. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, 

bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. 

D. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. 

E. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from 

plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8" in 10'-0". 



A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written 

instructions and recommendations. 

B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to 

layout at base and tops of studs. 

1. At concrete, attach with Hilti X-DNI47P8 fasteners (or equal) at 12 inches on center, 

staggered. 

2. At steel beams, attach with Hilti X-DNI27P8 fasteners (or equal) at 12 inches on 

center, staggered. 

3. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. 

4. Provide slip tracks where top of wall occurs under structural beams. Installation to 

accommodate an deflection of ! inch or less. 

C. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or 

screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. 

1. Screws: #10 minimum. 

D. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or 

warped surfaces and similar requirements. 

E. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends 

of stiffeners to supporting structure. 

F. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls 



or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and 

furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of 

supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's 

recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading 

resulting from item supported. 

G. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" square with double studs, of gauge indicated, at each 

jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's 

instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor 

tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height 

studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated. 

H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, with separate studs; do not bridge the joint 

with components of stud system. 

I. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 4'-6" 

o.c. Weld at each intersection. 

J. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and vertical junctures) to 

produce flush, even, true to line joints. 

1. Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated assemblies 

should not exceed 1/16 inch. 

K. Field Painting: Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during handling and 

installation. Use compatible primer for prime coated surfaces; use galvanizing repair paint for 

galvanized surfaces. 

3.02 SHEATHING, INSTALLATION 

A. Preparation: 

1. Examine subframing and verify that surface of framing and furring members to 

receive sheathing does not vary more than 1/4" from the place of faces of adjacent 

members. 

B. Install sheathing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and applicable instructions in 

GA-253 and ASTM C 1280. 

1. Install Dens-Glass Gold sheathing with gold side out. 

2. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints. 

3. Attach sheathing to metal framing with screws spaced 8" o.c. at perimeter where 

there are framing supports; and 8" o.c. along intermediate framing in field. 

4. Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Do not 

countersink. 

5. Locate fasteners minimum 3/8 inches from edges and ends of sheathing panels. 

6. Building paper: Install building paper or equal with flashing around openings. 

C. Finishing: 

1. Seal fasteners with sealant. 

2. Finish joints with sealant. Reinforce with 2" wide 10 x 10 glass mesh tape. 

D. Painted Ceilings and Soffits: 

1. Joint treatment and finish preparation: 

a. Apply joint tape over joints and embed in setting-type joint compound 

specified. 




b. Skim coat surface with setting-type joint compound for smooth finish. 

c. Prime and paint with exterior grade, good quality paints. 



SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 






A. The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on the Drawings, and includes items 

fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes, and castings which 

are not a part of other metal systems specified in other sections of these Specifications. 

B. The types of miscellaneous metal items include, but are not limited to the following: 

1. Carpenter's ironwork. 

2. Shelf angles. 

3. Loose bearing plates. 

4. Steel gates and bollards. 

5. Railings and sleeves for railings. 

6. Angle edging at openings in floors and walls. 

7. All bolts, screws, rods, bars, and miscellaneous items necessary for anchoring 

miscellaneous metal items. 


A. Concrete reinforcement is described in Division 3 Section “Concrete Work.” 

B. Open-Web steel joists and girders are specified in Division 5 Section “Steel Joists and Joist 

Girders.” 

C. Cooperate as necessary with all trades performing work described in other sections of these 

Specifications to ensure proper and adequate provisions for the installation of items 

described in this section. 

D. Division 9 Section “Painting” for finish coats of paint. 


A. In addition to conforming to all pertinent codes and regulations, conform to the following 

standards: 

1. American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC, "Specification for the Design, 

Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", with "Commentary". 

2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice", excluding the following: Section 1.5.1, Section 3.3 

(first sentence), Section 4.2, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 7.5.4, 

Section 7.11.5. 

3. American Welding Society, AWS, "Structural Welding Code" (Specific items do not 

apply when they conflict with the AISC requirements.) 

B. Certification of Welders: All shop and field welding shall be executed by AWS certified 

welders. Certification shall be considered current if dated within the past 12 months. 

C. If the Owner elects to test welds by means of x-ray, ultra-sonic, or any other appropriate 


METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1

nondestructive procedure, deficient welds shall be corrected by the contractor at no additional 

cost. 

D. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field 

splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling 

limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 

1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES 

A. Structural Performances: Provide assemblies which, when installed, comply with the following 

minimum requirements for structural performance, unless otherwise indicated: 


A. Submit shop drawings to the Architect for review prior to any fabrication. Show all locations, 

markings, quantities, materials, sizes, and shapes, and indicate all methods of connecting, 

anchoring, fastening, bracing, and attaching to the work of other trades. 



A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed 

to view, use only materials which are smooth and free from surface blemishes including 

pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. 

B. Structural Steel: Shapes, plates, bars, etc., ASTM A-36. 

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A-500, Grade C (Fy = 46,000 psi) 

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Type E or S, Grade B. 

E. Steel Grating: ASTM A-36. 

F. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A-570; or cold-rolled, ASTM A-611, Class 1; or 

grade required for design loading. 

G. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A-446, of grade required for design loading; 

coating designation G90. 

H. Deformed Bar Anchors: Nelson Stud Welding Company or KSM Welding Systems. 

I. Headed Stud Anchors: ASTM A-108, with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. 

J. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A-307 with ASTM A-563 nuts, Grade A. 

K. Welding Electrodes: E-70XX or as noted otherwise. 

L. Primer Paint: Fabricator's standard, compatible with specified finish. 

M. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized 

steel, complying with the Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or SSPC-Paint-20. 

N. Fasteners: 



1. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior 

walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. 

2. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307,Grade A. 

3. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. 

4. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 

5. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. 

6. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 

7. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325. 

8. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required. 

9. Lock Washers: Helical spring-type, carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 

O. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, 

nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by 

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. 

P. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish 

as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 

Q. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge-type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, 

ASTM A 47; or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip 

galvanized, ASTM A 153. 

2.02 OTHER MATERIALS 

A. Other materials not specifically described but required for a complete installation, shall be 

new, free from rust, best quality of their respective kinds. 

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Fabricate miscellaneous metal in accordance with the approved shop drawings and 

referenced standards. 

B. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated, or if not indicated, as required 

to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions 

indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use 

type of materials indicated or specified for various components of work. 

C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight 

sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise 

indicated. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible, without causing grain 

separation or otherwise impairing work. 

D. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, weld all shop connections. Comply with AWS 

recommendations. Make all joints and intersections of metal, tight fitting and 

securely fastened. Grind exposed welds smooth. Make work square, plumb, straight, and 

true. 

E. Drill or punch holes required for the attachment of work of other trades and for bolted 

connections. Burned holes are not acceptable. 

F. Intersecting steel shapes that are not bolted are to be connected by a fillet weld all around. 

Fillet weld sizes that are not shown shall be 1/16" less than the thinnest of the connected 

parts for thicknesses 1/4" and larger. Fillet welds on plates less than 1/4" shall be of the same 

size as the thinnest of the connected part. 



G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners 

wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated, or if not indicated, phillips 

flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. 

H. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and 

space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. 

I. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware 

and similar items. 

J. Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items indicated or specified to be galvanized, as 

follows: 

1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 

2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, 

and strip 1/8" thick and heavier. 

3. ASTM A 386 for galvanizing assembled steel products. 

K. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide 

weep holes where water may accumulate. 

L. After fabrication, shop paint steel, except surfaces to be encased in concrete or to be welded, 

and contact surfaces to be bolted. Thoroughly clean all steel to be encased in concrete. 

M. Surface Preparation: Comply with recommendations of SSPC for the applicable 

environmental exposure conditions. 

2.04 STEEL RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS 

A. Fabricate steel railings and handrails to design, dimension, and details indicated. Provide 

railings and handrails members formed of pipe of sizes and wall thickness indicated, or if not 

shown, as required to support design load. 

B. Mockups: Provide mockups of railings as indicated on the drawings. Upon approval, mockups 

may be incorporated in the project provided structural integrity of the railings is not 

compromised. 

C. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal 

connectors, at fabricator's option, except as otherwise indicated. 

1. At tee and cross intersections, provide coped joints. 

D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted handrails, except where otherwise indicated. 

E. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16" thick steel plate in place or by use of 

prefabricated fittings. 

F. For railing posts set in concrete, provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe, not less than 6" 

long and with an inside diameter not less than 1/2" greater than the outside diameter of pipe. 

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, 

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings 

and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting 

railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 



H. Prime coat exterior and interior steel railings, including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and 

other ferrous components. 

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Rough Hardware: 

1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, 

and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and 

supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other 

structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in 

other sections. 

2. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural 

connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 

B. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items 

bearing on masonry or concrete construction and of required thickness and bearing area. 

Drill plates to receive anchor bolts as required. 

C. Loose Steel Lintels: Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in 

masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single 

unit where indicated. Provide not less than 8" bearing at each side of openings, unless 

otherwise shown. 

D. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless 

otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with 

continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever 

possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly 

and installation with other work. 

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel 

framework, as required to complete work. 

B. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. 

Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. Except as otherwise shown, 

space anchors 24" o.c. and provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4" x 1/4" x 8" steel straps. 


3.01 ERECTION 

A. Coordinate installation schedule with the schedules of other trades to ensure orderly and 

timely progress of the work. 

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and 

fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where 

taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. 

C. Erect and install all miscellaneous metal in accordance with the Drawings, shop drawings, 

and the referenced standards, aligning straight, plumb, and level. 

D. After the erection and installation is complete, touch up all shop priming coats damaged 

during transportation and erection, using the priming paint specified for shop priming. 



3.02 WELDING 

A. Where welded connections are indicated, comply with Paragraph 2.03 F. of this section. 

B. Do not weld rebar, except as specifically detailed in the Drawings. In such cases, use only 

AWS standards. Do not substitute reinforcing bars for deformed bar anchors (DBA), machine 

bolts, or headed studs. 

C. Stud Welding: Conform with manufacturer's specifications. Welding shall be field tested to 

comply with IBC Standards. 

3.03 BOLTED CONNECTIONS 

A. Use ASTM A-325N bolts for all steel-to-steel connections, unless otherwise noted. Tighten 

bolts by the turn of the nut or direct tension method. Provide hardened washers beneath 

turned element. Provide beveled washers where the slope of the outer face exceeds 1 in 20, 

with respect to the plane normal to the bolt axis. 

B. Provide standard washers under all nuts or anchor bolts. 


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where 

necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including 

threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, 

wood screws, and other connectors as required. 

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of 

miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, 

plus, level, true, and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide 

temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete 

masonry or similar construction. 

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections 

which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping 

size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth, and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut, 

or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, 

and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. 

D. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing 

materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. 

E. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the 

bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not 

remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate 

before packing with grout. Use metallic nonshrink grout in concealed locations where not 

exposed to moisture; use nonmetallic nonshrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise 

indicated. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no 

voids remain. 

3.05 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS 

A. Anchor bollards in concrete as indicated on drawings. 



B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface. 

3.06 ADJUST AND CLEAN 

A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same materials as used for 

shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

B. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and 

apply two (2) coats of galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 






SECTION 05810 - EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEMS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes expansion joint covers at the following locations: 

1. Interior wall expansion joint covers. 

2. Interior ceiling expansion joint covers. 

3. Exterior wall expansion joint covers. 

B. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 

1. Division 3 Section “Concrete Work.” 

2. Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry.” 

3. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.” 

4. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies.” 

5. Division 9 Section “Acoustical Ceilings.” 

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: 

A. Joint cover systems shall allow unrestrained movement of joint without disengagement of 

cover. 

B. Joint size/movement range: As indicated on drawings. 


A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product description indicating compliance with specified 

requirements. Include installation instructions for each type of expansion control material. 

B. Shop drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings for expansion control conditions. Include 

requirements for blockouts. Submit prior to concrete placement or other construction adjacent 

to expansion joints. 

C. Samples: Submit one 6" sample of each specified system style. 

D. Submit certification or copies of independent test reports, by approved testing/listing agency, 

indicating compliance with fire resistance rating and specified performance requirements. 


A. Manufacturer: Furnish assemblies from one manufacturer with a minimum of five years 

experience in the design and fabrication of expansion joint cover assemblies. 

B. Installer: Firm with a minimum of five years experience in installation of systems similar to 

those required by this project and acceptable to manufacturer. 

C. Coordinate work and scheduling of the work of this section with other trades. 

1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: 

A. Deliver joint covers to jobsite in new, clean, unopened containers of size and strength to 

protect materials during shipping. 


EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEMS 05810-1

B. Store materials in original containers in dry location. 

1.06 WARRANTY: 

A. Provide manufacturer's standard one year material and workmanship warranty. 

B. Finish warranty: Warrant fluoropolymer coating to remain free, under normal atmospheric 

conditions, from peeling, checking, cracking, chalking in excess of numerical rating of 8 when 

measured in accord with ASTM D4214-89, of fading in excess of 5 N. B. S. units during 

warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of substantial completion. 




products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 

1. MM Systems Corporation 

2. Expansion control systems of similar design and construction, as manufactured by 

other manufacturers, may be submitted for Architect's consideration. Acceptance is 

subject to compliance with specified design criteria, as evidenced by submittal of 

specified product data. 

2.02 MATERIALS: 

A. Aluminum: Alloys meeting ASTM B221-95a. 

1. Extrusions: 6063-T5 alloy. 

2. Plates: 6061-T6 alloy. 

3. Sheet: 5052-H32 alloy 

B. Visual seal: System manufacturer's standard elastomeric seal 

1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range of colors. 

C. Filler/gasket: Elastomeric. 

1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. 

D. Finish for exposed aluminum components: 

1. Aluminum Wall and Ceiling: 

a. Anodized finish: Dura-Bronze: 0.07 mil thick color anodic coating conforming 

to AA-M10C22A44, medium bronze anodized finish. 

2.03 STANDARD WALL AND CEILING SYSTEMS: 

A. Acceptable products: DX Series at ceiling/ceiling conditions; with dual durometer white filler. 

B. Characteristics: Extruded aluminum frame with white filler. 

2.04 SEISMIC AND MASONRY WALL JOINTS: 

A. Acceptable wall products: 

1. ASK 2-2 / ASKL 2-.5 or sized as required to fit opening. 

B. Characteristics: 




1. Base and frame material: Extruded aluminum. 

A. Factory fabricate expansion joint components to greatest extent practicable. Size of joint 

components shall be determined by manufacturer, based on minimum and maximum size of 

joints indicated. 

B. Fabricate units in single length without intermediate joints where practicable. 

C. Aluminum protection: Treat surfaces in contact with concrete with a factory applied chromate 

conversion coating for corrosion resistance. 

D. Apply protective tape for wall expansion joint covers. 


3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION: 

A. Prepare surfaces to receive expansion joint systems in accordance with manufacturer's 

product data and approved shop drawings. 

B. Clean surfaces adjacent to and including joints prior to installation. Repair surfaces as 

required to provide a smooth, even sound surface. Surfaces shall be free of debris, oils, dust 

or other deleterious materials. 

C. Install blockouts for expansion joint systems in accordance with approved shop drawings and 

manufacturer's product data. Coordinate installation of blockouts with cast-in-place concrete 

work. 

D. Shim only as approved by manufacturer. 


A. Install manufactured expansion control assemblies in accordance with approved shop 

drawings and manufacturer's product data, except where more stringent requirements are 

specified herein. Cover and protect expansion joint cover assemblies from construction traffic. 

B. Compression seals: 

1. Apply adhesive to armored joint blockouts. 

2. Position seal over joint and compress into joint as directed by manufacturer's product 

data. 

3. Splice, miter and bond seals in accordance with manufacturer's product data as 

required for installation. 

4. Install seal to align flush with adjacent surfaces when compressed. 

C. Aluminum frame/cellular seal system: 

1. Mechanically fasten frames to substrates. Set frames in same sealant as specific for 

horizontal traffic joints in Sealant and Caulking Section. Top edges of frames shall be 

flush with adjacent surfaces. Fill blockouts with concrete, flush with top edge of 

frames and adjacent surfaces. 

2. Install adhesive in channel of frames to receive seals. Do not allow adhesive to set. 

3. Install neoprene seal in channels of frames. Place cover plate over each edge of seal 

and screw in place. 



D. Aluminum compression seal with frames: 

1. Install adhesive in channel of frames to receive seals. Do not allow adhesive to set. 

2. Install seal in channels of frames. 

E. Interior joints: 

1. Secure joint assembly in place with anchors spaced at minimum 2'-0" o. c. 

F. Exterior expansion systems: Mechanically fasten frames to each side of joint and attach 

interior and exterior seals. 

G. Remove excess and misplaced sealants as work progresses. 

H. Remove protective film or coverings from expansion joint covers upon completion of adjacent 

construction. 

3.03 CLEANUP 

A. Refer to Section 01700. 




DIVISION 6 – WOOD 

Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry 

Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry 

Section 06402 – Interior Architectural Millwork 



SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 





B. Related Sections: Sections specifying work that requires nailers and blocking include, but are 

not limited to the following: 

1. Division 7 Section “Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing.” 

2. Division 10 Section “Solid Phenolic Plastic Toilet Compartments” for partitions and 

screens. 

3. Division 10 Section “Toilet and Bath Accessories” for grab bars, mirrors, shelves and 

owner provided accessories. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes but is not limited to the following: 

1. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and plywood backing panels, including backing and 

blocking required to support Owner-provided equipment. 

B. All wood used for framing and blocking shall be fire-retardant treated. Tested for ASTM E84 

and shall have a flame spread not greater that 25. 


A. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, 

storing, installation, and finishing of treated material. 

B. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating 

type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, 

and conformance with applicable standards. 

C. For waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was 

reduced to levels indicated, prior to shipment to project site. 

D. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treated material complies 

with specified standard and other requirements. Material shall bear such identification. 

E. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting 

test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements 

indicated. 

F. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. 

G. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction evidencing compliance of the following wood products with 

specified requirements and building code in effect for Project. 

1. Metal framing anchors. 

2. Power driven fasteners. 

3. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 

SEGP LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLASSROOM ADDITION MARCH 2, 2009 

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1


A. Single-Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fireretardant-treated 

wood products from one source for both treatment and fire-retardant 

formulation. 


A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to 

weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other 

panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks, and under temporary coverings, 

including polyethylene and similar material. 

B. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, sticker between each 

course to provide air circulation. 


A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. 

Correlate location of nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of 

other work. 

B. Thickness of wood blocking used in conjunction with roofing system must match insulation 

thickness; Contractor shall verify this dimension for proper coordination. 


2.01 LUMBER, GENERAL 

A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood 

Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by 

American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 

B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with 

lumber grade and species include the following: 

1. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 

2. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 

C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection 

agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, 

grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 

D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as 

required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 

1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of 

dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless 


2.02 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop 



equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, 

stripping, and similar members. 

B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes 

shown. 

C. Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or board-size lumber as 

required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules. 

D. Pegboard: 0.25 inch perforated hardboard. 

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS 

A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction 

and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured 

under PS 1 provision, with APA PRP -108. 

B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark 

evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 

C. Plywood Backing Panels : For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide 

fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED Exposure 

1, in thickness indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch. 

2.04 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified 

in this article for material and manufacture. 

B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. 

C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. 

D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. 

E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. 

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where 

indicated, flat washers. 

2.05 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS 

A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply 

with requirements specified including the following: 

1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model code 

evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 

and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with 

the building code in effect for this Project. 

2. Allowable design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable 

design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering 

analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a 

qualified independent testing laboratory. 



B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior 

to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A 446, 

Grade A (structural quality); ASTM A 526 (commercial quality); or ASTM A 527 (lock-forming 

quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 

2.06 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS 

A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative-treated wood or is specified 

herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) 

and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark 

Requirements. 

B. Pressure-treat above ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 

0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum 

moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the 

following: 

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar 

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in 

contact with masonry or concrete. 

C. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, 

coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber of plywood after 

drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 


3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and 

that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with a minimum joint or optimum joint 

arrangement. 

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut 

and fitted. 

C. Fit rough carpentry, to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. 

Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow 

attachment of other construction. 

D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. 

E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 

F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select 

fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view 

or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners 

without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 

G. Nailers shall be firmly anchored to the roof deck 3'-0" o.c. to resist a force of 175 pounds per 

lineal foot in any direction. A minimum of 3 anchors shall e used to anchor each length of 

nailer. A 1/2" vent space shall be provided between lengths of nailers. 



3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS 

A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to 

shapes as shown, and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. 

Coordinate location with other work involved. 

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush 

with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry 

work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 

C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 

1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish 

material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS 

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E 30, "APA 

Design/Construction Guide - Residential and Commercial," for types of construction panels 

and applications indicated. 

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as follows: 

1. Plywood Backing Panels: Screw to supports. 






SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 





1.02 WORK INCLUDED 

A. The work includes fabrication and installation of fixed modular and flexible rail mounted 

laminate clad casework and components, fixed and modular countertops and related 

products furnished by the same supplier for single source responsibility, as shown on 

drawings, schedules, and specified herein. 

1. Plastic laminate window sills. 

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 

A. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for backing and blocking. 

B. Division 11 Section "Appliances" for coordination of appliance installation. 


A. Manufacturers products shall be publicly cataloged. Manufacturer will show evidence of a 

minimum of five (5) years experience in providing manufactured casework systems for similar 

types of projects, produce evidence of financial stability, bonding capacity, and adequate 

facilities and personnel required to perform on this project. 


A. Samples: 

1. Submit samples of casework manufacturer's standard and premium decorative 

laminate colors, PVC, patterns and textures for exposed and semi-exposed materials 

for architect Is selection. Samples of other materials or hardware will be available if 

requested. 

2. Submit full-size samples for evaluation prior to approval. Samples may be impounded 

by architect/owner until completion of project to ensure compliance with 


B. Production Drawings: 

1. Submit CAD production drawings for casework systems, countertops, and related 

products showing plan -view layout of units, elevations, and cross--section details. 

2. Coordinate production drawings with other work involved. 

1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING 

A. Deliver completed laminate clad casework, countertops, and related products only after wet 

operations in building are completed, store in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, 

with relative humidity range of 20% to 50%. 

B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation with a 

protective covering. 

SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLASSROOM ADDITION MARCH 2,2009 

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06402 - 1

1.07 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Humidity and Temperature Controls: 

1. Advise contractor of requirements for maintaining heating, cooling, and ventilation in 

installation areas as required to reach relative humidity necessary to maintain 

optimum moisture content. (See Product Handling). 

1.08 LIFETIME GUARANTY AND LIMITED WARRANTY: 

A. Manufactured products to carry a Lifetime Guaranty and Limited Warranty to the original 

owner against defective material and workmanship for as long as they own the product. This 

is a warranty of replacement and repair only, whereby the architectural millwork sub will 

correct defects in material and/or workmanship without charge. 


2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturer and Product Type: 

1. For purpose of determining minimum performance and quality standards this 

specification is based upon TMI fixed modular, flexible rail mounted and mobile 

casework as manufactured by TMI SYSTEMS DESIGN CORPORATION, 50 South 

Third Avenue West, Dickinson, North Dakota, 58601, a member of the Architectural 

Woodwork Institute (membership #8913) and Approved Quality Certification 

Program. 

B. Approved Equals: 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. Westmark, Washington 

b. LSI Corp, Minnesota 

c. Anderson Mill. Inc., Salt Lake City 

d. Johnson Brothers, Idaho 

e. Huetter Mill and Cabinet, Salt Lake City 

f. Thompson & Sons, Deweyville 

g. Frontage Enterprises, Inc., West Jordan 

h. Granite Mill, Salt Lake City 

2. Where specific materials, finish options, construction details, modularity, hardware 

and test data are specified 'herein, the casework will be held in strict compliance. 

Substitutions will be considered prior to bid date provided request is submitted to the 

architect, in writing, no later than seven (7) days prior to bid date; substitution request 

will list any and all deviations from the specified product. Acceptable substitutions will 

be identified in future addenda. 

2.02 DEFINITIONS AND MATERIALS 

A. Definitions: Listed are definitions and materials commonly used in defining decorative 

laminate clad casework. Identification of casework components and related products by 

surface visibility. 

1. Open Interiors: Any open storage unit without solid door or drawer fronts and units 

with full glass insert doors and/or acrylic doors. 

2. Closed Interiors: Any closed storage unit behind solid door or drawer fronts, sliding 

solid doors. 

3. Exposed Ends: Any storage unit exterior side surface that is visible after installation. 



4. Other Exposed Surfaces: Faces of doors and drawers when closed, and tops of 

cabinets less than 72" above finished floor. 

5. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Interior surfaces which are visible, bottoms of wall cabinets 

and tops of cabinets 72" or more above finished floor. 

6. Concealed Surfaces: Any surface not visible after installation. 

B. Core Materials: 

1. Particleboard: Medium density 45-50 pound industrial grade particleboard of fir or 

pine meeting or exceeding ANSI A 208.1-1993, M-3 requirements. Thicknesses used 

are 1/4", 1/2", 3/4", and 1". 

2. Hardboard: Prefinished hardboard in 1/4" thickness meeting or exceeding 

commercial standards CS-251. 

C. Decorative Laminates: 

1. High pressure decorative laminate GP28 (.028), NEMA Test LD-3-1995, (vertical 

grade). 

2. High pressure decorative laminate GP50 (.050), NEMA Test LD-3-1995, (horizontal 

grade), 

3. High-pressure cabinet liner CL20 (.020), NEMA Test LD-31995. 

4. Thermally Fused Melamine laminate tested to meet NEMA Test LD-3-1995. 

5. High-pressure backer BK20 (.020). 

D. Laminate Color Selection: 

1. Color selection for high pressure decorative laminate to be from manufacturers' full 

range of colors/price groups. 

2. Selections for cabinet surfaces, grade GP28, are offered from the current year 

Wilsonart, Nevamar, Pionite or Formica series. A maximum of one (1) color to be 

selected per unit face and six (6) colors per project. 

3. Selections for countertop grades, GP50, shall be selected from the current year 

Wilsonart, Nevamar, Pionite or Formica standard and premium solid and pattern 

offering. A maximum of six (6) colors per project. 

4. Basic cabinet body color to include surfaces of all components, including drawer 

boxes, to be covered with melamine laminate as a minimum requirement; drawer 

boxes not matching basic color will be rejected. 

E. Edging Materials: 

1. 3mm PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive with external 

edges and outside corners of door and drawer fronts, and countertops, machine 

profiled to 1/8" radius for safety. PVC edge banding to match laminate color selected 

by Architect. 

2.03 SPECIALTY ITEMS 

A. Metal Parts: 

1. Countertop support brackets, undercounter support frames, legs and miscellaneous 

metal parts are furniture steel, welded, degreased, cleaned, treated and epoxy 

powder coated. 

2. Flexible rail-mounted casework support rail and interfacing support keys (if indicated 

on drawings). 

a. Extruded aluminum 6061-T6 alloy and epoxy powder coated. Structural 

fasteners of rail are concealed in finished installation. 

b. Structural integrity of the support rail and interfacing components are 

documented by an independent testing laboratory showing that, when tested 

in strict accordance with the requirements of seismic construction codes, all 

components meet or exceed the requirements as set forth by the codes. 



2.04 CABINET HARDWARE 

3. Structural Utility Chase Components: 

a. All structural steel components are fabricated for dimensional consistency, 

welded, degreased, cleaned, treated and epoxy powder coated. The chase 

and all components are dimensionally integrated to align with and 

accommodate fixed modular or flexible rail mounted casework and 

countertops. 

b. Structural assembly will provide for mounting of closure panels, reagent 

ledges, rail support system, removable access panels, and field connection 

of services within. 

A. Hinges: 

1. Five knuckle, institutional grade, 2-3/4" overlay type with hospital tip. Steel is 

minimum .095" thick and have a minimum of nine (9) edge and leaf fastenings and 

are epoxy powder coated. Hinges pass ANSI-BHMA standard A156.9, Grade 1 

requirement for both vertical and horizontal set and sag (pair of. hinges will hold 

minimum of 310 pounds) ; copy of test _result provided upon request. Hinges are 

secured with specifically engineered screws. Doors 48" and over in height have three 

(3) hinges per door. Magnetic door catch with minimum five, (5) pound pull provided, 

attached with screws and slotted for adjustment. 

B. Pulls: 

1. Door and drawer front pulls shall be rectangular semi recessed, injection molded 

ABS plastic, screw fastened. Pull design shall be compatible with Americans with 

Disability Act (ADA), Federal Register Volume 56, No. 144, specifically paragraph 

4.27.4. Other pulls may be acceptable pending architect approval. 

C. Drawer Slides: 

1. Regular use and kneespace drawers are Blum Style No. BS230M with epoxy powder 

coated. Slides have a 100-pound load rating at full extension and a built-in, positive 

stop both directions, with self-closing feature, zinc color. 

2. File drawer slides are full extension, epoxy powder coated, 150-pound load rating. 

3. Pencil drawers are equipped with Blum No. BS230M, zinc color. 

4. Slides have a lifetime warranty as offered by the slide manufacturer. 

D. Adjustable Shelf Supports: 

1. Injection molded polycarbonate, clear color to blend with selected interior finish, 

friction fit into cabinet end panels and vertical dividers, readily adjustable on 32mm 

(approximately 1-1/4") centers, Each shelf support has two (2) integral support pins, 

5mm diameter, to interface pre-drilled holes, and to prevent accidental rotation of 

support. The supports automatically adapt to 3/4" or 1" thick shelving and provide 

non-tip feature for shelving. 

2. Supports are designed to readily permit field fixing of shelf if_ desired. Structural load 

testing shall show loading to 1,040 pounds (260 pounds per support) without failure. 

E. Locks: 

1. For doors and drawers, as shown on drawings, are Olympus Locks 100DR 7/8" for 

doors and 200 DW 7/8" - 1-3/8" for drawers or National Locks C8178 7/8" for doors 

and C8173 7/8" & C8179 1-3/8" for drawers. Each lock is furnished with two (2) keys. 

Lock for sliding 3/4" doors is a pin tumbler type plunger lack 300SD sliding door type 

with strike. Lock for sliding glass/acrylic doors is a ratchet type sliding showcase lock, 

National Locks Ratchet C8140. 



2. Chain bolts are 3" long, and have an 18" pull and an angle strike to secure inactive 

door on cabinets over 72" in height. Elbow catches are used on inactive doors up to 

and including 72" in height. 

G. Coat Rods: 

1. 1" diameter, 14-gauge chrome plated steel installed in captive mounting hardware. 

H. Drawer Accessories: 

1. Standard Hanging File: PVC rails fitted to top of drawer sides. Available for Pendaflex 

files. Rails are color matched to cabinet interior. 

I. Mirrors: 

1. I/4" thick polished mirror plate. 

J. Grommets for power chord and cable passage: At each power and data outlet below 

countertops, provide 3" diameter hole with molded plastic cover. (Color as selected by 

Architect). Cabinet installer to coordinate with electrical and other trades as needed. 


A. Fabricate casework, countertops and related products to dimensions, profiles, and details 

shown. 

B. Comply with accessibility requirements, including, but not limited to ANSI A117.1. At sink 

units, do not provide bottom shelf and provide toe kick integral with cabinet door for wheel 

chair access. 

C. Cabinet Body Construction: 

1. Tops and bottoms are joined to cabinet ends and internal cabinet components such 

as fixed horizontals, rails and verticals using 10mm diameter industrial grade 

hardwood dowels, laterally fluted with chamfered ends, securely glued and clamped 

under pressure during assembly to secure joints and cabinet squareness. A minimum 

of six (6) dowels at each joint for 24" deep cabinets and la minimum of four (4) 

dowels at each joint for 12" deep cabinets are used. 

2. Unless specifically indicated, core 3/4" thick particleboard. Edging and surface 

finishes as indicated herein. 

3. Unit backs on fixed cabinetry shall be 1/2" thick particleboard, and on relocatable 

cabinetry backs shall be 3/4" thick particleboard structurally doweled into cabinet end 

and top panels, color matched to cabinet interior. Exposed backs on fixed or movable 

cabinets to be 3/4" thick particleboard, color matched to cabinet interior, exterior 

surface GP28 laminate as selected. 

4. All fixed undercounter and tall units have an individual factory applied base, 

constructed of 3/4" A.C. Grade plywood. Base is 96mm (nominal 4") high unless 

otherwise indicated on the drawings. 

5. All base units, except sink base units, are provided with a full sub-top. Sink base 

units are provided with open top, a welded steel/epoxy painted sink rail full width at 

top front edge concealed behind face rail/doors, a split back removable access panel, 

and bottom panel to have CL20 high pressure cabinet liner, color to match interior 

color. No exceptions will be permitted. 

6. All end panels and vertical dividers are prepared to receive adjustable shelf hardware 

at 32mm (approximately 1-1/4") line boring centers. Door hinges, drawer slides and 

pullout shelves mount in the line boring to assure consistent alignment of 

components. 

7. All exposed and semi exposed edges of basic cabinet components are factory edged 

with PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive. 



a. Edging is 3mm PVC. 

8. Adjustable shelf core is 3/4" thick particleboard up to '30" wide, 1" thick particleboard 

over 30" wide. 

a. Front edge is factory applied 3mm PVC. 

9. Interior Finish, Units with Open Interiors: 

a. Sides, top, bottom, and vertical members, and adjustable shelving faced with 

thermally fused melamine laminate with matching prefinished back. 

10. Interior Finish, Units with Closed Interiors: 

a. Sides, top, bottom, horizontal, and vertical members, and adjustable shelving 

faced with thermally fused melamine laminate with matching prefinished 

back. 

11. Exposed Ends: 

a. Faced with high-pressure decorative laminate GP28 (.028) color from 

casework manufacturer's full range offering, from Wilsonart, Nevamar, 

Pionite and Formica, standard grades and finish. 

12. Wall Unit Bottom: 

a. Faced with thermally fused melamine laminate. 

13. Wall and Tall Unit Tops: 

a. The top edge of all wall and tall unit end panels are factory edged with 3mm PVC, 

b. Top surface is laminated with thermally fused melamine laminate. 

14. Balanced construction of all laminated panels is mandatory. Unfinished core stock 

surfaces, even on concealed surfaces (excluding edges) will not be permitted. No 

exceptions. 

D. Drawers: 

1. Sides, back and sub front are particleboard, 1/2" thick, laminated with thermally fused 

melamine. The back and sub front are doweled and glued into the sides. Dowels are 

fluted, with chamfered ends and a minimum diameter of 8mm. Top edge is banded 

with 3mm PVC. 

2. Drawer bottom is particleboard, 1/2" thick, laminated with thermally fused melamine, 

screwed directly to the bottom edges of the drawer box, to provide a rigid platform. 

Drawer bottom less than 1/2" thick will not be permitted. 

3. The same 1/2" thick particleboard and platform construction detail is used for paper 

storage drawers and 'also include a PVC angle retaining bar at the rear of each 

drawer. 

4. Painted finishes on drawer sides and/or bottom will not be permitted. 

E. Door/Drawer Fronts: 

1. Core for all doors and applied drawer fronts is 3/4" thick particleboard. All edges 

finished as indicated herein. Provide magnetic catch when hinges are not provided 

with a built-in closer. Provide two catches on doors over 48" high. 

2. Double doors are used on all cabinets in excess of 24" wide. 

3. Exterior faces are laminated with high-pressure decorative laminate GP28, color as 

selected. Interior face is high-pressure cabinet liner CL20. 

4. All door/drawer edges are finished with 3mm PVC, machine applied with waterproof 

hot melt adhesive. External edges and outside corners are machine profiled to 1/8" 

radius. 

F. Miscellaneous Shelving: 

1. Core material is 1" particleboard. 

2. Exterior faced with High-pressure decorative laminate, GP-28. 

3. Edges finished with 3mm PVC, machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive. 

External edges and outside corners are machine profiled to 1/8" radius. 

2.06 DECORATIVE LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS 



A. All nominal 1" thick laminate clad countertops shown on drawings are constructed with 1" 

particleboard core laminated top face with GP50 (.050) high-pressure decorative laminate, 

with BK20 backer underside. Provide tight joint fasteners where needed. All exposed edges, 

including edges of backsplash where used, have 3mm PVC banding, machine applied with 

waterproof hot melt adhesive. Exposed edges and corners are machine profiled to 1/8" radius 

for safety. 



A. The installer must examine the job site and the conditions under which the work under this 

section is to be performed, and' notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do 

not proceed with work under this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 

in a manner acceptable to the installer. 


A. Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to 

installing. 


A. Install casework with factory-trained supervision authorized by manufacturer. Erect casework, 

plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required. Where laminate clad 

casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut to accurate fit. 

B. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or 

bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 


A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. 

B. Clean plastic surfaces, repair minor damage per plastic laminate manufacturer's 

recommendations. Replace other damaged parts or units. 

C. Advise contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of casework and tops from 

damage by other trades until. acceptance of the work by the owner. 

D. Clean cabinetry "broom clean" and free of debris. Installer shall be responsible for the 

immediate removal of all trash, crating, etc., associated with the cabinet installation. 






DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

Section 07210 – Building Insulation 

Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems 

Section 07270 – Firestopping 

Section 07411 – Manufactured Roof Panels 

Section 07430 – Composite Panels 

Section 07511 – Built-Up Asphalt Roofing 

Section 07542 – Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing 

Section 07600 – Flashing and Sheet Metal 

Section 07720 – Roof Accessories 

Section 07900 – Joint Sealants 



SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes thermal and fire safing insulation shown on the drawings and specified 

herein. 

B. Contractor to ensure that all exterior soffits, walls and fascias enclosing interior spaces 

receive the appropriate type of insulation. 


1. Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry” for insulation placed in masonry cells. 

2. Division 7 Section “Manufactured Roof Panels.” 

3. Division 7 Section “Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing” for insulation below roof 

membrane. 

4. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for sound attenuation batts in gypsum 

board/metal stud walls. 


A. Coordinate work and scheduling of the work of this section with other trades. 


A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow. 

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during 

installation. 

B. Protect plastic insulation from exposure to sunlight per manufacturer's recommendations. 

C. Remove any damaged materials from site and replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 

D. Fire hazard: Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to the project site ahead of time of 

installation. Protect at all times against ignition. Complete the installation and concealment of 

placement materials as rapidly as possible in each area of work. 

1.04 STANDARDS 

A. Thermal conductivity: Thickness required is for the thermal conductivity (k-value at 75 degrees 

F.) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thickness, as directed, for the use of material 

having a different thermal conductivity. 

B. Fire and insurance rating: Comply with the fire resistance and flammability ratings indicated, 

and comply with requirements of Fire Marshal having jurisdiction. 


2.01 BLANKET-TYPE BUILDING INSULATION 




BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1

1. Owens-Corning 

2. Johns Manville Corporation 

3. U.S. Gypsum Company 

B. Glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous binder formed into flexible blankets complying 

with ASTM C-665, Type III, Class B. Foil-backed vapor barrier laminated to one face, with 1" 

flanges on long edges; vapor transmission not more than 0.5 perms. Insulation shall have 0- 

25 flamespread rating, and smoke development no greater than 150. 

1. R-value at Walls: 13. 

2. R-value at Roofs: 30 

2.02 RIGID INSULATION 



1. Dow, Styrofoam SM 

2. U.S. Gypsum, Formular 

B. Rigid, closed-cell, extruded polystyrene board complying with FS-HH-I-524C, Type IV, 

flamespread of 75 or less and fuel contribution 0-450, in accordance with UBC standard 42.1; 

25 psi minimum compressive strength, water vapor permeability of 0.6 perms per inch 

maximum; thermal conductivity of 0.20. 

C. Thickness shall be two inches, R-value of 10.0, unless noted otherwise. 

2.03 SAFING INSULATION 

A. Safing insulation shall meet the following requirements: Fire hazard classification per ASTM E- 

84, flamespread 15, fuel contribution 0, smoke development 0. Meet FS-HH-I-521F, Type III, 

except identification marking, paragraph 3.7.1. 


A. Adhesive for bonding insulation: The type recommended by the insulation manufacturer for 

the type of application shown, condition of substrate, and compliance with insurance 

requirements. 

B. Provide proper clips for attachment of insulation to walls, roof deck or as appropriate for other 

locations. 



A. Examine all subsurfaces to receive work and report, in writing, to the Architect, any conditions 

detrimental to the work. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any 

subsequent claims to the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance 

of all subsurfaces. 

B. Do not proceed with the installation of insulation until subsequent work that conceals the 

insulation is ready to be performed. 




A. Comply with manufacturer's instruction for the particular conditions of installation in each 

case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult 

the manufacturer's technical representatives for specific recommendations before proceeding 

with the work. 

B. Apply insulation units to the substrate by the method indicated, complying with the 

manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate 

with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of 

units. 

C. Install rigid insulation at foundations from bottom of concrete slab to top of footings. 

3.03 CLEANUP 







SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes exterior insulation and finish system, class PB, including but not limited to, 

finish, rigid insulation, mesh, primer, caulking and backing board when not shown on the 

drawings and required by manufacturer. 

B. Related Sections: Division 5 Section “Cold-Formed Metal Framing” for metal studs and 

sheathing. 


A. Refer to Section 01300. Submit shop drawings which show layout, installation methods and 

construction details. 

B. Submit 12" x 12" sample of full system on substrate identical to project requirements for type 

of finish. Sample shall be erected with same tools and techniques for actual work. Sample 

shall be used as a standard for color, finish, texture, and construction detailing of actual work. 


A. Coordinate with trades whose work is affected by the work of this section. Notify trades of 

schedule to ensure timely installation of items connected with this section. 

B. Work closely with Section 07600 to assure timely erection of flashing on exposed edges of 

system. 


A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packages with labels intact. 

B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, protected from weather 

and temperatures below 40 degrees F. 


A. Manufacturer shall be a member of the Exterior Insulation Manufacturer's Association (EIMA). 

B. The applicator shall be certified by the manufacturer and have five years experience in the 

installation of exterior insulation finish systems. 


2.01 MANUFACTURER & FINISH 



1. Dryvit Systems Inc. 

2. Sto Industries Inc. 

3. Synergy 

4. Master Wall Inc. 


EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 07240 - 1


A. Primer/Adhesive: Acrylic based approved by manufacturer of the finish system. 

B. Insulation Board: Expanded Polystyrene complying with the requirements of FS-HH-I-524C, 

Type 1. Flame spread shall be less than 25 and smoke development shall be less than 450 

when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. Thickness is indicated on the drawings. 

C. Standard reinforcing fabric shall be balanced open weave, treated glass fiber mesh, 3.8 

ounce per sq. yard. 

D. Finish shall be acrylic-based factory mixed materials, intregal color and texture. 

E. Cement: Type 1, Portland Cement, ASTM C-150. 

F. Water: Potable 

G. Sealant: Tremco "Dymeric" with primer #1, Pecora "Dynatrol 11" with Primer P75, or Dow 

Insulation Mastic No. 11. 

PART 3 - ERECTION 

3.01 WEATHER CONDITIONS 

A. Ambient air and substrate temperatures shall be 40 degrees F. or greater and rising at the 

time of installation and shall remain at least 40 degrees F. for at least 24 hours after 

application. 

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. Insulation boards shall be applied with joints offset with respect to the substrate joints using a 

running bond pattern, with joints at corners staggered and interlocked. 

B. Provide temporary protection during installation of system and prior to installation of sealants 

and flashing systems. 

3.03 PRIMER/ADHESIVE AND INSULATION BOARD 

A. Apply 6" wide strips of reinforcing mesh to substrate, after board is applied fold reinforcing 

mesh around edge and overlap face sheet with edge strip. Apply primer/adhesive mixture to 

entire surface of one face of insulation board using a 3/8" notched trowel. Make sure ribbons 

of adhesive are full and reach the outer perimeter of the EPS board. 

B. Mount prepared board to substrate, tamp board using even pressure to produce uniform 

contact and bond. Allow to cure 24 hours. Install all routed joints. 

C. Sand high areas of insulation board to produce a level plane surface. 

3.04 BASE COAT AND MESH 

A. Apply base coat, 1/16" thick coat of primer/adhesive mixture to the surface of insulation 

board. Immediately embed reinforcing fabric into wet primer/adhesive mixture. Fabric shall be 

abutted and staggered. Allow to dry 12 hours. 

B. Apply 1 layer of base coat over the reinforcing fabric. Allow to dry 24 hours. Wrap reinforcing 



3.05 FINISH 

mesh around edges and corners. Use extreme care to avoid "telescoping" of joints through 

finish coat. 

A. Apply finish using sufficient manpower and equipment to ensure a continuous operation 

without cold joints, scaffolding lines, and other blemishes. 

B. Finish material shall be thoroughly mixed before use. The surface of the base coat must be 

smooth. Level uneven surfaces with primer/adhesive. 

C. Colors to be selected by Architect and may not be of the standard colors offered by the 

manufacturer. 

3.06 CLEANUP 







SECTION 07270 - FIRESTOPPING 




Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes firestopping for the following: 

1. Penetrations through fire- resistance- rated walls and partitions including both empty 

openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other 

penetrating items. 

2. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. 

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and accessories. 

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint sealants. 

3. Division 15 Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations. 

4. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 

C. This section specifies firestopping materials, which shall be installed at all penetrations 

through fire-resistive and smoke barrier construction. 

1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of 

fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. 

B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop 

systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814 and UL1479, but not less 

than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. 

C. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as 

determined per ASTM E 119 and UL2079, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the 

fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. 

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide 

moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 

2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop 

systems not requiring removal of insulation. 


A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 


B. Product data for each type of product specified. 


FIRESTOPPING 07270-1

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for 

construction and penetrating items. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following 

requirements and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article: 

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A 

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency 

performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of 

qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

b. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to 

design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by 

another qualified testing and inspecting agency, 

c. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of 

qualified testing and inspection agency. 

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of 

penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. 

C. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the 

method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light 

Microscopy." 

D. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that 

designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. 

E. Installer shall be certified by manufacturer's representative. Manufacturer's representative 

(not distributor or agent) shall be on the project site during initial installation to train contractor 

on proper firestop installation procedures. 


A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or 

packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and 

manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified 

testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing 

time; and mixing instructions far multicomponent materials. 

B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due 

to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate 

temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when 

substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 



B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by 

natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. 


2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with 

each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the 

firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by 

firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to 

install fill materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in 

Part 1.Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved 

by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated 

systems. 

C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this 

Section that comply with system performance and other requirements. 

2.02 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 

A. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk farm formulated for use 

with mastic coating, and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. 

B. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: Single-component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic 

binders. 

C. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation. 

D. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no 

solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. 

E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single -component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on 

one side. 

F. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and 

lightweight aggregate formulated far mixing with water at Project site to form a 

nonshrinking, homogenous mortar. 

G. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing 

elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below: 

1. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other 

surfaces. 

H. Firestop Sleeves: Firestop device with integrated intumescent inlay, smoke, and 

water seals. 



I. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, singlecomponent, 

synthetic-polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below: 

1. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other 

surfaces. 

J. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

1. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: 

a. FireMaster Bulk and FireMaster Mastic, Thermal Ceramics. 

b. Flameshield Ceramic Fiber, Nelson Firestop Products. 

c. CP672 Firestop Spray with Mineral Wool, Hilti, Inc. 

2. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: 

a. Metacaulk 525, The RectorSeal Corporation. 

3. Intumescent Latex Sealant: 

a. Metacaulk 950, The RectorSeal Corporation. 

b. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. 

c. Nelson LBS: Latex-Based Sealant: Nelson Firestop Products. 

d. FS-One High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant, Hilti, Inc. 

4. Intumescent Putty: 

a. Pensil 500 Intumescent Putty, General Electric Co. 

b. Flame-Safe FSP1000 Putty, International Protective Coatings Corp. 

c. Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products. 

d. Nelson Intumescent Putty Bars, Nelson Firestop Products. 

e. CP618 Firestop Putty Stick, Hilti, Inc. 

5. Intumescent Wrap Strips: 

a. Dow Corning Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap Strip 2002, Dow Corning 

Corp. 

b. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products. 

c. Intumescent Wrap Strips (WRS), Nelson Firestop Products. 

d. CP617/CP617L Firestop Putty Pad, Hilti, Inc. 

6. Mortar: 

a. K-2 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc. 

b. Novasit K-10 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc. 

c. KBS-Mortar Seal, International Protective Coatings Corp. 

d. Nelson CMP & Mortar Compound: Nelson Firestop Products. 

e. FS635 Trowelable Firestop Compound, Hilti, Inc. 

7. Silicone Sealants: 

a. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant 2000, Dow Corning Corp. 

b. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant SL 2003, Dow Corning Corp. 

c. CS240 Firestop Sealant, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 

d. Metacaulk 835, The RectorSeal Corporation. 

e. Metacaulk 880, The RectorSeal Corporation. 

f. Fyre-Sil, Tremco Inc. 

g. Fyre-Sil S/L, Tremco Inc. 

h. Nelson CLK Silicone Caulk Non-Sag & Self-Leveling: Nelson Firestop 

Products. 

i. CP6015 Elastomeric Firestop Sealant, Hilti, Inc. 

8. Firestop Sleeves: 

a. CP680 Cast-In Firestop Device, Hilti, Inc. 

2.03 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, 

elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 



2.04 MIXING 

requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and 

requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants. 

B. Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 

1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard 

colors for products of type indicated. 

C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure- related 

Use NT, and joint -substrate related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates 

indicated) O. 

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

1. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: 

a. Vulkem 922, Mameco International Inc. 

b. Sikaflex 2cn NS, Sika Corp. 

c. Sonalastic NP 2, Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. 

d. Dymeric, Tremco Inc. 

e. CP672 Firestop Spray with Mineral Wool, Hilti, Inc. 

A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping 

manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of 

mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other 

procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum 

performance characteristics far application indicated. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements 

for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting 

performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions 

have been corrected. 


A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to 

comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 

1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from 

penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 

2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound 

surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose 

particles remaining from cleaning operation. 

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 

3.03 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS 

A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the 

through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining 

to products and applications indicated. 



B. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce 

the following results: 

1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, 

and penetrating items. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and 

penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce 

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 

3.04 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 

1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to 

products and applications indicated. 

B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to 

produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths 

that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required. 

C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully 

wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and 

providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum 

sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. 

D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or 

curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce 

fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion 

of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not 

use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant 

manufacturer. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work 

progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of 

firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. 

B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating 

substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that 

they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such 

protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated 

firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with 





SECTION 07410 - PRE-FORMED METAL PANELS 


1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. Provide all un-insulated metal wall and soffit panels as shown and noted on drawings. 

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 

A. Primary and secondary structural steel. 

B. Division 7 Section “Manufactured Roof Panels” for metal roofing 


A. Manufacturer and erector shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of related industry 

experience. 

B. Profile and gauges of panels shall beet a wind load of 70 MPH for panels without exceeding a 

deflection of L/180. 


A. No less than ten days prior to bid date, submit all independent laboratory test reports, design 

and performance data as specified. 

B. Prior to fabrication, submit erection/shop drawings for products specified, showing all erection 

procedures and accessories required. 

C. Refer to Section 01300. 



A. Manufacturer: MBCI (or approved equal). 

B. 22 gauge 2 1/2" corrugated metal panel. 

1. Finish to conform to Signature 300. Color selected by architect from manufacturer 

standard colors. 

C. The flashing and trim shall be of the same material, gauge, finish and color(s) as the panels, 


D. Accessories: 

1. Provide all required trim and closures for a complete and weathertight finish. 

2. Provide all required fastening devices as required. 

E. Accessories: 

1. Fasteners: #14 diameter pre-painted self drillers. 

2. Tape Sealant: A non-hardening shall be installed at all roof side laps and wall side 


PRE-FORMED METAL PANELS 07410 - 1



laps of office area. 

A. The installer shall examine the building to verify that the structure is ready for installation. 

B. All structural supports shall be in place and all sag rods, diagonal bracing and connections 

shall be tightened before work proceeds. 

C. Field check dimensions and check support alignment with a taut string or wire; support 

misalignment will cause panel "oil-canning". 

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 

3.02 INSTALLATION AND ERECTION 

A. Install metal panels, fasteners, trim, and related items in conformance with approved 

drawings. 

B. Protect installed panels from abuse by other trades. The general contractor shall be 

responsible for protecting the panels from wet cement, plaster, painting operations, etc. 

3.03 DAMAGED MATERIAL AND CLEANING 

A. Replace damaged panels and other components of work which cannot be repaired by finish 

touch-up or similar minor repair. 

B. To prevent rust staining, remove immediately from finished surfaces any filings caused by 

drilling or cutting. 

C. Wipe down each area after erection is complete for final acceptance. 

D. Refer to Section 01700. 



PRE-FORMED METAL PANELS 07410 - 2

SECTION 07411 - MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 



A. Furnish and install un-insulated metal roof panels as shown and noted on drawings. 


1. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel.” 

2. Division 5 Section “Steel Joists and Joist Girders.” 

3. Division 5 Section “Steel Deck.” 

4. Division 7 Section “Building Insulation.” 

5. Division 7 Section “Flashing and Sheet Metal.” 


A. Manufacturer and erector shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of related industry 

experience. 

B. Profile and gauges of panels shall beet a wind load of 70 MPH for panels without exceeding a 

deflection of L/180. 


A. No less than ten days prior to bid date, submit all independent laboratory test reports, design 

and performance data as specified. 

B. Prior to fabrication, submit erection/shop drawings for products specified, showing all erection 

procedures and accessories required. 

C. Refer to Section 01300. 





1. Berridge Manufacturing co. 

2. BHP Steel Building Products USA 

3. AMP, Atlanta Metal Products, Inc. 

4. Copper Sales, Inc. UNA-CLAD 

5. MBCI 


A. 24 gauge, standing seam 12” o.c. continuous roll-formed panels, similar to MBCI LokSeam 

system. 

B. The flashing and trim shall be of the same material, gauge, finish and color(s) as the panels, 



MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1

2.02 FINISH 

C. Accessories: 

1. Provide all required trim and closures for a complete and weathertight finish. 

2. Provide all required fastening devices as required. 


1. Fasteners: #14 diameter pre-painted self drillers. 

2. Tape Sealant: Install non-hardening tape sealant at all roof sidelaps. 

A. Finish shall be full strength Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating, applied by the manufacturer on 

a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 

to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side 

shall be coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall conform to all 

tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 finish supplier. 

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard or custom colors. 



A. The installer shall examine the building to verify that the structure is ready for installation. 

B. All structural supports shall be in place and all sag rods, diagonal bracing and connections 

shall be tightened before work proceeds. 

C. Field check dimensions and check support alignment with a taut string or wire; support 

misalignment will cause panel "oil-canning". 

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 

3.02 INSTALLATION AND ERECTION 

A. Install metal panels, fasteners, trim, and related items in conformance with approved 

drawings. 

B. Protect installed panels from abuse by other trades. The general contractor shall be 

responsible for protecting the panels from wet cement, plaster, painting operations, etc. 

3.03 DAMAGED MATERIAL AND CLEANING 

A. Replace damaged panels and other components of work which cannot be repaired by finish 

touch-up or similar minor repair. 

B. To prevent rust staining, remove immediately from finished surfaces any filings caused by 

drilling or cutting. 

C. Wipe down each area after erection is complete for final acceptance. 

D. Refer to Section 01700. 



MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07411 - 2

SECTION 07430 - COMPOSITE PANELS 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: Composite panels, including: 

1. High Performance Rout and Return Dry System with PE Core Alucobond ! 

B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include but are not limited to: 

1. Structural Framing: Division 5 Section “Cold-Formed Metal Framing.” 

2. Wood Blocking: Division 6 Section “ Rough Carpentry.” 

3. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Division 7 Section “Flashing and Sheet Metal.” 

4. Sealants (not specified in this section): Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.” 

5. Windows: Division 8 Section “Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.” 

6. Translucent Panels: Division 8 Section “Insulated Translucent Sandwich Panel 

Wall/Roof System. 

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Provide a watertight Rout and Return Dry panel system, as detailed on the drawings. The 

panel system must consist of a dry gasket interlocking system. Any panel system utilizing a 

continuous field applied joint sealant is unacceptable. 

B. The panel system as detailed, shall consist of concealed dry gasketed perimeter extrusions, 

extruded stiffeners, gaskets, fasteners and may consist of related flashings (where architectural 

drawings indicate they are to be furnished under this specification section), sealants between 

jamb panels and previously installed adjacent construction, and other miscellaneous 

accessories required for a complete watertight installation. Assembly shall be water and airtight 

without reliance on a secondary backup membrane. 


A. Pre-bid submittals: 

1. Project Listings: Submit five (5) listings of projects of similar scope and character, 

photographs of existing installations. Include the contact names and phone numbers 

for the representatives of the Owner, Architect and Contractor for each of the projects. 

2. Documents: Demonstrating product compliance with the local building code shall be 

submitted prior to the bid. The architect prior to the bid date must approve alternate 

materials and wall systems. 

3. Substitutions: Any proposed system must comply with the Substitution Section 1.04 B 

and submit the following: 

a. Prior to bid approval, submit the following ten (10) days prior to the bid date: 

(1) Sample: Panel system specifications and 24” x 24” sample fabricated 

showing the typical 4-way intersection, with perimeter extrusions and 

stiffeners. Samples must be accessible from the backside. 

(2) Details: Details and installation instructions showing typical edge 

conditions, corners joints, terminations and 4-way intersections. 

Details must include sealing instructions. 

(3) Test Reports: Independent laboratory test results certifying that the 

proposed panel system meets or exceeds all the tests required in this 

specification. 

b. Submit the following with the bid after the substitution has been approved: 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 


COMPOSITE PANELS 07430 - 1

(1) All costs resulting from modifications to the structure, substrates 

and/or other components as required by the proposed substitution. 

Each and every cost shall be clearly delineated in the submittal. 

B. Post-bid submittals: 

1. Shop Drawings: Submit CAD generated shop drawings showing profiles of panel units, 

details of forming, joint supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, sealants and accessories. 

Show details of weatherproofing at edge terminations, show elevations, and layout of 

entire work. 

a. Shop drawings should indicate project layout from control gird lines and 

elevations referring to the required details for each unique condition. 

b. The details should show the preferred profiles and performance requirements. 

Provide a watertight and structurally sound, self-draining wall panel system 

that meets or exceeds the performance criteria set in the Testing Section 1.05. 

2. Samples: Submit an 8" x 8" sample of panel system in the specified finish complete 

with factory applied edge treatment, fabricated into units representative of the actual 

system. 

3. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports which meet or exceed the requirements as 

described in the Testing Section 1.05. The test report shall include the following, 

a. Name and location of the certified independent testing laboratory with the 

contact phone numbers. 

b. Date the test was performed. 

c. Unit description and system name of the panel system tested. Include the test 

drawings with elevations with details showing the tested panel joinery. 

4. Report of Approval: ICC/EC Evaluation Report No. ESR-1114. 

5. Affidavit: Certifying material meets requirements specified. 


A. Qualifications: 

1. Installer qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has 

experience in wall applications similar to that required for this project. 

a. Installation History: Installer shall be a firm that has at least five (5) years of 

experience with exterior wall applications and has successfully completed 

installations of similar scope and size to this project. 

2. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator capable of providing field service representation 

during construction, approving acceptable installer and application method. 

a. Fabrication History: Panel fabricator shall assume undivided responsibility for 

all components of the panel work, and shall demonstrate no less than ten (10) 

years successful experience of metal panel work similar in scope and size to 

this project. 

3. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer experienced in performing work of this 

section that has experience with the specified materials. 

a. Manufacturer of the composite material must have at least ten (10) years 

experience in the production of the specified composite material. 

b. ICC/EC Report: Composite panel manufacturer shall have an ICC/EC 

Research Report (i.e., Report ESR-1114 for Alucobond PE Core ! ). 

c. Certification: Composite panel manufacturer shall have established a 

Certification Program acceptable to the local Code Authorities. 

d. Manufacturers of the accessories and perimeter framing extrusions must have 

at least five (5) years experience in the production of their respective products. 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 



B. Substitutions: Any substitution must comply with the pre-bid submittal as discussed in the 

Submittal section 1.03. No post-bid substitutions are allowed. 

1. Any proposed system shall be approved and compatible with adjacent materials and 

components such that the assembly as a whole will conform to this specification, and 

shall include an extruded aluminum perimeter to provide the designed architectural 

reveal and guttering system without the use of external field applied sealants. Any 

substitution must also comply with the System Description Section 1.02 and meet or 

exceed the performance requirements as described in the Testing Section 1.05 without 

the reliance of a secondary backup membrane. 

C. Code Performance Requirements: Work of the section shall conform to all applicable codes 

and regulations. 

1. Thermal Design Criteria: 

a. Make allowances for free and noiseless vertical and horizontal thermal 

movement due to the contraction and expansion of component parts, for an 

ambient temperature range from -20 degrees F to +180 degrees F. Buckling 

of panels, separation/opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, failure of 

sealants or any other detrimental effects due to thermal movement of 

component parts will not be permitted. Fabrication, assembly and erection 

procedure shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the time of 

the respective operation. 

2. Wind Loads: 

a. Assemblies herein specified shall be designed for flexural, shear and torsional 

stresses for the following positive and negative wind pressures acting normal 

to the plane of the assemblies. Loading design shall; be based on latest 

Building Code but in no case less than 20 pounds per square foot with 25 

pounds per square foot corner pressure. 

3. Material Stress and Deflection: 

a. Normal to the plane of the wall between structural supports, deflection of the 

attached perimeter-framing members shall not exceed L/175 of span length or 

3/4", whichever is less. 

b. At connection points of framing members to anchors, anchor deflection in any 

direction shall not exceed 1/16". Where connection points are not clearly 

defined, maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/16". 

c. Stresses must take into account interaction and in no case shall allowable 

values exceed the yield stress. 

d. At 1.5 times design pressure, permanent deflections of framing members must 

not exceed L/1000 of the span length, and components must not experience 

failure or gross permanent distortion. At connection points of framing 

members to anchors, permanent set shall not exceed 1/16". 

1.05 TESTING 

A. Wall System Test Specimen Arrangement: The panel system test specimen must be arranged 

with at least four (4) panels. The panel joint arrangement shall consist of intersecting typical 

vertical and horizontal joints to generate a typical 4-way intersection and include the design and 

materials for the 4-way splice. Testing a 3-way intersection alone is not acceptable. 

B. Wall System Performance: Walls furnished under this section shall have been tested. If 

comparable tests are not available, mockups shall be constructed and tests performed. In 

either case, an independent laboratory approved by the architect shall conduct the tests. Test 

results shall meet or exceed the following without reliance on a secondary backup membrane: 

1. Air Infiltration: 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 



a. When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, the air infiltration at 6.24 psf 

must not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of wall area. 

2. Static Water Infiltration: 

a. When tested at a differential static pressure of 15.0 psf for 15 minutes, in 

accordance with ASTM E331, any uncontrolled water passing into the roomside 

beyond the interior barrier of the wall system shall not be permitted. The 

panel system shall be designed to provide controlled drainage to the exterior 

face of the wall for any leakage of water occurring at joints and/or 

condensation taking place within the wall system. 

3. Dynamic Water Infiltration: 

a. Shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501 with a slipstream velocity, 

creating a pressure on the wall equivalent to 15.0 psf with a water spray rate of 

5 gallons per hour per square foot for 15 minutes with no uncontrolled water 

leakage to the room-side. 

4. Structural Performance: 

a. Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E330 at design pressure. Deflection 

limitations are listed previously. After initial test, test at 150% of design 

pressure; no permanent deformation exceeding L/1000 or failure to structural 

members allowed. 

5. Seismic Racking: 

a. There shall be no failure or deterioration of the system when the unit is laterally 

racked to 3/4” in both directions and repeated for three (3) cycles. System 

must pass the static water requirements as described in the Static Water 

Infiltration Section 1.05 A 2, following the seismic racking. 

C. Bond Integrity Test: In accordance with ASTM D 1781-76 for bond integrity, simulating 

resistance to delaminating (No other test procedure is acceptable): 

1. Peel strength: 22.5 in lb/in (min) 

D. Fire Performance: 

1. ASTM E84-79 - Maximum value flame spread 0, smoke developed 0. 

2. UBC 17-5 - No flame spread along interior face or penetration through the wall 

assembly. 

3. ASTM 162 - No surface flaming. 


A. After acceptance of panels on a given elevation, protection shall be the responsibility of the 

General Contractor. 


2.01 COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM 

A. Fabricator: ESC Alucobond ! Architectural Wall System manufactured by Elward Systems 

Corporation of Lakewood, Colorado. (800) 933-5339 or (303) 239-6303. 

B. Panel System: The panel system shall consist of Alucobond ! manufactured by Alcan 

Composites USA Inc., Benton, Kentucky, and a system of custom aluminum extrusions as 

specified herein. The panel shall conform to all of the following, 

1. Perimeter Extrusions: Extruded aluminum with integral weather-stripping as detailed 

on drawings, so as to provide the following essential features, 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 




a. Rout and return the Alucobond ! on all perimeters. “Continuous Edge Grip” 

(CEG) is not acceptable. 

b. Exposed edge of the Alucobond ! shall be protected inside an extruded 

aluminum pocket. 

c. Maximum overall panel thickness, including the attachment shim space, shall 

not exceed 2”. 

d. The Alucobond ! shall be mechanically attached to all perimeter extrusions. 

The mechanical fastener must not penetrate any portion of the outer (exterior) 

skin of the aluminum composite material. Attachment of the Alucobond ! to the 

perimeter extrusions with structural silicone is not allowed. 

e. Do not substitute sealants for dry gasketing shown at the metal panel joinery. 

2. Stiffeners: Extruded aluminum sections secured to edge trim and bonded to rear face 

of Alucobond ! with silicone, and of sufficient size and strength to maintain flatness of 

the panel within the specified tolerances. 

3. Reveals at Panel: Joint size between the faces of the perimeter extrusions shall be 

1/2", nominal. 

4. Flatness Criteria: Maximum 1/8" in 15'-0" on panel in any direction for assembled 

units. (Non-accumulative). 

A. Alucobond ! Composite Material (ACM or MCM): 

1. Composite: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a core of extruded thermoplastic, 

formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar 

materials. Total composite thickness is 4mm. 

2. Face Sheets: 0.020" thick . 

3. Color and Coating: To be selected by the architect from the Series A and/or Series B 

Alucobond ! color chart with the appropriate recommended coating, (2 coat or 3 coat). 

4. Finish: The selected coating must meet the weathering performance criteria of AAMA 

2605. Exterior surfaces shall be coil coated Kynar 500 ! or Hylar 5000 ! based 

polyvinylidence fluoride (PVDF) resin. Other resin-based coatings are not acceptable. 

In particular, the coating must have successfully passed the following tests: 

a. Humidity Resistance 

(1) Test Method: ASTM D-2247 

(a) No formation of blisters when subjected to condensing water 

fog at 100% relative humidity and 100 degrees Fahrenheit for 

4,000 hours. 

b. Salt Spray Resistance 

(1) Test Method: ASTM B-117; expose coating system to 4,000 hours, 

using 5% NaCl solution. 

(a) Minimum rating of 7 on scribe or cut edges. 

(b) Minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field. 

c. Weather Exposure 

(1) Outdoor 

(a) Ten (10) year exposure at 45 degree angle facing south 

Florida exposure. 

(b) Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units as calculated in 

accordance with ASTM D-2244. 

(c) Maximum chalk rating of 8 inches accordance with ASTM D- 

659. 

(d) No checking, crazing, adhesion loss. 

5. Core: Thermoplastics 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 



B. Aluminum Extrusions: 

1. Perimeter Extrusions 

a. Alloy: AA-6063-T5 

b. Color: Extrusion color shall be black painted Duracon. 

2. Stiffeners 

a. Alloy: AA-6063-T5 

b. Color: Stiffeners shall have a mill finish. 

C. System Sealants: 

1. Sealants and gaskets within the panel system shall be per manufacturer's standards. 

2. Sealant color shall be black. 

D. Gaskets: 

1. Gaskets shall be Santoprene or EPDM. 

E. Flashings: 

1. Fabricate flashing from 0.062” minimum thickness aluminum sheet. Where exposed to 

view, finish to match adjacent panels. Provide lap strip under flashing at abutted 

conditions; with lapped surfaces sealed with a full-bed of non-hardening sealant. 

F. Fasteners: 

1. Attachment of the panel system to the primary panel structural supports shall be made 

using a Drill-Flex ! Fastener by ELCO Textron Inc. 

2. Typical joinery shall be attached with concealed fasteners. When exposed fasteners 

are required in isolated conditions, the fastener shall be obscured in the panel joinery. 


A. Fabricate panel units to dimensions indicated on the drawings based on an assumed design 

temperature of +70 degrees F. Allow for ambient temperature range at time of fabrication and 

erection. 

B. Fabricate panels in sizes shown using composite aluminum panel material and perimeter 

extrusion so that the panel thickness at the joinery is no more than 1.75". Completed panel 

shall be properly fabricated and designed so that no restraints are placed on the panel, which 

might result in excessive compressive skin stresses. The installation detailing shall be such 

that the installed panels shall remain flat due to temperature changes and at all times remain 

water and air-tight. Oil canning of panel surface is not acceptable. 

C. Where practical, shop fabricate units ready for erection. If not shop assembled, pre-fabricate 

components at the shop as required for proper and expeditious field assembly. 

D. Design, fabricate, assemble, and erect wall panel units, to insure a weather tight system, as 

required in this specification section. 

E. Where drawings indicate, factory curve panels to required radii. Extrusions shall be factory 

stretched formed to conform to panel curve. 

F. Provide stiffeners secured to rear face of panels mechanically fastened to edge trim members, 

with spacing as required by specific job wind loading. 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 



PART 3 – EXECUTION 


A. Delivery: Deliver fabricated units and component parts identified per erection drawings. 

B. Protection of Surfaces: Protect surfaces from damage during shipping and erection. Inspect 

work for damage upon delivery - no damaged work permitted on job site. 

C. Storage: Coordinate with General Contractor for storage space. 

D. Panel Penetrations: Penetrations including those shown on the Architectural Drawings that are 

required by other trades shall be done by the trade involved, unless noted otherwise. 


A. Examine supporting structure and conditions under which the work is to be erected, and notify 

the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. 

Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install in compliance with manufacturer’s product data, including shop drawings, installation 

instructions, technical bulletins, and special detailing pertaining to the any specific condition. 

B. Erect panel work in a square, plumb, strait, and true, accurately fitted manner. 

C. Do not install component parts, which are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, 

dented, abraded and/or broken members. 

D. Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection, in a manner which would 

damage finish, decrease strength, or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in system 

performance. Return component parts that require alteration to shop for re-fabrication, if 

possible, or for replacement by new parts. 

E. Apply a coat of bituminous paint, concealed, on one or both surfaces wherever dissimilar 

metals would otherwise be in contact. Use gasketed or approved coated fasteners where 

needed to eliminate the possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action between metals. 

F. Anchor panels securely in accordance with the approved shop drawings to allow for the 

necessary thermal movement and structural support as specified above. 


A. After installation of panels on a given elevation, any additional protection shall be the 

responsibility of the General Contractor. 

B. Deposit all trash from panel shipping crates in General Contractor's furnished debris boxes. 

C. Make sure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and sealants. 

D. Remove protective film at time of panel installation. 

________________________________________________________________________________________ 




________________________________________________________________________________________ 



SECTION 07511 – BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 




Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this 

Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 


1. Repair of existing roof system and new membrance adjacent addition. 

2. Roof insulation. 

3. Built-up asphalt roofing system. 


1. Division 2 Section “Selective Demolition” for additional requirements for 

removal and disposal of construction materials. 

2. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood nailers, curbs, cants, and 

blocking, and plywood sheathing. 

3. Division 7 Section “Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing” for expansion joint 

covers and tie-in to roof at new addition. 

4. Division 7 Section “Flashing and Sheet Metal” for metal counter flashings. 

5. Division 15 for roof drain removal and re-installation. 


A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA’s “The NRCA 

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual” for definition of terms related to roofing work in 

this Section. 

B. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the 

temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoises for mopping application and 75 

centipoises for mechanical application, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F 

measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. 


A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain 

watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, 

thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. 

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one 

another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by 

roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

C. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials 

that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing 


BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511 - 1


system and that are listed in FMG’s “Approval Guide” for Class 1 or noncombustible 

construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 

2. Hail Resistant: MH 

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Samples for Verification: For the following: 

1. 12”x12” square of ply sheet/ flashing backer sheet. 

2. 12”x12” square of flashing sheet. 

3. 12”x12” square of roof insulation. 

4. Two insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 

C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer 

is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. 

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing 

system complies with requirements specified in “Performance Requirements” Article. 

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. 

E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. 

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by 

manufacturer and witnessed by qualified testing agency, for components of roofing 

system. 

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system. 

H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in the Section. 

J. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer’s inspection report of 

completed roofing installation. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by 

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer’s product and that is eligible to 

receive manufacturer’s warranty. 

1. Experience: 5 years minimum. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for roofing 

system identical to that used for this Project. 

C. Manufacturer’s Field Inspection: Require Manufacturer to maintain an inspector who 

is on job site during times that built-up asphalt roofing work is in progress and who is 

experienced in installing roofing systems similar to type and scope required for this 



Project. Inspector to be on the job every day (different time of day each day so that 

all parts of the work can be inspected.), with a minimum of 2 hours per week. 

D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by 

roofing system manufacturer. 

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with fire-testresponse 

characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per 

test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable 

to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate 

markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with 

requirements in Division I Section “Project Meetings.” Review methods and 

procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner’s insurer if applicable, testing and 

inspecting agency representative, roofing installer, roofing system 

manufacturer’s representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or 

affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted 

equipment. 

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including 

manufacturer’s written instructions. 

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, 

Installer’s personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and 

avoid delays. 

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with 

requirements, including flatness and fastening. 

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof 

penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will 

affect roofing system. 

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates 

if applicable. 

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after 

installation. 

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and 

labeled with manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of 

manufacture, and directions for storage. 

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, 

protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system 

manufacturer. Protect stored liquid materials from direct sunlight. 

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid materials that cannot be applied within 

its stated shelf life. 



C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by 

sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with 

insulation manufacturer’s written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting 

during installation. 

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid 

permanent deflection of deck. 


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted 

weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer’s 

written instructions and warranty requirements. 

1.09 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form, without monetary limitation, in 

which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that 

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes 

roof leaks. 

1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing 

membrane, accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, substrate board, vapor 

retarder, walkway products, and other components of roofing system. 

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer’s warranty, on warranty form at 

end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all 

components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof 

insulation, fasteners, substrate boards, vapor retarders, and walkway products, for 

the following warranty period: 




A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 


1. Firestone. 

2. GAF Materials Corporation. 

3. Johns Manville International, Inc. 

4. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. 

5. U.S. Intec. 

B. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements 

apply for product selection: 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the 

products specified. 



2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES 

A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type VI, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. 

B. Cap Sheet: ASTM D 3909, mineral surfaced, asphalt-impregnated, glass fiber felt. 

1. Granule Color: White. 

2.03 FLASHING MATERIALS 

A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type VI, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. 

B. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Type I and II, composite polyester- and glass-fiberreinforced, 

SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application 

method specified and as follows: 

1. Granule Color: White 

2.04 ASPHALT MATERIALS 

A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by built-up roofing 

system manufacturer for application. 

2.05 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATREIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for 

intended use and compatible with built-up roofing. 

B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by 

roofing system manufacturer for application. 

C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen, non-hardening, nonmigrating, 

non-skinning, and non-drying. 

D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting 

corrosion-resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing 

membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout 

strength; acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 

E. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 7 Section 

“Flashing and Sheet Metal.” 

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by 

roofing system manufacturer. 

G. Gravel: Comply with ASTM D 1863. 

1. Provide gravel of similar size as existing roof. 

2. Do not re-use existing gravel unless approved by the Owner. 

2.06 ROOF INSULATION 

A. General: Provide performed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements 

and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer’s standard sizes, except that 

maximum size of insulation board shall be 4’ x 8’. 



1. Thickness: As required to provide the heights indicated. 

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat 

facer on both major surfaces. 

C. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic 

fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated. 

D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 

! inch per 12 inches (1:24), unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Provide performed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation 

shapes to provide slopes to drain. Fabricate to slope of ! inch per 12 inches (1:24), 


1. Provide crickets at high sides of mechanical roof-top equipment to direct 

water around equipment. 

2.07 INSULATION ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for 

intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting 

corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation 

to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 

C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. 


3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS 

A. Removal of Existing Roofing System: Remove existing ballast, built-up roof 

membrane and insulation in the area affected by the new construction. Install new 

insulation as indicated in the drawings to provide the slopes indicated and apply new 

built-up asphalt roof system. Tie in to existing built-up roof as recommended by 

manufacturer to maintain integrity and water-tightness of the membrane. 


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance 

with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing 

system: 

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced 

and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 

2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to 

roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thickness of 

insulation. 

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of wood roof deck comply 

with roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions. 




4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to 

roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions. 

Remove sharp projections. 

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from 

spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs 

when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 

3.04 INSULATION INSTALLMENT 

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to 

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. 

B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions for installing roof 

insulation. 

C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure performed 45-degree insulation cant strips 

at junctures of built-up roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle 

changes greater than 45 degrees. 

D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 

E. Install insulation with side joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end 

joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps 

exceeding ! inch with insulation. 

1. Cut and fit insulation within ! inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 

F. Install two layers of polyisocyanurate insulation under area of roofing to achieve 

required thickness. Install with joints of second layer staggered from joints of first 

layer a minimum of 12 inches in each direction. 

G. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is 

flush and does not restrict flow of water. 

H. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of 

polyisocyanurate insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using 

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified boardtype 

roof insulation to deck type. 

1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FMG’s “Approval 

Guide” for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 

2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing 

asphalt. 

I. Following installation of polyisocyanurate insulation, install layer of perlite insulation 

with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. 



Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 12 inches in each 

direction. 

1. Install in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 

3.05 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer’s 

written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA’s “Quality 

Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-Up Roofing.” 

1. Roofing System: 4G-I-G, by Johns Manville International, Inc., or equivalent 

system by other acceptable manufacturers. 

a. Install cap sheet on vertical surfaces. 

B. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing 

membrane sheets are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the 

workday or when rain is forecast. 

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day’s work to cover exposed roofing 

membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing 

cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed. 

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to 

prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining 

roofing. 

C. Asphalt Heating: Heat roofing asphalt and apply within plus or minus 25 deg F of 

equiviscous temperature unless otherwise required by roofing system manufacturer. 

Do not raise roofing asphalt temperature above equiviscous temperature range more 

than one hour before time of application. Do not exceed roofing asphalt 

manufacturer’s recommended temperature limits during roofing asphalt heating. Do 

not heat asphalt within 25 deg F of flash point. Discard roofing asphalt maintained at 

a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature for more than 4 hours. 

D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate 

joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent 

building construction. 

3.06 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Install four ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without 

stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of 

plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. 

Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. 

1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at 

rate required by roofing system manufacturer; to form a uniform membrane 

without ply sheets touching. 

B. Gravel: Flood the surface with asphalt at an approximate rate of 60 lbs. per square; 

embed gravel at the rate of 400 lbs. per square. Install so that there is complete 

coverage across the entire surface with at least 50% of the gravel solidly adhered in 

the hot asphalt. 



3.07 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION 

A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof 

edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to 

roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows: 

1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system 

manufacturer. 

2. Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or 

parapets. Adhere backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in a solid 

mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 

3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid 

mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F. Apply hot 

roofing asphalt to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system 

manufacturer. 

B. Extend base flashing up walls and over parapet walls as indicated on drawings, and 

4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. 

C. Mechanically fasten base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. 

1. Seal top termination of base flashing. 

D. Flashing-Sheet Stripping: Install flashing-sheet stripping in a continuous coating of 

asphalt roofing cement or in a solid mopping of hot asphalt applied at not less that 

425 deg F, and extend onto roofing membrane. 

E. Roof Drains: Set 30-inch by 30-inch metal flashing for one drain, or 30-inch by 60inch 

metal flashing for two drains in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed 

roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of 4 

inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing 

membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 

1. Install flashing-sheet stripping by same method as installing base flashing. 


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer’s technical 

personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 

1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. 

B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections 

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. 

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to 

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.’ 

D. Inspection/Testing of Installation: Architect and Owner’s Inspectors may test 

installed work for compliance with requirements. 

1. Testing of Insulation Layer Adhesion or Embedment: When asphalt is 

viscose, by random sampling, insulation units may be “popped” to verify 



adequacy of adhesion or embedment by visual observation, as judged by the 

Architect or Inspector. 

a. If sample unit is judged to exhibit less than 70 percent minimum 

adhesion or embedment of the materials surface area, adjacent 

insulation units will be removed by the same method until it can be 

demonstrated that minimum adhesion is consistently being 

achieved. 

b. De-lamination of insulation surface does not constitute failure of 

adhesion, but is rather a demonstration thereof. 

c. Adhesions and/or embedment are defined as the process of 

pressing a felt, aggregate, fabric, mat, or panel uniformly, and 

completely into hot bitumen or adhesive to ensure intimate contact 

between materials at all points within limits indicated. 

2. Testing by Sample Test Cuts: It is the Owner’s intent to avoid destructive 

testing of the completed roof membranes, but the right is reserved to conduct 

testing when conditions of installation give cause to question the integrity of 

the installation. 

a. If sampling reveals non-compliance with requirements, Contractor 

shall be responsible for payment of costs to make corrections and 

repair test sampling. 

b. If sampling reveals compliance with requirements, Owner will pay 

cost of test sampling at the rate of $100 per cut, including initial 

sampling and subsequent repairs by the Contractor. 

3.09 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction 

period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect 

roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written 

report, with copies to Architect and Owner. 

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with 

requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition 

free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to 

warranty requirements. 

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and 

procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 

3.10 ROOFING INSTALLER’S WARRANTY 

A. See following attachment. 




ALPINE SCHOOL DISTRICT 

ROOFING WARRANTY 

Whereas, ________________________________ a licensed roofing contractor, whose address is 

_____________________________________________________, herein referred to as the roofing 

contractor and/or the contractor, substantially completed installation of _____________ total square 

feet of roofing on the __________ day of ________________, __________; at 

_____________________________________________ in accordance with the contract 

documents prepared by _________________________. 

Said roofing contractor does hereby warrant to: 

ALPINE SCHOOL DISTRICT, 490 N State Street, Lindon, Utah 84042 

that from the date of substantial completion for a period of two (2) years that the roofing contractor 

guarantees said roofing work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship, 

subject to the terms and conditions of this warranty. 

Therefore the roofing contractor agrees to make, at their own expense, immediate 

temporary repairs as required to stop leaks and to correct defects in the roofing and associated 

work as is necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition within twenty-four (24) hours of 

verbal or written notification from the owner. If the contractor does not make repairs within the 

stipulated time period, the contractor agrees to promptly reimburse the owner for the cost of 

procuring such repair services from other qualified sources. The contractor further agrees to make 

permanent roofing repairs satisfactory to the owner and roofing manufacturer to restore or replace 

the defective work to the quality standards of the original contract documents as soon as weather 

conditions will permit. 

Final responsibility for the cost of repairs shall be determined by inspection of the roofing by 

the contractor, owner, and the roofing materials manufacturer’s representative. Work that is 

determined to be defective based on improper workmanship and/or faulty materials and/or 

deviations from the contract documents, shall be paid for by the roofing contractor. Repair work 

required caused by latent structural defects, which are not part of this work, damage caused by the 

owner or building users, or damage due to acts of god shall be paid promptly by the owner upon 

completion of the required work. Repair work shall include any damage to the building interior 

finishes or building contents, unless specifically excluded from the roofing contractor’s responsibility 

by the owner. Repair work completed at the owner’s expense, following inspection and approval of 

such work by the contractor, manufacturer’s representative, and owner, shall be paid based upon 

receipt of contractor’s itemized invoice based on quantities and reasonable unit costs (local 

prevailing wage rates) for labor and materials, including not more than fifteen percent markup for 

overhead and profit. 

During the warranty period any alteration of the original roofing work (excluding emergency 

repairs) made by anyone other than the roofing contractor, shall nullify this warranty. If alterations 

to the original roofing work are made by the roofing contractor then the warranty shall remain in 



effect unless the contractor notifies the owner in writing that alterations would reasonably cause a 

limitation or termination of the warranty. 

At the conclusion of the two (2) year warranty period, the contractor shall schedule a site 

visit to the project with the owner’s representative, the design architect/engineer and/or roofing 

consultant, and roofing materials manufacturer’s representative to inspect the roofing, base 

flashing, and associated work for damage and/or defects in materials and workmanship. At his own 

expense, the contractor shall promptly repair any damage and/or defects observed as directed by 

the design architect/engineer and/or roofing consultant and/or manufacturer’s representative, and 

as approved by the owner. Date and time of this inspection shall be made at a mutually convenient 

time to all parties. 

The roofing contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the requirements of this warranty with the 

provision of any and all other warranty(s), which may be separately furnished for this project. 

In witness whereof, _______________________________________________ a corporate officer 

of the roofing contractor being duly subscribed and sworn has caused this instrument to be signed 

and sealed this ____________ day of _____________________, ____________. 

Company: ____________________________________ 

(Type name of Company) 

Title: ______________________________ 

(Type) 

Signature: _____________________________ 

Seal: 

(if a corporation) 

Notary Public: 

My Commission Expires: 



SECTION 07542 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Mechanically fastened PVC membrane roofing system. 

2. Roof Insulation 

3. Walkway pads 

4. Roof expansion joint covers 


1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 

2. Division 7 Section “ Manufactured Roof Panels” for metal roof. 

3. Division 7 Section “Built-Up Asphalt Roofing” for modifications to and repair of existing roof 

membrane. 

4. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal” for flashings and counter-flashings. 


6. Division 15 for roof drains 


A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and 

Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified 

uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to 

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing 

and base flashings shall remain watertight. 

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under 

conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer 

based on testing and field experience. 

C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have 

been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure 

calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

D. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials that 

comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a membrane 

roofing system. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings. 

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 

E. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof 


POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING 07542 - 1

Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments 

to other work. 

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 

2. Walkway pads. 

3. Two roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. 

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies 

with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements. 

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and 

witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system. 

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-ES. 

H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system 

identical to that used for this Project. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane 

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive 

manufacturer's special warranty. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including fasteners for membrane roofing system from 

same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. 

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as 

determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials 

shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

E. Pre-installation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency 

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, 

and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof 

accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's 




3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's 

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including 

flatness and fastening. 

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment 

curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with 

manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing 

agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. 

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and 

within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid 

material from direct sunlight. 

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. 

C. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection 

of deck. 


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather 

conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and 

warranty requirements. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in 

which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in 

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. No exclusions for ponding water. 

2. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, fasteners, substrate board, 

roofing accessories, and other components of membrane roofing system. 


B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form approved by Owner, 

signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing 

system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, fasteners, substrate boards, and walkway 

products, for the following warranty period: 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 PVC MEMBRANE ROOFING 

A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434, Type III, liquid coated, acrylic coated, fabric reinforced. Membrane 

must be manufactured by the company supplying the warranty (no private labeling) with a minimum 



25 year successful track record. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the work include the following: 

a. FiberTite, a Seaman Corporation. 

b. Sarnafil Inc. 

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal, with minimum 20 mils above reinforcing. 

3. Exposed Face Color: White. 

B. Alternate: 80 mils, nominal, with minimum 20 mils above reinforcing and a 30 year warranty. 

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for 

intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing. 

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, 

thickness, and color as PVC sheet membrane. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. 

D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, 

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. 

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and 

acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 

F. Coated Flashings: Manufacturer’s standard PVC coated metal flashings in thickness as 

recommended by manufacturer for indicated use and complying with performance requirements, but 

with metal thickness not less than 0.028 inches. 

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, 

preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination 

reglets, and other accessories. 

2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Substrate Board: Rigid polyisocyanurate with black mat facers 4’ x 8’ installed in two layers to meet 

desired r-value. 

1. R-Value: 30. 

B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Where tapered insulation, crickets, saddles, tapered edge 

strips, or other insulation shapes are indicated provide rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation 

formed by expansion of polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM 

C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated below: 

1. Type II, 1.35-lb/cu. ft. (22-kg/cu. m) minimum density 

2. Where molded-polystyrene tapered insulation, crickets, saddles, tapered edge strips, or other 

insulation shapes are indicated, the molded-polystyrene board shall be placed between the 

layers of polyisocyanurate insulation. 



C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck. 

2.4 WALKWAYS 

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured 

walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system 

manufacturer. 

1. Size: 3’-0” wide by lengths indicated or as graphically shown on the roof plans. 

2. Provide around roof access hatch, at high roof drip edge and around mechanical equipment 

as indicated on the drawings. 

2.5 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS 

A. Manufacturer’s standard prefabricated expansion joint cover made from roofing membrane, 

neoprene foam and galvanized metal nailing flanges. 

B. Provide expansion joint covers compatible with transition from existing built-up asphalt roofing 

membrane where the addition connects to the existing building. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following 

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced. 

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at 

penetrations and terminations. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation 

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. 

B. Prevent materials from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. 

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from 

entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 

Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 

D. Do not begin installation in inclement weather and only install as much insulation in a day as can be 

covered with the roof membrane. 

3.3 INSULATION (SUBSTRATE) BOARDS 

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with 

end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 

B. Install second layer with end and side joints offset one-foot minimum from joints in first layer. 



3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to roofing 

system manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082. 

B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical 

personnel. 

C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions 

required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 

D. Mechanically fasten or adhere membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and 

perimeter of roofing. 

E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. 

F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of 

membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a 

watertight seam installation. 

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges 

of sheet membrane. 

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. 

3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to 

membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to 

partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. 

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet 

flashing. 

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and 

end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. 

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings. 

3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION 

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or 

adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Install walkways around all sides of mechanical rooftop equipment, at roof access hatches 

and under eaves of high roof along drip line. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 



B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect 

roofing installation on completion. 

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate 

that they do not comply with specified requirements. 

D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 

replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. 

When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration 

and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. 

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with 

requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free 

of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty 

requirements. 

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures 

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 






SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes flashing and sheet metal work shown on the drawings and specified herein. 


1. Division 7 Section “Manufactured Roof Panels.” 


3. Division 7 Section “Built-Up Asphalt Roofing.” 




A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Submittals.” 


A. Verify all dimensions by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment is required. 

B. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades whose work relates to sheet metal in any way. 


A. Deliver and store materials in dry, protected areas. Keep free of corrosion or other damage. 

Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. Furnish a written warranty, countersigned by the General Contractor that all sheet metal work 

is guaranteed to be watertight and free of defects for a period of 2 years from the date of 

substantial completion. 



A. Mild Steel: ASTM A-283. 

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: conforming to ASTM A-525 or ASTM A-446, as required. Where 

sheet metal gages are not noted, use 24 gage. Use 20 gage, minimum, for clips or strips. 

Exposed pieces to be black. 

1. Coping: 22 gage 

C. Fasteners: Nails, bolts, and nuts shall be hot-dip galvanized for galvanized steel, aluminum, 

copper or bronze for copper. 

D. Anchors: For fastening items to concrete or masonry, shall be galvanized machine screws or 

bolts, and "Rawl" plug inserts or Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors, of the size and type 

noted or required. 


FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1

2.02 FINISH 

E. Solder: Grade A, ASTM B-32, composed of 50% pig lead and 50% block tin, warranted pure. 

No re-melted or reworked solder shall be used. 

F. Flux: Muriatic acid killed with zinc, or an approved brand of soldering flux, for galvanized 

steel; rosin for copper. Flux shall be thoroughly washed off after soldering is completed. 

G. Cement: Bituminous plastic, FS-SS-C-153. 

H. Building paper: Waterproof, FS-UU-P-147. 

I. Sealant: Morrison and Company CL-50 polyisobutylene. Include primer as required. 

J. Butyl sealer: Where impractical to use solder at joints, corners, and transitions, seal with DAP 

"Butyl Gutter and Lap Sealer" or "Cushion Lock CL-50 Butyl Sealer" - Black color. 

K. Asphalt primers: FS-SS-A-701. 

L. Coating Asphalt: Brushing consistency, FS-SS-R-451. 

M. Reglets: Fry Reglet Corporation springloc flashing system, Type SM surface mounted with 

Mono, one part acrylic sealant, Type CO concrete, and Type MA masonry. 

N. Primer on ferrous metal: FS TT-P-645. 

A. Finish shall be full strength Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating, applied by the manufacturer on 

a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 

to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side 

shall be coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall conform to all 

tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 finish supplier. 

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard or custom colors. 


A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing to shapes and sizes detailed, allowing sufficient materials for 

up-standing leg. Make surfaces free of waves and buckles with lines, arises, and angles 

sharp and true. 



A. Examine all subsurfaces and report, in writing, to the Architect any conditions detrimental to 

the work. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims. 

Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces. 


A. Conform to quality, procedures and methods recommended by National Association of Sheet 

Metal Contractors. Accurately form, fit snugly, fold exposed edges under at least !" and have 

no sharp corners left exposed. Properly shield against galvanic action with asphalt base paint 



or equivalent. Securely fasten and make absolutely watertight. Provide for adequate 

expansion and contraction. 

B. Extend flashing 4" beyond jambs of openings. Provide expansion control at all junctions and 

straight runs at intervals not exceeding 30 ft. 

C. Attach flashing to smooth, sound, dry and clean surfaces, free of defects which might effect 

application. Clean surfaces before soldering. Perform soldering slowly with well heated tool to 

thoroughly heat the sheet and completely sweat the solder through full width of seam. All lock 

seam work shall be flat and true to line and sweated full of solder. Thoroughly wash all acid 

flux work after soldering. 

D. Wherever possible, secure metal to cleats without nailing. Space nails not more than 8" on 

center where exposed to weather use lead washers. 

E. Coping: Provide folded standing seam joints. Lap seems are not allowed. 

F. Cap flashing joints shall be !" wide. Cover joint with 6" wide joint cover, same shape as cap 

flashing, and anchor one side. 

G. Install all reglets and expansion joint covers not built into masonry in accordance with 

manufacturer's instructions. 

3.03 CLEANUP 







SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes roof accessories shown on the drawings and specified herein. 





B. Submit shop drawings showing rough opening dimensions, typical curb details and anchorage 

methods. 


A. Coordinate and schedule work with trades whose work is affected by the work of this section. 


A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging. Store units in an 

upright position and protect from damaging elements. Replace damaged materials at no 

additional cost to the Owner. 


2.01 ROOF HATCH 


products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following 

1. Dur-red 

2. J.L. Industries 

3. Bilco 

4. Precision Ladders 

B. Provide Bilco 3'-0" x 3'-0' Type "E" galvanized steel insulated hatch, or equal product by other 

manufacturers. Provide complete operating hardware and locking devices. 



A. Examine subsurfaces to receive work and report, in writing, to the Architect any detrimental 

conditions. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to 

the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces. 


A. Install accessories in prepared openings. 

SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOLCLASSROOM ADDITION MARCH 2, 2009 

ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-1

3.03 ERECTION 

A. Erect in strict accordance with reviewed shop drawings, supplied by manufacturer and 

instructions. 

B. After other trades have completed work on adjacent material, carefully inspect the installation 

and make adjustments necessary to ensure proper installation and weather tight conditions. 

3.04 CLEANUP 



SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOLCLASSROOM ADDITION MARCH 2, 2009 

ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-2

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions 

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 

1. Exterior Vertical Building Joints: Joints and cracks around window, aluminum 

entrances, door frames, columns, louvers, wall penetrations, connections, both sides 

and other joints necessary to seal off building from outside air and moisture. Perimeter 

edges of exterior insulation and finish system. 

2. Exterior Horizontal Surfaces. 

a. Sidewalk/pavement joints. 

b. Other joints as indicated. 

3. Interior Vertical and Horizontal Building Joints: 

a. Joints and cracks around wall, ceiling, and floor penetrations. 

b. Both sides of exterior and interior hollow metal door frames. 

c. Inside corners of gypsum board, fiber-reinforced wall sheathing and masonry. 

d. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. 

e. All transitions between differing building materials. 

f. Other joints as indicated. 


1. Division 7 Section “Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems” for sealing system joints. 

2. Division 7 Section “Flashing and Sheet Metal” for sealing joints related to flashing and 

sheet metal for roofing. 

3. Division 7 Section “Firestopping” for through-penetration firestopping systems. 

4. Division 7 Section “Built-Up Asphalt Roofing.” 


6. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.” 

7. Division 8 Section “Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.” 

8. Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing” for sealants used in glazing. 

9. Division 8 Section “Insulated Translucent Sandwich Panel Wall/Roof System.” 

10. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for sealing concealed perimeter joints 

of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 

1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to 

establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining 

or deterioration of joint substrates. 




B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 


JOINT SEALANTS 07900-1

1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners 

required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile 

organic compounds. 

C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s standard bead samples, 

consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product 

exposed to view. 

D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint 

sealant samples in ! inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material 

matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 

E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with 

specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 

F. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with 

requirements specified. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant 

applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have 

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, total of 3 years or 

more. 

B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a 

single manufacturer for each different product required. 

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, 

samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants for compatibility and adhesion 

testing as indicated below: 

1. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific 

joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint 

sealants to joint substrates. 

a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions that will exist during 

actual installation.. 

2. Testing will not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint 

preparation data required above that are acceptable to Architect and are based on 

previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint 

substrates and other materials matching those submitted. 

D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to 

joint substrates as follows: 

1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 

2. Testing will not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint 

preparation data required above that are acceptable to Architect and are based on 

previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint 

substrates and other materials matching those submitted. 

3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be 

erected. 

E. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of 

the Division 1 Section covering this activity. 




A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels 

indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot 

life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. 

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent 

their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other 

causes. 


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following 

conditions: 

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by 

joint sealant manufacturer. 

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are 

less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. 

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants 

capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 


2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are 

compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and 

application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 

1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors 

for products of type indicated. 

2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing elastomeric 

sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric 

Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing 

ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. 

B Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in 

each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet. 

1. Vertical 

a. Sika 2C N/S: Sika Corp. 

b. Vulkem A22: Mameco, Inc. 

c. N.P. II: Sonneborn. 

2.03 JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in 

each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet. 



1. Traffic 

a. Sika 2C S/L: Sika Corp. 

b. Vulkem 245: Mameco, Inc. 

c. N.R. 200: Pecora. 

B. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing acrylic 

terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both, with capability 

when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to 

withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of application and 

remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively: 

1. 7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 15 percent. 

2. 12-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 25 percent. 

C. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized 

butyl sealant complying with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids 

to be nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack-free time of 24 hours or less. 

D. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard, solvent-release-curing, pigmented 

synthetic rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 

inch or smaller in width. 

2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex 

sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and 

protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width 

existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 

B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates 

joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 

percent. 

C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for 

weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement 

of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. 

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: 

a. “AC-20”, Pecora Corp. 

b. “Sonolac”, Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. 

c. “Tremco Acrylic Latex 834”, Tremco, Inc. 

2. Silicone-Emulsion Sealant: 

a. “Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant”, Dow Corning Corp. 

2.05 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant 

complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 

1. Product has flame spread and smoke developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 

84. 

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer’s standard, nondrying, nonhardening, 

nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior 

concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 



C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

1. Acoustical Sealant: 

a. “SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant”, United States Gypsum Co. 

b. “AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant”, Pecora Corp. 

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: 

a. “BA-98”, Pecora Corp. 

b. “Tremco Acoustical Sealant”, Tremco, Inc. 

2.06 JOINT SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible 

with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications 

indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 

B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, 

nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and 

density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant 

performance: 

1. Open-cell polyurethane foam. 

2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in 

unruptured state. 

3. Any material indicated above. 

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant 

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint 

surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive 

tape where applicable. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of 

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate 

tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants 

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or 

harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to 

promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. 



A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, ad other conditions affecting joint 

sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory 

conditions have been corrected. 


A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to 

comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 



1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of 

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested 

and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint 

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 

2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint 

substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a 

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of 

developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from 

above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed 

air. 

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 

4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other 

nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm 

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant 

manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply 

primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s recommendations. Confine primers to areas 

of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s printed installation instructions applicable to 

products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint 

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for 

use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and 

conditions indicated. 

D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following 

requirements: 

1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and 

at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed 

sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. 

b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. 

c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant 

application and replace with dry material. 

2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between 

sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. 

E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly 

contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint 

configuration, and providing uniform, corss-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths 

that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant 

backings are installed. 

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or 

curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to 

eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that 



3.04 CLEANING 

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 

1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods 

and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in 

which joints occur. 


A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating 

substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they 

are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such 

protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint 

sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from 

original work. 






DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 

Section 08100 – Hollow Metal Door and Frames 

Section 08200 – Wood Doors 

Section 08305 – Access Doors 

Section 08400 – Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 

Section 08700 – Finish Hardware 

Section 08800 – Glass and Glazing 

Section 08950 – Insulated Translucent Sandwich Panel Wall/Roof 

System 



SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes hollow metal doors, and door frames, shown on the drawings and specified 

herein. 

1. Division 8 Section “Wood Doors” for wood doors installed in metal frames. 

2. Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware.” 

3. Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing.” 



B. Schedule door and frame types, using Architect's designations, showing elevations, jamb, 

head, and sill details and other pertinent information. 


A. Coordinate work and scheduling of the work of this section with other trades for anchorage 

and installation. 


A. Frames and doors shall be stored in an upright position, under cover, on the building site, on 

wood sills or on the floor, in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid creating a 

humidity chamber by using a plastic or canvas shelter and by not venting the area covered. 

Remove any damaged items from site and replace at no additional cost to Owner. 

B. All metal frames and doors shall be provided by one manufacturer. 


2.01 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 

A. Construct to shapes and sizes shown, meeting various wall thicknesses. 

B. Materials: Pressed steel shall be free of defects impairing their strength, durability or 

appearance. Frames shall conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI - 100, latest edition. 

C. Metal door frames: Shall be fabricated from 16 gage steel. Frames shall be combination type 

with integral stop and trim. Head assemblies to be reinforced internally at each miter joint with 

16 gage channel-shaped reinforcements. Frames shall be one piece welded construction. 

D. Frames shall have one welded-in floor anchor in each jamb. Three field inserted steel snap-in 

anchors (maximum of 24" o.c.) shall also be provided for each jamb. Anchors shall be of 

proper type for the particular construction involved (masonry, steel stud, etc.). 

E. Provide angle spreader for frames during shipping, handling and installation. 


HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100-1

F. Galvanize exterior frames, hot dip, ASTM A-525 and A-526, Type I, Class D. 

2.02 METAL DOORS 

A. Construct to sizes shown; provide necessary clearances and bevels to permit operation 

without binding and to accommodate thresholds where required. 

B. Provide one-piece pan shaped face sheets of 16 gage material, spot welded to 20 gage 

reinforcing channels (18 gage at edges) which are spaced not over 8" o.c. and run full height 

of doors. Weld continuous 18 gage stiffener channels at top of all doors and close tops of 

exterior frames against water accumulation and make watertight. Pack spaces between 

reinforcing members with inorganic insulating material to sound deaden doors. Fill joints with 

mineral filler; finish surface smooth and flush. Bevel lock stile 1/8" in 2". 

1. Comply with requirements for SDI Grade III Extra Heavy-duty, Model 4 Seamless 

Composite. 

a. U Value: 0.09 (urethane core). 

C. Include reinforcements and mortising for required hardware specified under Section 08700 

from templates furnished thereunder. Reinforce butt cutouts with minimum 3/16" thick steel 

plate, drilled, tapped and welded in place. 

D. Fire rated doors shall be constructed to meet U.L. requirements and shall display label. 

E. Clean thoroughly, fill joints smooth, and prime with factory baked-on neutral gray rustinhibiting 

paint tested per ASTM D-174 and B-117. 

2.03 HARDWARE PREPARATION 

A. Make cutouts for required hardware specified Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware” from 

templates furnished thereunder. Reinforce butt cutouts with minimum 3/16" thick steel plate, 

drilled, tapped and welded in place. Provide strike stops on frames with holes for 3 rubber 

door silencers; on double door frames, provide for 2 silencers per door at head. Reinforce 

head section for installation of closers. Plaster guards shall be installed in back of all 

applicable hardware cutouts. Frames shall be reinforced for surface applied hardware. 

Reinforcement shall comply with S.D.I. recommendations. 

2.04 FINISHES 

A. Interior Doors & Frames: Phosphatized with one coat baked on rust inhibiting prime paint, 

ANSI A224.1. 

B. Exterior Doors & Frames: Galvanized, hot-dipped, ASTM A525, G60. 

C. Field paint, colors as selected by Architect. 




detrimental to work. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent 

claims to the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of all 

subsurfaces. 



3.02 WORKMANSHIP 

A. All work shall be shop fabricated to required profiles by forming and welding with corners, 

angles and edges straight and sharp. Fit and fabricate accurately with corners, joints, seams 

and surfaces free from warp, wave, buckle, or other defects. 

3.03 SHOP PAINTING 

A. All exposed surfaces not galvanized shall be cleaned, bonderized, and given one baked-on 

shop coat of gray synthetic primer. Paint back surfaces of frames in masonry walls with 

heavy bodied bituminous paint. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMES 

A. Install plumb, straight, true, and rigidly secured in place. Frames shall be properly braced 

until anchored to final support. Provide temporary spreaders. 

B. Frames shall be anchored to concrete floors with powder actuated bolts. 

C. Frames in masonry shall be filled solid with grout. 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF DOORS 

A. Fit metal doors accurately in their respective frames. Check and readjust operating finish 

hardware on metal doors just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper 

operating condition. 

B. Fire rated doors shall be installed with clearances as specified in NFPA pamphlet No. 80 and 

requirements of Fire Marshal having jurisdiction. 

C. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and 

apply touchup of compatible air drying primer. 

3.06 CLEANUP 







SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes wood doors shown on the drawings and specified herein. 


1. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for metal frames. 

2. Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware.” 

3. Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing.” 



B. Shop drawings to indicate location and size of each door, elevation of each door type, 

construction, fire ratings, and other door conditions specified herein or shown on the 

drawings. 


A. Coordinate work and scheduling of the work of this section with other trades for anchorage 

and installation of hardware. 




claims to the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of all 

subsurfaces. 


A. Doors shall be stored in an upright position, under cover, and protect from extreme change in 

temperature and humidity. Avoid creating a humidity chamber by using a plastic or canvas 

shelter and by not venting the area covered. Remove any damaged items from site and 

replace at no additional cost to Owner. 

B. All doors shall be provided by one manufacturer. 

C. Ship materials to job site in separate containers with identified building locations. 

1.06 QUALITY STANDARDS: 

A. WDMA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-97 (Window & Door Manufacturers Association). 

B. AWI Quality Standards, Latest Edition. 

C. ANSI A115. W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards. 

1.07 WARRANTY 


WOOD DOORS 08200 - 1

A. Provide manufacturer's warranty to the following term: 

1. Interior Solid Core Doors: "Full Life of Original Installation." Doors showing defects 

within the term of the guarantee shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 

B. Any core telegraphing shall be considered a defect and may be cause for rejection. 





1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 

2. Eggers Industries, Inc. 

3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. 

4. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company 

2.02 WOOD DOORS 

A. Face veneer shall be premium grade plain sliced white maple, slip match, with matching 

edges. 

1. Adhesive: Type 1 Waterproof. 

B. Core shall be particleboard of average density, 28 to 32 pounds per cubic foot. Stiles shall be 

a minimum of 1-1/8", compatible in appearance with the face veneer. Rails shall be a 

minimum of 2-1/4". 

C. Doors shall be standard solid core. Provide U.L. labeled doors for ratings indicated. 

D. Provide solid blocking at rails and stiles to accommodate hardware. 

E. Innerblocking for Mineral Core Fire Doors: 

1. Supply innerblocking for all surface applied hardware. Through bolts are not 

accepted. 

F. Glazing Stops 

1. Rated: 

a. Manufacturer’s standard metal stop, field painted. 

2. Non-Rated: 

a. Wood, of the same species/compatible with door species, with mitered 

corners. 

2.03 HARDWARE PREPARATION 

A. Make cutouts for required hardware specified under Section 08700 from templates furnished 

thereunder. Factory machine and finish for all hardware. When mineral core doors are used 

to meet fire ratings provide adequate reinforcement to interface with hardware. Use throughbolts 

for attachment of hardware. 

2.04 FACTORY FINISH 

A. Factory finish doors in accordance with WDMA G-17 Finish System Description or AWI 



Division 1500-S-4 - Finish System Standards. Factory finish to be water based stain and 

ultraviolet (UV) cured polyurethane sealer to comply with EPA Title 5 guidelines for Volatile 

Organic Compounds (VOC) emissions limitations. 

1. Performance Standard: TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 

2. Color: Clear 

B. Install factory finished doors just prior to substantial completion. 



A. Hang doors in adequately secured, square and plumb frames with clearances of not more 

than 3/32" at each side and head; clearance at bottom 1/2" or as required for floor finish. 

B. Install storage room doors in accordance with NFPA pamphlet No. 80. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF DOORS 

A. Assemble and set all doors. Attach all subframes and special anchors. Fit all doors accurately 

to their frames with even margin at top and jambs and with proper clearance at threshold. 

Remove and reset doors and hardware for the installation of work of other trades. 

B. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. 

C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum 3/4 inch. 

D. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. 

E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates provided by hardware manufacturer. 

F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware 

G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 

H. Reseal or refinish any doors that required site alteration. 

3.03 WARRANTY TOLERANCES 

A. Conform to WDMA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow and telegraphing. 

3.04 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust work under provisions Division 1. 

B. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. 

3.05 CLEANUP 


B. Hardware shall be thoroughly cleaned. Care shall be taken to protect doors and hardware 

until completion of Work. 






SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS 



A. Drawings And general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary 


1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of access doors: 

1. Wall access doors. 

2. Ceiling access doors. 


1. Division 4 Sections for building in anchors and grouting frames set in masonry 

construction. 

2. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for gypsum board walls and ceilings. 

3. Division 9 Section “Tile” for ceramic tile walls. 


A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 

1 Specification sections. 

B. Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of 

construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire-protection 

ratings (if required). 

1. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling 

construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to 

installation. 


A. Single-source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire project from one source and by a 

single manufacturer. 

B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect’s acceptance of manufacturer’s standard size units, which 

may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 


A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access 

to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified under “Submittals” Article. 

1.06 ALLOWANCES 

A. In addition to any access doors shown in the drawings, contractor shall include four (4) 24" x 

24" flush panel access doors, to be located as directed by the architect. Cost to include 

installation and general contractor’s mark up. 


ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 1




products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. J.L. Industries. 

2. Karp Associates, Inc. 

3. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co. 

4. Milcor, Inc. 


A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366 M commercial quality, cold-rolled steel sheet with backedon, 

rust-inhibitive primer. 

2.03 ACCESS DOORS 

A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Trim For Masonry Construction: Units consisting of frame 

with exposed trim, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements: 

1. Frame: 0.0590-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick steel sheet. 

2. Door: 0.0747-inch- (1.90-mm-) thick steel sheet. 

3. Trim: Flange integral with frame, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, overlapping surrounding 

finished surface. 

4. Hinge: Continuous type. 

5. Locks: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam. 

B. Trimless, Flush Access Doors for Gypsum Board: Units consisting of frame, concealed edge 

trim, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements: 

1. Frame: 0.0598-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick steel sheet. 

2. Door: 0.0747-inch- (1.90-mm-) thick steel sheet. 

3. Concealed, Gypsum Board Edge Trim: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated or 

galvanized-steel sheet with face flange formed to receive joint compound. 

4. Hinge: Concealed spring pin or continuous type. 

5. Locks: Screwdriver-operated cam. 


A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. 

B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and 

flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to 

secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 

1. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25.4 to 38.1 mm) wide around perimeter 

of frame. 

2. For gypsum board assemblies furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board of 

gypsum base. 

3. For installation in masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal 

masonry anchors. 

C. Locking Devices: Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. 





A. Advise Installer of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, 

including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of 

supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access 

doors that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid 

delay. 


A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installing access doors. 

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels 

aligned with adjacent finished surfaces. 


A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. 

B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 






SECTION 08400 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 





B. Provide aluminum doors and frames as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes aluminum doors and frames as shown on the drawings. 

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 

1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealants between frame and wall. 

2. Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing” for glass systems and components. 

3. Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware” for door hardware and Knox-Box. 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division1 

Specifications Sections. 

1. Product data, including: 

a. Construction details and fabrication methods. 

b. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. 

c. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. 

d. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. 

2. Manufacturer’s product data and shop drawings which include the following: 

a. Layout and installation details, including anchors. 

b. Elevations of continuous work at 1/4-inch scale or greater. 

c. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement. 

d. Hardware. 

e. Glazing details. 

f. Accessories. 

3. Samples for Color Selection: Submit samples of each specified finish on 12-inch-long 

sections of window members. Where showing the full range of variations expected. 

4. Certification: Provide certification by a recognized independent testing laboratory or 

agency showing that each type, grade, and size of window unit complies with 

performance requirements indicated. 


A. Coordinate work and scheduling of the work of this section with other trades for anchorage and 

installation of hardware. 


A. Examine all subsurface to receive work and report, in writing, to the Architect, any conditions 


claims to the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of all sub 

surfaces. 


ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08400 - 1


A. Frames and doors shall be stored in an upright position, under cover, and protect from extreme 

change in temperature and humidity. Avoid creating a humidity chamber by using a plastic or 

canvas shelter and by not venting the area covered. Remove any damaged items from site and 

replace at no additional cost to Owner. 

B. All doors and frames shall be provided by one manufacturer. 

C. Ship materials to job site in separate containers with identified building locations. 




1. Kawneer Corporation 

2. Amarlite 

3. Arcadia 

4. U.S. Aluminum 

5. Vistawall 


2.01 ALUMINUM DOORS 

A. All doors and framing sections shall be extruded from 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. All major door 

sections shall maintain at least 1/8" wall section thickness. Fasteners shall be non corrosive. 

B. All exposed surfaces shall be free from defects, die marks or scratches. 

C. Doors shall be wide stiles with minimum widths as indicated below, and shall be securely joined 

by means of structural corner assemblies. Welded corners without structural reinforcement will 

not be permitted. Vertical rails shall overlap and conceal the corner joint. Lock and hinge stiles of 

single acting doors shall be beveled. Doors shall be adjusted vertically. Glass stops shall be 

snap-on type with non-stretch vinyl beads. 

1. Top Rail: 4-1/2 inches. 

2. Stiles: 5-1/2 inches. 

3. Bottom Rail: 10 inches. 

2.02 ALUMINUM FRAMES 

A. Aluminum framing members shall be 2" deep by approximately 4" wide, unless shown otherwise, 

extruded from 6063-T5 alloy. Glass framing members shall provide a flush glazed appearance on 

all sides. Fasteners shall be non-corrosive. Non-stretch, high shore vinyl shall be provided at both 

sides of the glass. 

B. Exposed surfaces shall be free of defects, die marks or scratches. 

C. Fabrication shall be accurately done so final assembly will be neat, tightly fitted joints. 

2.03 FINISHES 



A General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to 

application and designations of finishes. 

B. Finish designations prefixed by ‘AA’ conform to the system established by the Aluminum 

Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

C. Class 1 Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical finish: as fabricated, non-specular; 

Chemical finish: etched, medium matter; Anodic Coating: Class 1 Architectural, clear anodic 

coating, minimum 0.7 mil thickness, complying with AAMA 611. 

2.04 SCHEDULED HARDWARE 

A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type 

of finish hardware are indicated in the “Hardware Schedule” at the end of this Section. 

B. Manufacturer’s Product Designations: The product designations and name of one manufacturer 

are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. 

Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified above, 

the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 

C. Make cutouts for required hardware specified under Section 08700 from templates furnished 

there under. Factory machine and finish for all hardware. 


3.01 INSTALLATION (FRAMES) 

A. Storefront components shall be set in prepared openings. Frames shall be set plumb, level, and 

square. Sections installed in contact with steel or other dissimilar materials shall receive a heavy 

coat of bituminous paint to insulate the two surfaces. 

B. Aluminum frame for storefront glass shall be a “front-loaded” system. Profile of the frame may 

vary from each manufacturer; however the proposed system must consider the heights and 

lateral loading in effect to render the system stiff enough to withstand those forces and still allow 

for roof load deflection. Refer to storefront wall sections for size, height and suggested profiles of 

the storefront system. 

3.02 INSTALLATION (DOORS) 

A. Hang doors in adequately secured, square and plumb frames. After erection and glazing, check 

and adjust all operating hardware. 

B. Hardware for doors in Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware” shall be furnished by the aluminum 

door supplier (except cylinders) and installed on the door at the factory by the door manufacturer. 

C. Door manufacturer shall provide door bottoms, sweeps, weatherstripping, and piles at meeting 

strikes. 

3.03 CLEANUP 


B. Protect all exposed aluminum surfaces from staining or abrasion after installation. 



3.04 HARDWARE GROUPS 

A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of this Specification 

Section, hardware group numbers indicated in door schedule and in the following schedule of 

hardware groups. 

1. Hardware groups indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size and 

finish or color, as applicable. 

2. Provide hardware with Class 1 AA-M12C22A41 Class I Clear Anodic finish, unless 

indicated otherwise. 

B. Refer to Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware” for hardware. 




SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes hardware items, articles, material, operations, or methods listed or 

mentioned herein, including all materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary and required 

for the completion of the work. 

1. This section includes the Knox Box. 

2. This section specifies hardware for aluminum storefront doors. Hardware for these 

doors, with the exception of cylinders, shall be provide by Division 8 Section 

“Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts” 

B. While the hardware schedule is intended to cover all doors and other movable parts of the 

building and establish a type and standard of quality, examine drawings and specifications 

and furnish proper hardware for all openings whether listed or not. If there are any omissions 

in hardware groups, call them to the attention of the Architect, prior to bid opening, for 

instructions by addendum. Otherwise, the list will be considered complete. No extras will be 

allowed for omissions, changes, or corrections necessary to facilitate proper installation. 


1. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Door and Frames.” 

2. Division 8 Section “Wood Doors.” 

3. Division 8 Section “Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts” for exterior and vestibule 

storefront doors. 


A. Refer to Division 1 Section “Submittals.” 

B. Submit a complete schedule of all hardware, identify with identical hardware group numbers 

as listed herein. 


A. Qualifications: 

1. Work under this section shall be done under the direct supervision of a member of the 

Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC), or equivalent. This architectural 

hardware consultant shall be available for consultation and technical assistance 

throughout the period of construction and for 1 year following substantial completion. 

The supplier shall be an authorized distributor of the brand names listed to assure 

continuous service of the products supplied. 

B. Codes: 

1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 80 

and Standard No. 80. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL 

for the types and sizes of doors required. 

2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide UL label on exit 

device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware." 

3. All hardware supplied shall conform to applicable building codes, fire and life safety 

codes, and handicap requirements. 


A. Deliver hardware with each unit marked or numbered per hardware schedule submitted. 


FINISH HARDWARE 08700-1



Identify each piece or hardware by name. Store materials in dry, protected areas. 



1. Butts and Hinges: 

a. Bommer 

b. Hager Hinge Co. 

c. McKinney 

d. Roton 

e. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works 

2. Overhead Closers: 

b. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group 

3. Door Trim (Kickplates): 

a. McKinney 

b. H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company 

c. Quality 

d. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco) 

4. Door Stripping, Seals and Thresholds: 

a. National Guard Products, Inc. 

b. Pemko 

5. Magnetic Hold Open Devices 

a. Rixson 

B. Approved Manufacturers. Due to the unique requirements of hardware for this project, the 

following manufacturers are the only approved manufacturers for the hardware indicated. No 

substitutions are allowed. 

1. Locksets: Yale 

2. Exit Devices: Precision Hardware Inc. 

C. Knox Box: Provide Knox-Box 3200 Series Hinged Door, as manufactured by Knox Company, 

and as follows: 

1. Recessed mount in masonry with hinged door, UL listed tamper switches, !” plate 

steel housing, "” thick steel door with interior gasket seal and stainless steel door 

hinge. Provide 1/8” thick stainless steel dust cover with tamper seal mounting 

capability. 

2. Recessed Mount Flange: 7” high by 7” wide. 

a. Include manufacturer’s recessed mounting kit. 

3. Lock: Double action, UL listed rotating tumblers and hardened steel pins accessed by 

a biased cut key. 

4. Finish: Knox-Coat proprietary finish. 

a. Color: Dark bronze. 

2.02 SCHEDULED HARDWARE 

A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each 

type of finish hardware are indicated in the “Hardware Schedule” at the end of this Section. 

B. Manufacturer’s Product Designations: The product designations and name of one 

manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing 

minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one 

manufacturer is specified above, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers 

that complies with requirements. 




A. Special Tools: 

1. Provide six of each type of special tool for adjusting and regulating hardware. These 

are to be turned over to the Owner upon completion. 

B. Templates: 

1. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work, to be 

factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop 

drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the 

project installation of hardware. 

C. Silencers: 

1. Provide silencers in all metal door frames unless specified elsewhere to be provided 

as part of the door and frame unit, or unless continuous bumper-type weatherstripping 

is shown or specified. Provide 3 silencers units in a single door frame and provide 4 

silencer units in double door frames. Omit silencers from fire-rated door openings. 



A. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builder's 

Hardware" by DHI, except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with 

governing regulations and except as may be otherwise directed by the Architect. 

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and 

recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into 

surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely 

and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of 

the finish application, reinstall each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes 

have been completed on the substrate. 

C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment 

substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. 

D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space 

fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 

E. Knox-Box: Mount in masonry wall at 6 feet above the foundation wall. Install recessed 

mounting kit plumb and flush with face of wall. Install with four 3/8” grade 5 or grade 8 

fasteners to securely anchor box to wall. 

1. Locate Knox-Box at front door as shown on the plans or as directed by Architect. 

Confirm location with the local fire department prior to installing. 


A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation 

of function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type of lubrication recommended by 

manufacturer (graphite type if no other is recommended). Replace units that cannot be 

adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 

B. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than 1 month prior to the date 

of substantial completion, return to the project and adjust all hardware items. 



C. Closers shall be adjusted to a range of 5 pounds to 8 pounds of force. Door shall latch 

regardless of adjustment. 

3.03 KEYING 

A. The Owner will determine keying and install cores at or near the completion of the Project. 

1. Door 109 to Fire Riser Closet is required by the local fire department to be keyed to 

match the main entry door. 

B. The Contractor shall provide and install Yale 1210 Interchangeable core cylinders at all 

exterior doors. Coordinate with Owner for change over to the District’s cores. 

C. Submit questions regarding keying in writing to the Owner’s Project Coordinator. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE 

A. Install finish hardware in accordance with the "Hardware Schedule" specified in this section, 

and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise 

indicated on the drawings, set all finish hardware at the following maximum heights: 

1. Cylinder dead locks: Center 48" above finished floor 

2. Door Knobs: Center 36" above finished floor 

3. Door Pulls: Center 40" above finished floor 

4. Push Plates: Center 45" above finished floor 

5. Top Hinge: Top 7" below head of frame 

6. Bottom Hinge: Bottom 11" above finished floor 

7. Center Hinge: Equal distance between top and bottom hinges. 

3.05 HARDWARE GROUPS 

A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of this Specification 

Section, hardware group numbers indicated in door schedule and in the following schedule of 

hardware groups. 

1. Hardware groups indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size 

and finish or color, as applicable. 

2. Provide hardware with BHMA No. 626 (US26D) finish, unless indicated otherwise. 

B. Hardware for aluminum doors is specified in this section and provided by the door supplier in 

Division 8 Section “Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts” with the exception of cylinders 

which shall be provided by this section. 

SET #AL-1 

Doors: V03A, V01A 

2 Continuous Hinge MCK-25HD CLEAR MC 

1 Mullion KR4954 SP28 VO 

1 Exit Device 2103 X 1703A X 1210 630 PR 

1 Exit Device 2103 X 1702A 630 PR 

1 Hardware Seals by Others 

2 Cylinders as Req Medeco Cylinder 626 ME 

2 Adapter Plate 4040 18 AL LC 

2 Closer 4041 S-CUSH AL LC 

2 Kickplate KP50 10 x 2" LDW US32D MC 

1 Threshold 271A PE 

1 Cush Shoe Support 4040-30 AL LC 



SET #AL-2 

Doors: V02A 

2 Continuous Hinge MCK-25HD QC CLEAR MC 


1 Exit Device 2103 x 1702A 630 PR 

1 Exit Device 2103 X 1703A X 1210 ELR FAIL 630 PR 




1 Closer 4642 AL LC 



1 Vestiblue Switch 675 NO 

1 Door Switch 662 NO 

1 Power Supply BPS-24-2 SN 



1 Hardware Card Reader by Others 

Presenting a card at the card reader will retract the latch of the exit device allowing the door be 

automatically opened by pressing the door switch or manually pulling the door open. 

Free egress at all times. 

SET #AL-2A 

Doors: V01B 



1 Exit Device 2103 x 1702A 630 PR 








1 Vestiblue Switch 675 NO 





Pressing the door switch when the exit device is dogged down will automatically open one leaf of the 

pair of doors. 


SET #AL-3 

Doors: V01D, V02B 





SET #AL-4 

SET #01 

SET #02 

SET #03 

2 Pull/Push Bar Set OP810 US32D MC 






Doors: V03B, V01C 



2 Pull/Push Bar Set OP810 US32D MC 




2 Wall Stop WS02 US32D MC 


Doors: 115A, 115B, H04 

3 Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 


1 Cylinder as Req’d Medeco Cylinder 626 ME 

1 Closer 4041 EDA AL LC 



3 Door Silencers S1M MC 

Doors: H02, H06 

3 Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Exit Device FL 2103 X 1703A X 1210 630 PR 

1 Cylinders as Req’d Medeco Cylinder 626 ME 




1 Smoke Seal PK 55 D PE 

Doors: H03A 

6 Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 









SET #04 

SET #05 

SET #06 

SET #07 

SET #08 


Doors: H03B 

6 Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Mullion KR9954 7'5" SP28 VO 

2 Exit Device FL 2103 X 1703A X 1210 630 PR 






Doors: H07A 

6 Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 

2 Exit Device FL 2801 36" LBR 630 PR 

2 Magnetic Holder 998 689 RX 



2 Astragal 357 SP PE 


Doors: H07B 

3 Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Exit Device FL 2301 630 PR 

1 Magnetic Holder 998 689 RX 




Doors: 124B 

3 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Passage Set PB 5401LN 626 YA 





Doors: 109, 110, 111, 118, 119 

3 Hinges TA2314 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 32D MC 

1 Storeroom Lockset PB 5405LN 1210-6 PIN 626 YA 

1 Cylinders Medeco Cylinder 626 ME 



SET #09 

SET #10 

SET #11 

SET #12 

SET #13 



1 Raindrip (Door 109 only) 346 C PE 


1 Door Bottom 315 CN PE 

1 Threshold 271 A PE 

Doors: 117, 120, 121 

3 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Privacy Set PB 5402LN 626 YA 





Doors: 113B 

3 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Deadlock 3762A x 1210 626 YA 


Doors: 113A 

3 Hinges T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Classroom Lockset PB 5408LN x 1210 626 YA 




1 Cylinder as Req’d Medeco Cylinder ME 

Doors: 127, 126, 116 

3 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Entrance Lockset PB 5407LN x 1210 626 YA 



1 Cylinder as Req’d Medeco Cylinder MEDE 

Doors: 122A, 123A, 123B 

3 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Door Pull 126 X 70C US32D RO 

1 Push Plate 70C 4 X 16 US32D RO 

1 Closer 4041 HEDA AL LC 




SET #14 

SET #15 


Doors: 124A, 125 

3 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Passage Set PB 5401LN 626 YA 



Doors: 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 128, 129, 130, 131 

3 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 26D MC 

1 Intruder Lockset PB 5418LN 1210-6 PIN 626 YA 

1 Cylinder as Req’d Medeco Cylinder 626 ME 

1 Closer 4041 HEDA AL LC 



SET #MISC 1 - ALTERNATE #1 

Doors: EO2 

1 Storeroom Lockset PB 5405LN 1210-6 PIN 626 YA 

1 Cylinders REUSE EXISTING 626 ME 

1 DPS BY OTHERS 


1 Electric Strike 5900 FAIL SECURE 630 HE 

1 Card Reader BY OTHERS 

Presenting an authorized card at the card reader will release the electric strike allowing the door to be 

pulled open. 


SET #MISC 2 - ALTERNATE #1 

Doors: EO9 



1 Electric Strike 9500 FAIL SECURE 630 HE 

1 Card Reader BY OTHERS 

Presenting an authorized card at the card reader will release the electric strike allowing the door to be 

pulled open. 


SET #MISC #2 - ALTERNATE #2 

Doors: EO1, EO3, EO4, EO5, EO6, EO7, EO8, E10, E11, E12, E13 







SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other 

Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 

1. Door vision lites. 

2. Fixed windows. 

3. Storefronts. 


A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or 

fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. 

B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to 

causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning 

insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on 

the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not 

comply with the manufacturer’s directions. 

1.04 SAMPLES 

A. Refer to Section 01300. Submit manufacturer's technical data of each type of glazing 

specified including installation and maintenance instructions. 

B. As requested by the Architect and for verification purposes, submit 12" square samples of 

each type of glass specified. 

C. Submit certificates from manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials comply with 

requirements. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing 

manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, providing labels 

represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or 

independent testing laboratory acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. General: Warranties specified in the Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the 

Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to, 

and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the 

Contract Documents. 

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by 

manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units 

that deteriorate as defined in “Definitions” article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed 

Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only 


GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-1

1.06 MEASUREMENTS 

deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and 

maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions. 

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than 10 years after date of 

Substantial Completion. 

A. Verify all glass dimensions by taking field measurements before any glass is shipped to job 

site. 


A. Coordinate work with components to be glazed to prevent delay in work. 

B. Coordinate with energy criteria supplied by Mechanical Engineer. 


A. Examine all subsurfaces to receive work and report, in writing to the Architect, any conditions 


claims to the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of 

subsurfaces. 


A. Deliver and store materials in protected areas. Protect glass, whether installed or not, against 

damage, replace broken, damaged, or defective glass at no additional cost to Owner. 

1.10 STANDARDS 

A. Comply with all applicable standards of the Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) 

"Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual," and Chapter 24 of the International Building Code, 

latest edition. 

B. Primary Glass Standard: FS DD-G-451. 

C. Heat-treated Glass Standard: FS-DD-G-1403. 

D. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for 

category II materials. 

E. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand 

normal temperature changes, wind velocity equal to 90 mph, exposure "C" complying with 

International Building Code (latest edition), impact loading (where applicable), without failure 

including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and 

airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials, and other defects in the work. 

F. Each type of glass shall be supplied by single manufacturer. 







1. AFG Industries, Inc. 

2. PPG Industries, Inc. 

3. Guardian Industries 

B. Acceptable Products: Provide PPG Solarban Solarban 60 Clear, or similar products from 

other manufacturers which meet or exceed the performance characteristics of Solarban 60, in 

all exterior windows and doors. 

2.02 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1, unless indicated 

otherwise, and Quality q3 (glazing select). 

2.03 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to 

bottom edge of glass as installed. 

B. Uncoated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), 

Type I (transparent glass, flat) Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select, Kind FT (fully 

tempered). 

2.04 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of 

glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other 

requirements indicated. 

1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified 

elsewhere in the Section. 

2. Provide heat-treated of kind indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat 

strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system 

performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass 

is designated or required. 

2.05 GLAZING MATERIALS 

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM. 

B. Primer and Sealant: In accordance with Glass Manufacturer's recommendations complying 

with FS TT-S-001543, Class A nonsag, ASTM C-920, type S, Grade NS, class 25 for low 

modulas silicone, type for specific applications. Color shall be selected by the Architect from 

manufacturer's standard colors. 

C. Back-up Material: Foamed closed cell polyethylene or polystyrene rod stock. Sizes as 

required by joint conditions. 

D. Glazing Tape: DAP No. 1202, or as approved by Architect. 

E. Glass protection application as manufacturer by diamond seal. 





A. At the Contractor's direction, glazier, sealant, and gasket manufacturers' technical 

representatives, glass framing erector and other trades whose work is affected by glass and 

glazing shall meet at project site to review procedures and time schedule proposed for 

glazing and coordination with other trades. 

B. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before 

glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from 

metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are to be used. 

3.02 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS 

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for 

Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with 

recommendation of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to 

comply with system performance requirements. 


A. Have surfaces receiving glass clean, dry and free of foreign matter. Prepare, clean and prime 

surfaces to which sealant is to be applied, per sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 

B. Install glass type at locations shown on drawings and according to glass manufacturers 

recommended maximum size limitations and placement of any setting blocks. Make all 

adjacent glass in same glazed areas consistent in type and thickness unless otherwise noted 

or directed. 

C. Keep labels indicating manufacturer, quality, and thickness on glass until it has been 

approved by Architect. Absence of label constitutes cause for rejection. 

D. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each 

corner, but no closer than 6", unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant 

which is acceptable for heel bead use. 

E. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face 

clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets or glazing 

tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" sealant width, except 

with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 

F. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except 

where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. 

3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING 

A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed 

streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of 

glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. 

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with 

glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. 



C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at 

frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of 

dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of 

residue, remove by methods recommended by glass manufacturer. 

D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other 

ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism. 

E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections 

intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by 

method recommended by glass manufacturer. 

F. Refer to Section 01700. 

3.05 GLAZING SCHEDULE 

A. Glass Type A: Insulating glass consisting of clear tempered glass at indoor and outdoor lites. 

1. Classification of Units: Class CBA per ASTM E774. 

2. Air Space Width: Nominal ! inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass 

lites at unit’s edge. 

3. Glass Filling: Fill air space with argon. 

4. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants: manufacturer’s standard 

sealants. 

5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer’s standard metal. 

a. Dessicant: Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 

b. Corner Construction: Manufacturer’s standard corner construction. 

c. Color of Spacer: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard 

colors. 

6. Glass Specifications: Comply with the following requirements: 

a. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (0.23 inch). 

b. Uncoated Indoor Lite: Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) Class 

1 (clear) float glass. 

c. Coated Outdoor Lite: Kind FT (fully tempered), Low E Coating (sputtered) 

No. 2 Surface, Class 1 (clear) float glass. 

7. Nominal Performance Characteristics as indicated below: 

a. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.27. 

b. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.29. 

c. Shading Coefficient: 0.44. 

B. Glass Type B: Insulating glass consisting of clear float glass at indoor and outdoor lites. 

1. Classification of Units: Class CBA per ASTM E774. 

2. Air Space Width: Nominal ! inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass 

lites at unit’s edge. 

3. Glass Filling: Fill air space with argon. 

4. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants: manufacturer’s standard 

sealants. 

5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer’s standard metal. 

a. Dessicant: Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 

b. Corner Construction: Manufacturer’s standard corner construction. 

c. Color of Spacer: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard 

colors. 

6. Glass Specifications: Comply with the following requirements: 

a. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (0.23 inch). 

b. Uncoated Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 



c. Coated Outdoor Lite: Low E Coating (sputtered) No. 2 Surface, Class 1 

(clear) float glass. 

7. Nominal Performance Characteristics as indicated below: 

a. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.27. 

b. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.29. 

c. Shading Coefficient: 0.44. 

C. Glass Type C: 1/4" clear tempered float, clear Grade B, Style I type 1, quality of 3 Class 1. 




SECTION 08950 - INSULATED TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL WALL/ROOF SYSTEM 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary 


1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes translucent fiberglass sandwich panel system for walls or skylights 

consisting of 2-3/4" thick flat factory prefabricated into single units, including factory 

installation. 

1. Section includes all blocking, brake metal trim and other components required for 

installation and attachment to the surrounding materials. 

B. Related sections include: 

1. Division 5 Sections for structural steel framing. 

2. Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry.” 


4. Division 7 Section “Flashing and Sheet Metal.” 

5. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealers.” 

C. Requests for Substitutions: Comply with Division 1 requirements. 


A. Product Data: Submit shop drawings and color samples of face sheets and finishes according 

to Division 1. 

B. Samples: Submit product sample showing thickness, face sheets, colors and insulation 14" x 

28". 

C. Test Reports: Systems manufacturer to submit certified test reports by an independent 

testing organization for each type and class of panel system. Reports shall verify that the 

material will meet all performance requirements of this specification. Previously completed 

test reports will be acceptable if by current manufacturer and indicative of products proposed 

for this project. Test reports required are: 

1. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (ASTM E-84 by UL 723) 

2. Burn Extent (ASTM D-635) 

3. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244) 

4. Impact Strength (Free-falling Ball Method) 

5. Tensile Bond Strength (ASTM C-297) after aging by ASTM D-1037. 

6. Shear Bond Strength (ASTM D-1002) after 5 different aging conditions 

7. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E-72) 

8. Insulation “U” Factor (by NFRC 100; ASTM C-236; E-1423; and C-1199) 

9. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503) 

10. Class A Roof Covering Burning Brand (ASTM E-108) 

11. Class A Roof System UL Listed (UL-790) 

D. Proof of regular, independent quality control monitoring under a nationally recognized 

building code review and listing program including the International Conference of Building 

Officials shall be submitted. 


INSULATED TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL WALL/ROOF SYSTEM 08950 - 1

E. Submit complete energy and structural calculations and all above data with any request to be 

included as an approved product to bid this section. 


A. System Deflection: No more than L/45 for entire system, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Structural Loads: Provide system capable of handling the following loads when supporting full 

dead load: 

1. Wind Load: 32 psf plus or minus. 

2. Negative Load: 32 psf. 

3. Seismic Load: 0.18 W plus or minus. 

C. Air/Water Infiltration: For Water Penetration, curtainwall system shall be tested per 

procedures of ASTM E331, and shall show no water entry at WTP=10.00 psf, @ 5.00 gph/ft. 

squared. Test shall be performed before and after uniform loads are applied. For Air 

Leakage, system shall be tested per procedures of ASTM E283, and shall show results of no 

more than 0.01 cfm/ft. squared @ 1.56 psf (25 mph) and 0.01 cfm/ft. squared @ 6.24 psf (50 

mph). 


A. Installer Qualifications: Erection shall be by an installer who has been in the business of 

erecting and installing specified materials for at least five (5) consecutive years, and can 

show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type. 

B. Shop drawings to be reviewed and stamped by structural engineer registered in the State of 

Utah. 

C. System manufacturer must be listed by a recognized building code authority, including the 

International Conference of Building Officials, which requires quality control inspections; and 

fire, structural and water infiltration testing by an approved agency for sandwich panel 

systems. Panels used on this project shall meet the criteria of ICBO and the International 

Building Code without restrictions to Chapter 26. 

D. Quality control inspections; and required testing conducted at least once each year, shall 

include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels 

for conformance with “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels” as regulated by the ICBO- 

ES or equivalent. 

E. Materials and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly 

employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10) 

consecutive years and which can show evidence of these materials being satisfactorily used 

on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and type within such a period. At least three 

(3) projects shall have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer. 

F. Performance Requirement: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and 

fabrication of the complete panel system. 

G. Product Options: Drawings indicated size, dimension and profile of structural translucent 

panel system. Specifications indicate performance required. Other manufacturers that can 

meet portions of this specification and wish to be considered as alternates must comply with 

Div. 1, Substitutions and Alternates, and can offer alternate bids for consideration using those 

guidelines. 




A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in system installation areas and indicate if 

dimensions on shop drawings are actual or guaranteed dimensions. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. General Warranty: Any warranties specified in this section shall not alter or change Owners 

rights and provisions received under other contract documents, and shall be in addition to 

those documents. 

B. Special Warranty: Provide system manufacturer provide written agreement to repair or 

replace all defective panel and system craftsmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of 

substantial completion. Provide Installer’s warranty against leakage for one (1) year from date 

of substantial completion. 


A. Store panels on long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover to 

prevent damage. Follow manufacturer’s storage and handling instructions. 





1. Kalwall Corporation. 

B. Manufacturers wishing to bid this section must submit product information showing all 

compliance including IBC compliance in accordance with the ICBO reports and receive 

written approval prior to bidding. 

2.02 MATERIALS AND PANEL FABRICATION 

A. Translucent Fiberglass Faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins by 

insulated system fabricator especially for architectural use. Thermoplastic (e.g. 

polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable. 

B. Flammability: The interior face sheet shall be UL listed and have a flamespread rating no 

greater than 45 and smoke developed no greater than 350 when tested in accordance with 

UL 723. Burn extent by ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1". Faces shall not deform, 

deflect, drip when subject to fire or flame, or become detached when subjected to 300 

degrees F for 25 minutes. 

C. Weatherability: The full thickness of the exterior face shall not change color more than 3.0 

Hunter of CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D-2244 after five (5) years outdoor South Florida 

weathering at 5 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least three (3) white 

samples with and without a protective film or coating to insure maximum, long-term color 

stability. 

1. Class A Roof System: Seven (7) Units, after 30 months exposure. 



D. Exterior Face: Provide a permanent glass veil erosion barrier integrally embedded to provide 

maximum long-term resistance to fiber exposure. Substitute plastic surface films, coatings or 

veils not acceptable. 

E. Face Sheets: Provide smooth face sheets with maximum variation in thickness of not more 

than plus or minus 10% and uniform in color. 

1. Exterior Face Sheet: 

a. Thickness: 0.070" 

b. Color: Crystal. 

2. Interior Face Sheet: 

a. Thickness: 0.045". 

b. Color: White. 

F. Panel System: 2-3/4" thick, made of two sheets of translucent fiberglass, bonded by heat and 

pressure to either an aluminum or composite grid core specifically for architectural use. 

G. Thermal Insulation: Provide NFRC laboratory tested and certified system: 

1. “U” Factor: 0.29 by ASTM C-236, E-1423 and C-1199. 

H. Light & Solar Transmission per ASTM E-972: 

1. Light Transmission: 20 

2. Shading Coefficient: 0.219. 

I. Grid Cores: 

1. Grid Pattern: Symmetrical about the horizontal centerline for each flat panel: 

a. Nominal 12” x 12", square. 

2. Panels shall withstand 1200 degrees F fire for minimum (1) hour without collapse or 

exterior flaming. 

J. Adhesive: 

1. Laminate Adhesive: Heat and pressure resin-type engineered for structural sandwich 

panel use, with minimum 25 years field use, and passing testing requirements 

specified by the International Conference of Building Officials “Acceptance Criteria for 

Sandwich Panel Adhesive.” 

2. Minimum Strength: 750 PSI tensile strength by ASTM C-297 after two (2) exposures 

to six (6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037. 

3. Shear strength by ASTM D-1002 minimum after exposures to five (5) separate aging 

conditions: 

a. 50% Relative Humidity at 73 degrees F: 540 PSI 

b. 182 degrees F: 100 PSI 

c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI 

d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at 182 degrees F: 250 PSI 

e. 500-hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D-572: 1400 PSI 

K. Impact Resistance: 

1. Exterior Face Sheet: Uniform in strength and repel an impact equal to 60 ft. lbs. 

without fracture or tear when impacted by 3-1/2" diameter, 6.37 lb. free-falling ball, 

and be resistant to penetration by pencil point. 

L. Translucent Structural Sandwich Panel: True sandwich panel of flat fiberglass sheets bonded 

to a grid core of mechanically interlocking I-beams, laminated under a controlled process of 

heat and pressure, and deflect no more than 1.9" at 30 psf in 10' by ASTM E-72. 

M. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam, and have a 

neat, sharp edge. In order to insure bonding strength, white spots at intersections of mutins 



and mullions shall not exceed 4 for each 40 sq. ft. of panel, nor shall they be more than 3/64" 

in width. 

N. Where practical, pre-assemble and seal panels and aluminum perimeter frame at the factory. 

Ship panels to the job site packaged to prevent damage and ready for erection. 

O. Perimeter Closure System, Battens and Aluminum Finishes: 

1. Closure System: Extruded 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 aluminum clamp-rite screw type. 

2. Aluminum Closures: Supply with 300 series stainless steel screws (excluding final 

fasteners to building) and factory sealed to the panels. Field install aluminum battens 

and cap plates. 

3. All exposed aluminum to be architectural corrosion resistant finish which meets the 

performance requirements of AAMA 2604. For bidding purposes, provide the 

following colors from Kalwall Corporation or similar colors from other manufacturers. 

Actual color selection may vary. 

a. Exterior Metal Finish Color: Brick #88 

b. Interior Metal Finish Color: Bone White #21B. 

4. Flexible Sealing Tape: Manufacturer’s standard pre-applied to serrated edges of 

closure system at factory under controlled conditions. 



A. Do not install systems until conditions adversely affecting installation and performance have 

been corrected. 


A. Prepare openings including isolating dissimilar materials from aluminum system which may 

cause damage by electrolysis. Provide temporary enclosures if required, to protect interior 

from weather, theft or vandalism. 


A. The installer shall erect translucent panel system in strict accordance with approved shop 

drawings as supplied by manufacturer, including fastening and sealing. Clean aluminum 

before sealants are applied. 

B. Secure non-moveable joints, and accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. 

C. If required, insure weep holes are correctly installed. 

D. After other trades have completed work on adjacent material, inspect translucent panel 

installation and make any adjustments necessary to insure proper installation and weathertight 

conditions. 

3.03 CLEANING 

A. Clean both sides of panel system after installation, according to manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 






DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 

Section 09250 – Gypsum Board Assemblies 

Section 09300 – Tile 

Section 09510 – Acoustical Ceilings 

Section 09650 – Resilient Flooring 

Section 09680 – Carpet 

Section 09900 – Painting 



SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Non-load bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 

2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. 

3. Cementitious baker units installed at all toilet room walls. 

4. Sound attenuation batt insulation. 

B. Related Documents 

1. Refer to Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for backing and blocking. 

2. Division 9 Section “Tile” for glazed wall tile installed on cementitious backer units. 

3. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for acoustical sealants. 

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. Refer to section 01300. 

B. Manufacturer’s specifications. 


A. Coordinate with trades whose work connects with, is affected by, or is concealed by drywall. 

Before proceeding with work, make certain all required inspections have been made. 

B. Standards: 

1. Comply with all applicable requirements of "American Standard Specifications for the 

Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard", by the American Standard 

Association except where more stringent requirements are called for herein, local 

codes, or by manufacturer. Do all cutting and patching required to accommodate 

other trades. 


A. Store materials off ground and cover against weather. Remove any damaged materials from 

the site. 





1. Steel Framing and Furring: 

a. Dale Industries, Inc. 

b. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 

c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 

2. Gypsum Boad: 

a. Domtar Gypsum. 

b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. 


GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250-1

c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 

d. United States Gypsum Co. 

3. Tile Backer Board: 

a. Georgia Pacific Gypsum. 

4. Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation: 

a. CertainTeed Corporation 

b. Johns Manville Corporation 

c. Owens Corning 

5. Slotted Deflection Track; 

a. Brady Construction Innovations. Inc. 

2.02 WALLBOARD MATERIALS 

A. Gypsum wallboard shall conform to ASTM C-36. 

B. Provide the following types: 

1. At rated construction: 5/8" thick x 4' wide fire resistive gypsum board, Type X. 

2. 5/8" thick x 4' wide standard gypsum board. 

2.05 FIBERGLASS-MAT FACED GYPSUM BACKING BOARD: 

A. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Units: ASTM C1178, Type X and as follows: 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

2. Width: 4 feet. 

3. Length: 8 feet. 

4. Weight: 2600 pounds per thousand square feet. 

5. Edges: Square. 

6. Surfacing: Coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 

7. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): Not less than 10, in a test as manufactured. 

8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 1.0 perms when tiled. 

9. Robinson Floor Test Rating (ASTM C627): Light commercial. 

10. Acceptable Products: 

a. 5/8 inch DensShield Fireguard Type X 

2.03 WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES 

A. Trim and edging: 26 gage electrogalvanized steel. Provide angle corner pieces with 1-3/4" 

legs at all external corners and U.S.G. No. 200-A metal trim pieces, as detailed, at all 

wallboard edges meeting dissimiliar materials and when edges are exposed. 

B. Screws: Type S, bugle head, blued steel, of lengths as required to accommodate thicknesses 

of wall and ceiling construction. 

C. Drywall channel screeds: Fry reglet type DRM-625-75. 

D. Laminating Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board. 

2.04 METAL FRAMING 

A. Metal Studs: 25 gage unless noted otherwise, electrogalvanized steel, 3-5/8", with dissimilar 

flange widths to permit nesting. Provide punch holes at 24" o.c. and 12" from end of studs 

capable of passing pipe and conduit and interlocking 1-1/2" reinforcing channel. 

1. Provide 20 gage studs at the following locations: 

a. Walls over 13 feet high. 



. At door jambs 

c. At walls with tile finishes. 

B. Channels: 1-1/2", weighing 520 pounds per 1,000 lineal feet, 16 gage, painted. 

C. Furring channels: Roll-formed 25 gage electrogalvanized cold steel, "hat channels", 

approximately 2-5/8" wide at base, 7/8" deep. 

D. Ceiling runner channels: 1-1/2" cold-rolled steel, weighing 475 pounds per 1,000 lineal feet, 

rust inhibitive painted. Use same channel for partition reinforcing. 

E. Floor and ceiling runners: 25 gage electrogalvanized steel, "U" shaped sections, of sizes 

required to accommodate metal studs. 

F. Tie wire: 18 gage soft annealed galvanized steel wire. 

G. Hanger wire: 9 gage, galvanized annealed steel wire. 

H. Furring channels for 2" insulated wall (exterior) 25 gauge electro-galvanized cold steel. 

2.05 SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION 

A. Type: Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I. 

B. Size: 3-1/2 inches thick 

C. Surface Burning Characteristics, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84: 

1. Maximum flame spread: 10 

2. Maximum smoke developed: 10 

D. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136. 

E. Fire Resistance Ratings: Passes ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested wall assembly. 

F. Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than 0.1% 



A. Examine all subsurfaces to receive work and report, in writing to Architect, any detrimental 

conditions. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to 

the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces. 


A. Suspension systems: 

1. All main runners shall be 1-1/2" runner channels at 48" o.c. suspend from structure by 

9 gage annealed wire, spaced at 36" o.c. 

2. Cross members shall be 7/8" hat channels at 16" o.c. Provide wall track where 

suspension system meets vertical surface. 

3. Deflection from loading of suspension system shall not exceed 1/360 of the span. 

4. When applicable comply with 1 hr. fire rating requirements. 

B. Framing: 



1. Comply with installation instructions of U.S.G. installation handbook, latest edition. 

2. Install additional stud and jambs of openings. 

3. Install deflection tracks where studs are continuous to roof deck. 

C. Gypsum Board: 

1. Apply boards with long dimension perpendicular to framing members with all abutting 

ends and edges over supports. Neatly fit and stagger all end joints. Make joints occur 

on different studs at opposite sides of partition. Cut and fit neatly around all outlets 

and switches. Space fasteners 8" o.c. along vertical edges and 12" o.c. at midpoints, 

3/8" from edge of board. Fasten boards to backings specified. 

2. Erection techniques shall result in plumb and straight surfaces with no waves or 

buckles, free or unevenness at joints. 

3. Joints shall be in continuous moderate contact. 

4. If framing members are out of alignment, bowed or warped, correct to make true 

surfaces before application of gypsum board. Use method of correction approved by 

the Architect. Make finished walls or ceilings plumb and level without ridges, bows, or 

warps. 

5. Execute wallboard work when building temperature is within a range of 55 degrees to 

90 degrees F. Ventilate to eliminate excessive moisture. 

D. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Backing Board: 

1. General: In accordance with ASTM C840 and the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

Install at toilet room walls. 

a. Install other accessories where required. 

E. Finishing Gypsum Board Assemblies 

1. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of 

corner beads, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface 

defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decorations 

and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. 

2. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type 

joint compound. 

3. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having 

concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint 

treatment at flange edges. 

4. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish 

per GA-214. 

5. For gypsum board surfaces exposed to view, provide level 4 gypsum board finish. 

Embed tape in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over 

joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats 

and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for 

decoration. Use one of the following joint compound combinations: 

a. Fill (Second) Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type topping compound. 

b. Finish (Third) Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type topping compound. 

c. Embedding and First Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type all-purpose compound. 

d. Fill (Second) Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type all-pourpose compound. 

e. Finish (Third) Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type all-purpose compound. 

f. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type compound. 

g. Finish (Third) Coat: Job-mixed, drying-type all-purpose compound. 

6. For gypsum board not exposed to view (above ceilings), provide a level 2 finish, 

applying joint compound for an embedding coat and for a first coat. 

7 Allow compound to thoroughly dry for at least 24 hours. 

8. Gypsum Wallboard is to be a smooth non-textured finish. 

9. Give all dimples at fastener heads and all marred spots on surface of board 1 coat 

joint compound and 2 coats finishing compound, applied as each coat is applied. 



10. Install metal corner reinforcement at all external corners. Conceal flanges of metal 

reinforcing with at least 2 coats of compound. When completed, compound shall 

extend approximately 8" to 10" on each side of metal nosing. 

11. After each application of joint or finishing compound has dried, lightly sand all joints 

and leave all board and treated areas uniformly smooth ready for painting. 

12. Where walls run to underside of deck, all voids in deck must be filled and sealed with 

dry wall, insulation or if rated, then one-hour material approved by the Architect. 

13. Do all cutting and patching where drywall construction must be penetrated by other 

trades. 

F. Sound Attenuation Batts: 

1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each 

case. 

2. Batts may be friction-fit in place until the interior finish is applied. Install batts to fill 

entire stud cavity. If stud cavity is less than 96" in height, cut lengths to friction-fit 

against floor and ceiling tracks. Carefully cut batts to fit around outlets, junction boxes 

and other irregularities. 

3. Where walls are not finished on both sides, or insulation does not fill the cavity depth, 

provide supplementary support to hold product in place. 

4. Where insulation must extend higher than 8 feet, provide temporary support to hold 

product in place until the finish material is applied. 

3.03 CLEANUP 







SECTION 09300 - TILE 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes tile work shown on the drawings and as specified herein for the 

following: 

1. Unglazed Ceramic mosaic tile. 

2. Glazed wall tile. 

3. Porcelain floor tile. 

4. Thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 


1. Division 3 Section “Concrete Work” for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile 

substrates. 

2. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and 

isolation joints in tile surfaces. 

3. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for cementitious backer units installed 

in toilet rooms. 


A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint 

width indicated. 

B. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1. 


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the 

following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 

B. Load-Bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide 

installations rated for the following load-bearing performance level based on testing 

assemblies according to ASTM C 627 that are representative of those indicated for this 

Project: 

1. Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 12. 


A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified. 

B. Tile Samples for Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of 

tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and 

composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. 

C. Grout Samples for Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of actual sections of grout 

showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated. 


A. Conform to applicable requirements of the American Standards Association Specifications (A- 


TILE 09300 - 1

108 Series), and the “Tile Handbook” of the Tile Council of America, Inc., and be equal to or 

exceed standard grade. Tile shall be set by journeyman tile setters. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations 

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of 

successful in-service performance. 

C. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of 

tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each 

contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying 

the Work. 

D. Source Limitations for Selling and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform uality for 

each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and ach aggregate 

from one source or producer. 

E. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified n this 

Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product: 

1. Stone thresholds. 

2. Waterproofing. 


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and abels 

intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile 

packages. 

B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other 

causes. 

C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces 

from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, 

remove coating from bonding surfaces before selling tile. 


A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products 

installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels 

describing contents. 

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount 

installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 




products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Tile Products: 

a. American Olean Tile Company 

b. Dal-Tile Corporation. 

c. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. 

d. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 

2. Tile-Setting and -Grouting Materials: 

a. American Olean Tile Company 


TILE 09300 - 2

2.02 PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

b. Dal-Tile Corporation. 

c. Laticrete International, Inc. 

d. Mapei Corporation. 

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI Al 37.1, “Specifications for 

Ceramic Tile,” for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified 

in Part 1 “Definitions” Article. 

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI 

standards referenced in “Setting Materials” and “Grouting Materials” articles. 

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer’s standard products are indicated for tile, 

grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other 

appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the 

following requirements: 

1. Provide Architect’s selections from manufacturer’s full range of colors, textures, and 

patterns for products of type indicated. 

2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. 

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample 

submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the 

same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 

E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile 

assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated. 

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted 

tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting 

is suitable for these kinds of installations and has a record of successful in-service 

performance. 

F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect 

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a 

continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 

2.03 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following 

requirements: 

1. Composition: Porcelain. 

2. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches and as scheduled. 

3. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch. 

4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 

5. Colors: Provide colors in patterns indicated on drawings. Dal-Tile colors are indicated 

below: 

a. Field Tile: FT-1: Biscuit D317 

b. Accent Tile: 

1) FT-2: Garden Spot D141 

2) FT-3: Luminary Gold D142 

3) FT-4: Galaxy D023. 

4) FT-5: Suede Gray D182 


TILE 09300 - 3

B. Porcelain Floor Tile (FT-6): 

1. Composition: Porcelain 

2. Size: 13 by 13 inches. 

3. Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch. 

4. Color: Regal Rouge CV 13, Dal-Tile. 

C. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: 

1. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches and as scheduled. Refer to drawings for patterns. 

2. Thickness: 5/1 6 inch. 

3. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 

4. Mounting: Factory back-mounted. 

5. Colors: Provide colors in patterns indicated on drawings. For bidding purposes, use 

the following Dal-tile pricing groups or similar groups from other manufacturers: 

a. Field Tile: WT-1: Almond K165. 

b. Accent Tile: 

1) WT-2: Garden Spot 0141 

2) WT-3: Mustard Q012 

3) WT-4: Galaxy 1469 

4) WT-5: Orange Burst Q097 

6. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer’s standard shapes: 

a. Coved base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations. 

b. Straight base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations. 

c. Surface bullnose for thin set mortar installations. 

d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and 

cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. 

2.04 THRESHOLDS 

A. General: Provide thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and 

profiles indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor 

surfaces. 

1. Threshold: 1/2" x 3" tapered marble threshold. 

a. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than 3/8 inch above 

adjoining finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of 

no greater than 1:2. 

b. Provide marble threshold at transition from toilet rooms to hallways. 

2. Metal Edge: Schluter RENO-U or equal at other transitions between tile and carpet or 

vinyl composition tile. Profile as required for tile and adjacent material. 

a. Finish: Brushed stainless steel. 

3. Submit color samples for Architects approval. 

2.05 MORTAR 

A. Mortar Bed: Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1A 

B. Bond Coat: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. 

2.06 GROUTING 

A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6. 

1. Unsanded for joints between 1/16" and 1/8". 

a. Products: Mapei Ker 800 or approved equal. 

2. Sanded for joint over 1/8". 


TILE 09300 - 4

a. Products: Mapei Ker 200 or approved equal. 

3. Color as selected by Architect. 

B. Floor Tile: Mapei Kerapoxy or approved equal. 

2.07 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 

A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base 

polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 

Section “Joint Sealers.” 

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed 

joints, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type 5; Grade NS; Class 25; 

Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated with 

fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that 

are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes. 

D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; 

Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. 

E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealants: 

a. Dow Corning 786; Dow Corning Corporation. 

b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. 

c. Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant; Pecora Corp. 

d. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco, Inc. 

2. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealants: 

a. Chem-Calk 550; Bostik. 

b. Vulkem 245; Mameco International, Inc. 

c. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corp. 

d. THC-900; Tremco, Inc. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based 

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations 

indicated. 

B. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide at tap edge with 

integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect 

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, 

and grout products; and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging 

grout or tile. 

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil 

with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87. 

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and 

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout 

manufacturers. 


TILE 09300 - 5

E. Penetrating Sealer: Non-yellowing, matte-finish, stain-resistant penetrating sealer. 

1. Equal to: AQUA MIX, Inc., Sealer’s Choice. 

2.09 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT 

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout 

manufacturers’ written instructions. 

B. Add materials and additives in accurate proportions. Do not use or add any water to mortar or 

grout when mixing, use only latex additive. 

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and 

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance 

characteristics for installations indicated. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, 

for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 

performance of installed tile. 

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and 

curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A 108 

series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and 

mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been 

completed before installing tile. 

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if 

not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect. 

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, 

oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete 

grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. 

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement 

mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A 108 series of tile 

installation standards for installations indicated. 

1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material 

manufacturer’s written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions. 

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample 

submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken 

from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and 

match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at 

Project site before installing. 

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed 

to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of 


TILE 09300 - 6

tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of 

temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces: 

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. 

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A 108 series of tile installation 

standards in “Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile” that apply to types of setting and 

grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCAs “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.’ Comply with TCA 

installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete 

covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at 

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring 

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for 

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other 

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when 

adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center 

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 

Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints 

within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, 

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar 

beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section 

“Joint Sealants.” 

H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards: 

1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, 

and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A 108.10. 

3.04 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation 

Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A 108 series of tile 

installation standards. 

1. Installation Methods: 

a. Tile over Concrete Slabs on Grade at Toilet Rooms: TCA F114. 

b. Tile over Concrete Slabs on Grade at Classrooms and Faculty Lounge: TCA 

115. 

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 


TILE 09300 - 7

C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying 

with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A 108 series 

of tile installation standards: 

1. Tile floors in wet areas. 

2. Tile 8” by 8” or larger. 

3. Tile floors installed with chemical-resistant grouts. 

D. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting 

bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would 

otherwise be exposed above adjacent non-tile floor finish. 

3.05 WALL TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic 

Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and 

ANSI setting-bed standards. 

1. Installation Methods: 

a. Tile over Masonry Surfaces: TCA W211. 

b. Tile over Gypsum Board Surfaces: TCA W243/W244. 

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 

1. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 

C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying 

with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A 108 series 

of tile installation standards: 

1. Tile wall installations in wet areas. 

2. Tile wall installations composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. 

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement arid grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are 

free of foreign matter. 

1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 

2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and 

grout manufacturer’s written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. 

Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid 

cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating 

manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove 

coating to prevent it from clogging drains. 

B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, 

unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. 

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and 

installer that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial 

Completion. 

1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective 

cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper 

or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and 

wear. 

2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is 

completed. 


TILE 09300 - 8

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile 

surfaces. 

E. Refer to Section 01700. 



TILE 09300 - 9


TILE 09300 - 10

SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes acoustical ceiling panels, suspension system and accessories. 

B. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 


A. Product Data: Manufacturers product specifications and installation instructions for each 

acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including certified 

laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these 


1. Include manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical units, 

including precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to 

finishes and acoustical performances. 

B. Samples: Set of 6’ x 4” square samples for each acoustical unit required, showing full range of 

exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. 

1. Set of 12” long samples of each exposed runner and molding. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than three years of successful experience in 

installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is 

acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units, as shown by current written statement from 

manufacturer. 

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceiling components that are identical to 

those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, according to ASTM test method 

indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable 

testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84. 

a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 

b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. 

2. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designation in UL “Fire 

Resistance Directory” or “FM Approval Guide”, for floor, roof or beam assemblies in 

which acoustical ceilings function as a fire protective membrane; tested per ASTM E 

119. Provide protection materials for lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with 

requirements indicated for rated assembly. 

C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and 

suspension system components with other work supported by or penetrating through, ceilings, 

including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components, and partition 

systems. 



ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1

A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them 

in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct 

sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. 

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a 

stabilized moisture content. 

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any 

way. 


A Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and 

weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings 

completed, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously 

maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 





1. Suspension System: 

a. Armstrong. 

b. Chicago Metallic Corp. 

c. Donn Corp. 

2. Acoustical Tile: 

a. Armstrong. 

b. USG. 

c. Celotex. 


A. Acoustical Ceiling Units: 

1. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard units of configuration indicated which are 

prepared for mounting method designated and which comply with FS 55-5-1 18 

requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, form, pattern, grade 

(NRC or NIC’s as applicable), light reflectance coefficient (LR), edge detail, and joint 

detail (if any). 

2. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: No. 7 (mechanically mounted on special metal 

support), FS 55-5-1 18; or Type E-400 mounting as per ASTM E 795. 

3. Sound Attenuation Performance: Provide acoustical ceiling units with ratings for 

ceding sound transmission class (STC) of range indicated as determined according to 

AMA 1 -II “Ceiling Sound Transmission Test by Two-Room Method” with ceilings 

continuous at partitions and supported by a metal suspension system of type 

appropriate for ceiling unit of configuration indicated (concealed for tile, exposed for 

panels). 

B. Provide the following ceiling types. The manufacture and product name is provided to 

establish the standard quality, and design type required. Other approved manufacturers shall 

use equal products. 

1. Type “A” – USG Aspen No. 651 

a. Size: 24” x 48” x 3/4”. 



. Edge: Angled tegular. 

c. CAC: 35 

d. NRC: .55 

e. LR: .87 

f. Surface Finish: Factory-applied vinyl latex paint. 

g. Color: White. 

2. Type “B” – USG Aspen No. 650 Panel 

a. Size: 24” x 24” x 3/4” 

b. Edge: Angled tegular. 

c. CAC: 35 

d. NR: .55 

e. LR: .87 

f. Surface Finish: Factory-applied vinyl latex paint. 


3. Type “C” – USG Curvatura Suspension System 

a. Infill Panel: 24” x 24” 

b. Tee: 15/16” face 

c. Edge Trim: 2-1/4” with attachment clips 

d. Insulation: 1” semi-rigid on top of panels 

e. Infill Panel Finish: Aluminum perforated 

1) Pattern: No. A188 

2) Perforations: Round, 3/16” 

3) Open Area: 5%. 

f. Color: As selected by Architect. 

1) Two colors minimum. 

C. Metal Suspension System: Provide metal suspension systems of type, structural classification 

and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. 

1. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer’s standard finish for type of system 

indicated, unless otherwise required. For exposed suspension members and 

accessories with painted finish, provide color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, 

as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors. 

2. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, 

Direct Hung. 

3. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, 

Class 1 coating, sized so that stress at 3- times hanger design loan (ASTM C 635, 

Table 1, Direct Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 

12 gage. 

4. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, 

provide manufacturer’s standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling which 

fits with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. 

a. Perimeter Molding: 7/8” x 7/8” hemmed angle molding with prefinished edges. 

1) Color: Black or as selected by Architect. 

b. Provide 4” high fascia molding with attachment clips where ceilings transition 

from 8”-8” to 9’-0”. 

2) Color: To be selected by Architect. 

5. Non-Fire-Rated Single Web Steel Suspension System: 

a. Structural Classification: Heavy-Duty System. 

b. Equal to Armstrong “Prelude XL” system (15/16” exposed tee). 

6. Seismic Joint Clips: Provide Armstrong SJCG seismic joint clips at each joint. 





A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by 

other trades for support of acoustical ceilings. 

1. Furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clips and similar devices to other trades 

for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work. 

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at 

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply 

with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible. 


A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions, and to 

comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and 

industry standards applicable to work. 

B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally-patterned units (if any) in manner shown by 

reflected ceiling plans. 

1. Install panels with pattern running in one direction. 

C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from 

building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6” from each end and spaced 4-0” 

along each carrying channel or direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to 

tolerance of 1/8 in 12-0”. Comply with detail on drawings for seismic bracing. 

D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, 

or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not 

deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within 

ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension 

system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting 

horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective means. 

E. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations 

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. 

1. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16” oc. and not more than 3” 

from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8” in 12-0”. Miter 

corners accurately and connect securely. 

F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by 

support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at 

penetrations. 

1. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, and in areas where required by governing 

regulations or for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel 

manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 

G. Install two seismic joint clips at all joints in the suspension system, or as otherwise 

recommended by manufacturer. 


A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension 

members; comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish 

damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to 

permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 



B. Extra Stock: Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance material 

matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with 

appropriate labels. 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount 

installed. 

2. Exposed Suspension Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component 

required for actual installation equal to 2.0% of amount installed. 

C. Refer to Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout.” 






SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A Section includes resilient flooring, base and accessories. 


1. Division 9 Section “Tile” for transition strips at floor tile. 

2. Division 9 Section “Carpet” for carpet base. 

2. Division 12 Section “Entrance Mats” for transition strips at entrance mats. 

C. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of resilient flooring and 

accessory. 

B. Samples: 

1. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit actual sections of resilient flooring, 

including accessories for each type of resilient flooring, and base required. 

C. Certification for Fire Test Performance: Submit certification from an independent testing 

laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that resilient flooring complies with fire 

test performance requirements. 

D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturers recommended maintenance 

practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. 


A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single 

manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. 

B. Fire Test Performance: Provide resilient flooring which complies with the following fire test 

performance criteria as determined by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Flame Spread: Not more than 75 per ASTM E 84. 

2. Smoke Developed: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 84. 

3. Smoke Density: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 662. 

C. Installer’s Qualifications: Engage Installer who is certified in writing by resilient flooring 

manufacturer as qualified for installation of sheet vinyl employing heat welded seams. 


A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 deg. F (18 deg. C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring 

for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after 

installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 

48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 

deg. F (13 deg. C) in areas where work is completed. 


RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1

B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, 

have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have 

been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by resilient 

flooring manufacturer’s recommended bond and moisture test. 



A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 


1. Vinyl Composition Tile: 

a. Amtico Flooring Div., American Biltrite Inc. 

b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

c. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc. 

d. Tarkett Inc. 

2. Rubber Wall Base: 

a. Burke Flooring Products Div., Burke Industries, Inc. 

b. Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co. 

c. Johnson Rubber Co., Inc. 

d. R. C. Musson Rubber Co., Inc. 

e. Roppe Rubber Corp. 

3. Resilient Edge Strips: 

a. Roppe Corporation 


A. Vinyl Composition Tile: ASTM F 1066 Class 2, Through Pattern; 12” x 12” unless otherwise 

indicated, and as follows: 

1. Composition 1 - asbestos-free. 

2. Gage: 1/8”. 

3. Color: Colors indicated below are from Azrock “Cortina Colors” and “Cortina 

Complements” product lines and indicate design intent. Provide colors indicated, or 

comparable colors from other manufacturers, subject to Architect’s approval, in 

patterns shown on drawings, 

a. VCT 1: Azrock Stratus V-787 

b. VCT 2: Azrock Granny Smith(Green) V-614 

c. VCT 3: Azrock Honey (Yellow) V-885 

d. VCT 4: Azrock Denim (Denim) V-887 

e. VCT 5: Azrock Hype (Orange) V-608 

f. Colors subject to change and are provided to convey the design intent. 

B. Rubber Wall Base: Provide rubber base complying with ASTM F-1861, Type TP, Group 1 

(solid) Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base, with matching end stops and preformed 

or molded corner units, and as follows: 

1. Height: 4”. 

2. Thickness: 1/8” gage. 

3. Style: Standard top-set cove for resilient flooring and straight at carpet. 

4. Finish: Matte. 

5. Color: As selected by Architect. 

C. Resilient Edge Strips: Homogeneously constructed of first-quality resilient rubber compound, 

free of objectionable odors, blister, cracks and other imperfections that will affect the 



serviceability of the accessories. 

1. Profile: Roppe No. 50 Tile Carpet Joiner or as required to match thickness of adjacent 

materials. 

a. Color: As selected by architect. 

b. Adhesive: Manufacturer’s urethane enhanced, solvent-free two-component 

epoxy. 

c. Vinyl products are not allowed. 

D. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer 

to suit material and substrate conditions. 

1. Use contact cement on corners and irregular surfaces. 

E. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 

F. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex types as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 



A Examine subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory subfloor 

surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings 

preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance. 

B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are 

sufficiently cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence of curing compounds. 

C. Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory. 


A. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows: 

1. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring 

manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors. 

2. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including 

curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes 

and sealers. 

3. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. 

4. Include floor preparation for existing concrete floors in the base bid. 

B. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of 

adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer’s directions. 


A. Where movable partitions are shown, install resilient flooring before partitions are erected. 

B. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer’s printed 

instructions. Extend resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and 

similar openings. 

C. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, 

outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions. 



D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future 

cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent 

marking device. 

E. Install resilient flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items 

occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with 

pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around 

covers and to covers. 

F. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering 

at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll 

resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. 

G. Tile Floor Installation: 

1. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, 

so that tile at opposite edges of room area of equal width. Adjust as necessary to 

avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room 

axis, unless otherwise shown. 

2. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as 

manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. 

Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable. 

a. Lay tile in “checkerboard’ fashion with grain reversed in adjacent tiles. 

3. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance 

with flooring manufacturer’s directions. 

H. Base Installation: 

1. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in 

rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, 

with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped 

inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with 

continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 

I. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Miter corners. 

Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed and at transitions 

from carpet to vinyl tile and entrance mats to vinyl tile. 


A. Perform the following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: 

1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 

2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer 

has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in adhesive. 

3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. 

4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner 

recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers. 

B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction 

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 

Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. 

1. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, 

and surface blemishes. 

a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to 

tile manufacturer. 

b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner’s maintenance service. 

2. Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial 




Completion. 

3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard 

panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects 

over panels without moving panels. 

A. Provide three boxes of each type of resilient flooring. 






SECTION 09680 - CARPET 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes floor carpet, carpet base, and accessories shown on the drawings and 

specified herein. 

1. Use: Severe Traffic Rating. 


1. Division 9 Section “Resilient Flooring” for rubber base, vinyl composition tile and 

transition strips between carpet and vinyl composition tile. 

2. Division 9 Section “Tile” for floor tile and metal transition strips installed at the tile. 

3. Division 12 Section “Entrance Mats.” 


A. Coordinate with all trades affected in any way with the work of this section to assure timely 

completion of work. 


A. Refer to Section 01300. Submit shop drawings indicating seam locations and edging 

conditions. 

B. Submit two 36” square samples of each carpet and color specified. These samples shall bear 

manufacturers label and material identification. 

C. A layout of each area to receive carpet shall be provided showing pattern, color, location of 

seams, fills and installation details. 

D. Submit the following: 

1. Certified letter from Mill indicating that carpet meets or exceeds specifications subject 

to normal manufacturing tolerance not to exceed 5%. 

2. Data indicating compliance with requirements including test laboratory reports and 

manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation and maintenance. 


A. Deliver materials properly identified, in protective wrapping. Store and protect materials until 

incorporated into the work. Replace damaged material at no additional cost to the Owner. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. Provide 10 year warranty by carpet mill, carpet installer and the carpet dealer meeting the 

following requirements: 

1. Wear: Surface pile in any area shall not be abrasively worn by more than 10% during 

the 10 years from date of substantial completion. 

2. Static Protection: No static discharge in excess of 3.5 KV when tested in accordance 

with AATCC Test Method No. 1 34 during the 5 years from date of substantial 

completion. 

3. Edge Ravel: No unraveling of continuous lengthwise seams during lifetime of carpet. 

4. Tuft Bind: Average face yarn tuft bind of 20 pounds when tested in accordance with 


CARPET 09680 - 1



ASTM D-1335. 

5. Delamination: No backing delamination during lifetime of carpet. 

A. Approved Manufacturers: 

1. Shaw Contract 

a. Hit the Books 60465, Broadloom. 

1) Color: Study Hall 18490, or as selected by Architect. 

2. Lees Carpet 

a. Five GL021, Broadloom 

1) Color: 5127 Blue Note, or as selected by Architect 

3. Other manufacturers may be approved subject to meeting the same quality 

performance standards and with the written approval of the Architect prior to bid. 

2.02 FLOOR CARPET 

A. Construction: 

1. Shaw Contract 

a. Construction: Pattern Loop. 

b. Fiber: 90% Eco Solution Q Nylon. 

c. Protective Treatement: S.S.P. ® Shaw Soil Protection. 

d. Gauge: 5/64 

e. Stitches: 10.0 

f. Tufted Weight: 22.0 ozs./sq. yd. 

g. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.108 inches. 

h. Primary Backing: Polypropylene. 

i. Secondary Backing: Ultraloc MPC with “no failure” lifetime commercial 

warranty. 

i. Dye Method: 61% Solution dyed/39% Space dyed. 

k. Size: 12 feet width. 

2. Lees Carpet 

a. Construction: Tufted 

b. Surface Texture: Multi level loop 

c. Gauge: 1/8” 

d. Stitches: 8.2 per inch 

e. Pile Height: 0.156” to 0.218” avg 

f. Face Yarn: Antron! Legacy nylon with DuraTech Soil Protection by Invista 

g. Dye System: Yarn dyed 

h. Fiber Technology: Duracolor" by Lees Stain Resistant System. 

i. Face Yarn Weight: 26 oz/sq. yd. 

j. Backing Materials: Unibond" by LEES 

k. Size: 12 feet width. 

B. Flammability: 

1. ASTM E-662 NBS. 

2. Smoke Density: 450 or less, ASTM E-648 Direct: Critical Radiant Flux - Class I - 

0.45 watts/cm2 or greater. Comply with Flammable Fabrics Act. 

C. Tuft Bind: ASTM D-1335, 20 lbs. 

D. Light Fastness: AACTCC test method 16E-1976, Shade change after 80 standard fading 


CARPET 09680 - 2

hours (Xenon Arc) shall be not less than 3. 

E. Miscellaneous: 

1. Adhesive: Water-resistant carpet adhesive of type recommended by carpet mill. 

2. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt type recommended by mill. 



A. Examine all subsurfaces to receive work and report, in writing to the Owner and/or 

Construction Manager, any conditions detrimental to the work. Failure to observe this 

injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to the contrary. Commencement of 

work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces. 

B. Do not install carpet over concrete with either excessive moisture or dust producing surface 

which is not adequately sealed. 

3.02 GENERAL 

A. Prepare subsurfaces, layout, trim, seam, stretch, tuck, and provide all necessary operations 

required for a complete installation. 

B. Surfaces to receive carpet shall be damp mopped, clean and dry. 

C. Allow installation a minimum of 24 hours to cure before subjecting it to any traffic, moving of 

furniture, or other heavy equipment. 

3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Clear away debris, cementitious deposits, and similar obstructions or substances. Fill cracks 

and voids including honeycombed concrete. 

B. Sequence carpeting installation with other work in a manner which will minimize possibility of 

damage or deterioration to carpeting, and yet not delay completion of the project. 

C. Clean surfaces to be carpeted immediately prior to installation of carpeting materials, by 

vacuum cleaning and damp mopping. 

D. Dimensions: Prior to start of carpet installation, check critical dimensions of space to be 

carpeted, to ensure that planned use of materials will fulfill requirements, including locations 

for seams, joints and edgings. 

E. Areas scheduled to receive carpeting shall be heated to 70 degrees F. or above for not less 

than 24 hours prior to carpet installation. Maintain temperatures for the full duration of the 

installation period. 


A. Comply with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Place seams in directions 

indicated and as accepted in prior submittals. Maintain direction of pattern and texture, 

including lay of pile. Do no seam weft to warp, except as specifically indicated for a direction 

change. 

B. Extend carpet under open-bottomed and raised-bottom obstructions, and under removable 


CARPET 09680 - 3

flanges of obstructions. Extend carpet under movable furniture and equipment, unless 


C. Install carpet edge guard at locations where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic or where floor 

covering materials change, except where another device, such as an expansion joint or 

threshold is indicated, with integral carpet binder bar or edge guard. Anchor edge guard to 

substrate. 



B. Provide the Owner with a manual of instructions for proper care and cleaning of carpet. 

C. Remove spots, smears, stains, etc., immediately with a material recommended by carpet 

installation. 

D. After installation, sweep and vacuum carpet surfaces clean of all foreign material. Neatly 

apply minimum 4 mil thick polyethylene film, firmly fastened to carpet surfaces that are subject 

to construction traffic. 

E. Remnants: At direction of Architect, leave remnants, of sizes indicated, in possession of 

Owner. 



CARPET 09680 - 4

SECTION 09900 - PAINTING 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Supply and apply all painting work as specified on the drawings and included in this section. 

B. Mechanical and plumbing identification shall be by Division 15. 

C. Section includes painting work, interior and exterior. Work Includes, but is not limited to 

painting the following: 

1. Exterior steel including, but not limited to steel lintels and railings. 

2. Metal doors and door frames, including metal glazing stops. 

3. Removable mullions. 

4. Exterior metal mechanical units. 

5. Interior walls and ceilings. 

6. Interior steel rails and miscellaneous metal. 

7. Exposed structural steel. 

8. Exterior exposed metal flashing. 

9. Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including 

color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, plug mold, electric 

panels, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and 

electrical work, except as otherwise indicated. Field painting of a roof mounted 

mechanical units is part of this section. Field painting includes: 

a. Return air louvers. 

D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 3 Section “Concrete Work” for sealed concrete. 

2. Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry” for interior and exterior brick sealer. 

3. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for bollards, pipe railings, steel lintels and 

other miscellaneous metals. 

4. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for field painted metal doors and 

frames. 

5. Division 8 Section “Wood Doors” for field painted stops in wood doors. 

1.02 SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED 

A. Any gypsum wallboard permanently concealed from view. 

B. Any factory finished paneling, equipment and other materials with a complete factory applied 

finish, except where otherwise noted. 

C. Finish hardware, except where primed for paint finish. 

D. Factory finished wood doors. 

E. Non ferrous metals, unless specifically noted otherwise. 

F. Lighting fixtures, except as noted on the drawings or specified. 

G. Any acoustical surfaces, unless noted otherwise. 

H. Any glass, plastics, vinyl floor, ceramic tiles and top set base. 


PAINTING 09900 - 1

I. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and 

electrical pads, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, and sensing 

devices. Do not paint motor and fan shafts. 

J. Code-required labels, such as Underwriters’ Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any 

equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 

1.03 SAMPLES 

A. Submit samples of all types of finish specified herein. 

1. Before work is begun, Architect shall furnish a color schedule from manufacturer’s 

standard and specially requested color mixes. 

2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical information including Paint label 

analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 

a. On 12” x 12” hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material, with 

texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by 

Architect until acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved. 

b. On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components, 

duplicate painted surfaces and other exterior and interior building 

components, on at least 100 sq. ft. Of surface, or as directed, until required 

sheen, color and texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for 

review of in-place work. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples 

applied on the job. 


A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same 

manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only 

within recommended limits. 

B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are 

to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon 

request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for 

use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. 


A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing 

manufacturer’s name and label, and following information: 

1. Name or title of material. 

2. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture. 


4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 

5. Thinning instructions. 

6. Application instructions. 

7. Color name and number. 

B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in 

storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

1. Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove 

oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work 

areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from 

handling, mixing and application of paints. 


PAINTING 09900 - 2


A. Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air 

temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg. F, unless otherwise permitted by paint 

manufacturer’s printed instructions. 

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and 

surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg. F, unless otherwise permitted by 

paint manufacturer’s printed instructions. 

C. Do not paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or 

wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s printed instructions. 

1. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be 

painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint 

manufacturer during application and drying periods. 

D. Determine moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests using a 

commercially available moisture meter. Apply paint only when surfaces are within limits 

specified by the paint manufacturer’s printed instructions. 





1. Kwal 

2. Pittsburgh Paints 

3. Pratt and Lambert 

4. Fuller O’Brien 

5. Sherwin Williams 

6. Benjamin Moore 


A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly 

manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying 

manufacturer’s identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. 

B. Proprietary names used to designate color or materials are not intended to imply that products 

of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other 


C. Federal Specifications establish minimum acceptable quality for paint materials. Provide 

written certification from paint manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these 

minimums. 

D. Manufacturer’s products which comply with coating qualitative requirements of applicable 

Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use 

when acceptable to Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer’s certificate of 

performance to Architect for any proposed substitutions. 

E. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. 


PAINTING 09900 - 3

F. Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.06% lead, as lead metal 

based on the total non-volatile (dry-film) of paint by weight. 

1. This limitation is extended to interior surfaces and those exterior surfaces, such as 

stairs, decks, porches, railings, windows, and doors which are readily accessible to 

children under seven years of age. 

2.03 PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Sherwin- 

Williams products are listed below to indicate paint system types, and to establish minimum 

requirements, but are not intended to limit the choice of manufacturers. 

1. Interior Gypsum Board. 

a. 1 st coat: PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, B28W200 (4 mils wet, 1.2 mils 

dry) 

b. 2 nd coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20W200 

c. 3 rd coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20W200 Series 

(4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat) 

2. Interior Concrete and Concrete Masonry Walls 

a. 1st coat: PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 (16 mils wet, 8 mils dry) 

b. 2nd coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20W200 

c. 3rd coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20W200 Series 


3. Interior Miscellaneous Ferrous Metal (Doors, H.M. jambs, exposed pipe, machinery, 

etc.) 

a. 1 st coat: Kem Kromik Universal Primer, B50Z Series (6 mils wet, 3 

mils dry) 

b. 2 nd coat ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34W200 

c. 3 rd coat: ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34W200 Series 


4. Exterior Ferrous Metal 

a. 1 st coat: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer, B50Z Series (6 mils 

wet, 3 mils dry) 

b. 2 nd coat Industrial Enamel, B54Z Series 

c. 3 rd coat: Industrial Enamel, B54Z Series 

(4 mils wet, 2 mils dry per coat) 

5. Galvanized Ferrous Metal 

a. 1 st coat: Galvite HS, B50WZ30 (7 mils wet, 4.5 mils dry) 

b. 2 nd coat: Industrial Enamel, B54Z Series 

c. 3 rd coat: Industrial Enamel, B54Z Series (4 mils wet, 2 mils dry per 

coat) 

6. Metal Roof Deck (primed) 

a. 1 st coat: Super Save Lite Dryfall 

b. 2 nd coat: Super Save Lite Dryfall 



A Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and 

notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. 

Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correct in a manner 

acceptable to Applicator. 

B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator’s acceptance of surfaces and 


PAINTING 09900 - 4

conditions within any particular area. 

C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise 

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 


A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint 

manufacturer’s instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. 

B. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify 

Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with 

substrates primed by others. 

C. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and 

similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior 

to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of 

items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall 

removed items. 

D. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and 

grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants 

from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. 

E. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces to be painted by removing 

efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 

1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing 

appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering 

and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not 

paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s 

printed directions. 

2. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution or 

muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid, 

and allow to dry before painting. 

F. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, 

grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 

1. Caulk fabrication joints in hollow metal door frames which paint application cannot 

bridge. 

G. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other 

sections of these specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer. 

H. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based 

solvent. 

I. Materials Preparation: 

1. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. 

2. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free 

of foreign materials and residue. 

3. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as 

required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if 

necessary, strain material before using. 

3.03 APPLICATION 


PAINTING 09900 - 5

A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Use applicators and 

techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated in “schedules” of the 

contract documents. 

2. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. 

3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final 

coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special 

attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and 

exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 

4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed 

surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime 

coat only before final installation of equipment. 

5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, 

non-specular black paint. 

6. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed 

surfaces. 

7. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

8. Paint entire acoustical panel ceiling above platform with a flat black paint. 

8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 

9. Omit first coat (exterior faces of surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up 

painted, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated 

or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before 

subsequent surface deterioration. 

1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not 

recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firms, does not deform or feel sticky under 

moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause 

lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. 

2. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer’s 

recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if 

not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer. 

C. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those 

items exposed to mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. 

1. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 

b. Roof mounted mechanical units. 

c. Ductwork, where exposed in occupied spaces. 

d. Motor, mechanical equipment and supports. 

e. Accessory items. 

2. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Conduit and fittings. 

3. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical subcontractors so that painting is 

completed before cover plates, controls, light fixtures and other devices are installed 

in or on painted walls and ceilings. 

D. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and 

which has not been prime coated by others. 

1. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or 

unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other 

defects due to insufficient sealing. 


PAINTING 09900 - 6

E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of 

uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush 

marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish 

or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 


A. The right is reserved by Owner to invoke the following material testing procedure at any time, 

and any number of times during period of field painting: 

1. Owner will engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint 

being used. Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and 

sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 

a. Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for any or all of following 

characteristics: Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, 

washability, absorption, accelerated weathering, dry opacity, accelerated 

yellowness, recoating, skinning, color retention, alkali resistance and 

quantitative materials analysis. 

b. If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified 

requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove 

non-complying paint; pay for testing; repaint surfaces coated with rejected 

paint; remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon 

repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are non-compatible. 

3.05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION 

A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans 

and rags at end of each work day. 

1. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered 

surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using 

care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. 

B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by 

painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and 

repainting, as acceptable to Architect. 

1. Provide “Wet Paint” signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove 

temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after 

completion of painting operations. 

2. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced 

painted surfaces. 

C. Extra Stock: Deliver stock or maintenance materials to Owner. Furnish maintenance material 

matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with 

appropriate labels. 

1. Paint: Furnish not less than one (1) full gallon for each color and type of paint 

installed. 

3.06 COLOR SCHEDULE 

A. General: Paint colors indicated below are from Sherwin Williams to indicate the scope of work, 

and are subject to change or to be otherwise revised to provide similar colors from other 

manufacturers. It is not the intent by providing these colors to restrict manufacturers or to 

require custom matching of colors. 


PAINTING 09900 - 7

B. Wall and Ceiling Paint Color: SW 7106 Honied White 

C. Accent Wall Paint Color: Provide an accent paint color on the walls indicated from the 

following colors. All colors will be used, room locations for each to be determined by Architect. 

1. Accent Paint 1: SW 6415 Hearts of Palm (green) 

2. Accent Paint 2: SW 6675 Afternoon (yellow) 

3. Accent Paint 3: SW 6521 Notable Hue (blue. 

4. Accent Paint 4: SW 6647 Exciting Orange (orange). 

D. Hollow Metal Paint Colors: Colors for hollow metal door and window frames may be selected 

from the following colors. Color will correspond to the accent wall color: 

1. HM Accent 1: SW 6418 Rural Green (green). 

2. HM Accent 2: SW 6677 Goldenrod (yellow). 

3. HM Accent 3: SW 6524 Commodore (blue). 

4. HM Accent 4: SW 6650 Marquis Orange (orange). 



PAINTING 09900 - 8

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 

Section 10100 – Visual Display Boards 

Section 10170 – Solid Phenolic Plastic Toilet Compartments 

Section 10350 – Flagpoles 

Section 10425 – Signage 

Section 10520 – Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories 

Section 10800 – Toilet and Bath Accessories 



SECTION 10100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of visual display boards: 

1. Markerboards. 

2. Tackboards. 

3. Continuous tack strips. 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of the Contract and Division I 


B. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall indicate location and actual material lengths of each unit. 

Room elevations shall indicate joint locations and include dimension from floor and adjacent 

sidewalls, cross-sections for trim, backing, face and core materials, fastener spacing and 

types of units provided. 

C. Samples: Provide samples for each of the following: 

1. Face sheet materials. 

2. Cork materials. 

3. Vinyl materials. 

4. Aluminum trim. 

5. Anchoring devices and accessories. 

6. Tackboards and Continuous Tack Strips: Manufacturer's color samples showing the 

full range of vinyl fabric available. 


A. Uniformity of color, corrosion, temperature, alkali, water, range of gloss test, uniform texture, 

light reflectance and cleanability are requirements for all groups and have specific ranges for 

each. 

B. Reflectivity of P.3 ceramicsteel markerboard writing surfaces shall not exceed the following: 

1. P3 ceramicsteel Markerboard - 87-95% (high gloss surface) 

C. P3 ceramicsteel- writing surfaces - Surface Distortion reduction to performance 

characteristics. 

D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide vinyl-fabric faced cork tackboards with surface 

burning characteristics indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials 

composed of facings and backings identical to those required in this section, in accordance 

with ASTM E 84, by a testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 

2. Smoke Developed: 10 or less. 


VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1


A. All pre-framed units shall be stored vertically and with packing materials between each to 

prevent damage. 

B. Cover all units to prevent damage and dirt accumulation. 


A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure 

proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication 

schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. 

B. Store materials in dry areas and above temperatures above 55 deg. F. 

C. General contractor to maintain proper environment prior to, during, and after installation. 

D. Adhesives are to be used with adequate ventilation. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Warranty: "PolyVision Forever Warranty on communication products and surfaces. This 

warranty is unconditional under normal usage. If the surface fails, PolyVision agrees to repair 

or replace the ceramicsteel writing surface. 

B. Tackboard: Furnish manufacturer's standard written warranty. 



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the 

following: 

1. Markerboards: 

a. Polyvision 100 Series P3 High Gloss, clear anodized finish. 

(1) White only. 

b. Or Owner approved equal. 

2. Tackboards: 

a. Polyvision 

b. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co. 

c. ADP Lemco Corporation. 

d. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 

3. Continuous Tack Strips: 

a. Polyvision 

b. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co. 

c. Lemco Corporation. 

d. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 


A. Markerboards: Shall be enameling grade cold rolled steel 0.13" thickness for all preframed 

boards without joints. Any boards that include spline joints shall be 0.19" thick. Manufacturer 

shall offer all of the following items as standard to the Owner. 



1. P3 ceramicsteel markerboard with improved writing and erasing surface. 

2. Face Sheet Construction: 

a. 1.7-2.5 mils enameled ground coat on face minimum thickness. 

b. 3.0-4.0 mils enameled cover (color) coat for markerboard. 

c. 1.7-2.5 mils enameled mininum ground coat on back of facing. 

d. Firing temperatures shall be 1475 deg. - 1500 deg. min. for markerboard. 

3. Core: 

a. Provide 1/2" thick particleboard. (Units 16'0" width and greater will require 

routed steel splined joint). 

b. Provide 1/4" thick hardboard only in areas where replacement panels are 

furnished and the thickness of existing grounds or conditions will not permit 

1/2" thick particleboard. 

4. Moisture backer shall be factory laminated to core material. Aluminum .015 backer 

shall be provided standard on all units with routed steel spline joints. 

5. Perimeter trim shall be minimum .062” thick securely fastened with resin coated 

staples at the rear of the unit and with no exposed fasteners. Trim shall be C-4 and 

include wrap around safety corners mitered to a hairline joint. 

6. Markerboard tray: CRC-2B solid aluminum with 3/4" radius corners. 

a. Extend the pen/chalk tray the entire length of each markerboard or 

marker/tack board when these boards are shown side by side. 

7. Display Rail: 2" wide. 

a. Natural cork with vinyl covering shall be 1/4" in thickness and a minimum 15 

pounds per cubic foot density laminated to 15 oz. per lineal yard to match 

tackboards installed inclusive with boards. 

8. Accessories: 

a. Where the size of boards or other conditions exist that require support in 

addition to the normal trim, provide structural supports or modify the trim as 

indicated or as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard 

structural support accessories to suit the condition indicated. 

b. Maphooks (min. four (4) per markerboard). 

c. Maprail end stops (one pair per display rail). 

9. Attachment Devices: 

a. Adjustable slotted wall brackets (zinc plated). 

10. Lamination: 

a. Specially formulated adhesives. 

B. TACKBOARDS 

1. Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Cork Tackboards: Provide mildew-resistant, washable, vinyl fabric 

complying with FS CCC-W-408, Type lI, weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd., 

laminated to 1/4-inch- thick cork sheet. Provide fabric that has a flame spread rating 

of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Provide color and texture 

as scheduled or as selected from the manufacturer's standards. 

a. Backing: Make panels rigid by factory laminating cork face sheet under 

pressure to 3/8-inch-thick fiberboard backing. Color as selected by Architect. 

C. CONTINUOUS TACK STRIPS 

1. Continuous Tack Strips: Provide tackable fabric-covered strips in size as detailed on 

drawings. Fabric to be mildew-resistant, washable, vinyl fabric complying with FS 

CCC-W-408, Type II, weighing not less than 15 oz./sq, yd., laminated to 1/4-inchthick 

cork sheet. Provide fabric that has a flame spread rating of 25 or less when 

tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Provide color and texture as scheduled or as 

selected from the manufacturer's standards. 

a. Color as selected by Architect. 




A. INSTALLATION 

1. Provide factory-trained installers. 

2. Apply manufacturers' adhesive behind each board using egg-sized gobs 16" o.c. 

3. Locate accessories on each board as specified. Provide mitered and wrapped 

hairline joints for all trims. Provide fasteners at perimeter trims 16" - 24” and 12" - 16" 

on trays. 

a. Mounting heights from the floor: Refer to drawings. 

4. Install continuous tack strips at height and location shown on drawings. Glue to wall 

with proper adhesive recommended by manufacturer. 

5. Coordinate job-site assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts 

with a neat, precision fit. 

B. ADJUST AND CLEAN 

1. Clean boards using manufacturers' recommended procedures and install cleaning 

labels for each room. 

2. General contractor shall cover and protect all boards after installation and cleaning. 




SECTION 10170 - SOLID PHENOLIC PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 





1.02 SUMMARY 


1. Toilet Compartments. 

2. Urinal Screens. 

B. Related Sections: The following Section contains requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place-Concrete" for support of floor anchored 

compartments. 

1.03 REFERENCES: 

A. National Fire Protection Association 101 Life Safety Code 1991 Edition. Chapters 5, 6, 8-30. 

B. ANSI A117.1-2003 Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and 

Useable by Physically Handicapped People. 

C. International Building Code, 2006 edition, Chapter 11 

D. ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, Federal Register Volume 56, 

Number 144, Rules and Regulations. 


A. Partitions: 

l. Solid phenolic core, high pressure melamine sparkle finish surface made as an 

integral part of the core. Edges to be black in color, unless noted with radius or 

beveled edge. Laminated surfaces are not acceptable. 

2. Approved Manufacturers: 

a. Bobrick. 

b. Metpar. 

c. Sanymetal. 

d. Global Steel 

e. Or approved equal prior to bidding. 

3. Compartments shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 

4. Manufacturer's must comply with this specification completely. 


A. Comply with requirements of Section regarding submittals. 

B. Manufacturer's Data: 

1. Provide required number. copies of: 

a. Product data sheets, including written independent testing laboratory 

certification for National Fire Protection Association Class A. 


SOLID PHENOLIC PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10170 - 1

. Installation instructions. 

c. Replacement parts information. 

C. Shop Drawings: 

1. Provide required number of copies of all shop drawings. 

2. Show fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies, to extent not fully 

described by manufacturer's data sheets. 

3. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes. 

4. Provide location drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for 

attachment of compartments. 

D. Samples: 

l. Furnish scale model of compartments, including stile, shoe, door, door hardware, 

divider panel, and mounting brackets prior to bidding. 

2. Furnish sections showing stile anchoring and leveling devices, through-bolting, panel 

and stile construction and edge construction. 

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. 

B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage, or wetting. 

C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Furnish 10 year warranty for panels, doors and stiles against breakage, corrosion, 

delamination, and defects in factory workmanship. 

B. Furnish 12 year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for stainless steel 

door hardware and mounting brackets. 

C. Furnish 12 year guarantee for installation. 


2.01 CONFIGURATIONS 

A. Submit certification that product specified meets the requirements for Class "A" or "B" flame 

spread rating calculated according to ASTM E-8491 A. 

1. Toilet Compartments shall be: 

a. Floor-Anchored, Overhead Braced (Super HD-12 Series). 

2. Urinal Screens shall be: 

a. Wall Hung with Continuous Wall Bracket and Floor Mounted Post. (Super 

HD-12 Series). 

2.02 COMPONENTS / MATERIALS 

A. Stiles, Panels, Doors, and Screens: 

l. Solid phenolic material with high pressure matte finish melamine surfaces fused to 

core. Edges shall be black. Brown edges shall not be acceptable. 



a. Color and pattern as selected by architect from standard colors or from 

approved equals. 

2. Finish Thickness: 

a. Doors shall be 3/4". 

b. Panels shall be 1/2". 

c. Pilasters shall be 3/4". 

B. Hardware: 

1. All hardware to be Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel. 

2. All hardware shall be concealed inside compartments with the exception of outswinging 

doors. 

3. To include vandal resistant through-bolt mounting screws throughout. 

4. Hardware of chrome plated "Zamac" is unacceptable. 

C. Latch: 

1. Sliding door latch shall be Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel surface mounted. 

2. Sliding door latch shall require less than 5 lb. force to operate. Twisting latch 

operation will not be acceptable. 

3. Latch track shall be attached to door by theft resistant stainless steel through-bolts. 

4. Latch shall allow door to be lifted over Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel keeper for 

emergency access. 

5. Metal to metal connection shall withstand a direct pull of over 1000 lbs. per screw. 

6. Strike shall be Heavy Duty Cast Stainless Steel surface mounted with integral rubber 

bumper door stop. Surface mounted and through bolted to partition. 

D. Hinges: 

1. Hinge shall be 16-gauge continuous piano hinge with 3/16" pin. 

2. Outswinging and inswing door shall be equipped with self-closing 16-gauge 

continuous piano hinge. 

3. Continuous piano hinge shall be attached to door and stile by theft-resistant, 

stainless steel through-bolts from inside and outside of compartments. 

E. Coat Hook: Heavy Duty, Cast Stainless Steel coat hook shall project no more than 1-1/8" 

from face of door and shall be secured by theft resistant through-bolt stainless steel screws. 

Provide on all doors. 

F. Door stop: Stainless steel with rubber-tipped bumper. 

G. Continuous Brackets: Full high extruded aluminum 6063-T5 bright anodized finish min. 1.685 

lbs. per LF, of size (thickness) to match pilasters and/or panels. Shall be mounted inside 

compartment. Use for each pilaster to wall connections, pilaster to panel, and panel to wall 

connections. 

H. Leveling device: 3/8" x 1" steel bar shall be chromate treated and double zinc plated; bolted 

to base of solid phenolic stile. 

I. Stile shoe: One piece, 4" high, type 304, 18gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Top shall 

have 90 degrees return to stile, attached with stainless steel through-bolts. 

J. Headrail (Overhead braced): Heavy Duty extruded clear anodized aluminum continuous 

headrail with anti-grip profile and integral reinforcing channel and curtain track. 




A. All hardware through bolted to door and stile with theft-resistant, two-way bolt and barrel, 

stainless steel machine screws. 



A. Check areas scheduled to receive compartments for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls 

and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets. 

B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of compartments. 

C. Do not begin installation of compartments until conditions are satisfactory. 

3.02 ERECTION 

A. General: 

1. Install- compartments rigidly, straight, plumb, and level and in accordance with 

manufacturer's installation instructions. 

2. Installation methods shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations for backing 

and proper support. 

3. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish. 

4. Maintain uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors. 

3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING 

A. Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation. 

B. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 15 degrees from closed 

position when unlatched. 

C. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to hold unlatched doors in closed position. 

D. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings. 




SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes: 

1. Ground-Set, Fixed, Cone Tapered Flagpoles: 

1. Aluminum. 




B. Product data and installation instructions for each type of flagpole required. 

C. Shop drawings of flagpoles and bases, showing general layout, jointing, grounding method, 

and anchoring and supporting systems. 

1. Include details of foundation system for ground-set poles. 

D. Samples of each finished metal for flagpoles and accessories as requested by Architect. 


A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by a single 

manufacturer, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices. 

B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpoles and installations constructed to withstand a 90-mph wind 

velocity minimum when flying flag of appropriate size. Use heavy pipe sizes if required for 

flagpole type and height shown. 

C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if possible. If more than one 

piece is necessary, provide snug-fitting, precision joints with self-aligning, internal splicing 

sleeve arrangement for weather-tight, hairline field joints. 


A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy Kraft paper or other weather-tight wrapping and 

prepare for shipment in hard fiber tube or other protective container. 

B. Deliver flagpoles and accessories completely identified for installation procedure. Handle and 

store flagpoles to prevent damage or soiling. 




FLAGPOLES 10350 - 1


products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. American Flagpole Div. of Kearney-National, Inc. 

2. Concord Industries, Inc.: Executive Model 

3. EMC Div., Eder Manufacturing Corp. 

2.2 FLAGPOLE TYPES 

A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Fabricate from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241, 

alloy 6063-T6, having a minimum wall thickness of 0.188”, tensile strength not less than 

30,000 psi, and a yield point of 25,000 psi. Heat-treat and age-harden after fabrication. 

1. Provide cone-tapered, internal cam cleat aluminum flagpole. 

2. Height (measured from grade): 35 feet. 

3. Butt Diameter: 7 inches. 

2.3 FLAGPOLE MOUNTING 

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard base system for the type of flagpole installation required. 

B. Foundation Tube: For ground-set flagpoles, provide 16-gage minimum galvanized corrugated 

steel tube, or 12-gage rolled steel tube, sized to suit flagpole and installation. Furnish 

complete with welded steel bottom base and support plate, lightning ground spike, and steel 

centering wedges, all welded construction. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top for 

plumbing pole after erection. Galvanize steel parts after assembly, including foundation tube. 

1. Provide manufacturer’s standard flash collar, finished to match flagpole. 

2.4 SHAFT FINISH 

A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to 

application and designations of finishes. 

B. Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to the Aluminum Association system 

for designating aluminum finishes. Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32), 

finished as follows: 

1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; 

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear 

coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1. 

2.5 FITTINGS 

A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer’s standard flush-seam ball, size as indicated or, if not indicated, to 

match pole butt diameter. 

1. 14-gage spun aluminum finished to match pole shaft. 

B. Truck: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving, cast aluminum with aluminum spindle and 

removable hood. Finish to match pole. 

C. Cleats: Provide flush access door with compression lock, continuous piano hinge and 

manually operated cam cleat 

D. Halyards: Provide two, external continuous halyards for each flagpole, as follows: 

1. Polypropylene, braided, white. 

2. Size: 5/16 inch (No. 10). 


FLAGPOLES 10350 - 2

E. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two swivel snaps per halyard, as follows: 

1. Chromium-plated bronze. 


3.1 PREPARATION FOR GROUND-SET POLES 

A. Excavation: Excavate for foundation concrete to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Provide 

forms where required due to unstable soil conditions. Remove wood, loose soil, rubbish, and 

other foreign matter from excavation; and moisten earth before placing concrete. Back fill 

open excavation after concreting with original excavated material. 

B. Concrete: Provide concrete composed of portland cement, coarse and fine aggregate, and 

water mixed in proportions to attain 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi, 

complying with ASTM C 94. 

C. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by use of vibrators. 

Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than 7 days, or use a nonstaining curing compound 

in cold weather. 

D. Finish trowel exposed concrete surfaces to smooth, dense surface. Provide positive slope for 

water runoff to base perimeter. 

3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION 

A. General: Prepare and install flagpoles where shown and in compliance with accepted shop 

drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. 

1. Provide positive lightning ground for each flagpole installation. 

2. Paint below-grade portions of ground-set flagpole with heavy coat of bituminous 

paint. 

3.3 CLEANUP 




FLAGPOLES 10350 - 3


FLAGPOLES 10350 - 4

SECTION 10425 - SIGNAGE 





1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 

1. Panel signs. 

a. Interior room identification signs. 

b. Handicap accessibility signage. 

2. Dimensional letters and numbers. 

3. This section also includes removal of existing classroom signs. 


A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 


B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to 

materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. 

C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and 

large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, 

layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 

1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording 

and lettering layout. 

2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting 

drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors 

to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 

3. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional 

letters and numbers. 

4. Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques. 

D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, 

pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements 

indicated. 

1. Samples for selection of color, pattern, and texture: 

a. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturers color charts 

consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors 

available for each material required. 


A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated 

for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production 

capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. 

B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one 


SIGNAGE 10425 - 1

source of a single manufacturer. 

C. Handicapped Accessibility: Provide signs which are in conformance with the requirements of 

ANSI Al 17.1-1992 and the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). 

D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of 

signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other 

manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not 

change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on 

the proposer. 


A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and 

fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 

Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. 




products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs: 

a. ABC Architectural Signing System. 

b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 

c. Best Manufacturing Company. 

d. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. 

2. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters and Numbers: 

a. Andco Industries Corp. 

b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 

c. Gemini, Inc. 

d. Metal Arts. 

e. Metallic Arts. 

f. Spanjer Brothers Inc. 


A. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate 

monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength 

of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous 

service temperature of 1 76 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following general types: 

1. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as opaque,provide colored opaque 

acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer s standards. 

B. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for 

copy and background colors that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum 

adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for the application intended. 

C. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum casting of alloy and temper recommended by the sign 

manufacturere for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated. 

D. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign 

material and mounting surface. 


SIGNAGE 10425 - 2

E. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for 

exterior installations and elsewhere as required fro corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or 

lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be 

set into concrete or masonry work. 

2.03 PANEL SIGNS 

A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, 

designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 

1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under 

installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured 

diagonally. 

B. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to 

conform to the following requirements: 

1. Edge Condition: Square cut. 

2. Corner Condition: Round corners. 

C. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated 

for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, 

and other graphic devices. 

1. Size: 1.5 inches. 

2. Style: Helvetica Regular. 

3. Color: As selected by Architect. 

4. Copy Placement: Center. 

5. Provide one wall mounted sign per door or opening. 

a. Provide signs with permanent ADA text. 

b. At toilet rooms, include the handicap accessible symbol on each sign. 

6. Provide maximum occupancy load signs in assembly rooms as required by code. 

a. Letter Size: 1 inch. 

D. Raised Copy: Machine-cut copy characters from matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet and 

chemically weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely formed 

characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 

1. Panel Material: Matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet. 

a. Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. 

2.04 DIMENSIONAL NUMBERS AND LETTERS 

A. Cutout Letters and Numbers: Cut from solid plate material of thickness indicated. Produce 

precisely cut characters with square cut, smooth edges. Comply with requirements indicated 

for finish, style and size. 

1. Metal: Aluminum, not less than 0.090 inch thick. 

2. Height: Refer to schedule below. 

3. Style: Univers. 

4. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s colors. 

5. Verify location with Architect prior to installation. 

2.05 FINISHES 

A. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and 

application recommendations. 


SIGNAGE 10425 - 3

B. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to the system established 

by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

1. Class 1 Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 or, 

2. Baked Enamel Finish: AA-M4xC12C42R1x. Apply baked enamel in compliance with 

paint manufacturer’s specifications for cleaning, conversion coating and painting. 



A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the 

type described and in compliance with the manufacturer s instructions. 

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from 

distortion or other defects in appearance. 

2. Where no location is indicated, locate as directed by Architect. 

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated 

below: 

1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign 

manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use 

double-sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the 

sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured. 

C. Remove existing classroom signs including any adhesives and clean wall. Install new signs 

as scheduled below. 

D. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening 

methods recommended by the manufacturer for number form, type of mounting, wall 

construction and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish 

number spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 

1. Projected Mounting: Mount letters and numbers one-half inch from the surface of the 

wall. 


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer s instructions. 

Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 

3.03 SIGN SCHEDULE 

A. Provide signs of the size and quantity indicated below. Classroom numbers to be determined. 

Designation/Room Size Quantity Message Type 

A / Classrooms 8” x 8” 12 CLASSROOM 1?? Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

B / Boys 8” x 8” 1 BOYS Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

C / Girls 8” x 8” 1 GIRLS Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

D / Men 8” x 8” 1 MEN (+Symbol) Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

E / Women 8” x 8” 1 MEN (+Symbol) Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

F / Unisex 8” x 8” 1 Man/Woman Symbol Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

G / Teacher’s Lounge 8” x 8” 3 FACULTY Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

H / MDF 8” x 8” 1 IDF ROOM Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

J / Teacher’s Workroom 8” x 8” 4 WORKROOM Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

K / Office (Main Office) 8” x 8” 2 OFFICE Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 


SIGNAGE 10425 - 4

L / Principal 8” x 8” 1 PRINCIPAL Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

M / Storage 8” x 8” 2 STORAGE Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

N / Nurse 8” x 8” 1 NURSE Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

P / TSA 8” x 8” 1 TSA Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

Q / Conference 8” x 8” 1 CONFERENCE Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

R / Mechanical 8” x 8” 1 MECHANICAL Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

S / Fire Riser 8” x 8” 1 Fire Riser Wall Mounted Alum. Panel 

T / Multipurpose Room 8” x 8” 2 MULTIPURPOSE ROOM Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

U / Custodian 8” x 8” 1 CUSTODIAN Wall Mounted Acrylic Panel 

B. Provide cast metal signage as follows mounted (and centered) on the masonry beam at the 

main entry: 

1. In twelve inch (12”) high letters: SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

2. In ten inch (10”) high letters: 550 



SIGNAGE 10425 - 5


SIGNAGE 10425 - 6

SECTION 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes fire extinguishers, mounting brackets and cabinets as shown on the 

drawings and as specified herein. 





A. Type of products in this section include: 

1. Fire Extinguishers. 

2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. 

3. Fire Extinguisher Mounting Brackets. 


A. UL Listed Products: Provide new, portable fire extinguishers which are UL listed and bear UL 

"Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated. 


A. Submit product date in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 

Sections. 

B. Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets 

with mounted measurements, and anchorage details. 

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 

1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data. 

B. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re-certification requirements 

including requirements applicable to the work. 

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. 





1. J.L. Industries 


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10520 - 1

2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 

3. Potter-Roemer, Inc. 

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers which comply with requirements of governing authorities. 

Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and 

manufacturer's requirement. 

B. Type: Multipurpose Dry Chemical: UL rated 4-A: 80-BC, 10-lb. nominal capacity, in 

enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B, and Class C fires. 

1. Provide: Cosmic 10E by J.L. Industries, or equivalent model by other manufacturers. 

2.03 MOUNTING BRACKETS 

A. Provide manufacturer's standard mounting brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement 

of extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in manufacturer's 

standard plated finish. 

2.04 EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 

A. Provide cabinets suitable to house (1) 10 pound extinguisher. 

B. Provide “Cosmopolitan” series Model No. 1037 cabinet as manufactured by J.L. Industries or 

equal product from other manufacturers. 

1. Door: ‘V’ Style with 4 satin stainless steel frame and door. 

a. Glass: Clear tempered. 

2. Heavy gauge rolled edge construction, four corners welded, ground and buffed smooth, 

on a 2-1/2" return trim. 

3. Provide semi-recessed cabinets. Semi recessed cabinets shall comply with projection 

into walkway requirement of ANSI 117.1 and applicable ADA requirements. 



A. Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not 

indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 

B. Securely fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with 

manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Provide one extinguisher at location indicated on drawings, or if not shown, locate as directed 

by Architect. 


A. Identify fire extinguisher with lettering spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" on sign attached to 

structure adjacent to the extinguisher. Provide lettering as selected by Architect and/or Fire 

Marshal from manufacturer's standard letter sizes, styles, colors, and layouts. 



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10520 - 2

SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes toilet room and janitor room accessories as shown on drawings and as 

specified herein. 

B Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 



A. Toilet accessories required for this work are limited to items specified in this section. 

B. Contractor shall provide solid backing and blocking as required for provided items including: 

1. Electric Hand Dryers 

2. Handicap Grab Bars 

3. Mirrors 

4. Mop and Broom Holders 

C. Owner Finished Contractor Installed Items: The following items will be provided by the Owner 

and Installed by the Contractor: 

1. Towel Dispensers 

2. Soap Dispensers 

3. Toilet Paper Dispensers 


A. The following are specified in other sections of these Specifications. Cooperate as required 

with all other trades to ensure proper and adequate provisions for the installation of toilet 

accessories: 

1. Backing and Blocking: Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry.” 

2. Toilet Compartments: Division 10 Section “Solid Phenolic Plastic toilet 

Compartments.” 


A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in 

concrete or built into masonry; coordinate deliver with other work to avoid delay. 

B. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference 

and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each 

toilet accessory. 

B. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for 

installation of anchorage devices and cut-out requirements in other work. 


TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1

1.06 WARRANTY 

A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace 

any mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage within warranty period. 

B. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion for silver spoilage of mirror, 1 

year mechanical parts and accessories. 

C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other 

provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other 

warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 




toilet accessories which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the 

following: 

1. American Specialties, Inc. 

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

3. Bradley Corporation 

2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034-inch (22-gage) minimum 

thickness. 

B. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, 

Quality q2, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating. 

C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of 

galvanized steel where concealed. 


A. General: Only a maximum 1-1/2 inch diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as 

approved by the Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessory units. On either interior 

surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by either a 

printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer’s name and 

product model number. 

B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate 

units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with 

continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. 

C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of 

all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with fulllength, 

stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is 

closed. 



D. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, 

felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provided mirror backing and support 

system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture 

accumulation, as follows: 

1. Provide galvanized-steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 (22 gage) and full mirror 

size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable 

filler material. 

2. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid, 

tamperproof, and theftproof installation, as follows: 

a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with a spring-action locking 

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. 

E. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for 

servicing, supply, etc. Provide a minimum of six key to Owner’s representative. 


3.01 DELIVERIES 

A. Deliver the toilet accessories in a timely manner to ensure orderly progress of the work. 

Stockpile as necessary to ensure their availability for this work. 


A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using tamper 

resistant fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of 

unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated, or in 

accordance with requirements of handicapped codes and/or authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation, and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. 

Replace damaged or defective items. 

B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective 

coatings. 

3.04 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE 

A. Manufacturer: The following catalog numbers refer to products of Bobrick Washroom 

Equipment, Inc, except where noted otherwise. These scheduled products serve as the 

standard of quality required for the project. Provide these or comparable products from 

specified manufacturers if they meet or exceed this standard of quality. 

1. Electric Hand Dryer: B-750, recessed mounted. 

a. Color: White 

b. Motor: Universal type, 2300 W, 115V 20 Amp 60 Hz. 

c. Provide three each in the Boys and the Girls Toilet Rooms. 

d. Provide one each in other toilet rooms. 

2. Mirror: B-290 with stainless steel frame 

a. Size: 2’-0” x 3’-0”, unless noted otherwise. 

3. Stainless Steel Grab Bars: B-6806.99 (peened grip) 

a. Size: One 18”, one 36” and one 42” per accessible stall. 

4. Mop/Broom Holder: B-239x34 




a. Provide two per janitor’s closet. 



DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 

Section 11132 – Projection Screens 

Section 11451 – Appliances 



SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS 




Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this 

section. 

B. Related Sections: Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for blocking in walls. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes projection screens of the following type: 

1. Manual Projection Screens. 


A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 


B. Product data of standard details and specifications for projection screens 

C. Product data of current Camden Manufacturing control switching. 


A. Screens to be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and CSA. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering defect in materials or 

workmanship. 

1. Warranty period for ten (10) years. 


2.01 PROJECTION SCREENS 

A. Manual Projection Screen: Shall be Da-Lite, Inc., Model B, Spring Roller Type 

Screen, 70" x 70", wall mounting type, "Matte White" viewing surface with black 

masking borders standard on flame-retardant and mildew-resistant seamless fabric. 

Screen to have a heavy 22-gauge octagonal steel case with flat back design with 

baked enamel finish and fitted with end caps concealing roller ends with integral 

bearing surface to support roller and integral brackets far wall mounting by means of 

slotted screw holes. Provide No. 6, 6" non-adjustable extension brackets for 

clearance of markerboard. Bottom of fabric shall be mounted into a metal strip in a 

tubular steel slat finished in baked enamel. Ends of slat shall be protected by plastic 

caps. Plated steel slat pull shall be attached to slat with screws. 

1. Approved manufacturers: 

a. Da-Lite Inc 


PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 1



b. Draper Shade and Screen Co. 

c. Or approved equal prior to bidding. 

2. Provide one (1) screen in each classroom and elsewhere as indicated on the 

drawings. 

A. Installation: Coordinate installation with work of other trades and locate accurately. 

Install projection screens in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

B. Manual Projection Screens: Provide blocking in wall for fastening of wall brackets. 



PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 2

SECTION 11451 - APPLIANCES 





1.02 SUMMARY 


1. Refrigerator/freezer. 


1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Millwork" for appliance installation. 

2. Division 15 Section for plumbing connections to appliances. 

3. Division 15 Section for drainage plumbing connections to appliances. 

4. Division 16 Section for services and connections to appliances. 


A. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements. 

Include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. 

B. Appliance Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room designations 

shown on Drawings. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the 

appliance manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of appliances required for this 

Project. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain appliances through one source from a single manufacturer. 

1. Provide products from the same manufacturer far each type of appliance required. 

2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for 

entire Project. 

C. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of appliances that 

are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. 

E. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards: 

1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to 

ANSI/AHAM HRF-1. 

F. Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis 

(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal 

Trade Commission. 

SHELLEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLASSROOM ADDITION MARCH 2, 2009 

APPLIANCES 11451 - 1

1.05 DELIVERY 

A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete, construction in the spaces to receive 

appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation, and all dimensions have been 

field verified. If any discrepancies exist between field dimensions and appliance dimensions, 

notify architect prior to proceeding. 

1.06 WARRANTIES 

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other 

rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in 

addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements 

of the Contract Documents. 

B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance 

specified agreeing to repair or replace appliances or components that fail in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 


2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS 

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the appliances indicated 

as manufactured by General Electric or approved equal by one of the following 


1. Whirlpool 

2. Amana 

2.02 APPLIANCES 

A. Side-By-Side Refrigerator with Dispenser: GE Profile Energy Star 25.6 Cubic Feet, Model 

PSHF6TGXWW. 

1. Color: White. 

2. Provide one refrigerator in the Faculty Lounge. 



A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, 

to verify actual locations of services before appliance installation. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

2. Verify that all appliances are equipped with cord and plug, UL listed. 


A. General: Provide complete installation, per manufacturer's written instructions, so all 

appliances function as per manufacturer's recommendations. 



B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with 

concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough 

openings are completely concealed. 

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in 

each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. 

D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 15 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 


A. Test each item of appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. 

B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. 

C. Remove packing material from appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for 

operation. 






DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 


Section 12670 – Entrance Mats 




Part 1 – General 

1.01 SCOPE 

A. Requirements of Division 0 “Bidding Requirements” and Division 1 “General Requirements” 

apply to every section contained in the Project Manual, and shall govern the execution of 

Work required by the Contract Documents. 

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 

1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry.” 

2. Division 7 Section “Aluminum Storefronts and Entrances.” 

3. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.” 

1.02 REFERENCES 

A. Flame-resistant materials shall pass or exceed one or more of the following tests: 

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701 (small scale for horizontal 

applications) 

2. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302 Flammability of 

Interior Materials 

3. California Administrative Code Title 19 

4. Federal Standard 191 Method 5903 (used by Port Authority of New York and New 

Jersey for drapery, curtain, and upholstery material) 

5. Boston Fire Department Test BFD IX-1 

6. New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code 


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature shall be submitted indicating materials, 

finishes, construction and installation instructions and verifying that product meets 

requirements specified. Manufacturer’s recommendations for maintenance and cleaning shall 

be included. 

B. Drawings And Diagrams: Wiring diagrams of any motorized components or units, working 

and assembly drawings shall be supplied as requested. 

C. Sample: Responsible contracting officer or agent shall supply one sample shade of each type 

specified in this contract for approval. Supplied units shall be furnished complete with all 

required components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions and warranty. 


A. Supplier: Manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products 

specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty. 

B. Installer: Installer or agent shall be qualified to install specified products by prior experience, 

demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, or 

licensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation. 

C. Uniformity: Provide 2” Horizontal Aluminum Blinds of only one manufacturer for entire project. 


2” HORIZONTAL ALUMINUM BLINDS 12492 - 1


A. Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer’s original packaging. 

B. Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating 

mechanisms. 


A. Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed. 

B. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60° F. and 90° F. during and after 

installation; relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Lifetime Limited Warranty. Specific product warranties available from manufacturer or its 

authorized agent. 

PART 2 – Products 

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER 

A. Hunter Douglas Contract/ 12400 Stowe Drive/ Poway, CA 92064/ Phone: 800-727-8953 Fax: 

800-205-9819/ Website: http://contract.hunterdouglas.com 

B. Other products submitted for approval prior to bid. Products submitted within seven (7) days 

of the close of bid will not be considered for approval. 

2.02 2” HORIZONTAL ALUMINUM BLINDS 

A. Product: Hunter Douglas “H200 2” Aluminum Blind” 

B. Materials: 

1. Slats: 2” wide x .008” thick prior to painting, heat-treated and spring tempered (except 

5000 series alloy on metallized finishes) aluminum alloy 6011 with eased corners and 

manufacturing burrs removed. Furnish not less than nominal 7.2 slats per foot to 

ensure tight closure and light control. Finish with manufacturer’s standard baked-on 

finish in colors selected by architect from manufacturer’s available contract colors 

utilizing Dust Shield finish to inhibit dust build-up for easier maintenance. 

2. Slat Support: Woven high strength polyester, exceeding commercial specification 

number 1029-86. Maximum distance between tapes: 34”. 

3. Headrail: U-shaped profile with rolled edges, measuring 1-1/2” x 2-1/4” x .024” 

constructed of corrosion resistant steel. Internally fit with components required for 

specified performance and designed for smooth, quiet, trouble-free operation. 

Headrail finish to be standard baked-on polyester and to match slats. Ends fitted with 

zinc coated steel end lock with adjustable tab for centering blinds. 

4. Bottom Rail: .019” steel, with corrosion-resistant finish formed with double-lock seam 

into closed oval shape for optimum beam and torsional strength. Ends fitted with 

color-coordinated engineered polymer caps. Color-coordinated engineered polymer 

tape buttons secure the ladder and cord. Bottom Rail finish to be standard baked-on 

polyester color coordinated to slats. 




5. Lifting Mechanism: Crashproof steel cordlocks with corrosion-resistant finish, steel 

locking dogs, hexagon pulley, polyester 2.2mm lift cords, and Break-Thru® safety 

tassel. Located on either side of individual blind unit as per architect’s request. 

6. Tilting Mechanism: Cord tilter consisting of zinc die-cast helical gear type driven by a 

worm in enclosed polymer housing, 2.2mm polyester cord, and solid steel corrosion 

resistant tilt rod. 

7. Tilt Control Cord: 2.2mm polyester cord. Located on either side of individual blind unit 

as per architect’s request. 

8. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard .030” steel box brackets with baked-on 

polyester finish to match headrail with additional support brackets for blinds over 84” 

wide. 

9. Options: Provide blinds with the valance option. 

A. Measurements shall be accurate to within + 1/8” or as recommended in writing by 

manufacturer. 

2.04 FINISHES 

A. Slat Finish: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. 



A. Subcontractor shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surfaces, 

installation conditions and field measurement for this work. 

B. Other interacting trades shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions, assembly and 

installation methods from subcontractor upon request. 


A. Installation shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications, standards and procedures as 

detailed on contract drawings. 

B. Adequate Clearance shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and 

hardware. 

C. Clean finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris. 

3.03 SCHEDULE: 

A. Exterior Windows: Provide one blind on each exterior wall window in the addition. 

B. Interior Lites: Provide blinds in each lite of door side lites. Mount inside the jamb. 






SECTION 12670 – ENTRANCE MATS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Furnish and install entrance vestibule matting as described in the Contract Documents. 

B. Related Sections 

1. Division 3 Section “Concrete Work.” 

2. Division 9 Section “Resilient Flooring” for transition strips between entrance mats and 

vinyl composition tile. 

1.02 SUBMITTAL 

A. See Division 3 Section “Submittals.” 

B. Product Data 

1. Manufacturer’s literature or cut sheets. 

C. Samples 

1. Submit samples of actual matting showing full range of Manufacturer’s standard 

colors. 

1.03 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard lifetime of carpet warranties for wear, static, edge ravel and 

delamination. 

B. Installer: Provide one year warranty on installation. 



2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 



1. Entrance Mat: 

a. Shaw Contract Group 

b. Lees, Division of The Mohawk Group 

2.03 ENTRANCE MATS 

A. Provide surface mounted, frameless installation at locations shown within the drawings. 

1. Style: Shaw Bonjour EW24 

a. Style Number: 59411 

b. Fiber: 100% P.E.T. Polyester 

c. Construction: Ribbed thermal bonded needlepunch modular 

d. Tufted Weight: 35.0 ounces per square yard. 

e. Total Weight: 88.0 ounces per square yard. 

f. Secondary Backing: Eco*worx® 

g. Dye Method: Solution dyed. 


ENTRANCE MATS 12670 - 1

h. Flammability: ASTM E-648, Class 1 

i. Smoke Developed: ASTM E-662, less than 450 

j. Size: 24 inches by 24 inches. 

k. Color: As selected by Architect. 

2. Style: Lees Step Up 

a. Style Number: DD763 

b. Face Yarn: Fortis Nylon 6.6 with Nylon 6.6 scraper yarn 

c. Tufted Weight: 38.0 ounces per square yard. 

e. Gauge: 5/32”. 

f. Secondary Backing: Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic composite. 

g. Dye Method: Yarn dyed. 

h. Flammability: ASTM E-648, Class 1 

i. Smoke Developed: ASTM E-662, less than 450 

j. Size: 24 inches by 24 inches. 

k. Color: As selected by Architect. 


1. Adhesive: Manufacturer’s pressure sensitive adhesive. 



A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions 

detrimental to proper installation. 

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

2. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for installation over new concrete 

surfaces. 

B. Install mats per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

1. Quarter turn the carpet tiles. 

2. Coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to 

provide ample clearance between door and mat. 

3. Apply adhesives at rates indicated by manufacturers. 

C. Provide transition elements at all dissimilar finish materials as described in the drawings and 

below: 

1. Install resilient edge strip at edge between entry mat and vinyl composition tile. 


A. Defer installation of floor mats until time of Substantial Completion. 

B. Clean mats and remove any debris from project site. 



ENTRANCE MATS 12670 - 2

SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 

PART 1.00 - GENERAL 

GENERAL CONDITIONS: 

The contractor shall carefully read the General Conditions of the Contract and all information to bidders which, 

with the following specifications for heating, cooling, ventilating, plumbing, and temperature control are a part of 

the Contract. 

BASIC BID: 

Shall include all labor and materials specified in this division. The term "furnish" and/or "install" or similar 

implication shall mean "furnish and install complete." 

SCOPE OF WORK: 

The work to be done under this section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, controls and 

accessories required to complete all air conditioning, plumbing, drainage, and other mechanical systems as 

shown on plans and/or described in these specifications, including miscellaneous items required to provide a 

complete and functional facility. 

Work shall include, but shall not be necessarily limited to, the following: 

1. Hot water heating systems 

2. Chilled water cooling system 

3. Air handling unit air distribution system 

4. System commissioning 

5. Testing 

6. Balancing 

7. Insulation systems 

8. Air distribution system 

9. Automatic control systems 

10. Plumbing systems 

11 Demolition of existing systems 

Unless otherwise noted the mechanical contractor shall provide all miscellaneous electrical work, including 

control conduit and wiring (both line voltage and low voltage) for all special systems where the wiring 

requirements are either noted on the drawings or provided by the equipment manufacturers or suppliers. 

Exception: Where the required wiring is clearly shown on the electrical drawings it shall be provided by the 

electrical contractor. 

CODES AND ORDINANCES: 

All work shall be installed in accordance with the city, state, and local codes, which govern the type of work 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-1

covered by these specifications. 

Should the drawings conflict with the code, the code shall govern the proper installation of the work, and no extra 

charge shall be made for the proper installation. 

Should the contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable building 

codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, or utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs 

associated with correcting the deficiencies. 

Where the work required by the drawings and specifications exceeds the minimum code requirements, the work 

shall be done as shown or specified. 

NOTE: Code compliance, or similar terminology, shall be interpreted to mean "the interpretation of the code as 

enforced by the local building authority". 

DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: 

These specifications are intended to cover all labor, material, and standards of mechanical workmanship to be 

employed in the work shown on the drawings, called for in these specifications, or reasonably implied by terms 

of same. 

The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement one another, and any part of the work that may be 

mentioned in the one and not represented in the other shall be done the same as if it had been mentioned or 

represented in both. 

Large scale drawings shall take precedence over layouts and small scale details. 

The mechanical drawings are schematic in nature. They show the general arrangement of all piping, ductwork, 

mechanical equipment, and appurtenances. They shall be followed as closely as the actual building 

construction and the work of other trades will permit. 

Due to tight structural conditions and space limitations in selected areas the contractor should anticipate 

structural and space conflicts, and shall make allowances for them in his bid. Until the steel fabrication shop 

drawings are submitted for review, the mechanical coordination cannot be completed. 

Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and 

accessories which will actually be required. This contractor shall investigate the structural and finish conditions 

affecting the work and provide all necessary offsets, fittings, valves, trim and accessories required to meet actual 

job-site conditions. 

a. Dimensions - 

Verify dimensions governing mechanical work at the building. No extra compensation shall be claimed 

or allowed on account of differences between the actual job-site dimensions and those indicated on the 

drawings. 

b. Adjoining work - 

Examine all adjoining work on which the mechanical work is dependent and report any work which must 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



e corrected. No waiver of responsibility shall be claimed or allowed due to failure to report unfavorable 

conditions affecting the mechanical work. 

The structural drawings shall be considered part of the mechanical work insofar as these drawings furnish this 

Division with information relating to design and construction of the building. 

Structural drawings take precedence over the general building layouts and details shown on the mechanical 

drawings. 

The structural engineer shall approve all attachments to or modifications of any structural members in the 

building required for installation of the mechanical systems. 

INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS: 

If any person contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed contract is in doubt as to the true meaning of any 

part of the plans, specifications, or other proposed contract documents, or finds discrepancies in or omissions 

from the drawings or specifications, he may submit to the Owner's representative, a written request for an 

interpretation or correction thereof. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. 

Any interpretation or correction of the proposed documents will be made only by addenda duly issued, and a 

copy of such addenda will be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of such documents. The Owner 

will not be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the proposed documents. All questions 

shall be submitted at least seven days in advance of bidding. 

The Owner's representative will interpret the meaning of any part of the drawings and specifications about which 

any misunderstanding may arise, and his decisions will be final. Should there appear to be any error or 

discrepancy in or between the drawings and specifications, the contractor shall refer the matter to the Owner's 

representative for adjustment before proceeding with the work. Should the contractor proceed with the work 

without so referring the matter, he does so on his own responsibility. 

WORKMANSHIP: 

Workmanship shall be the best quality of its kind for the respective industries, trades, crafts, and practices, and 

shall be acceptable in every respect to the Owner's representative. 

SUBSTITUTIONS: 

See Special Conditions pertaining to Substitutions. 

FEES & PERMITS: 

All necessary permits and fees required in connection with the work will be paid by the school district. 

SITE INSPECTION AND EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS: 

The contractor shall carefully study all drawings and specifications pertaining to the work. If any of the work as 

laid out, indicated, or specified is contrary to or conflicts with any governing ordinances or regulations, the same 

shall be reported to the Owner's representative before submitting a bid. The Owner's representative will then 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



issue instructions as to procedure. 

The contractor shall carefully examine the building site and compare the drawings with existing conditions. By 

the act of submitting a bid, the contractor shall be deemed to have made such examination, to have accepted 

such conditions, and to have made allowance therefore in preparing his bid. 

VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS: 

Before proceeding with any work, the contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions, sizes, etc., and 

shall assume full responsibility for the rigging and fitting-in of his ductwork, piping, and equipment. 

Where apparatus and equipment has been indicated on the drawings, dimensions have been taken from typical 

equipment of the class indicated. The contractor shall carefully check the drawings to see that the equipment he 

is required to install will fit into the spaces provided, and still allow for proper service and maintenance of the 

equipment. 

COORDINATION: 

This contractor shall coordinate his work with other specification divisions and shall provide all necessary 

specialty items, trim, and incidental 115 volt and 24 volt power and control wiring (which is not shown or 

specified under other divisions) required to provide a complete, functional system. 

The Division 15 contractor shall coordinate his work such that all slots and openings through floors, walls, 

ceilings, and roofs are properly located and shall do any cutting and patching caused by neglecting to do so. 

1. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in sufficient time to 

be incorporated into the construction as the work proceeds. 

2. It is the responsibility of Division 15 to located these items and see that they are properly installed. 

The locations of all piping, ducts, apparatus, and equipment indicated on the drawings are approximate only, 

and shall be changed as required to meet the actual architectural and structural conditions at the job site. All 

changes shall be approved by the Owner's representative. Any change in work which has not been installed 

shall be made by the contractor without additional compensation, except changes which are caused by 

architectural and structural changes which substantially increase the size of any of the mains, or which 

substantially increase the number of fixtures or length of pipe runs. Any and all changes shall be made only 

upon approval of a written change order. 

1. Right of way - Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. For example, 

plumbing drains shall normally have right of way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have 

right of way over lines whose elevations can be changed. 

2. Offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain 

proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and 

install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and devices as required to effect these offsets, transitions and 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



changes in direction. 

It shall be each contractor's responsibility to verify exact location, elevation, and/or route of the various 

mechanical system components with architectural details and with Owner's representative's personnel on job. 

Where deviations from locations and/or arrangements described are necessary to meet actual job conditions, 

the changes shall be made without cost to the Owner. 

The Owner's representative reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet, piping, 

or equipment, before installation, without additional cost. 

LOCATION OF CEILING OUTLETS: 

This contractor shall assist the Owner's representative, General Contractor, Electrical Contractor and other 

interested parties in the establishment of room centerlines, axis of rooms and all walls. 

All grilles, registers, ceiling diffusers, etc. shall be located with reference to these established data points. 

These outlets shall be referenced to such features as room centerlines, walls and ceiling furrings, balanced 

border widths, etc. 

Outlets in acoustical tiles, panels, etc. shall occur in joints or centers of whole pieces, etc. 

The final determination of the exact location of all outlets shall be subject to the direction and approval of the 

Owner's representative. 

PROVISIONS FOR REMOVAL & ADEQUATE CLEARANCE: 

Install Mechanical work to permit removal of cooling coils, filters, belt guards, sheaves, drives, and other parts 

requiring periodic replacement or maintenance without damage to or interference with other parts of equipment 

or structure. 

Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors, control 

components, and to clear the openings of swinging doors and access panels. 

RECORD DRAWINGS: 

The contractor shall maintain one set of record drawings. These prints shall show the location, elevations and 

details of all items of work installed under this contract. Buried piping shall be located by dimensions from 

foundation walls and depths of bury shall be indicated. These shall be marked in red. The completed set of 

record drawings must be submitted to the Owner's representative before the contractor is eligible to receive the 

final payment. An up-to-date record set of drawings shall be maintained during the progress of the project, and 

be available to the Owner's representative upon request. 

COORDINATION DRAWINGS: 

The contractor shall provide coordination drawings, when requested by the Owner's representative, to insure 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



that the various mechanical system components are coordinated with each other, and with other building 

systems. 

The coordination drawings shall be drawn to scale (usually 1/2" = 1'-0") and shall show all systems as they relate 

to each other, especially in areas of potential conflict. 

Equipment layout drawings shall identify service and maintenance points, aisleways and accessways, electrical 

lights and panels, control panels, and shall show necessary maintenance clearances. 

All ductwork and piping and their attachments to the building structure shall be detailed, and shall be coordinated 

with the Owner's representative. 

COOPERATION WITH OTHERS: 

The contractor shall so organize the work that progress will harmonize with the work of all trades, so that all work 

may proceed as expeditiously as possible. The contractor shall be held responsible for any delays which might 

be caused by his negligence or failure to cooperate with other contractors or crafts. 

FOREMAN: 

A full-time foreman shall be designated by the contractor to the Owner's representative and shall be available on 

site for consultation. This individual, when appointed, will not be replaced without prior approval from the 

Owner's representative. The foreman shall be responsible for the coordination and correct placing of the work. 

GUARANTEE: 

By the acceptance of the contract award for the work herein described, the contractor assumes the full 

responsibility imposed by the guarantee as set forth herein and should protect himself through proper guarantee 

from equipment and specialty manufacturers and subcontractors as their interests may appear. 

All materials and equipment provided and installed under this division of the specifications shall be guaranteed 

for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion and acceptance by the Owner, and all 

refrigerant compressors shall be guaranteed for five (5) years from the date of substantial completion and 

acceptance, unless specifically noted elsewhere in the specification. Should any trouble develop during this 

period due to defective materials or workmanship, the contractor agrees to correct the trouble without any cost to 

the Owner, any defect noticed at the time of installation and/or during the guarantee period shall be corrected 

immediately to the satisfaction of the Owner. 

SCHEDULES, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: 

As soon as practicable, and within 30 days after date of award of contract, and before commencement of work, a 

complete schedule of equipment and materials proposed for installation shall be submitted to the Owner's 

representative. The schedule shall include catalogs, cuts, drawings, and such other descriptive data or samples 

that are requested by the Owner's representative. Schedules shall include all items of equipment used. No 

partial submittals will be accepted. 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



Provide six (6) corrected copies of each required shop drawing or similar submittal to the Owner's representative 

for review, approval, and return of two (2) copies. DO NOT SUBMIT without general contractor's signed stamp, 

indicating the general contractor has reviewed the submittal for completeness and conformance to the Contract 

Documents. 

Inform the Owner's representative by notation, or in the letter of transmittal, of any proposed deviation from the 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

Provide required shop drawings or other submittals within time stipulated on approved progress schedule. 

Do not commence work requiring a shop drawing or other submittal until approval of the required submittal has 

been received. Such approval will be based upon a review only for conformance with the design concept of the 

project and with the information given in the Contract Documents, and does not relieve the contractor from 

responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings. 

Schedules shall be neatly bound in hard-backed looseleaf binders. Schedules shall be completely indexed, and 

shall include the following items: 

1. Air handling unit 

2. Packaged rooftop unit 

3. Boiler 

4. Glycol feed system 

5. Cooling coils 

6. Heating coils 

7. Pumps 

8. Valves 

9. Heating hot water & chilled water specialties 

10. Piping systems 

11. Pipe supports & restraints 

12. Pressure gauges & thermometers 

13. Hot water unit heaters 

14. Exhaust fans 

15. Ventilation fan 

16. Boiler stack 

17. VAV boxes with reheat coils 

18. Variable frequency drive 

19. Filter banks 

20. Dampers 

21. Low pressure flexible ducts 

22. Registers 

23. Grilles 

24. Diffusers 

25. Roof hoods 

26. Louvers 

27. Insulation systems 

28. Vibration isolators 

29. Seismic restraints 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



30. Automatic temperature controls 

31. Air balance contractor qualifications 

32. System commissioning contractor's qualifications 

33. Fire-safing materials and methods 

34. Other schedule items 

Submittals received which do not contain all of the above items will be returned unchecked. 

Purpose and Contractor's Responsibility: 

The purpose of the final submittal is to "assist the contractor selecting the equipment." The contractor shall 

review the submittals prior to submission to the Owner's representative to make sure that the submittals are 

complete in all details including the following items: 

1. Manufacturers' names shall be mentioned in specifications as accepted by Owner at time of bidding. 

2. Equipment dimensions shall be verified to fit the spaces provided with sufficient clearances, as may be 

required by the equipment or indicated on the drawings. 

3. Equipment shall be reviewed with respect to schedules, specifications, plans and details. 

4. Equipment submittal sheets shall be clearly marked indicating equipment symbol and exact selection of 

proposed equipment. 

Review: 

Review and acceptance of submittal does not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to fulfill the contract 

requirements. Review and acceptance of the submittal will not be used as a means of changing the contract 

requirements. Items not covered in the accepted submittal, or items incorrectly covered but not recognized or 

identified, shall not be used when contrary to the requirements of the contract documents. 

Acceptance of Substitute Equipment: 

If the proposed equipment is approved, this contractor shall make all incidental changes in piping, ductwork, 

supports, installation, wiring, heaters, panel boards, and as otherwise necessary. Provide any additional motors, 

valves, controllers, fittings, and other additional equipment required for the proper operation of the system 

resulting from the contractor's selection of alternate equipment, including all required changes in the effected 

trades. 

Owner's Refusal Right: 

In the event that items submitted are substitutions for specified items and are found to be not acceptable, the 

right shall be reserved to require the specified items. 

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND CATALOG INFORMATION: 

This contractor shall compile in looseleaf binders catalogs of every product used by him in the completion of the 

work. The binders shall also include copies of the test data (Section 15042), balancing reports (Section 15043), 

and system commissioning data (Section 15030). Before final acceptance by the Owner's representative, he 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



shall turn over to the Owner this compilation of catalog data. A double index shall be provided, one giving an 

alphabetical list of products for which catalogs are included, and one giving their addresses, whose products are 

included in the work. Provide data for each item of equipment listed in SCHEDULES, MATERIALS & 

EQUIPMENT, as shown in Section 15010. Provide copy of submittal data. Four (4) copies shall be delivered to 

the Owner's representative for his approval. 

Provide warranty schedule and schedule of overload protection as required in Section 15030. 

Binders shall be white vinyl with see-thru front and end of panels identified as follows: 

SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

CLASSROOM ADDITION 

2009 

OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

SET # 

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 

MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES: 

Unless otherwise specified, all equipment, accessories, and materials shall be new and undamaged, and the 

workmanship shall be of the best quality for the use intended and shall be acceptable to the Owner's 


Equipment, accessories, and materials shall be essentially the standard products of the manufacturer, or as 

specified herein. Where two or more units of the same class of new equipment are required, these units shall be 

products of a single manufacturer. 

Should mechanical equipment other than that used in the design be furnished, it shall be the responsibility of the 

mechanical subcontractor to provide large scale (1/2"=1'-0") installation drawings, as required, showing service 

and maintenance points with proper clearance allowances for service. 

All equipment shall be selected to deliver full rated capacity at the job site elevation. 

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 

FUNCTIONING AND OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT: 

Contractor's Responsibility: 

Installation and startup shall be so made that its several component parts will function together as a workable 

system, and shall be left with all equipment properly adjusted and in working order. 

CLEANING AND PATCHING BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR: 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



The contractor shall remove all stains or grease marks on walls, floors, glass, hardware, fixtures, or elsewhere, 

caused by his workman or for which he is responsible. He shall remove all stickers on plumbing fixtures, do all 

required patching up and repair all work of others damaged by this division of the work, and leave the premises 

in a clean and orderly condition. 

INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES: 

The mechanical contractor shall provide, without expense to the Owner, competent instructors to train the 

Owner's representatives in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of all parts on the heating, air 

conditioning, ventilating, plumbing, fire protection, and automatic temperature control systems and equipment. 

Instruction date shall be scheduled at the time of final inspection. A written report specifying times, dates, and 

name of personnel instructed shall be forwarded to the Owner's representative. 

PROTECTION AGAINST THE ELEMENTS: 

The contractor shall, at all times, take reasonable and adequate precautions to protect his work and all stored 

materials and equipment from damage by the elements, including flooding, windstorms, etc., and shall not 

expose the work of any other contractor to such damage. 

In addition to requirements specified in Division 01, stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by 

the Owner's representative until installed. 

All items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, shall be stored in dry, heated spaces. 

Protect all bearings during installation, and thoroughly grease steel shafts to prevent corrosion. 

REMOVAL OF DEBRIS, ETC.: 

Upon completion of this division of the work, remove all surplus material and rubbish resulting from the work, and 

leave the premises in a clean and orderly condition. 

MOTORS & STARTERS: 

This contractor shall furnish all motors required and necessary to operate equipment furnished by him. The 

voltage, phase, and horsepower of each motor shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor prior to 

ordering. 

OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: 

All openings required for installation of mechanical systems shall be provided by the mechanical contractor. Any 

piece of equipment which is to be installed in any space of the building and which is too large to permit access 

through stairways, doorways or shafts shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the 

space before the enclosing structure is completed. Materials shall be delivered at such stages of the work as will 

expedite the work as a whole. 

SAFETY REGULATION: 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



The contractor shall comply with all local and OSHA safety requirements in performance with this work. (See 

General Conditions). This contractor shall be required to provide equipment, supervision, construction, 

procedures, and all other necessary items to assure safety to life and property. 

OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT: 

This contractor shall include in his bid the necessary labor and material to properly coordinate and install the 

required piping, trim, specialties, controls, ductwork, and other necessary utilities and services to equipment 

furnished by the Owner. 

This contractor shall relocate (where noted), rough-in and make final connections to owner furnished equipment. 

ASBESTOS & HAZARDOUS WASTES: 

Unless specifically included elsewhere in these contract documents, the removal of asbestos fiber bearing 

material or materials containing hazardous wastes are not a part of this contract. Should such material be 

identified on the contract site, the owner's representative shall be so notified. 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 



SECTION 15030 - SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 


DESCRIPTION: 

The work required under this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 

The pre-startup inspection of all systems by a qualified systems commissioning contractor, and coordination of 

subsequent correction of any incorrect items. 

Repair, replacement, or adjustment of each item shall be performed by the installing contractor. 

System operations inspection. 

All personnel used on the job site shall be "Certified Technicians" certified by the National Certification Board for 

TAB Technicians, 601 North Fairfax Street, Suite 240, Alexandria, Virginia, 22314, (703) 739-7200, who shall 

have been permanent, full-time employees of the firm for a minimum of six (6) months prior to the start of the 

work for this project. 

The intent of this section is to provide for proper installation, startup, service, and operation of the mechanical 

systems in preparation for system balancing. See Section 15043 for balancing. 

SITE VISITS: 

The system commissioning contractor shall visit the construction site periodically as construction progresses to 

insure that the work is being installed in a manner which will insure that the start-up and system commissioning 

work will proceed without interruption for remedial work once the system commissioning work is started. 

Site status reports shall be submitted to the owner's representative as the work progresses. 

A minimum of six (6) pre-commissioning site visits will be required. 

PRE-STARTUP INSPECTION: 

The pre-startup inspection of all systems shall provide for verifying that each piece of equipment is properly 

installed and prepared for startup. 

All pertinent items shall be checked, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 

1. Removal of shipping stops. 

2. Vibration isolators and seismic snubbers properly aligned and adjusted. 

3. Flexible connections are properly aligned. 

4. Belts are properly adjusted. 

5. Belt guards and safety shields are in place. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_______ 


SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15030-1

6. Safety controls, safety valves, and high or low limits are properly installed and functioning. 

7. All systems are properly filled. 

8. Filters are in place with a proper seal around their edges. 

9. Fire dampers are properly installed, linked, and serviceable. 

10. Pressure and temperature gauges of the proper size and range are installed. 

11. All test stations and measuring devices are properly installed and functioning. 

12. Initial lubrication of equipment is complete. 

13. Filters and strainers are clean. 

14. Motor rotations are correct. 

15. Voltages match nameplates. 

16. Control system is operating properly. 

17. All interlocks are wired and verified. 

18. All controls have been connected and verified. 

19. All valves, dampers, and operators are properly installed and operating. 

20. All ductwork is installed and connected. 

21. All roof-mounted equipment is properly flashed. 

22. All water and chemical feed piping is either heat taped, or located in spaces which are heated to prevent 

freezing. 

23. Piping which is run above the roof or is otherwise subjected to freezing is properly heat taped and 

insulated. 

24. All other items necessary to provide for proper start-up. 

25. All seismic restraints are in place and secured. 

26. All condensate drain lines are piped to discharge in proper drains. 

FIRST RUN INSPECTION: 

Recheck all items outlined in pre-startup inspection to insure proper operation. 

Check the following items: 

1. Excessive vibration or noise. 

2. Loose components. 

3. Initial control settings. 

4. Motor amperages. 

5. Heat buildup in motors, bearings, etc. 

6. Control system is sequencing properly, calibrated and functioning as required. 

7. Heat tapes are wired & functioning. 

Correct all items which are not operating properly. 

SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION: 

The mechanical systems shall be observed under operation conditions for sufficient time to insure proper 

operation under varying conditions, such as daylight and heating-cooling. 

Periodically check the following items: 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_______ 



1. Strainers and filters. 

2. Visual check of air flow for "best guess" setting for preparation for system air balancing under Section 

15043. 

3. Control operation of time clocks, on-off sequences, system cycling, etc. 

4. Visual checks for water flow, seals, packings, safety valves, operating pressures and temperatures. 

5. Cleaning of excessive oil or grease. 

6. Dampers close tightly. 

7. Valves close tightly. 

8. System leaks. 

9. All other items pertaining to the proper operation of the mechanical system, whether specifically listed or 

not. 

WARRANTY SCHEDULE: 

Provide a list in each O & M Manual of all motors, fans, and equipment with manufacturer's names, models, 

serial numbers and date of startup approved by the Owner's representative, date of warranty, extent of warranty, 

and equipment supplier with address and phone numbers. 

SCHEDULE OF OVERLOAD PROTECTION: 

Provide a list in each O & M Manual of all motors with size, voltage, amperage, and size and rating of overload 

protection. 

REPORT: 

Prior to the start of system balancing the system commissioning sub-contractor shall submit a written report to 

the owner's representative outlining the results of the system commissioning work for each system and piece of 

equipment which lists any un-corrected system abnormalities. This report is mandatory. 

CERTIFICATION: 

Provide written certification of all tests, and start-up procedures. Bind a copy of this certification in the O & M 

manuals. Certification shall include an itemized list of systems serviced during the system commissioning 

process with dates, times, and a complete description of the work completed, and the name of responsible 

system commissioning mechanic. 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

_______ 



SECTION 15042 - TESTING 


DESCRIPTION: 

The work outlined in this section shall be performed by the several trades involved. 

The mechanical contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, materials, tools, scaffolding, and equipment 

required to complete all system testing. 

The mechanical contractor shall remove and repair any defective component as indicated by the system 

tests and retest. 

The mechanical contractor shall test the operation of all safety and high limit controls to insure proper 

installation and operation. Any defective devices shall be replaced. 

TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS: 

Before any piping is covered, tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative, and any 

leaks or defective work corrected. No caulking of threaded work will be permitted. 

Before application of insulation covering, and as far as practical before concealing any piping, all piping shall 

be hydrostatically tested and proved tight. 

Stubs shall be capped and all control valves shall be removed during the test. 

System may be tested in sections, providing connections to last section tested are included in each 

succeeding test. 

Following minimum pressures shall be used for testing: 

1. Domestic hot, cold, and hot water recirculating water piping at 150 psig for six hours. 

2. Refrigeration piping, as indicated in Section "Refrigeration Piping Installation." 

3. Heating hot water and chilled water system piping at 150 psig for six hours. 

4. Gas piping at 150 psig for six hours. 

5. High pressure air ducts in accordance with SMACNA standards. 

6. Plumbing waste and vent piping, 10 ft. of head for 30 minutes. 

7. Glycol feed system piping at 100 psig for six hours. 

8. Rainwater piping 10 ft. of head for 30 minutes. 

All valves and equipment which may be damaged shall not be subjected to the test pressure. 

______________________________________________________________________________ 


TESTING 15042-1


EQUIPMENT: 

The contractor shall furnish all necessary gauges, plugs, test fans, pumps, etc., as required to conduct the 

tests. 

REPORTS: 

The contractor shall give the Owner's Representative one week notice prior to performing the tests. All tests 

shall be recorded and copies of reports bound in the O & M manuals and given to the Owner. 


PROCEDURE: 

The contractor shall be responsible to conduct all tests in a safe manner, protecting the work of other trades 

from water or physical damage. 

The tests, as indicated, shall be in addition to any test, as required, by any governing agency. Submit 

results of all approved tests to the Owner's representative. 

Each test and any necessary repairs and retest shall be performed by the contractor which installed the 

system. 

______________________________________________________________________________ 


TESTING 15042-2

SECTION 15043 - BALANCING 



The mechanical contractor shall employ an independent technical firm to perform the checking, adjusting, and 

balancing (CAB) of the HVAC systems. This firm shall be one whose operations are limited to the field of 

professional CAB, and this firm shall meet the following qualifications: 

1. The firm shall be a member of AABC and/or NEBB. 

2. The firm shall be one which is organized to provide professional services of this specific type. 

3. The firm shall have completed projects of similar scope within the past 12 months and shall be capable 

of performing the services specified at the location of the facility described within the time frame 

specified, and following up the basic work as may be required. 

As a part of this contract, the mechanical contractor shall make all changes in the sheaves, belts, and dampers, 

including the addition of dampers required for correct balance as required by the CAB firm, at no additional cost 

to the Owner. 

The mechanical contractor shall provide and coordinate services of qualified, responsible subcontractors, 

suppliers, and personnel as required to correct, repair, or replace any and all deficient items or conditions found 

during the testing, adjusting, and balancing period. 

In order that all systems may be properly checked, balanced, and adjusted as required by these specifications, 

the mechanical contractor shall operate said systems at his expense for the length of the time necessary to 

properly verify their completion and readiness for the CAB and shall further pay all costs of operation during the 

CAB period. 

The project completion schedule shall be coordinated with the CAB work to provide sufficient times to permit the 

completion of CAB services prior to Owner occupancy. 

DOCUMENTS: 

The Owner's representative will furnish, without charge to the CAB firm, one set of mechanical specifications, all 

pertinent change orders, and the following: 

1. One complete set of plans less the structural sheets. 

2. One set of mechanical floor plans of the conditioned spaces. 

These sheets should be ozalid type (blue or black on light background) reproductions to facilitate marking. 

Approved submittal data on equipment installed to accomplish the test procedures outlined in paragraph 

"Services of the CAB Firm" of this specification will be provided by the mechanical contractor. 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


BALANCING 15043-1

The Owner's representative will transmit one copy of the following "Records for Owner" to the CAB firm for 

review and comments: 

1. Record drawings 

2. Approved fixture brochures, wiring diagrams, and control diagrams. 

3. Shop drawings 

4. Instructions 

5. Motor and valve charts 

6. Operating and Maintenance Manuals 

SERVICES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR: 

The mechanical contractor shall have all systems complete, calibrated, and in operational readiness prior to 

notifying the CAB firm that the project is ready for their services. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate 

system readiness with the system commissioning contractor and shall certify in writing to the Owner's 

representative that the system is complete and ready to balance. 

SERVICES OF THE CAB FIRM: 

The technical CAB firm shall submit biographical data on the individual proposed to directly supervise the CAB 

work. It shall also submit their record of specialized experience in the field of air and hydronic system balancing. 

Act as liaison between the Owner's representative and contractor and periodically inspect the installation of 

mechanical piping systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, 

air conditioning and ventilating systems as the installation progresses. The inspection will cover only those parts 

of the systems relating to the checking and balancing. 

To check, adjust, and balance system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in 

the building. 

Prepare and submit to the Owner's representative, complete reports on the balance and operations of the 

systems. 

The CAB firm shall be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the data on the performance 

of the following general systems, including all components. 

1. Heating hot water systems, including boiler, pumps, coils, controls, etc. 

2. Chilled water system including air cooled chiller, pumps, compressors, control, etc. 

3. Air handling unit, fan, dampers, heating hot water and chilled water coils, etc. 

4. Temperature control system in its entirety includes the verification of all control sequences and safety 

devices. 

5. Relief air systems, dampers, sensors, etc. 

6. Air distribution systems. 

Before any adjustments are made, the air systems are to be checked for such items as correct placement of 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


BALANCING 15043-2

perforated panels in the computer room floors, dirty filter, duct leakage, damper leakage, equipment vibrations, 

correct damper operations, etc. 

Before any adjustments are made to water systems, the strainers shall be cleaned, temperature control valve 

operation shall be checked, pump rotation shall be checked, pressure reducing valves shall be adjusted, etc. 

It shall be the responsibility of the CAB personnel to check, adjust, and balance the components of the various 

systems as listed above using an applicable "proportionate balance procedure" in order that each of them will 

operate under optimum noise, temperature and air flow conditions in the conditioned spaces in the building 

"while simultaneously operating at the most energy efficient condition." 

During the balancing process, if abnormalities or malfunctions of equipment or components are discovered by 

the CAB personnel, the owner's representative shall be advised promptly so that the condition may be corrected 

by the project contractor. Data from malfunctioning equipment or components shall not be recorded in the final 

CAB report. 


EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS: 

This contractor shall provide all necessary labor, equipment, scaffolding, instruments, and materials required to 

adjust, balance, and check all systems. 


REPORT: 

The activities, as described hereinbefore, will culminate in a report to be provided to the Owner's representative. 

This report shall be furnished in six (6) copies. One copy shall be bound in each O & M manual. The intent of 

the final report is to provide a reference of actual operating conditions for the building operating personnel. 

The CAB report shall include the following as a minimum: 

Preface: 

A general discussion of the systems, any idiosyncrasies, any problems encountered, an outline of normal 

sequence of operation for the HVAC system cycles, any un-corrected noise problem. 

Pitot Tube Traverses: 

For use in future trouble-shooting by maintenance personnel, all exhaust ducts, main supply ducts and return 

ducts will have air velocity and volume measured and recorded by the traverse method. Locations of these 

traverse test stations will be described on the sheet containing the data. 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


BALANCING 15043-3

Temperature Tabulation: 

Of all conditioned spaces on a room-by-room basis, a total of at least three readings will be taken of each room 

on successive days. Record outside ambient temperature at two-hour intervals. The total variation in 

conditioned space temperatures shall not exceed 2 deg. variance from the thermostat settings. 

Air Volumes and Velocities: 

As measured at each supply grille, return air grille, and exhaust air grille or air handling device. In all fan 

systems, the air quantities indicated on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature 

variation of two degrees within each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each 

zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the contractor to furnish or revise fan drive and/or motors, if 

necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. 

Air Pressure: 

As measured across each supply fan, cooling coil, heating coil, air handling unit filter and exhaust fan. Relate 

these readings to the particular fan curve in terms of CFM handled at the various static pressures, and their 

relationship to fan power and fan instability. 

Water Temperature: 

Shall be taken entering and leaving the coils and heat exchangers under maximum load conditions in each case. 

Water Pressure: 

At all gauge connections, pressure readings at coils and pumps shall be related to coil and pump curves in terms 

of gpm handled and confirmed by gpm flow thru Venturi units at each air handler. The flow of water thru all 

water coils shall be adjusted by manipulating valves until the rated pressure drop across each coil is obtained 

and total water flow is verified by Venturi readings. On those with 3-way valves, rated pressure drop shall first be 

adjusted thru the coils in each of the several systems and the temperature differential between inlet and outlet 

shall be determined to be in each of the several systems and the temperature differential between inlet and 

outlet shall be determined to be in accordance with its rating. The bypass valves shall then be adjusted on each 

coil until an equal pressure drop between supply and return connections is obtained with the three-way valves 

set to bypass all coils in each of the several systems. 

Electrical Current/Voltage: 

Measurements to be taken at the drive motor on each piece of equipment. 

Fan Speeds: 

To be measured in RPM. 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


BALANCING 15043-4

Instrumentation List: 

A list of instruments by type and make used in gathering the CAB data. 

Drawings: 

The CAB contractor's working drawings shall have the VAV, and fan powered boxes and supply air openings 

numbered and/or lettered to correspond to the numbers and letters used on the report data sheets so that data 

in the report can be correlated with each specific supply air opening in the building. If room numbers actually 

used in the building differ from those on the plans, the building room numbers shall be marked on these plans. 

Only one such marked-up set of drawings need be provided with the six copies of the CAB report. 

Before final acceptance of the CAB report, the report data, at the discretion of the Owner's representative, shall 

be verified one time on the job site, by selection of check points (not to exceed 10 percent of total) at random, in 

the presence of the Owner's representative. Representatives of the testing firm doing the work shall be present 

and provide the necessary equipment for test data verification. 

The firm shall be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the data on the performance of 

fans, all dampers in the duct system, all air distribution devices, the flows of freon or water thru all coils, and the 

power consumption of all motors. 

During the CAB work, the temperature regulation will be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling 

instruments. The Owner's representative will be advised of any instruments out of calibration so that the controls 

subcontractor may come in and recalibrate, using data supplied by the balancing firm. 

Make a total of three inspections within ninety (90) days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory 

conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy and unusual conditions. 

An additional inspection in the building shall be made by the firm during the season opposite that in which the 

initial adjustments were made. At that time, any necessary modifications to the initial adjustment required to 

produce optimum operation of the system components shall be made to produce the proper seasonal conditions 

in each conditioned space. 

At the time of opposite season checkout, the Owner's representative shall be given timely notification before any 

readings or adjustments are made so that they may participate in the checkout. 

_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


BALANCING 15043-5

SECTION l5050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 


DESCRIPTION: 

This section specifies the basic materials and methods to be used in Division l5 work. 

MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT: 

All materials shall be new and undamaged. Protect all stored materials and equipment from damage by the 

elements, including exposure to excessive heat, flooding and rain, windstorms, etc. 

All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 

DEMOLITION: 

Demolition: Provide disconnection, demolition and renovation work specified under Division 15 and as indicated 

and scheduled on the drawings. 

Damage: Where pipe, ductwork, insulation or equipment to remain is inadvertently damaged or disturbed, cut 

out and remove damaged section and provide new pipe, ductwork, insulation or equipment of equal capacity 

and quality. 

Accessible Work: Exposed pipe and ductwork to be demolished shall be removed in its entirety. 

Abandoned Work: Buried pipe abandoned in place, shall be cut out approximately two inches beyond the face 

of adjacent construction, capped, and the adjacent surface patched to match existing finish. 

Removal: Equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., specified or indicated to be demolished, shall be removed from the 

project site and shall not be reused. 

Temporary Disconnection: Equipment required to be temporarily disconnected and relocated shall be carefully 

removed, stored, cleaned, reinstalled, reconnected and made operational. 

CUTTING AND PATCHING: 

Any cutting, patching, or filling necessary for the proper execution of this work, except as noted on drawings, 

shall be done by this contractor. 

No rough or unsightly work will be allowed. 

Cutting of structural members shall be done only on approval of the Owner's representative. 

The attention of the contractor is directed to the requirements of running pipes thru concrete slabs, walls, and 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 

SEGO LILY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLASSROOM ADDTION March 2, 2009 

BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050-1

eams. These conditions are to be anticipated and sleeves installed as provided for under "Sleeves". 

INSERTS: 

Furnish and set, in all necessary locations, before or during construction, unistrut inserts for use in connection 

with the support and seismic restraint of piping, ductwork, and equipment furnished under this division of the 

work. 

SLEEVES: 

Sleeves for Concrete or Masonry Surfaces: 

For pipes passing thru masonry or concrete construction, provide sleeves at least two pipe sizes larger than the 

pipe passing thru and made from sections of steel pipe. 

Provide galvanized iron sleeves with collar on each side of wall for all ducts passing thru masonry or concrete 

construction. 

Sleeves shall be placed in structural members only where approved by the Owner's representative. 

Sleeves through foundation walls below grade shall be mechanical seal type with watertight sealing grommets 

and pressure rings. Sealing grommets shall be non-melting at temperatures incurred. Foundation wall sleeves 

shall be "O.Z. Type WSK". 

Sleeves thru Finished Surfaces: 

For pipes passing thru finished partitions or ceilings, provide galvanized sheet iron sleeves of suitable size. The 

sleeves shall be fastened to construction to prevent creep along pipe and the sleeve ends shall be flush with 

finished surfaces. Provide escutcheon plates at each side of finish wall or floor or ceiling for all pipes passing 

thru same. 

Sleeves thru Fire-rated Surfaces: 

All pipe and duct sleeves in fire walls and surfaces shall be packed inside after pipes and ducts have been 

placed with an approved UL listed fire insulation similar to 3M fire protection products. This contractor shall 

submit complete installation details for the through-penetration fire protection sleeves proposed for use on this 

project. 

Sleeves thru Sound Rated Surfaces: 

Sleeves thru sound rated walls or surfaces shall be installed so as to provide the same sound transfer coefficient 

as the surface in which they are installed. This contractor shall submit complete installation details for all sound 

rated sleeves. 

Sleeves thru Floors: 

Sleeves for all pipe and duct penetrations thru floors above grade shall extend 1" above the floor and shall be 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



sealed watertight with flexible waterproof silicone caulking. Seal around sleeves and pipe in sleeves to make 

watertight. 

PIPE LOCATION AND ARRANGEMENT: 

Under no circumstances shall plastic piping or ducting materials be run inside of supply or return air plenums. 

No water supply piping inside the building shall be placed in direct contact with the earth. Buried water piping 

shall be placed in split tile or PVC pipe to keep pipe from direct contact with ground. 

Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, all water piping shall be kept out of concrete floor slabs. 

All piping shall be properly racked and supported to run straight and true. 

All changes in direction shall be made with approved fittings. Pipes shall not be bent to change direction. 

All piping shall be racked and run to facilitate maintenance work. Under no circumstances shall valves, shock 

absorbers, drip traps, or piping specialties be installed in a "closed space" without proper access provided for 

future maintenance. See "Access Doors" section of specifications. 

NOTE: All piping shall be capped or plugged at the end of each work shift and when not being 

extended, to prevent the entry of rocks and debris. 

Any time lines are broken or disconnected, they shall be capped immediately after flushing to remove rock and 

debris from pipes. If rocks or other foreign materials are found in the system after it has been closed, the 

contractor shall stand the expense of their removal. 

All valves, piping, and equipment to be installed so as to permit disassembly for maintenance purposes. 

Provide drain valves at all low points in piping systems. Run to floor drain where possible, otherwise provide 3/4" 

hose connections. 

PIPE JOINING: 

All steel pipe under 2" in size shall be joined by screwed connections. Heating hot water, chilled water, 

condenser water, glycol, and oil piping may be welded if pipe size is over 2" in size. 

Welded ends shall be plain beveled. Welding fittings must be employed if welding is used. Small (1-1/2" and 

smaller) branch connections may be made with Weldolets or Thredolets provided the main is at least 2" 

diameter, and not less than two pipe sizes larger than the branch. Where these connections are used, the pipe 

opening in the main shall be cut to insure a full inside pipe diameter at the branch connection. Slag and spelter 

resulting from the hole cutting shall be removed from the main piping. 

All joinings shall be made to maintain the full metal strength of the pipe, with neat and workmanlike appearance. 

All piping must be perfectly clean before the system is filled. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Copper Piping in Domestic Water Service: Piping shall be cut (with a pipe cutter) so ends are square and will 

"bottom" in fittings. There must be no gaps left thru which solder can run into the line. If a hack saw must be 

used, it shall be guided with a miter box to insure a square, even cut. Tubing shall be reamed to remove burrs, 

being careful not to expand tubing while reaming. 

The outside of the copper pipe and the inside of the fittings, where solder will be applied, shall be burnished with 

fine crocus cloth or fittings brushes until all dirt and oxide is removed. 

A light coat of soldering flux shall be applied to both pipe and fittings. Acid flux shall not be used. 

Joints in copper pipe shall be uniformly heated to proper soldering temperature to insure that solder will flow to 

all parts of the joint. The solder shall be fed to the joint until a uniform line of solder appears around the pipe at 

the end of the fittings. 

Copper piping used in domestic water service above grade shall be joined with 'Stay-Safe-50' or 'Silvabrite-100' 

no lead solder. 

Copper piping used in domestic water service below grade shall have brazed -or- silver soldered joints. 

When valves are being installed in copper piping, the non-metallic parts shall be removed to prevent the heat of 

soldering from damaging the valves. No heat shall be applied near where an excessive temperature may cause 

damage. 

Refrigeration piping: See "Refrigeration Piping Installation." 

Victaulic type couplings, fittings, and valves may be used for chilled water piping 2" and over when fabricated 

and installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 

Qualification of Welders: Welders performing work under this Contract shall be certified and qualified in 

accordance with tests prescribed by the National Certified Welding Bureau (NCWB) or by other approved test 

procedures using methodology and procedures covered in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 

IX, "Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Braziers, and Welding and Brazing 

Operators." 

Submit for approval the names, identification, and welder's assigned number, letter or symbol of welders 

assigned to this project. 

The assigned identification symbol shall be used to identify the work of each welder and shall be indelibly 

stamped immediately upon completion of each weld. 

Welders shall be tested and certified for all positions. 

Submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by each operator. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Any or all welders may be required to retake welding certification tests at the request of the owner's 

representative without additional expense. 

When so requested, a welder shall not be permitted to work as a welder on this project until he has been 

recertified in accordance with NCWB. 

Where piping 1-1/2 inches and smaller is to be butt or socket welded, submit 3 samples of test welds for 

approval. 

SCREWED CONNECTIONS: 

All pipe shall be reamed at the ends and free of all inside scale or burrs. Threads shall be cut clean and sharp, 

and to a length equal to 1-l/8 the length of the female thread receiving the pipe. The pipe shall be screwed in the 

full length of the female thread. 

Pipe joints shall be made tight with teflon thread tape or thread lubricant worked into male thread only. Surplus 

material shall be wiped off and the joint left neat and clean. Lubricant shall be powdered graphite and linseed oil, 

or plumbage and linseed oil. 

MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPING CONNECTIONS: (Heating hot water and chilled water systems only) 

When approved by the owner's representative, mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for 

piping systems 2-1/2" and above and having operating conditioning not exceeding 230 deg. F. excluding steam 

piping, domestic water piping, and any other service not recommended by manufacturer, instead of welded, 

flanged or threaded methods, and may also be used as unions, seismic joints, flexible connections, or vibration 

reducers. 

Couplings shall consist of one of more piece housing, synthetic rubber gasket, with nuts, bolts, locking pin, 

locking toggle or lugs to secure unit together. Housing shall be ASTM A-536 ductile cast iron or ASTM A-47 

malleable iron, hot dip galvanized or zinc electroplated. Coupling housing shall be painted with alkyd enamel 

paint. 

Gasket shall be molded of synthetic rubber in a central cavity, pressure-responsive configuration conforming to 

the pipe outside diameter and coupling housing. Gasket material shall be selected for the specific service as 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

Fittings shall be full flow fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings. Standard 

fittings shall be ASTM A-536 ductile cast iron or ASTM A-47 malleable iron. Standard steel fittings including 

large size elbows (16" - 24"), shall be forged steel conforming to ASTM A-106. Standard segmentally welded 

fittings shall be fabricated of Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe. 

AWWA cast iron fitting shall be ASTM A-48 Class 30-A gray cast iron or ASTM A-536 ductile cast iron, 

conforming to the requirements of AWWA/ANSI C-110. 

Outlet fittings for branches, gauges, meters or other specialty items shall be a standard mechanical product. 

Fittings for plain end steel pipe shall consist of cast housing with internal pipe stops, quarter turn positive locking 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



lugs, and self-contained, pressure-responsive gaskets. Housing shall be ASTM A-536 ductile cast iron or ASTM 

A-47 malleable iron, hot dip galvanized or zinc electroplated. Coupling housing shall be painted with an alkyd 

enamel paint. 

All mechanical grooved couplings shall be of the same manufacturer. Either flexible or rigid type to be used as 

required. 

Approved Manufacturers: Victaulic, Grinnell, or Central. 

PIPE GRADING: 

Piping shall be uniformly graded in direction of flow as noted below: 

PIPING FALL/RISE DIRECTION PER/RUN 

Rainwater 1" Down 8' 

Waste 4" & Smaller 1" Down 4' 

Vent 1" Up 4' 

Water 1" Up 40' 

Condensate Drip 1" Down 4' 

Heating Hot Water/ 

Glycol 

Chilled Water/ 

Glycol 

1" 

Up 40' 

1" Up 40' 

Refrigerant 1" Down 40' 

Natural Gas 1" Down 40' 

EQUIPMENT BASES: 

All pumps, compressors and other equipment shown on the plans shall be set on 4" high concrete housekeeping 

pads. The pads shall be furnished by the mechanical contractor. 

Roof curbs shall provide a free height from the roof membrane to the top of the curb of at least 12". All roof 

curbs and platforms, whether field built -or- factory furnished, shall have a wood nailer strip around the top 

perimeter for securing the roof membrane and attaching roof flashings. 

VIBRATION ISOLATION: 

All mechanical equipment over 5 H.P. shall be isolated in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE 

Handbook. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Care shall be taken by this contractor to prevent the transmission of vibration from equipment to building 

structure. Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connecting to pumps, air handling units, cooling 

towers, and other flexibly mounted equipment. 

Flexible connection shall be specifically designed to absorb noise and vibration and to prevent damage to 

equipment caused by piping stress. Unit construction shall consist of heavy bellows type neoprene rubber hose 

sections with stainless steel liners and attachments to match piping. Three (3) grooved flexible couplings may 

be substituted for vibration isolators on grooved pipe systems. 


PIPING SYSTEMS: 

All piping shall be in accordance with the American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM A-53. No foreign 

made piping or connections will be accepted in this construction. 

Culinary hot, cold, and hot water recirculating water above grade shall be Type "L" copper with soldered wrought 

copper fittings. "Pull T" systems will not be allowed. 

Rainwater and waste piping below slabs and outside building shall be standard weight cast iron pipe with M-G or 

tyseal gasketed fittings. 

Rainwater waste, and vent piping above grade shall be standard weight cast iron pipe with no-hub, tyseal, M-G, 

or A.B.I. 'Best' gasketed fittings for sizes 2" and larger; and galvanized Schedule 40 with tarred Durham drainage 

fittings for 1-1/2". 

Gas lines shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe. Fittings shall be standard black malleable screwed, or standard 

welding fittings where welding is required. All gas lines shall be installed in strict compliance with the local fuel 

supply company requirements. 

Gas lines located outside building and below finished grade shall be ASTM D2513 polyethylene plastic pipe. 

Fittings shall be ASTM D2513 polyethylene, butt-fusion type; and ASTM D2683, polyethylene socket-fusion type. 

Installation and piping material shall be in strict compliance with the Questar Gas company requirements. 

Heating hot water supply and return piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe. 

Condensate drip lines shall be Type "M" copper with soldered wrought fittings. 

Refrigeration piping shall be Type "L" copper with malleable copper fittings. Piping shall be specifically treated 

and sealed for refrigeration systems piping, similar to Mueller. 

NOTE: Pre-charged line sets will be permitted on refrigeration systems with rated capacities below 65,000 

BTUH. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 

General: 

All piping shall, as a minimum standard of performance, be supported per MSS SP-69, and generally as follows: 

Vertical Piping: 

Attachment - Vertical piping shall be secured at sufficiently close intervals to keep the pipe in alignment and to 

carry the full weight of the pipe and contents. Stacks shall be supported at their bases, and if over two (2) stories 

in height at each floor by approved metal floor clamps. 

Cast iron soil pipe shall be supported at not less than each story height and at its base. 

Screwed pipe (IPS) shall be supported at not less than every other story height. 

Copper tubing shall be supported at each story for piping one and one-half (1-1/2) inches in diameter and at not 

more than six (6) foot intervals for piping one and one-quarter (1-1/4) inches in diameter and smaller. Piping 

shall be wrapped with three wraps of vinyl tape to isolate pipe from ferrous pipe supports. 

Horizontal Piping: 

Supports - Horizontal piping shall be supported at sufficiently close intervals to keep it in alignment, prevent 

sagging, and to insure that the weight of the piping system is not transferred to equipment connections. 

Cast Iron Soil Pipe - Where joints occur, soil pipe shall be supported at not more than 5-foot intervals, except 

that where 10-foot pipe lengths are used, supports at 10-foot intervals are acceptable. Supports shall be placed 

within eighteen (18) inches of the hub or joint. No-hub joints and fittings shall be restrained with rods and clamps 

where required per manufacturer's recommendations. 

Screwed pipe (IPS) shall be supported at approximately 12-foot intervals. 

Copper tubing shall be supported at approximately 6-foot intervals for piping one and one-half inches and 

smaller in diameter and at 10-foot intervals for piping two inches and larger in diameter. 

Hangers shall be MSS-69 Type-1 for both bare and insulated pipe. Hangers shall be over-sized where required 

to accommodate insulation saddles and shields. 

Where roller type supports are used, they shall be MSS-69 Type-43 chair type or suspension type, as required. 

(Provide carbon steel pipe saddles on insulated pipes). 

Where piping is run adjacent to walls or steel columns, it shall be supported from steel brackets or vertical 

channel hangers. Channel systems shall be approved for each condition on an individual basis. 

Furnish all hangers, inserts, brackets, anchors, guides, sliding supports, etc., and all auxiliary steel necessary for 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



the installation. All supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook and painted with 

one shop coat of primer paint. 

Insulation inserts and MSS-69 Type-40 shields for cold surface piping will be provided under Section 15180 of 

these specifications. 

Pipe covering protection saddles, MSS-69 Type-39, shall be installed at all pipe hangers which support insulated 

"hot surface" piping. Saddles shall be tack welded to the piping and shall match the insulation thickness applied. 

All copper piping shall be securely supported from the building structure at intervals specified and/or as 

recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Hangers shall be provided with pads or cushions on the bearing 

surfaces to prevent contact between the pipe and hanger. 

All piping in mechanical equipment rooms shall be supported with spring cushion vibration control hangers per 

MSS-69 Fig. 48. 

Plumbers' tape, chain, or wire will not be permitted for pipe support. 

Piping placed underground shall be laid on a firm bed for its entire length. 

VALVES AND STRAINERS: 

All valves and strainers shall be by one manufacturer. Approved valve manufacturers are Stockham, Apollo, 

RP&C, Crane, Keytone, W.C. Norris, Grinnell, or Powell. Stockham, Apollo, and RP&C numbers are used for 

convenience. 

Heating, Chilled, and Domestic Cold Water: 

Gate Valves: 

Valves 2" and smaller shall be Stockham B-100, bronze, screwed, 200# WOG gate valve with solid wedge disc 

and rising stem. 

NOTE: If unable to use a rising stem valve because of insufficient clearance, use a Stockham B-110 nonrising 

stem valve. 

Globe Valves: 

Valves 2" and smaller shall be Stockham B-22-T, bronze, screwed, 200# WOG globe valve with a replaceable 

teflon disc and teflon packing. The disc shall be suitable for hot water up to 360 deg. F. at 150 psi. 

Check Valves: 

Valves 2" and smaller shall be Stockham B-321, bronze, screwed, Y-pattern 200# WOG swing check valve. 

Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be Stockham G-931. 

Butterfly Valves: 

Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be Stockham LG-712D & 3E lever iron body and disc, lug type, stainless steel 

stem, 200# WOG EPT Stockham LG-722D & 3E gear seat rated for 275 deg. F butterfly valve. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



NOTE: Valves 4" and smaller shall be equipped with the proper size 10 position Multi-lock hand lever. Valves 5" 

and larger shall be equipped with the proper size Extra Power Manual weather proof gear operator. 

Ball Valves: 

For cold domestic water service: Valves 2" and smaller shall be Apollo 70-100 bronze, screwed, 200# WOG, 

Gem ball valve with Buna-N rubber capsule. Watts B6000 or Apollo 70-100. 

For chilled water service as isolation or balancing valves: Valves 2" and smaller shall be Apollo 70-100, bronze, 

screwed, 200# WOG, Hydro Gem ball valve with EPT Nordel capsule. (If solder-joint ball valves are desired, 

use Apollo 70-200). NOTE: Valves must be suitable for temperature and pressure required in the individual 

application. 

Strainers: 

Strainers 2" and smaller shall be Style "T", iron body, screwed Y-pattern, 200# WOG, sediment separators with 

a 20-mesh Monel screen. 

All strainers shall be installed with fine mesh supplementary "construction screens" which shall remain in place 

while the system is flushed and chemically cleaned. The "construction strainer" basket shall be removed just 

prior to balancing the water systems. 

Provide blow-down ball valve on all strainers same size as strainer tapping. Apollo 78-100. 

NON-SLAMMING OR SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES: 

Types: Provide valves of the fully guided or cone-and-diaphragm types. 

Bodies: Provide flanged or wafer type bodies constructed of cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B; cast steel ASTM A 

216/A 216M, Class WCB; stainless steel, Type 304 or cast bronze ASTM B 61. 

Trim: Seats, discs and springs shall be constructed of 18-8 stainless steel or bronze complying with ASTM B 62. 

Seats may be of elastomers suitable for 250 degrees F. minimum continuous working temperature or not less 

than 50 degrees F. above the operating temperature of the system, whichever is higher. 

Mating Surfaces: Mating surfaces of closure faces shall be bronze or Type 316 or 17-4PH stainless steel or 

elastomer approved for the particular service and materials must be compatible to prevent electrolytic action. 

Pressure Loss: Pressure loss through the valves, measured in feet of water, shall not exceed 6/10 of the water 

velocity in feet per second. 

Bubble-Tight: Non-slamming and spring loaded check valves shall provide bubble-tight shut-off when handling 

water up to 250 degrees F. and 125 pounds per square inch differential pressure. Design shall prevent rubbing 

of seat materials when opening and closing. Poppet valves shall have conical springs. 

GENERAL DUTY VALVES & SPECIALTY COCKS: 

Cocks: 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Balancing cocks 1-1/2" and smaller shall be Crane No. 80E, bronze, screwed, 200# WOG. 

Balancing cocks 2" and larger shall be Crane No. 325, all iron, flanged 125# WOG. 

Gas cocks 2" and smaller shall be Crane No. 270, flat head, bronze screwed. 

Gage cocks shall be Crane No. 744, 1/4", bronze, screwed. 

Pet cocks shall be Crane No. 702, 1/4", bronze, screwed with lever handle. 

Try cocks shall be Crane No. 734, 3/8", bronze, screwed, 250# rated with stuffing box. 

Provide two complete sets of wrenches for all cocks and stops. 

VALVES FOR GROOVED END PIPE: 

General: 

Provide valves with pressure rating clearly marked on valve body. 

Unless otherwise specified provide valves of the same size as the upstream pipe size. 

Valves shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved end pipe products. 

Ball Valve: 

Ball valves 1-1/2" to 6" shall be Victaulic 721 "Vic-Ball" with bubble tight shut-off at 600 psi WOG or equal of 

Grinnell. Body/end cap shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 with Endurion corrosion resistant 

coating, stainless steel ball, TFE seats. 

Butterfly Valve: 

Butterfly valves 2" to 12" shall be Victaulic 700, 703, 704, 707 and "Series 300" with bubble tight shut-off at 200 

psig to 300 psig depending on style. Carbon steel body or ductile iron. Zinc plated or PPS coated body, 

aluminum bronze, chrome plated ductile iron, stainless steel or encapsulated synthetic elastomer coated disc. 

Dual piece stem or drive hub and trunnion mounted disc. Handle shall be std on-off, latchlock, infinitely variable 

or gear operated as required for intended service. 

In systems requiring insulation, all butterfly valves shall have extended necks. Valve neck must be designed 

with sufficient length to accept 2" of insulation without inhibiting actuator in any way. 

Swing Check Valve: 

Check valves 2" to 4" shall be Victaulic 712 fabricated with ASTM A-536 ductile cast iron housing, bonnet cap, 

and bonnet closure. 300 psi working pressure. Full port opening, 316 stainless steel clapper, EPDM disc seat 

permanently bonded to the valve body. 

Non-Slam Check Valve: 

Check valves 4" to 12" shall be Victaulic 710 or 711, 714, or 715 "Vic-Check II". Silent, springloaded, 400 psig 

wp. ASTM A-536 ductile cast iron or ASTM A-47 malleable iron housing, aluminum discs, 316 stainless steel 

shaft and spring, nylon bushings, EPDM disc seat permanently bonded to the valve body. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



PIPE SPECIALTIES FOR GROOVED END PIPE: 

Strainer: 

Strainers 2" to 12" shall be Victaulic 730 "Vic-Strainer". Straight through pattern, ASTM A536 ductile cast iron 

body with grooved ends, 304 stainless steel 20 mesh screen, 0.033" openings. Provide ball valve on drain 

connection and run drain line to nearest floor drain. 

Suction Diffuser: 

Suction diffusers shall be Victaulic 731, one piece ASTM A-536 ductile cast iron or ASTM A-47 malleable iron 

body with outlets drilled, tapped, and plugged either side for pressure or temperature gauges and at the bottom 

for drain connection. Access end cap shall be of the same material as the body. 

Basket shall be of type 304 stainless steel 0.041" wire in a woven no. 6 mesh wire screen with 0.126" opening, 

welded securely to a heavy frame of like material, in a convoluted configuration. 

Flange connection to pump shall mate to ANSI Class 125 or Class 150 pump flange. 

Dielectric Waterway: 

Dielectric waterways shall be Victaulic 47 or Perfection Corporation, ASTM A-120, standard weight, galvanized 

steel, Schedule 40 pipe with grooved by threaded ends. PVC lining permanently bonded to the interior of the 

pipe. 

Flow Metering System: 

Flow measuring systems shall be Victaulic 733 Venturis Sensor or 734, 734S Orifice/Indicators. Grooved end 

type designed to accept grooved mechanical coupling without field preparation. Meters and sensors are 

designed for 250 psig working pressure. Venturis sensors to be compatible with systems having flows of 2 GPM 

and larger. To be used in systems that require water balancing. Orifice/Indicators shall be used for systems 

requiring flow measuring devices. 

Vic-O-Let: 

Strapless outlet shall be Victaulic 923 cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 or malleable iron 

conforming to ASTM A-47. Rated at 300 psi working pressure. Gasket shall be for the specific service as 

recommended by the manufacturer. Collar shall be hot rolled, pickled and oiled steel conforming to ASTM 

A-569. 

Vic-O-Well: 

Strapless outlet shall be Victaulic 924 cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-47. Rated at 300 psi working 

pressure. 6" insertion well. Gasket shall be for the specific service as recommended by the manufacturer. 

Collar shall be hot roller, pickled and oiled steel conforming to ASTM A-569. 

AUTOMATIC VALVES AND WELLS: 

The mechanical subcontractor shall install the automatic temperature control valves, temperature sensing wells, 

and flow switches, as directed by the automatic temperature control subcontractor. 

UNIONS: 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Ground joint unions shall be installed on pipe 2-1/2" and under where indicated on drawings. Whenever piping 

is connected to a major piece of apparatus, unions shall be provided as near as practical on each side of the 

apparatus. 

ISOLATION FITTINGS: 

Approved isolation fittings shall be installed at the junction of all copper and steel piping to prevent electrolytic 

action. Fittings shall be as manufactured by Walter Vallett Co., Corrosion Services, or approved equal. 

THERMOMETERS: 

General: Provide liquid-in-glass type thermometers unless bimetal dial type is required due to space limitations 

or other specific conditions. 

Scale and Dial: Provide liquid-in-glass thermometers of the organic liquid type having a nominal scale length of 

not less than 7 inches. Provide bimetal dial thermometers with a nominal 5-inch dial size graduated through a 

minimum arc of 270 degrees. Provide a recessed dial so that graduated portion and pointer are in the same 

plane. 

Range: Temperature range shall be as shown on the drawings or as specified. Chilled water system 20 

degrees F. to 120 degrees F. 

Case: Provide liquid-in-glass type thermometer with an aluminum alloy or steel case. Provide bimetal dial 

thermometers with all exposed metal parts, including the case and stem made of 300 Series stainless steel, all 

welded construction. 

Accuracy and Calibration: Bimetal dial thermometers shall have zero adjustment for recalibration and shall have 

an accuracy of plus or minus one percent of span through the complete range. Liquid-in-glass thermometers 

used for indicating shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 degree F. Unless otherwise required in other 

sections of the specifications, thermometers for commissioning tests shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 

0.25 degree F. 

Thermometers measuring temperature for energy calculations shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 0.1 

degree F. 

Thermometer Wells: Provide pipe line liquid-in-glass thermometers with a union connection, tapered bulb 

chamber and matching taper on well. Provide bimetal dial thermometers with a well to match bulb chamber. 

Provide wells for insulated pipe of the extension neck type suitable for insulation thickness. Provide wells 

fabricated of bronze, brass or 316 stainless steel suitable for the fluid or gas in the pipe. 

Stem: Provide stems with a minimum length of 2-1/2 inches immersion which shall be increased in length as 

necessary to reach the center lines of the pipes in which they are installed. 

Adjustment: Provide straight or angle pattern adjustable type thermometers as required to facilitate readings. 

Thermometers shall be Palmer, Trerice, Marsh or Weiss. Install all thermometers so as to be easily readable 

from the floor. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



PRESSURE GAUGES: 

General: Provide pressure gauges which comply with ANSI B40.1. 

Dials: Provide dials not less than 4-1/2 inches in diameter, except that packaged equipment may be provided 

with manufacturer's standard gauges of equal accuracy. 

Ranges: Select operating ranges so that during normal service the gauge pointer will be at the approximate 

midpoint of the gauge scale. 

Refrigerant Gauges: Provide refrigerant pressure gauges with corresponding temperature scales for the 

particular refrigerant sensed. 

Accuracy: Pressure gauges used for commissioning of other equipment shall have a minimum accuracy of 3 

percent of span. 

Gauge Cocks: All gauges shall be furnished with gauge cocks and pressure snubbers. 

Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Trerice, or U.S. Gage. 

PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS: 

Plugs shall be brass body type with Neoprene, Nordel, or Vitron self-closing valve (to suit temperatures of fluid in 

pipe). Test plugs shall be Pete's Plug or approved substitute. Furnish six pressure and six temperature 

instruments to Owner to permit reading pressures and temperatures. 

FLOW MEASURING AND BALANCING SYSTEMS: 

Furnish and install complete the Venturi and calibrated orifice Flow Metering Systems as shown on the 

drawings. 

This shall be a coordinated system with individual Venturi Flow Stations supplied by one manufacturer and each 

individual calibrated orifice supplied by one manufacturer. 

On pipe sizes 3/4-inch diameter and smaller, provide calibrated balancing valves on runouts to fan coil units, fin 

tube radiation, convectors and reheat coils. 

Fittings shall be of the combination balancing and shut-off type with the balancing device positioned by an Allen 

set screw or other approved method which permits closing of the valves without disturbing its balanced position. 

Bodies may be of the globe or "Y" type with contour flow plug or approved equivalent. 

Provide a graduated dial or other device to indicate the valve setting. 

Gland shall permit packing under pressure. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Materials and construction shall be as specified for water valves sizes 1-1/2-inch and smaller. 

On sizes 3/4-inch and smaller ends may be sweat or compression type. 

Each station shall be complete with quick disconnect valves and safety shut-off valves, metal identification tag 

on chain giving pipe size, meter series, station identification, and meter reading at specified flow rate. Metering 

stations shall be selected so that design flow rate shall be between 10 and 40 inches of water pressure 

differential with permanent pressure loss of not more than 25% of indicated flow rate differential pressure. 

The calibrated flow metering valves shall be selected to deliver the rated flows at the mid-point of their set-point 

range. 

Venturi Flow Metering System shall be by Barco Engineering Company or Robertson. Calibrated orifice system 

shall be Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Flow-Set, or Taco. 

GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS: 

Furnish and install, as required, approved type gas pressure regulators in gas piping ahead of appliance and 

equipment. Regulators located outside of building shall have weatherproof vent with bugproof screen. 

Regulators located inside of building shall be vented thru the roof with approved thread on bug screen. 

Approved manufacturers of gas regulators are Fisher and Reliance. 

V-BELT DRIVES: 

Capacity of V-belt drives at rated RPM shall be not less than 150 percent of motor nameplate horsepower rating. 

V-belt drive combinations shall be limited to A, B, C, and fractional horsepower belts. 3V, 5V, and 8V belts and 

sheaves shall not be used. 

Drives requiring single belt application shall be of the adjustable pitch type. Multiple belt drives shall be of the 

non-adjustable type. All fixed pitch sheaves, including single groove fan sheaves, shall be of the bused type. 

Fixed bore sheaves will not be acceptable for non-adjustable pitch sheaves. 

All belt drives shall be fitted with belt guards. 

MAGNETIC STARTERS: 

Contractor furnishing pre-wired "packaged equipment" with 1/2 HP and larger motors shall furnish 

factory-mounted magnetic starters. Magnetic starters shall provide both overload and undervoltage protection 

and shall have integral hand-off-auto switch, auxiliary contacts, and pilot. All motors installed under this contract 

shall have a disconnect switch in the immediate vicinity of the motor. Starters on three phase motors shall 

protect all three legs of the circuit. Starters to be Cutler-Hammer, Square "D", or Westinghouse. 

Starters for all motors on other than "packaged equipment" will be furnished and installed by the electrical 

contractor. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Starters shall be two-speed type or explosion-proof type where required. 

Provide a heater index bound in the mechanical section of the O & M manuals for all starters furnished on the 

project. 

MOTORS: 

Motors shall be furnished and installed under the applicable Mechanical Sections of the Specifications. 

Each motor shall be provided with a nameplate for the electrical characteristics shown on the Drawings or as 

otherwise noted. 

Motors shall be constructed and rated to deliver full nameplate capacity at the project altitude. 

Horsepower shall be at least equal to that shown on the drawings. Where equipment is submitted and approved 

for the installation which requires larger motor sizes than shown, the wire and starter sizes shall be increased 

and means provided for operation and control suitable for the larger motors with no increase in cost to the 

Owner. 

Unless otherwise specified, or required for controller sequencing, all motors over 5 HP shall be premium 

efficiency type, and all fractional HP single phase motors 1/2 HP & under shall be permanent split capacitor 

(PSC) type. 

Premium efficiency motors shall be based on CEE premium efficiency criteria for OPD motors at 1800 RPM. 

HORSEPOWER NEMA PREMIUM EFFICIENCY 

5 89.5% 

7.5 91.0% 

10 91.7% 

15 93.0% 

20 93.0% 

25 93.6% 

30 94.1% 

40 94.1% 

50 94.5% 

Motors for V-belt drives shall be provided with cast iron or steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device 

and shall be isolated by rubber-in-shear devices. 

Motors shall have sufficient capacity to start and operate the machine it drives without exceeding the motor 

nameplate rating at the speed specified or at any speed and load which may be obtained by the drive actually 

furnished. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Motors provided with automatic control shall be capable of making as frequent starts as the control device may 

demand. Motors not provided with automatic control shall be capable of making not less than 4 starts per hour. 

All belt-connected motors, regardless of size, shall be equipped with shafts and bearings that will withstand both 

the normal belt pull of the drive furnished and the momentary or continuous overloads due to acceleration of 

incorrect belt tension. 

Motors shall be air cooled, and shall be guaranteed to operate continuously at 115% of full load with temperature 

rise in any part not to exceed 40 degrees C above the ambient air temperature. 

Motors shall be open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan cooled type as required, and shall be commercially 

dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment. 

Motors shall be selected for quiet operation. Sound power levels shall be within NEMA MGI-12.49. 

Motors shall comply with requirements of ANSI C 50, NEMA MG-1, and all NEMA standards. 

Motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall have characteristics which are fully compatible with the 

drives to which they are connected. Provide written confirmation of coordination with VFD supplier. 

Approved Manufacturers: Allis-Chalmers, Century, Gould, Lincoln, Reliance, Westinghouse, U.S. 

HEATING CABLE: 

Furnish and install complete electrical heating cable on all pipe and fittings which may be exposed to freezing. 

Heat cable shall be of the self-regulating low temperature type with a heat output of 5 watts/ft. (17 BTUH/ft), and 

a weather-proof PVC sheath. The heating cable shall automatically adjust heat output to correspond with the 

heat loss rate. Cable shall be UL and FM approved for use in rainwater downspout ice melting applications, and 

for freeze Protection on exterior piping systems. 

Cable system shall be furnished with power termination, end seal kits, splice and tee fittings, and all accessories 

required for a complete installation. 

Approved Manufacturers: Thermon or prior approved equal. 

SEISMIC RESTRAINTS: 

All Division 15 equipment, piping, and ductwork shall be anchored and seismically restrained as required by the 

UBC for Seismic Zone 3, NFPA 90A (current edition), UL Standard 181, and the SMACNA Guidelines for 

seismic restraints of mechanical systems. 

The Division 15 contractor shall be responsible for supplying and installing equipment, vibration isolators, flexible 

connections, rigid steel frames, anchors, inserts, hangers and attachments, supports, seismic snubbers and 

bracing to comply with Seismic Zone 3 of the International Building Code. 

All supports, hangers, bases, anchorage and bracing for all isolated equipment shall be designed by a 

professional engineer employed by the restraint manufacturer, qualified with seismic experience in bracing for 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



mechanical equipment. 

Shop drawings submitted for earthquake bracing and anchors shall bear the Engineer's signed professional 

seal. 

The above qualified seismic engineer shall determine specific requirements on equipment anchorage and 

restraints, locations and sizes based on shop drawings for the mechanical equipment which have been 

submitted, reviewed and accepted by the Owner's representative for this project. 

The Division 15 contractor shall require all equipment suppliers to furnish equipment that meets the seismic 

code, with bases designed to receive seismic bracing and/or anchorage. All isolated mechanical equipment 

bracing to be used in the project shall be designed for the equipment shop drawings and certified correct by the 

equipment manufacturer for Seismic Zone 3 with direct anchorage capability. 

Submit shop drawings, calculations, and printed data for the following items under provisions of the General 

Conditions of the Contract: 

1. Complete engineering calculations and shop drawings for all vibration and seismic requirements for all 

equipment to be isolated and restrained. 

2. The professional seal of the engineer who is responsible for the design of the Vibration and Seismic 

restraint System for isolated equipment. 

3. Details for all the isolators and seismic bracing with snubbers proposed for items in this specification 

and on the drawings. 

4. Details for steel frames, concrete inertia bases, and anchors to be used in conjunction with the isolation 

of the items in this specification and drawings. 

5. Clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators, seismic bracing anchors and 

snubbers. 

6. The location of all restraints of pipes and ducts with the locations shown on a floor plan noting the size 

and type of anchorage and restraint to be used. 

Snubbers: 

Snubbers shall be double acting and consist of interlocking steel members restrained by replaceable shock 

absorbent elastomeric materials a minimum of 3/4 inch thick. 

Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between hard and resilient material of not less than 1/8 inch nor 

more than 1/4 inch. 

A one "g" minimum vertical and lateral level shall be used in the design of all snubbers restraining isolated 

equipment. 

Design and Installation: 

General: All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork shall be braced, anchored, snubbed or supported to 

withstand seismic disturbances and remain operational. Provide all engineering, labor, materials and equipment 

for protection against seismic disturbances as specified herein. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



All equipment not anchored directly to the floors shall be restrained by cables as designed and furnished by the 

Restraint Manufacturer. 

Isolated Equipment: All vibration isolated equipment shall be mounted on rigid steel frames or concrete bases 

as described in the vibration control specifications unless the equipment manufacturer certified direct attachment 

capability. Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all-directional seismic snubbers that are 

double acting and located as close to the vibration isolators as possible to facilitate attachment both to the base 

and the structure. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. 

Piping: All isolated and non-isolated piping 2-1/2" I.D. and larger shall be protected in all planes by restraints to 

accommodate thermal movement as well as restrain seismic motion. Where necessary the piping restraints 

shall be resiliently attached to the piping with vibration dampening inserts to prevent the transmission of vibration 

to the building structure. Locations shall be as scheduled and shall include but not be limited to: 

At all drops to equipment and at flexible connections. 

At all 45 deg. or greater changes in direction of pipe. 

At horizontal runs of pipe, not to exceed 30 ft. O.C. spacing. 

Piping shall be restrained by a cable restraining system using a minimum of two cables at all restraint points. 

Piping in mechanical rooms shall have additional restraints as scheduled. 

Non-Isolated Equipment: The restraint systems for all non-isolated equipment are to be installed to resist 

stresses produced by lateral forces according to Sec. 2312 of the Uniform Building Code with an Occupancy 

Importance Factor of 1.5, a Seismic Zone Factor of Z = 0.75 for Zone 3 and a Horizontal Force Factor for 

Elements of Structures and Nonstructural Components of Cp = 0.3. In addition, the vertical forces restraint 

requirement shall be half the value of the horizontal forces. All equipment not anchored directly to floors shall 

be restrained by cables as designed and furnished by the Restraint Manufacturer. 

Acceptable Manufacturers and Suppliers for Non-Isolated Systems: 

1. Mason Industries, Inc. 

2. Korfund 

3. Amber/Booth Company 

4. Vibration Mountings and Control Company 

Manufacture and design of restraints and anchors for internally isolated equipment shall be the responsibility of 

the manufacturer of the vibration isolators furnished with the equipment. 

Piping, ductwork, and equipment without moving parts shall be restrained as shown and noted on the drawings. 

Locations shown are approximate and shall be coordinated with other trades and with the structural engineer at 

the job site. 

Field Services: 

The seismic restraint manufacturer's engineer shall inspect the final installation and shall certify that all 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



seismic restraints have been installed per manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes and 

standards. 

CHEMICAL CLEANING: 

Prior to operating any heating systems, all piping systems and components shall be chemically cleaned and 

flushed by an experienced chemical cleaning service approved by the owner's representative. 

Pipe Exterior: Wash and wipe pipe exterior to remove construction dirt, loose scale and flux. 

Pipe Interior: Flush pipe interior with clean water. Continue flushing until the piping system runs clean. After 

flushing inspect strainer screens, refrigeration machine water boxes, piping low points, and tank drains to 

determine the presence of construction debris. If debris is found, disassemble equipment and remove debris. 

Reflush the system and re-inspect. 

Do not operate centrifugal pumps until system has been cleaned and flushed. 

Provide written certification of the chemical cleaning with dates, duration, and chemical concentrations used. 

GLYCOL FILL SYSTEMS: 

Furnish and install the glycol fill system detailed on the drawings. 

The fill system shall be complete with 30 gallon translucent polypropylene tank with cover, high pressure 

metering pump with controls, liquid level alarm sensors to sound local alarm on high -or- low tank level and 

prevent pump operation on low liquid level. 

Controls shall cycle on feed pump when system pressure falls below low pressure set point and shall cycle off 

when system pressure exceeds high pressure set point. 

Provide operating controls for glycol feed unit on the heating water system. 

Provide (1) hand pump to owner for transfer of glycol from drums to tank. 

Electrical contractor to provide a 110 volt duplex outlet for glycol feed and reclaim systems and a 110 volt duplex 

outlet for each receptor pump. Wiring of system and associated conduit to be by Division 15000. Control 

contractor to provide and install all conduit and wiring for all low voltage wiring. All control wiring to be in 

conformance with NEC and Division 16. 3/4" conduit minimum. 

System shall be Power Engineering, Alpine Technical Services, West Chemical, or Pulsafeeder. 

GLYCOL FILL: 

This contractor shall furnish all propylene glycol solution for the chilled water system to provide a 30% volumetric 

concentration. Glycol solution shall be Dowfrost HD or Jeffcool P150 low toxicity polypropylene with extra 

strength corrosion inhibitors and colored dye for identification. This contractor shall provide 30 gallons of 30% 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



glycol solution in addition to the 30% solution initial fill, for use in maintaining the system. 

Contractor shall provide complete system analysis at the time of final inspection. 

Fill water used for mixing glycol shall be of an approved level of chlorides and sulfates as allowed by glycol 

manufacturer. Soft water shall not be used to mix glycol. 

GREASING AND OILING: 

Prior to placing the equipment in operation, the bearings on all motors, fans, pumps, etc., shall be properly 

lubricated with a lubricant suitable for the service. 

Lubrication instruction tags are to be left on "all" bearings and equipment for the Owner's future use. Only 

lubricants recommended by the equipment manufacturers shall be used. 

It shall be incumbent on the contractor to operate the building equipment used for temporary heat, etc., in a 

prudent manner to insure that when the building is turned over to the Owner all equipment is in a "first-class" 

condition. 

Equipment shall not be operated unless: 

1. All safety devices are installed and functioning properly. 

2. Filters are in place on fan systems. Filters to be new and clean. 

3. Equipment is properly greased and oiled. 

4. Belts and drives are properly aligned and adjusted. 

The contractor shall maintain a current "equipment maintenance" chart in the construction shack at all times. 

This chart shall be posted in a conspicuous place and shall include all items of maintenance necessary for 

proper operation of the equipment. 

Equipment used for temporary heat and cooling shall, if requested by the Contracting officer, have tube bundles 

pulled by contractor for Owner inspection prior to acceptance. 

VALVE TAGGING: 

All valves shall be designated by distinguishing numbers and letters on required charts and diagrams. The 

contractor shall furnish and install approved brass tags for all designated items, which numbers and letters on 

the tags corresponding to those on the charts and diagrams. 

Brass tags shall be not less than 1-1/2" diameter with depressed black filled numbers not less than 1/2" high and 

black filled letters not less than 1/4" high. Tags shall be securely fastened to valves with approved brass "S" 

hooks, or brass jack chain, in a manner to permit easy reading. Do not attach to valve wheel. Brass tags shall 

be as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Company, New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. 

Each valve shall have an identifying number identifying the unit. Standard identifications may be used for 

identifying type of service or fluid in pipe. The contractor shall submit his system of identification to the Owner's 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



epresentative for approval prior to ordering. Any work done without this approval is done at the contractor's risk. 

Charts of all valves shall be furnished to the Owner's representative by the contractor. 

A chart to be mounted in a frame with clear glass front, and secured on the wall in the main Mechanical 

Equipment Room. 

Second chart shall be prepared for use outside of the equipment room, and to be provided with an approved 

heavy transparent plastic closure for permanent protection. Two (2) holes to be punched at top of plastic closure 

to allow for affixing approximately an 8" length of nickel plated bead chain. Each hole to be reinforced by means 

of a small brass or nickel grommet. Plastic closure shall be as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Company, 

New Haven, Conn., or approved equal. 

Identify all valves. A sample identification shall be as follows: 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



VALVE IDENTIFICATION CHART 

NUMBER DESCRIPTION LOCATION NORMAL 

POSITION 

1. Cold Water Supply to Water Heater Mech. Room #121 Open 

2. Cold Water Supply to Hose Room #13 Open 

3. Cold Water Supply to Equip. in Room 

#12 

Room #18 Open 

4. Sprinkling System Drain Valve Tunnel Below Room #115 Closed 

5. Hot Water Supply to Toilet Room 

#212 

6. Air Vents - Cooling Coil #12 (2 

required) 

7. Heating Hot Water Balancing Valve 

(Southwest Zone) 

Mechanical Equipment & Ductwork: 

Chase #210 Open 

Fan Room 3122 Closed 

Above Ceiling Room #412 Marked On 

Valve 

All mechanical equipment, including meters, fans, pumps, relocated equipment, and other devices shall be 

identified with signs made of laminated plastic 1/8" or larger engraved letters. Signs shall be securely attached 

by rustproof screws or some other permanent means (no adhesives). 

Information on sign shall include name of equipment, rating, maintenance instructions, and any other important 

data not included on factory attached nameplate. 

Signs shall be attached to equipment so they can be easily read. 

Identify all ducts exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in ducts and pipe chases. Sample duct 

identification shall be as follows: 

"Cold Duct - High Pressure - To Second Floor System" 

"Exhaust Duct - Toilet Room - To EF-3" 

"Ventilation Air Duct - To Utility Room #228" 

Ducts shall be labeled at all wall penetrations and at connections to equipment. 

PAINTING: 

Mechanical Contractor: All equipment which is to be furnished in factory prefinished conditions by the 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



mechanical contractor shall be left without mark, scratch, or impairment to finish upon completion of job. Any 

necessary refinishing to match original shall be done. Do not paint over nameplates, serial numbers, or other 

identifying marks. 

Mechanical Contractor: Spot painting for application of pipe and equipment identification markers. 

Mechanical Contractor: Gas piping on roof and exterior walls shall be painted gray with two coats of U. V. 

resistant coating. 

Painting Contractor: All insulated piping and all piping in equipment rooms of finished areas shall be painted, as 

required by the painting specifications. Colors to be selected by owner. 

Coding, Pipe Identification & Painting: 

All pipes are to be labeled and color coded with contents clearly identified and arrows indicating direction of flow. 

Pipes shall be identified at the following locations: 

1. Adjacent to each valve. 

2. At every point of entry and exit where piping passes thru wall or floor. 

3. Every 50 feet on long continuous lines. 

4. On each riser and junction. 

5. Adjacent to all special fittings or devices (regulating valves, etc.) 

6. Connection to equipment. 

7. Every 50 feet on roof mounted piping. 

Apply markers to they can be read from floor. 

Labels and markers shall be of the self-sticking, all temperature permanent type as manufactured by W. H. 

Brady Co., 727 West Glendale Avenue, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, or Seton Name Plate Corp., 592 Boulevard, New 

Haven, Connecticut. 

Pipe color coding shall be uniform throughout. 

Background colors shall be as follows: 

Yellow: Dangerous Materials (high pressure steam, natural gas condensate, etc.) 

Red: Fire Protection Equipment (fire sprinkler water, fire protection water) 

Bright Blue: Protective Materials (filtered water) 

Green: Safe Materials (heating water, cold water, instrument air, sanitary sewer, etc.) 

Letters of identification legend shall be 2" high for pipes 3" and larger, and 1" high for pipes 2-1/2" and under. 

Markers shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



On chalky and loose insulation, soft, porous, fiber-filled or fiberglass coverings, a spiral wrap of pipe banding 

tape shall be made around the circumference of the pipe. Sufficient spiral wraps shall be made to accommodate 

the horizontal dimension of the pipe marker. 

On bare pipes, painted pipes, and pipes insulated with a firm covering, pipe banding tape matching the 

background color of the marker shall be used for 360 deg. color coding. After applying pipe markers, wrap pipe 

banding tape around pipe at each end of marker. Tape should cover 1/4" to 1/2" of each end of marker, and 

should overlap approximately 1/2" to 1" on itself. Be sure pipe surface is dry and free of dirt or grease before 

applying markers or banding tape. 

Stenciling may be used in lieu of the above labels and markers if finished application gives the same overall 

appearance, that is that stenciling is applied over a background color. If stenciling is used, letter heights, 

background colors, banding, and arrow shall be as specified above. Submit sample to Owner's representative 

before proceeding with work. 

Ceiling Markers: 

Use round color coded stickers on all accessible ceiling grid to indicate location of valves and dampers. 

Color code as follows: Yellow HVAC 

Green Plumbing 

Blue Air 

White Duct valves 

Orange Electrical devices 

Red Fire 


COORDINATION: 

All equipment and piping shall be arranged to allow for easy maintenance and access to service valves. 

Provide valves and unions or flanges at all pieces of equipment to allow maintenance. 

Install all automatic valves, sensor well, flow switches, etc., as directed by the control contractor. 

TESTING: 

All piping shall be tested in accordance with Section 15042 prior to applying insulation or concealing in partitions, 

wall, etc. 

ACCESS: 

All valves and equipment shall be located to allow easy access for inspection, service and maintenance, test and 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



alance, and operation. If valves are installed in inaccessible locations it shall be this contractor's responsibility 

to furnish and install access doors of a type approved by the owner's representative. 

Locate piping, valves, etc., to allow easy access to and maintenance of equipment. Do not block walkways, filter 

access, maintenance access, or tube-pull space in equipment rooms. 

LOCATIONS & ARRANGEMENTS: 

All pressure gages shall be so installed as to be easily readable from an eye level 5' -6" above the floor. 

Test plugs on flow measuring stations shall be unobstructed, and shall be arranged in the piping per 

manufacturer's recommendations. 

All equipment and accessories shall be installed to facilitate proper service and maintenance in compliance with 

the manufacturer's recommendations. 

WIRING BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR: 

It is the intent of these specifications that all line voltage electrical power and control wiring, and power 

connections to equipment, be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor unless otherwise specified or 

shown on the mechanical drawings. 

The mechanical contractor shall coordinate actual job-site power requirements of mechanical equipment being 

furnished by him with the electrical contractor prior to installation of power wiring and electrical equipment. 

The electrical contractor shall provide necessary wiring to electric heat tape as required, and shall coordinate 

with the mechanical contractor the location and capacity of required circuits. 

When mechanical system components are furnished with remote mounted control panels, alarm bells, 

alternators, etc. the electrical contractor shall run all required line voltage (power and control) wiring as directed 

by the mechanical contractor. It shall be the mechanical contractor's responsibility to coordinate the work and 

provide the necessary wiring diagrams. 

When exhaust fans are provided which are not controlled by the ATC contractor, they shall be wired by the 

electrical contractor to local line voltage wall switches. The wall switch locations shall be coordinated with the 

owner's representative. 

STORAGE AND INSTALLATION OF MOTORS: 

Handle motors carefully to prevent damage, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged motors or 

components; replace with new. 

Store motors and components in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and 

physical damage. 

Install motors where indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's drawings and in 

accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Install each direct-connected motor such that it is securely mounted in accurate alignment. The drive must be 

free from both angular and parallel misalignment when both motor and driven machine are operating at normal 

temperatures. Provide each belt-connected motor with a securely mounted adjustable base to permit installation 

and adjustment of belts. 

INSTALLATION OF ABOVE GROUND PIPING: 

Provide piping systems of sizes indicated on the drawings. Systems shall be installed complete. 

Install piping systems in conformance with ANSI B31. 

Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction of the piping systems. 

Provide offsets and swing joint connections at coils, pumps and other equipment to eliminate undue strain at the 

equipment connections. 

1. Connect flanges and tack weld piping systems in place before full circumferential welds are made. 

2. Springing of piping at equipment connections will not be permitted. 

3. The use of "cold-spring" is not permitted. 

Branch connections shall be made at the top or at a 45 degree angle above the centerline. 

Install water piping with a pitch or slope of not less than 1-inch in 40 feet. 

1. Provide 3/4-inch diameter plugged drain valves at each low point. 

High Points: At each high point of the piping system provide a 3/8-inch diameter plugged globe valve. 

1. Where high points are located in an inaccessible position, provide a 3/8-inch diameter bleed line from 

the high point of the piping system and extend to an approved location, with access. Anchor bleed 

piping and provide 3/8-inch diameter globe valve. 

Support, anchor, and guide piping systems to preserve piping flexibility and the isolation effects of sound and 

vibration isolation hangers. 

Conform to the welding and welder qualification requirements paragraph of this Section. 

1. Perform welding in conformance with ANSI B31.1. 

2. Perform welding in ambient temperatures above 0 degrees F. 

3. Ream and clean ends of piping. 

4. Support piping, align and tack weld making allowance for pipe pitch and insulation. Temporarily block 

piping at hangers. 

5. Use welding pipe clamps on piping 4-inch diameter and larger, and verify alignment before welding. 

All installed pipe lines shall be straight, free from dents, scars and burrs, with ends reamed smooth and shall 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



emain straight against strains tending to cause distortion during system operation. The Contractor shall make 

proper allowance for pipe line expansion and contraction so that no unsightly distortion, noise, damage or 

improper operation will occur. 

Piping shall be run in a neat and efficient manner and shall be neatly organized. Piping shall be run parallel or at 

right angles to the building walls or construction. The Contractor shall study the general, electrical, and other 

drawings to eliminate conflict of piping with structure, sheet metal, lighting, or other services. Unless specified 

otherwise, no piping shall be exposed in a finished room, and all changes in direction shall be made with fittings. 

All piping shall be clean and free from acids and loose dirt when installed. 

Temporary pipe plugs of rags, wool, cottons, waste or similar materials shall not be used. 

All piping shall be so arranged to not interfere with removal of filters, tube bundles, or other equipment or devices 

and shall not block access openings, etc. 

Piping shall be arranged to facilitate equipment maintenance. 

Flanges or unions shall be provided in the piping at connections to all items of equipment. 

All piping shall be so installed to insure noiseless circulation. 

All valves and specialties shall be so placed to permit easy operation and access, and all valves shall be 

regulated and adjusted at the completion of the work. 

JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS: 

Mechanical Grooved Pipe Couplings: 

Pipe shall be prepared in accordance with the latest edition of the manufacturer's published standard, 

ANSI/AWWA C-606, UL, FM, NFPA, or other applicable standards. 

Steel pipe shall be grooved in accordance with the manufacturer's standard specification. Standard weight pipe 

shall be roll grooved without metal removal or square cut grooved. Light wall pipe shall be roll grooved without 

metal removal. 

Operating conditions shall not exceed temperature range of the gasket or valve lining selected and working 

pressures shown in the coupling manufacturer's current product specifications. 

Hole cut pipe shall have a machine cut hole at a predetermined position, on the centerline of the pipe, of a size 

to receive the housing locating collar, in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. 

Couplings, fittings, valves, and pipe shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published 

instructions. 

Pipe shall be checked to be certain it is sufficiently free of indentations, projections, grooves, weld seams or roll 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



marks on the exterior of the pipe over the gasket seating area to assure a leak tight seat for the gasket, that pipe 

ends are square cut and that end preparation is in accordance with manufacturer's published standards. 

Gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be checked to be certain gasket supplied is suited to the 

intended service. 

Thoroughly lubricate the gasket exterior including the lips and/or pipe ends and housing interiors. Lubricant shall 

be approved by the gasket manufacturer. 

No pipe length shall be left unsupported between any two couplings. 

GROOVED PIPE SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION: 

All pipe specialties in a grooved pipe system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published 

instruction. 

Strainers shall be installed on the inlet side of all circulating pumps and automatic control valves and as shown 

on the drawings. 

Suction diffusers shall be installed at the inlet of all floor mounted circulating pumps. 

Dielectric waterways shall be installed between all dissimilar metal pipes. 

Before piping system has been tested and again before the piping system has been put into service, inspect 

screens in each strainer and suction diffuser. Clean all dirty screens. 

After piping system has been put into service and run for approximately 200 hours, re-inspect all screens in 

strainers and suction diffuser and remove start-up screen in suction diffuser. 

Venturis flow sensors on all sizes shall be installed with a minimum straight pipe requirement of 5 diameters 

upstream and 2 downstream. Orifice/indicators flow meters for sizes 2-1/2" to 4" have a minimum straight pipe 

requirement of 5 diameters upstream and 2 downstream. For sizes 5" and up the straight pipe requirement is 10 

diameters upstream and 4 downstream. 

VALVE INSTALLATION: 

After piping system has been tested and put into service, but before final testing, adjusting and balance, inspect 

each valve for possible leak. Open and close each valve to verify proper operation. 

REFRIGERATION PIPING INSTALLATION: 

Refrigeration tubing shall be cut (with a pipe cutter) so ends are perfectly square and will "bottom" in fittings. 

There must be no gaps left thru which solder can run into the line. If a hack saw must be used, it shall always be 

guided with a miter box to insure a square, even cut. Tubing shall be reamed to remove burrs, being careful not 

to expand tubing while reaming. 

The outside of the copper pipe and the inside of the fittings, where solder will be applied, shall be burnished. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Fine crocus cloth or fitting brushes especially made for this type of work should be used. Surfaces shall be 

burnished until all dirt and oxide is removed. Cleaned surface should not be touched with hands or gloves. 

A light coat of brazing flux shall be applied to both pipe and fittings. Acid flux (such as muriatic or hydrochloric 

acid) shall not be used. The resulting corrosion would seriously affect the pipe and composition for brazing. 

Joint shall be heated to proper brazing temperature, being sure that it is uniformly hot so brazing material will 

flow to all parts of the joint. The brazing material shall be fed to the joint until a uniform line of brazing material 

appears around the pipe at the end of the fittings. 

Refrigerant piping shall be joined with "sil-fos" soldered joints. "Easy-Flow" solder may be used for 

connections at valves and specialties only. 

An oxy-acetylene torch shall be used for heating the joint for brazing. During brazing, the pipe and fittings 

must be kept full of an inert gas, N or CO2 to prevent formation of scale. 

NOTE: Should the contractor be observed by the job superintendent or any authorized inspector soldering 

or brazing any part of a refrigerant piping system without proper circulation of inert gas thru the lines being 

worked on, it shall be assumed that the entire system was fabricated in such a manner, and all of the piping 

installed on that system shall be condemned and promptly removed from the job site at the expense of the 

contractor. 

When solenoid stop valves are being installed, the coil shall be removed to prevent the heat of soldering 

from ruining the insulation. When sight glasses are being installed, the glass should be removed to prevent 

cracking. No heat shall be applied near the bulb of the expansion valve or any other place where an 

excessive temperature may cause damage. 

All of the foregoing piping shall be examined, and if found to leak, shall be made tight and test repeated until 

the system is proved tight. All tests shall be verified by the Owner's representative. 

After all refrigeration piping and connections are completed, make a leak test by filling the system with freon 

and test for leaks with an electronic leak detector. Evacuate all piping to 500 microns and hold for 24 hours 

prior to final charging. 

Charge the system with clean, dry refrigerant until a proper operating charge has been added as determined 

by proper operation with a clean refrigerant stream at the sight of glass. 

Pipe covering shall not be installed, nor the piping anchored until testing is completed and all leaks have 

been properly eliminated. 

INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS AND THERMOMETER WELLS: 

General: Install thermometers and thermometer wells at locations shown on the drawings and where 

specified. Install thermometers so that they can be read by a person standing on the floor and with normal 

illumination. 

______________________________________________________________________________________ 



Locations: Install thermometers and thermometer wells at the following locations, and elsewhere as 

indicated. 

1. At the inlet and the outlet of each hydronic zone. 

2. At the inlet and the outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 

3. At the inlet and the outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units, and built-up central systems. 

4. At the inlet and the outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger. 

5. At the inlet and the outlet of each hydronic heat recovery unit. 

6. At the inlet and the outlet of each thermal storage tank. 

7. Thermometer Wells: Drill and tap pipes 5-inch and larger for installation of wells. Provide tees or 

reinforced welding fittings on pipes smaller than 5-inch for installation of wells. Provide oversize 

tees or enlarge pipe smaller than 3-inch at points where wells are installed to avoid restriction of 

flow. 

INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES: 

General: Install pressure gauges at locations shown on the drawing and where specified. 

Locations: Install pressure gauges in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated. 

1. At the suction and the discharge of each pump. 

2. At the discharge of each pressure reducing valve. 

3. At the water service outlet. 

4. At the inlet and the outlet of water-cooled condensers and refrigerant cooled chillers. 

Pressure Gauge Cocks: Provide stem mounted pressure gauges with T-handle cocks and pressure 

snubbers. 

INSTALLATION OF FLOW METERS: 

General: Install flow meters at locations shown on the drawings and where specified. Install in accordance 

with ASME recommendations for flow meters. 

Locations: Install flow meters in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated. 

1. At the discharge of each pump. 

2. At the inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems. 

Piping: Install piping in the exact locations and arrangement, both upstream and downstream of primary 

elements, as required by the manufacturer's published literature. Provide any necessary piping changes 

required for certification without additional cost. 

Horizontal Pipe: Provide the connection nipples at, or slightly above, the horizontal centerline of the pipe to 

minimize the entrance of gases and impurities when flow is measured in horizontal pipe. 

Taps: Provide taps with shut-off valves and quick connecting hose fittings for portable meters or 

double-ferrule compression fittings for connection to tubing for permanently located meters or recorders. 

_____________________________________________________________________________________ 

_ 



Portable Flow Meter Connections: Install connections for attachment to portable flow meter hoses that are 

readily accessible. 

_____________________________________________________________________________________ 

_ 



SECTION 15180 - INSULATION 


WORK INCLUDED: 

It is the intent of this section of the specifications that all hot (above 105N F.) and cold (below 55N F) surfaces of 

all piping and mechanical system components be insulated, unless specifically excluded herein. 

Systems to be insulated: 

l. Supply air ductwork 

2. Heating hot water and chilled water piping systems 

3. Hot and cold domestic water piping systems 

4. Refrigerant suction piping systems 

5. Water and waste piping below handicapped sinks and lavatories 

6. Roof drain piping 

The providing of all materials, supplies, equipment, tools, transportation, and facilities and performing all labor 

and service necessary to provide the work outlined above and as shown on the working drawings. 


COMPLIANCE: 

All insulation shall (as a minimum) conform to the requirements of the building code an have a flame spread 

rating of less than 25 and smoke developed less than 50. 

Insulation shall be as manufactured by Schuller, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Armstrong, or Certainteed. 

HEATING HOT AND CHILLED WATER PIPING, DOMESTIC HOT, COLD, AND HOT WATER 

RECIRCULATING PIPING: 

All piping shall be insulated with 2-piece heavy density pipe insulation having an average thermal resistivity in 

the range of 4.0 to 4.6 Hr Deg. F. Ft2/BTU per inch of thickness on a flat surface at a mean temperature of 75 

deg. F. Thickness of insulation shall be as follows: 

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 


INSULATION 15180-1

MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION 

INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES FOR PIPE SIZES** 

PIPING SYSTEM 

TYPES 

FLUID 

TEMP. 

RANGE, F 

RUN- 

OUTS 

2"* 

1" & 

LESS 

1-1/4" 

TO 2" 

2-1/2" 

TO 4" 

5" TO 6" 8" + 

HOT SURFACE SYSTEMS 

Low Press/Temp. 201-250 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 2 

Low Temp. 120-200 1/2 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 

COOLING SYSTEMS 

Chilled Water 40-45 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 

Domestic Cold Water 40-55 1 1 1 1 1 1 

Refrig. or brine Below 40 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 

* Runouts not exceeding 12 feet in length to individual terminal units. 

** For piping exposed to outdoor air, increase thickness by 1/2". 

Pipe insulation shall be covered with an all-service jacket. 

WATER & WASTE PIPING EXPOSED BELOW ALL LAVATORIES AND SINKS: 

Insulate all exposed surfaces with an approved ADA insulation kit as required by sink manufacturer. 

ROOF DRAIN PIPING: 

Roof drain receivers and roof drain piping (both primary and secondary) except in masonry wall and 

where buried in the ground, shall be insulated as specified for domestic cold water. Insulation thickness 

shall be 1". Provide white PVC insulation cover for all roof drain piping that runs exposed in occupied 

areas. 

REFRIGERANT SUCTION PIPING: 

Refrigerant suction piping shall be insulated with 1/2" thick closed cell flexible foam. Finish exterior 

insulation with two heavy coats of UV resistant gray sealer. 

CHILLED WATER PUMPS: 

Insulate with removable and replaceable covers consisting of No. 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal jacket lined 

with 2" thick high density polystyrene insulation. The insulation shall have an average "K" factor or .22. All voids 

between insulation and pump housing shall be filled insulation. Closure joints of metal casing shall be 

vapor-sealed after the covers are in place. 

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 


INSULATION 15180-2

CHILLED WATER STORAGE TANKS: 

All cold surfaces shall be insulated with 2" thick high density polystyrene insulation with coated joints and an all 

service jacket. Insulation shall have an average "K" factor of .22. All voids between tank and jacket shall be 

filled with insulation. 

HEATING HOT AND CHILLED WATER AIR ELIMINATION TANKS: 

Insulate with removable and replaceable covers consisting of No. 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal 

jacket lined with 2" thick high density fiberglass insulation. The insulation shall have an average "K" 

factor or .22. All voids between insulation and pump housing shall be filled insulation. Closure joints of 

metal casing shall be vapor-sealed after the covers are in place. 

MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTS: 

Medium pressure ducts shall be externally insulated with 1 1/2" thick 1.0 lb. density mineral fiberglass 

insulation. Insulation shall be furnished with an integral FSK vapor barrier jacket. Insulation shall be 

applied with edges tightly butted and secured by impaling on pins welded to the duct or on metal clips, 

previously adhered to the ducts with manufacturer's adhesive. Pins or clips shall be spaced to hold 

insulated firmly against the duct surface. Where required, insulation on the underside of all horizontal 

ducts and sloping ducts shall be additionally secured by applying an adhesive. All penetrations shall be 

sealed with vapor barrier adhesive. All seams shall be covered with 2" wide strips of same insulation 

facing material adhered with adhesive. 

MEDIUM PRESSURE FLEXIBLE DUCT: 

Flexible supply air ducts shall be insulated with 1" thick 1.5# density duct wrap with vapor barrier. 

Insulation shall comply with UMC Standard 10-1. 

LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTS: 

All round metal ducts shall be wrapped with 1" thick fiberglass duct wrap with factory-applied vapor 

barrier. All joints shall be sealed with mastic and taped to form a neat and complete insulation system. 


GENERAL: 

The contractor shall provide a complete installation which is neat in appearance and functional. 

Remove all excess materials and packaging from job site. 

All insulation shall be continuous thru wall and ceiling openings and thru sleeves. 

Terminations of insulation on piping shall be tapered and coated with finish cement. 

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 


INSULATION 15180-3

Insulation on all cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used will be applied with a continuous, unbroken 

vapor seal. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately 

insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation. 

Valves and fittings inside the building shall be insulated as specified for the piping systems and covered with 

high temperature P.V.C. insulation fitting covers. 

Fittings and valves for pipe size smaller than 4" shall be insulated and finished with Insulating and Finishing 

Cement to a thickness equal to the adjoining pipe insulation. Fittings and valves for pipe sizes 4" and larger shall 

be insulated with segments of the molded insulation secured with No. 20 gage galvanized annealed steel wire 

finished with a smoothing coat of finishing cement. Vapor seal with a layer of glass fabric embedded between 

two 1/16" coats of vapor seal adhesive. Lap seal outer jacket at least 1" on itself adjoining insulation. 

In exposed areas, all fittings shall be additionally finished with FSK wrap smoothly adhered. Overlap the FSK 

wrap on itself and adjoining pipe insulation. Overlap to be at least 1" on pipe insulation below 4" and 2" on sizes 

4" and above. Piping exposed in occupied areas shall have a white PVC cover installed. 

Insulation inserts and shields for cold surface piping such as roof drain lines and domestic cold water piping shall 

be installed at all pipe hangers. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hangers shall consist of calcium silicate block 

insulation of equal thickness to the adjoining insulation and shall be provided with vapor barrier where required. 

Insulation inserts shall not be less than the following lengths, unless otherwise approved on submittals: 

1/2" to 2-1/2" pipe size 6" long 

3" to 6" pipe size 9" long 

8" to 10" pipe size 12" long 

Rigid metal shields shall be applied between hangers or supports and the pipe insulation. Shields shall be 

formed to fit the insulation and shall extend up to the centerline of the pipe and length specified for the insulation 

hanger inserts. 

Vapor barrier wrap shall be sealed tight and not penetrated by the hanger or shield. 

Block insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted, joints broken, and secured with No. 16 gauge 

galvanized annealed steel wire or 1/2" x .015" galvanized steel bands on 12" maximum centers for large areas. 

Where required, welded studs, clips, or angles shall be provided as anchored for fire and bands. Finish shall be 

Insulating and Finishing Cement applied 1/4" thick in one coat, trowelled to a smooth finish. Over the Insulating 

and Finishing Cement an FSK outer jacket cloth shall be smoothly adhered with vapor barrier adhesive. 

Insulation blocks shall be applied with edges tightly butted, joints broken, and secured with No. 14 gauge 

galvanized annealed steel wire, or 1/2" X 0.15" galvanized steel bands on 12" maximum centers for large areas. 

Where required, welded studs, clips, or angles shall be provided as anchored for wires and bands. 

Over the insulation, 1" hexagonal mesh wire shall be tightly stretched in place and secured by wiring to anchors, 

with edges tied together. Finish shall be Johns-Manville No. 3011 Insulating and Finishing Cement or approved 

equal applied 1/4" thick in one coat, trowelled to a smooth finish. 

Over the Insulating and Finishing Cement, pre-sized glass cloth shall be smoothly adhered with Adhesive. 

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 


INSULATION 15180-4

Adhesives, mastics, and coatings shall be applied at the manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage per 

gallon. 

Where insulation pipes pass thru sound or fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings, the insulation sleeves shall be 

sound or fire-rated to match rating of surface penetrated. 

All insulation which runs outside of the building, or inside of the building in areas where the insulation will be 

exposed to physical abuse, shall be jacketed with a minimum thickness of .016 inch aluminum. The insulation 

and aluminum shall be secured in place by a continuous friction type joint to provide a positive weatherproof seal 

along the entire length of the aluminum jacket. Then, an aluminum preformed strap containing a permanently 

plastic weatherproof sealant shall be centered over each circumferential joint, and secured by tightening on a 

clip, or by use of separate 1/2 inch wide stainless steel banding. All elbows, tube, turns, sweeps, and bends shall 

be insulated with mitered sections of aluminum-jacketed insulation. Joints shall be sealed with a sealing 

compound and preformed aluminum bands. Valves shall be covered by prefabricated sections of 

aluminum-jacketed insulation according to manufacturer's recommendation. 

Insulation of storage tanks, manholes, hand holes, and at flanged ends of heat exchangers shall be applied so 

that these items can be removed without damaging the insulation. 

INSULATION WORKMANSHIP: 

All insulation shall be applied by specialists experienced in the field, and shall be neat in appearance. Neatness 

in appearance shall be equated to proper insulation application procedures, and sloppy workmanship will not be 

tolerated. Work which is deemed unacceptable shall be condemned, removed, and replaced at the contractor's 

expense. 

Protect floors, valve handle, accessories, etc., to keep paste off areas not being insulated. 

Splitting of longitudinal sections on flexible foam pipe insulation will not be permitted. 

Do not install insulation on pipes which require heat taping without coordinating with mechanical contractor. 

CLEAN-UP: 

The piping shall be cleaned and tested prior to installation of insulation. 

Fittings shall be cleaned after insulation is installed. 

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 


INSULATION 15180-5

SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING 



Piping diagrams are schematic and indicate preferred pipe routing. It is the intent that the installation be 

complete. Where fixtures are not shown connected to any required services, they shall be connected properly 

and completely. Connect all fixtures to various services, i.e., hot water, cold water, waste, and vent, etc., as 

required. 

The work shall include furnishing of all materials and labor required for the job as described, together with all 

accessories and trim implied or required to finish the work, and generally as follows: 

1. Complete rain removal system, including piping and roof drains. 

2. Plumbing fixtures and water supply piping. 

3. Sanitary sewer systems. 

4. Condensate drain systems. 

STANDARDS: 

Plumbing installation shall be made in accordance with the International Plumbing Code, City Code, and all other 

governing codes. 

In the event drawings violate the codes as being locally enforced, the contractor shall base his estimate on the 

enforced code requirements. 

DISINFECTING: 

After flushing the mains, introduce a water and chlorine solution concentrated to 300 PPM to disinfect the system 

and oxidize piping contaminates. Retain treated water and chlorine for a period of not less than three hours or 

more than six hours before final flushing out of system. 

All valves should be opened periodically during the process and the residual chlorine checked to ensure that at 

least 50 percent of the initial concentration is present to complete the disinfection. If there is less than 50 

percent, the valves should be allowed to drain water until the 50 percent or greater level is obtained. A make-up 

chlorine solution of a concentration equal to the initial concentration must be added as needed during the 

withdrawal of the spent solution. 

A warning sign shall be conspicuously posted at each water outlet and faucet during the disinfecting process to 

prevent occupants from drinking the water. 

Flushing: Following disinfection, all treated water shall be flushed from the system through its extremities. 

Flushing shall continue until samples show that the quality of the water delivered is comparable with the quality 

of the public water supply and satisfactory to the public health authority having jurisdiction. Flushing shall be 

_______________________________________________________________________________________ 

________ 


PLUMBING 15400-1

epeated if samples taken daily over a period of three days show the water quality is not being maintained. 

Samples shall be taken only from taps located and installed in such a manner that they will not contribute any 

contamination. Samples shall not be drawn from hydrants or through unsterilized hose. Test samples shall be 

certified by a recognized and approved testing laboratory, and a certificate of acceptability shall be submitted. 

Written certification of the disinfecting process and purity of water samples shall be forwarded to the Owner's 

representative. 

VERIFICATION OF GRADE: 

The contractor shall verify with the site utilities contractor the connection of water, and waste piping 

systems to the mains, and shall verify the actual job site elevation and location prior to the installation of 

the building footings. 

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS: 

CLEANOUTS: 

Approved cleanouts shall be installed in the base of each vertical drainage line, and in the horizontal line at each 

change in direction. In addition, there shall be cleanouts spaced at a maximum of 50' in all horizontal lines. All 

cleanouts shall be extended to accessible surfaces. All cleanouts to grade shall be capable of cleaning in both 

directions. 

WATER HAMMER: 

Provide and install stainless steel bellows type shock absorbers in the ends of all multiple fixture water lines and 

in piping ahead of snap-acting automatic valves. 

Absorbers shall be sized and located in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations for the specific 

application. Absorbers shall be Zurn, Wade, or Smith. 

Absorbers shall not be installed in inaccessible areas. Extend piping to accessible locations. 

FLASHINGS: 

All pipes passing thru the roof shall be neatly flashed. 

FIXTURE STOPS: 

All stops for plumbing fixtures shall be chrome plated McDonald or Brass Craft 1/4 turn ball valves. 

PLUMBING FIXTURES: 

This contractor shall furnish and install all fixtures shown on the architectural or mechanical drawings or 

specified hereinafter, clean and adjust all fixtures and replace any damaged fixtures at the contractor's 

_______________________________________________________________________________________ 

________ 


PLUMBING 15400-2

expense. 

The fixtures shall be all new and complete as shown and described in manufacturer's catalog, and as 

required for the work, including accessible loose key 1/4 turn ball valve stops above the floor in supplies to 

all fixtures, and cast brass P-traps, unless otherwise shown. Trim for all fixtures shall be chrome-plated, and 

all trim shall match in design. Supply faucets shall have renewable seats and barrels. Fixtures shall be 

Kohler, American Standard, Crane, or approved equal. 

PLUMBING FIXTURES 

WC-1 Water Closet: Kohler K-4330 'Kingston' siphon jet, wall hung, elongated bowl, 1-1/2" top 

spud; Sloan Royal III 1.5 gpf chrome plated flush valve; Bemis 1955C extra 

heavy solid plastic white open front seat with stainless steel check hinge; 

Wade W-311 (horizontal) or W-331 (vertical) series carrier, single or double 

right or left as required, with foot support. 

WC-2 Water Closet: Same as "WC-1" - Set at handicapped height. 

(ADA) 

WC-3 Water Closet: Kohler K-4368 “Highcliff” siphon jet, floor-mounted, extended lip bowl, 

1-1-2” top spud, vitreous china, Sloan Royal 1.5 gpf flush valve; K-4666-C 

“Lustra” extra heavy solid plastic white open front seat with stainless steel 

check hinge; 431310-100 bolt caps. 

U-1 Urinal: Kohler #K-4989-T "Freshman" vitreous china, wall hung, siphon jet with 

flushing rim, 2" outlet connection, 3/4" top spud with Zurn 

ZR60003AV-0B-WS1 battery powered sensor operated chrome plated flush 

valve with vacuum breaker and battery, plate type carrier and bearing plate. 

Wade W-452, Zurn 1222, Smith 633. Provide battery for each urinal. 

U-2 Urinal: Same as “U-1” set at handicapped height. 

(ADA) 

L-1 Lavatory: Kohler K-2032 "Greenwich" 20" x 18" - 4" center set vitreous china, front 

(ADA) overflow, anti-splash rim, center basin, wall hanger, punched for concealed 

arm carrier, Moen 8460 single lever faucet, grid strainer, tailpiece and flexible 

supplies w/stops and brass P-trap. Support lavatory with Zurn ZN1231 

concealed arm carrier with foot support. 

S-1 Sink: Just CRB-2022-A-GR 20" x 22" x 7-1/2" D, 18 ga., 304 stainless steel, 

(Classroom) drilled for 3-hole rear ledge centerset faucet and right ledge bubbler, self- rimming, 

sound dampening, cup strainer, Chicago 786-E3 gooseneck faucet with 4” wrist 

blade handles, aerator, flexible supplies, brass P-trap, and Just JSB-10-FLX-VR 

bubbler with flexible mouth guard. 

S-2 Sink: Just DL-1933-A-GR 19" x 33" x 7-1/2" D, 18 ga., 2 compartment stainless steel, 

drilled for 3-hole centerset faucet, self- rimming, sound dampening, cup strainer, 

Chicago #50TCP faucet with swing spout, 4” wrist blade handles, aerator, flexible 

supplies, and brass P-trap. 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-3

SS-1 Service Sink: Kohler K-6710 "Whitby" 28" x 28" service sink, floor mounted, drain channels 

(Floor type) Moen Faucet No. 8124 polished chrome faucet with vacuum breaker, hose 

end with hose, bucket hook, wall brace integral stops and rough chrome 

finish. Faucet to be mounted 30" above finish floor; K-8940 rim guard; 

K-9146 drain with strainer for 3" connection. 

DF-1 Drinking Elkay EZSTL8C, bi-level wheelchair access, wall mounted, air cooled, 

Fountain: refrigerated type, to cool 8.0 gal/hr. from 80 deg. F. to 50 deg. F. with 90 

(ADA) deg. F. EAT. 1/5 HP hermetic compressor, 120/1/60. 304 stainless steel 

top and cabinet w/chrome plated bubbler and semi-circular wrap around 

self-closing push bar operable from front and side of fountain. 

HB-1 Hose Bibb: Zurn Z-1310 3/4" "Ecolotrol" non-freeze anti-syphon wall hydrant with bronze 

casing and plain bronze face, provide with loose key and set screw for each 

hydrant. 

HB-2 Hose Bibb: Chicago Faucet No. 952 (No. 998 where connected to exposed piping) 3/4" 

chrome plated hose bibb with No. 293-6 handle and 3/4" threaded outlet with 

integral vacuum breaker. 

TP-1 Trap Primer: PPP Inc. Model MPB-500 electronic trapprimer, 1/2” inlet and outlet, 1” air 

gap fitting, solenoid valve and timer with override button, 12/1/60. Unit 

assembly shall be complete in NEMA #1 metal box with access door and DU 

distribution unit for 9 drains. 

IMB-1 Ice Maker Box: Guy Gray BIM-875 for in-the-wall installation with concealed piping, 1/2” ball 

valve. 18 gauge dipped galv. steel finish. Face plate with 20 gauge box. 

(Verify mounting height with conditions). 

FD-1 Floor Drain: Zurn #Z-415-4 2" cast iron drain with nickel bronze top. Drain to have deep 

seal P-trap. 

FD-2 Floor Drain: Zurn Z-521 3" heavy duty drain with sediment bucket, loose grate, 

dura-coated cast iron body, "Duresist" grate and deep seal trap with trap 

primer connection on trap. 

TD-1 Trench Drain: ABT polydrain 8” wide precast polymer concrete pre-sloped drain system 

with #854 ductile iron grating and 851C grating hold-down devices. Drain 

shall be drilled for 3” outlet and have deep seal trap. 

RD-1 Roof Drain: Roof drains shall be cast iron type with flashing collar, C.I. dome, gravel 

guard, adjustable extension, sump receiver, and underdeck clamp. See plans 

for sizes. J. R. Smith #1010-ARC. 

RD-2 Roof Drain: J. R. Smith #1080-ARC w/2" water dam, duco cast iron body with combined 

(Secondary) flashing clamp and gravel stop with underdeck clamp, adjustable extension, 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-4

sump receiver, and cast iron dome. See plans for sizes. 

DN-1 Downspout Smith #1770 brass downspout nozzle. Provide 1/4" mesh aluminized, slipfit Nozzle: 

birdscreen. See plans for sizes. 

WATER HEATER: (WH-1) 

Water heater shall be natural gas fired, 94% thermal efficiency w/ AGA approved gas train and power 

burner. 150,000 BTUH input with 214 GPH recovery thru 80E F. temp. 3” PVC vent and air intake with 

termination kit. 100 gallon glass lined ASME vertical storage tank with pressure and temperature relief 

valve, insulated jacket with baked enamel finish, complete with all controls for automatic operation. Heater 

shall be designed for 120E F. operation. 

Make & Model: A. O. Smith BTH-150 

Nominal Size: 27 3/4" Dia. x 74 1/2" H. 

Shipping Weight: 600 lbs. 

Water heaters and storage tanks shall be A. O. Smith, PVI, State, Bradford White or approved equal. 

LEAD PANS AND WATERPROOF MEMBRANES: 

All floor drains shall be fitted with clamping collar and waterproof membrane. 

Membrane and lead waterproofing pans for shower stalls and built-up type custodial floor sinks shall be 

furnished and installed by plumbers so they are 100% watertight. Drains shall have clamping device which 

clamps drain to pans. There shall be a mastic seal between floor drain bottom and lead or membrane so 

when clamping device is tightened, there is a complete watertight seal. 

Care should be taken not to clog weep holes. All pans will be tested by placing test plug in drain and filling 

with water overnight. 

CONDENSATE DRAIN: 

All refrigerated air conditioning which has cooling coil condensate drip pans with pipe connections shall be 

piped to the nearest drain by this contractor. 

Pipe location and routing shall be approved by the owner's representative. 

Piping shall be the same size as the drain pan connection, and shall be trapped to prevent forced air flow 

thru the pipe. 

VACUUM BREAKERS, DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES, & 

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS: 

Vacuum breakers and backflow preventers shall comply with requirements of the International Plumbing 

Code for the actual installed duty. 

Vacuum breakers and backflow preventers shall be of the type, style, and arrangement approved by the 

Code. 

All vacuum breakers and backflow preventers shall be installed with the necessary isolation valves and test 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-5

cocks. 

Backflow preventers shall be located at a maximum of 4' - 0" A.F.F. and shall be accessible for service. 

Backflow preventers shall have a water filter with a replaceable cartridge. 

GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS: 

Furnish and install, as required, approved type gas pressure regulators in gas piping ahead of appliance and 

equipment. Regulators located outside of building shall have weatherproof vent with bugproof screen. 

Regulators located inside of building shall be vented to the outside with approved cap screen. Approved 

manufacturers of gas regulators are Fisher and Reliance. 


PRODUCT HANDLING: 

Protection: 

Use all means necessary to protect plumbing materials before, during, and after installation and to protect 

the installed work and materials of all other trades. 

Replacements: 

In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the 

Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. 

TESTING: 

Furnish all required personnel and equipment and make all tests required to receive the approval of the 

Owner and all agencies having jurisdiction. 

CLEANING UP: 

Prior to acceptance of the building, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the plumbing installation, 

removing all labels and all traces of foreign substance, using only a cleaning solution approved by the 

manufacturer of the plumbing item and being careful to avoid all damage to finished surfaces. 

ROOF DRAIN LOCATIONS: 

This contractor shall review the architectural and structural drawings and shall field verify from actual job site 

conditions that the roof drains are located at the low points of the roof systems. Locations shown on the 

plumbing drawings are approximate. All low points on the roof shall have primary and secondary roof drains 

installed in them unless otherwise noted. 

WATER CLOSET INSTALLATION: 

General: Install water closets as shown on the drawing and as follows: 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-6

1. Supply pipe extending from wall shall be covered by chrome plated sleeve and wall flange. 

2. Additional wall plates shall be provided where each pipe extends through finished wall. 

3. Two rubber or plastic seat bumpers with metal holders shall be provided and secured to the 

wainscot behind the fixture. 

4. The centerline of the flush valve shall be on the centerline of the fixture, 39 inches above the 

finished floor and a minimum of 2-1/4 inches from the wall. 

5. Chrome plated pipe support shall be provided on the long flush pipe outlet and shall be secured 

rigidly to the wall with suitable anchors. 

6. The backflow preventer for the flush valve shall be installed at the discharge of the valves. 

7. The flush valve water piping concealed in the partition shall be rigidly supported; piping between 

flush valve and wall shall be provided with a factory fabricated chromium plated spacer sleeve and 

wall flange. 

LAVATORY INSTALLATION: 

General: Install lavatories as shown on the drawings and as follows: 

1. Lavatories for use by wheelchair handicapped shall be installed with a minimum rim height of 34", a 

minimum vertical clearance of 29" from floor, and a minimum clear knee recess of 30" in width and 

20" in depth. 

2. Trap on lavatory for use by wheelchair handicapped shall be installed so as to provide maximum 

clearance under bowl. Exposed waste, trap and hot water supply under lavatory shall be insulated 

in accordance with the requirements for domestic hot water piping. 

3. All lavatories shall be installed with a rim height of 34". 

URINAL INSTALLATION: 

General: Install urinals as shown on the drawing and as follows: 

1. Supply pipe extending from wall shall be covered by chrome plated sleeve and wall flange. 

2. Additional wall plates shall be provided where each pipe extends through finished wall. 

3. The centerline of the flush valve for wall hung urinals shall be on the centerline of the fixture, 45 

inches above the finished floor and a minimum of 2-1/4 inches from the wall. 

4. The centerline of the flush valve for handicap urinals shall be 40 inches or less above the finished 

floor. 

5. The backflow preventer for flush valve shall be installed at the discharge of the valve. 

6. The flush valve and the water piping concealed in the partition shall be rigidly supported; piping 

between flush valve and wall shall be provided with a factory fabricated chromium-plated spacer 

sleeve and wall flange. 

FIXTURE CONNECTIONS: 

Floor Mounted Water Closets and Service Sinks: Provide connections between soil pipes and floor 

connected water closets and service sinks made with cast-iron floor flanges. 

Connection sizes shall be 4-inch for water closets and 3-inch for service sinks. 

Floor flanges shall be slipped over the ends of the pipes and caulked in position. 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-7

Special short radius fittings shall be used where space does not permit the use of standard fittings below the 

flanges. 

Setting Compounds and Gaskets: Provide watertight and gas tight seals between flanges and fixtures with 

plumbing-fixture-setting compound or manufacturer's standard non-asbestos gaskets. 

Neither rubber gaskets nor putty shall be used in sealing connections. 

FIXTURE SUPPORTS: 

Urinal Support: Provide urinal chair carriers consisting of a pair of cast-iron feet bolted to or imbedded into 

the floor together with 1.66-inch outside diameter (minimum), steel tubular upright members, steel hanger 

support plate, and steel bearing plate connected to cast iron or steel adjustment sleeves and furnished with 

necessary bolts, nuts, washers, and chrome plated trim. Provide chair carrier that is fully concealed in the 

building construction and that supports the fixture in such a manner that no part of the fixture will be 

supported by the wall or the partition. 

Lavatory Support: Provide lavatory chair carriers consisting of a pair of cast-iron feet bolted to or imbedded 

into the floor together with 1.66- inch (minimum) steel tubular upright members, a horizontally adjustable 

alignment truss or tie rod at bottom and another at the top connected to cast-iron or steel adjustment sleeves 

and painted cast-iron or steel adjustment sleeves, and painted cast-iron concealed arms. 

INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES: 

General: Install one or more pressure reducing valves on the main water line supplying plumbing fixtures. 

1. Provide each pressure reducing valve with a gate valve and union on both the inlet and outlet 

connections. 

2. A bypass one pipe size smaller than the main water line provided with a globe valve and union, shall 

be installed between the inlet and outlet sides of the pressure reducing valve assembly. 

3. Pressure gauges shall be installed at the inlet and outlet connections to the pressure reducing valve 

assembly. Gauges shall have T-handle stops in their connections. 

STRAINER INSTALLATION: 

General: Place strainers ahead of pressure reducing valves, automatic control valves, pumps, and 

elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or specified. 

BACKFLOW PROTECTION VALVE INSTALLATION: 

General: The entire water distribution system shall be protected against contamination due to backflow from 

non-potable sources. Each connection to a fixture or an item of equipment shall be protected in accordance 

with the requirements of the International Plumbing Code. 

Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: Install a reduced pressure zone backflow preventer in the 

building water supply main to expansion tanks, condenser water systems, and boilers as shown on the 

drawings and/or as required by the local codes. 

INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES: 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-8

Basic Requirements: Install pipe sleeves as follows: 

1. Pipe sleeves shall be provided for all pipes passing through walls, slabs on grade and floors. 

Sleeves may be omitted where pipes pass through exterior walls above ground to lawn faucets, wall 

hydrants and downspout nozzles. 

2. Sleeves for pipes passing through exterior walls and slabs on grade which do not have membrane 

waterproofing shall be of cast-iron or galvanized steel pipe or black steel pipe, Schedule 40. 

3. Sleeves for pipes passing through exterior walls, slabs on grade and floors which are provided with 

membrane waterproofing shall be of threaded galvanized steel pipe fitted with companion flanges 

and arranged to secure membrane. Companion flanges shall be drilled and tapped in such a 

manner that bolting is effected from the outer (or upper) face only. 

4. Sleeves for pipes passing through potentially wet floors that do not have membrane waterproofing 

such as in toilet rooms, cafeteria kitchens, serving areas, dishwashing rooms, utility cores, 

mechanical equipment rooms, and areas that are provided with fire protection sprinkler systems, 

shall be galvanized steel pipe, shall project 2 inches above the finished floors, and shall be caulked 

watertight. 

5. Sleeves for pipes passing through all other floors and walls shall be constructed of galvanized or 

black steel pipe, standard weight. 

Sleeves On New Work: On new work, sleeves shall be built into the walls and floors as the work 

progresses. 

INSTALLATION OF CLEANOUTS AND FERRULES: 

Riser Connection to Sewer or Drain: Where soil, waste, or roof drainage risers connect to a sewer or drain 

extending from the building above the lowest floor, the fitting at the base of each stack or downspout shall be 

a sanitary tee or a combination Y and 1/8 bend with cleanout plug in the end of the run of the main. 

Test Tees: Each vertical soil, waste, and vent pipe and each downspout and roof drainage pipe which 

connects to horizontal drain piping below ground shall be fitted with a test tee above the lowest floor or 

ground. Where accessible, test tee may be installed in the horizontal pipe at the base of the riser. 

Cover Plates: Where cleanouts or test tees occur on concealed pipes in finished rooms, they shall be 

provided with a 1/8-inch thick, machine finished, brass cover plate of sufficient diameter to cover the opening 

in the finished wall or partition. The cleanout plug shall have a solid head, tapped for a 1/4-inch brass screw 

to secure the cover plate. Where cleanout plugs extend beyond the wall finish, the cover plates shall be of 

machine finished brass and shall be only of sufficient depth to fit against the wall to cover plug. Cleanout 

cover plates shall be painted to match adjacent wall finish. 

Cleanouts Plugs For Threaded Fittings: Cleanout plugs for threaded fittings shall be in accordance with 

ANSI B16.12. Except for test openings, where size must be sufficient to admit test plug, bushings will be 

permitted on pipes 5-inches and larger to reduce plug size to 4 inches; cleanout plugs for piping 4 inches 

and smaller shall be the same size as the pipe. 

Cleanout Plugs For Hub-and-Spigot Fittings: Cleanout plugs for hub-and-spigot fittings shall be screwed 

into ferrules caulked into the fitting. Ferrules and plugs shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.12, except 

that plugs required to be flush with the floor shall have square countersunk heads in lieu of raised heads. 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-9

Cleanout Plugs For Copper Drainage Lines: Cleanout plugs on copper drainage lines shall be installed in 

solder-joint fittings having threaded openings provided for the cleanout, or in solder-joint fittings with 

threaded adapters. 

WATER PIPING INSTALLATION: 

General: Water piping shall be complete from service connection to all fixtures and equipment outlets. 

Sizes of pipes shall be as shown or specified. 

Reaming: Ends of pipes and tubes shall be reamed before being made up. 

Threaded Joints: Threaded joints shall be made up metal-to-metal, with a noncorrosive lubricant applied to 

the male thread only. Lampwick or other packing material shall not be used in making up threaded joints. 

Chromium Plated Piping: Chromium plated piping shall be threaded and made up carefully, and not more 

than one full turn of thread shall be exposed beyond any fittings. 

Long Screws and Bushings: Long screws and bushings (other than bushings cast in the sand) shall not be 

used on water piping. 

Soldering: Ends of tubing and recesses of fittings to be soldered shall be thoroughly cleaned. Joints shall 

be assembled without binding. Solder shall penetrate fully and shall fill the joint completely. Joints shall be 

made using lead-free solder, as specified. 

Joint Materials: All joint materials shall be free from oil, tar, and greasy substances, and shall be dry when 

placed in the joint. The material shall be handled with care to prevent contamination. 

Copper Tubing: All copper tubing shall be free from cuts, dents or other surface damage at the time of final 

inspection. Damaged tubing shall be removed and replaced with new. 

Copper Tube Anchoring: Horizontal runs of copper tubing over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to wall or 

floor construction. Anchors shall be located near the midpoints of the runs so as to force the expansion 

equally to the ends or in a direction where expansion can take place without excessive strain. 

Swing Joints, Offsets, and Expansion Joints: Swing joints, offsets, and expansion joints shall be provided 

where necessary to accommodate expansion of piping, which will be approximately two inches in 100 feet of 

copper hot water piping. 

Dielectric Couplings: Where non-ferrous metal piping and zinc-coated metal piping are joined, dielectric 

(insulating) couplings, fittings or unions shall be provided. 

Reducing Fittings: Where pipe sizes shown or specified differ from the connection sizes of meters, pumps, 

fixtures, outlets, and the like, reducing fittings shall be installed close to them. 

Pipe Branches: Branches from water supply mains shall be taken from the top, bottom or side, using 

crossover fittings where required by structural or operating conditions. 

Upfeed Hot Water Return: On upfeed hot water distribution systems for which return circulation piping is 

shown, a 1/2" circulation connection shall be made at a point on each riser just below the highest outlet 

connection. Provide branch circulation lines with gate valves near the valves on corresponding supply lines. 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-10

Downfeed Hot Water Supply: Each downfeed main for a hot water supply system shall be graded upward to 

the first branch connection, which shall be taken from the top of the main. Beyond the first connection the 

main shall grade downward, and all branch connections shall be taken from the bottom of the main. 

Connect a 1/2-inch circulating line to the bottom of each downfeed riser. Provide branch circuiting lines with 

gate valves in locations corresponding to the supply branch valve locations. 

Grading: Hot water supply and hot water circulating lines shall be accurately and uniformly graded to avoid 

traps which might impede or destroy circulation. All lines shall be graded so as to facilitate drainage. 

Unions: Unions shall be installed near points of connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as 

required for installation of piping, removal and replacement of regulating and control equipment and the like. 

Right and left couplings or nipples are prohibited. 

Water Hammer Arresters: Water hammer arresters shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. 

Water hammer arresters shall be approved and installed in accordance with the requirements of 

PDI-WH201 and shall bear the PDI seal of approval. 

Roughing: Roughing shall be provided for equipment furnished under other sections of the specifications. 

Where future extensions are indicated on the drawings, roughing shall extend to within the space to be 

served, and shall be valved, and capped or plugged. 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


PLUMBING 15400-11

SECTION 15500 FIRE PROTECTION 


GENERAL CONDITIONS: 

The requirements of Section 15010, 15030, 15050, and 15900 shall govern the work in Section 15500, where 

applicable, and where not in conflict with governing codes and ordinances. Division 1 is a part of this and all 

other sections of these specifications. 

SCOPE: 

The work required includes the designing, hydraulically calculating pipe sizes, flows, and pressure, furnishing 

and installation of fire protection systems in accordance with the drawings, specifications, latest standards and 

codes for complete systems for the building. 

The work specified in this section shall be installed by none other than a recognized fire sprinkler contractor. All 

fire protection system piping shall be hydraulically calculated. All systems shall be subject to the inspection and 

approval of the local fire authority or his representative for compliance of applicable standards. 

All work shall be coordinated with other subcontractors. 

The sprinkler system shall consist of the required number of sprinkler heads, piping, hangers, drains, test pipes, 

alarms, valves, gauges, fire department connections, and all other parts to assure a complete system to meet 

the requirements of the owner's insurance underwriter, local authority having jurisdiction, and in accordance with 

nationally recognized standards. 

Codes & Standards: 

Water Supply: National Fire Code #24 - 2003 International Building Code. 

Wet Sprinkler System & Combined Systems: N.F.C. #13 and #14 - I.B.C. 

Alarm Equipment: N.F.C. #70 & 72A 

Standpipe & Hose Systems: N.F.C. #14 - I.B.C. 

Supervision: N.F.C. #13 and #14 - I.B.C. 

Temporary Fire Protection: N.F.C. #14 - I.B.C. 

Sprinkler Heads: N.F.C. #13 

Sleeves and Location: N.F.C. #13 

Excavation and Backfill: 15010 of this specification 

_______________________________________ 

_______________________________________________________________________________________ 

______ 


FIRE PROTECTION 15500-1

Work Included Elsewhere: 

Underground Mains: N.F.C. #24 

Concrete Work - by General Contractor 

Access Doors - By General Contractor. 

Color coding or pipe identification - By Mechanical Contractor. 

Wiring of flow switches and gate valve supervisory switches - By Electrical Contractor. 

WORK BY FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR: 

This contractor shall furnish and install all labor, material, and equipment to make a complete and working fire 

protection system fully tested and approved in accordance with the drawings, standards of this specification for 

the new building, and minor system modifications in the existing building. 

UNDERGROUND WATER SUPPLY: 

Fire protection contractor shall perform a flow test at or near site prior to final calculations for system. Flow test to 

be performed in the presence of the state or local fire marshal and Alpine School District representative. 

System Flow Data: 

Static Pressure 75 psi 

Residual Pressure 70 psi 

Flow 1,100 gpm 

Sprinkler System: 

This system shall conform to N.F.C. #13 and #14 and I.B.C. Riser may be calculated, but shall not be smaller 

than 6". Sprinkler systems are to be light, ordinary, or extra hazard, as required by NFC-13 and the Utah State 

Fire Marshall's office. 

System shall be hydraulically calculated. Sprinkler system shall be light hazard, except for casual ordinary and 

extra hazard group 1 in storage and service areas. Density for light hazard areas shall be 0.10 gpm per sq. ft. 

over 1500 sq. ft. Remote area with a maximum head spacing of 225 sq.ft. Service area shall be density of 0.15 

over 2000 sq. ft. with maximum spacing of 130 sq. ft. 

QUALIFICATION OF DESIGNER: 

Designer shall be an engineering technician or Senior Engineering Technician (Level III or Level IV), NICET 

certification for fire sprinkler system design. 

QUALIFICATION OF INSTALLER: 

It is intended that the system be designed and installed by a firm regularly engaged in the design and installation 

_______________________________________ 

_______________________________________________________________________________________ 

______ 



usiness of Fire Sprinkler contracting. The Owner's representative may require evidence to support the ability of 

the contractor to perform work in the scope and volume as specified. A contractor who cannot verify such 

experience, may be found not suitable to perform the work. 


HANGERS: 

All hangers to be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 13. 

RISERS: 

Risers shall be at the locations shown and shall include a U.L. approved control valve, check valve, flow switch, 

pressure gauges, water motor gong, or electric bell, standard fire department connection, gate valve supervisory 

switch, test connections, and drains as required. 

SPRINKLER HEADS: 

Sprinkler heads shall be U.L. approved. "K" factors shall be the same on each system and/or floor. See plans 

for head types. 

Sprinklers shall be of the proper temperature rating. Location of sprinkler head wherever reasonably possible 

shall be symmetrical and coordinated with the ceiling pattern. 

Number and location of sprinkler heads shown on the drawings are schematic. Exact number and location of 

heads shall be determined by the system design, and architectural coordination. 

Provide dry pendent or sidewall heads in areas subject to freezing, only where wet piping can be run in heated 

space. Otherwise, provide antifreeze loops. In finished spaces heads shall be chrome plated. 

Provide sparehead cabinets in accordance with NFPA No. 13 and equip same with at least ten (10) chrome 

heads, six (6) white heads, six (6) brass heads, and appropriate wrenches. 

Provide head guards in all areas where heads are subject to physical abuse. 

VALVES: 

All valves and fittings shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories or approved by Factory Mutual for fire 

protection duty and shall be installed in accordance with their listing and/or approval. Control valve shall have 

alarm supervisory switches with two sets of contacts and normally open/normally closed. 

All indicating valves will be of the listed and/or approved type with an electric tamper switch approved for use 

with that valve. 

Water hammer arrestors shall be provided ahead of all automatic valves to eliminate water hammer and shall be 

installed vertically in an accessible location. 

_______________________________________ 

_______________________________________________________________________________________ 

______ 



Hose valves off standpipes shall be U.L. approved. All valves shall be 2-1/2" with 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" reducer and 

cap with chains. Valves shall be polished brass and chrome-plated. 

PIPING: 

All piping above ground shall be Schedule 40 domestic or 'Dyna Thread' 40 steel pipe and fittings. 

Thinwall and foreign made pipe will not be permitted on this project. 

EARTHQUAKE BRACING: 

Install earthquake bracing in accordance with NFPA #13 Standards and Utah State Fire Marshall's Office. 

SLEEVES: 

Sleeves shall be furnished, together with their location and elevations to the construction manager, timely with 

required schedule or concrete pours. If sleeves are missed by this contractor, he shall be responsible for core 

drilling thru concrete at his own expense, and he shall be responsible for his cutting and patching. Sleeves shall 

be of the size, type, and length required by N.F.P.A. codes. See Section 15050 for "Sleeves". 


TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION DURING COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION: 

This contractor shall provide fire protection as required by N.F.C. #14 - Chapter 8, and shall be coordinated with 

the local fire department. 

SHOP DRAWINGS: 

Shop drawings, submittals, and hydraulic calculations, as necessary and required, shall be submitted to the 

Owner's representative for approval prior to incorporating materials or equipment into the work. Shop drawings 

shall be complete and in accordance with N.F.C. #13, #14, #20, and all applicable standards, submittals, and 

equipment, valves, flow switches, controls, and other important items shall be complete, showing details, 

description, and characteristics; hydraulic calculations shall be based on the water system fire flow capacities 

shown on the drawings and shall show flows, pressures, velocities, pipe size, and equivalent lengths as required 

for the system. 

Calculations shall be arranged in an orderly manner with sufficient reference points for the approving authority to 

review and approve. 

Testing shall be accomplished by this contractor for all required systems, equipment, and appurtenances, as 

required by the various standards and codes. The Owner's representative shall witness and sign off each item 

required. This contractor shall furnish required forms. 

TESTS: 

Install all test pipes and valves as required by NFPA No. 13. Locate inspector's test valves and auxiliary drain 

valves above ceilings in areas approved by the Architect and provide hose bibb connections. Conduct all tests 

_______________________________________ 

_______________________________________________________________________________________ 

______ 



as required by NFPA Standards and Insurance Services Office and submit copies of completed test forms to the 

building owner. 

All fire sprinkler related tests requiring the witnessing by local authorities will be the responsibility of this 

contractor. If tests are not run or do not have the proper witness or documentation, then they will be run late and 

all damage caused by the system, or caused in uncovering the system for such tests, will be borne by this 

contractor. 

The Utah State Fire Marshall and building owner shall be notified (in writing) at least three days in advance of 


Hydrostatic test and final inspection of overhead, prior to 

the installation of the ceilings. 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 

This contractor shall submit complete drawings, hydraulic calculations, and proper documentation to the local 

authority having jurisdiction and receive their approval before submitting such material to the 

Owner's representative for final approval. The contractor will be required to show proof of submittal to the 

Owner's insurance underwriter and local building authorities before installation may begin. 

All work of this contractor will be coordinated with other trades to insure minimal changes to the sprinkler system 

from the designs. Careful coordination of mechanical and electrical ducts, pipe and conduit shall be required. 

The ceiling cavity must be carefully reviewed and coordinated with all trades. In the event of conflict the 

installation of the mechanical equipment and piping shall be in the following order: plumbing waste, rainwater, 

and soil lines' supply, return, and exhaust ductwork; water piping; fire protection piping; and pneumatic control 

piping. 

Every effort shall be required to insure that the heads form a symmetrical pattern in the ceiling with the ceiling 

grid, the lights, and diffusers and grilles and as shown on the Architect's reflected ceiling plan. Offsets shall be 

made in piping to accommodate ductwork in ceiling. Heads should be symmetrical and all piping run parallel or 

perpendicular to building lines. In no case shall sprinkler heads be installed closer than 6" from ceiling grids or 

closer than approved distances from ceiling obstructions. 

All sprinkler piping shall be run concealed unless approved by the Owner's representative. All lines will be run 

as high as possible so as to not interfere with future changes to ceiling heights or other mechanical equipment. 

This contractor will be responsible for all sleeves, core drills, and sealing of penetrations in walls, floors, and 

structural members to facilitate the installation of the system, however, no holes in, or attachments to structural 

members will be allowed unless approved by the Owner's representative. 

All required drains and test pipes will be installed and finished in a workmanlike manner, terminating at a proper 

location to accommodate the required outflow without damaging the building or landscaping. Drain and test pipe 

locations shall be approved by the owner's representative. 

All piping and heads located in un-heated spaces shall be installed with a glycol loop system. Coordinate 

location with the owner's representative. Indicating valves with tamper switches shall be installed and wired as 

required by code. Coordinate with electrical contractor. 

_______________________________________ 

_______________________________________________________________________________________ 

______ 



No piping or valve assemblies shall be run exposed in a finished area without the prior approval of the owner's 

representative. 

JOB CLOSEOUT: 

This contractor shall assure that all placards, signs, and instruction manuals are in place, and all tests are run 

before any consideration for final payment will be considered. This includes maintenance manuals, hydraulic 

calculations placards, spare head cabinets and the proper number of spare heads, and instruction to on-site 

personnel. 

This contractor shall, in addition to the above, furnish the owner one (1) set of mylar reproducibles of the 

sprinkler system "record drawings" for his project files. 

_______________________________________ 

_______________________________________________________________________________________ 

______ 



SECTION 15700 HEATING-COOLING 


SCOPE: 

The installation covers the furnishing and installing of rooftop heating/air conditioning units and all necessary trim 

and specialties, etc., as specified and shown on drawings and as required to provide the complete heating and 

air conditioning systems shown on the drawings and specified herein. 


HOT WATER BOILER: 

Furnish and install hot water boiler as shown on plans in accordance with all codes and authorities having 

jurisdiction. Boiler shall be UL/FM approved and have an input of 1000 mbh with a gross output of 860-920 mbh 

(dependent upon return water temperature). 

Construction 

Boiler shall be of gas fired, condensing fire tube design with a modulating power burner and positive pressure 

discharge. Burner shall be capable of 20:1 turndown of firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency. Heat 

exchanger/combustion chamber shall incorporate a helical fire tube design that will be self supporting, baffle 

free, and warranted to withstand thermal shock. Heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working 

pressure not less than 150 psig. Unit shall have an ASME approved relief valve. Exhaust manifold shall be of 

corrosion resistant porcelain enameled cast iron, with a 6" diameter flue connection. Exhaust manifold shall have 

a gravity drain for the elimination of condensation. 

The flame monitoring system shall incorporate a U/L recognized combustion safeguard system utilizing 

interrupted spark ignition and a rectification type flame sensor. An electro-hydraulic double seated safety shutoff 

valve shall be an inherent part of the gas train. 

Boiler shall incorporate electric probe type low water cutoff and dual over temperature protection including a 

manual reset in accordance with ASME section IV and CSD-1. Remote fault alarm contacts, and sensor failure 

detection. Boiler shall operate on 120/1/60. 

Installation 

All aspects of installation of Boiler Plant shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Materials 

shall conform with all manufacturers’ recommendations and shall include a Stainless Steel AL-29-4C Positive 

Pressure U/L Listed Vent System. Boiler shall have individually isolating shutoff valves for service and 

maintenance. 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 


HEATING-COOLING 15700-1

Mode of Operation 

Boiler shall include integral factory wired operating controls to control all operation and energy input of the boiler. 

The controller shall have the ability to vary boiler input throughout its full range to maximize the condensing 

capability of the boiler without header temperature swings. 

The boiler will operate to vary header temperature setpoint linearly as an externally applied 4-20 ma signal is 

supplied. Unit shall operate with an Inverse Efficiency Curve, with known Part Load Value Efficiencies. 

Maximum efficiency shall be achieved at minimum firing input. Main Header outlet temperature shall not be 

more than +/-2F from setpoint at any point of operation. The boiler shall have LCD display for monitoring of all 

sensors and interlocks. 

Warranty 

The pressure vessel of boiler shall carry an unconditional, non-prorated 10 year warranty against leakage due to 

defective materials or workmanship. The heat exchanger tubes/combustion chamber assembly shall be 

warranted against failure due to thermal stress failure or condensate corrosion for a prorated five year period. A 

Warranty Certificate must be issued to the owner from the manufacturer and a copy of warranty be submitted for 

engineers approval. 

Field Services 

Contractor shall provide the services of a local factory authorized representative to supervise all phases of 

equipment startup. A letter of compliance with all factory recommendations and installation instructions shall be 

submitted to the engineer with operation and maintenance instructions. 

Boiler shall be Aerco or Fulton 

AIR COOLED CHILLER: 

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

Microprocessor controlled, air-cooled liquid chiller utilizing scroll compressors, low sound fans 

QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590, latest revision (U.S.A.). 

B. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code, UL 1995, and ASME applicable codes 

(U.S.A. codes). 

C. Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000 Manufacturing Quality Standard. 

D. Unit shall be full load run tested at the factory. 

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturer's recommendations. 

EQUIPMENT 

A. General: 

Factory assembled, single-piece or factory-matched duplex chassis, air-cooled liquid chiller. 

Contained within the unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls and refrigerant charge. 

B. Unit Cabinet: 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

1. Frame shall be of heavy-gage, painted galvanized steel. 

2. Cabinet shall be galvanized steel casing with a baked enamel powder or pre-painted finish. 

3. Cabinet shall be capable of withstanding 500-hour salt spray test in accordance with the 

ASTM (U.S.A.) B-117 standard. 

C. Fans: 

1. Condenser fans shall be direct-driven, shrouded-axial type, and shall be statically and 

dynamically balanced with inherent corrosion resistance. 

2. Air shall be discharged vertically upward. 

3. Fans shall be protected by coated steel wire safety guards. 

D. Compressor/Compressor Assembly: 

1. Fully hermetic scroll type compressors. 

2. Direct drive, 3500 rpm (60 Hz), protected by motor temperature sensors, suction gas cooled 

motor. 

3. External vibration isolation rubber-in-shear. 

4. Each compressor shall be equipped with crankcase heaters to minimize oil dilution. 

E. Cooler: 

1. Shell-and-tube type, direct expansion. 

2. Tubes shall be internally enhanced seamless copper type rolled into tube sheets. 

3. Shall be equipped with Victaulic-type fluid connections. 

4. Shell shall be insulated with 3/4-in. PVC closed cell foam with a maximum K factor of 0.28. 

5. Design shall incorporate a minimum of 2 independent direct-expansion refrigerant circuits. 

F. Condenser: 

1. Coil shall be air-cooled heat exchanger technology and shall have a series of flat tubes 

containing a series of multiple, parallel flow microchannels layered between the refrigerant 

manifolds. Coils shall consist of a two-pass arrangement. Coil construction shall consist of 

aluminum alloys for fins, tubes, and manifolds in combination with a corrosion-resistant 

coating on the tubes. 

2. Tubes shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. 

3. Assembled condenser coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 656 psig. 

G. Refrigeration Components: 

Refrigerant circuit components shall include replaceable-core filter drier, moisture indicating sight 

glass, electronic expansion device, discharge service valve and liquid line service valves, and 

complete operating charge of both refrigerant R-410A and compressor oil. 

H. Controls, Safeties, and Diagnostics: 

1. Unit controls shall include the following minimum components: 

a. Microprocessor with non-volatile memory. Battery backup system shall not be accepted. 

b. Separate terminal block for power and controls. 

c. Control transformer to serve all controllers, relays, and control components. 

d. ON/OFF control switch. 

e. Replaceable solid-state controllers. 

f. Pressure sensors installed to measure suction and discharge pressure. Thermistors installed 

to measure cooler entering and leaving fluid temperatures. 

2. Unit controls shall include the following functions: 

a. Automatic circuit lead/lag. 

b. Hermetic scroll compressors are maintenance free and protected by an auto-adaptive control 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

that minimizes compressor wear. 

c. Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature and compensated by rate of 

change of return-fluid temperature with temperature set point accuracy to 0.1° F. 

d. Limiting the chilled fluid temperature pulldown rate at start-up to an adjustable range of 0.2° F 

to 2° F per minute to prevent excessive demand spikes at start-up. 

e. Seven-day time schedule. 

f. Leaving chilled fluid temperature reset from return fluid and outside air temperature. 

g. Chilled water pump start/stop control and primary/standby sequencing to ensure equal pump 

run time. 

h. Dual chiller control for parallel chiller applications without addition of hardware modules and 

control panels. 

i. Timed maintenance scheduling to signal maintenance activities for pumps, strainer 

maintenance and user-defined maintenance activities. 

j. Low ambient protection to energize cooler. Periodic pump start to ensure pump seals are 

properly maintained during off-season periods. 

l. Single step demand limit control activated by remote contact closure. 

m. Nighttime sound mode to reduce the sound of the machine by a user-defined schedule. 

3. Diagnostics: 

a. The control panel shall include, as standard, a scrolling marquee display capable of 

indicating the safety lockout condition by displaying a code for which an explanation may be 

scrolled at the display with time and date stamp. 

b. Information included for display shall be: 

1) Compressor lockout. 

2) Loss of charge. 

3) Low fluid flow. 

4) Cooler freeze protection. 

5) Cooler set point. 

6) Chilled water reset parameters. 

7) Thermistor and transducer malfunction. 

8) Entering and leaving-fluid temperature. 

9) Evaporator and condenser pressure. 

10) System refrigerant temperatures. 

11) Chiller run hours. 

12) Compressor run hours. 

13) Compressor number of starts. 

14) Time of day: 

a) Display module, in conjunction with the microprocessor, must also be capable of 

displaying the output (results) of a service test. Service test shall verify operation of 

every switch, thermistor, fan, and compressor before chiller is started. 

b) Diagnostics shall include the ability to review a list of the 30 most recent alarms with 

clear language descriptions of the alarm event. Display of alarm codes without the 

ability for clear language descriptions shall be prohibited. 

c) An alarm history buffer shall allow the user to store no less than 30 alarm events with 

clear language descriptions, time and date stamp event entry. 

d) The chiller controller shall include multiple connection ports for communicating with 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

the local equipment network system and access to chiller control functions from any 

point on the chiller. 

e) The control system shall allow software upgrade without the need for new hardware 

modules. 

15) Crankcase heater failure. 

4. Safeties: 

a. Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and all necessary components in conjunction with the 

control system to provide the unit with the following protections: 

1) Loss of refrigerant charge. 

2) Reverse rotation. 

3) Low chilled fluid temperature. 

4) Thermal overload. 

5) High pressure. 

6) Electrical overload. 

7) Loss of phase. 

b. Condenser fan and factory pump motors shall have external overcurrent protection. 

I. Operating Characteristics: 

1. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at outdoor ambient temperatures from 32 F to 

125 F for all sizes. 

2. Unit shall be capable of starting up with 95 F entering fluid temperature to the cooler. 

J. Motors: 

Condenser-fan motors shall be totally enclosed single speed, 3-phase type with permanently 

lubricated bearings and Class F insulation. 

K. Electrical Requirements: 

1. Unit/module primary electrical power supply shall enter the unit at a single location. 

2. A factory mounted disconnect shall be provided. 

3. Unit shall operate on 3-phase power at the voltage shown in the equipment schedule. 

4. Control points shall be accessed through terminal block. 

5. Unit shall be shipped with factory control and power wiring installed.. 

L. Chilled Water Circuit: 

1. Chilled water circuit shall be rated for 300 psig. Thermal dispersion proof of flow switch shall 

be factory installed and wired. 

a. Pressure/temperature taps (3) shall be factory installed to measure the pressure differential 

across the pump and across the strainer. 

b. Combination valve shall be factory installed. Pressure/temperature taps (2) shall be factory 

installed to measure the pressure differential across the combination valve. 

c. Piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel. 

d. Cast iron or ductile iron body strainer with 8 mesh screen. A factory-installed, removable fine 

mesh clean-out strainer for initial run period shall be included. 

M. Special Features: 

1. Low Ambient Head Pressure Control: 

Unit shall be capable of running at outdoor ambient temperatures down to –20 F with the 

addition of antifreeze in the cooler circuit, wind baffles, and field-installed or factory-installed 

solid-state head pressure control with condenser coil minimum step capacity temperature 

sensor. 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

2. Unit-Mounted Non-Fused Disconnect: 

Unit shall be supplied with factory-installed, non-fused electrical disconnect for main power 

supply. 

3. Minimum Load Control: 

Unit shall be equipped with factory installed, microprocessor-controlled, minimum load control 

that shall permit unit operation down to a minimum of 15% capacity. 

4. Energy Management Control Module: 

A factory or field-installed module shall provide the following energy management 

capabilities: 

4 to 20 mA signals for leaving fluid temperature reset, cooling set point reset or demand limit 

control and 2-step demand limit control (from 0% to 100%) activated by a remote contact 

closure. 

5. Condenser Coil Trim Panels and Security Grilles: 

Unit shall be supplied with factory or field-installed coil covers and painted grilles to protect 

the condenser coil and internal chiller components from physical damage. 

6. Hail Guards: 

Field-installed accessory kit shall include set of metal grilles for the protection of the 

condensing coils from hail damage. 

7. BACnet Translator Control: 

Unit shall be supplied with field-installed interface between the chiller and a BACnet Local 

Area Network (LAN, i.e., MS/TP EIA-485). 

8. Touch Display: 

9. Freeze Protection Cooler Heaters: 

Cooler heaters provide protection from cooler freeze-up to –20 F. 

10. Low-Sound Compressor Enclosures: 

Provide sound reduction for the scroll compressors through enclosure and blankets not to 

exceed the following: Overall sound power level = 90.0 dBA 

Distance 

from side of 

unit (feet) 

Free field 

sound 

pressure 

3 75.6 

5 73.4 

10 69.6 

15 66.9 

20 64.9 

25 63.3 

30 61.9 

35 60.7 

40 59.6 

45 58.7 

50 57.9 

55 57.1 

60 56.4 

65 55.7 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

70 55.1 

Chiller shall be Carrier, Dunham-Bush, or McQuay 



AIR HANDLING UNIT: (AHU-1) 

Part 1 — General 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 

Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum of five 

years documented experience. 

B. Units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000 manufacturing quality standard. 

C. Air-handling unit assembly shall have UL 1995 certification for safety. 

D. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. 

E. Air-handling unit shall be ARI 430 listed and meet NFPA 90A requirements. 

1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION 

A. All indoor units, painted or unpainted, shall be completely shrink-wrapped from the factory for 

protection during shipment. Tarping of bare units is unacceptable. 

B. Inspect for transportation damage and store in clean dry place and protect from weather and 

construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. 

1.03 START-UP REQUIREMENTS 

Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, condensate properly 

trapped, piping connections verified and leak tested, belts aligned and tensioned, all shipping braces 

have been removed, and fan has been test run under observation. 

Part 2 — Products 

2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

A. Units shall ship in the number of sections necessary to meet project requirements. 

B. Unit shall be factory-supplied, central station air handler. The air-handling unit shall consist of a fan 

with the following factory-installed components as indicated on the equipment schedule. 

1. Filter/Mixing Box Section including outside air dampers, return air dampers, filter racks, filter 

access door, and filters (to include an additional set to be left with the owner). 

2. Hot water coil. 

3. Chilled water coil with stainless steel condenser drain pan and connection. 

4. Fan section with plenum fan. 

. 

2.02 CASING 

A. Construction: 

1. Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with easily removable panels. Removal of any 

panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Single height coil sections shall have 

removable frame sections to facilitate vertical coil extraction. 

2. All units shall be supplied with 16-gage, G-90 galvanized steel base rails. Bolt-on legs are 

NOT acceptable. Perimeter 10-gage lifting lugs for overhead lifting shall be provided on each 

section. Slinging units in place of lifting lugs shall not be acceptable. 

3. Unit shall be thermally broken to minimize the conduction path from the inside of the casing 

to the outside. 

4. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall 

have one of the following exterior finishes as specified: 

a. Pre-painted with a baked enamel finish passing 500-hour salt spray test (ASTM B-117) for 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

pre-painted steel and 125-hour marine level 1 prohesion test (ASTM G-85.A5) for pre-painted 

steel. 

5. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall 

have one of the following interior finishes as specified: 

a. Pre-coated with a silver zeolite antimicrobial material registered by the US EPA for use in 

HVAC applications. 

6. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall have no exterior exposed raw edges that could 

lead to rust formation. All casing corners shall be radiused or chamfered. 

7. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be one piece, double-wall construction with 

insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an Rvalue 

of less than 13. 

8. Casing deflection shall not exceed a 1:200 ratio when subject to an internal pressure of ± 5in. 

wg. 

9. Side panels shall be easily removable for access to unit and shall seal against a full 

perimeter automotive style gasket to ensure a tight seal. 

10. The panel retention system shall comply with UL 1995 which states all moving parts (for 

example, fan blades, blower wheels, pulleys, and belts) that, if accidentally contacted, could 

cause bodily injury, shall be guarded against accidental contact by an enclosure requiring 

tools for removal. 

11. Accessibility options shall be as follows: 

a. Hinged double-wall access door on either side with removable access panel(s) on the other 

side. 

b. Hinged double-wall access doors on both sides. 

c. Removable double-wall access panels on both sides. 

12. Fan supports, structural members, panels, or flooring shall not be welded, unless aluminum, 

stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material is used. Painted welds on unit exterior 

steel or galvanized steel are not acceptable. 

13. All coil sections shall be doublewall construction with insulation sealed between the inner and 

outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R-value of less than 13. Single height coil 

sections shall have removable frame sections to facilitate vertical coil extraction. 

B. Access Doors: 

Access doors shall be one piece, double-wall construction with insulation sealed between the inner 

and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R-value of less than 13. 

C. Drain Pans: 

Drain pans shall be insulated double-wall stainless steel construction. The pan shall be sloped in 4 

directions toward the drain fitting. Drain pan shall have a recessed bottom drain design with 11/2-in. 

MPT connection exiting through the hand side or opposite side of the casing as specified. Drain 

connection shall be insulated from the drain pan to the point at which it exits the casing. One drain 

outlet shall be supplied for each cooling coil section. Drain pan shall allow no standing water and 

comply with ASHRAE Standard 62. Where 2 or more coils are stacked in a coil bank, intermediate 

drain pans shall be provided and the condensate shall be piped to the bottom drain pan. The bottom 

coil shall not serve as a drain path for the upper coil. 

2.03 FANS 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

A. General: 

1. Plenum fan sections shall have one single-width single-inlet (SWSI) airfoil fan wheel. Airfoil 

blades shall be double thickness design constructed of heavy gage, high strength steel or 

aluminum continuously welded to the backplate and the spun inlet flange. Entire fan 

assembly shall be cleaned, primed and painted with alkyd enamel, except for an aluminum 

fan wheel when supplied. They shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum 

rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fans shall have an AMCA class rating 

corresponding to the static pressure at which the fan is designed to operate (Class I, II, or III). 

Completed fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced to minimum grade of G 6.3 per 

ANSI/AMCA 204-96 at design operating speed using contract drive and motor if ordered. 

4. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuous operation at 

maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and shafts shall be selected 

with a maximum operating speed 25% below the first critical. 

5. Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and coated with a rust inhibitor. 

6. Fan motor shall be mounted within the fan section casing on slide rails equipped with 

adjusting screws. Motor shall be high efficiency, open dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled 

NEMA Design B with size and electrical characteristics as shown on the equipment schedule. 

Premium efficiency motors shall be available. Motor shall be mounted on a horizontal flat 

surface and shall not be supported by the fan or its structural members. All three-phase 

motors shall have a ± 10% voltage utilization range and a 1.15 minimum service factor. Motor 

shall be compliant with EPACT where applicable. 

B. Performance Ratings: 

Fan performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430. 

C. Sound Ratings: 

Manufacturer shall submit first through eighth octave sound power for fan discharge and casing 

radiated sound. 

D. Mounting: 

Fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, drives, and motor shall be mounted on a common base assembly. 

The base assembly is isolated from the outer casing with factory-installed isolators and rubber 

vibration absorbent fan discharge seal. A canvas style duct connection between fan discharge and 

cabinet is not acceptable. Sizes 03-61 shall use 2-in. deflection spring isolators. 

3. Plenum Fans: 

a. Variable frequency drives with or without bypass. 

b. Magnetic motor starters. 

c. Motor disconnects. 

d. Inlet screen and wheel cage. 

F. Flexible Connection: 

The base assembly is isolated from the outer casing with factory-installed isolators and rubber 

vibration absorbent fan discharge seal. A canvas style duct connection between fan discharge and 

cabinet is not acceptable. 

2.04 BEARINGS AND DRIVES 

A. Bearings: 

Self-aligning, grease lubricated, anti-friction with lubrication fittings extended to drive side of fan 



section. Optional grease fittings extended to the exterior of the casing are available. 

1. Size 06 to 61 plenum fans: Heavy-duty pillow block type, self-aligning, regreasable roller type 

bearings selected for a minimum average life (L50) of 200,000 hours or optionally for an 

(L50) of 500,000 hours. 

B. Shafts: 

Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and coated with a rust inhibitor. 

C. V-Belt Drive: 

Drive shall be designed for a minimum 1.2 service factor as standard with a 1.5 service factor option 

and/or a factory-supplied extra set of belts. Drives shall be fixed pitch. All drives shall be factory 

mounted, with sheaves aligned and belts properly tensioned. 

2.05 COILS 

A. All water coils shall be provided to meet the scheduled performance. All coil performance shall be 

certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. All water coils shall be tested at 450 psig air pressure. 

B. General Fabrication: 

1. All water coils shall have minimum 1/2-in. OD copper tubes mechanically expanded into fins 

to ensure high thermal performance with lower total flow and pumping requirements. 

Minimum tube wall thickness shall be 0.016 inches. 

2. Aluminum plate fin type with belled collars. Optional copper plate fins shall be supplied, if 

specified. 

3. Aluminum-finned coils shall be supplied with dieformed casing and tube sheets of mill 

galvanized steel or stainless steel as specified. 

C. Hydronic Heating and Cooling Coils: 

1. Headers shall be constructed of steel with steel MPT connections. Headers shall have drain 

and vent connections accessible from the exterior of the unit. 

2. Configuration: Coils shall be drainable, with non-trapping circuits. Coils will be suitable for a 

design working pressure of 300 psig at 200 F. 

2.06 DAMPERS 

A. Filter-mixing boxes shall have parallel or opposed blades and interconnecting outside-air and returnair 

dampers. 

1. Standard Dampers: 

Damper blades shall be constructed of galvanized steel, with blade seals and stainless steel 

jamb seals. Blades shall be mechanically fastened to axle rods rotating in self-lubricating 

synthetic bearings. Maximum leakage rate shall be 4 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. wg (0.25 kPa) differential 

pressure. 

2.07 BYPASS FOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 

1. 200-230 v/3 Ph/60 Hz: 

a. 4-position panel-mounted disconnect style switch with lockable handle (locks not provided), 

meets OSHA 1910. 

b. Switch position indication (LINE/OFF/DRIVE/TEST). 

c. Adjustable motor overload with trip indication (in LINE position). 

d. Manual overload reset button. 

e. Horsepower rated for motor applications. 

f. 115-v control transformer with fused secondary (fused primary on units over 50 amps). 

g. Contactor for Line Start/Stop. 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 



h. Door-mounted Line Start and Line Stop pushbuttons. 

i. Complete isolation of inverter in LINE position. 

j. NEMA 12 type metal enclosures. 

k. Terminal strip provided for field power supply wiring. 

l. Lug connection for field ground wire. 

m. Auxiliary switch contact set (for switch position monitoring). 

n. Factory mounted, wired to VFD and motor, and run tested (motor and VFD must be factory 

supplied and installed). 

o. UL listed. 

2.08 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 

1. Factory-mounted variable frequency drives (VFDs) shall be wired to factory-supplied motors. 

2. Factory-supplied VFDs are programmed and started up from the factory and qualify the VFD, 

through ABB, for a 24-month warranty from date of commissioning or 30 months from date of 

sale, whichever occurs first. 

3. The VFD parameters are programmed into the controller and removable keypad. In the event 

that the VFD fails and needs replacement, the program can then be uploaded to the 

replacement VFD via the original keypad. 

4. The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type 1 enclosure, 

completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in a facility registered to ISO 

9001:2000. The VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of 

+30% nominal, and –35% nominal voltage as a minimum. 

a. Environmental operating conditions: 0° to 40 C continuous. Variable frequency drives that 

can operate at 40 C intermittently (during a 24-hour period) are not acceptable and must be 

oversized. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, less than 95% humidity, non-condensing. 

b. Enclosure shall be rated UL type 1 and shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD. Variable 

frequency drives without these ratings are not acceptable. 

5. All VFDs shall have the following standard features: 

a. All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, 

regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote 

mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for startup 

of multiple VFDs. 

b. The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. The drive shall 

incorporate “bumpless transfer” of speed reference when switching between “Hand” and 

“Auto” modes. There shall be fault reset and “Help” buttons on the keypad. The Help button 

shall include “on-line” assistance for programming and troubleshooting. 

c. There shall be a built-in timeclock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a battery back up 

with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and 

record operating parameters at the time of fault. If the battery fails, the VFD shall 

automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up. The clock shall also be 

programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and 

output relays. The VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the time clock 

(when in the off mode) for a programmable time frame. There shall be four (4) separate, 

independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings. 

d. The VFDs shall utilize pre-programmed application macros specifically designed to facilitate 

start-up. The Application Macros shall provide one command to reprogram all parameters 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming time. The VFD 

shall have two user macros to allow the end-user to create and save custom settings. 

e. The VFD shall have cooling fans that are designed for easy replacement. The fans shall be 

designed for replacement without requiring removing the VFD from the wall or removal of 

circuit boards. The VFD cooling fans shall operate only when required. To extend the fan and 

bearing operating life, operating temperature will be monitored and used to cycle the fans on 

and off as required. 

f. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse) up to full speed 

and accelerate or decelerate to set point without safety tripping or component damage (flying 

start). 

g. The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an overcurrent, over-voltage, 

under-voltage, or loss of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts, trial time, 

and time between attempts shall be programmable. 

h. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute 

every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds. The minimum FLA rating shall meet or 

exceed the values in the NEC/ UL table 430-150 for 4-pole motors. 

i. The VFD shall have an integral 5% impedance line reactors to reduce the harmonics to the 

power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% impedance may be from 

dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5% AC line reactors. Variable frequency 

drives with only one DC reactor shall add AC line reactors. 

j. The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient protection system consisting of four 120joule 

rated MOVs (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% 

impedance reactors. 

k. The VFD shall be capable of sensing a loss of load (broken belt or broken coupling) and 

signal the loss of load condition. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via 

a keypad warning, relay output and/ or over the serial communications bus. Relay outputs 

shall include programmable time delays that will allow for drive acceleration from zero speed 

without signaling a false underload condition. 

l. If the input reference (4 to 20 mA or 2 to 10 v) is lost, the VFD shall give the user the option 

of either (1) stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, (3) 

holding the VFD speed based on the last good reference received, or (4) causing a warning 

to be issued, as selected by the user. The drive shall be programmable to signal this 

condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communication bus. 

m. The VFD shall have programmable “Sleep” and “Wake up” functions to allow the drive to be 

started and stopped from the level of a process feedback signal. 

6. All VFDs to have the following adjustments: 

a. Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating 

the load continuously at an unstable speed. 

b. Two (2) PID set point controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing pressure or flow 

signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed loop 

control. The VFD shall have 250 mA of 24 vdc auxiliary power and be capable of loop 

powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID set point shall be adjustable from the 

VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus. There shall be two parameter 

sets for the first PID that allow the sets to be switched via a digital input, serial 

communications or from the keypad for night setback, summer/winter set points, etc. There 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and 

modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain set point of an independent process (i.e,. 

valves, dampers, etc.). All set points, process variables, etc. shall be accessible from the 

serial communication network. The set points shall be set in Engineering units and not 

require a percentage of the transducer input. 

c. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals. 

d. Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA). The outputs may be 

programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output 

Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference, and other 

data. 

e. Six (6) programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external devices, 

typically programmed as follows: There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve 

control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, timeclock 

control, or serial communications) the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal 

the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a 

normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD 

digital input and allows VFD motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be 

provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and 

the damper shall be commanded to close. The keypad shall display “start enable 1 (or 2) 

missing.” The safety status shall also be transmitted over the serial communications bus. All 

digital inputs shall be programmable to initiate upon an application or removal of 24 vdc. 

f. Three (3) programmable digital Form-C relay outputs. The relays shall include programmable 

on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. Default settings shall be for run, not faulted 

(fail safe), and run permissive. The relays shall be rated for maximum switching current 8 

amps at 24 vdc and 0.4 A at 250 vac; Maximum voltage 300 vdc and 250 vac; continuous 

current rating 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall be true Form C type contacts; open collector 

outputs are not acceptable. 

g. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds. 

h. Two independently adjustable accelerate and decelerate ramps with 1 to 1800 seconds 

adjustable time ramps. 

i. The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied 

motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and audible motor noise. 

j. The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency 

based on actual VFD temperature that allows the highest carrier frequency without derating 

the VFD or operating at high carrier frequency only at low speeds. 

k. The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes. 

7. The keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English 

words for programming and fault diagnostics (alphanumeric codes are not acceptable). The 

keypad shall utilize the following assistants: 

a. Start-up assistants. 

b. Parameter assistants. 

c. Maintenance assistant. 

d. Troubleshooting assistant. 

8. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) 

units. A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

displayed at all times. The display shall be in complete English words (alphanumeric codes 

are not acceptable): 

a. Output Frequency 

b. Motor Speed (rpm, percentage, or Engineering units) 

c. Motor Current 

d. Calculated Motor Torque 

e. Calculated Motor Power (kW) 

f. DC Bus Voltage 

g. Output Voltage 

9. The VFD shall include a fireman’s override input. Upon receipt of a contact closure from the 

fireman’s control station, the VFD shall operate at an adjustable preset speed. The mode 

shall override all other inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad 

commands) and force the motor to run at the adjustable, preset speed. “Override Mode” shall 

be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the override signal, the VFD shall resume 

normal operation. 

10. Serial Communications: 

a. The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus, 

Johnson Controls N2 bus, and Siemens Building Technologies FLN. Optional protocols for 

Lon Works®, BACnet, Profibus, Ethernet, and DeviceNet shall be available. Each 

individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party gateways and 

multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority. 

Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed. 

b. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to: run-stop control, speed 

set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative (PID) control adjustments, current limit, 

accelerate/decelerate time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall 

have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable 

feedback, output speed/frequency, current (in amps), percent torque, power (kW), kilowatthours 

(resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also 

be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input 

and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted 

over the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible. The following 

additional status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications 

bus — keypad “Hand” or “Auto” selected, bypass selected, the ability to change the PID set 

point, and the ability to force the unit to bypass (if bypass is specified). The DDC system shall 

also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the VFD mode or bypass mode (if bypass is 

specified) over serial communications. A minimum of 15 field parameters shall be capable of 

being monitored. 

c. The VFD shall allow the DDC to control the drive’s digital and analog outputs via the serial 

interface. This control shall be independent of any VFD function. For example, the analog 

outputs may be used for modulating chilled water valves or cooling tower bypass valves. The 

drive’s digital (relay) outputs may be used to actuate a damper, open a valve or control any 

other device that requires a maintained contact for operation. In addition, all of the drive’s 

digital and analog inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system. 

d. The VFD shall include an independent PID loop for customer use. The independent PID loop 

may be used for cooling tower bypass value control, chilled water value control, etc. Both the 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

VFD control PID loop and the independent PID loop shall continue functioning even if the 

serial communications connection is lost. The VFD shall keep the last good set point 

command and last good digital output (DO) and analog output (AO) commands in memory in 

the event the serial communications connection is lost. 

11. EMI/RFI Filters: 

All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be 

CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment 

restricted level. 

12. All VFDs through 50 hp shall be protected from input and output power miswiring. The VFD 

shall sense this condition and display an alarm on the keypad. 

13. Operational Functions: 

a. The drive shall contain two separate acceleration/ deceleration times with auto tuning for 

optimum setting (0.1 to 6000 seconds) with choice of linear, S, or C curves that shall be 

factory programmed to match the fan load and prevent nuisance overcurrent fault trips. 

b. The drive shall be equipped with both local/remote and manual/auto keys on touchpad. 

c. The drive shall be equipped with a quick setup key. 

d. The drive shall contain 15 preset speeds, which can be activated from the keypad, terminal 

inputs, and host computer. 

e. The drive shall have the capability of storable special custom user setting. 

f. The drive shall restart into a rotating motor operating in either the forward or reverse direction 

and match that frequency. 

g. The drive shall have adjustable soft stall (10% to 150%) which reduces frequency and 

voltage of the inverter to sustain a run in an overload situation factory programmed for each 

motor’s characteristics. 

h. The drive shall be capable of performing a time base pattern run using 4 groups of 8 patterns 

each using the 15 preset speed values for a maximum of 32 different patterns. 

i. The drive shall have adjustable UL listed electronic overload protection (10% to 100%) 

factory programmed to match each motor’s FLA/RLA ratings. 

j. The drive shall have a custom programmable volt/hertz pattern. 

14. Protective Features: 

a. The drive shall be rated for 200,000 AIC (ampere interrupting capacity). The use of input 

fuses to achieve this rating shall not be acceptable. 

b. The drive shall have external fault input. 

c. The drive shall be capable of resetting faults remotely and locally. 

d. The drive shall be programmable to alert the following alarms: 

1) Over torque alarm. 

2) Inverter overload pre-alarm. 

3) Motor overload pre-alarm. 

4) Braking resistor overload pre-alarm. 

5) Inverter overheat pre-alarm. 

6) Undercurrent alarm. 

7) Overcurrent pre-alarm. 

8) Communication error alarm. 

9) Cumulative timer alarm. 

10) Executing retry. 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

e. The drive shall identify and display the following faults: 

1) Overcurrent during acceleration trip. 

2) Overcurrent during deceleration trip. 

3) Overcurrent during normal run trip. 

4) Overcurrent on the DC Bus during acceleration trip. 

5) Overcurrent on the DC Bus during deceleration trip. 

6) Overcurrent on the DC Bus during normal run trip. 

7) Load end overcurrent trip detected at start-up (output terminals, motor wiring, etc.). 

8) U-phase short circuit trip detected at start-up. 

9) V-phase short circuit trip detected at start-up. 

10) W-phase short circuit trip detected at start-up. 

11) Overvoltage during acceleration trip. 

12) Overvoltage during deceleration trip. 

13) Overvoltage during normal (constant speed) run trip. 

14) Inverter overloaded trip. 

15) Motor overloaded trip. 

16) Inverter overheat trip. 

17) Emergency off trip message. 

18) EEPROM failure during write cycle. 

19) EEPROM abnormality during initial reading. 

20) RAM error. 

21) ROM error. 

22) CPU error. 

23) Communication interruption error. 

24) Gate array error. 

25) Output current detection circuit error. 

26) Option PCB error trip. 

27) Low operating current trip. 

28) Main circuit under voltage trip. 

29) Over torque trip. 

30) Software detected earth fault trip. 

31) Hardware detected earth fault trip. 

32) Inverter type form mismatch error. 

33) EEPROM type form mismatch error. 

15. Monitor Functions: 

a. The drive digital display shall be capable of displaying the following: Frequency, percent 

current, current amps, percent voltage I/O, voltage in volts I/O, RPM, GPM, I/O watts, torque, 

and input reference signal, kWh. 

b. The drive shall have 320 programmable parameters which can be changed while the drive is 

operating. 

c. The drive’s 353 parameters shall be adjustable from the 8-key touchpad or computer link. 

d. The drive’s 8-key touchpad shall be NEMA 12 rated. 

e. The drive’s keypad shall be capable of being extended 15 ft from the drive. 

f. The drive shall contain a reset of all parameters to factory default settings or user defaults 

(whichever one is chosen). 



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

g. The drive shall have 2 programmable analog outputs programmable to 17 choices. 

h. The drive shall have one programmable relay output programmable to 67 choices. 

i. The drive shall have 8 programmable digital inputs programmable to 54 choices. 

j. The drive shall have a pulse train output proportional to frequency (48, 96, 360 times 

frequency). 

k. The drive shall have an elapsed time meter. 

Air handler shall be Carrier, Dunham-Bush, or McQuay. 



BASE-MOUNTED PUMPS: 

Furnish and install the base-mounted pumps of the size, type, and capacity indicated on the drawings. 

All base-mounted pumps shall be single stage, non-overloading, centrifugal volute type. Impellers shall be 

bronze and shall be dynamically balanced. Bearings shall be of the ball or roller type and the shaft be steel. 

Pumps shall be provided with leakless mechanical shaft seal. All pumps shall be provided with flexible couplings 

which shall impose no restriction or normal end play or expansion. 

Each pump shall be provided with a cast iron or steel baseplate of ample size to hold both the pump and motor 

in alignment. Pumps and motor shall be aligned when running at normal temperature. Final alignment shall be 

made immediately prior to testing under the supervision of a representative of the pump manufacturer. 

All pumps shall operate at 1750 RPM. Motors shall be phase and voltage specified on plans, horizontal ball 

bearing, dripproof. 

Pumps shall be designed in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute, including the latest 

modifications. 

High points of pump casing shall be provided with air vent cocks. Cocks shall be extended outside of insulation 

specified. 

Pumps shall be Bell & Gossett or Taco. 

PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSERS: 

Pump suction diffusers to match the system pipe size and pump inlet size shall be furnished and installed where 

shown or noted on the drawings. Units shall consist of angle type body with inlet vanes and combination 

diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder. Suction diffuser shall be Bell & Gossett or Taco. 

HOT & CHILLED WATER SPECIALTIES: 

Furnish and install complete the water specialties including the air separation tanks, ASME and bladder type 

expansion tanks, tank fittings, air vents, and specialty items required to make a complete and operable hot and 

chilled water system as shown on the drawings and as required to complete system intended. 

Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett, Taco, Wessels. 

Manual air vents shall be installed at all high points in the water system. Air vents shall be 3/8" ball valves and 

shall be installed on a 1/2" pipe nipple--6" long. Run 1/4" copper tube from vent to near floor-anchor tube 

securely to wall, pipe, or structural member. 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 



AIR SEPARATORS: 

Type: Provide air separators of tangential type constructed of steel and tested and stamped in accordance with 

section 8 of the ASME Code for a working pressure of 125 psig. 

Provide separators on hydronic systems capable of separating not less than 80 percent of the entrained air on 

the first passage of water and not less than 30 percent of residual air on each subsequent passage through the 

separator. 

Provide flanged inlet and outlet connections, 3/4-inch diameter valve drain connection and 1-inch diameter top 

air eliminator connection. 

Provide 1-inch diameter pipe from the top air eliminator point to a 5 gallon, steel, ASME stamped 125 pound 

working pressure air receiver vessel with automatic float vent. 

Provide 1-inch diameter globe valve between the air separator and the air receiver. 

EXPANSION TANKS: 

Furnish and install pre-pressurized diaphragm-type expansion tanks of sizes indicated on the drawings. 

Construct tanks of steel in accordance with section 8 of the ASME Code for a working pressure of 125 psig. 

Test and stamp tanks for the working pressure. 

Support tanks on 2-inch diameter steel pipe legs with cross bracing and floor plates or suspend on steel saddles 

with all-thread rod anchored to the structure. 

The tanks shall be the product of a manufacturer who certifies that his tanks have been a standard production 

model for five years prior to opening bids and warrants the diaphragm material unconditionally, against failure or 

leakage for a period of five years from the date of project acceptance. 

CHILLED & HOT WATER COILS: 

Furnish and install the cooling and heating coils of capacities as shown and specified on the drawings. 

Coils shall be of the extended surface type, fabricated of copper or brass tubing not less than 5/8” diameter with 

.035” thick walls and plate-type fins of copper or aluminum extending at right angles to the centerline of the 

tubes. Pressure parts of the coils shall be constructed and tested for a working pressure of not less than 200 

psig. 

Each coil section shall be mounted in a die-formed, 16 gauge, zinc-coated steel casing with mounting flanges. 

All coils shall have inlet, outlet, vent and drain connections for each section and shall have all connections at the 

same end. 

Coils shall be York, Dunham-Bush, Bohn, AAF, Carrier, Trane, or Thermal. 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 



WATER TREATMENT FOR HOT WATER SYSTEMS: 

Contractor shall furnish and install chemical treatment of the boiler water system on initial start-up to prevent the 

formation of scale, corrosion, sludging, and carry-over. Furnish and install a bypass chemical feeder equal to 

Dearborn Aqua-Serv on the boiler water make-up line as shown on the drawings. The chemical supplier shall 

analyze the raw water and prescribe the proper treatment formulation for the boiler system. 

UNIT HEATERS: 

Furnish and install in the locations shown on the plans a propeller fan unit heater of the type and rating specified. 

Each unit to have capacity, air delivery, and motor characteristics as shown on the schedule and shall be for the 

duty as shown on the plans. 

Unit heater coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with .035" thick walls, plate-type aluminum fins and steel 

headers. Tubes shall be expanded into the integral fin collars. The complete assembly shall be tested at 500 

pounds hydrostatic pressure. Adequate provisions shall be made for expansion and contracting of coils within 

the casing. 

Unit casings shall be of not less than 16 gauge steel. All casings to be phosphatized for rust resistance and 

finished with a baked enamel. All hard shall be plated for rust resistance. 

Motors and fans shall be designed for unit heater service and shall be tested for continuous duty as applied on 

each size to eliminate vibration and minimize sound. Heater design shall incorporate means for adequately 

cooling the motor when heat is on but the fan is not operating. 

Horizontal delivery units shall be equipped with formed louvers, 4-way individually adjustable. 

Vertical delivery units shall be provided with the diffuser specified. 

Unit heaters shall be Airtherm, Trane, Erincraft, or Modine. 


COORDINATION: 

All equipment and piping shall be arranged to allow for easy maintenance and access to service valves. 

Provide valves and unions or flanges at all pieces of equipment to allow maintenance. 

Install all control dampers, sensors, etc., as directed by the control contractor. 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 



PROTECTION AGAINST THE ELEMENTS: 

The contractor shall, at all times, take reasonable and adequate precautions to protect his work and all stored 

materials and equipment from damage by the elements, including flooding, windstorms, etc., and shall not 

expose the work of any other contractor to such damage. 

EXPANSION LOOPS: 

General: Provide expansion loops or offsets where indicated on the drawings or where required to relieve 

excessive stress in piping systems. 

Construction: Construct loops and offsets with pipe and long turn factory-made welded fittings sized to limit the 

stress in any part of the loop or piping system to the values in ANSI B31.1. Use ASTM A 53 pipe and fittings. 

Size expansion loops without cold spring. 

Provide two pipe guides, one on each side of each loop, and anchor to the building construction. 

INSTALLATION OF PUMPS: 

General: Install pumps where indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's published installation 

instructions. 

Support: Install floor mounted pumps on minimum of 4-inch high concrete base. Provide anchor bolt inserts 

poured in place. Pumps shall be mounted with cap screws. Grout pump base level. 

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____ 



SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION 


SCOPE: 

Work shall include the air distribution, ventilation, and exhaust duct systems, and all materials, equipment, 

and labor required to complete the systems shown on plans and specified herein. 


Construct all ducts, plenums, etc., of the gauges specified in the latest editions of the applicable SMACNA 

manuals, unless otherwise shown. Sheets shall be free from blisters, slivers, pits, and imperfectly 

galvanized spots. 

Duct construction and installation details shall comply with the latest edition of the SMACNA Duct 

Construction Standards. 

Ducts from the fan unit discharge to VAV terminal boxes shall be constructed to meet the requirements of a 

+4 inch pressure class. All other supply air ducts shall be designed to meet the requirements for +2 inch 

pressurized ducts. All exhaust ducts shall be -2 inch suction ducts. 

+4" PRESSURE CLASS DUCTWORK: 

All ductwork on the discharge side of Air Conditioning units to the terminal boxes shall be +4" pressure class 

duct. It is the essence of the duct system to have a minimum pressure loss. Therefore, ducts shall be run in 

a straight line and shall be run so that the lowest beam or obstruction shall generally determine the 

centerline of the straight run. Eccentric reducing transition shall be avoided, but may be used where space 

is a determining factor. Bends and elbows other than those shown on the drawings shall have the approval 

of the Owner's representative before installation. No pipes, conduits, or any other obstructions shall be run 

through +4" P.C. ductwork. 

ROUND DUCTWORK +4" PRESSURE CLASS: 

The round +4" P.C. HVAC ductwork, fittings, and accessories shall be factory fabricated, spiral conduit. 

Ductwork may, when approved by the owner's representative, be fabricated in a 26 ga. standing rib 

configuration. The ducts shall be constructed of rust-resistant zinc-coated steel and shall be of the sizes 

called for on the drawings. 

All fittings in the round ducts shall be factory fabricated to match the spiral ducts and shall be of the same 

manufacturer. 

Round duct joints in diameters through 50 inches shall be sealed as follows: 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 


AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 1

Approved sealer equal to "Hard Cast" shall be applied to the coupling and fittings. Sealer is applied to the 

outside of the joint, extending 1 inch on each side of the joint bead and covering all screw heads. Plastic 

backed tape is immediately applied over the wet sealer. 

The duct sealer must be specifically formulated for the job sealing the field joints for high-pressure systems. 

The sealer shall be compatible with plastic-backed duct tape so the two shall cure and bond together. 

Samples of sealer and tape and the specification data sheets shall be submitted to the Owner's 

representative for approval. 

Flanged joints shall be sealed by Neoprene Rubber Gaskets. 

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS: 

Location: Provide access doors in casings, plenums, and ducts where shown on the drawings and where 

specified for ready access to operating parts including fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, and concealed 

coils. 

Pressure Clarification: Construct and install access doors in accordance with SMACNA Standards to suit 

the static pressure classifications and the locations where installed. 

Access Doors in Ducts: Provide and size doors as follows: 

1. Minimum 24-inch by 24-inch clear opening. 

2. When field conditions require an access opening smaller than 16-inch by 12-inch, provide a 24-inch 

long removable section of casing or duct, secured with quick acting locking devices, 6 inches on 

centers, to permit ready access without dismantling other equipment. 

Door Requirements: Provide doors in casings and duct as follows: 

1. Arrange doors so that system air pressure will assist closure and prevent opening when the system 

is in operation. 

2. Coordinate doors and equipment to provide unrestricted passage through clear door opening, 

without removal of any equipment. 

3. Where pressure regulating dampers are installed in ducts or plenums, provide access doors with a 

clear wire glass observation port, 6-inch by 6-inch minimum size. Anchor port with structural metal 

frame, resilient gaskets and stainless steel bolts. 

4. Hinges for doors in zinc coated or aluminum construction shall be steel or iron, zinc coated with 

brass pins. 

5. Hinges for doors in copper, copper nickel alloy construction shall be all brass. 

CLOSURE COLLARS: 

A duct ending at a wall or partition shall have the edge turned back to form a closure collar and flanged tight 

to the wall or partition so that no sharp or ragged edge appears. 

FLASHING: 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Where ducts pierce roof construction, the flashing shall be provided as part of Division 7. 

The equipment bases and duct opening bases on the roof shall be constructed by this Contractor as shown 

on the drawings. The base shall be constructed to fit the equipment approved for construction. This 

Contractor shall construct and install a weatherproof inverted pan over the wood bases to act as a 

counterflashing and weatherproof hood for the base. All openings through the pan for equipment mounting 

shall be sealed weathertight with lead washers. 

TEST HOLES IN DUCTWORK: 

Test holes for testing air quantities in ducts shall be installed at locations to be specified by the Balancing 

Contractor. Rubber stoppers shall be provided for closing the test holes. Where these holes are installed in 

insulated ductwork, a removable plug of approved insulation material shall be provided. An instrument port 

shall be provided in the following locations for each fan system. 

Return air shaft and/or duct upstream of sound traps 

Return air fan plenum 

Main return air duct upstream of fresh air dampers 

Mixed air plenum 

Supply fan plenum 

Additional ports are to be installed in locations determined by the Owner's representative. 

Instrument ports shall be die cast with screwed cover for the insulation thickness specified. Ports shall be 

located outside of the plenum with 20-gauge sheet metal sleeve of the same size as the port opening, 

passing through insulation where ducts have interior insulation. 

CLEANOUT OPENINGS: 

Duct systems shall have cleanout openings equipped with tight fitting sheet metal doors. Doors shall be 

tightly latched without the use of tools. 

FIRE-RESISTIVE ACCESS OPENING: 

When cleanout openings are located in ducts within a fire-resistive shaft or enclosure, access openings shall 

be provided in the shaft or enclosure at each cleanout point. 

These access openings shall be equipped with tight-fitting sliding or hinged doors which are equal in 

fire-resistive protection to that of the shaft or enclosure. 

CLEARANCES: 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Duct systems shall have a clearance from combustible construction of not less than 18 inches. This 

clearance may be reduced to not less than three inches, provided the combustible material is protected with 

materials approved for one-hour fire-resistive construction on the duct side. 

EXHAUST OUTLETS: 

Exhaust outlets shall extend thru the roof, unless otherwise noted. Such extension shall be at least two feet 

above the roof surface, at least 10 feet from any adjacent building, property line, or air intake opening into 

any building, and shall be located at least 10 feet above the adjoining grade level. 

BRANCH TAKEOFFS: 

Branch takeoffs shall be high efficiency type as shown on the drawings, and shall be fitted with adjustable 

lock balancing dampers, complete with locking quadrants. Where dampers are not accessible for 

adjustment from above, concealed ceiling regulators with adjustable chrome-plated covers shall be 

provided. 

DAMPER REGULATORS: 

All volume dampers and splitter dampers in exposed ductwork shall be provided with Ventlock No. 640 or 

Young No. 443 damper regulators. Each volume damper and splitter damper concealed above an 

inaccessible ceiling, etc., shall be provided with a shaft extended thru the ceiling, to which shall be attached 

a chrome-plated Ventlock No. 666 concealed damper regulator. No. 680 Ventlock miter gears shall be used 

where necessary. 

WALL PENETRATIONS: 

All ducts penetrating structural or architectural walls shall be sealed air and sound tight. 

FIRE RATED SURFACE PENETRATIONS: 

All ducts penetrating fire rated surfaces shall be sealed as directed in 15050. 

DUCTWORK: 

All ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in compliance with the latest SMACNA duct manuals. 

Sheet metal ducts shall be properly braced and reinforced with and, where they protrude above roof, they 

shall be properly flashed. 

DUCT JOINTS: 

All duct joints must be sealed airtight as required by Table 1-2 "SEAL CLASSIFICATION" of the "HVAC Duct 

Construction Manual". The term "seal" or "sealed" means use of mastic or mastic plus tape or gasketing as 

appropriate. 

DIMENSIONS: 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Ducts, unless otherwise approved, shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated on the drawings, 

and shall be straight and smooth on the inside with joints neatly finished. All duct sizes shown on the 

drawings are free area inside dimensions. Acoustically-lined ducts shall have outside dimensions increased 

as 

required to accommodate the acoustic lining specified and still maintain the free area inside dimensions 

shown on the drawings. 

Under no circumstances shall the cross section of any duct be decreased by dents, pipes, or hanger rods 

running through it unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Neither shall the shape be changed without 

approval. No abrupt transitions that restrict the area shall be used. Where necessary to gain clearance, the 

duct seams may be turned inside. Structural and Architectural drawings shall be consulted for areas with 

restrictive clearances. 

FIELD VERIFICATION: 

No ductwork shall be fabricated without first field verifying that the available space (under actual job 

conditions) will permit installation of the ductwork without structural or other conflicts. 

FLEXIBLE CONNECTION: 

This contractor shall provide flexible connections not less than 4 inches wide, constructed of heavy, 

waterproof, woven plastic-coated glass fabric at the inlet and outlet connections of each fan unit, securely 

fastened to the unit and to the ductwork by a galvanized iron band, and provided with tightening screws. 

Corners shall be sewn tight shut. 

+4" PRESSURE CLASS FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: 

This flexible connection between the +4" P.C. ductwork and VAV boxes or fans shall be fabricated of 

neoprene-coated 1/8 inch glass fabric sheets with the ends vulcanized together. The flexible connection 

shall be securely attached to the fan and ductwork with heavy iron draw bands. Connections shall be 30ounce 

Ventglass. 

AIR FLOW MEASURING DEVICES: 

The sheet metal contractor shall install the air flow measuring devices as specified in Section 15900. The 

devices will be furnished by the control contractor. 

BELT GUARDS: 

Belt guards shall be fabricated and installed. Guards shall be constructed of 10-gauge wire, 1-inch mesh in 

1-1/2 inch angle-iron welded frames. All guards shall be provided with an opening for a tachometer and 

shall be either the split type or easily removable for belt repair. The guards shall be anchored securely to 

the floor or walls to prevent any vibration. 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



PRE-MANUFACTURED DUCTS: 

Runouts above ceiling from primary supply air ducts to VAV terminal boxes may be rigid conduit or premanufactured 

high pressure flex duct or a combination of the two. 

Runouts above ceiling from the terminal boxes to the ceiling diffusers shall be similar to "Genflex - Type IL". 

Maximum allowance length is 5'-0" in any given duct run. Duct to be factory fabricated with spring steel wire 

helix and 1" thick glass fiber insulation covered with external vapor barrier and lined with continuous nonperforated 

inner sleeve. 

Material shall comply with UMC Standard 10-1. 

RECTANGULAR DUCT LINING: 

The interior surface of all rectangular supply, return, make-up, outdoor, fresh, relief, and exhaust air ducts 

(except where noted otherwise), shall be lined with 1" thick fiberglass dual density duct liner, having an 

average "K" factor of .24 BTU at 75 deg. F mean. The liner shall meet standards NFPA No. 90A and No. 

90B and shall have the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., label. 

Duct liner shall be applied to the flat sheet with a 100% coverage of duct adhesive. The duct liner shall be 

cut to assure snug corner joints. The black surface of the liner shall face the air stream. On horizontal runs, 

tops of ducts over 12" in width and sides over 16" in height shall be additionally secured with welded pins 

and speed clips on a maximum of 15" centers. On vertical runs, gripnails or welded pins and speed clips 

shall be spaced on a maximum of 15" centers on all width dimensions over 12". Pins shall start within 2" of 

all cross joints within the duct section. 

Welded pins shall be cut virtually flush with the liner surface. Clips should be drawn down flush only and not 

so as to compress the liner and cause the leading edge of raise. All exposed edges and the leading edge of 

all cross joints of the liner shall be coated with adhesive. 

Material shall comply with UMC Standard 10-1. 

BOILER STACKS & BREECHINGS: 

Stack shall be double wall insulated positive pressure type as shown on plans, with necessary wall brackets, 

tee sections, cleanout doors, section bands, trim and fittings for a complete installation. Stack shall have 1" 

insulation, stainless steel liner and aluminized steel shell coated for field painting by the painting contractor. 

Stack shall be Metalbestos Model PS (UL listed). 

REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS: 

Supply Air Diffusers: 

Furnish and install all supply air diffusers shown and specified on the drawings. All units to have opposed 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



lade balancing dampers. Diffusers to have 4-way air deflection. Diffusers shall be of steel, or anodized 

aluminum construction. Finish shall be bright white unless otherwise noted. Units shall be Titus, Carnes, 

Metalaire, Nailor, or Price. 

Return & Exhaust Air Registers & Grilles: 

Furnish and install all ceiling and sidewall return, exhaust, and registers and grilles shown and specified on 

the drawings. All units to be painted steel, or aluminum construction (where permitted by fire code) with 

bright white finish and opposed blade balancing dampers (registers and supply grilles only). All cores shall 

be removable or plaster frames shall be furnished with units. Registers and grilles shall be Titus, Metalaire, 

Nailor, Carnes or Price. 

Ceiling Diffusers: 

All ceiling diffusers shall be of the round, square, or rectangular type with louvered face and 1, 2, 3, or 4 way 

air pattern as indicated on the drawings. Units shall be painted steel, or aluminum construction (where 

permitted by fire code) with bright white finish and inner assembly shall be easily removable from outer 

frame without special tools. Louvers shall be spaced on 1-1/2" centers maximum. 

All diffusers shall be furnished with round or square opposed blade volume control and air extractor. 

Diffusers shall be Titus, Price, Metalaire, Nailor, or Carnes. 

General: 

Color and finish of all grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be bright white match ceiling grid. Coordinate with 

the Owner's representative. 

LOUVERS: 

At all air system openings in outside wall, install storm louvers. 

Construct louvers of aluminum with anodized aluminum custom color finish 

Slats shall be inclined at least 45 degrees from the horizontal and overlap a minimum of 1". Slats over 40" 

long shall have a 2" wide intermediate support. The exterior face of the louver shall be neatly fitted to the 

building wall, flashed at top, and caulked at sides and bottom. New open area for air passage shall be at 

least 50% of the nominal size. On the inside face of the louver, install a removable screen, consisting of 1/2" 

mesh galvanized wire screen in a galvanized channel frame. The louver shall have a sub-frame and shall 

be removable. 

Louver finish shall be Class I Color Anodized finish AA-M12C22A44 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; 

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, medium bronze 

colored anodic coating thicker than 0.7) complying with AAMA 606.1 AND 608.1. 

Caulk around louver frames with clear G.E. silicone sealer after installation. 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Louvers shall be Airolite, Air Balance, Air Guide, American Warming or Dowco. 

ROOF HOODS: 

Furnish and install complete the roof hoods shown on plans and specified in the Equipment Schedule. All 

units shall be rigid aluminum construction, with vertical seams continuously welded. Hoods shall be 

stressed and sloped for drainage, and shall be complete with birdscreen, reinforced self-flashing insulated 

base, and 

all accessories required for a complete installation. Hoods shall be designed and fabricated to withstand 

wind gusts of 150 MPH without physical damage. 

Roof hoods shall be Penn "Airette", Airolite, or Cook. 

EXHAUST OR VENTILATION FANS: 

Roof-Mounted Type: 

Furnish and install complete the low profile roof-mounted exhaust fans of the size and capacity shown on 

the drawings. 

Roof-mounted fans shall be of the centrifugal type with spun aluminum hood. All parts exposed to weather 

and all fastenings shall be either aluminum or stainless steel. All fans to be equipped with permanently 

lubricated 2-speed (where specified) ball bearing motors located in separate compartment out of the air 

stream. Fan shall have adjustable V-belt drive, self-flashing insulated curb, backdraft dampers, birdscreen, 

disconnect switch, and shall be complete with all necessary fittings and transition pieces for a complete 

installation. All units shall bear the AMCA certified performance seal. 

Fans shall be Twin City, Cook, Penn, or Jenn-Air. 

Roof Mounted Ventilation Type: 

Furnish and install complete the roof mounted ventilation fan shown and specified on the drawings. 

Fan shall be a hooded, low profile, filtered, roof mounted, belt driven, propeller supply fan 

The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction. The motor, bearings, and drives shall be mounted on a 

welded tubular steel power assembly. The power assembly shall be rigidly secured to the fan housing. The 

steel fan housing shall include a minimum 14 gauge base with integral spun venture and continuously 

welded curb cap corners. The fan shall be enclosed with a minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel hood bolted 

to the fan housing. The hood shall have a removable top cap to allow unobstructed access to the motor and 

power assembly without removing entire hood. Filters shall be washable expanded aluminum media with 2” 

formed aluminum frame. 

All steel fan components shall be coated with a baked polyester powder coating. Paint must exceed 1,000 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method. 

Propeller shall be extruded aluminum airfoil design with cast aluminum hub. The blade pitch shall be factory 

set and locked. The hub shall be keyed and locked to the shaft utilizing two set screws or a taper lock 

bushing. Propeller shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-06. 

Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings and furnished at the 

specified voltage, phase, and enclosure. 

Bearing construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron housing. 

Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, 

keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150% of the installed 

motor horsepower. The variable pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM. 

Fan shall be Penn, Cook, Greenheck, Twin City or Jenn-Air. 

Ceiling Type: 

Furnish and install complete the ceiling-mounted exhaust fans shown and specified on the drawings. 

Fan shall have acoustically insulated housing for quiet operation. Air deliveries shall be as indicated on the 

drawings and shall be certified by AMCA performance tests. 

Fan shall have centrifugal wheel direct connected to motor. Ceiling grille shall be all aluminum construction 

with satin finish. Entire fan, motor, and wheel assembly shall be removable without disturbing the housing. 

Fan speeds shall not exceed 1100 RPM. Unit shall be complete with backdraft damper. 

Fan shall be Cook, Penn, Greenheck, Twin City, or Jenn-Air. 

AIR FILTER BANKS: 

Furnish and install the filtering bank systems shown and specified on the drawings. Filter banks shall be 

suitable for the space available. Filter banks shall be constructed and installed so as to prevent the passage 

of unfiltered air. Felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets shall be provided between filter frames and unit casing, 

etc. Steel filter parts shall be protected against corrosion. 

Filter bank shall consist of 35% efficient (ASHRAE 52-76 test standard) replaceable media type air filters. 

The supporting front grid of each filter section shall be hinged to facilitate easy replacement of filter media. 

Filter frames shall be of 18 gauge galvanized steel construction with 11 gauge galvanized steel wire grids to 

support the media. 

Provide draft gauge on filter banks processing 10,000 CFM or more to indicate pressure drop across each 

filter bank. 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Fan system shall not be operated to provide temporary heat or for other purposes, until the filters are in 

place. 

At time of acceptance of the work, new filter media shall be furnished and installed by the contractor. 

Provide one complete set of spare filter media (in addition to the new filters installed at time of acceptance) 

for each filter bank and store on site as directed by the owner's representative. 

Air filter banks shall be Cambridge, AAF, or Farr. 

VARIABLE AIR VOLUME RE-HEAT BOXES: 

Casings shall be 26 gauge galvanized with flange rectangular discharge duct connection. A one-piece 

aluminum backdraft damper shall be provided on the fan discharge. The damper shall be factory set and 

aligned to insure a precise seal. Leakage rate shall not exceed 2 percent of rated capacity at 0.5" static 

pressure. 

Automatic damper operators and controllers shall be furnished by the ATC contractor and installed by the 

VAV box manufacturer. 

The VAV box manufacturer shall furnish and install an approved cross flow sensor with a gain factor of not 

less than three (3). 

VAV boxes shall be provided with a pressure independent volume regulator which operates thru a 

thermostatically reset velocity controller to provide constant air delivery within plus or minus 5 percent of 

rated flow, and down to 25 percent of the VAV box rated CFM. Factory calibrated field adjustable setpoints 

shall be provided to set maximum and minimum CFM. 

The hot water heating coil shall be a single or multiple row unit as specified with plate-type aluminum fins 

and mechanically bonded to a copper tube carrier pipe. 

The entire unit shall be serviceable from a single ceiling access door. 

The sound attenuators shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel construction with high density matt-faced 

insulation. Insulation shall be UL listed and meet all requirements of NFPA-90A. 

Units shall be Metalaire, Price, Nailor or Titus. 

CROSS FLOW PRESSURE SENSORS FOR VAV BOXES: 

Sensors shall be aluminum corrosion resistant of the cross flow type with ported tubes and baffle mounted to 

a center manifold. The center manifold shall have 1/4" barb fittings for FRPE tubing, and shall provide a 

differential pressure proportional to the average velocity of air moving through duct. 

The sensors shall have an amplification factor (gain) of at least three and flow coefficient as follows: 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Size Cv 

4 209 

5 315 

6 462 

7 612 

8 817 

10 1250 

12 1792 

14 2474 

16 3235 

PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONER (AC-1): 

Furnish and install complete the air-to-air split system packaged air conditioner shown and specified on the 

drawings. 

Evaporator section shall be ceiling mounted type with pre-charged refrigerant system, packaged controls, 

swing flow outlet air louvers, and packaged, integral, concealed drain pump. Unit shall be complete with 

filter section, hard wired, wall mounted thermostat, and all controls for automatic operation. 

Condensing unit section shall be complete with high performance hermetic compressor with high and low 

pressure safety controls, air cooled condenser with modulating fan controls for operation at outdoor air 

temperatures as cold as 0N F. 

Unit shall be EMI, Carrier, Mitsubishi or approved equal. 

AIR FILTERS: 

Provide one complete set of spare filter media (in addition to the new filters installed at time of acceptance) 

for each unit filter bank and store on site as directed by Architect. 

Air filter banks shall be Cambridge, AAF, or Eco-Air. 

HVAC SMOKE DETECTORS: 

All units above 2000 CFM shall be provided with smoke detectors located in the return air intake and supply 

air discharge as per IMC. Detectors to be provided and wired under Section 16000. Mechanical contractor 

shall install all detectors, and ATC contractor shall wire fan shutdown. See specification section 15900. 

Duct smoke detectors shall not be installed until just prior to final inspection to prevent dust and debris from 

contaminating detector. 

COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS: 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Furnish and install at locations shown on plans, combination fire-smoke dampers. Frame shall be minimum 

16 gauge galvanized steel formed from a continuous channel section. Bearings shall be formed in the frame 

and shall match the contour of the blade. Blades shall be roll formed single-thickness galvanized steel and 

shall overlap both frame and adjacent blades a minimum of 3/4". Blade edge and jamb seals shall be low 

friction type non-degradable steel-to-steel and shall withstand 850N F. with a minimum leakage of 15 cfm/ft. 

at 1" w.g. Stainless steel flexible metal compression type jamb seals will not be accepted. The torque 

required to maintain the rating in the closed position shall be 0 in-lbs. Blade linkage shall be interconnected 

to the damper jackshaft on both ends. 

Each damper shall be 1-1/2 hour rated per UL Standard 555, and shall be classified by Underwriters 

Laboratories as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version of UL 

555S. The leakage rating under UL 555S shall be no higher than leakage Class II. Dampers shall be tested 

in HVAC systems to ensure operation with pressures of at least 4" w.g. in the closed position, and 4000 fpm 

in the open position. Each damper shall carry a UL label (File No. R11767) and a CSFM label (File No. 

3225-368:008). 

Actuators shall open upon loss of power and shall be rated to an elevated temperature of 250N F. Actuators 

shall be factory installed and shall be 120 volt electric and shall provide a minimum of 75 in-lbs. of torque at 

the damper shaft. Damper leakage shall provide for fail closed fire operation independent of the actuator 

position. Actuator bracket shall be designed to allow for the installation of ductmate without realignment or 

alterations. Manufacturer shall provide a factory assembled sleeve of 16 gage galvanized steel standard. 

Damper and actuator assembly shall be factory cycled 

to ensure proper operation. Dampers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation 

instructions. Suitable access shall be provided for inspection and servicing of each damper. 

Electro-thermal Bi-Metallic Link (resettable) - Each damper assembly shall be equipped with a UL 33 listed 

electro-thermal bi-metallic resettable 'McCabe Link' that provided for fail closed fire and smoke operation 

independent of the actuator position, electric sensing stats will not be accepted. Electro-thermal McCabe 

link shall disengage damper linkage from actuator and mechanically lock damper in a closed position from 

either a smoke detector signal or when duct temperature exceeds 250N F. (shall not exceed operational limit 

of actuator). The design shall only allow damper to be reopened when the smoke detector signal is clear 

and the duct temperature has returned to a safe level, as per NFPA 92A. Damper assembly shall include 

dual position indicator switch package capable of positively indicating each damper's status as being fullopen 

or full-closed at remote central control panel. Actuator shall be fail open upon loss of power. 

Dampers shall be Pottorff Model FSD-142 with PI-50 dual position indicating switch package. 

Fire/smoke dampers to be provided by Division 15800 and wired by Division 16000. Dampers shall be 

installed by Division 15800. Damper shall be 120/1/60. 

DAMPERS - GENERAL: 

Damper frames shall be of not less than 13 gauge galvanized steel, formed for extra strength, with mounting 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



holes for enclosed duct mounting. 

All damper blades shall be of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel formed for strength and high velocity 

performance. Blades on all dampers must be of not over 6" in width. Blades shall be secured to 1/2" 

diameter zinc-plated axles by zinc-plated bolts and nuts. All blade bearings shall be nylon. Blade side 

edges shall seal off against spring stainless steel seals. Teflon-coated thrust bearings shall be provided at 

each end of every blade to minimize torque requirements and insure smooth operation. All blades linkage 

hardware shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant, zinc-plated steel and brass. 

AUTOMATIC DAMPERS: 

The ATC contractor shall furnish all automatic control dampers. The sheet metal contractor shall install all 

dampers and transition all ductwork to the dampers. 


JOB SITE CONDITIONS: 

Inspection: 

Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such 

work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 

Verify that the work of this section may be installed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations in 

the approved shop drawings. 

Discrepancies: 

In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner. 

Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy, until all such discrepancies have been fully 

resolved. 

INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT: 

Install all equipment with adequate space for service and maintenance. 

VAV boxes, fan coil units, and similar equipment which requires periodic service and maintenance shall be 

installed in plenum space within 2 ft. of finished ceilings, or within 2 ft. of the bottom chord of the structure. 

All visible surfaces behind grilles and registers shall be painted flat black. 

Care shall be taken to avoid interference with structure and the work of other trades. Do not cut into load 

carrying members without the approval of the Owner's representative. 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



INSTALLATION OF DUCTS: 

All ducts shall be installed in compliance with the latest editions of the SMACNA manuals. 

All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet metal ducts for the 

structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or divided as may be required. 

Whenever this is necessary, the required area shall be maintained. All changes, however, must be 

approved and installed as directed. 

Pre-manufactured ducts shall be connected to rigid ducts and equipment with the solid wraps of fabric duct 

tape and tyton bands drawn tight to form an airtight joint. 

During the installation, the open ends of all ducts shall be protected by covering with plastic sheet tied in 

place to prevent debris and dirt from entering. 

Install this work in cooperation with other trades so that there will be no delay in progress of construction 

work. It is extremely important that the duct system be clean before connections are made to the VAV 

boxes. 

The contractor shall take special care when running exposed ductwork to insure that the final installation is 

neat in appearance. 

Spiral ducts running exposed in occupied areas shall be hung with an aircraft cable type hanger. 

Under no circumstances shall ductwork be supported from the metal roof deck. 

Ceiling outlets shall be rigidly supported from the overhead structure with G.I. wires or straps, or from rigid 

galvanized iron ductwork. Outlets shall not be supported from T-bar ceilings or metal roof deck. 

Hanger and Supports: 

Hangers for ducts up to 18" in width shall be placed on not more than 8'-0" centers. Ducts 19" and over in 

width shall be supported on not more than 4'-0" centers. Hangers shall be placed plumb and present a near 

appearance. Construct hangers from galvanized band iron 1" x 1/8" for duct up to 36" wide. Hangers shall 

extend down the sides of the ducts not less than 9". On ducts less than 9" in depth, hangers shall extend 

the full depth of the ducts. Attach hangers to ducts using not less than three rivets or parker screws of 

appropriate sizes. It is essential that all ducts be rigidly supported. Where vertical ducts pass thru floors or 

roofs, supporting angles shall be rigidly attached to ducts and to the structure. Angles shall be galvanized 

and of sufficient size to support the ductwork rigidly. Place supporting angles on at least two sides of the 

duct. For round ducts, strap hangers shall extend completely around ducts. 

Ceiling outlets shall be rigidly supported from the overhead structure with G.I. wires on straps, or from rigid 

galvanized iron ductwork. Outlets shall not be supported from T-bar ceilings unless approved by the 

owner's representative. 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Ducts at Masonry: 

Where ducts are shown connecting to masonry openings and along edges of all plenums at floors and walls, 

provide a continuous 2" x 2" x 3/8" galvanized angle iron which shall be bolted to the construction and made 

airtight to the same by applying caulking compound. Sheet metal at these locations shall be bolted to the 

angle irons. 

Installation of Food Preparation Area Ducts: 

Connections from ductwork to hoods shall be performed by this section. 

Duct systems shall be so constructed and installed that moisture cannot become pocketed in any portion 

thereof, and the system shall slope not less than 1/4" per lineal foot towards the hood or toward an approved 

grease reservoir. Where horizontal ducts exceed 75 feet in length, the slope shall be not less than one inch 

per lineal foot. When a centrifugal fan is used, it shall be positioned so that the discharge outlet is in a 

bottom horizontal position and the air shall be so diverted that there will be no impingement on the roof, 

other equipment or parts of the structure. 

Provide access panels in the ductwork from kitchen hood exhaust fans to allow internal inspection and 

cleaning of exhaust ductwork. 

Locate not more than 12 feet 0 inches on centers, and at all elbows. Coordinate location of access panels 

with available maintenance access space. 

STORAGE OF DUCTS: 

Ductwork shall be stored in a protected area to prevent physical damage to the duct liner, and to insure that 

the duct liner is not exposed to excessive heat or moisture which would deteriorate the air side surface. 

Ductwork which has been improperly stored and/or sustained physical damage will be rejected, and shall 

be removed from the job site as directed by the Owner's representative. 

CLEANING OF DUCTS: 

Before ducts are insulated and before the ceiling is installed and final connections made to the terminal 

boxes, the fans shall be operated at full capacity to blow out any dirt and debris from ducts. If it is not 

practical to use the main supply blower for this cleaning, the ducts may be blown out in sections by a 

portable fan. After the ducts have been cleaned and initially pressure tested, the final connection shall be 

made to the terminal boxes. 

TESTING OF DUCTS: 

Supply, return, and exhaust ducts, plenums, and casings operating at duct pressures from +2" to -2" shall be 

tested and made substantially airtight at static pressure indicated for the system before covering with 

insulation or concealing in masonry. Substantially airtight shall be construed to mean a leakage rate less 

than 5% of the rated airflow. 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



Supply air ducts operating at pressures above +2" shall be tested and made substantially airtight. Leakage 

shall be less than 1% of the rated air flow. 

Ducts including all flexible runouts shall be tested in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction 

Standards. 

After the vertical duct risers or branch ducts have all been tested and tied into the mains, and after the 

central station air handling apparatus has been installed, the mains shall be tested in accordance with 

SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. 

- 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ 



SECTION 15900 – BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM (BMCS) 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Includes all necessary software and materials for a complete and operating system 

without additional cost to the owner and as indicated elsewhere in the specification and 

shall include the following: 

1. Furnishing and installing a complete temperature control and building 

management system (BMCS) for the new classroom addition. 

a. Local Head End System Workstation (includes feature that provides 

functioning as a local Graphic Operator’s Interface) located at the school. 

b. All hardware, software and services necessary to seamlessly be 

connected through the Wide Area Network (WAN) to a fully implemented 

District Level Head End System located at the District Offices. 

c. Program the DDC and create the graphic screens. 

2. Engineering, programming, checking out and commissioning a complete system 

in accordance with design documents and sequences of operation. 

3. Furnishing and installing all the required conduit, cable and wire for the entire 

system. 

4. Mounting and wiring all temperature control and building management devices, 

controllers and equipment for a complete system. 

5. Creating and installing a complete graphical interface which will include all points 

and systems for the entire BMCS. 

6. Working with air balance contractor during the balancing phase of the project. 

Providing the necessary set points in the VAV controllers needed to do the 

pickup calibration. Providing the handheld tool required to modify each individual 

VAV box controller. This tool shall remain on the job site for future use by the 

District. 

7. District training, using job specific Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 

8. Documentation - Four hard copies of the Project's Operation and Maintenance 

Manuals. Provide CD ROM containing all job documentation (i.e. PDF files of 

data sheets, CAD files, DDC Programming etc.) with each O&M Manual. 

9. One-year warranty for all labor and equipment for the entire system. 

10. All valve operators on valves 2" and smaller are to be direct coupled. 

11. All low voltage wire shall be run in conduit where exposed in mechanical areas, 

areas not accessible, areas where it may be subject to damage, or areas with a 

single point of access requiring crawling in the concealed area. Low voltage wire 

may be installed in plenums and other concealed areas where easy and 

reasonable access is regularly available. Wire run in plenums and other 

concealed areas shall be plenum rated wire and shall meet all NEC and local 

code requirements. 

12. Furnish and install EBTRON Flow Sensors in all AHUs. 

13. Furnish and install CO2 sensors on all AHUs. 

B. Related Sections 

1. Division 15 - Installing of temperature control valves, thermal wells in pipes, DP 

Sensors and flow switches etc. 

2. Division 16 - Power provisions as described in Contract Documents. 

C. District To Provide - 

1. Connection point for District's BMCS LAN Communication (Ethernet). 


AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 15900-1


A. Product Data - Manufacturer's original catalog data and descriptive information on each 

piece of equipment to be used. 

B. Shop Drawings 

1. Control diagram for each major and/or minor mechanical and electrical system to 

be monitored and controlled. Diagrams will show locations of control and 

operational components and devices. ATC diagrams will be generated using 

AutoCAD or similar software package drawn on 11 "Xl 7" or larger sheets. 

2. Ladder and wiring diagram for each controller. 

3. Ladder and wiring diagram for overall control system. 

4. Graphics penetration path in block diagram form. 

5. Software control schematics which accomplishes each "Sequence of Operation". 

6. Full and complete As-Built Drawings must be submitted and approved before 

final payment can be made. 

C. Closeout 

1. Operations And Maintenance Manual Data - 

a. Requirements are as follows - 

1) Provide operating and maintenance instructions for each item of 

equipment submitted under Product Data. 

2) Include copy of approved shop drawings. 

3) Provide all documentation hard copy and in digital format on CD 

format 


A. Pre-Installation Meeting - Schedule meeting with Division 16 and Division 15 installation 

contractors before installation of system begins. 

1.3 SCHEDULING 

A. Coordination 

Coordinate planning and installation of equipment with parties specified to be 

involved in BMCS including but not limited to: 

a. BMCS Contractor 

b. Electrical Subcontractor 

c. Mechanical Subcontractor 

d. District 

e. Architect and Consultants 

f. Balancing Subcontractor 


2.1 COMPONENTS 

A. The following is a list of approved component manufacturer's: 

Work Station - 

a. Processor -Intel Pentium IV 

b. 512 Meg RAM 

c. R/W CDROM 



d. Sound Card with Speakers 

e. 60 Gigabyte Hard Drive (minimum) 

f. 256 Megabyte Video Card 

g. 19" XVGA Flat Panel Monitor 

h. UPS - Omnipro Model 675 

i. Operating System – Windows XP Pro 

j. All required BMCS vendor and 3 party software. 

k. 56k Dial-up Modem 

l. 10/1 00 Network Interface Card 

m. Three button mouse and enhanced keyboard 

Laptop – 

a. Processor -Intel Pentium IV 

b. 512 Meg RAM 

c. R/W CDROM 

d. Sound Card with Speakers 

e. 60 Gigabyte Hard Drive (minimum) 

f. 256 Megabyte Video Card 

g. 17" XVGA Monitor 

h. UPS - Omnipro Model 675 

i. Operating System – Windows XP Pro 

j. All required BMCS vendor and 3 party software. 

k. 56k Dial-up Modem 

l. 10/1 00 Network Interface Card 

m. Three button mouse and enhanced keyboard 

2. Controllers - 

a. Alerton BACtalk or TAC (formerly Invensys) IA-Series Control Systems 

shall be utilized as specifically indicated and specified elsewhere in this 

specification. 

3. Sensors, actuators and other components - The following are approved 

manufacture's for the various field devices. Other manufacturers may be used if 

approved by engineer in writing at least I week prior to bid. 

a. Temperature Sensors - Invensys Building Systems, Alerton. 

b. Space Static Pressure Sensors - Dwyer, AutoTran, Mamac. 

c. Duct Static Pressure Sensors - Dwyer, AutoTran, Mamac. 

d. Control Relays - IDEC model RH2B-UL with base 

e. CT Relays - Veris - models H-800, H-904 

f. Stainless Steel Ball Valve/Actuator Combination - Honeywell, Belimo. 

g. Damper and Valve Actuator - Delta, Honeywell, Belimo 

h. DDC Panel Enclosures - Hoffman NEMA I with hinged locking door 

i. UPS for DDC Panels - Omnipro Model 280 

j. Transformer/Power Supplies - Kele, Honeywell 

k. Others devices as pre-approved by engineer 

I. Mechanical Timer - (0 to 1 Hr) 

m. Sensor Guards - Clear Plastic with key locking cover. 

n. Temperature Low Limit Stats – Honeywell or approved equal. 

o. Dampers - Ruskin CD5O or approved equal 

p. Outside air flow measuring sensor – EBTRON or Onicon. 

q. CO2 Sensor - Vulcain Infrared type or approved equal. 

r. Butterfly Valves - capable of a minimum 75 psig close off pressure, 

Delta, Honeywell, Johnson. 

2.2 APPROVED CONTRACTORS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS 



A. Manufacturers: All components and controllers shall be manufactured by Invensys or 

Alerton unless specified otherwise 

1. Direct Digital Control Systems and Approved Installing Contractors: 

a. TAC (formerly Invensys) IA-Series Control System as installed by 

Yamas Controls Intermountain Inc. New system will be an extension of 

the existing TAC system installed in the building. 

b. Alerton BACtalk installed by Mountain Valley or D&L. If Alerton products 

are bid on this project, the contractor shall replace all control systems 

throughout the entire school. 

2.3 DISTRICT GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE 

A. All necessary software, hardware, setup and programming shall be provided and 

implemented in order to accomplish a properly integrated Graphic User Interface (GUI). 

B. The color graphic terminal (which shall be part of the local Head End System at the 

school) shall be driven by software which displays all information In a graphical format. 

The operator shall access any information via a command prompted, 

mouse driven interface. The operator shall be able to penetrate to any level of desired 

system information without being required to enter any commands from the keyboard. 

1. The color CRT shall continuously display the present operator, local site 

connected to, number of total alarms for the system and total unacknowledged 

alarms. A section of the screen shall be dedicated to displaying the reported 

alarm. 

2. All system commands shall be graphically displayed using iconic, pull-down, popup 

or graphical data entry templates. Each command selection shall display an 

advisory description of the commands operation to inform the operator of the 

expected result. 

3. Pop-up windows shall be used to display groups, points and other pertinent 

information where a variety of items are available to choose from. This feature 

shall be context sensitive when a user/operator requires help during a particular 

function request. 

C. Graphics shall be provided to meet the Alpine School District's graphics standard. The 

graphics standard is the existing graphics standard at Cedar Ridge Elementary School. 

Contractor is required to customize each school to meet the standard at Cedar Ridge. No 

Canned programs are allowed and each graphic screen must meet the districts' standard 

for that area or application. Included in the graphics package must be all customized 

graphics that are for troubleshooting or energy management. Sample graphics screens 

are included at the end of this section. 

D. All system commands shall be graphically displayed using iconic, pull-down, pop-up or 

graphical. 

2.4 DISTRICT SUPERVISOR INTEGRATION 

A. Global Controllers (JACE/UNC) 

1. The only global controllers allowed are either a JACE-545 (available from Tridium 

Vykon) or a UNC-520 (available from TAC IA-Series, formerly Invensys IA- 

Series). No Substitutions are allowed. JACE-600 series controllers are not 

allowed. Sufficient resource space and processor allocation shall be insured to 

account for the quantity of nodes connected to the JACE/UNC global controller. If 

needed additional JACE/UNC global controllers shall be added to insure that 

proper resource space and processor allocations exist. In such a case, then a 

Web Supervisor or IA Enterprise Server must be added at the local school to 



2.5 DDC EQUIPMENT 

properly integrate the JACE/UNC global controllers. Node licensing will be 

included to accomplish this. 

2. This specification requires the use of JACE/UNC at the local school level for the 

Building Automation System (BAS). It also requires that the BAS is seamlessly 

connected through the Wide Area Network (WAN) to a fully implemented District 

Level Head End System located at the District Offices. This is required to be 

either a Web Supervisor Workstation (with WS-1 available from Tridium) or a IA 

Enterprise Server (with IA-ENT-1 available from TAC) loaded and running on the 

workstation computer with corresponding GUI and global services implemented. 

This may be connected to the existing District Head End System Workstation 

located in the District offices. If a compatible Head End System Workstation does 

not already exist, then the BAS contractor is required to supply the necessary 

computer, software, programming and setup to establish a new Head End 

System Workstation at the District Offices. 

3. The local global controller (JACE/UNC) that will be connected to the existing or 

new Head End System Workstation shall provide all necessary software and the 

connection or node licenses to accomplish this. 

4. Global Controllers must have the following minimum capabilities: 

a. Must support either LONworks or BACnet communications. 

b. One Ethernet Port — 10/100 Mbps. 

c. Two RS-232 Ports. 

d. Two RS-485 Ports. 

e. Battery Backup. 

f. Flash memory for long term data backup. 

A. Application Specific Devices (ASDs) 

1. The contractor shall utilize and employ only the following controllers for any 

application specific devices (ASD) such as air handling units, rooftop units, 

unitary equipment, etc. (this excludes variable air volume terminal box 

controllers) No Substitutions are allowed: 

a. MNL-800 controllers (TAC, formerly Invensys) 

b. VLC-1188 (Alerton) 

2. MNL-800 Controllers (MNL-800). 

a. MNL-800's shall utilize a multi-tasking, multi-user operating system. 

b. All input/output signal conversion shall be performed through a minimum 

of a 16 bit A to D converter. 

c. All input points shall be universal in nature allowing their individual 

function definition to be assigned through the application software. All 

unused input points must be available as universally definable at the 

discretion of the owner. 

d. MNL-800's shall be in continuous direct communication with the network 

which forms the facility wide Building Automation System. The MNL800's 

shall communicate with the UNC at a baud rate of not less than 72,800 

baud. 

e. All control sequences programmed into the MNL-800 shall be stored in 

non-volatile memory. Power failures shall not cause the MNL-800 

memory to be lost. 

f. All control sequences shall be fully programmable at the MNL-800, 

allowing for the creation and editing of an application control sequence, 

while at the unit. The MNL-800 shall allow for the creation of unique 

application control sequences. 

g. The MNL-800 shall provide an input/output point trending utility that is 

capable of accumulating 48 analog point samples and 10 digital point 



samples, per input/output point. 

h. The MNL-800 shall provide LED indication of transmit/receive 

communications performance, as well as for the proper/improper 

operation of the controller itself. 

i. The MNL-800 shall be provided with a battery backed time clock that is 

capable of maintaining the time of day and calendar for up to thirty days, 

upon loss of power to the MNL-800, without loss of setting. The battery 

for the time clock shall be replaceable by the customer. 

j. The MNL-800 shall be provided with integral time schedules; as a 

minimum, two seven day schedules with eight on/off periods per day 

shall be provided. 

k. Holliday override of weekly Schedules shall be provided for prescheduling 

of holidays, for the year in advance. 

I. The MNL-800 shall be provided in a MENA 1. The MNL-800 shall be 

constructed in a modular orientation such that service of the failed 

components can be done quickly and easily. The MNL-800 shall be 

directly wired to sensory devices, staging relays or modulating valves for 

heating and Cooling. 

m. MNL-800's shall be rated for service from -40 Deg. F to 140 Deg. F. 

3. VisualLogic Controller (VLC) 

a. VLC shall utilize a multi-tasking, multi-user operating system. 

b. All input/output signal conversion shall be performed through a minimum 

of a 10 bid A to D converter. 

c. All input points shall be universal in nature allowing their individual 

function definition to be assigned through the application software. All 

unused input points must be available as universally definable at the 

discretion of the owner. 

d. VLC shall be in continuous direct communication with the network which 

forms the facility wide Building Automation System. The VLC shall 

communicate with the Head End at a baud rate of not less than 72,800 

baud. 

e. All control sequences programmed into the VLC shall be stored in nonvolatile 

memory. Power failures shall not cause the VLC memory to be 

lost. 

f. All control sequences shall be fully programmable at the VLC, allowing 

for the creation and editing of an application control sequence, while at 

the unit. The VLC shall allow for the creation of unique application control 

sequences. 

g. The VLC shall provide an input/output point trending utility that is capable 

of accumulating 48 analog point samples and 10 digital point samples, 

per input/output point. 

4. Variable Air Volume Box Digital Controller: The only controller allowed for the 

VAV applications are MNL-V2's (TAC, formerly Invensys) and VAVi-SD (Alerton) 

No substitutions are allowed. 

a. Controller shall consist of a microprocessor, actuator, differential 

pressure transducer, field terminations, and operation/application system 

software in a single integrated package. All input/output signals shall be 

directly hardwired to the controller. Troubleshooting of input/output 

signals shall be easily executed through the wall sensor. 

b. All control sequences programmed in the controller shall be stored in 



non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a 

battery to be retained. 

c. The VAV terminal manufacturer shall provide a multi-point, averaging, 

differential pressure sensor mounted on the inlet to each VAV box. The 

BAS contractor shall supply a line to low voltage transformer, of sufficient 

capacity, to power the controller plus all reheat valves and/or contactors 

and fan circuits associated with the VAV terminal and actuator 

assemblies. The BAS contractor shall provide all reheat control valves to 

the mechanical contractor for mounting and piping. The BAS contractor 

shall provide and install all wiring between the valve and controller and 

between the room sensor and the controller. 

d. Controller shall have manual positioning of the actuator and include a 

visual indication of the position of the actuator. 

e. Controller shall have LED indication of transmit/receive communications 

performance, as well as for the proper/improper operation of the 

controller itself. 

f. Controller shall support a peer to peer network using two wire type 

independent topologies without regard for the polarity of wiring. Wiring of 

communications shall support "Ts", "Stars", "Active Ts", "Active Stars" 

and "Distributed Stars" and other configurations without the use of 

termination resistors. 

g. Controller shall have zone temperature control of +/- 1 Deg F from 

setpoint. 

h. Controller shall have internal differential pressure transducer for 

pressure independent applications with an accuracy of ~ 5%. 

Controller shall be powered by a 24 VAC power source and shall comply 

with Class 2 wiring requirements. 

j. Controller shall be rated for service from 32 Deg. F to 131 Deg. F. 

k. Controller shall meet or exceed IEC 801.5 and ANSI C62.41 (IEEE-587, 

Category A & B) for surge immunity, IEC 801.4 for transient compliance 

and IEC 801.2 for electrostatic discharge. Where 

mounted in supply or return air plenums, the MNL-V2 enclosures shall 

comply with the requirements of UL 94-5V. 

l. MNL-V2 Input/Output. 

1) Self-calibrating Velocity Pressure Input (0-2" WC). The velocity 

pressure transducer shall be a continuously self-calibrating unit, 

which determines the zero velocity pressure point, by equalizing 

the pressure across the sensing element, every 10-15 seconds. 

2) Room Temperature Input. 

3) Occupancy Override Input. 

4) VAV Box Damper Output: Unless otherwise specified, the 

controller shall provide a minimum 6 N-m/53 Ib./inch integral 

electric actuator, having a 90 degree stroke rotation in a time of 

3 minutes maximum. 

5) Occupancy or Status Input. 

6) 0-100% Position Indication of Primary Damper Actuator, to be 

direct feedback from damper actuator. 

7) Room Setpoint Input. 

8) Auxiliary Temperature Input. 

9) Discharge air temperature sensor, located downstream of 

reheat coil. 

m. In addition to the inputs and output points described above, MNL 

controllers for fan assisted and/or reheat configurations, provide the 



following additional control points: 

1) 3 digital outputs for fan control, up to 3 stages of electric reheat, 

floating valve actuator control or occupancy control of blinds, 

lights, etc. 

2) Digital outputs shall be pilot duty and directly control 24 VAC 

loads. 

5. VAV Box Room Sensors (MNL-S1) 

a. Room Sensor shall provide room temperature value to the VAV Box 

Controller. 

b. Room Sensor shall connect directly to the VAV Box Controller and shall 

not utilize any of the 1/0 points of the controller. 

c. Room Sensor shall be a two-wire connection to the controller that is 

polarity and wire type insensitive. 

d. Room Sensor shall have a communications jack for connection to the 

communication trunk to which the VAV Box Controller is connected. 

e. Room Sensor shall be a MNL-S1 and have a blank cover. 

B. Software: 

1. Controller and System HVAC Applications 

a. Provide latest version of Workplace Pro. Include and implement the 

following capabilities from the control units if documented by the 

specified sequence of operations: 

1) Load Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, 

automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, 

occupied/unoccupied setback/setup, DDC with PID, and trend 

logging. 

PART 3- EXECUTION 


2) HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and 

enthalpy/economizer switchover. 

3) Chiller Control Programs: Chilled water plant optimization with 

condenser water reset, chilled-water reset, chiller and pump 

equipment selection and sequencing. 

4) Boiler Control Programs: Boiler plant optimization with hot water 

supply reset, boiler and pump equipment selection and 

sequencing. 

5) Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm 

reporting, alarm lockout, weekly scheduling, staggered start, 

sequencing, anti-short cycling and calculated point. 

A. On-Site Assistance 

1. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, 

provide site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate 

components and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in 

adjusting sensors and controls to suit actual conditions. The contractor shall 

specifically budget for no less than 40 hours on-site graphics assistance and no 

less than 40 hours of on-site programming assistance. In the event that the 

contractor is unable to meet the districts energy management requirements in 

the above allocated time, the contractor is required to spend whatever time is 

necessary to provide the district with a complete and operating system that 

meets the districts' requirements and standards. The standard shall be the 



operating parameters on programming at Cedar Ridge Elementary School for all 

elementary schools. 

B. Training 

1. Provide a minimum of 40 hours of on-site or classroom training throughout the 

contract period for personnel designated by the Owner. Each session shall be a 

minimum of four hours in length and must be coordinated with the building 

Owner. Train the designated staff of Owners Representative and Owner to 

enable them to: 

a. Proficiently operate the system. 

b. Understand control system architecture and configuration. 

c. Understand DDC system components. 

d. Understand system operation, including DDC system control and 

optimizing routines (algorithms). 

e. Operate the workstation and peripherals. 

f. Log on and off the system. 

g. Access graphics, point reports, and logs. 

h. Adjust and change system set points, time schedules, and holiday 

schedules. Recognize malfunctions of the system by observation of the 

printed copy and graphical visual signals. 

j. Understand system drawings, and Operation and Maintenance manual. 

k. Understand the job layout and location of control components. Access 

data from DDC controllers. 

m. Operate portable operator’s terminals. 

C. Sensor Guards 

1. In classrooms, media center, corridors, storage rooms, toilet rooms, exercise 

rooms and multipurpose rooms, room sensors shall be wall-mounted and 

furnished complete with a clear plastic guard sized to fit the sensor. Guards shall 

have key locks. 

D. Sensors 

1. Provide insulating base where thermostat is mounted on exterior walls. 

2. Room, duct mounted or immersion type temperature sensors shall be furnished 

as required for the application. Averaging element sensors shall be used 

whenever there is a possibility of air temperature stratification in the ductwork. 

Averaging sensors shall be of sufficient length to provide accurate temperature 

measurements. 

E. Labeling 

1. All controls except individual room controls shall be permanently labeled with an 

identification name and number keyed to the ATC diagrams. Labels shall be 

mounted on or adjacent to the device such that if the device is replaced the label 

remains intact. This applies to both field and panel mounted controls. 

F. ATC and DDC Panels 

1. All panels shall be listed by ETL or UL. 

2. Each panel cabinet shall be made of steel (not less than 16 gage) with welded 

seams and finished corners. Provide a full back plate and full hinged door such 

that the assembly provides a completely enclosed panel. The panel shall be fully 

painted for a finished appearance. Supply panel with key locking latch. 

3. Each panel shall contain all controllers, relays and all other devices related to the 

systems served by that panel. All devices shall be mounted inside the panel or 

on the face of the panel. Appropriately sized nameplates made of black plastic 

laminate with white engraved letters shall be used to identify all panel mounted 



devices. 

4. Panel Wiring: Run all wiring within enclosed distribution gutters (similar to 

Panduit). all wiring entering or leaving the panel shall terminate on numbered 

terminal strips. All wiring entering or leaving the panel shall be tagged with a 

permanent, identifying tag. All wire and tube identification numbers shall be 

designated on the control drawings. All wiring shall be color coded and the color 

shall not be changed between the terminal strip and the end destination of that 

wire. 

PART 4- SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 

4.1 GENERAL OPERATION 

A. Control Programs: The control programs to achieve the sequence of operation shall reside 

in the field controller. These controllers shall be capable of standalone operation, such that 

if communication with the network level controller is lost or disrupted, the sequence of 

operation will continue to operate. Global functions such as Scheduling, Optimal 

Start/Stop, and Outside Air Temperature Reset may reside on the Global Controller. 

B. Optimal Start/Stop is incorporated into the District system-wide energy management 

program. Any time a school experiences and school wide change of state (i.e. unoccupiedoccupied 

or power-up after loss of electrical power), the EMS shall initiate a school wide 

optimal start-up procedure so as to minimize the electrical demand based on a 15-minute 

sliding window. 

C. Human Machine Interface (HMI): The HMI shall be a PC based graphical package. User's 

privileges determine whether setpoints and parameters can be modified or outputs 

manually overridden. 

1. This graphical package shall contain graphical representations of the mechanical 

equipment. 

2. The graphics shall display all the digital and analog points as listed in the points 

listed for each mechanical system. 

3. Digital output points shall have the capability to be manually overridden on and off 

from the HMI. These overrides may be timed, until or forever. Manual overrides 

cannot override any safety conditions. 

4. Analog output points shall have the capability to be manually overridden on and 

off from the HMI. These overrides may be timed, until or forever. Manual overrides 

cannot override any safety conditions. 

5. All setpoints, parameters and calculated values shall be displayed and adjustable 

from the HMI. 

6. All setpoints and parameters defined as (adjustable) shall be adjustable from the 

HMI. 

4.2 VAV WITH REHEAT 

A. Each variable air volume box consists of a room sensor, a supply damper with an over 

the shaft Direct Digital Controller, modulating integral damper motor with quick release, 

integral differential pressure sensor, Hot Water Reheat Coil, and a Flo-Cross 2 X 12 

points averaging and signal amplifying air flow sensor. The temperature control shall 

utilize Proportional, Integral and Derivative (PID) algorithms. Each VAV box shall include 

maximum and minimum (cooling and heating) flow settings (CFM), Morning Warm- 

Up/Cool-Down, Energy Consumption, and Room Temperature Control. The VAV box 

shall be controlled through the BAS as follows: 

1. Unoccupied Mode 

a. When the central air handling unit is off, the BAS shall command the 



VAV supply air damper closed. 

b. When the central air handling unit is off, the BAS shall command the 

reheat coil hot water valve closed. 

c. If the room temperature falls below 50 Deg F. (adjustable), the BAS shall 

generate an alarm. 

d. Unoccupied Limits 

1) Night Low Limit: When the BAS schedule is in the unoccupied 

mode the room temperature setpoint shall be reset as follows: 

OAT Setpoint 

0 Deg F 60 Deg F 

32 Deg F 55 Deg F 

e. In rooms with convectors, the convector hot water valve shall be 

modulated to maintain the night low limit temperature. If a room 

temperature falls below the night low limit, the air handler shall be 

commanded on and shall continue on and run until the room 

temperature rises by 5 degree F (adjustable). 

2. Occupied Mode 

a. The BAS and the room occupancy sensor shall schedule the VAV to 

occupied mode. The central air handling unit must be running before the 

VAV will operate in the occupied mode. 

b. If the central air handling unit is running before the VAV is scheduled 

occupied, the VAV shall be in the warmup/cooldown mode. 

c. The cooling setpoint shall be 3 Deg F (adjustable) greater than the 

heating setpoint, and the heating setpoint is reset by the following 

schedule: 

OAT Setpoint 

40 F 72 F 

68 F 70 F 

d. Cooling: 

1) The BAS shall modulate the VAV supply air damper to maintain 

room temperature of 73 Deg F. Reset with the table above. 

2) The supply damper shall be modulated towards the maximum 

position as the room temperature rises above setpoint and shall 

be modulated towards the minimum position as the room 

temperature drops below the setpoint. 

3) The VAV shall operate independent of the supply air pressure. 

e. Ventilation: 

1) In the occupied mode the VAV box shall open to the Ventilation 

minimum setpoint. 

f. Heating: 

1) When the room temperature drops below the heating setpoint, 

the VAV Box shall be considered to be in the heating mode. 

2) The BAS shall modulate VAV supply air damper to maintain the 

heating minimum flow (CFM). 

3) When the room temperature drops below the heating setpoint, 

the BAS shall modulate the hot water reheat valve to maintain 

the heating setpoint of 70 Deg F. (adjustable). The BAS shall 

start to open the hot water reheat valve when the room 

temperature drops below 70 Deg F. The BAS shall modulate the 

hot water reheat valve to the full open position when the room 

temperature drops below the heating setpoint by 1 Deg 

F. (adjustable). The VAV box shall modulate open to the heating 



air flow. The discharge air temperature shall be limited to 100 

Deg F. 

4) The BAS shall limit the maximum cooling setpoints to 75 Deg F. 

(adjustable) and the minimum cooling setpoint to 73 Deg F. 

(adjustable). 

5) The BAS shall limit the maximum heating setpoint to 72 Deg F. 

(adjustable) and the minimum heating setpoint to 70 Deg F. 

(adjustable). 

6) If the room temperature rises 3 Deg F. (adjustable) above the 

cooling setpoint, the BAS shall generate an alarm. If the room 

temperature drops 3 Deg F. (adjustable) below the heating 

setpoint, the BAS shall generate an alarm. 

7) Convector shall be controlled in sequence with the reheat coil. 

Convector valve shall open first, followed by the reheat coil 

valve. 

g. Warm-up Cool-Down Mode 

1) When the central air handling unit is in the Warm-Up mode, the 

BAS shall reverse the action of the VAV box so as the room 

temperature drops below setpoint the box will modulate towards 

maximum position and as the room temperature rises above the 

setpoint the box will modulate towards minimum position. When 

the Warmup mode is concluded the VAV box shall operate in the 

same manner as during the Occupied Mode. 

2) The BAS shall command the hot water reheat valve closed. 

3) When the central air handling units is in the Cool-Down mode, 

the VAV box shall operate in the same manner as during the 

Occupied Mode except the heating shall be disabled. 

h. Energy Consumption 

1) The BAS shall monitor the supply air temperature to the VAV 

Box, the VAV room temperature and the supply air flow in CFM. 

2) The BAS shall monitor and totalize the energy consumption of 

the VAV zone in Btuh. 

i. VAV Room Sensor 

1) The VAV Room Sensor shall provide room temperature value to 

the controller. 

2) The VAV Room Sensor shall be supplied in the following 

manner: 

a) Tamper-resistant with tenant override to allow timed 

override of unoccupied to occupied mode of operation. 

b) LED indication of override state. 

j. Point List 

1) Inputs 

a) Al Room Temperature 

b) Al VAV Box Velocity Pressure 

c) Al VAV Box Supply Flow (CFM) 

d) Al Energy Consumption in BTU 

e) Al Totalized Energy Consumption in BTUH. 

f) Al VAV Supply Air Temperature. 

2) Outputs 

a) AO VAV Supply Damper 

b) AO Hot Water Reheat Valve 

c) DO Occupied Mode 

d) AO Convector Valve 



4.3 BOILER OPERATION - HOT WATER SYSTEM 

1. Boiler and associated pumps are enabled when OAT is less than 60 Deg F. 

(adjustable). HW pumps shall be monitored with Current Transformers (CT) and 

controlled by the BAS. HW supply and return temperature shall be monitored by a 

stainless steel temperature sensor mounted in a Stainless Steel thermal well. 

2. System Operation 

a. There are 2 hot water heating pumps. Pumps ‘P-1’ and ‘P-2’ operate during the 

OCCUPIED and WARM-UP modes and are each rated at 50% of the building load. 

b. When the panel mounted toggle HAND-OFF-AUTO (H-O-A) switches are in the 

AUTO position, these pumps will be controlled by the building energy management 

system. During the OCCUPIED or WARM-UP modes, if the outside temperature is 

below 72 degrees F., pump P1 will start. If the outside temperature is below 40 

degrees F., both pumps P1 and P2 will start. 

c. When the panel mounted toggle HAND-OFF-AUTO (H-O-A) switch is in the AUTO 

position, the boiler is enabled by the building management system. The boiler will 

be enabled whenever one or more of the heating pumps is running. Once 

enabled, the boiler operates from its factory-furnished and installed operating and 

safety controls. The DDC system will modulate boiler leaving hot water 

temperature. 

d. When the central air handling unit is off, the BAS shall command the hot water 

valve closed. 

e. If the room temperature falls below 50 Deg F. (adjustable), the BAS shall generate 

an alarm. 

f. A local DDC controller with analog temperature sensors located in both the supply 

water and the outdoor air shall modulate thru the boiler control system the hot 

water temperature to maintain building supply water temperature (reset from 

outdoor temperature) as follows: 

4.4 CULINARY HOT WATER SYSTEMS 

OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE HOT WATER TEMPERATURE 

70 degrees F. 90 degrees F. 

0 degrees F. 180 degrees F. 

A. When the starter or MCC mounted (H-O-A) switches are in the AUTO position, and any 

of the fan systems is running in the OCCUPIED mode, a strap-on thermostat mounted on 

the culinary hot water return line shall cycle domestic hot water pump to maintain 120 F 

(initial setting) culinary return water temperature. 

4.5 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM 

A. When the starter or MCC mounted (H-O-A) switches are in the AUTO position, the chilled 

water pumps shall be controlled by the building energy management system. 

B. When the outdoor temperature is above 55 F, the chilled water pump shall start and run 

continuously whenever a fan system is in OCCUPIED mode and the chilled water valve 

is open more than 10%. 

C. When the starter or MCC mounted (H-O-A) switches are in the AUTO position, the chiller 

shall be enabled to operate under its factory supplied controls to maintain the discharge 

water temperature as reset by the building energy management system. 

D. The chiller will not start unless the chilled water pump is running and chilled water flow 

has been proven by a paddle type water flow switch. A BTU meter will measure the 



secondary water differential temperature and water flow to the building. 

E. The chilled water supply temperature shall be reset based on outside air temperature 

according to the following schedule: 

Outside Air Temperature CHS Temperature 

95 0 F 45 0 F 

55 0 F 50 0 F 

F. Interface the BMCS with the chiller interface panel. Provide on-off control and monitoring, 

CHS supply temperature control and monitoring, demand limiting and general alarm 

monitoring. 

4.7 VAV SUPPLY AIR FAN SYSTEMS 

A. The air handler shall be equipped with supply fan; hot water preheat and chilled water 

coils; angle filter bank; outside air and return air dampers. 

B. Systems shall be individually started, stopped and controlled by the building energy 

management system (BAS). Provide manual 0-6 hour override timers (2) located as 

directed to provide local override of each fan system to the OCCUPIED mode. 

C. Supply fan speeds are controlled by VFD's. 

D. 0-2" w.c. supply duct static pressure transmitters located where shown on the plans and 

acting through DDC controllers shall modulate each VFD to maintain required supply duct 

static pressure. Duct static pressure shall be reset from zone requiring most cooling. Duct 

static pressure transmitters shall have an accuracy of 2% or better. 

E. A manual reset high limit pressure switch sensing discharge duct static shall shut down 

the fan if its setting is exceeded. 

F. Minimum Outside Air Control - The minimum outside air flow shall be controlled between 

the upper and lower air flows by a CO2 sensor, If the CO2 level is below setpoint (800 

PPM), the outside air dampers shall close to the lower air flow. The outside air dampers 

and return air dampers will modulate to maintain the minimum air flow. 

G. During the OCCUPIED mode and when the outdoor air temperature is below 55 F, a 

DDC controller shall modulate the boiler water temperature and the outdoor air and 

return air dampers in sequence to maintain discharge air temperature according to the 

following schedule: 

Outdoor Air Temperature Discharge Air Temperature 

55 F 55 F 

0 F 60 F 

H. If the outside air temperature is above 72 F, the outside air damper shall close to the 

minimum CFM position and the return air damper shall open correspondingly. 

I. The amount of outdoor air passing through the outdoor air damper and the outdoor air 

damper position shall be measured and displayed at the boiler room ATC panel. 

J. A return air temperature sensor shall prevent the outdoor air damper from opening until 

the return air temperature rises above 68 deg, F. 



K. The outside air dampers and relief air dampers shall close completely whenever the 

supply and return fans are off and/or when the system is in the UNOCCUPIED or 

WARMUP modes. 

L. A low limit freeze protection thermostat shall stop the fan if the mixed air temperature 

drops below 38 F. and the heating hot water system pump(s) shall start. 

M. Smoke detectors shall be incorporated into the building fire alarm system in accordance 

with NFPA 90A. Both supply fans shall stop if the building fire alarm system is activated. 

Refer to the Fire Alarm System. 

N. Provide fire alarm interface relays of the proper coil voltage in the fan systems ATC 

panels to stop the supply fans whenever the building fire alarm system is in alarm. 

Control power to these relays will be provided by Division 16. 

0. The night PURGE mode for each fan system shall be initiated by manual commands 

from the District. When these commands are received, each fan system shall be 

switched to the OCCUPIED mode. Discharge temperature setpoints shall set to 52 Deg 

F. PURGE mode shall continue until the temperatures at the fan system space 

temperature sensors drops to 74 F. 

P. Once the fan systems space temperatures have reached PURGE setpoint, the fans shall 

stop until the regularly scheduled OCCUPIED mode begins. 

Q. The WARM-UP mode for the building shall be initiated by a manual command from the 

District. When this command is received, fan system shall be switched to the 

OCCUPIED mode but the outdoor and relief air dampers shall remain closed. WARM-UP 

mode shall continue until the return air temperature at both fan systems has risen to 68 F. 

R. Once the fan system return air temperatures have reached WARM-UP setpoint, fan 

systems shall switch to the regular OCCUPIED mode. 

S. In Unoccupied Mode, the supply and return fans start when the lowest space temperature 

drops below the night setpoint temperature and runs until the lowest space temperature 

rises 50 Deg F above the night setpoint temperature. 

T. Provide a differential pressure transmitter with its sensing tips located across fan system 

filter bank. 

U. Provide software to provide an alarm to the District Host if the filter differential pressure 

continuously exceeds a software setpoint for 15 minutes. 

4.7 BUILDING PRESSURIZATION 

A. Positive building differential pressure of 0.05 inches w.c. is maintained by modulating the 

relief air damper at the roof hoods. The relief damper shall modulate to maintain building 

static pressure. 

B. Upon shutdown of the air handling unit system relief air dampers shall close. 

4.8 UNIT HEATER CONTROL 

A. A room thermostat shall cycle a normally open heating valve to maintain desired space 

temperature. A strap-on aquastat on the supply pipe will not allow the fan to operate 



4.9 BOlLER ROOM 

below 100 Deg F. 

A. An electric room thermostat shall cycle the unit heater to maintain minimum desired boiler 

room temperature. Initial thermostat setpoint shall be 60 F. 

B. Emergency Shutdown: Provide emergency boiler shutdown switches at each boiler room 

door. Switch will shut down the control power to the boiler and water heater. Each switch 

shall be located outside of the door. Label the switch "Emergency Boiler Shutdown 

switch". Switch shall be push-button type. 

4.10 TOILET ROOM EXHAUST FANS 

A. Ceiling mounted, toilet room exhaust fans shall be individually switched with the light 

switch in the area served. In addition, each exhaust fan shall run for 10 minutes after the 

room lights have been turned off. 

B. Roof mounted, toilet room exhaust fans shall be individually operated by pre-determined 

schedules from the building DDC system. 

4.11 MECHANICAL ROOM VENETILATION CONTROL 

A. A room temperature sensor, acting through a DDC controller shall cycle ventilation fan 

and open the dampers in the neck of the fan to maintain desired mechanical room 

temperature. 

4.12 GLYCOL FEED SYSTEM 

A. The glycol feed system shall be furnished complete by the vendor. The ATC contractor 

shall provide 120-volt power, interconnecting wiring between components as necessary 

to make a complete operational system. 

4.13 SPLIT DX SYSTEMS (Telecomm Rooms) 

A. Provide control wiring from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit. Connect into the BMCS. 

System shall be controlled through a wall mounted cooling thermostat provided by the 

system manufacturer. 

4.14 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 

A. The control contractor shall furnish and install all DDC controllers, DDC/pneumatic 

transducers, sensors, interface relays, wiring and other field accessories for the building 

automation system to provide for implementation of this sequence of operation and the 

representative input-output points listed below. 

DDC SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT SUMMARY 

(List is not comprehensive) 

1. DIGITAL OUTPUTS: 

a. CHILLER ENABLE-DISABLE 

b. CHILLED WATER PUMP START-STOP 

c. SUPPLY FAN VFD START-STOP 

d. MAIN HEATING PUMPS START-STOP 



e. EXHAUST FANS START-STOP 

f. 120 F CULINARY SYSTEM ENABLE-DISABLE 

g. VAV BOXES ALL DATA 

2. DIGITAL INPUTS: 

a. CHILLER (each compressor) RUN STATUS 

b. CHILLER STATUS 

c. CHILLER FAILURE ALARM (1) SAFETY SHUTDOWN 

d. CHILLED WATER FLOW (1) STATUS 

e. SUPPLY FAN VFD STATUS 

f. BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM STATUS 

g. FREEZE PROTECTION THERMOSTAT STATUS 

h. DISCHARGE DUCT HIGH STATIC STATUS 

i. 0-6 HOUR OVERRIDE TIMER STATUS 

j. HEATING WATER PUMPS STATUS 

k. CHILLED WATER PUMP STATUS 

l. CHILLED WATER FLOW STATUS 

m. VAV BOXES ALL DATA 

3. ANALOG INPUTS: 

a. CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMP 

b. CH1LLED WATER RETURN TEMP 

c. HOT WATER SUPPLY TEMP 

d. HOT WATER RETURN TEMP 

e. CULINARY 120 F STORAGE TANK TEMP 

f. BOILER TEMP 

g. OUTDOOR – AIR TEMP TEMP 

h. RETURN AIR CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR CO2 

i. SUPPLY AIR TEMP TEMP 

j. MIXED AIR TEMP TEMP 

k. RETURN AIR TEMP TEMP 

l. VAV SYSTEM SUPPLY DUCT STATIC PRESS 

m. FILTER BANK PRESS 

n. VAV BOXES ALL DATA 

4. ANALOG OUTPUTS: 

a. FAN SYSTEM HEATING VALVE Mod 

b. SYSTEM COOLING VALVE Mod 

c. SYSTEM OA AND RA DAMPERS Mod 

d. BUILDING RELIEF DAMPERS Mod 

e. SUPPLY FAN VFD Mod 

f. VAV BOXES ALL DATA 



4.15 GRAPHICS PAGES 

A. The following pages are an example of the required graphics pages to meet the Alpine 

School District standards. These graphic pages shall be provided for the entire school 

including existing school systems as well as the new addition. 

Graphic 1 – Main Floor Plan Example 



Graphic 2 – Classroom temperature screen 

Graphic 3 – Classroom VAV Box Flow Screen 



Graphic 4 – Equipment Screen 



Graphic 5 – Hot Water Screen 



Graphic 6 – Chilled Water Screen 



Graphic 7 – Power Monitoring Screen 



Graphic 8 – Air Handler Screen 



Graphic 9 – VAV Box Screen 



4.16 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Completely check, calibrate and test connected hardware and software to insure system 

performs in accordance with Contract documents and sequences of operation submitted. 



B. Demonstrate complete system operations for District Engineer or Project Manager prior 

to system acceptance. 

C. Training 

1. Perform training at the same time as commissioning is done. Utilize specific 

manuals and record documentation. 

2. provide eight (8) hour training session for BMCS covering following topics: 

a. Sequence of operation review 

b. Use of operator’s terminal 

c. Operating time schedules 

d. Alarm messages 

e. Network communications, both local and within the district’s LAN. 

f. Review modifying setpoints and schedules 

g. Questions and answers. 

C. Final Acceptance 

1. Written acceptance sign-off of system operation will then occur after 

commissioning and training are complete. Acceptance will be signed by District’s 

designated Commissioning Agent 

2. Checklist, provided by District, shall be initialed and signed by District’s Project 

Manager at completion. 

a. Punch list items completed and BMCS accepted. 

b. Checklist shall verify required training has been provided. 

c. Checklist shall also be signed by BMCS trainer and forwarded to 

District Engineer for final review and approval 

d. Final payment will not be made until checklist has been received, 

reviewed and approved by District’s Engineer. 



DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 

Section 16050 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 

Section 16115 – Cable Tray 

Section 16120 – Wires and Cables 

Section 16130 – Raceways 

Section 16140 – Switches and Receptacles 

Section 16425 – Switchboards 600 V & Below 

Section 16470 – Panelboards 

Section 16475 – Motor Controllers 

Section 16478 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppression 

Section 16500 – Lighting 

Section 16530 – Lighting Controls 

Section 16550 – Occupancy Sensed Lighting Control 

Section 16723 – Fire Alarm Systems 

Section 16760 – Integrated Electronic Communication Network 

Section 16740 – Telephone and Data Wiring 

Section 16771 – Classroom Sound Reinforcement, Projectors and 

Smartboards 

Section 16780 – Television Program Distribution 

Section 16781 – Security Intrusion Detection and Access Control 

System 



SECTION 16050 – BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 



A. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, 

mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the drawings and/or in these specifications, including 

all labor, services, permits, fees, utility charges, and incidentals necessary and required to 

perform and complete the electrical work described in this Division. Apply for all permits early 

in the project to avoid problems due to code revisions. 

B. See the contract conditions (general and supplementary) and Division 1 for requirements 

concerning this Division including, but not limited to, submittals, shop drawings, substitution 

requests, change orders, maintenance manuals, record drawings, coordination, permits, 

record documents and guarantees. 


A. Mechanical equipment motors to be furnished under another Division but connected under 

this Division. Starters to be mounted and connected by this Division, but furnished by 

another Division unless otherwise noted on the electrical drawings. Motor control centers 

shall be furnished and installed under this Division of the work. Verify and coordinate all 

equipment locations and electrical characteristics with other trades involved in the work. 

Coordination shall be done prior to rough-in or ordering equipment. 

B. Control wiring for mechanical equipment beyond provisions shown on the Electrical Drawings 

shall be performed under another Division of the work. 


A. Do all work in accordance with regulations of serving electric utility, telephone utility, cable TV 

utility, National Electrical Code, state and local codes and amendments, National Fire Codes, 

and all other applicable codes. 


A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and familiarize himself with existing 

conditions which will affect the work. Prior to start of work, obtain "As built", "Record", or 

other Drawings showing existing underground utilities. 

B. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting 

fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical 

Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When required make all 

deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as constructed, and to 

related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be made without 

added cost to Owner. 

C. Call to the attention of the Architect any error, omission, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings 

and/or Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification 

of same has been made. 


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-1

D. Under no conditions are beams, girders, footings or columns to be cut for electrical items 

unless so shown on Drawings or written approval obtained from the Architect. 

E. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space 

and promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Coordination of 

equipment to the available space and to the access routes through the construction shall be 

the Contractor's responsibility. 

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS: 

A. Prior to ordering equipment, and prior to Contractor’s first application for payment, the 

Contractor shall, within 14 days after award of this work, submit six (6) complete shop 

drawings, neatly bound in 3-ring binder form, with indexed tabs, to the Architect, of materials 

and equipment he proposes to furnish. It is preferred that all sections be submitted at once, 

however, in the event that one or more sections need approvals quickly and others are not 

prepared yet, the Engineer will agree to review the individual section submittals needing 

immediate approval. However, each individual submittal section must be complete and 

remaining submittals that are not a rush shall be submitted all in one package as quickly as 

possible. Submitting individual sections over many weeks/months will not be tolerated. 

B. List shall bear Contractor’s stamp, signature or other means to show that he has inspected 

same and certified that submitted material is correct in regard to quantity, size, dimension, 

quality and is coordinated with the Contract Documents. 

C. See individual sections within this Division for products requiring submittal. 

D. Each shop drawing submittal shall be prepared by the manufacturer, and shall clearly show 

manufacturer’s name, catalog numbers, pictures, details, layout, type, size, rating, style, and 

all options identified in a permanent fashion. Specific items or options shall be permanently 

marked on sheets containing more than one option – do not rely on the Engineer to mark 

options. Yellow highlight will not be an acceptable means of marking. 

E. Large equipment drawings such as UPS systems, generators, transformers, switchboards, 

and similar large equipment shall include the size, weight, seismic rating, emissions data, 

elevation, and wiring diagrams in addition to the product data. 

F. Some sections of this Division may require shop drawings prepared on full size floor plans in 

AutoCAD or other CAD software. Where required, contact the Architect for the latest version 

of the floorplans and match the size and scale of the construction drawings. Drawings 

delivered to the contractor from the Architect/Engineer may not include addenda changes. 

Contractor shall only use floor plans for purposes of the construction on this job, and not for 

any other use or reuse. Add any required addenda items prior to finishing submittals. 

G. Provide complete materials (all materials) list at the beginning of each tabbed section 

showing “Specification Section”, “Material Item”, “Manufacturer’s Name and Catalog 

Number”, and all pertinent data. 

H. Provide samples were required in individual sections of this Division. 

I. Contractor agrees that Shop Drawing Submittals processed by the Architect are not Change 

Orders; that the purpose of Shop Drawing Submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to 

the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his 

understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install 

and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. 



J. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between Shop 

Drawings and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing Submittals 

are processed by the Architect, the design Drawings and Specifications shall control and 

shall be followed. 



A. All materials shall be new and bear manufacturer's name, model number, electrical 

characteristics and other identification. All equipment to be U.L. approved or listed by 

another testing agency approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Material and equipment shall be standard product of manufacturer regularly engaged in 

production of similar material for at least five years (unless specifically exempted) and shall 

be manufacturer's latest design. 

C. If the description of a product is in conflict with the product as specified in the catalog 

number, the description shall generally take precedence. Contact the Architect for 

clarification if this occurs. 

D. All equipment for essential or life safety systems must be rated and certified for the 

appropriate seismic design category or seismic use group for the installed location. 

2.2 DISCONNECTS: 

A. Safety and disconnect switches to be General duty quick-make, quick-break, dual rated, 

lockable, and of such electrical characteristics as required for the load served. Switches to 

have defeatable cover interlock. 

B. Fuse clips shall accept Class R or Class L fuses if required. Motor rated toggle switches 

equal to Square D Class 2510, type F with thermal overloads may be used as motor 

disconnects in dry locations. 

C. Disconnect switches required by code shall be installed whether or not specifically shown on 

the Drawings. Disconnect switches for refrigeration equipment and multiple motor HVAC 

equipment shall be fusible type. 

D. Safety and disconnect switches (fuse, non-fuse or circuit-breaker type) to be of same 

manufacturer as switchgear and panelboards. 

2.3 FUSES: 

A. Provide fuses as indicated on the drawings, sized per NEC, or as required by the equipment 

manufacturer, whichever provides maximum protection, for a fully operational system. 

B. All fuses shall be furnished of the same manufacturer. 

C. All fuses shall be installed by the electrical contractor at job-site and only when equipment is 

to be energized. Fuses shall not be installed during shipment. 

D. All fuses to be 200,000 AIC, Current-limiting, U.L., Time Delay, Dual-element Type as 

follows: 



For feeders 601 Amps to 6000 Amps: 

Class L, KRP-C, KLPC, & A4BQ 

For feeders 600 Amps and less: 

Class RKk-1 for 600 volt; LPS-RK, LLS-RK, & A6D-R 

Class RK-1 for 250 volt; LPN-RK, LLN-RK, & A2D-R 

Class J; JHC, JTD, & AJT 

For motor circuits beyond the main and subdistribution boards, 600 volt and below: 

Class RK-5 for 600 volt; FRS-R, FLS-R, & TRS-R 

Class RK-5 for 250 volt; FRN-R, FLN-R, & TR-R 

E. SPARE PARTS: Provide 10% spare fuses, but not less than 3 of any one size and type. 

F. Provide Spare Fuse Cabinet(s), #SFC, #LSFC, & ATFC as required. Install cabinet(s) in 

Main Electrical Room. 

G. Approved Manufacturers, with catalog numbers listed in order: Bussman, Littelfuse, Ferraz 

Shawmut. 

H. If the electrical contractor wishes to furnish materials other than those specified, a written 

request, along with a complete short circuit and selective coordination study, shall be 

submitted to the engineer for evaluation at least 8 days prior to the bid date. If the engineers 

evaluation indicates acceptance, a written addendum will be issued listing the other 

acceptable manufacturer. 

2.4 BOXES: 

A. Outlet and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with code requirements or as noted 


B. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, all outlet boxes for new work shall be 

galvanized steel knockout, outlet boxes. Gangable boxes are not acceptable. Outlet boxes 

shall not be smaller than 4" square and 1-1/2 inches in depth, unless otherwise noted. All 

outlet box covers, rings, or other fittings shall be galvanized. Boxes which are exposed to the 

weather shall be cast metal. Outlet boxes for phone and data outlets shall be 2.5" deep 

boxes. 

C. Outlet boxes shall be designed for the intended use, and shall be installed flush with finish 

surface lines or not more than 1/8 inch back and shall be level and plumb. Long screws with 

spaces or shims for mounting devices are not acceptable. No combustible materials shall be 

exposed to wiring at outlets. 

D. Outlet boxes on opposite sides of fire or sound isolating partitions shall have a minimum 

horizontal separation of 24". Back to back boxes are not permitted in any walls. 

E. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, floor boxes shall be Walker RFB4 with RAKMII 

flush access hatch with carpet trim. Where located in tile floors, provide FAKMII cover. 

Provide cast iron for on grade applications, and stamped steel for above grade applications. 

Provide shallow stamped still if suspended slab thickness is less than 5-1/2 inches. Provide 

plates for mounting of duplex receptacles and RF-45 communications outlets. If the number 

of communications outlets exceeds the quantity which fits in a standard plate, provide a 

custom plate to accommodate the increased quantity. 



I. Floor boxes which contain voice and data cable often are shown with an empty conduit 

running up a wall and stubbing into the ceiling. Where no conduit is shown, stub a 1" conduit 

out the bottom of the low voltage section of the box and into the ceiling space of the floor 

below. 


3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION METHODS: 

A. All items, articles, materials, and equipment specified under this Division shall be installed per 

the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Where the manufacturer’s instructions are in 

conflict with the directions provided elsewhere in this Contract, the Engineer shall be notified 

prior to beginning rough-in. 

B. Cutting or notching shall be kept to an absolute minimum and done when, and in a method 

approved by the Architect. Patch and correct finished surfaces damaged by electrical work. 

C. Relays, panels, cabinets and equipment shall be level and plumb and installed parallel with 

structural building lines. All equipment and enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps, openings, 

or distortions. Provide approved devices for closing all unused openings. 

D. Arrange circuit wiring as shown on the Drawings and do not alter or combine runs or 

homeruns without the specific approval of the Architect. Feeder runs shall not be recombined 

or altered. 

E. Contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing devices shall not be placed on 

walls which are common to occupied space. 

F. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like equipment which are found to be 

noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and 

shall be replaced. 

G. In general, the mounting heights shall be as noted on the Drawings, or as listed below, the 

Architectural Interior Elevations and drawing notes taking precedence. Where no heights are 

indicated, request clarification from the Architect. Consult the Architectural, Mechanical and 

Structural drawings to avoid conflicts prior to roughing-in and for exact locations. All 

dimensions are to the center of the device unless otherwise noted. Lighting dimensions are 

to the bottom of suspended fixtures and center of wall mounted fixtures unless otherwise 

noted. 

Light Switches 45 inches 

Convenience Receptacles 18 inches 

Panelboard top 72 inches 

Fire Alarm Signals 96 inches to top (but at least 6" below ceiling) 

Fire Call Stations 45 inches 

Data/Telephone Outlets 18 inches 

Receptacles and Outlets 8 inches above counter or 3 

Over Counters inches above backsplash, whichever is greater. 

H. Where raceways penetrate floors, ceilings, ducts, chases, and fire walls, provide fire stopping 

to maintain integrity of the fire assembly. Firestopping method shall be approved by the 

Code Authority having jurisdiction. 



I. All materials and equipment installed under this work shall be properly and adequately 

supported from the building structure except where ceiling construction or other provisions 

are specifically designed to support them. Support systems shall provide a safety factor of 

four. This shall apply to chains, hangers, anchors, clamps, screws, structural iron, and all 

other hardware and appurtenances associated with the support system. 

J. Rough-in for communications outlets for phone and data systems shall consist of a 4" square 

deep (4SD) box with a single gang mud ring. A minimum of 1 1/4 inch conduit will be used 

for all TELCOM location pathways, and ALL conduits will be routed in the ceiling space and 

not in the concrete slab. All conduits will be run from the location in one complete and 

continuous path to the cable tray and bonded to the cable tray as per ANSI/TIA/EIA 

Standards and the National Electric Code. Refer to data specification for additional details. 

K. Maintain the following minimum separations from voice and data cables. Power conduit - 

12", transformers and motors - 40", fluorescent lighting - 12". Coordinate with the voice and 

data installer to assure these separations are met. 

L. All new floor mounted electrical equipment including, but not limited to: Transformers, 

Switchboards, MCC’s, Switchgear, Switches, UPS, PDU’s and Generators; shall have 

concrete housekeeping pads installed. All Concrete pads shall be as indicated on the 

drawings or 4 inches high above finished floor, extending to 4 inches beyond the width and 

depth of the Equipment base; pad dimensions indicated on the drawings shall take 

precedence in all cases. 

3.3 LOW VOLTAGE WIRING METHODS: 

A. Provide conduit homeruns complete for all low voltage systems in the new addition and office 

remodel area. Plenum cabling will not be acceptable. 

B. Provide plenum rated cabling for fire alarm, access control, security, and PA system wiring in 

existing school areas with hard ceiling (classrooms, hallways, restrooms, storages, etc.). 

Refer to the drawings for details. Wiring to be concealed above ceiling and supported on the 

j-hooks. 

C. Provide a box, plaster ring, and conduit with insulated bushing from each wall or floor outlet 

to an accessible ceiling or crawl space. Conduit shall be minimum 1-1/4" for voice and/or 

data outlets, and sized as needed for other systems. Drawings notes shall take precedence. 

Raceways for phone and data cable shall be sized based on the number of cables in 

accordance with the division 17000 specification. 

D. Furnish and install all necessary sleeves and raceways to permit the installation of signal 

cables (specific attention is called to non-contiguous ceiling spaces) to the appropriate 

equipment termination point. Provide sleeves through all fire-rated walls and partitions. No 

outlets of any type shall be left without a raceway system or accessible ceiling path to their 

termination point. Verify that raceway sizes and quantities are appropriate and will have at 

least 50% spare capacity after all cables are initially installed. Provide at least one empty 

spare conduit to each area, sized to handle future needs. 

3.4 LABELING: 

A. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the 

function of each item of equipment provided under this work. 



B. Nameplates shall be 1/16 inch thick, laminated three-ply plastic, center-ply white, outer-ply 

black "Lamicoid" or equal. Letters shall be formed by engraving outer black ply, exposing 

white center-ply, and shall be minimum 5/8 inch high. Nameplates shall be secured with 

screws or pop rivets. 

C. Provide a master nameplate at the main distribution to identify the project, the Engineer and 

the date. Clearly label switchboards with engraved nameplates to identify each load served. 

D. Label all electrical contactors, relays, time switches, transformers, etc. with an engraved 

nameplate corresponding to the labeling in the main, subdistribution, or branch panel serving 

the device or apparatus. 

E. Provide typewritten branch panel schedules with protective clear, transparent covers 

accounting for every breaker installed. Use actual room designations assigned by name or 

number near completion of the work, and not the designations shown on drawings. 

F. Identify branch panels with engraved nameplate corresponding with distribution panel 

labeling. Mount labels inside door for flush panels, and on the face of the door for surface 

panels. No brand labels or other marking shall be on the outside of the panels. Where 

changes are made in existing panels, distribution boards, etc., provide new labeling and 

schedules to accurately reflect the changes. 

3.5 SAFETY: 

A. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction 

review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, 

techniques, sequences or procedures required for the contractor to perform the work. 

3.6 DEMOLITION: 

A. It is the intent of these specifications to require the contractor to make all necessary 

adjustments to the electrical system, required to meet code, and accommodate installation of 

the new and remodeled work. 

B. Remove all existing fixtures, clocks, switches, receptacles, raceways, and other electrical 

equipment and devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces 

scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless specifically shown as retained or 

relocated on the drawings. If existing walls, ceiling, floors, etc. are moved, extend existing 

devices, fixtures, and circuiting to the new location. 

C. Disconnect all existing mechanical equipment scheduled for removal or relocation. See 

mechanical drawings for scope of work. Remove abandoned raceways and cables. Relabel 

panels and motor control centers to reflect changes. 

D. If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed 

through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, new conduit 

and wire shall be provided to bypass the abandoned outlets. If existing conduits pass 

through or are mounted on partitions or ceilings which are being removed or remodeled, new 

conduit and wire shall be provided to route around the ceiling or wall and maintain service to 

the existing load. 

E. Extend circuiting and devices in all existing walls to be furred out. 



F. Locations of items shown on the drawings as existing are partially based on as-built and 

other drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the 

information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to 

accomplish the intent of the contract documents. The plans may show some demolition 

conditions, but are not intended to show all of them. 

G. All materials accumulated during the demolition process are the Owners property and shall 

be removed from the job site as directed by the Owner. If owner does not wish to salvage 

materials, contractor shall remove from jobsite and dispose, or recycle materials at 

contractor’s discretion, in a lawful manner. 

H. Where changes are made in existing panels, distribution boards, etc., provide new labeling 

and schedules to accurately reflect the changes. 

I. Demolish and dispose of hazardous materials in a lawful manner, such as PCB containing 

transformers or ballasts, mercury containing lamps, or materials containing lead. All costs for 

proper disposal shall be paid by the contractor unless specified elsewhere in the general 

conditions. 

3.7 POWER INTERRUPTIONS: 

A. Keep outages to occupied areas to a minimum and prearrange all outages with the Owner's 

representative and utilities involved. Requests for outages shall state the specific dates and 

hours and the maximum durations, with the outages kept to these specified times. When 

power interruptions will last longer than 5 minutes and cover more than 10% of the building, 

or affect public areas, they shall be performed on the weekends between 1 and 5 AM. 

B. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt 

operations, normal activities, building access, etc. Coordinate work with other crafts for 

proper scheduling. 

C. No circuits shall be turned off without prior approval from owner. Coordinate with the Owner 

any interruptions which affect the operation of the remaining portions of the facility. 

D. This contractor will be liable for any damages resulting from unscheduled outages or for 

those not confined to the preapproved times. Include all costs for overtime labor as 

necessary to maintain electrical services in the initial bid proposal. Temporary wiring and 

facilities, if used, shall be removed and the site left clean before final acceptance. Requests 

for outages must be submitted at least (5) days prior to intended shutdown time. 

E. Include in bid cost of minimum temporary power for Fire Alarm System, Security, 

Telephone/Data equipment and any other equipment designated by Owner, during time when 

primary building power has been interrupted. 

3.8 GROUNDING: 

A. Ground all electric equipment, raceways and enclosures in accordance with code rules and 

established safety practices. Provide a single main grounding point where grounding 

conductors from the Grounding Electrode System ground rods, ground grids, water pipes, 

main switchgear, etc. may be terminated. 

B. Concrete encased Ufer grounds shall be no less than 60 feet in length. Bare Copper 

conductors shall be placed no closer than two inches of the bottom of an exterior wall footing 



and there shall be no plastic sheeting or other insulating material placed between the 

footing and earth. Bond to re-bar at minimum 10' intervals. 

C. Grounds shall be installed where accessible for future inspection and servicing. Where 

ground connections are made underground or in inaccessible locations, they shall be made 

using an exothermic weld process, Cadweld or equivalent, or Ampact pressure connectors. 

D. Install grounding conductors in approved metallic raceways unless specifically shown or 

specified otherwise. Bond at each end and at all intervening boxes and enclosures between 

the service equipment and grounding electrode. 

E. No. 8 and smaller grounding conductors shall have green insulation. No. 6 and larger shall be 

marked with green colored tape at each end and at every box, panel, switchboard, or point 

where conductor is accessible. 

F. All isolated ground buses shall be used only for conductors from isolated ground receptacles. 

Do not bond conduit or enclosures to isolated ground buses. All isolated ground conductors 

shall be run back to the main ground point for the separately derived system which serves 

them. 

G. Provide a #6 grounding conductor to all telephone, data processing and sound system 

terminals throughout project unless noted otherwise on the plans. Provide a wall mounted 

busbar assembly equivalent to Square D Class 1630-PK15GTA/PKGTAB. 

3.9 TVSS (TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION) INSTALLATIONS 

A. When TVSS units are specified, they are to be shipped with complete installation instructions 

which are to be followed in detail. The manufacturer’s representative is always to be 

contacted and is to supervise the TVSS installation. 

B. Supplemental installation information is as follows: 

1. Use the breaker space closest to the neutral bus. Nipple the suppressor to the panel 

where the suppressor can be installed so as to keep both the hot leads and the 

neutral lead as short and straight as possible from the suppressor to the breakers 

and the neutral bus. 

2. The best performance is achieved with the shortest leads and neutral. All efforts 

within the code should be used to minimize the lead lengths. Ideally the leads should 

be less than eight inches long. Each inch of lead above six inches will add 

approximately 20 volts to the quoted let-through voltage. Cut the leads down to the 

shortest size that will allow installation. 

3. If the neutral bus is out of reach of the leads, then a #4 AWG conductor is to be run 

from the remote neutral bus to a lug near the suppressor, and the lead from the 

suppressor should be cut as short as possible. 

4. The ground is to be connected to the case of the panel (equipment ground only). Do 

not connect the suppressor ground wire to an isolated ground (IG) bus. 

3.10 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: 

A. The location and method for connecting to each item of equipment shall be verified prior to 

roughing-in. The voltage and phase of each item of equipment shall be checked before 



connecting. Motor rotations shall be made in the proper direction. Pump motors are not to 

be test run until liquid is in the system and proper lubrication to all bearings in unit is checked. 

B. Conduit, wire and circuit breaker sizes for mechanical, elevator and similar equipment are 

based on the equipment ratings of one manufacturer. The equipment actually furnished may 

have entirely different electrical characteristics. Conduit, wire, circuit breakers, disconnects, 

etc. shall not be ordered or installed until exact electrical requirements are obtained. 

Responsibility for this coordination rests with the Contractor. 

3.11 SEISMIC BRACING: 

A. Furnish and install all seismic bracing of equipment, feeders, lighting fixtures, and other 

electrical items in accordance with prevailing codes. Refer to ASCE 7-02, section 9.6 for 

calculation methods. Provide and submit the required designs, calculations, certifications, 

and stamped drawings to the authority having jurisdiction and obtain their approval prior to 

installation or fabrication. 

B. Where conduit, cable trays, or busducts are attached to structures where they cross a 

seismic isolation interface, the electrical components shall be designed to accommodate the 

seismic relative displacement. 

3.12 PAINTING: 

A. All electrical equipment and conduit exposed in finished areas and on exterior walls are to be 

painted to match surrounding surfaces. 

B. Contractor shall coordinate the timing of painting requirements. 

C. Refer to Architectural specifications for methods and materials. 

3.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: 

A. Maintenance of Documents: 

1. Maintain at Jobsite, One Record Copy of: Contract Drawings, Specifications, 

Addenda, Reviewed Shop Drawings, Change Orders, Other Modifications to Contract 

and Field Test Records. 

2. Keep apart from documents used for construction. 

3. Keep documents available at all times for inspection by Architect. 

B. Recording: 

1. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD." 

2. Keep record documents current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required 

information has been recorded. 

3. Contract Drawings, legibly mark to record actual construction; including but not 

limited to the following: 



C. As-Built Submittals: 

a. Depths of various elements; locations of underground items, with dimensions 

to building walls and corners; changes of dimensions and details; changes 

made by Addendum, Field Orders or Change Order. 

b. Specifications and Addenda; Legibly mark each Section to record changes 

made by Addendum, Field Order or Change Order. 

1. At completion of project, transfer changes, addenda items, variations from drawings, 

exact routes of all feeders and service conduits, and locations of stubbed conduits to 

clean new prints and specifications which will be supplied by the Architect and deliver 

to the Architect as "As-reported Record" drawings. Include dimensions to all buried or 

concealed conduits to permanent structures. 

2. Refer to Section 16470, Paragraph 1.4, for as-built submittal requirements for Voice 

and Data Wiring. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 

3.14 WARRANTIES: 

1. At completion of project, prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals with operation 

and Maintenance Data, contractors warranties, and copies of approved electrical 

permits. Include corrected copies of original submittals and shop drawings. 

2. See Division 1 for additional requirements. 

A. Provide a minimum 1 year warranty on all electrical equipment, devices, labor, and work by 

Division 16 whether specified or not. 

B. Provide warranties greater than 1 year as specified in other sections where stated. The 

warranty requirement most stringent shall be used where conflicts arise. 

C. The systems listed below require warranties exceeding the minimum warranty: 

1. TVSS; 5 years - refer to Section 16478. 

2. Lighting; 5 years for ballasts - refer to Section 16500 

3. Occupancy Sensed Lighting Control; 5 years - refer to Section 16550. 

4. Division 17000: Voice and Data Wiring Workmanship and Parts; 25 years - refer to 

Section 16740. 

D. Provide copies of all warranties to the owner upon completion of the project. 

3.15 COMPLETION: 

A. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where 

only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in 

proper operation free of faults, shorts or unintentional grounds. Demonstrate system in the 

presence of the Architect, the Owner or their representative when requested. 



3.16 FINAL OBSERVATION: 

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that: 

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 

2. Contractor has inspected Project for compliance with Contract Documents. 

3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 

4. Equipment and Systems have been tested and are operational. 

5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection. 

B. Architect will make final inspection as soon as possible after receipt of Certification. 

C. Should Architect consider that work is finally complete in accordance with Contract Document 

requirements, Contractor shall make Contract Closeout submittals. 

D. Should Architect consider that work is not finally complete: 

1. He will so notify Contractor, stating reasons. 

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy deficiencies, and send second 

written notice to Architect certifying that work is complete. 

3. Architect will reinspect work. 

E. The Architect will make two final inspections. The first will determine deficiencies and errors 

in the work and the second will determine whether or not the noted deficiencies and errors 

have been satisfactorily corrected. 

F. If additional inspections are required because of the Contractor's failure to complete the 

deficiencies and errors prior to the second inspection, costs for the successive inspections 

will be back-charged to the Contractor by the Owner, who, in turn, will reimburse the 

Architect. Charges will be based as follows: 

1. Architect time at current billing rates. 

2. Travel time, and all other expenses incurred in making inspections. 

G. Contractor to provide one (1) journeyman, tools, meters, instruments and other test 

equipment required by Architect. Contractor to remove and replace trims, covers, fixtures, 

etc., for Architect to review and test materials, systems, methods and workmanship. 

(Example: Removing switchboard and panel covers to take voltage/amp readings, review 

connections and wire size, etc.) 




SECTION 16050 – BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 



A. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, 

mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the drawings and/or in these specifications, including 

all labor, services, permits, fees, utility charges, and incidentals necessary and required to 

perform and complete the electrical work described in this Division. Apply for all permits early 

in the project to avoid problems due to code revisions. 

B. See the contract conditions (general and supplementary) and Division 1 for requirements 

concerning this Division including, but not limited to, submittals, shop drawings, substitution 

requests, change orders, maintenance manuals, record drawings, coordination, permits, 

record documents and guarantees. 


A. Mechanical equipment motors to be furnished under another Division but connected under 

this Division. Starters to be mounted and connected by this Division, but furnished by 

another Division unless otherwise noted on the electrical drawings. Motor control centers 

shall be furnished and installed under this Division of the work. Verify and coordinate all 

equipment locations and electrical characteristics with other trades involved in the work. 

Coordination shall be done prior to rough-in or ordering equipment. 

B. Control wiring for mechanical equipment beyond provisions shown on the Electrical Drawings 

shall be performed under another Division of the work. 


A. Do all work in accordance with regulations of serving electric utility, telephone utility, cable TV 

utility, National Electrical Code, state and local codes and amendments, National Fire Codes, 

and all other applicable codes. 


A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and familiarize himself with existing 

conditions which will affect the work. Prior to start of work, obtain "As built", "Record", or 

other Drawings showing existing underground utilities. 

B. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting 

fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical 

Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When required make all 

deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as constructed, and to 

related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be made without 

added cost to Owner. 

C. Call to the attention of the Architect any error, omission, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings 

and/or Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification 

of same has been made. 



D. Under no conditions are beams, girders, footings or columns to be cut for electrical items 

unless so shown on Drawings or written approval obtained from the Architect. 

E. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space 

and promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Coordination of 

equipment to the available space and to the access routes through the construction shall be 

the Contractor's responsibility. 

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS: 

A. Prior to ordering equipment, and prior to Contractor’s first application for payment, the 

Contractor shall, within 14 days after award of this work, submit six (6) complete shop 

drawings, neatly bound in 3-ring binder form, with indexed tabs, to the Architect, of materials 

and equipment he proposes to furnish. It is preferred that all sections be submitted at once, 

however, in the event that one or more sections need approvals quickly and others are not 

prepared yet, the Engineer will agree to review the individual section submittals needing 

immediate approval. However, each individual submittal section must be complete and 

remaining submittals that are not a rush shall be submitted all in one package as quickly as 

possible. Submitting individual sections over many weeks/months will not be tolerated. 

B. List shall bear Contractor’s stamp, signature or other means to show that he has inspected 

same and certified that submitted material is correct in regard to quantity, size, dimension, 

quality and is coordinated with the Contract Documents. 

C. See individual sections within this Division for products requiring submittal. 

D. Each shop drawing submittal shall be prepared by the manufacturer, and shall clearly show 

manufacturer’s name, catalog numbers, pictures, details, layout, type, size, rating, style, and 

all options identified in a permanent fashion. Specific items or options shall be permanently 

marked on sheets containing more than one option – do not rely on the Engineer to mark 

options. Yellow highlight will not be an acceptable means of marking. 

E. Large equipment drawings such as UPS systems, generators, transformers, switchboards, 

and similar large equipment shall include the size, weight, seismic rating, emissions data, 

elevation, and wiring diagrams in addition to the product data. 

F. Some sections of this Division may require shop drawings prepared on full size floor plans in 

AutoCAD or other CAD software. Where required, contact the Architect for the latest version 

of the floorplans and match the size and scale of the construction drawings. Drawings 

delivered to the contractor from the Architect/Engineer may not include addenda changes. 

Contractor shall only use floor plans for purposes of the construction on this job, and not for 

any other use or reuse. Add any required addenda items prior to finishing submittals. 

G. Provide complete materials (all materials) list at the beginning of each tabbed section 

showing “Specification Section”, “Material Item”, “Manufacturer’s Name and Catalog 

Number”, and all pertinent data. 

H. Provide samples were required in individual sections of this Division. 

I. Contractor agrees that Shop Drawing Submittals processed by the Architect are not Change 

Orders; that the purpose of Shop Drawing Submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to 

the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his 

understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install 

and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. 



J. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between Shop 

Drawings and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing Submittals 

are processed by the Architect, the design Drawings and Specifications shall control and 

shall be followed. 



A. All materials shall be new and bear manufacturer's name, model number, electrical 

characteristics and other identification. All equipment to be U.L. approved or listed by 

another testing agency approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Material and equipment shall be standard product of manufacturer regularly engaged in 

production of similar material for at least five years (unless specifically exempted) and shall 

be manufacturer's latest design. 

C. If the description of a product is in conflict with the product as specified in the catalog 

number, the description shall generally take precedence. Contact the Architect for 

clarification if this occurs. 

D. All equipment for essential or life safety systems must be rated and certified for the 

appropriate seismic design category or seismic use group for the installed location. 

2.2 DISCONNECTS: 

A. Safety and disconnect switches to be General duty quick-make, quick-break, dual rated, 

lockable, and of such electrical characteristics as required for the load served. Switches to 

have defeatable cover interlock. 

B. Fuse clips shall accept Class R or Class L fuses if required. Motor rated toggle switches 

equal to Square D Class 2510, type F with thermal overloads may be used as motor 

disconnects in dry locations. 

C. Disconnect switches required by code shall be installed whether or not specifically shown on 

the Drawings. Disconnect switches for refrigeration equipment and multiple motor HVAC 

equipment shall be fusible type. 

D. Safety and disconnect switches (fuse, non-fuse or circuit-breaker type) to be of same 

manufacturer as switchgear and panelboards. 

2.3 FUSES: 

A. Provide fuses as indicated on the drawings, sized per NEC, or as required by the equipment 

manufacturer, whichever provides maximum protection, for a fully operational system. 

B. All fuses shall be furnished of the same manufacturer. 

C. All fuses shall be installed by the electrical contractor at job-site and only when equipment is 

to be energized. Fuses shall not be installed during shipment. 

D. All fuses to be 200,000 AIC, Current-limiting, U.L., Time Delay, Dual-element Type as 

follows: 



For feeders 601 Amps to 6000 Amps: 

Class L, KRP-C, KLPC, & A4BQ 

For feeders 600 Amps and less: 

Class RKk-1 for 600 volt; LPS-RK, LLS-RK, & A6D-R 

Class RK-1 for 250 volt; LPN-RK, LLN-RK, & A2D-R 

Class J; JHC, JTD, & AJT 

For motor circuits beyond the main and subdistribution boards, 600 volt and below: 

Class RK-5 for 600 volt; FRS-R, FLS-R, & TRS-R 

Class RK-5 for 250 volt; FRN-R, FLN-R, & TR-R 

E. SPARE PARTS: Provide 10% spare fuses, but not less than 3 of any one size and type. 

F. Provide Spare Fuse Cabinet(s), #SFC, #LSFC, & ATFC as required. Install cabinet(s) in 

Main Electrical Room. 

G. Approved Manufacturers, with catalog numbers listed in order: Bussman, Littelfuse, Ferraz 

Shawmut. 

H. If the electrical contractor wishes to furnish materials other than those specified, a written 

request, along with a complete short circuit and selective coordination study, shall be 

submitted to the engineer for evaluation at least 8 days prior to the bid date. If the engineers 

evaluation indicates acceptance, a written addendum will be issued listing the other 

acceptable manufacturer. 

2.4 BOXES: 

A. Outlet and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with code requirements or as noted 


B. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, all outlet boxes for new work shall be 

galvanized steel knockout, outlet boxes. Gangable boxes are not acceptable. Outlet boxes 

shall not be smaller than 4" square and 1-1/2 inches in depth, unless otherwise noted. All 

outlet box covers, rings, or other fittings shall be galvanized. Boxes which are exposed to the 

weather shall be cast metal. Outlet boxes for phone and data outlets shall be 2.5" deep 

boxes. 

C. Outlet boxes shall be designed for the intended use, and shall be installed flush with finish 

surface lines or not more than 1/8 inch back and shall be level and plumb. Long screws with 

spaces or shims for mounting devices are not acceptable. No combustible materials shall be 

exposed to wiring at outlets. 

D. Outlet boxes on opposite sides of fire or sound isolating partitions shall have a minimum 

horizontal separation of 24". Back to back boxes are not permitted in any walls. 

E. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, floor boxes shall be Walker RFB4 with RAKMII 

flush access hatch with carpet trim. Where located in tile floors, provide FAKMII cover. 

Provide cast iron for on grade applications, and stamped steel for above grade applications. 

Provide shallow stamped still if suspended slab thickness is less than 5-1/2 inches. Provide 

plates for mounting of duplex receptacles and RF-45 communications outlets. If the number 

of communications outlets exceeds the quantity which fits in a standard plate, provide a 

custom plate to accommodate the increased quantity. 



I. Floor boxes which contain voice and data cable often are shown with an empty conduit 

running up a wall and stubbing into the ceiling. Where no conduit is shown, stub a 1" conduit 

out the bottom of the low voltage section of the box and into the ceiling space of the floor 

below. 


3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION METHODS: 

A. All items, articles, materials, and equipment specified under this Division shall be installed per 

the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Where the manufacturer’s instructions are in 

conflict with the directions provided elsewhere in this Contract, the Engineer shall be notified 

prior to beginning rough-in. 

B. Cutting or notching shall be kept to an absolute minimum and done when, and in a method 

approved by the Architect. Patch and correct finished surfaces damaged by electrical work. 

C. Relays, panels, cabinets and equipment shall be level and plumb and installed parallel with 

structural building lines. All equipment and enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps, openings, 

or distortions. Provide approved devices for closing all unused openings. 

D. Arrange circuit wiring as shown on the Drawings and do not alter or combine runs or 

homeruns without the specific approval of the Architect. Feeder runs shall not be recombined 

or altered. 

E. Contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing devices shall not be placed on 

walls which are common to occupied space. 

F. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like equipment which are found to be 

noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and 

shall be replaced. 

G. In general, the mounting heights shall be as noted on the Drawings, or as listed below, the 

Architectural Interior Elevations and drawing notes taking precedence. Where no heights are 

indicated, request clarification from the Architect. Consult the Architectural, Mechanical and 

Structural drawings to avoid conflicts prior to roughing-in and for exact locations. All 

dimensions are to the center of the device unless otherwise noted. Lighting dimensions are 

to the bottom of suspended fixtures and center of wall mounted fixtures unless otherwise 

noted. 

Light Switches 45 inches 

Convenience Receptacles 18 inches 

Panelboard top 72 inches 

Fire Alarm Signals 96 inches to top (but at least 6" below ceiling) 

Fire Call Stations 45 inches 

Data/Telephone Outlets 18 inches 

Receptacles and Outlets 8 inches above counter or 3 

Over Counters inches above backsplash, whichever is greater. 

H. Where raceways penetrate floors, ceilings, ducts, chases, and fire walls, provide fire stopping 

to maintain integrity of the fire assembly. Firestopping method shall be approved by the 

Code Authority having jurisdiction. 



I. All materials and equipment installed under this work shall be properly and adequately 

supported from the building structure except where ceiling construction or other provisions 

are specifically designed to support them. Support systems shall provide a safety factor of 

four. This shall apply to chains, hangers, anchors, clamps, screws, structural iron, and all 

other hardware and appurtenances associated with the support system. 

J. Rough-in for communications outlets for phone and data systems shall consist of a 4" square 

deep (4SD) box with a single gang mud ring. A minimum of 1 1/4 inch conduit will be used 

for all TELCOM location pathways, and ALL conduits will be routed in the ceiling space and 

not in the concrete slab. All conduits will be run from the location in one complete and 

continuous path to the cable tray and bonded to the cable tray as per ANSI/TIA/EIA 

Standards and the National Electric Code. Refer to data specification for additional details. 

K. Maintain the following minimum separations from voice and data cables. Power conduit - 

12", transformers and motors - 40", fluorescent lighting - 12". Coordinate with the voice and 

data installer to assure these separations are met. 

L. All new floor mounted electrical equipment including, but not limited to: Transformers, 

Switchboards, MCC’s, Switchgear, Switches, UPS, PDU’s and Generators; shall have 

concrete housekeeping pads installed. All Concrete pads shall be as indicated on the 

drawings or 4 inches high above finished floor, extending to 4 inches beyond the width and 

depth of the Equipment base; pad dimensions indicated on the drawings shall take 

precedence in all cases. 

3.3 LOW VOLTAGE WIRING METHODS: 

A. Provide conduit homeruns complete for all low voltage systems in the new addition and office 

remodel area. Plenum cabling will not be acceptable. 

B. Provide plenum rated cabling for fire alarm, access control, security, and PA system wiring in 

existing school areas with hard ceiling (classrooms, hallways, restrooms, storages, etc.). 

Refer to the drawings for details. Wiring to be concealed above ceiling and supported on the 

j-hooks. 

C. Provide a box, plaster ring, and conduit with insulated bushing from each wall or floor outlet 

to an accessible ceiling or crawl space. Conduit shall be minimum 1-1/4" for voice and/or 

data outlets, and sized as needed for other systems. Drawings notes shall take precedence. 

Raceways for phone and data cable shall be sized based on the number of cables in 

accordance with the division 17000 specification. 

D. Furnish and install all necessary sleeves and raceways to permit the installation of signal 

cables (specific attention is called to non-contiguous ceiling spaces) to the appropriate 

equipment termination point. Provide sleeves through all fire-rated walls and partitions. No 

outlets of any type shall be left without a raceway system or accessible ceiling path to their 

termination point. Verify that raceway sizes and quantities are appropriate and will have at 

least 50% spare capacity after all cables are initially installed. Provide at least one empty 

spare conduit to each area, sized to handle future needs. 

3.4 LABELING: 

A. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the 

function of each item of equipment provided under this work. 



B. Nameplates shall be 1/16 inch thick, laminated three-ply plastic, center-ply white, outer-ply 

black "Lamicoid" or equal. Letters shall be formed by engraving outer black ply, exposing 

white center-ply, and shall be minimum 5/8 inch high. Nameplates shall be secured with 

screws or pop rivets. 

C. Provide a master nameplate at the main distribution to identify the project, the Engineer and 

the date. Clearly label switchboards with engraved nameplates to identify each load served. 

D. Label all electrical contactors, relays, time switches, transformers, etc. with an engraved 

nameplate corresponding to the labeling in the main, subdistribution, or branch panel serving 

the device or apparatus. 

E. Provide typewritten branch panel schedules with protective clear, transparent covers 

accounting for every breaker installed. Use actual room designations assigned by name or 

number near completion of the work, and not the designations shown on drawings. 

F. Identify branch panels with engraved nameplate corresponding with distribution panel 

labeling. Mount labels inside door for flush panels, and on the face of the door for surface 

panels. No brand labels or other marking shall be on the outside of the panels. Where 

changes are made in existing panels, distribution boards, etc., provide new labeling and 

schedules to accurately reflect the changes. 

3.5 SAFETY: 

A. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction 

review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, 

techniques, sequences or procedures required for the contractor to perform the work. 

3.6 DEMOLITION: 

A. It is the intent of these specifications to require the contractor to make all necessary 

adjustments to the electrical system, required to meet code, and accommodate installation of 

the new and remodeled work. 

B. Remove all existing fixtures, clocks, switches, receptacles, raceways, and other electrical 

equipment and devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces 

scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless specifically shown as retained or 

relocated on the drawings. If existing walls, ceiling, floors, etc. are moved, extend existing 

devices, fixtures, and circuiting to the new location. 

C. Disconnect all existing mechanical equipment scheduled for removal or relocation. See 

mechanical drawings for scope of work. Remove abandoned raceways and cables. Relabel 

panels and motor control centers to reflect changes. 

D. If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed 

through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, new conduit 

and wire shall be provided to bypass the abandoned outlets. If existing conduits pass 

through or are mounted on partitions or ceilings which are being removed or remodeled, new 

conduit and wire shall be provided to route around the ceiling or wall and maintain service to 

the existing load. 

E. Extend circuiting and devices in all existing walls to be furred out. 



F. Locations of items shown on the drawings as existing are partially based on as-built and 

other drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the 

information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to 

accomplish the intent of the contract documents. The plans may show some demolition 

conditions, but are not intended to show all of them. 

G. All materials accumulated during the demolition process are the Owners property and shall 

be removed from the job site as directed by the Owner. If owner does not wish to salvage 

materials, contractor shall remove from jobsite and dispose, or recycle materials at 

contractor’s discretion, in a lawful manner. 

H. Where changes are made in existing panels, distribution boards, etc., provide new labeling 

and schedules to accurately reflect the changes. 

I. Demolish and dispose of hazardous materials in a lawful manner, such as PCB containing 

transformers or ballasts, mercury containing lamps, or materials containing lead. All costs for 

proper disposal shall be paid by the contractor unless specified elsewhere in the general 

conditions. 

3.7 POWER INTERRUPTIONS: 

A. Keep outages to occupied areas to a minimum and prearrange all outages with the Owner's 

representative and utilities involved. Requests for outages shall state the specific dates and 

hours and the maximum durations, with the outages kept to these specified times. When 

power interruptions will last longer than 5 minutes and cover more than 10% of the building, 

or affect public areas, they shall be performed on the weekends between 1 and 5 AM. 

B. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt 

operations, normal activities, building access, etc. Coordinate work with other crafts for 

proper scheduling. 

C. No circuits shall be turned off without prior approval from owner. Coordinate with the Owner 

any interruptions which affect the operation of the remaining portions of the facility. 

D. This contractor will be liable for any damages resulting from unscheduled outages or for 

those not confined to the preapproved times. Include all costs for overtime labor as 

necessary to maintain electrical services in the initial bid proposal. Temporary wiring and 

facilities, if used, shall be removed and the site left clean before final acceptance. Requests 

for outages must be submitted at least (5) days prior to intended shutdown time. 

E. Include in bid cost of minimum temporary power for Fire Alarm System, Security, 

Telephone/Data equipment and any other equipment designated by Owner, during time when 

primary building power has been interrupted. 

3.8 GROUNDING: 

A. Ground all electric equipment, raceways and enclosures in accordance with code rules and 

established safety practices. Provide a single main grounding point where grounding 

conductors from the Grounding Electrode System ground rods, ground grids, water pipes, 

main switchgear, etc. may be terminated. 

B. Concrete encased Ufer grounds shall be no less than 60 feet in length. Bare Copper 

conductors shall be placed no closer than two inches of the bottom of an exterior wall footing 



and there shall be no plastic sheeting or other insulating material placed between the 

footing and earth. Bond to re-bar at minimum 10' intervals. 

C. Grounds shall be installed where accessible for future inspection and servicing. Where 

ground connections are made underground or in inaccessible locations, they shall be made 

using an exothermic weld process, Cadweld or equivalent, or Ampact pressure connectors. 

D. Install grounding conductors in approved metallic raceways unless specifically shown or 

specified otherwise. Bond at each end and at all intervening boxes and enclosures between 

the service equipment and grounding electrode. 

E. No. 8 and smaller grounding conductors shall have green insulation. No. 6 and larger shall be 

marked with green colored tape at each end and at every box, panel, switchboard, or point 

where conductor is accessible. 

F. All isolated ground buses shall be used only for conductors from isolated ground receptacles. 

Do not bond conduit or enclosures to isolated ground buses. All isolated ground conductors 

shall be run back to the main ground point for the separately derived system which serves 

them. 

G. Provide a #6 grounding conductor to all telephone, data processing and sound system 

terminals throughout project unless noted otherwise on the plans. Provide a wall mounted 

busbar assembly equivalent to Square D Class 1630-PK15GTA/PKGTAB. 

3.9 TVSS (TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION) INSTALLATIONS 

A. When TVSS units are specified, they are to be shipped with complete installation instructions 

which are to be followed in detail. The manufacturer’s representative is always to be 

contacted and is to supervise the TVSS installation. 

B. Supplemental installation information is as follows: 

1. Use the breaker space closest to the neutral bus. Nipple the suppressor to the panel 

where the suppressor can be installed so as to keep both the hot leads and the 

neutral lead as short and straight as possible from the suppressor to the breakers 

and the neutral bus. 

2. The best performance is achieved with the shortest leads and neutral. All efforts 

within the code should be used to minimize the lead lengths. Ideally the leads should 

be less than eight inches long. Each inch of lead above six inches will add 

approximately 20 volts to the quoted let-through voltage. Cut the leads down to the 

shortest size that will allow installation. 

3. If the neutral bus is out of reach of the leads, then a #4 AWG conductor is to be run 

from the remote neutral bus to a lug near the suppressor, and the lead from the 

suppressor should be cut as short as possible. 

4. The ground is to be connected to the case of the panel (equipment ground only). Do 

not connect the suppressor ground wire to an isolated ground (IG) bus. 

3.10 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: 

A. The location and method for connecting to each item of equipment shall be verified prior to 

roughing-in. The voltage and phase of each item of equipment shall be checked before 



connecting. Motor rotations shall be made in the proper direction. Pump motors are not to 

be test run until liquid is in the system and proper lubrication to all bearings in unit is checked. 

B. Conduit, wire and circuit breaker sizes for mechanical, elevator and similar equipment are 

based on the equipment ratings of one manufacturer. The equipment actually furnished may 

have entirely different electrical characteristics. Conduit, wire, circuit breakers, disconnects, 

etc. shall not be ordered or installed until exact electrical requirements are obtained. 

Responsibility for this coordination rests with the Contractor. 

3.11 SEISMIC BRACING: 

A. Furnish and install all seismic bracing of equipment, feeders, lighting fixtures, and other 

electrical items in accordance with prevailing codes. Refer to ASCE 7-02, section 9.6 for 

calculation methods. Provide and submit the required designs, calculations, certifications, 

and stamped drawings to the authority having jurisdiction and obtain their approval prior to 

installation or fabrication. 

B. Where conduit, cable trays, or busducts are attached to structures where they cross a 

seismic isolation interface, the electrical components shall be designed to accommodate the 

seismic relative displacement. 

3.12 PAINTING: 

A. All electrical equipment and conduit exposed in finished areas and on exterior walls are to be 

painted to match surrounding surfaces. 

B. Contractor shall coordinate the timing of painting requirements. 

C. Refer to Architectural specifications for methods and materials. 

3.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: 

A. Maintenance of Documents: 

1. Maintain at Jobsite, One Record Copy of: Contract Drawings, Specifications, 

Addenda, Reviewed Shop Drawings, Change Orders, Other Modifications to Contract 

and Field Test Records. 

2. Keep apart from documents used for construction. 

3. Keep documents available at all times for inspection by Architect. 

B. Recording: 

1. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD." 

2. Keep record documents current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required 

information has been recorded. 

3. Contract Drawings, legibly mark to record actual construction; including but not 

limited to the following: 



C. As-Built Submittals: 

a. Depths of various elements; locations of underground items, with dimensions 

to building walls and corners; changes of dimensions and details; changes 

made by Addendum, Field Orders or Change Order. 

b. Specifications and Addenda; Legibly mark each Section to record changes 

made by Addendum, Field Order or Change Order. 

1. At completion of project, transfer changes, addenda items, variations from drawings, 

exact routes of all feeders and service conduits, and locations of stubbed conduits to 

clean new prints and specifications which will be supplied by the Architect and deliver 

to the Architect as "As-reported Record" drawings. Include dimensions to all buried or 

concealed conduits to permanent structures. 

2. Refer to Section 16470, Paragraph 1.4, for as-built submittal requirements for Voice 

and Data Wiring. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 

3.14 WARRANTIES: 

1. At completion of project, prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals with operation 

and Maintenance Data, contractors warranties, and copies of approved electrical 

permits. Include corrected copies of original submittals and shop drawings. 

2. See Division 1 for additional requirements. 

A. Provide a minimum 1 year warranty on all electrical equipment, devices, labor, and work by 

Division 16 whether specified or not. 

B. Provide warranties greater than 1 year as specified in other sections where stated. The 

warranty requirement most stringent shall be used where conflicts arise. 

C. The systems listed below require warranties exceeding the minimum warranty: 

1. TVSS; 5 years - refer to Section 16478. 

2. Lighting; 5 years for ballasts - refer to Section 16500 

3. Occupancy Sensed Lighting Control; 5 years - refer to Section 16550. 

4. Division 17000: Voice and Data Wiring Workmanship and Parts; 25 years - refer to 


D. Provide copies of all warranties to the owner upon completion of the project. 

3.15 COMPLETION: 

A. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where 

only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in 

proper operation free of faults, shorts or unintentional grounds. Demonstrate system in the 

presence of the Architect, the Owner or their representative when requested. 



3.16 FINAL OBSERVATION: 

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that: 

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 

2. Contractor has inspected Project for compliance with Contract Documents. 

3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 

4. Equipment and Systems have been tested and are operational. 

5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection. 

B. Architect will make final inspection as soon as possible after receipt of Certification. 

C. Should Architect consider that work is finally complete in accordance with Contract Document 

requirements, Contractor shall make Contract Closeout submittals. 

D. Should Architect consider that work is not finally complete: 

1. He will so notify Contractor, stating reasons. 

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy deficiencies, and send second 

written notice to Architect certifying that work is complete. 

3. Architect will reinspect work. 

E. The Architect will make two final inspections. The first will determine deficiencies and errors 

in the work and the second will determine whether or not the noted deficiencies and errors 

have been satisfactorily corrected. 

F. If additional inspections are required because of the Contractor's failure to complete the 

deficiencies and errors prior to the second inspection, costs for the successive inspections 

will be back-charged to the Contractor by the Owner, who, in turn, will reimburse the 

Architect. Charges will be based as follows: 

1. Architect time at current billing rates. 

2. Travel time, and all other expenses incurred in making inspections. 

G. Contractor to provide one (1) journeyman, tools, meters, instruments and other test 

equipment required by Architect. Contractor to remove and replace trims, covers, fixtures, 

etc., for Architect to review and test materials, systems, methods and workmanship. 

(Example: Removing switchboard and panel covers to take voltage/amp readings, review 

connections and wire size, etc.) 




SECTION 16115 – CABLE TRAY 



A. Provide a complete cable tray system as shown and specified including tray, tray connectors, 

supports, brackets, vertical and/or horizontal offsets, grounding and hardware for a complete 

system. 

1.2 RELATED WORK: 

A. Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods. 

B. Section 16130 Raceways. 


A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. 

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 

C. Submit manufacturer's maintenance and repair data under provisions of Section 01700. 

D. Submit a complete cable tray layout drawn at 1/4-inch=1 foot scale minimum including 

suspension points, offsets, fire-wall penetrations and other essential information. Layout 

shall be coordinated with mechanical, plumbing and fire protection contractors to insure that 

access to the tray is unobstructed for its entire length. Location of tray shall be dimensioned 

and closed obstructions shown and noted. Drawing shall include a typical corridor sections, 

showing the tray location in relation to work of other trades. Submit four prints of tray layout 

to architect for approval within six weeks of award of bid. 


2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Cablofil EZ Tray series, B-Line or approved. 

B. Ladder Racks - Chatsworth Products Inc., Homaco 

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 

2.2 WIRE-BASKET CABLE TRAYS 

A. Continuous rigid welded steel wire mesh system. Wire mesh shall be 2 in. by 4 in. grid. UL 

listed. See drawings for cable tray width. 

B. Material: Carbon steel with electro-plated zinc galvanized finish. Designed to support a 

minimum of 50 pounds per linear foot when supported on 8-foot centers, without any 


CABLE TRAY 16115-1

deflection exceeding 1/100 of the span. All edges of trays, rungs, and fittings shall be 

rounded and smooth. Corners shall have a 12" inside radius. 

C. Tray systems shall be supported by minimum 1/4-inch threaded steel rods fastened to 

connectors with 1/4-inch washer and nut. Right-angle connectors or T-connectors shall be 

used at 90 degree bends and crossings. 

1. Cable tray shall be supported maximum 8-foot on center. 

2. Cable tray support shall be via either wall brackets or trapeze support of connectors. 

Center hung support of the tray is prohibited. 

D. Accessories: Provide dropouts at terminal locations. 

E. At all rated and non-rated wall penetrations provide a permanent fire stop system as 

described below. 

1. The system shall consist of reusable heat expanding pillows or bags. 

2. The fire stop material shall be approved by Factory Mutual System and shall be 

Underwriters Laboratories classified and tested for use with both steel and aluminum 

cable tray. The penetration seal method and material shall have an Underwriters 

Laboratories fire rating equal to the wall or floor in which the openings are located. 

3. The penetration seal must allow future changes, such as addition or removal of 

cables, with no damage to the integrity of the seal. 

4. The seal method shall provide an immediate seal with no cure time. 

5. The penetration seal must be unaffected by atmospheric conditions, water exposure 

or constant high humidity. 

6. The fire seal shall be installed strictly according to the manufacturer/distributor 

published instructions. 

2.3 LADDER RACKS (IN TELECOM CLOSETS ONLY): 

A. Ladder rack as described below shall be used only in telecommunication rooms and closets. 

B. Provide all appropriate accessories including dropouts at terminal locations. 

C. Corners shall have a minimum 12" inside radius. Tee intersections do not need to be 

radiused. 

D. Ladder rack shall be firmly attached to the top of each free standing equipment rack that it 

passes over. 


3.1 INSTALLATION: 

A. Install cable tray to maintain 6 inches minimum clearance at top and sides of tray. 

Coordinate layout with work of other trades in advance of installation to provide required 


CABLE TRAY 16115-2

access with minimum number of offsets in tray runs. If during construction as built conditions 

occur, such that cable tray becomes inaccessible for any reason, Division 16 contractors 

shall submit immediately to the architect: 

1. The type and location of the obstruction including the trades involved. 

2. The means proposed by Division 16 contractor to maintain accessibility. 

Contractor shall proceed only if his proposal is approved. If the Contractor proceeds without 

approval, the cable tray shall be relocated as directed by architect at contractors expense. 

B. Install all cable tray in an accessible and visible-from-floor location. Provide a diagonal 

seismic restraint brace at maximum 15 foot intervals. 

C. Install tray and all accessories to provide electrical continuity throughout system. Provide flat 

braided aluminum straps at questionable grounding connections. 

D. Hanger rods shall be fastened to structure in an approved manner. Pullout resistance shall 

have a safety factor of 4. 

E. Follow manufacturer's instructions and details for separation of dissimilar metals including 

steel suspension rod to aluminum splice connectors or cable tray. Provide nylon bushings at 

joints, vinyl sleeve at hanger rods. 

F. Maintain a minimum 12" spacing from light fixtures and electrical conduits. Maintain a 40" 

spacing from electric motors. Coordinate tray location with conduit layout and motor 

locations. 

G. Provide at all penetrations a permanent fire stop system. The system shall consist of 

reusable heat expanding pillows or bags. The fire stop material shall be approved by Factory 

Mutual System and shall be Underwriters Laboratories classified. The penetration seal 

method and material shall have an Underwriters Laboratories fire rating equal to the wall or 

floor in which the openings are located. The penetration seal must allow future changes, 

such as addition or removal of cables, with no damage to the integrity of the seal. If the wall 

or floor penetration is for cable tray passage, the fire stop material shall have been tested by 

Underwriters Laboratories for use with both steel and/or aluminum cable tray. The seal 

method shall provide an immediate seal with no cure time. The penetration seal must be 

unaffected by atmospheric conditions, water exposure or constant high humidity. The fire 

seal shall be installed strictly according to the manufacturer/distributor published instructions. 



CABLE TRAY 16115-3


CABLE TRAY 16115-4

SECTION 16120 – WIRES & CABLES 



A. Provide all wires and cables as herein specified and shown on the associated drawings. 


A. All wire and cable shall conform to Code and shall meet all ASTM specifications. 



A. No. 10 and 12 AWG conductors shall be Type "THHN" insulated, stranded or soft drawn solid 

copper. No. 8 AWG and larger conductors shall be Type "THHN" insulated, soft drawn, Class 

B stranded copper. Minimum conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG unless otherwise noted. 

B. Where adverse conductor exposure exists, code approved insulation suitable for the 

conditions encountered shall be used unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 

C. Wire and cable shall be new, shall have grade of insulation, voltage and manufacturer's name 

permanently marked on outer covering at regular intervals and shall be delivered in complete 

coils or reels with identifying size and insulation tags. 

2.2 ALUMINUM AND/OR METAL CLAD (MC) CABLING OPTIONS: 

A. Aluminum and MC Cabling Not acceptable – Provide Copper Only Feeder Wire. 

2.3 COLOR CODE: 

A. All wire shall be fully colored in sizes 12 and 10 AWG, and color banded at each end and at 

all junction and pull boxes for size 8 AWG and larger. 

B. Color Code throughout the project shall be: 

1. 480Y/277V System 

Phase A Brown 

Phase B Orange 

Phase C Yellow 

Neutral Grey 

Equipment Ground Green 

2. 208Y/120V System 

Phase A Black 

Phase B Red 

Phase C Blue 


WIRES & CABLES Section 16120-1


3.1 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS: 

Neutral White 

Equipment Ground Green 

Isolated Ground Green w/yellow stripe #12 & #10 

Green and Yellow bands #8 and up 

A. Splices are to be made up complete promptly after wire installation. Single wire pigtails shall 

be provided for fixture and device connections. Wirenuts may be used for fixture wire 

connections to single wire circuit conductor pigtails. 

B. Splices shall utilize Scotch "Hyflex" or "Ideal" wing nut connector installed properly. Splices 

for No. 8 and larger wires shall be made with mechanically applied pressure type connectors. 

All taped joints shall be with "Scotch 33+" or equal, applied in half-lap layers without 

stretching to deform. 

C. Insulation shall be removed with a stripping tool designed specifically for that purpose. A 

pocket knife is not an acceptable tool. All conductors shall be left nick-free. 

D. Thermoplastic insulated wire and cable shall not be installed or handled in temperatures 

below +14 degrees F (-10 C). Cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire and cable may be 

installed to -40 degrees F (-40 C). 


A. Provide dedicated neutral for each branch circuit. Use of the shared neutral for multiwire 

branch circuit is not allowed. 



WIRES & CABLES Section 16120-2

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS 



A. Provide all raceways, wireways and associated fittings as herein specified and shown on the 

associated drawings. 

1.2 APPLICATION: 

A. Electric metallic tubing (EMT), galvanized rigid conduit (GRC), intermediate metal conduit 

(IMC), flexible metal conduit, and PVC conduit may be used. 

B. Schedule 40 PVC conduit may only be used below grade and below slabs on grade. PVC 

may not be used above grade. Conduits larger than 1 inch shall be run below the slab. 

C. GRC and IMC shall be used in locations subject to mechanical injury and for service conduit 

under buildings or concrete slabs. 

D. EMT may be used only in dry and protected locations. 

E. Flexible metal conduit will be permitted only where flexibility is necessary. Exceptions are 

connections to recessed light fixtures and work fished into existing concealed dry locations, 

and wood frame construction. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection to all 

equipment subject to movement or vibration such as motors and transformers. 

F. Drawing notes requiring a specific type of raceway shall take precedence over the 


G. Surface metal raceways equal to Wiremold (700 series unless noted otherwise) may be used 

only where specifically called for on the drawings or in the specifications. Such installation 

shall be directed by Architect. 

H. Electrical wiring shall be in U.L. approved raceways and enclosures throughout. 

I. 4" and larger conduits intended for use on primary services and communications services 

shall have minimum 48" radius sweep on all bends. 


2.1 FITTINGS: 

A. GRC and IMC shall be coupled and terminated with threaded fittings. Ends shall be bushed 

with insulating bushings. 

B. Connectors and couplings for EMT shall be steel concrete tight set screw type with insulated 

throats on connectors. Connectors larger than 1-1/4 inch shall be insulating bushing. 

2.2 CONDUIT 


RACEWAYS 16130-1

A. All conduits shall be ! inch minimum trade size. Exception: Fire Alarm wiring could be 

installed in the "” conduit if in compliance with NEC for conduit fill ratio. TV wiring could be 

installed in the "” conduit if there is only one cable in the conduit. Two or more TV cables 

should be installed in minimum !” conduit. 

B. Provide PVC conduit (where installed below grade or below slab on grade) in one inch 

minimum size. 



A. Provide pull boxes where shown or required to limit the number of bends in any run to not 

more than three 90 degree bends. Use code gauge galvanized sheet steel boxes of code 

required size with removable covers, installed so that covers will be accessible after work is 

completed. Verify with the Architect any locations in finished areas. 

B. Conceal all wiring in finished spaces. Exposed raceways shall be parallel to structural lines. 

C. Support suspended feeder conduits by metal ring or trapeze hangers with threaded steel 

rods. If a large number of suspended feeders are grouped together, the contractor shall 

review the layout with the structural engineer and obtain approval for the proposed layout. 

D. Conduit shall be adequately braced for Seismic Restraint, as required per ASCE 7-02, 

Section 9.6, latest edition. 

E. Expansion Joints: 

1. All conduits crossing expansion joints where cast in concrete shall be provided with 

expansion-deflection fittings, equivalent to OZ/Gedney AXDX, installed per 

manufacturers recommendations. 

2. All conduits three inches and larger where not cast in concrete shall be rigidly 

secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint with 

an expansion-deflection fitting across the joint, equivalent to OZ/Gedney AXDX, 

installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 

3. All conduits less than three inches where not cast in concrete shall be provided with 

junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of the expansion joint, connected 

together with 15 inches of slack (a minimum of 15 inches longer than the straight line 

length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. In lieu of this 

flexible conduit, an expansion-deflection fitting, as indicated for conduits three inch 

and larger, may be installed. 

F. Seismic Joints: 

1. No conduits cast in concrete shall be allowed to cross a seismic joint. 

2. All conduits shall be provided with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of 

the seismic joint, connected together with 15 inches of slack (a minimum of 15 inches 

longer than the straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding 


RACEWAYS 16130-2

jumper. Prior to installation, verify with Architect that the 15 inches is adequate for 

the designed movement, and if not, increase this length as required. 

G. Conduit stubbed from a concrete slab or wall to serve an outlet under a table or to supply a 

machine shall have a rigid conduit coupling flush with the surface of the slab. Provide plug 

where conduit is to be used in future. 

H. Conduits in above grade slabs shall be located in the middle of the slab. The maximum size, 

spacing, and location of conduits in post-tensioned slabs shall be subject to approval by the 

structural engineer. Conduits larger than one inch shall not be run in slabs. 

I. Provide a ground wire sized per code in all conduit. 

J. Where PVC conduit is below building slab on grade, conduit must be installed to be at least 2 

inches below the slab. Provide 2 inches of sand or pea sized gravel to cover conduit. Protect 

conduit from vehicle traffic and construction traffic prior to concrete pour. Conduit poured 

inside the slab for slab on grade construction is not acceptable. 

K. Elbows larger than 30 degrees and one inch shall be galvanized rigid conduit, wrapped with 

PVC tape. 

L. Provide a ground wire sized per code in all PVC conduits. Conductor quantities indicated in 

conduits do not include ground wires unless otherwise noted. 

M. Provide trenching, backfilling, compaction, re-paving or other site restoration as required by 

the work done in this division. Minimum trench depth shall be 24" unless otherwise noted. 

N. Install a detectable 6 inch wide yellow vinyl tape with letter "Caution: Buried Electrical Line 

Below" 18 inches above all buried service conduit and wire not under structures. 

O. Backfill material for all trenches under paved areas shall be coarse sand or crushed rock, 

installed in layers not to exceed eight inches and compacted to 95% of maximum density at 

optimum moisture content to preclude subsequent settlement. Compaction by water method. 

The top 18 inches of trenches in landscaped or grassed areas shall be backfilled with native 

soil and tamped. 

P. Conduits piercing a building waterproof membrane shall be provided with flanges, using two 

neoprene washers, one washer on each side of membrane, between each flange and 

membrane. 

Q. All underground conduits which enter the building shall be sloped to drain away from the 

building and shall be water sealed to prevent moisture from passing through the conduit into 

the building. All joints to be threaded and taped or glued to prevent entry of water into the 

conduits. 

R. All underground conduits entering the building shall be poured-in-place, or provided with 

watertight conduit sleeves and rubber seals, Link-seal system by Thunderline Corporation or 

equivalent. 

S. Raceways shall be left clean and free of debris. 

T. Provide a pull string in all empty conduits. 


RACEWAYS 16130-3

U. All conduit leaving building envelope (e.g. site lighting, roof mounted HVAC requirement, etc.) 

to be 0.75" minimum. 



RACEWAYS 16130-4

SECTION 16140 – SWITCHES & RECEPTACLES 



A. Provide all switches, receptacles, and other devices as herein specified and shown on the 

associated drawings. 



A. Bryant, Arrow-Hart, Eagle, LaGrande, General Electric, Leviton, Hubbell are acceptable. 


A. The following list of wiring devices covers the most commonly specified items and establishes 

the grade of device. Should the Drawings indicate a device other than those listed herein 

without reference to catalog number, such device shall be of the same grade and 

manufacturer as like devices. 

Single Pole Switches Hubbell #1221 

Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp Hubbell #5362 

Where required by Code and/or indicated on drawings 

Safety Duplex Receptacle Hubbell #HBLSG 63H 

Duplex Receptacles-Isolated Ground Hubbell #5362-IG, Orange 

Switch with Pilot LaGrande #20AC1 

Dimmers Lightolier, Neptune Momentum series 

B. All wiring devices and plates to be specification grade. Receptacles shall be mounted 

vertically with the ground pin down unless otherwise noted. 

C. Install Safety Duplex receptacles in all kindergarten rooms. 

D. Color of Devices and Plates: 

1. Devices: White, unless noted otherwise. 

2. Plates: 302 stainless steel, unless noted otherwise. 

3. Finish and material of data/phone outlets to match finish and material of the power 

outlets. 

4. Receptacles fed by emergency circuits shall have red devices with "EMERGENCY 

POWER" engraved in white letters on a red nylon plate with panel and circuit 

designation engraved on plate. 


SWITCHES & RECEPTACLES 16140-1

E. Flush floor receptacles to be duplex and to have brass or aluminum, hinged flap lids. Provide 

carpet flanges in carpeted floors. (See 16050, 2.4, E.) 

F. Wet location and/or weatherproof receptacles shall be in a weatherproof enclosure, the 

integrity of which is not affected when the receptacle is in use (attachment plug cap inserted), 

UL labeled and listed “Suitable For Wet Locations While In Use”. Provide enclosure with 

stainless steel screws, gasket between enclosure and mounting surface and between cover 

and base, clear impact resistant UV stabilized polycarbonate as manufactured by TayMac 

Corporation or accepted equivalent. 


3.1 GENERAL: 

A. Provide a separate GFI type receptacle for each receptacle noted on plans as GFI. Standard 

receptacles fed from an up-stream GFI type receptacle are not acceptable. 

B. Install outlets and switches in a neat manner. 

C. Extend mudrings to flush out with surrounding wood panels and walls. 

D. Faceplates, devices, and boxes shall be square with floor, and door lines. 

E. Devices to be installed flush with faceplate. 

3.2 LABELING: 

A. Where switches control remote lighting or power outlets, or where switches in the same outlet 

(two or more) serve different purposes, such as light, power, intercom, etc. or different areas, 

such as corridor and outside, furnish engraved plates with 1/8 inch black letters indicating 

function of each switch or outlet. 



SWITCHES & RECEPTACLES 16140-2

SECTION 16425 – SWITCHBOARDS 600 VOLTS & BELOW 



A. Furnish and install the service entrance switchboard and distribution switchboards as herein 

specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings. 


A. Submit complete descriptive shop drawings indicating bus arrangement, overcurrent devices, 

labeling, dimensions, ratings and other pertinent data. 



A. Square D, General Electric, Siemens, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse 

B. Requests for substitution of other products will be considered if submitted in accordance with 


2.2 EQUIPMENT: 

A. Each distribution board section shall be free standing and have an open bottom. Top and 

bottom conduit area is to be clearly shown and dimensioned on the shop drawings. All front 

plates used for mounting meters, selector switches or other front mounted devices shall be 

hinged with all wiring installed and laced with flexibility at the hinged side. All closure plates 

shall be screw removable and small enough for easy handling by one man. The paint finish 

shall be gray enamel over a rust-inhibiting phosphate primer. 

B. Overcurrent devices shall be of size and type as indicated on the drawings. Series rated 

equipment will not be permitted as a substitute for the interrupting capacities stated on the 

one line diagram. 

C. Main lugs shall be tool applied compression type if aluminum wire is used. The bus bars 

shall be rigidly braced for 100,000 amps and sized as indicated on the drawings. 

D. The end section is to have bus bar provisions for future addition of a switchboard section. 

The provisions shall include the bus bars installed to the extreme side of the switchboard and 

prepunched to facilitate future bolted splice plates. 

E. Where fusible switches are indicated, they shall have Class R or L fuse clips. Fusible 

switches shall be of the positive, quick-make, quick-break type and external operating handle 

shall be suitable for padlocking in the "OFF" position. All units shall be dead front. Provide a 

spare fuse cabinet. 

F. Current limiting circuit breakers shall interrupt the current flow within a quarter cycle. 


SWITCHBOARDS 600 VOLT & BELOW 16425-1

G. Operating handles shall be mounted on the unit doors and interlocked with the overcurrent 

device to prevent opening of the door when the switch is "ON". A concealed "defeater" shall 

be provided so that authorized personnel may open door without interrupting power. 

H. All extra space in distribution boards shall be bussed for future use. 

I. Prior to bidding, confirm that equipment will fit within the physical space allocated on the 

drawings for switchgear. Do not attempt to use equipment which does not fit within the space 

allotted. Do not use space identified for future use. 



A. Distribution boards shall be free from surface and finish defects, and cleaned of dust and 

construction debris. 

B. All nameplates, labels, screws, bolts, or other hardware shall be in place prior to acceptance. 

C. Prior to installation of switchgear and transformers, layout the electrical rooms and obtain 

approval of the layout from the code authority having jurisdiction. 



SWITCHBOARDS 600 VOLT & BELOW 16425-2

SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS 



A. Provide all branch circuit panelboards as herein specified and shown on the drawings. 


A. Submit complete and descriptive shop drawings indicating dimensions and compliance with 

the specifications herein. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 



A. Square D, Siemens, General Electric, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse 



2.2 EQUIPMENT: 

A. Panels shall be factory pre-assembled using bolt-on circuit breakers, equivalent to Square D 

NQOD series. Separate feeder lugs shall be provided for each feeder conductor. 

B. Breakers in branch panelboards shall be not less than 3/4 inch on centers. Each breaker 

shall be securely fastened to prevent movement and trims shall fit neatly and tightly to the 

breaker assembly. Two and three pole breakers shall be single breaker assembly rather than 

two or three single pole breakers with the handles tied together externally. 

C. Panel finish shall be a flat, light gray finish suitable for painting over or being left with factory 

finish. Flush mounted panels in finished walls shall be painted to match wall, paint and paint 

preparation to be as specified by Architect. Panel covers to be painted off wall, then installed 

over painted wall surface. Trims to be separately packed and protected from scratching and 

marring. Refer to labeling requirements in 16050 Basic Materials and Methods. 

D. Panelboard trims to have concealed trim screws and door hinges, and a flush stainless steel 

cylinder lock with catch and coil spring loaded door pull equivalent to Square D "Mono-Flat". 

All panels shall be keyed alike. 

E. Where grounding conductors are shown or specified, provide each panel and distribution 

center with grounding bus to which the grounding conductors shall be connected, each 

having its own terminal or lug. 

F. Where Isolated Grounding (IG) conductors are shown or specified, provide each panel and 

distribution center with an Isolated Grounding bus to which the IG conductors shall be 

connected, each having its own terminal or lug. The IG grounding system shall be fully 

separated and insulated from the IG receptacle to the System Grounding Electrode. Provide 


PANELBOARDS 16470-1

a second ground bus bonded to the panelboard can for termination of conduit and equipment 

bonding conductors. 

G. Panelboards rated 400 amps or less shall not exceed 6" depth. 

H. Provide fully rated equipment greater than or equal to the interrupting capacities indicated on 

the drawings. 

I. Provide all copper bus bars, 100% rated neutral bus, ground bus and isolated ground bus 

where indicated. Lugs shall be rated for copper only, CU-AL rated lugs shall not be allowed. 



A. Breaker handle guards shall be provided on each circuit supplying obviously constant loads 

to prevent accidental shutting off. Such loads are refrigeration, contactor controlled circuits, 

freeze protection, etc. 

B. Prior to bidding, confirm that equipment will fit within the physical space allocated on the 

drawings for panelboards. Do not attempt to use equipment which does not fit within the 

space allotted. Do not use space identified for future use. 

C. Furnish and install three spare one inch conduits from the top of each recessed panel, to an 

accessible point above the ceiling. 

D. Care shall be taken to terminate ground conductors from isolated ground receptacles only on 

the isolated ground bus in a panel. Do not terminate bonding conductors on an isolated 

ground bus. 



PANELBOARDS 16470-2

SECTION 16475 – MOTOR CONTROLLERS 



A. Extent of motor controller and starter work is indicated by drawings, schedules and specified 

herein. 

B. Work includes the complete installation, electrical connections, testing, and commissioning of 

starters and combination disconnect/starters. 

C. Verify compatibility of motor controllers and starters with motors supplied under Division 15. 

Review Division 15 specifications, plans, schedules, etc., to issue compatibility. 


Comply with NEC, and NEMA Standards as applicable to wiring methods, construction and 

installation of motor controllers, starters, and combination disconnects/starters. Provide complete 

packaged units which have been UL-listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory or ETL Testing 

Laboratories, Inc. Note: The entire unit shall carry the label, not just components. 


A. Submit complete and descriptive shop drawings indicating dimensions and compliance with 

the specifications herein. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of 

general conditions. 

B. Submit dimensions of all units. 

C. Equipment list and ratings: list motors to be controlled, with motor identification, function and 

location, starter characteristics, size, voltage, phase and current ratings, control equipment 

and accessories as specified, scheduled or noted. 

D. Coordinate all motor starter sizes and requirements with Division 15 Contractor prior to 

submittal for approval. 



A. MOTOR CONTROL CENTER COMBINATION STARTERS APPROVED 

MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products 

manufactured by the following manufacturer: 

Square D 

GE 

Siemens 

Cutler Hammer 


MOTOR CONTROLLERS Section 16475-1

B. COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECTS – STAND ALONE UNITS: Subject to compliance 

with requirements, provide products manufacturered by one of the following: 

Square D 

GE 

Siemens 

Cutler Hammer 

2.2 COMBINATION STARTERS 

A. Starters: combination type with fused disconnect switch with time delay dual element, 3 pole, 

UL Class RK-5 fuses as scheduled; full voltage, non-reversing magnetic starter unless 

otherwise shown or noted. Provide quick make, quick break disconnect. Starters shall have 

electronic resettable thermal overload elements for all three phases with settings sized for the 

actual final motor nameplate full load current. Minimum starter size shall be NEMA 1. For 

sizes 4 and above, provide electronic soft start system starter. 

B. Each starter shall include: 

a. Hand-Off-Automatic selector switch unless otherwise shown or noted. HOA 

switch to be of a type that is field convertible to "On/Off" or "Auto/Off". 

b. A thermal element reset button. 

c. A red transformer type pilot light to indicate when the motor is running. 

d. A 120V holding coil. 

e. A 480/120V control transformer with primary and secondary fuse protection; 

of sufficient VA to handle the holding coil and associated controls. One leg 

of the transformer secondary shall be grounded. 

f. Two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts. 

g. A nameplate engraved with motor identification and Horsepower, Nameplate, 

HOA switch, reset button and pilot light shall be mounted in cubicle door. A 

door mounted keypad display with indicators, allowing user to program 

C. Each electronic solid state starter shall include the items indicated above, plus the following 

items: 

a. Ramp time, type of start, type of step. Display to show motor current, power 

factor, and fault status. 

b. Phase loss protection and phase reversal protection. 

1. The solid state starter shall utilize an 18 pulse converter design, to maintain minimal 

AC line distortion and low harmonics. 

2. The Solid State Starter and all components shall be rated to 100,000 AIC. 

4. The starter shall have an adjustable ramp start of 0.5 to 180 seconds, and an 

adjustable current limit of 0% to 85% of Locked Rotor Current. The starter shall also 

have an adjustable Soft Stop from 0 to 60 seconds. 



5. The starter shall have fault isolation, to automatically disconnect the power supply to 

protect the motor in the event of a semi-conductor fault. 

6. The starter shall be equipped with an Electronic Timing Relay, adjustable from 0.1 to 

60 seconds, to delay the start of the motor. 

7. Provide an elapsed Time Meter on door to indicate pump run time. 

D. Finish: Fronts shall be made of cleaned phosphatized steel with rust-inhibiting primer and 

electro-deposited baked enamel finish, manufacturer's standard color. 



A. Motor Controllers and Starters shall be installed level, plumb and anchored to the mounting 

surface in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The equipment shall be protected 

if stored during construction. 

B. Seismic restraints: Provide anchor bolts, angle irons and fasteners to attach the combination 

starters rigidly to the building structure per IBC seismic requirements. 

C. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free 

mechanical movement. 

D. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 

E. Clean interiors of motor controllers and starters prior to energization. 

3.2 TESTING: 

A. When all motors are connected and the pre-energizing tests have been completed, the 

contractor shall operate the equipment to demonstrate that all control equipment and 

overcurrent protective devices perform as specified. Any deficiencies found shall be 

corrected and tests repeated. All test results and dates shall be recorded and submitted to 

the Engineer and the Owner's Representative with statement certifying that the equipment is 

safe and ready for use. 






SECTION 16478 – TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS 



A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the 

installation of the Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) System components at 

locations shown on the plans. 


A. The TVSS shall be UL Listed as a Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor, category C, UL 1449 

Second Edition (including Sections 34 and 37.3, effective February 7, 2007). All UL 1449 test 

data shall be provided with submittal. 

B. The TVSS shall bear suppressed voltage rating issued by UL, and the units shall be tested in 

accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Category C, 20kV/10kA, 8x20 uS and 1.2x50 uS 

Combination Waveform and .5uS - 100kHz Ring Wave with a minimum of 10 sequential 

impulses delivered directly into the TVSS at a maximum of sixty second intervals for each 

waveform. 

C. Manufacturers Qualifications: Only firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of TVSS 

products for category C (ANSI/IEEE C62.41), and whose products have been providing 

satisfactory service for not less than five years, shall be considered. Manufacturer 

qualifications shall be provided as part of the submittal. 

D. The TVSS must be capable of surviving 1000 sequential surges without failure, using IEEE 

test procedures established in C62.45. 

E. The TVSS device must have MOV surge devices, installed with full rating indicated between 

Phase to Neutral, Phase to Ground, and Neutral to Ground, and be capable of handling a 

minimum surge current as follows: 

Distribution and/or service panels: 

Per Mode: 

Branch panels: 

Line to Neutral 150,000 amps 

Line to Ground 150,000 amps 

Neutral to Ground 150,000 amps 

Per Phase: 300,000 amps 

Per Mode: 

Line to Neutral 40,000 amps 


TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS 16478-1


Neutral to Ground 40,000 amps 

Per Phase: 80,000 amps 

A. Submit complete and descriptive shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, 

Division 1, and Section 16050. 

B. Submit all related TVSS Specifications and drawing information requested in this document 

and U.L. 1449 Second Edition surge suppression ratings for the TVSS. In order for a TVSS 

system to be considered, all responses to information requested in this specification must be 

provided in writing. If a manufacturer cannot comply with any portion of this specification, this 

must be stated in the reply and the reason for non-compliance shall be provided. 

C. Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with the General Conditions, Division 

1, and Section 16050. 



A. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers: 

1. Liebert 

2. LEA International 

3. Current Technologies 

4. Advanced Protection Technologies 

5. Intermatic Inc. 

6. GE Power Quality 

7. Cutler Hammer Clipper 

8. Square D 

9. Siemens 

10. EFI 


the General Conditions, Division 1 and section 16050. 

2.2 TVSS EQUIPMENT: 

A. The TVSS shall be suitable for application in category C environments as described in 

ANSI/IEEE C62.41. The TVSS shall be of parallel design and provide protection from Line to 

Ground, Line to Line, Line to Neutral, and Neutral to Ground. 



B. The TVSS shall be compatible with the electrical system voltage, current, configuration and 

intended application. 

C. The TVSS maximum continuous operation voltage (MCOV) shall be capable of sustaining 

100% of the nominal RMS voltage continuously without degradation. 

D. The TVSS shall only use solid state clamping components connected in parallel with the 

supply to limit the surge voltages. Clamping components shall be installed in 7 modes. Four 

mode TVSS devices are not acceptable. 

E. Provide visual or audible indication of properly performing protection. 

F. Provide a surge counter. 

G. House in the appropriate NEMA rated enclosure or within the switchboard or panelboard as a 

complete US listed assembly. Refer to drawings for installation requirements. 

H. Warranty shall be for full replacement without pro-rating value, for a minimum period of 5 

years. 



A. Ship with complete installation instructions which are to be followed in detail. The 

manufacturer's representative is to be contacted and is to supervise the installation. 

B. Installation shall comply with all applicable State and National Electrical Codes, including 

NEC Articles 240, 250, 310 and 280. Provide overcurrent protection and a means to 

disconnect power from unit. All fuses utilized for the TVSS overcurrent protection shall be of 

the Time Delay type rated for the available fault current at the location of installation. 

C. Phase, neutral and ground leads of installed TVSS must be grouped and twisted together up 

to the point of connection at the bus or overcurrent device. Lead lengths must be as short as 

possible, avoiding bends where possible. In no case will lead lengths greater than sixteen 

inches or sharp bends in leads be permitted. Lead length is measured from switchboard bus 

or breaker to point of connection to TVSS device. 

D. Conductors must terminate with compression type lugs. 

E. Mount so that suppressor indicator lights will be clearly visible after installation. 

F. Overcurrent and disconnect devices shall be exclusively utilized for the TVSS device. 

G. Raceway from TVSS to switchboard shall consist of rigid steel conduit with double locknuts 

and grounding bushings connected to switchboard ground. 

H. Overcurrent protection sizing shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions. Conductor sizing 

shall be based on NEC requirements. 






SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING 



A. Provide light fixtures with lamps and accessories as herein specified and shown on the 

drawings. 


A. If the catalog number of a specified fixture should conflict with the fixture description or the 

general lighting specifications, such conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect 

prior to bidding. 


A. Submit product data and shop drawings for fixtures, ballasts, and lamps in accordance with 

the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16050. 

B. Verify that fixture description matches that which is indicated by the specified catalog 

number. 

C. All features mentioned in the fixture list shall be marked on the submitted items. 

D. Submit written confirmation that dimming ballasts and dimming controls are compatible. 

E. Submit Operation and Maintenance data in accordance with the General Conditions, Division 

1, and Section 16050. 



A. See Luminaire Schedule for acceptable manufacturers. 


the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16050. 

C. Substitution requests for fixtures equal to those specified shall include complete construction 

and photometric data including, if applicable, candlepower distribution curve, spacing to 

mounting height ratio, table of coefficients of utilization, isofootcandle curve, ANSI beam 

spread classification, efficiency, etc. 

D. Submittals and substitution requests for fluorescent fixtures shall include the sheet metal 

gauge of the housing and the lens thickness, material, and pattern. 


LIGHTING Section 16500-1


A. Polystyrene lenses and lenses less than 0.125 inches nominal thickness shall not be 

permitted unless otherwise noted. 

B. Provide luminaires with Area Coverage, damp, or wet label if required for the application 

indicated. 

C. All recessed luminaires shall be free of light leaks. 

2.3 BALLASTS: 

A. All ballasts shall be capable of providing reliable operation of the lamps at the lowest 

temperature normally encountered. The contractor shall confirm that the ballasts are 

appropriate for the ambient conditions. 

B. The contractor shall verify the ballast voltage prior to submittal. 

C. Ballasts deemed excessively noisy shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. 

D. PREMIUM T8 BALLASTS – INSTANT START: Premium T8 fluorescent ballasts, unless 

noted otherwise on Light Fixture Schedule, shall be instant start electronic type; ballast data 

as follows: 

UL listed and CSA certified. 

Low wattage, ballast factor of 0.75 to 0.78 

Similar light output with Premium lamp to standard T8 ballast and lamps. 

Recognized Testing Laboratory listed, thermally protected, resetting, Class P, non- 

PCB, sound rated A. 

Operate lamps at a frequency of 40KHz or higher with no detectable flicker. 

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 10% or less. 

Power factor equal to or greater than 98%. 

Minimum lamp starting temperature of 50 degrees F. 

Meet all current Federal, State and Power Co. efficiency and efficacy standards, and 

rebate program requirements. 

Meet all current ANSI, IEEE, and FCC regulations for EMI/RFI, harmonic distortion, 

and transient protection. 

Provide extended lamp life as stated by lamp manufacturer. 

Minimum 5 year ballast and replacement labor warranty by manufacturer. 

Ballast manufacturer's data must be included with lighting fixture submittals. 

Compatible with occupancy sensor switching. 

Approved manufacturers: Advance Optanium, Osram Sylvania, Magnetek, or approved. 

E. DIMMING T8, T5, BIAX,and COMPACT FLUORESCENT BALLASTS – PROGRAMMED 

START: programmed start dimming fluorescent ballasts, unless noted otherwise on Light 

Fixture Schedule, shall be electronic type; ballast data as follows: 


100% to 5% full range flicker free continuous dimming using 0-10 VDC signal. 

Recognized Testing Laboratory listed, thermally protected, resetting, Class P, non- 

PCB, sound rated A. 

Operate lamps at a frequency of 40KHz or higher with no detectable flicker. 

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 10% or less. 




Lamp starting at any light output setting. 

Meet all current Federal, State and Power Co. efficiency and efficacy standards, and 

rebate program requirements. 

Meet all current ANSI, IEEE, and FCC regulations for EMI/RFI, harmonic distortion, 


Provide normal lamp life as stated by lamp manufacturer. 


Ballast manufacturer's data must be included with lighting fixture submittals. 

Compatible with occupancy sensor switching. 

Approved manufacturers: Advance (Mark 10), Lutron, or approved. 

Coordinate dimming ballasts with dimming controls specified in separate section. 

F. STANDARD COMPACT FLUORESCENT BALLASTS – PROGRAMMED START: Compact 

fluorescent ballasts, unless noted otherwise on Light Fixture Schedule, shall be programmed 

start electronic type; to operate 4 pin compact fluorescent lamps, ballast data as follows: 


Full light output. 

Dual voltage rated 120/277 

Capable of operating more than one lamp wattage for PL-T triple tube applications 

Recognized Testing Laboratory listed, thermally protected, resetting, non-PCB, 

sound rated A. 

Operate lamp(s) at a frequency of above 40 kHz. 

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 10%. 

Programmed start. 


Maximum lamp crest factor 1.7. 

Minimum lamp starting temperature of 0 degrees F. 

Meet all current Federal, State and Power Company efficiency and efficacy 

standards, and rebate program requirements. 

Meet all current ANSI, IEE, and FCC regulations for EMI/RFI, harmonic distortion, 


Provide normal lamp life as stated by lamp manufacturer. 


End-of-life detection and shut-down circuitry that meets proposed ANSI/IEC 

standards. 

Ballast manufacturer's data must be included with light fixture submittal. 

Approved manufacturers: Advance, Osram Sylvania, Magnetek, Howard Industries, or 

approved. 

G. HID ballasts shall be as follows: 

1. Metal Halide (MH): 

a. High power factor, normal ambient, 180 degrees C insulation class. 

b. Auto transformer with capacitor and ignitor for lamps 150 watt or less. 

c. Constant wattage autotransformer with capacitor for lamps above 150 watts. 

2. Pulse Start Metal Halide (PSMH): 



a. Where available as standard products, provide pulse start metal halide 

ballasts for maximum energy savings. 

H. Three or four lamp fluorescent fixtures located within 10 feet of each other, and arranged for 

2 or 3 level lighting shall have master/slave ballasts wired in such a manner that a single 

switch shall not operate the outer lamps in some fixtures, and the inner lamps in others. One 

ballast shall serve outer lamps and the other shall serve inner lamp(s). 

L. In indoor locations other than dwellings or hazardous locations, fluorescent luminaries that 

utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be serviced in place shall have a 

quick disconnecting means factory installed, internal to the luminaire, and accessable from 

the ballast housing. The quick disconnect shall simultaneously break all of the supply 

conductors to the ballast, including the neutral. The line side terminals of the disconnect shall 

be guarded. 

2.4 LAMPS: 

A. Provide Premium grade, high performance T8 lamps, low mercury TCLP complaint (green 

ends), 3100 lumens, 4100°K, CRI of 82. 

B. Biaxial and compact fluorescent lamps shall be 4100°K type with a minimum CRI of 82, 

unless otherwise noted. Provide low mercury TCLP compliant lamps (green ends) where 

available as standard products (Philips Alto series or equal). 

C. Metal Halide high intensity discharge lamps shall be either coated or clear as recommended 

by the fixture manufacturer. Provide pulse start lamps for Metal Halide fixtures requiring 

pulse start. Provide minimum CRI of 65. 

D. Provide Ceramic Metal Halide (Philips Master Color) with minimum CRI of 80 for display type 

lamps. Provide Low mercury TCLP compliant (green end) where available as standard 

product. 

E. For Metal Halide lamps, provide Base Up, or Horizontal rated lamps for maximum lumen 

output. Universal Burn lamps are not acceptable. 

F. All incandescent lamps shall be 130 volt, inside frosted unless otherwise noted (except 

Halogen). 

G. Acceptable lamp manufacturers are Venture, Osram/Sylvania, Philips, and General Electric. 

H. All lamps and fixtures shall be in proper operation at the time of acceptance. 

I. SPARE LAMPS: Provide ten percent spare lamps, with a minimum of two, for each size and 

type used. 

2.5 POLES: 

A. Each pole shall have adequate strength and rigidity to withstand not less than 100 mph winds 

without damage to the poles and attached fixtures and lamps. Pole bases shall be equipped 

with handholes with matching covers, and base cover. 

B. Anchor bolts shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and threads cleared. Nuts, 

washers, and other hardware and fittings shall be corrosion resistant alloy material of 

adequate strength. Indicated pole heights are above the top of the concrete base. 



C. After the poles have been installed, shimmed and plumbed, grout the spaces between the 

pole bases and the concrete base with non-shrink concrete grout material. 

D. Provide ground rod for poles installed on grade, attached to pole. Install ground rod on the 

side of the pole base. Do not install ground rod underneath the pole base. 

E. Provide fuse clips located in handhole for each fixture head circuit. 



A. Luminaires installed under this work shall be properly and adequately supported from the 

building structure except where ceiling construction or other provisions are specifically 

designed to support the fixture units. Fixture support systems shall provide a safety factor of 

four. This shall apply to chains, hangers, anchors, clamps, screws, and all other hardware 

and appurtenances associated with the support system. 

B. Fixture supports shall provide proper alignment and leveling of fixtures, and shall be arranged 

to maintain the alignment at all times. The final decision as to adequacy of alignment shall be 

given by the Architect. 

C. All light outlets shall be supplied with a fixture. Outlet symbols on the drawings without a type 

designation shall have a fixture the same as those used in similar or like locations. 

D. Fixture stem or chain lengths for industrial reflector or bare lamp strip fixtures shall be 

appropriate for the space and for coordination with other work such as ducts and piping. 

Provide swivel hangers for stem-hung fixtures. 

E. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work and every lamp shall be in 

operation. The responsibility for cleaning or protecting fixtures from dirt, dust, paint, debris, 

etc. shall rest with the Contractor performing this division of work. 

F. Prior to the purchase of any luminaire, the finish shall be verified with the Architect and the 

voltage shall be verified based on the panelboard voltage. 

G. Fixtures of a given description may be used in more than one type of ceiling. Consult the 

Architectural Reflected Ceiling plan to obtain this information. Some ceiling types may have 

changed immediately prior to bidding or by addenda or change order and the changes may 

not be reflected in the fixture list or fixture designations as shown on the plans. The 

contractor shall compare the electrical plans with the reflected ceiling plan and confirm that 

the specified fixtures are compatible with the ceiling system prior to ordering. 

H. Provide seismic support wires for all recessed fixtures where ceiling framing is not designed 

for fixture support. 

I. Provide all recessed lay-in fixtures a flexible power whip of at least 48 inches but not 

exceeding 72 inches. Where using modular wiring systems, wiring shall be supported from 

structure, not laying on ceiling tiles. 

J. Where fixtures are mounted under cabinets, in soffits, coves, or other physically restricting 

spaces, the contractor shall verify that the fixtures will fit the space prior to ordering. 



K. Undercabinet and similar fixtures are to be hard wired. Flexible cords similar to SO cord are 

not acceptable. 

L. Air supply fixtures shall be supplied with pattern control vanes. 

M. See Architectural plans for fire rated ceilings and coordinate fixture installation with general 

contractor to assure continuity of fire rating. 

N. Do not mount fluorescent or H.I.D. fixtures within 12" of any cable tray or telecommunications 

cable. 

O. Where dimming systems are specified, contractor shall operate fixtures at full intensity for a 

minimum of 100 hours prior to testing. Lamps shall not be dimmed until the 100 hours is 

complete. 




SECTION 16530 – LIGHTING CONTROL 



A. Provide manual and/or automatic control for all lighting fixtures shown. Exit and emergency 

pathway lighting shall be controlled at branch circuit panel only. 

B. Provide one low voltage relay for each 20 amp 120 volt 1p or 208 volt 2 pole lighting branch 

circuit except for exit and pathway lighting circuits. Mount relays in cabinets and locate relay 

cabinets adjacent to the lighting branch circuit panels. 

1.2 RELATED WORK: 

A. Section 16050: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 

B. Section 16110: Raceways 

C. Section 16120: Wires and Cables 

D. Section 16141: Switches and Receptacles 

E. Division 15: Energy management system. All low voltage control wiring is included in 

Division 15 control section except as specified. 


A. Submit catalog data of relays and cabinets. All equipment must be UL listed. 



A. Relays and cabinets: All components must be of the same manufacture; acceptable 

manufacturers are: Sierra, General Electric, Pass and Seymour or approved substitute. 

B. Relays: Electrically operated, mechanically held; 20 amp, 208 volt or 120 volt contact rating. 

Momentary switching voltage: 24 VAC. GE No. RR-7. Provide quantity of relays as shown on 

the drawings. 

C. Cabinet: Flush mounted metal enclosure with screw on cover, rust proofed and painted to 

match branch circuit panels; barrier between line and low voltage section with knockouts for 

mounting up to 12 relays minimum; barrier to be vibration isolated from box. Each box to be 

assembled and provided with low voltage, line voltage terminal strips and relays only; all 

terminal strips shall be numbered. 



LIGHTING CONTROL 16530-1


A. Label all relays and terminal strips with numbers to match panel branch circuit numbers. 

Provide relay directory on inside of cabinet identifying each relay and associated branch 

circuit. 

B. Provide all line voltage wiring from panel to relays and from relays to loads. Provide all low 

voltage wiring from relays to terminal strips in relay cabinet. 



LIGHTING CONTROL 16530-2

SECTION 16550 – OCCUPANCY SENSED LIGHTING CONTROL 



A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, 

wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation 

and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as 

described herein. 

B. The Contractor shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related 

electrical work required as work under Division 16. 


A. Submit complete and descriptive shop drawings including floor plans, layouts, catalog cuts 

and other descriptive data indicating compliance with the specifications herein. Submit data 

sheets on sensors, control units and all junction boxes and mounting accessories, including 

all wiring diagrams. Provide a complete layout of occupancy sensors including: location, 

coverage pattern, direction, and type. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 



A. The Watt Stopper, Inc., Mytech/Hubbell, Leviton, Novitas 


the general conditions and Division 1. 

C. All sensors shall be California Energy Commission Title 24 approved and certified. 

2.2 WALL SWITCH INFRARED TYPE (For Offices up to 150 square feet). 

A. Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of motion at desk top level up to 500 

square feet. 

B. Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads indicated on the plans. 

C. Coverage of 180 degrees 

D. Digital auto-OFF time delay adjustable from 30 seconds up to 30 minutes. 

E. Adjustable unit sensitivity. 

F. Integrated light level sensor - works from 2.4 to 300 footcandles 

G. LED for sensitivity calibration 


OCCUPANCY SENSED LIGHTING CONTROL 16550-1

H. Transformer / latching relay design. 

I. Works with electronic ballast and high power factor PL lamp ballasts. 

J. No leakage current in off mode. 

K. Voltage drop protection. 

L. Watt Stopper Model WS 120 / 277 

2.3 CEILING MOUNT INFRARED TYPE (For offices up to 300 square feet) 

A. Shall utilize custom ASIC specifically designed for PIR occupancy sensors which provides 

high immunity to RFI and EMI. 

B. Shall have user-adjustable sensitivity setting and adjustable time delay of 30 seconds to 30 

minutes. 

C. Shall have in place a by-pass pin which when removed will override sensor to ON and which 

requires no rewiring or modification to unit. 

D. Shall have a daylight filter which insures that the sensor in insensitive to short-wavelength 

infrared waves such as those emitted by the sun. 

E. Shall have the ability to sense directly under and slightly behind sensor when mounted on 

ceiling. 

F. Shall not protrude more than 1 1/4 inches from the ceiling (or wall). 

G. Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable cover to prevent 

tampering of adjustments and hardware. 

H. Shall operate from a 24 volts DC power supply: current draw of 14 milliamps. 

I. Watt Stopper Model WPIR 

2.4 CEILING MOUNT INFRARED TYPE (For Offices, Conferences Rooms up to 900 square feet). 

A. Shall use custom ASIC specifically designed for PIR occupancy sensors which provides high 

immunity to RFI and EMI. 

B. Shall have two outputs; one output is based on occupancy only and one is based on 

occupancy with a hold OFF and an internal photocell setting when a minimum light level is 

present (adjustable from 3 to 200 footcandles). 

C. Shall have a digital time delay setting adjustable from 15 seconds to 30 minutes. 

D. Shall be furnished with a DIP switch overrode-ON function for use in the event of failure. 

E. Shall have an additional single pole, double throw isolated relay with normally open, normally 

closed, and common outputs rated at 1 Amp for 24 VDC. The isolated relay is for use with 

HVAC control, data logging, and other control options. 



F. Shall have a standard 30 element Fresnel lens with 15 layers horizontally and 4 layers 

vertically, a 14 element Long Range Fresnel lens with 9 layers horizontally and 4 layers 

vertically, or an Aisle Way Fresnel lens with 14 layers horizontally and 9 layers vertically. 

G. Shall cover up to 1200 square feet with the Standard Lens, up to 90 linear feet with the Long 

Range Lens, and up to 120 linear feet with the Aisle Way Lens for walking motion when 

mounted at a ceiling height of 12 feet. 

H. Shall operate on 24 VDC, current draw of 19 Ma. 

I. Watt Stopper Model CX-100 

2.5 CEILING MOUNT ULTRASONIC TYPE (For Restrooms, Open Office Areas up to 1000 square 

feet) 

A. Shall be omni-directional with volumetric coverage of 360 degrees and up to 1000 square 

feet of walking motion. 

B. Shall have a multi-direction transmitter with temperature and humidity resistant, minimum 32 

kHz tuned ultrasonic receivers. Ultrasonic receivers shall be temperature and humidity 

resistant with less than a 6dB shift in the humidify range of 10% to 90% and less than a 10dB 

shift in the temperature range of -20 to 60 degrees C. 

C. Sensors of varying frequencies shall not be allowed so as to prevent sensors from interfering 

with each other and to ensure compatibility in the event more sensors are added or units are 

replaced. 

D. Shall be furnished with a convenient shunt provision which will enable a by-pass in the event 

of failure. This by-pass provision pin shall remain in the sensor and be visible from the floor 

as a constant reminder that the automatic function has been by-passed. 

E. Shall have user-adjustable sensitivity setting and time delay setting from 15 seconds to 15 

minutes. 

F. Shall operate on 24 VDC, current draw of 15 mA. 

G. Watt Stopper Model W-1000A 

2.6 CEILING MOUNT DUAL-TECHNOLOGY TYPE (For Rooms up to 1200 SF) 

Low Profile, ceiling mount, 360 degree coverage: Watt Stopper Model DT-300 

Adjustable arm, wall mount, 180 degree coverage: WattStopper Model DT-200 

A. The Occupancy Sensors shall be capable of detecting presence in the floor area to be 

controlled, by detecting doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat 

changes (dual technology). Sensors that utilize microphonics are not approved. 

B. Upon entering a space, motion from both technologies must be sensed before lighting will be 

turned on. After this has occurred, detection in either technology will hold lighting on for the 

set time period. Sensors will have a retrigger time delay where only one motion is necessary 

to turn on the lights within 5 seconds after turning off. 

C. Ultrasonic sensors will be volumetric in coverage. Up to 10 different passive infrared patterns 

will be available by lens selection. Detection shall be maintained when a person of average 



size and weight moves only within or a maximum distance of twelve inches either in a 

horizontal or vertical manner at the approximate speed of 12 inches per second. The sum of 

this distance, volume and speed represent the average condition an Occupancy Sensor must 

meet in order that the lights will not go off when a person is reading or writing while seated at 

a desk. 

D. Sensors will cover a minimum of 1500 square feet when mounted at 12 feet. 

E. The sensors are designed to be ceiling mounted and not protrude more than 2 inches and 

should blend in aesthetically with the space. 

F. Each sensing technology shall have independent sensitivity adjustments and LED display. 

G. Time Delay range shall be adjustable from 15 seconds to 15 minutes. 

H. Sensors shall operate on 24 volts, 25 milliamps DC. 

I. Sensor shall have an additional single pole, double throw isolated relay with Normally Open, 

Normally Closed and Common outputs rated at 1 amp for 24 VDC. The isolated relay is for 

use with HVAC control, Data Logging, and other control options. 

J. Ultrasonic circuit shall be solid state, crystal controlled with signal processing filtering. 

K. Ultrasonic receivers shall be temperature and humidity resistant with less than a 6dB shift in 

the humidity range of 10% to 90% and less than a 6dB shift in the temperature range of -20o 

to 60o C. 

L. The ultrasonic frequency shall be 40 kHz + .006%. 

M. Ceiling mount sensors shall provide a minor motion coverage range of 250 to 1300 square 

feet with an overall 1/2 step coverage range from 500 to 2000 square feet. 

N. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballast and PL lamp 

systems. 

O. All sensors shall be self-contained, crystal controlled ultrasonic or infrared occupancy 

sensors located to provide coverage of 90 to 100% of the controlled area. 

P. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No 

automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating 

fans. 

Q. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay and 

sensitivity. Controls shall be recessed in the sensor to limit tampering. 

R. In the event of failure, a bypass manual "override on" shall be provided on each sensor. 

When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall 

switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed in the sensor to prevent 

tampering. 

S. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled to within plus or minus 0.005% 

tolerance to assure reliable performance. 



T. Ultrasonic microphone receiver frequency shall be 25 KHz or greater and shall be 

temperature and humidity resistant. 

1. All sensors shall provide a red LED indication light to verify that motion is being 

detected and that the unit is working. 

U. All ultrasonic sensors shall comply with the State of California Safety and Health 

Requirements. Decibel levels for ultrasonic sensors shall comply with the following California 

Energy Commission criteria: 

Midfrequency of Sound Minimum dB level within 

Pressure Third Octave Third Octave Band (in dB 

Band (KHz) reference 20 micropascals) 

Less than 20 80 

20 or more to less than 25 105 

25 or more to less than 31.5 110 

31.5 or more 115 

The Contractor shall certify in writing that installed sensors comply with the specified 

California Energy Commission criteria for ultrasonic sound. 

V. All sensors shall have no leakage current in OFF mode and shall have voltage drop 

protection. 

W. Sensors shall be suitable for N.E.C. 725 Class 2 wiring and use plenum cable where 

approved. Where plenum cable is not approved, provide conduit to within 6 inches of sensor 

location. 

2.7 POWER PACKS: 

A. Power Packs shall be mounted on external J boxes and be an integrated self-contained unit 

consisting of a load switching relay and a transformer. 

B. Relay Contacts shall have ratings of: 

10A - 120 VAC Tungsten 

20A - 120 VAC Ballast 

15A - 277 VAC Ballast 

C. Relay contacts shall be isolated. 

D. Power Packs: Wattstopper A-120E, A-277E 

E. Between sensors and controls units shall be three (3) conductors, 18 AWG, stranded U.L. 

Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable approved for use in plenums. One 

sensor shall be capable of driving four Power Packs. 

F. Enclosures for Power Packs shall be NEMA I construction with mounting and barriers to 

provide separation between line and low voltage wiring or a standard four (4") inch junction 

box with control unit mounting to cover plate with ! inch knockout. Boxes not located above 

accessible ceilings shall be painted to match finish color of mounting surface. 

G. Occupancy sensors shall have calibration at the occupancy sensor head, not at the power 

pack above the ceiling. 




3.1 PERFORMANCE: 

A. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper design and installation of the occupancy 

sensor based fluorescent lighting control system in rooms designated on the drawings so that 

lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is 

vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. 

B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space 

utilization and all irregular work hours and habits. 

3.2 DESIGN: 

A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to contact the Manufacturers Representative and, 

with their assistance, aim and locate sensors correctly as required for complete and proper 

volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas. Rooms shall have 

ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to adequately cover the controlled area to 

accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the 

rooms(s). The sensor symbols shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only 

rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide sensors as 

required to properly and completely cover the respective room. Proper judgment must be 

exercised in executing the work so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available 

space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural 

components. Sensors in small offices should be located to avoid false operation caused by 

persons walking by the door and outside the office. 

B. Mount occupancy sensors a minimum of 8 feet away from HVAC diffusers. Ultrasonic 

sensors shall be mounted on vibration free, stable surfaces and shall not be used in areas of 

heavy air flow, moving objects, or on ceilings over 14 feet high. 

C. Where "override-OFF" switch is required, switch is to be connected on the load side of the 

Power Pack Relay. 

3.3 WARRANTY: 

A. Contractor shall warrant the system including all equipment furnished in accordance to this 

specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in 

conformance with the specifications. The suppliers obligation shall include repair or 

replacement, and testing without charge to the owner, all or any parts of equipment which are 

found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. Warranty on 

sensors and controls units will be for a period of five (5) years. The warranty shall commence 

upon the owner's acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period 

of one (1) year. 

3.4 OWNER TRAINING: 

A. The contractor shall provide, at the owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the 

owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the 

occupancy sensing devices and systems. 




SECTION 16723 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 



A. The Contractor shall furnish and install fire alarm devices, as specified herein and indicated 


B. Replace existing main fire alarm control panel. Extend all existing fire alarm initiating, 

notification, auxiliary power, and relay shout down circuits to new head end equipment 

location. Add additional horn/strobe power supplies as required to accommodate new and 

existing initiating and warning devices (detectors, call stations, strobes, horns, tamper 

switches, door holders, etc.). 

C. Provide all signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, power supply, a wiring 

system, and all accessory devices required to provide a complete operating system. 

D. All components shall be compatible with the existing system. 

E. Provide new duct smoke detectors and fan relays at all fan units 2000 CFM and over. Shut 

down all supply and return fans upon a general alarm signal. 

F. Provide vandal resistant cages to protect horn/strobes, smoke and heat detectors as 

indicated and in gyms whether shown or not. Securely fasten security cages as required. 

Provide backing and bracing as required to insure that attachment extends beyond the ceiling 

materials. Cages shall have two pieces, one backplate and one cover to attach to backplate. 

Provide cages/guards on horn/strobes that are clear and do not limit their effect on the field 

performance with the listing requirements. 

G. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the National Alarm Code (NFPA 

72), Americans with Disabilities Act, and meet all requirements of the local authorities having 

jurisdiction. All equipment and devices shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., 

or approved by the Factory Mutual Laboratories. 

H. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fire alarm and detection 

system components and accessories. Provide components and systems, which are UL-listed 

and labeled for fire alarm. Provide fire alarm and detection systems and accessories, which 

are FM approved. Comply with State and local requirements as applicable. 

I. Ensure that the fire alarm supplier has a minimum of (1) NICET level four and (3) NICET level 

three technicians on staff. 

J. Comply with applicable provisions of current NFPA Standard 72 National Fire Alarm Code (as 

applicable), local building codes, and meet requirements of local authorities having 

jurisdiction. 





FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16723-1

B. Division-16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 


A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on fire alarm and detection systems 

including, but not limited to, roughing-in diagrams and instructions for installation, operating 

and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Provide shop drawings showing equipment/device locations and 

connecting wiring of entire fire alarm and detection system. Include wiring diagrams and riser 

diagrams of panel. Provide dimensioned drawing of Fire Alarm Control Panel and Building 

Graphic. 

C. CERTIFICATION: Submit a written statement to the Architect and the state and local Fire 

Marshal's Office that each device of the fire alarm system will be installed, inspected and 

tested in accordance with applicable requirements of NFPA Standard 72. 

D. Submit plans and specifications to the governing Building Official. Obtain his written 

acceptance of, and procure and pay for all permits for, the system prior to beginning work 

and ordering equipment. Provide to the Fire Marshall's office the following: 

1. A complete set of shop drawings indicating: 

a. Location of all alarm-initiating and alarm-signaling devices. 

b. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all alarm-initiating and alarm-signaling 

devices. 

2. Wiring diagrams for: 

a. Alarm control panels. 

b. Auxiliary function relays and solenoids. 

c. Remote signaling equipment. 

d. Standby battery calculations, including voltage drop calculation. 

3. A complete equipment list identifying: 

a. Type 

b. Model 

c. Manufacturer 

d. Manufacturer catalog data sheets 

e. UL Listing and/or FM approval showing compatibility of device with Fire 

Alarm Control Panel (FACP) 

4. A complete zone list identifying all: 

a. Alarm-initiating and alarm-signaling devices. 

b. Remote signaling and auxiliary function zones. 

c. Specific devices associated with each zone. 

B. Submit to State and Local Fire Marshall, a complete Certificate of Compliance 





A. FCI as distributed by Nelson Fire or approved equal. 


the general conditions and Section 16050. 

C. Arrange for the fire alarm system vendor to review the wiring and power supply capacity of 

the existing system. Increase the power supply capacity, signal circuit wire size, or add a 

remote power supply as needed to accomplish proper operation of the system. 

2.2 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM 

A. GENERAL: Provide an electrically operated, electrically supervised fire alarm system as 

described herein. Include control units, power supplies, alarm initiating and indicating 

devices, conduit, wire, fittings and accessories required to provide a complete operating 

system. Enclose entire system in raceway. Provide basic wiring materials which comply with 

Division 16, Basic Materials and Methods Sections for raceways, conductors, boxes, fittings, 

supports, etc. Minimum wire size to be #14 AWG copper. 

B. SYSTEM TYPE: Analog addressable, non-coded. Either manual activation of a fire alarm 

station or activation of an automatic initiating device energizes all fire alarm signaling devices, 

sounding a non-coded alarm and providing device identification on an annunciator panel. 

C. SYSTEM OPERATION: Provide system such that any manual station or automatic initiating 

device annunciates all alarm indicating units (bells, horns, buzzers, chimes, visual alarm 

lamps, etc.) continuously until the manual station or initiating device is restored to normal and 

the fire alarm control unit reset. Annunciate alarm signals by device at the control panel and 

all remote annunciators. Provide all conductors, raceway, equipment and labor to 

accomplish the following: 

D. Deactivate air supply and return fan units simultaneously by means of a supervised master 

fan shutdown relay with slave relays as required. Restart air units automatically after panel 

has been reset. Provide a bypass switch for master fan shut down relay for drill purposes, 

and indicate by a locked-in lamp that the circuit has been bypassed. 

E. Selectively activate and/or deactivate fan units as required. 

F. Release all magnetic door holders upon activation of an alarm from any device by use of a 

master relay in the control panel. 

G. Provide supervised circuits for the following: 

1. Close dampers upon activation of an alarm from any device through the HVAC 

interface relays at the Fire Command Center. 

2. Recall elevators, upon activation of an alarm, to the floor of building egress unless 

the alarm is on the egress floor, in which case recall elevator to the level designated 

by the Fire Marshal. Cooperate with the elevator supplier to ensure complete 

operable system. Provide shunt trip breaker(s) as required. 

H. Central Station Monitoring. Provide a UL listed fire control communicator in accordance with 

NFPA 71 with a minimum of two reporting zones to the central station. Provide a 

communicator with dual phone lines for central station reporting by using BFSK or pulsed 

single round fast format. Provide integral trouble annunciator. Provide with compatibility for 



automatic test reports every 24 hours. Provide system and components which comply with 

UL 2635 and UL 864. 

I. Provide fire alarm control panel with capability of shutting down individual initiating devices 

for maintenance purposes without affecting the continued operation of other initiating devices. 

J. Provide manual fire alarm stations in boiler rooms, kitchen and main administrative office. 

K. Provide external alarm horns sufficient to be heard in all parking areas. 

L. Sprinkler Supervision. Provide a signal initiating and supervisory circuit to each PIV (post 

indicator) valve, and to each sprinkler riser and subdivision. Provide continuous alarm signal 

upon actuation of any water flow signal initiating device. Sound alarm until the condition has 

been corrected and the panel manually reset as required by UL864. Provide separate alarm 

zones for: (1) alarm zones from “waterflow alarms”, (2) alarm zones from “supervisory alarm” 

indicating sprinkler system trouble. Provide power to all alarm bells furnished under Division 

15. Review final fire sprinkler drawings and coordinate for panel, flow and tamper switch 

locations. 

M. Provide relays, monitor modules and connections as required at control panel of kitchen hood 

suppression system for initiation of alarm signal to fire alarm control panel. Connect hood 

suppression control panel to shunt trip breakers as required. 

N. Provide all required wiring from gas shut off valve to the hood suppression control panel. 

Make all connections to insure a properly operating system. Verify with Mechanical 

Contractor. 

2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL: E3 SERIES 

A. The fire alarm control panel shall be microprocessor-based. Each loop shall be capable of 

159 analog addresses and 159 monitor and/or control addresses. 

B. If the microprocessor fails, the system shall execute a default signaling program. This 

program will enable the panel to sound the audible signals and summon the Fire Department. 

In addition, a red LED shall light to indicate the device wherein the alarm originated. Inability 

of the system to sound signals or summon the fire department during microprocessor failure 

shall not be acceptable. 

C. The fire alarm control panel shall have 16 programmable switches. All switches shall have 3 

different status LEDs(blinking and solid)Red, Yellow, and Green. 

D. The fire alarm control panel shall contain a LCD Graphic Annunciator touch-screen and 

permit the user to perform all necessary functions including but not limited to the following: 

1. Up to 512 user-defined messages 

2. 77 character length messages 

3. Different font and color for each message 

4. Alarm/Trouble Acknowledge. 

5. Alarm Silence 

6. Reset 

7. Lamp Test 

8. Control of Initiating Devices (on/off) 

9. Control of output modules (on/off) 

10. Change sensitivity of devices 

11. Change time 



12. Walk test 

13. Check system on battery voltage and current 

E. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of alarm verification. The control panel shall 

indicate which smoke detector is in alarm during the pre-alarm window. 

F. All alarm signals shall be locked in at the panel until the operated device is returned to it's 

normal condition and the control panel is manually reset. 

G. Alarm or trouble activation of initiating points shall be represented in English on the 

alphanumeric display on both the remote operating panel and the fire alarm control panel 

indicating the address of the specific device, i.e. Device L4S76, Smoke Detector, 1st floor 

Rm. 17. 

H. Each initiating and signal circuit shall be electrically supervised for opens, shorts, and ground 

faults in the wiring. 

I. The occurrence of any fault shall activate the system trouble circuitry but shall not interfere 

with the proper operation of any circuit that does not have a fault condition. 

J. The system communication loops shall be capable of being wired using Class "A" (Style 6) 

supervised circuits (a ground fault on either conductor or a break shall not prevent a device 

from operating on either side of the break) 

K. The fire alarm control panel shall contain circuitry permitting the transmission of trouble and 

alarm signals over leased phone lines by the means of reverse polarity. There shall be a 

supervised disconnect switch to allow testing of the fire alarm control panel without 

transmitting an alarm to the central station. 

L. The fire alarm control panel shall include the following features. 

1. Auxiliary SPDT alarm actuated contacts. 

2. Auxiliary SPDT trouble actuated contacts. 

3. Auxiliary SPDT supervisory actuated contacts. 

4. A solid-state power transfer circuit that shall switch to standby power 

automatically and instantaneously if normal power fails or falls below 

15% of normal ("brown out" conditions). This electronic circuit shall allow 

the batteries to be effectively "floated" on the operating system to avoid 

upsetting the normal microprocessor scan and minimize resultant 

nuisance troubles and/or alarms. 

5. A ground fault detector to detect positive or negative grounds on the 

initiating circuits, signal circuits, power circuits, and telephone line circuit. 

A ground fault code on the alphanumeric display shall provide indication 

of either a positive or negative ground fault and shall operate a general 

trouble but shall not cause an alarm to be sounded. 

6. A short circuit error message shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm 

control panel. Each communication loop shall be monitored and shall 

have a distinctive error message. 



7. Lightning protection shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm control 

panel and shall be incorporated in the power supply circuit, common 

control circuits, signal circuits, and telephone line circuit. 

8. Individual circuit breakers shall be provided for the following: smoke 

detector power, main power supply, signal circuit #1, signal circuit #2, 

battery standby power, and auxiliary output. 

9. The fire alarm control panel shall be of dead-front construction. One key 

shall allow access to all electronics or to the dead-front access to the 

operator functions. 

10. Opening the main door shall expose all components for inspection or 

adjustment without further dismantling of the cabinet, control unit, or 

wiring. 

11. It shall be possible to check and adjust the sensitivity of all analog 

devices from the main fire alarm panel. 

M. The fire alarm control panel shall have batteries capable of powering the system for (24) 

hours in standby condition and (5) minutes in alarm. 

N. There shall be no special tools required for the programming of devices. A standard slot 

head screwdriver only. 

2.4 REMOTE OPERATING PANEL: NGA 

A. Remote Operating Panel (Provide color as selected by Architect) 

B. The fire alarm control panel shall contain a LCD Graphic Annunciator touch-screen and 

permit the user to perform all necessary functions including but not limited to the following: 

2.5 PRINTER: 

1. Up to 512 user-defined messages 

2. 77 character length messages 

3. Different font and color for each message 

4. Alarm/Trouble Acknowledge. 

5. Alarm Silence 

6. Reset 

7. Lamp Test 

8. Control of Initiating Devices (on/off) 

9. Control of output modules (on/off) 

10. Change sensitivity of devices 

11. Change time 

12. Walk test 

13. Check system on battery voltage and current 

A. The fire alarm control panel shall report all status changes to an 80 column wide carriage 

printer using 8.5"x11 standard printer paper. The printer shall be supervised by the control 

panel. In the event of a power outage, the control panel shall be capable of storing and 

printing out the last 4100 events, including event during the power outage. 

B. The panel shall report a supervisory signal to the printer every 8 hours. 

2.6 MONITOR MODULE: AMM-4F: 



A. Remote identification module devices shall be attached to any single normally open initiating 

device (heat detector, waterflow switch, duct detectors, sprinkler, tamper switches, kitchen 

hood, pull station, etc.). The modules shall supply addressing and status information to the 

Fire Alarm Control Panel through the dual loop module. 

2.7 CONTROL POINT MODULE: AOM-2RF: 

A. The control point module shall be connected to the same loop as the initiating devices, and 

shall provide (2) seperate relay output (Form "C" 2 Amp @ 24 VDC, resistive only). 

B. This relay output shall be used to perform auxiliary functions. 

C. When the AOM is activated, the red "ACTIVE" LED shall be on solid. Under normal 

conditions, the green "ON LINE" LED shall flash. 

2.8 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATION: MS-7AF: 

A. Provide red enclosure, manual fire alarm stations with the following features: 

1. Addressable alarm type electrically compatible with system 

requirements. 

2. Double Action 

2.9 SMOKE DETECTORS: ASD-IL2F: 

3. 1 viewable LED to indicate the status of the device 

4. Break glass design requiring unit to be opened for resetting, and 

requiring resetting before closing. Provide one spare “glass” for each 

manual station. Key reset, keyed like fire control panel. 

A. All ionization smoke detectors shall be capable of being replaced without disconnecting any 

wires or wire connectors from the base of the detector. Each detector shall be installed on a 

separate base. The detector base shall be capable of receiving a photoelectric, ionization, or 

electronic thermal detector. All ionization fire detectors shall be UL 268 listed. All detectors 

shall have (2) viewable LEDs to indicate the status of the device. 

2.10 DUCT FIRE DETECTORS: ADP-RF: 

A. Provide photo electronic type with UL 268A listings. Each detector shall be equipped with a 

remote light. Each detector shall have (2) form "c" alarm contacts rated at 10 amps (at 

120VAC). 

2.11 BEAM SMOKE DETECTORS: ABD-2F: 

A. Provide addressable projected beam smoke sensor, with each detector consisting of a 

transmitter and receiver combination unit with reflector. The transmitter/receiver head shall 

be capable of being located up to 328 feet from the reflector. Provide on wall mounted arms 

as shown. 

2.12 THERMAL DETECTORS: ATD-RL2F: 



A. Thermal detectors shall operate on the Rate-of-Rise principal. The detectors shall have a 

fixed temperature rating of 135 degrees Fahrenheit. Exception: in Boiler rooms, provide 

temperature rating of 200 degrees Fahrenheit. 

2.13 AUDIOVISUAL ALARM HORNS: P2W: 

1. The heat detector shall consist of a base and a head. 

2. The base shall be capable of accepting either a smoke detector or a 135 

(or 200) degree heat detector. 

3. The head shall automatically restore to its normal standby condition 

when the temperature returns to its normal range. 

A. Provide audio-visual alarm horns with selectable multi-candela strobes (15/30/75/110 cd) and 

selectable horn (90 or 95 dba). Provide outdoor devices listed for exterior use. Provide white 

devices inside and red devices outside. Synchronize all strobes. 

2.14 AUDIOVISUAL ALARM STROBES: SW: 

A. Provide visual alarm strobes with selectable multi-candela strobes (15/30/75/110 cd). Provide 

white devices. Synchronize all strobes. 

2.15 AUXILIARY RELAY: ARB-C: 

A. Remote auxiliary relay boards shall be rated at 10 AMPS @ 120 VAC. A red LED shall light 

to indicate relay activation. All relays shall transfer on general alarm and latch on until reset. 

All relays shall be supervised. The control output provided can be used in conjunction with 

fire alarm applications (i.e. fan controls, dampers, doors, and any other general alarm 

control). 

2.16 INITIATING MODULES: AMM-4F: 

A. Provide style "6" initiating modules capable of receiving and annunciating an alarm from any 

detector, even with a single fault condition on any initiating circuit. 

B. Power all smoke detectors from the "Style 6" initiating loop wiring. For systems which power 

smoke detectors separately from the "Style 6" loop, provide monitoring for both the power 

source and the independent initiating wiring, so that complete trouble and alarm indication is 

achieved by loop. Provide capability to operate all smoke detectors, even with a single fault 

condition on the smoke detector power wiring. Provide one spare initiating circuit. 

2.17 SIGNALING MODULES: AOM-2SF: 

A. Provide signaling as required. Provide power adequate to sound all signaling devices 

concurrently. Provide supervised indicating circuits for polarized 24V D.C. alarm signaling 

devices. Provide 2 spare signaling circuits. 

B. Each signal circuit shall have a separate disconnect switch for servicing the fire alarm 

system. Each and every indicating circuit shall have a distinct location description. Power 

supply shall be at fire alarm control panel. Remote power supplies and indicating circuits will 

not be acceptable. 

2.18 SUPPLEMENTAL NOTIFICATION CIRCUITS: FIREFORCE-8: 



A. Provide supplementary notification appliance circuit panel(s) as required. The ‘SNAC’ shall 

be capable of supplying up to four Class A, Style Z notification appliance circuits. The panel 

shall contain its own battery charger, regulated power supply, and shall be supervised for 

ground fault, overcurrent, open circuits and low battery conditions. Ground fault, battery and 

circuit trouble conditions shall transmit a trouble signal to the main fire alarm control panel. 

2.19 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING: 

A. To help the owner in programming, system changes, and servicing, the fire alarm system 

shall have the following functions: 

2.20 BATTERIES/POWER SUPPLIES: 

1. The FACP shall be capable of an auto-configuration of the Signal Line 

Circuits, which via a password, all analog devices and panel modules are 

automatically programmed into the system. At this point the system will 

operate as a general alarm system without any other programming. 

2. If any two devices are addressed the same, the LED's on both devices 

will light steady and the panel will read "extra address and the address 

number". 

3. If any device is installed and not programmed into the system the LED 

will light steady and the panel will read the same as above. 

A. Provide standby batteries capable of operating fire alarm system for minimum of 24 hours, 

then operating all indicating units for at least five minutes. Locate batteries in fire alarm 

control unit, or in similar type enclosure located as directed. Provide all interconnecting 

wiring. Place batteries which vent hydrogen gas in separate enclosure. Provide 30 percent 

spare capacity. 


3.1 WIRING: 

A. Furnish and install all required wiring in accordance with local and National codes. 

B. Unless otherwise specified, minimum wire size shall be 16 gauge for audible alarm circuits, 

and 18 gauge for signal initiating circuits. All wiring shall be in conduit. Conduit shall be 

sized by the contractor. See 16050 for wiring methods. 

C. Provide a minimum of one 3/4" conduit with (8) wires #14’s to security panel. 

D. Confirm that the existing power supply and circuiting have sufficient capacity to handle 

additional horns and strobes. If insufficient capacity exists, add additional components to 

resolve the problem. This might include such items as replacing existing signal circuits with 

larger wire or replacing power supplies. All signal devices must operate properly at 

completion. 



3.2 DEVICE LOCATION 

A. Install smoke and heat detectors a minimum of 3 feet away from air supply and return 

diffusers. Install smoke or heat detectors in sloped ceilings to within 3 feet of the top of the 

sloped structure. 

B. Install smoke and heat detectors in locations as approved by the NFPA 72. Adjust locations 

as required to coordinate with solid beam construction, peaked or sloped ceilings, and high 

ceiling areas. 

C. Smoke detectors installed in corridors shall be no more than 30 feet on center, and 15 feet 

from the end of the hallway. Pullstations shall be located not more than 15 feet from end of 

the hallway. Strobes and speaker/strobes shall not be located more than 15 feet from the end 

of a hallway or change in corridor direction. 

D. Consult Engineer for minor relocations of devices that may be required to avoid obstructions, 

or for ease of installation or concealment. Mark all such relocations on record drawings. 

Contractor shall relocate devices up to 15 feet without any additional charge to the contract. 

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 

A. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the prefinal testing of the 

system. Pretest all installed devices to ensure compliance prior to the final test. 

B. The final test shall be subject to the approval and acceptance of the responsible 

Architect/Engineer, and the Fire Marshal. Provide all appropriate equipment to complete the 

testing. 

C. On completion of the acceptance tests, the Owner or his representative shall be instructed in 

the operation and testing of the system. 

3.4 CERTIFICATION/CLOSEOUT: 

A. Submit a statement to the Architect/Engineer that indicates the system has been designed, 

tested, and installed in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations. 

B. Submit diskette or CD, with all appropriate programming updates to the owner. 

C. Submit testing report to the Architect/Engineer and Fire Marshal showing results of tests. 

D. Submit letter of warranty, guaranteeing the new portion of the fire alarm system for 3 years. 

Provide a 4 hour response upon failure of any component of the fire alarm system. The 

vendor, and the contractor, are required to participate as necessary for any warranty work 

during the warranty period. 




SECTION 16760 – INTEGRATED ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION NETWORK 


1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 

A. All bids shall be based on the equipment as specified herein. The catalog numbers and 

model designations are that of the RAULAND-BORG CORPORATION. 

B. Furnish and install all speakers, raceway, wiring and other necessary components to expand 

the existing paging system into the locations shown on the drawings. If needed, either 

replace the existing amplifier or add an additional amp to provide sufficient power to run the 

system. It is the intent of this specification to provide any and all materials and labor 

necessary to produce a workable addition to an existing system. 




B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section: 

1.3 SUMMARY: 

1. Basic Electrical Requirements. 

2. Basic Electrical Requirements. 

A. This Section includes Integrated Intercom/Telecommunications System. It includes 

requirements for Integrated Electronic Communications Network system components 


1. Ceiling/Wall Mounted Speaker Assemblies. 

2. Bell/Class Change Signaling System. 

3. Public Address/Intercom System. 

4. Controls, Amplifiers, and Terminal Equipment. 

5. Power supplies. 

6. Wiring. 

7. Wall-mounted Paging Horns. 

8. Volume Attenuators. 

9. Tuner, Cassette, CD changer 


INTEGRATED ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION NETWORK 16760-1

B. Related Sections: The following Division 16 Sections contain requirements that relate to this 

Section: 

1. "Raceways," for raceways used for Integrated Electronic Communications. 

2. ”Electrical Boxes and Fittings," for boxes, cabinets and fittings used with 

communications systems. 

3. Television Distribution System. 

4. Data Network. 

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: 

A. General: Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and materials in accordance with 

these specifications and drawings to provide a complete and operating Integrated 

Intercom/Communications system for the school. 


A. Submit complete and descriptive shop drawings indicating compliance with the specifications 

herein. Submit in accordance with the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16050. 

1. Submit equipment prints, inter-panel and intra-panel, full electronic wiring diagrams 

and specification sheets for each item specified herein. Provide a tabulation of the 

specification clearly comparing the submitted item with the specified item, being able 

to refer to all written expressed functions and capabilities. Specification Sheets shall 

be submitted on all items including cable types. 

2. Shop drawings, detailing Integrated Electronic Communications Network system 


a. Built-in station arrangement. 

b. Equipment cabinet arrangement. 

3. Wiring diagrams, detailing wiring for power, signal, and control, differentiating clearly 

between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. Identify terminals to 

facilitate installation, operation and maintenance. 

4. Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all equipment. 

5. Provide a riser diagram for the system showing in technically accurate detail all 

connections, interconnections, and all provisions available and made for adaptability 

of all specified future functions. In addition, riser diagram must include all 

calculations, charts, and test data necessary to demonstrate that all systems and 

system components deliver the specified signals, grades, and levels at all required 

points and locations. 

6. Submit a certificate of completion of installation and service training 




A. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer to 

function as a complete system and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's complete 

service notes and drawings detailing all interconnections. 

B. The contractor shall be an established communications and electronics contractor that has 

had and currently maintains a locally run and operated business for at least five (5) years. 

The contractor shall utilize a duly authorized distributor of the equipment supplied for this 

project location with full manufacturer's warranty privileges. 

C. The contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that the supplier maintains a 

fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to 

the system. The supplier shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper 

proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment 

being supplied. 

D. Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with applicable requirements of 

NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" including, but not limited to: 

1. Article 250, Grounding. 

2. Article 300, Part A. Wiring Method. 

3. Article 310, Conductors for General Wiring. 

4. Article 725, Remote Control, Signaling Circuits. 

5. Article 800, Communication Systems. 

E. EIA Compliance: Comply with the following Electronics Industries Association Standards:. 

1. Sound Systems, EIA-160. 

2. Loudspeakers, Dynamic Magnetic Structures, and Impedance, EIA-299-A. 

3. Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, EIA-310-A. 

4. Amplifiers for Sound Equipment, SE-101-A. 

5. Speakers for Sound Equipment, SE-103. 

F. Installation and start up of all systems shall be under the direct supervision of a local agency 

regularly engaged in installation, repair, and maintenance of such systems. The supplier 

shall be accredited by the proposed equipment manufacturers and be prepared to offer a 

service contract for system maintenance on completion of the guarantee period and provide 

the names, locations, and size of ten (10) recent successful installations in the area. 

G. The agency providing equipment shall be responsible for providing all specified equipment 

and mentioned services for all equipment as specified herein. The agency must be a local 

authorized distributor of all specified equipment for single source of responsibility and shall 

provide documents proving such. The agency must provide written proof that the agency is 

adequately staffed with factory-trained technicians for all of the specified equipment. The 



agency must have established business for and currently be providing all services for the 

equipment to be provided for a minimum of five (5) years. 

H. The contractor shall guarantee availability of local service by factory-trained personnel of all 

specified equipment from an authorized distributor of all equipment specified under this 

section. On-the-premise maintenance shall be provided at no cost to the purchaser for a 

period of one (1) year (parts and labor) from date of acceptance unless damage or failure is 

caused by misuse, abuse, neglect, or accident. All Rauland-Borg manufactured products are 

covered by a five (5) year (parts only) limited warranty from the date of acceptance. The 

warranty period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the owner/engineer. 

I. The contractor shall, at the owner’s request, make available a service contract offering 

continuing factory authorized service of the system after the initial warranty period. 

J. The supplier shall visit the sites and familiarize himself with the existing conditions and field 

requirements prior to submitting a proposal. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 

A. Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry space in original containers. 

Protect products from fumes and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. 



A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers shall provide the following system: 

Telecenter ICS manufactured by Rauland-Borg Corp. 

If the contractor wishes to have another manufacturer approved, said manufacturer must 

strictly comply with all of the specifications as set forth in this document. 

B. The intent of this specification is to establish a standard of quality, function and features. It is 

the responsibility of the bidder to insure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every 

standard set forth in these specifications. 

C. The functions and features specified are vital to the operation of this facility, therefore, the 

acceptance of alternate manufacturers does not release contractor from strict compliance 

with the requirements of this specification. 

D. The contractor for this work shall be held to have read all of the Bidding Requirements, the 

General Requirements of Division 1, and Contract Proposal Forms; and in the execution of 

this work, he will be bound by all of the conditions and requirements therein. 

E. The contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete functional system including all 

necessary components whether included in this specification or not. 

F. In preparing the bid, the bidder should understand that no claim shall be made against the 

owner for any costs incurred by the bidder for any equipment demonstrations which the 

owner requests. 



G. Any prior approval of an alternate system does not automatically exempt the supplier from 

meeting the intent of these specifications. Failure to comply with the operational and 

functional intent of these specifications may result in the total removal of the alternate system 

at the expense of the contractor. 

H. Alternate equipment shall be considered if submitted to the specifying authority at least ten 

(10 ) days prior to bid date. Submission of an alternate shall contain engineering drawings of 

the system with specification sheets covering all components of the system as well as all 

items of Section 1 “SUBMITTALS.” The system and equipment drawings and specifications 

sheet shall meet all items of the specification. 

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS: 

A. General: The system shall provide the state of the art in technology for all intercom 

communications, and bell schedule. The system shall be easy to learn and operate. All 

standard system programming shall be user friendly to allow the system administrator the 

ability to easily program system features. 

B. The contractor shall provide a complete and satisfactorily operating Integrated 

Intercom/Communications System as described herein, using materials and equipment of 

types, sizes, ratings, and performances as indicated. Use materials and equipment that 

comply with referenced standards and manufacturers standard design and construction, in 

accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all materials and 

equipment so they form an integrated system, with components and interconnections 

matched for optimum performance of specified functions. 

C. Features offered by this system shall be implemented and controlled by software programs 

that can be changed and expanded as customer needs evolve. 

D. The system shall allow system monitoring and administration from a local Windows 95/98/XP 

PC or remote Windows 95/98/XP PC via a modem. 

E. The system shall be an electronic system consisting of one or two amplified intercom 

channels, (classroom) speakers, call switches, and/or telephones, digital readout for display 

of call origination, and solid state logic and sensing. 

F. Ability to provide multiple zone program distribution which is not interrupted by intercom 

communications. 

G. The system shall lend itself to expansion by simple addition of modules. 

H. Two-way communication between any telephone and any room speaker. 

I. Room speakers and call switches shall be programmable and may be assigned any three, 

four or five digit number. Any room number may be reassigned at any time, and it shall not 

be dependent on wiring or circuit numbers. 

J. Sixteen (16) separate paging zones shall be provided; each location shall be programmed in 

software to belong to any combination of software zones. Initially, zones shall be provided for 


1. One zone for gymnasium/cafeteria speakers. 

2. One zone for kitchen speakers. 



3. One zone for corridor speakers. 

4. One zone for common areas. 

5. One zone for administrative areas. 

6. One zone for teachers' lounge and workrooms. 

7. One zone for media center area speakers. 

8. One zone for outside speakers. 

IMPORTANT: Speakers utilized as intercom speakers in gymnasium/cafeteria and other 

areas having their own separate sound amplification systems, shall operate completely 

independently of those sound systems 

K. Each dialing administrative telephone in the system shall be programmable for the following 

options. 

1. Allow zone paging. 

2. Allow All-Page announcements. 

3. Allow Executive Override. 

4. Allow Emergency paging. 

5. Allow activation of Time Zone tones. 

6. Set the priority level and target display of "normal" calls. 

7. Set the priority level and target display of "emergency" calls. 

8. Assignment of architectural number. 

9. Class of Service. 

10. Assignment of associated speaker to paging zone. 

11. Automatic Call-Back-Busy. 

12. Call Forward-No Answer. 

13. Call Forward-Busy. 

14. Allow activation of security monitoring functions on a per room and per zone basis. 

L. Amplified two-way voice communication shall be available from any dial phone separate from 

the system, through any speaker in the system. This shall allow hands-free communication 

to any classroom or any individual loudspeaker unit. A programmable pre-announce tone 

shall sound immediately before the intercom path is opened and a supervisory tone shall 

continue to sound at regular intervals when speaker monitoring is active. 



M. The administrative phones shall be located in the office and where indicated on the plans; 

these phones shall be used for public and inter-school communication. 

N. The system shall allow room or area security monitoring features. This will include the ability 

to support motion detectors or normally open alarm inputs. 

2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: 

. 

A. CENTRAL CONTROLLER UNIT 

The Integrated Electronic Communications Network shall have the following capabilities: 

1. Facilities for multiple operations simultaneously without interference with an 

established pattern of priorities for all administrator/classroom communication 

capabilities. 

2. Provisions for Personal Identification Numbers for selected administrators. By dialing 

their PIN at any IP telephone, the administrator shall have access to the same 

intercom/paging capabilities assigned to their office IP telephone, regardless of the 

restrictions on the phone they are currently using. 

3. Provisions for multiple attendant positions for answering outside lines and internal 

intercom calls. 

4. Facilities for the central control unit to store information and give reports on features, 

system activity, etc. upon request either on site or remotely. 

5. Facilities for automatically sounding a warning tone signal over any loudspeaker 

selected for two-way communications to alert the station attendant (classroom 

teacher) to the call and prevent unauthorized monitoring. 

6. Facilities for access to any single loudspeaker unit, zone loudspeaker unit, or all 

loudspeaker units. The warning tone signal shall sound as soon as the station is 

selected and shall be automatically repeated at regular intervals for the duration of 

the call if the voice circuit is not activated. 

7. Direct Dialing, two-way amplified voice intercom between all locations equipped with 

administrative IP telephones and staff station speakers without the use of a 

press-to-talk or talk-listen switch. 

8. The Central Controller Unit shall provide an RS-232 port for the connection of on-site 

or off-site diagnostics by distributor or factory-trained personnel. 

a. This port shall be usable for the programming and saving of all programmed data 

for each system with the utilization of an on-site or off-site computer. 

b. This port shall provide the capability of logging of various activities within the 

system. 

9. Facilities for executive override permitting an assigned telephone to "override" 

on-going intercom conversation(s) in the system. 

10. Facilities for the instantaneous distribution of emergency announcements 

simultaneously, by a single button access, to all locations equipped with speakers. 



Emergency announcements originating from any assigned administrative telephone 

shall have priority over all regular system functions. 

11. Facilities for the distribution of alarm signals to all areas equipped with speakers by 

single button access. Up to nine (9) separate distinct alarm signals shall be provided. 

Each of the distinct alarm signals can be activated by a designated single button. 

12. Capability for assigning speaker locations to any one or more of the sixteen (16) 

zones for zone paging, up to sixteen (16) zones for program distribution, eight (8) 

zones for class change “bells”, and up to eight (8) security zones. All of these zones 

may be configured to be independent of the other zones. 

13. Facilities for the origination of both “normal” and “emergency” calls from any staff 

location. Calls may originate from either a separate call switch or by going off hook 

on the Staff Phone. 

14. It shall be possible to review all calls stored in memory in the order received. 

15. Facilities for answering calls registered in the digital read-out display merely by 

pressing a single response button. This capability shall not prevent other calls from 

being placed or answered by dialing their numbers. 

16. Facilities to cancel all staff station originated calls from any administrative telephone. 

17. Facilities for assigning or changing classroom numbers by architectural or any 

desired numbering system; either three-digit, four-digit, or five-digit numbers may be 

assigned. 

18. Facilities for multiple loudspeaker or telephone conversations to take place and not 

prevent announcements, educational, or music programs from being distributed to 

other areas of the building. 

19. Facilities to automatically send incoming calls to an alternate phone or if they remain 

unanswered for a predetermined amount of time. 

20. A facility to notify a user that the intercom path called earlier is now available. If a 

busy signal is obtained, user shall dial callback feature code and hang up. System 

shall automatically call back user when intercom path is available and complete an 

intercom call to speaker. 

21. Facilities for universal wiring for all data network, telephones, intercom speakers, and 

call switches using category 6 cable. Systems requiring a custom cable plant 

dedicated to just the intercom system will not be acceptable. 

22. Facilities to provide automatic emergency instructions to be broadcast to the entire 

school when an alarm is tripped. The emergency instructions are preprogrammed 

and require no user intervention. 

23. Facilities for single button access to allow page announcements into speaker zones 

without interrupting others performing simultaneous functions. 

24. Facilities to page one or more area-wide pocket pagers when a call is placed of a 

specific call priority or all call priorities. The pocket pager will display the calling room 

number and a numeric call priority. 



25. Facilities to automatically alter a call switch’s class of service by time of day and day 

of week as directed by the owner. 

26. It shall be possible to initiate Class of Service changes either manually or 

automatically on a per station basis using internal clock set. 

a. A minimum of four independent program memory sets shall be provided. 

b. Choice of time of service change and active memory set selected shall be 

completely programmable. 

b. Class of Service Changes shall be programmable by time of day and day of 

week. 

a. A minimum of 64 unique classes of service shall be available. 

27. Capability to assign speaker locations to any one or more of the zones for zone 

paging or time signal reception. This assignment to be a programmable function. 

28. Time signal tones shall be generated on a manual or automatic basis 

29. Emergency tones shall be distributed from designated Administrative Telephones. 

30. Power amplifiers shall meet all specifications exactly as specified herein,including 

power capacity and count. 

B. ADMINISTRATIVE TELEPHONES. 

1. All telephones will be IP phones provided by owner. Integrate with the updated 

Rauland intercom system. 

C. EMERGENCY/NORMAL CALL SWITCHES: Quam CIB-3 

1. Provide one (1) “Emergency” call switch that shall activate a distinctive “EMER” level 

call from a single button activation. Button shall be clearly marked “EMER” and shall 

route call to any one or more Administrative Telephones and/or Displays for quick 

and easy response from an Administrative Telephone. In accordance with the 

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), the “Emergency” call will provide a flashing 

call assurance LED confirming that the call has been placed in the system. 

2. Provide one (1) “Normal” call switch that shall activate a distinctive “NORM” level call 

from a single button activation. Button shall be clearly marked “NORM” and shall 

route call to any one or more Administrative Telephones and/or Displays for quick 

and easy response from an Administrative Telephone. In accordance with the 

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), the “Normal” call will provide a steady call 

assurance LED confirming that the call has been placed in the system. 

D. SWITCHPANEL: 

1. Program distribution shall have the capability to be upgraded to be controlled by both 

dial-up and switch panel selection for individual speakers or program distribution 

zones. Systems not providing for both switch panel AND dial-up program distribution 

will not be acceptable. 

2. When upgraded, speaker stations may be manually accessed by rack-mounted 

switch-panels specifically designed for individual and/or group station selection 



E. PROGRAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM: 

1. The system shall provide facilities to distribute program material (i.e. cassette tape, 

CD, radio broadcasts) in the following manner: 

a. The media operator shall cue remotely located music source or select radio 

station. 

b. The media operator shall then "direct select" room(s) or areas to send the 

program via a switchpanel 

OR 

The media operator shall dial from an Administrative Telephone to select the 

room(s) or areas to distribute program 

c. Both means of switch panel and dial-up program distribution shall be accessible 

from the system 

2. Power amplifiers shall meet all specifications exactly as specified herein, including 

power capacity and count, provide a minimum of ! watt power to all intercom 

speaker locations plus 15 watts power to all horn type speaker locations: 

F. CLASSROOM SECURITY AND SUPERVISION INTERFACE: 

1. Each classroom connected to the intercom system shall offer the ability to interface to 

a security transducer-like motion detector or door switch. 

2. All field wiring shall be individually supervised for opens or shorts to each call station 

and security devices. 

3. No other wiring or equipment shall be needed to secure a classroom. 

4. Arming and disarming functions shall be performed by dial-up via the Administrative 

Telephone(s). 

5. Easy interface shall be provided to the main security system. 

6. Any systems not providing inherent security functions in the classrooms shall not be 

acceptable. 

G. DATA LOGGING: 

1. System wide events. The System Log shall contain all events that occurred in the 

system for which event logging has been enabled to diagnose or document system 

usage. 

2. Schedule parameters. Shows for each day-of-the-week the times-of-day when 

system configuration modes change. 

3. System logging. System Log Dump report shall list all events occurred in the system 

for which event logging has been enabled to diagnose or document system usage. 

4. System shall be self-monitoring. System shall include a background process 

dedicated to self-monitoring. 

H. ACCESSORIES: 



1. Boiler Rooms & Outside Speakers for installation at existing walls (surface mounted) 

a. Reentrant type. 

b. Frequency Response: 375 to 14,000 Hz. 

c. Power Handling: 15 Watts, 60 Watts Peak. 

d. Variable screw taps, 25 V transformer. 

e. Sound Pressure Level: 110 dB at 1 meter with 1-watt input. 

f. Mounting: Horizontal, and vertical. 


h. Quam Model System 6VP: Grill, Horn, and Back box 

2. Outside Speakers for installation in new walls (recessed in the wall): 

a. Reentrant type. 

b. Frequency Response: 375 to 14,000 Hz. 

c. Power Handling: 15 Watts, 60 Watts Peak. 

d. Variable screw taps, 25 V transformer. 

e. Sound Pressure Level: 110 dB at 1 meter with 1-watt input. 

f. Mounting: Horizontal, and vertical. 


h. Quam Model H16/SVP: Grill and Horn 

i. Quam Model ES-8 Back box. 

3. Ceiling-Mounted Loudspeakers. 

a. 8" Cone. 

b. Frequency Response: 65 to 17,000 Cycles. 

c. Power Rated: 8 Watts. 

d. Magnet: 5 Ounce. 

e. Axial Sensitivity: 93 dB at 4 feet with 1-watt input. 

f. 25-watt variable tap transformer. 

g. Quam Model 10X/BU/W, Quam ERD-8U, Quam SSB-2 

4. Wall Mounted Loudspeakers for existing classrooms. 

a. 8" Cone. 

b. Frequency Response: 65 to 17,000 Cycles. 

c. Power Rated: 8 Watts. 

d. Magnet: 10 Ounce. 

e. Axial Sensitivity: 93 dB at 4 feet with 1-watt input. 

f. 25-watt variable tap transformer. 

g. Quam System 3 with grill and back box. 

5. Wall Mounted Loudspeakers for existing hallways 

a. Retrofit existing enclosure with new speaker 8C10PAX/TBL25 

6. Surface-mounted speaker housings in areas so designated. 

a. Bi-directional. 

b. Rauland Model 3904-8. 

7. All speaker housings for recessed wall mounting. 

a. Rauland ACC1004 with Rauland ACC1100 Backbox. 



2.4 WIRING: 

b. All ceiling-mounted speakers to be provided with Rauland ACC1000 Baffle. 

c. All ceiling-mounted speakers shall be provided with Rauland ACC1101 Backbox 

and ACC1104 Bridge or ACCBAF-TILE speaker assembly 

8. Volume Controls 

a. Quam Model QC-10. 

9. Surge Protection 

a. Surgex, SX2120. 

A. All speakers shall be connected in parallel with minimum 20 gauge two twisted pair wire 

(West Penn 25355). 


3.1 EXAMINATION: 

A. Examine conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other 

conditions affecting the performance of the Integrated Intercom system. 

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. GENERAL 

1. Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. Install 

equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. WIRING METHODS: 

1. Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters, and except in 

accessible ceiling spaces, and in gypsum board partitions, where cable wiring 

method may be used. Use UL listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces 

including plenum ceilings. Conceal wiring except in unfinished spaces. 

C. IMPEDANCE AND LEVEL MATCHING: 

1. Carefully match input and output impedance’s and signal levels at signal interfaces. 

Provide matching networks where required. 

D. CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING: 

1. Install control circuits in accordance with NFPA 70 and as indicated. Provide number 

of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide control functions 

indicated or specified. 

2. The contractor shall mount a main distribution frame behind the Integrated Electronic 

Communications Network console. Each wire shall be laid down on terminal punch 



locks and identified by the actual room location it serves. All communications points 

shall be wired into this main distribution frame, laid down in sequence, and identified 

by which line it is on and the point position it serves. 

3. All housings are to be located as specified and shown on drawings. 

4. Make installation in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's drawings and 

instructions. 

5. The contractor shall provide necessary transient protection on the AC power feed, all 

station lines leaving or entering the building, and all central office trunks. All 

protection shall be as recommended by the equipment supplier and referenced to 

earth ground. 

E. SPLICES, TAPS, AND TERMINATIONS: 

1. Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal punch blocks in junction, 

pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures. 

F. WIRING WITHIN ENCLOSURES: 

1. Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to 

terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars. 

2. Provide physical isolation from each other for speaker-microphone, line-level, 

speaker-level, and power wiring. Run in separate raceways, or where exposed or in 

same enclosure, provide 12 inch minimum separation between conductors to 

speaker-microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Provide 

physical separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer for other Integrated 

Electronic Communications Network system conductors 

G. IDENTIFICATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: 

1. Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate 

wires and cables so all media are identified in coordination with system wiring 

diagrams. 

H. WEATHERPROOFING: 

1. Provide weatherproof enclosures for items mounted outdoors or exposed to weather. 

I. REPAIRS: 

3.3 GROUNDING 

1. Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for installation, 

repair, restore, and refinish to original appearance. 

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for Integrated Electronic Communications Network 

systems as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 

Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 

B. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize 

to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross 



talk, and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, 

record, and report ground resistance. 

C. The contractor shall provide all necessary transient protection on the AC power feed and on 

all station lines leaving or entering the building. 

D. The contractor shall note in his system drawings, the type and location of these protection 

devices as well as all wiring information. 

E. The contractor shall furnish and install a dedicated, isolated earth ground from. the central 

equipment rack and bond to the incoming electrical service ground buss bar. 


A. MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES: 

1. Provide services of a duly factory authorized service representative for this project 

location to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, 

testing, and adjustment of the system. 

B. INSPECTION: 

1. Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and 

interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Provide a list of final tap settings 

of paging speaker line matching transformers. 

C. TESTING: 

3.5 COMMISSIONING: 

1. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely re-test work affected by such 

deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system 

meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards. 

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating, 

troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a minimum 

of ten (10) hours training. O&M’s and Users Guides to be provided at the time of this training. 

B. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least seven days advance notice 

3.6 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS: 

A. When requested by the Architect within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide 

on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting matching transformer taps, and 

adjusting controls to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three (3) visits to the site 

for this purpose. 

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: 

A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and 

deterioration. 




SECTION 16771 - CLASSROOM SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM, PROJECTORS, AND 

SMARTBOARDS 

PART I - GENERAL 


A. Relocate existing classroom sound amplification system, ceiling projector and projector 

mounts, and smartboards from trailer classrooms to classrooms in new addition. Provide all 

required conduit, cables, input plates, j-boxes, etc. as herein specified and shown on the 

drawings. System shall be complete with all accessories and components necessary for a 

complete operational system. 


A. EMT raceways per section 16130. 

B. Minimum raceway size shall be !” unless otherwise noted. Raceways shall be EMT unless 

otherwise noted and shall be installed with a minimum of bends. Bends where used, shall 

have 12" minimum radius. Raceways exceeding 100 feet or having more than two right angle 

bends shall have a pullbox in an accessible location approximately in the center of the run 

PART II - PRODUCTS 

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR CABLES AND INPUT PLATES: 

A. RapidRun, Extron, as distributed by Marshall Industries, or approved equal. 


the General Conditions and Division 16050. 

PART III – EXECUTION 

3.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 

A. No hum, noise, or distortion shall be audible under any normal operating condition. 

B. Test all system at the end of the installation and verify that all components are fully 

operational and functional. 


A. Do not run microphone, speaker or other low voltage cables adjacent to or in the same 

raceway as power conduits. 

B. Do not splice cables at any point other than at the standard termination point. 

C. Mark all cables at each end with permanent shrink-on wire labels. 


CLASSROOM SOUND REINFORCEMENTSYSTEM, PROJECTORS, AND SMARTBOARDS 16771-1

D. Fasten all equipment securely in place plumb and square. Where equipment is installed in 

racks, utilize all fastening holes as recommended by manufacturer. Provide blank matching 

panels over panel spaces. 



CLASSROOM SOUND REINFORCEMENTSYSTEM, PROJECTORS, AND SMARTBOARDS 16771-2

SECTION 16780 – TELEVISION SYSTEMS 



A. Provide new television system head end equipment and all equipment and labor necessary 

for television distribution system in the building. Make required connections between new TV 

head end equipment and existing TV equipment in tunnel. The scope of work of this section 

shall include system design and installation. The riser diagram shown on the drawings is 

intended to show the general configuration of the system and does not indicate all devices 

needed. 

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCES: 

A. The MATV contractor must be a distributor of all equipment utilized in the MATV system. 

This contractor must have a minimum of 5 years of experience in the specific application of 

the equipment proposed for these systems. 


A. Submit complete and descriptive shop drawings. Drawings shall indicate the type of 

equipment to be used and a one-line system diagram. 

1.4 DESCRIPTION: 

A. The system shall be designed to receive inputs from a CATV source and as indicated on the 

riser diagram. It shall include all necessary amplifiers, splitters, directional couplers, 

equalizers, terminators, cable, outlets, and other products necessary for a complete and 

operational system. 

B. The CATV signal will be delivered to the telephone board by the Cable TV Utility. Extend this 

signal to the central equipment location. 

C. The system shall deliver 10dB ± 3dB on a 75 ohm line at each outlet and shall be free of 

interference, snow, ghosts, or other anomalies. The responsibility for assuring this signal 

level rests with the Contractor. Provide all components necessary to assure this 

performance. 

D. If the contractor feels that any of the components specified in this section are not compatible 

with, or will not provide optimum operation in the system he has designed, he should bring 

this to the attention of the Architect prior to bidding. 



A. Blonder-Tongue, Pico Macon 


TELEVISION SYSTEMS 16780-1



2.2 CABLES: 

A. Each reel of coaxial cable used in the system shall be sweep tested for transmission and 

structural return loss and be so certified in writing by the cable manufacturer. Transmission 

sweep tests shall establish conformance to guaranteed loss values from 20-108 MHz, 174- 

216 MHz and 470-890 MHz. Structural return loss tests by sweep method shall show a 

minimum, return loss of 26 dB RL VHF, 16 dB RL UHF as compared to a fixed 75-ohm 

reference from 20-108 MHz, 174-216 MHz and from 470-890 Mhz. 

B. Coaxial cables shall be run in continuous lengths except for terminations and no splices shall 

be permitted in any conduit run. Cables shall be installed to avoid sharp bends or physical 

distortion. 

C. Individual drops to rooms shall be West Penn 25841 (RG-6U). Main trunk runs shall be West 

Penn 25821 (RG-11) or as specified on the drawings, with drawing notes taking precedence. 

D. Cable shall be approved for air plenum use if required by the construction. 

2.3 SPLITTERS: 

A. Two-way line splitters shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating band 

from 12 MHz to 300 MHz and from 470 to 890 MHz. The unit shall be of the hybrid design 

with a 75 ohm match of 23.0 dB RL minimum on all inputs and outputs. Output isolation shall 

be not less than 23.0 dB VHF - 18.0 dB UHF. 

B. Two-way line splitters shall have a signal loss of not more than VHF 3.7 dB UHF 4.0 dB at 

each output. All unused outputs on the splitters shall be terminated with 75 ohm termination. 

C. Four-way line splitters shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating band 

from 12 MHz to 216 MHz and from 470 to 890 MHz. The unit shall be of the hybrid design 

with a 75 ohm match of 24.0 dB RL minimum on all input and outputs. Output isolation shall 

be not less than 16.0 dB VHF, 11.5 dB UHF. 

D. Four-way line splitter shall have a signal loss of not more than VHF 6.2 dB; UHF 6.7 Db. 

E. Splitters shall be Blonder-Tongue model MS-2U/V stock No. 3435 or MS-4U/V Stock No. 

3436. 

F. Multi-port Taps: Shall have a flat frequency response over the entire operating bandwidth of 

550 Mhz. Taps shall be 8 port with equal loss between all ports. The unit shall be of the 

hybrid design with a 75 ohm match of 24.0 dB. 

G. Distribution Amplifiers: Shall have an operating range of 54-550 Mhz. and provide a flat gain 

of 30 dB forward and 20 dB reverse with internal slope and tilt adjustment. Amplifier must be 

117 volt AC line powered and must have modular power supply and mother-board and be 

capable of modular internal equalization. 

2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: 

A. Agile Modulator: Blonder Tongue, AM-60-860, Qty: 1 



B. Broad Band Amplifier: Blonder Tongue, RMDA 750-30P, Qty: 2 

C. Shelf: Atlas, SH-15-3, Qty: 1 

D. VCD/DVD Player: Panasonic, DM REZ 48VK, Qty: 1 

E. Equipment rack: Atlas, 61”, FMA35-255A, Qty: 1 

F. Rack Panels: Marshal Industries, RP, Qty: As required 

G. Splitters, Tapes, Plates, Connectors, Patch Cables: Marshal Industries, Misc., Qty: As 

required for complete operating system 

H. Surge Protection: Surgex, SX2120, Qty: 1 



A. Main cable runs shall be installed in corridors for ease of future access. 

B. Do not use cable tray as a raceway. Cable tray is dedicated to voice and data cables. Video 

cables shall be kept a minimum of 6" from data cables. 

3.2 TESTING: 

A. The contractor shall, after the system is installed and adjusted, notify the owner to arrange for 

an acceptance test at a mutually convenient time. 

B. The contractor shall prove that reception quality at any outlets selected by the owner (or his 

authorized representative) is equal to or better than reception normally available in the area 

and that signal strength is as specified. 






SECTION 16781 - SECURITY INTRUSION DETECTION AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS 





B. Division-16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 


A. The security intrusion detection and access control systems is hereby defined to include, but 

not be limited to equipment, raceway, outlets, coverplates, cabinets, grounding and 

miscellaneous items required for complete system. 

B. Refer to other Division-16 sections for requirements for raceways, trays, boxes and fittings, 

and supporting devices, and other sections, as applicable. 

C. Access control system head end equipment and proximity card reader with all required 

accessories (door contact, request for exit, mag lock/electric strike, conduit and wiring) to be 

provided as part of the base bid. 

D. (2) Proximity card readers with all required accessories (door contact, request for exit, mag 

lock/electric strike, conduit and wiring) to be provided as part of the alternate #1. 

E. Security intrusion detection system to be provided as part of the alternate #2. 


A. MANUFACTURERS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of security system equipment 

and components of the types described here-in and whose products have been in 

satisfactory use in similar applications for not less than 10 years. 

B. INSTALLER: Qualified technicians: With at least 3 years of successful installation 

experience with security systems, and shall be a Bosch Certified Security Dealer and 

Readykey Pro certified. 


A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data sheets including specifications, installation 

instructions, and general recommendation for each type of equipment specified. 

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit dimensioned drawings and wiring layout for any changes in 

wiring from the layout on the drawings. 



A. Bosch supplied by Nelson Fire System or approved equal. 


SECURITY INTRUSION DETECTION AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS 16781-1



2.2 GENERAL: 

A. Provide a complete and operable security intrusion detection and access control systems, 

which utilizes door contact, motion sensor and card readers to maintain building security. 

2.3 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM: 

A. Intrusion Detection Panel Bosch No. 9412GV2. Provide intrusion detection panel complete 

with the following items: 

1. Transformer No. D1640 

2. Dual Phone Line Switcher No. D928 

3. Addressable Expansion Module No. D8125. 

4. Ethernet Interface Module No. DX4020. 

5. ATM keypad No. D1260B 

6. Battery 7AH 12VDC 

7. Surface Mount Can, 16” H x 16” W x 3.5” D. 

8. Transformer/Receptacle Kit No. D8004 

B. Power Supply Panel Bosch No. RK-AL 400ULX. Provide power supply, complete with the 

following items. 

1. Battery 7AH 12VDC. 

2. Surface Mount Can, 16” H x 16” W x 3.5” D. 

3. Transformer/Receptacle Kit No. D8004. 

C. Provide the following field installed devices: 

1. Popit No. D9127U. 

2. ATM Keypad No. D1260B. 

3. Door Contact Sentrol No. 1078. 

4. Infrared Detectors: 

2.4 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 

a. Wide Motion Detection Systems ISN-CCI-50W. 

b. Narrow Motion Detection Systems ISN-CCI-100N. 

c. 360° Motion Detection Systems DS939. 

A. Access Control Panel Bosch Ready Key Pro. Provide access control panel complete with the 

following items: 

1. Intelligent System Controller No. LNL-500. 

2. Dual-Reader Interface Module No. LNL-1320. 

a. Provide one module for every two doors. 

3. Onboard Cobox Micro. Serial Server No. LNL-ETHLAN-MICR. 

4. Interface with security panel No. DX4020 

5. Surface Mount Can 24” H x 18” W x 4.5” D. 



B. Power Supply Panel: Bosch No. RK-AL400 ULX. Provide power supply panel complete with 

the following item: 

1. Battery 18AH 12VFC. 

C. Provide the following field installed devices: 

1. Office Panic Switch. 

2. Proximity Card Reader; Bosch Corp AWID SP-6820 

D. Provide a laptop computer for client software Access Control System. Computer to be 

mounted in a lockable cabinet next to the Access Control Cabinet. The laptop shall meet the 

following minimum requirements: 

2.5 WIRING: 

1. 2.33 GHz Dual Core Processor 

2. 1 Gb of DDR2 ram 

3. 100Gb SATA hard drive (7200 RPM) 

4. 24X CD-RW/DVD Drive 

5. 128Mb video card 

6. 32 Bit Sound Card 

7. 1Gb Network interface card 

8. 15.4 TFT screen 

9. PC card: One Type I or Type II. 

10. I/O Ports: 2 USB 2.0, VGA, Serial 

11. Windows XP Pro Operating System. 

A. Provide the following wiring for the intrusion detection system components. 

1. ATM Keypad: 2 pair #18 twisted. 

2. Popit/Motion/ Door Contact: 2 pair #18 twisted. 

3. Network Switch: Two CAT6 cables. 

4. Fire Alarm Transponder: 2 #18. 

5. Access Control Panel: 8 #18. 

6. Phone Board: 8 #22, connected ahead of all other phone equipment. 

B. Provide the following wiring for the access control system components. 


1. Office Panic Switch: 2 pair #18 twisted 

2. Door Hardware Power Supply- Belden #638AFS Access Control Banana Peel Cable. 

3. Door Hardware Power Supply to the following: 

a. Card Reader; Belden #638AFS. Access Control Banana Peel Cable. 

b. Door Hardware; 1 pair #18 twisted. 

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SECURITY SYSTEM 

A. GENERAL: Install security system as indicated, in accordance with equipment 

manufacturers written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that 

system equipment complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, and 

applicable portions of NECA's "Standards of Installation" practices. 



B. Review and coordinate security system layout and wiring with Jordan School District 

Maintenance Department and get approval prior to rough-in. 

C. Coordinate all equipment locations and mounting details with other trades and suppliers. 

D. Mount security devices a minimum of 3 feet from heat or air movement sources 

E. GROUNDING: Provide grounding connections sufficiently tight to assure permanent and 

effective ground. 

F. TESTING: Upon completion of installation of system and after energized, demonstrate 

system compliance with intent. 

G. WIRING: Install all wiring in conduit raceway. Wire all components of the system as shown 

and in accordance with factory recommendations. All devices shall be wired through POPIT 

modules to a data loop which is tied to the control communicator. All final connections shall 

be made by a qualified technician familiar with the school district procedures and the 

manufacturer's equipment. Label each junction box throughout system, ‘Security’, indicate 

zone number, and paint cover of junction boxes orange (Kwal Howells Orange Fiesta 

AC107Y). 

H. In addition to those shown on drawings, provide 20 popits, 20 door contacts, 10 wide infrared 

detectors, 10 narrow infrared detectors, 10 360° infrared detectors, and 5 card readers as 

directed by Architect/ Engineer. Provide 100’ of conduit with 2 pair #18 twisted for each 

device and connect into loop as directed. Provide 1000’ of conduit with Belden #638AFS 

cable for each reader. Credit back all unused material and labor to the Owner. 

I. ZONING: Each location shall be provided with a D8127T POPIT module which has been 

assigned a discreet address. Each detector, door switch, sensing device shall be considered 

a location. Multiple doors at a common entry shall be considered one location. 

J. LABELING: Label all devices with their appropriate address with 30 point KROY labels. 

K. WARRANTY: Provide warranty complying with Division 16001. 

L. Directed by the Engineer/Architect. 

3.2 AS BUILT DRAWINGS: 

A. A complete set of CAD “AS-BUILT” Drawings showing installed wiring, color coding, specific 

interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of the equipment shall be 

delivered to the owner upon completion of the system. 

B. A building map (2 copies)shall be supplied to the owner indicating the exact location of all 

devices along with the addresses of the individual devices. Install building security map 

adjacent to the security control panel. Provide high quality plastic sign (map holder) with two 

layers. The back layer shall be painted black. The front layer shall be a clear center for 

viewing the CAD security drawing. Edges of the sign shall be colored to match the building 

interior. The building map shall indicate the various by the use of different colors (minimum 

of five colors). 

C. The disk containing the files shall be supplied to the owner. These disks shall include all 

information required to allow the district to change the security program themselves. These 

computer disks shall contain a minimum of the following: 




1. CAD drawing files of building security map. 

2. CAD drawing files of AS BUILT security components and point to point connections. 

3. General configuration programming. 

4. Job specific configuration programming. 

5. Tutorial file on complete programming of security system. 





SECTION 17000 – TELEPHONE AND DATA DISTRIBUTION 

DIVISION 16000 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE TO READ, UNDERSTAND 

AND ABIDE TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OF DIVISION 271010 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY 

AND THE SCOPE OF THE WORK THAT IS BEING REQUIRED 

DIVISION 16000 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE ALL PATHWAYS 

(CONDUITS, CABLE BASKET TRAYS, WALL OR FLOOR PENETRATIONS, GROUNDING AND 

BONDING TO ENABLE DIVISION 271010 CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL TELECOM CABLING 

WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE CONSTRUCTION PROJECT 

PART 1-GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY: 

A. Section Includes: Equipment, materials, labor, and services to provide a telephone and data 

distribution system including, but not limited to: 

REFERENCE: MDF-Main Distribution Frame IDF- Intermediate Data Facilities 

1. Telephone and data cabling terminations 

2. Optical fiber and terminations 

3. Telecommunications faceplates 

4. Terminal blocks/cross-connect systems 

5. Equipment racks and cabinets 

6. System testing 

7. Documentation and submissions 

8. The District will provide and install all computers and servers. 

9. The District is responsible to patch all connections both in the closets and within each 

location-the ports to be used will only be patched over, and dressed out within the 

closets and locations. 

B. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, and services, not specifically mentioned or shown, 

which may be necessary to complete or perfect all parts of the installation. Ensure that they 

are in compliance with requirements stated or reasonably inferred by the contract documents. 

C. Work not included: 

1. The following work will be done by others: 

a. Off-site services. 


TELEPHONE AND DATA DISTRIBUTION 17000-1

1.2 REFERENCES: 

b. Providing 120V wiring and outlets. 

c. Providing servers, computers, and other active devices except as described in 

subsection 1A. 

d. Configuration of network switches provided by contractor to be completed by 

Alpine School District IT Department. Deliver device to the department for this 

process. 

e. Purchase and installation of network components, and phone system. 

f. Cable pathways – conduit, cable basket (with exception of MDF and IDF’s), etc 

to be installed by division 16000 contractor. See Part 3 Execution for 

requirements. Cable tray is not to be any less than 12 inches wide and 4 inches 

high through main corridor pathways. 

A. Test and install telecommunications cabling network per manufacturer's requirements and in 

accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code®), state codes, local codes, requirements 

of authorities having jurisdiction, and particularly the following standards. 

**Also reference Part 3: Execution for specific detail on conduit paths, conduit sizing 

and District expectations for installation. 

ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards 

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Part: 1. 

(Except where specified as exception) general requirements 

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications cabling standard 

Part 2: Balanced twisted pair cabling components 

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 - Optical fiber cabling component standards. 

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications 

Pathways and Spaces. 

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 - The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications 

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings. 

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for 

Telecommunications. 

B. Install cabling in accordance with the most recent edition of BICSI® publications: 

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual. 

BICSI - Cabling Installation Manual. 



A. The typical telecommunications work area outlet - "(A)" 

Consists of a single-gang plate with 4 ports - 2 jacks - (2 blank). 

Each outlet receives one White (1) four-pair Category 6 cable, and one Blue (1) four-pair data 

Category 6 cable installed from the work area outlet to the MDF/IDF. The White Cat 6 cable is 

dedicated to voice telecommunications service. The Blue Cat 6 cable is dedicated to data 

communications. Voice cables terminate to rack mount modular patch panels, and data 

cables terminate to rack mount modular patch panels. See wiring diagram for details. 

Cabling manufacture is to be consistent throughout the location infrastructure with the 

exception of the cable runs that must be ran through the concrete slab on the ground and 

those locations will be installed using UniPrise outdoor rated CAT 6 Part Number 6NF4+ 

cabling as specified in Section Part 2-Products. 

B. The typical telecommunications work area outlet - "(B)" 

**District Standard - preferred in all office/Admin locations or as referenced in plans 

Consists of a single-gang plate with 4 ports - 4 jacks – (0 blank). 

Each outlet receives two White (2) four-pair Category 6 cable, and two Blue (2) four-pair data 

Category 6 cables installed from the work area outlet to the MDF/IDF. The White Cat 6 cable 

is dedicated to voice telecommunications service. The Blue Cat 6 cables are dedicated to 

data communications. Voice cables terminate to rack mount modular patch panels, and data 

cables terminate to rack mount modular patch panels. See wiring diagram for details. 

Cabling manufacture is to be consistent throughout the location infrastructure. 

C. The typical Lab telecommunications work area outlet "(L)-x where X=1-8 

Consists of a single gang plate with 2-4 ports and a double gang face plate with 6-8 ports. 

Each jack (x) receives one four-pair Category 6 cable installed from the work area outlet to the 

MDF/IDF. Data cables terminate to rack mount modular patch panels. See wiring diagram. 

Cabling manufacture is to be consistent throughout the location infrastructure. 

D. Voice only copper backbone cabling consists of multiple pair category 5E unshielded twistedpair 

installed from the MDF to the IDF(s) and/or from the MDF to the IDF to the HC. This 

backbone will be utilized for voice telecommunications service only. Termination of the cross 

connect shall be patch panel to patch panel. Pair counts as indicated on the drawings. 

E. Data communications backbone cabling consists of SIEMON 50/125 mm multimode tight 

buffered, laser optimized optical fiber cable - armored fiber according to Section 2 Part 2 

Subsection e. installed from the MDF to each of the IDF locations. There is to be a minimum 

of a 24-count feed installed into each IDF. 


*Cat 6 4-pair cables may be specified by the Alpine School District Director of IT Infrastructure 

in addition to fiber if distances allow and there may be future need. 

A. Submit to the engineer/designer product data (including cut sheets and catalog information). 

Submit product data with such promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the 

work or in the activities of separate contractors. The engineer/designer and the Infrastructure 

supervisor will indicate approval of product data submitted to the engineer by stamping such 

submittals "APPROVED" with a stamp. 



B. Perform no portion of the work requiring submittal and review of the product data until the 

electrical engineer and Director of IT Infrastructure have approved the respective submittal. 

Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 

C. Submit product data sheets as a complete set within thirty (30) days of award of contract 

For initial submission and for re-submission required for approval, submit eight (8) copies of 

each item. The engineer will not return copies. Make reproductions as required for your use 

and distribution to subcontractors 

D. General: Submit the following: 

1. Bill of materials, noting long lead-time items. 

E. Product Data: Provide catalog cut sheets and information for the following: 

1. Cabling and optical fiber. 

2. Outlets, jacks, faceplates, and connectors. 

3. Patch panels required for all terminations both phone and data. 

4. Enclosures, racks, horizontal and vertical cable management. 

F. Project record drawings: 

1. Submit to the District Technology Department, the project record drawings at 

conclusion of the project and include. 


a. As built drawings indicating locations and identification of work area outlets, 

nodes, telecommunications rooms (MDF’S/IDF’S), and backbone (riser) cable 

runs. This should be provided on disk format (CD) as well as a hard copy. 

Provide AutoCAD as-built drawings. Provide AutoCAD as-built drawings. Post a 

laminated copy on site within each MDF and IDF. 

**Release of payment will not be permitted until drawings are provided. 

b. Cross-connect schedules including entrance point, main cross-connects, 

intermediate cross-connects, and horizontal cross-connects. 

c. Labeling and administration documentation. 

d. Warranty documents for equipment. 

e. Copper certification test results on CD with appropriate viewing software. 

f. Optical fiber power meter/light source test results. 

A. The following CERTIFIED INSTALLATION contractors are approved for the work of this 

section: 



1. CACHE VALLEY ELECTRIC COMPANY – Salt Lake City, Utah. 

2. NIELS FUGAL SONS COMPANY - Pleasant Grove, Utah 

B. The following manufacturer's cabling systems are approved for the work of this section: NO 

EXCEPTIONS 

1. SIEMON end to end connectivity (Fiber Plant, Cabling plant, Jacks, faceplates, patch 

bays, patch cables for WA’s and TR’s-end to end). No substitutes accepted 

2. Uniprise outdoor CAT 6 part number 6NF4+ cable for all ground level, under slab 

cable pathways 

C. Division 17000 contractor shall meet the following requirements: NO EXCEPTIONS. If 

you do not understand any aspect of these specifications, call Matt Johnson – Director 

of IT Infrastructure at 717-4705 for clarification 

1. RCDD on staff, full time, to oversee bid and installation procedures. 

**Division 17000 Contractor is solely responsible to absorb any cost for change 

orders that are not stated as part of the bid submittal process. If in design of the 

infrastructure for a plan there is need for change, provide an addenda to the bid 

stating needs and provide a complete cost break out. 

2. SIEMON certified designer. 

3. SIEMON certified installation technician. 

4. BICSI certified Installer II and Installer I technicians on staff, on project full time. 

D. The contractor shall have worked satisfactorily for a minimum of five (5) years on systems of 

this type and size within a fifty mile radius of the center of Alpine School District. 

E. The vendor shall have Utah County or Salt Lake County based service personnel, factory 

trained to service the equipment proposed with a normal response to service calls (not to 

exceed two hours for major systems failures) on the same day. 

F. Upon request made by the electrical engineer/designer/Alpine School District Director of IT 

Infrastructure, furnish a list of references with specific information regarding type of project 

and involvement in providing of equipment and systems. 

G. Material and equipment shall be new, and conform to grade, quality, and standards specified. 

Equipment and materials of the same type shall be a product of the same manufacturer 

throughout. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Unless otherwise specified, unconditionally guarantee in writing of the workmanship for a 

period of not less than twenty-five (25) years from date of acceptance by the owner. The 

owner shall deem acceptance as beneficial use. 

B. Transfer manufacturer's SIEMON PREMIUM 6 WARRANTY (minimum 25 years) warranties 

to the owner. Warranty proprietary equipment and systems involved in this contract during the 



guarantee period. Final payment shall not relieve you of these obligations. A copy of the 

warranty is to be provided at the completion of the project to the Alpine School District 

Director of IT Infrastructure. 

C. UniPrise cabling installed in under slab conduit pathways on the ground level areas are to be 

grandfathered in as part of the SIEMON PREMIUM 6 WARRANTY, as the Alpine School 

District has specified CommScope cabling in years past 


568 A WIRING STANDARD WILL BE FOLLOWED FOR ALL CABLING TERMINATIONS 

INSTALLED 

2.1 VOICE/DATA TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE BACKBONE CABLE 

A. DATA (General 24 Strand 50 Micron 10G interlocking armor – PLENUM Part Number: 

BE0241PNU-ILPA) Multimode 50/125 µm diameter tight-buffered, laser optimized optical 

fiber, with fiber counts as indicated on drawings. A minimum of two strands per switch to be 

installed plus allow 50% growth on the backbone stands or pair counts is required. 

1. Siemon 1U rack mount fiber tray (1 per MDF/IDF mounted in the top 1U of 

the data rack, just below the j-bolt that attaches the network rack to the cable 

tray) 

PART NUMBER: SIEMON FCP3-DWR RACK MOUNT FIBER TRAY 

2. Siemon fiber tray bulkhead (number of bulkheads to accommodate every 

strand of fiber that is specified below.) 

PART NUMBER: SIEMON RIC-F_LC12-01 

Note: as a minimum, there needs to be a 24 count fiber backbone between all IDF’s. 

B. VOICE (Plenum Category 5E) Solid Copper, 24 AWG, twisted-pair backbone cable, in 25 pair 

increments as indicated on drawings. 

2.2 VOICE TELECOMMUNICATIONS STATION CABLE 

A. SEIMON CAT 6 PLENUM - 9C6P4-E3-(02)-RXA White) Four-pair 24 AWG, solid-copper 

station cable Classified Category 6. Cabling manufacture is to be consistent throughout the 

location infrastructure. 

B. UniPrise outdoor CAT 6 - 6NF4+ cable for all under slab ground level cable paths. 

2.3 DATA STATION CABLE 

A. SEIMON CAT 6 PLENUM - 9C6P4-E2-(06)-RXA Blue) Four-pair 24 AWG, solid-copper 

station cable Classified Category 6. Cabling manufacture is to be consistent throughout the 

location infrastructure. 

B. UniPrise outdoor CAT 6 - 6NF4+ cable for all ground level under slab cable paths. 

2.4. VOICE/DATA WORK AREA OUTLETS ("A" type) **CLASSROOMS 



A. Single-gang mounting plate SIEMON MX-FP-S-04-02 containing the following devices: 

1. 1 Voice Outlet - SIEMON MX6-02, White Cat 6 cable. White Icon. 

2. 1 Data Outlet - SIEMON MX6-02, Blue Cat 6 cable. Blue Icon. 

3. 2 Blank - SIEMON MX-BL-02 

2.5 VOICE/DATA WORK AREA OUTLETS ("B" type) **OFFICE AREAS – unless specified otherwise 

on plans. 

A. Single-gang mounting plate SIEMON MX-FP-S-04-02 containing the following devices: 

1. 2 Voice Outlets - SIEMON MX6-02, White Cat 6. White Icon. 

2. 2 Data Outlets - SIEMON MX6-02, Blue Cat 6 cable. Blue Icons. 

2.6 DATA ONLY WORK AREA OUTLETS ("L-X" type) WERE X=2-8 

A. X=1, Single data line - to be used for wireless access point-locations. Should be installed in 

the center of each of the classrooms, in the center of the office areas, faculty lounges, work 

rooms, multipurpose rooms (Gym, Auditorium, Lunch areas), computer labs, and two 

individual locations within the media center. Each of these locations is to have enough 

service loop on the access point end to get the cable below the ceiling tile. These access 

point locations will be numbered and terminated according to the other locations within each 

classroom or location. 

B. X=2, Single gang mounting plate SIEMON MX-FP-S-04-02 containing the following devices: 

1) 2 Data Outlets - SIEMON MX6-02, Blue Cat 6 cable, Blue Icons. 

C. X=4, Single gang mounting plate SIEMON MX-FP-S-04-02 containing the following devices: 

1) 4 Data Outlets - SIEMON MX6-02, Blue Cat 6 cable, Blue Icons. 

D. X=6, Double-gang mounting plate SIEMON MX-FP-S-06-02 containing the following devices: 

1) 6 Data Outlets -- SIEMON MX6-02, Blue Cat 6 cable, Blue Icons. 

E. X=8, Double-gang mounting plate SIEMON MX-FP-S-08-02 containing the following devices: 

(Double gang box) 

1) 8 Data Outlets - SIEMON MX6-02, Blue Cat 6 cable, Blue Icons 

2.7 KITCHEN WORK AREA OUTLET (K type) to be installed in the lunch serving area only 

A. Single gang mounting plate part number CT4-FP-SS-L with two (2) openings. (See section 2.6 

above for jack counts.) 

*All locations to be ran to nearest MDF/IDF.. 

** Locations should not be placed in the floor and should be placed on the walls in the areas 

called out specifically in the plans 



***All K Type terminations are to use CT-F-C6-02 jacks in specified locations. 

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS AREA OUTLETS (FIRE ALARMS, EMERGENCY DIALERS, ELEVATORS, 

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS) 

A. 1- 4 PAIR CAT 6 LINE FOR THE ELEVATOR/LIFT- REFER TO PLANS FOR EXACT 

LOCATION - terminated one pair per port sequentially on the patch panel. 

B. 1- 4 PAIR CAT 6 LINE FOR THE FIRE ALARM, EMERGENCY DIALER REFER TO 

ADMINISTRATION AREA PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION - terminated one pair per port 

sequentially on the patch panel. 

C. 1- 4 PAIR CAT 6 LINE RAN TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLER (S) AT THE 

SCHOOL. IF THERE IS MORE THAN 1 CONTROLLER, LINES NEED TO BE PULLED TO 

EACH OF THE LOCATIONS AS SPECIFIED ON THE PLANS, AND MUST HAVE A SIEMON 

MX6-02 CONNECTOR INSTALLED ON THE END OF THIS CALBLE LOCATION INSIDE OF 

THE ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLER BOX. 

D. 1- 4 PAIR CAT 6 LINE RAN installed in the center of each of the classrooms, in the center of 

the office areas, faculty lounges, work rooms, multipurpose rooms (Gym, Auditorium, Lunch 

areas), computer labs, and two individual locations within the media center. Each of these 

locations is to have enough service loops on the access point end to get the cable below the 

ceiling tile. These access point locations will be numbered and terminated according to the 

other locations within each classroom or location. 

These locations shall be indicated as a L1 location on the plans, and must be terminated into 

a patch panel in the telecommunication room nearest the room being installed, and must have 

a SIEMON MX6-02 connector installed on the classroom end so that a wireless access point 

can be plugged in 

2.9 TERMINATION OF VOICE CABLING IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM. 

A. SIEMON HD6-XX (cabled voice ports plus 25%) 19 in. rack mountable, 24 or 48 port panels 

only. 

B. Termination of the 25 or 50 pair accordingly, shall patch down on a 24 or 48 port patch bay 

respectively with one pair per port. The last pairs of the 25 or 50 pair cable may be rolled 

back and tied out of the way so that a 25 or 50 pair may be terminated into a 24 or 48 port 

patch panel. 

2.10 TERMINATION OF DATA CABLING IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS. 

A. SIEMON HD6-XX (cabled data ports plus 25% unused ports available) 19 in. rack mountable, 

24 or 48 port panels only. 

2.11 RACKS AND MANAGEMENT FOR PATCH PANELS AND SWITCHES. 

A. Panduit Rack Part #CMR19X84 with Panduit vertical wire management Part #PRV6, Panduit 

wire spool Part #PRSP5 for each vertical wire management, and Panduit patch runner dual 

hinged door Part #PRD6 for the front and rear of each rack, 19 in. equipment rack, 7 foot 6 in. 

overall height with flange base, mounting rails drilled front and back and tapped to EIA 

standards. Plan enough racks to accommodate all switches, panels, and managers to a 

maximum 70% rack capacity. 



1) Provide Siemon horizontal cable management Part #WMBK for the backside 

of each patch panel installed - 1 patch panel installed.. 

** All racks shall have ladder rack bracing in a minimum of two directions to ensure stability. 

Provide specified ladder rack as part of this process. 

Part Number: HLS1012B 

B. Where specified use wall mount Great Lakes rack Part Number# GLXXWD enclosed rack. 

Height determined by maximum of 70% rack capacity. Wall mount rack does not require 

vertical management. 

2.12 RACK MOUNTED OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATION PANEL 

A. (SIEMON) Rack mount fiber tray. 

Part NUMBER: SIEMON RIC-F_LC12-01 

2.13 OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTORS 

A. LC fiber jumpers 

2.14 OPTICAL FIBER JUMPERS 

A. (Siemon) Dual 50/125-µm optical fiber jumper cable, length as required with LC fiber 

connectors on both ends, 1 jumper per strand per MDF/IDF location). 

2.15 PATCH CORDS-DATA 

A. Siemon Category 6 250 MHz, snag less boot. 

Blue for station uplinks. Quantity to equal switch ports installed per each cable installed both 

ends. 

WA's=50% 10 foot patch cables part number MX6-8T-10-B06 

WA's=50% 7 foot patch cables part number MX6-8T-7-B06 

TR's=100% 3 OR 5 foot patch cables part numbers 

3 foot – MX6-8T-03-B06 

5 foot – MX6-8T-05-B06 

7 foot – MX6-8T-07-B06 

10 foot – MX6-8T-10-B06 

2.17 PATCH CORDS-VOICE 

A. Siemon Category 6 250 MHz, White with white snag less boot. 

White for TR uplinks. Quantity to equal ports installed per each cable installed both ends. 





TR's=50% 5 foot patch cables part numbers 

5 foot – MX6-8T-05-B02 

TR's=50% 7 foot patch cables part numbers 

7 foot – MX6-8T-07-B02 

NO CABLE WILL BE ALLOWED TO BE INSTALLED WITHOUT HAVING ADEQUATE SUPPORTS 

EVERY 3 FEET OF THE ENTIRE SPAN OF THE CABLE. 

FREE SPANNING OF CABLE WILL NOT BE ALLOWED IN ANY SPAN LONGER THAN 36 

INCHES FROM CABLE TRAY OR CONDUIT. 

CABLE BASKET TRAY IS TO BE INSTALLED BY DIVISION 26000 CONTRACTORS. THIS 

SHOULD BE INSTALLED BELOW ALL MECHANICAL PATHWAYS FOR ACCESS DURING 

INSTALLATION, AND FOR FUTURE CABLING NEEDS. 

A. Penetrations through floor and fire-rated walls shall utilize intermediate metallic conduit (IMC) 

or galvanized rigid conduit (GRC) sleeves, and shall be fire stopped after installation and 

testing, utilizing a fire stopping assembly approved for that application. To be completed by 

division 16000 contractors. 

B. Install conduits for station cabling to the nearest communications closet, unless otherwise 

noted. To be completed by division 16000 contractors. 

*NO CONDUIT SHALL EXCEED 40% FILL AS ACCORDING TO SIEMON INSTALLATION 

SPECIFICATIONS REGARDLESS OF CONDUIT LENGTH. 

ACCORDING TO SIEMONS REFERENCE GUIDE FOR CONDUIT FILL, SEE GUIDE 

BELOW: 

1 ! - INCH CONDUIT CAN HAVE NO MORE THAN 6 CABLES WITHIN 

1 - INCH CONDUIT CAN HAVE NO MORE THAN 3 CABLES WITHIN 

" - INCH CONDUIT CAN HAVE NO MORE THAN 2 CABLES WITHIN 

**NO CABLE RUN SHALL EXCEED 90 METERS/280 FEET FROM STATION LOCATION 

TO NEAREST IDF, INCLUDING SERVICE LOOP AS PER SPECS AND PATCH CABLES 

ON TERMINATION END AND MDF/IDF UPLINK,, AND SHOULD NOT EXCEED A TOTAL 

OF 180 DEGREE BEND RADIUS ( Except as approved in ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 standards)IN 

THE ENTIRE SPAN OF THE RUN. 

C. A minimum of (1) 1 1/4 inch conduit will be used for all “B” LOCATIONS, L4 LOCATIONS OR 

ANY CABLE COUNTS LARGER THAN 4 CABLES IN ONE LOCATION. ALL conduits will be 



outed in the ceiling space and not in the concrete slab. For wireless access point locations, 

! inch conduit can be utilized. 

All conduits will be run from the location in one complete and continuous path to the cable tray 

and bonded to the cable tray as per ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards and the National Electric Code. 

To be completed by division 16000 contractors. Distance from end of conduit to cable basket 

will not exceed 36 inches. 

**NOT to have more than 180 degree bend radius in the entire span of the conduit from end to 

end. If more bend radius is required, install a 4 gang electrical box after the initial first 180 

degrees of bend radius, and continue with this practice through the entire span of the conduit 

until the path is installed completely 

Each conduit installed by 16000 contractors, shall service only one location each. Each 

conduit will have a 200 lb pull string, and grounding bushing and ground wire installed by 


D. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: 

1. Cable basket and all transitions will be installed under all of the mechanical 

components, and will route to each of the MDF/IDF location. To be completed by 


2. Clear pathways will be provided by division 16000 contractor from within each room, 

to the hallway with a solid conduit ran to the location, and bonded to the cable tray for 

all locations. 

3. All cabling will be run in a cable tray or cable basket as per specified in Section 2. 

References above, and according to ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards and the National 

Electric Code. To be installed by the division 16000 contractors. 

4. All conduits will be run from location and will be bonded to the cable tray directly as 

per ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards the National Electric Code as specified above in item d. 

To be installed by division 16000 contractors. 

5. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices. 

6. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. 

Termination/Organization of racks is to be as follows: 

a. Fiber termination as necessary is to be mounted in a fiber tray in the top 2U 

of the Data rack. The first U space is to be utilized for the j-bolt to attach the rack 

to the ladder rack supports. 

b. 1 Horizontal wire management Part Number # WMBK will be placed on the rear 

of each patch panels to support the terminated cables within the patch panel. 

c. Data patch panels (48 ports) spaced so that a 1U network device can be placed 

in between each termination group of 48 cables. 

d. No zip ties to be used for grouping of wires, use Velcro strapping on all. 



e. All cables will be separated by color in the cable basket, bundled, and Velcro 

tied every 64 inches throughout the cable basket path. Once the cables are 

within the MDF/IDF room, the cables will all be dressed out from the point of 

entry within the MDF/within the room, and cables will be penciled and velco tied 

every 36 inches into the back of the rack that the cables will be terminated into. 

E. Install adequate support structures for, and install a 10-foot cable service loop in the 

MDF/IDF, AND ALSO ON THE TERMINATION END OF THE CABLE RUN. 

F. Install cables in one continuous piece. No splicing is allowed in any circumstance. 

G. Provide over voltage protection on both ends of cabling exposed to lightning or accidental 

contact with power conductors. 

H. A minimum of a 24-strand Backbone fiber will be required from the MDF to each switch in any 

IDF. Also fiber jumpers for each fiber termination made within the bulkhead. 

I. All fiber is to armored, Plenum rated, Siemon Fiber optic plant. 

J. If wiring is done in an existing structure to replace present infrastructure all old cabling that is 

being replaced will be removed from premise as per State and Federal Codes. 

1.2 GROUNDING 

All Grounding and bonding of conduits and cable basket is to be installed by Division 16000 

contractor 

A. Grounding shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA 607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding 

Requirements for Telecommunications, National Electrical Code® and manufacturer's 

grounding requirements as minimum. 

B. Ground equipment racks, conduits, cable baskets and ladder rack. 

C. Connect cabinets, racks, and conduits to a single-point ground which is connected to the 

building ground system via #6 AWG green insulated copper grounding conductor. 

D. Any breaks in cable basket pathway must be grounded across the break points 

3.3 LABELING 

Labeling shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 standards. In addition, provide the following: 

A. Mechanically label each cable with permanent self-adhesive label. This is to include both 

voice and data locations. 

1. Inside receptacle box at the work area within 10 inches of the end of the cable. 

2. Behind the communication closet patch panel or punch block within 10 inches of the 

end of the cable. 

B. Mechanical label on face of data patch panels. Provide AutoCAD as-built drawings on CD. 

Post a laminated copy on site. 

C. All Labels shall be machine-printed. Hand-lettered labels shall not be acceptable. 



D. Label cables, outlets, patch panels, backbones, and punch blocks with closet letter rack, 

patch panel and port IE A 1-2-23. 

E. Marked floor plans showing outlet locations, type, and cables shall be delivered to the owner 

two (2) weeks prior to move in to allow the owner's personnel to connect and test ownerprovided 

equipment in a timely fashion. 

F. Two (2) sets of as-built drawing shall be delivered to the owner (District Technology 

Department) within four (4) weeks of acceptance of project by the owner. A set of as-built 

drawings shall be provided to the owner in media form (CD ROM or 3.5" floppy disks) and 

utilizing CAD software that is acceptable to the owner. Contractor is to deliver to the owner 

(Technology Department of District) within six (6) weeks of acceptance of project by owner. 

3.4 TESTING 

A. Testing shall conform to TIA/EIA 568B. Testing shall be accomplished using level III field 

testers. 

B. Test each pair and shield of each cable for opens, shorts, grounds, and pair reversal. Correct 

grounded and reversed pairs and examine open and shorted pairs to determine if problem is 

caused by improper termination. If termination is proper, tag bad pairs at both ends and note 

on termination sheets. 

1. Perform testing of copper cables with tester meeting TIA/EIA 568B requirements. 

2. If fiber/copper backbone cable contains more than one (1) percent bad pairs, remove 

and replace entire cable. 

3. If horizontal cable contains more than one (1) percent bad conductors, remove and 

replace span of cable entirely. 

C. Initially test optical cable with a light source and power meter-utilizing procedures as stated in 

ANSI/TIA/EIA- 526-14A. If loss tests results are outside acceptable range, test cable with 

optical time domain reflectometer to determine cause of variation. Correct improper 

terminations and replace damaged cables at no additional charge to the owner or location. 


1. Cables shall be tested at 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode optical fiber cables. 

2. Testing procedures shall utilize "Method A" - one jumper references. 

3. Testing will be performed with the most recent version of software as required by 

Siemon to ensure warranty compliance. 





APPENDIX A 

Geotechnical Report 



APPENDIX A – GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 

The geotechnical report, prepared by Professional Service Industries, in., dated December 12, 2008 is 

included herein for the contractors’ use and reference. 


GEOTECHNICAL REPORT APPENDIX A - 1


GEOTECHNICAL REPORT APPENDIX A - 2

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

! 

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT! 

PROPOSED ADDITION TO SEGO LILY 

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

550 EAST 900 NORTH 

LEHI, UTAH 

PSI PROJECT No: 710-85060 

December 12, 2008 

Prepared For: 

Alpine School District 

490 North State Street 

Lindon, Utah 84042 

Attn: Mr. Kraig Sweat 

Prepared By: 

PROFESSIONAL SERVICE INDUSTRIES, INC. 

2779 South 600 West 

Salt Lake City, Utah 

(801) 484 - 8827

! 

! 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

1.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................... 1 

2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................... 1 

3.0 SITE DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. 1 

"#$!%&'(!)*+,&'&*+-!.+,!/*0*12.034 ######################################################################################### $ 

"#5!6(1&*+.7!8(*7*14 ################################################################################################################ 5 

4.0 FIELD EXPLORATIONS ........................................................................................................ 2 

9#$!:*2&+1-!.+,!%.;07&+1########################################################################################################## 5 

9#5!#5!82*?+,@.'(2######################################################################################################################## 9 

7.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ...................................................................... 4 

A#$!8(*'(=3+&=.7!B&-=?--&*+ #####################################################################################################9 

A#5!%&'(!

! 

APPENDIX A 

! 

"#$#%#&'!()*! +,-./0!)12! 

3#&4!()*!5#&6!789#%:!;8$)&#8%3! +,-./0!)1?/@.-?!71A! 

3B(()9'!8+!;)789)&89'!&43&!943B;&3! +,-./0!71C! 

! 

!

! 

1.0 INTRODUCTION 

"#$%! &'()&*! (&'%'+*%! *#'! &'%,-*%! ).! /! 0')*'1#+$1/-! $+2'%*$0/*$)+! .)&! *#'! (&)()%'3! /33$*$)+! *)! 

4'0)!5$-6!7-'8'+*/&6!41#))-!-)1/*'3!/*!99:!7/%*!;::!

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+5+ 

+ 

3.2 Regional Geology 

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+I+ 

+ 

$&"+."*)$(J"+;"':($?+#K+-.)'L*).+:#(*:6+:L%&+):+:)';6+)';+$&"+."*)$(J"+%#':(:$"'%?6+#.+:$(KK'"::6+#K+ 

%#&":(J"+:#(*:6+:L%&+):+%*)?+#.+:(*$C+ 

=)20*":+M"."+"N)2('";+('+$&"+K("*;+)';+."0.":"'$)$(J"+0#.$(#':+M"."+:$#.";+('+:")*)3*"+0*):$(%+ 

3)-:C++O&"+:)20*":+M"."+$.)':0#.$";+$#+#L.+*)3#.)$#.?+K#.+KL.$&".+"N)2(')$(#'+)';+$":$('-C++O&"+ 

3#.('-:+M"."+3)%PK(**";+L0+$#+$&"+-.#L';+:L.K)%"+M($&+)L-".+%L$$('-:+)';+#'E:($"+:#(*:C+ 

4.2 Percolation Test 

+ 

Q'"+R4S+0".%#*)$(#'+$":$+M):+%#';L%$";+'").+$&"+'#.$&M":$+%#.'".+#K+$&"+0.#0#:";+3L(*;('-+);;($(#'C++ 

)3#.)$#.?+ O":$+ /":L*$:+ RW(-L."+ ZEFS+ ('+ 

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+I+ 

+ 

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+F+ 

+ 

)';+3)%IJ(**";+K($&+0.#0".*?+0*)%";+)';+%#20)%$";+:$.L%$L.)*+J(**C+ 

9*"):"+ '#$"+ $&)$+ $&"+ :#(*:+ %#'$)('+ :(-'(J(%)'$+ )2#L'$:+ #J+ :)';6+ $&":"+ $?0":+ #J+ :#(*:+ $?0(%)**?+ 

3"%#2"+*##:"+;L.('-+"M%)N)$(#'+#.+#$&".+%#':$.L%$(#'+)%$(N($(":C++>##:"+#.+;(:$L.3";+:#(*:+)."+ 

'#$+ :L($)3*"+ J#.+ :L00#.$+ #J+ J#L';)$(#':+ #.+ J*##.+ :*)3:+ )';+ :&#L*;+ 3"+ ."2#N";+ ;#K'+ $#+ 

L';(:$L.3";+ :#(*:+ 0.(#.+ $#+ 0*)%('-+ :$""*+ )';+ %#'%."$"+ J#.+ $&"+ J##$('-:+ )';+ J*##.+ :*)3:C+ + 9=@+ 

."%#22"';:+ $&)$+ :($"+ 0."0).)$(#'6+ ").$&K#.I6+ )';+ 0)N"2"'$+ :L3-.);"+ 0."0).)$(#'+ 3"+ 

)%%#20*(:&";+;L.('-+K).2".6+;.(".+2#'$&:6+$?0(%)**?+"M$"';('-+J.#2+2(;EO)?+$#+2(;EP%$#3".+#J+ 

$&"+ ?").C+ +

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+G+ 

+ 

Table 1:+=$.I%$I.)*+J(**+!.);)$(#'+/"KI(."2"'$:+ 

=("L"+=(M"+ 

9".%"'$+9)::('-+3?+ 

N"(-&$+ 

O+('%&+ 477+ 

P+('%&+ 8F+E+477+ 

B#C+Q+ Q7+E+87++ 

B#C+Q7+ 47+R+Q7++ 

B#C+577+ F+E+4F+ 

>(KI(;+>(2($+S>>T+ !+OF++ 

9*):$(%($?+@';"U+S9@T+ 4F+SV)UCT+E+Q+SV('CT+ 

7.5 Compaction 

+ 

J(**+ 2)$".()*:+ :&#I*;+ 3"+ 2#(:$I."+ %#';($(#'";+ $#+ $W#+ S5T+ 0".%"'$+ 3"*#W+ #0$(2I2+ $#+ $W#+ S5T+ 

0".%"'$+ )3#L"+ #0$(2I2+ 2#(:$I."+ %#'$"'$C+ + =$.I%$I.)*+ X(**+ :&#I*;+ 3"+ 0*)%";+ ('+ *##:"+ *(X$:+ '#$+ 

"U%"";('-+ '('"+ SYT+ ('%&":+ $&(%Z+ )';+ %#20)%$";+ $#+ )$+ *"):$+ YF+ 0".%"'$+ #X+ $&"+ 2)U(2I2+ ;.?+ 

;"':($?+ ):+ ;"$".2('";+ 3?+ $&"+

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+D+ 

+ 

!+ I##$('-:+ :&#J*;+ 3").+ )$+ )+ 2('(2J2+ ;"0$&+ #K+ L7+ ('%&":+ 3"*#M+ K(')*+ -.);"+ K#.+ K.#:$+ 

0.#$"%$(#'C++I#.+'#'EK.#:$+)."):6+:J%&+):+('$".(#.+K##$('-:6+)+2('(2J2+"23";2"'$+;"0$&+ 

#K+ 48+ ('%&":+ (:+ ."%#22"';";C+ + @K+ $&"+ 0.#0#:";+ 3J(*;('-+ (:+ $#+ 3"+ %#':$.J%$";+ ;J.('-+ 

M('$".+ 2#'$&:+ #.+ (K+ $&"+ K##$('-:+ 2)?+ 3"+ :J3N"%$";+ $#+ K.""O('-+ $"20".)$J.":+ )K$".+ 

K#J';)$(#'+%#':$.J%$(#'6+$&"'+)**+K##$('-:+:&#J*;+3"+0.#$"%$";+K.#2+K.""O('-C+ 

!+ I#J';)$(#':+ :&#J*;+ &)P"+ 2('(2J2+ *)$".)*+ ;(2"':(#':+ #K+ 48+ ('%&":+ K#.+ %#'$('J#J:+ 

K##$('-:+)';+5Q+('%&":+K#.+(:#*)$";+%#*J2'+K##$('-:C+ 

!+ =$.J%$J.)*+K(**6+M&"."+."RJ(.";6+:&#J*;+"S$"';+)+2('(2J2+#K+T+$&"+;"0$&+#K+$&"+K(**+*)$".)**?+ 

3"?#';+$&"+#J$:(;"+";-"+#K+$&"+K##$('-:C+ 

!+ I##$('-:+:&#J*;+3"+;":(-'";+('+)%%#.;)'%"+M($&+$&"+@'$".')$(#')*+UJ(*;('-+V#;"+W@UVX6+ 

577G+";($(#'C+ 

Y#.(O#'$)*+ :&").+ K#.%":+ %)'+ 3"+ .":(:$";+ 0).$()**?+ #.+ %#20*"$"*?+ 3?+ K.(%$(#')*+ K#.%":+ ;"P"*#0";+ 

3"$M""'+$&"+3):"+#K+K##$('-:+)';+$&"+J';".*?('-+:#(*C++Z&"+$#$)*+K.(%$(#')*+.":(:$)'%"+3"$M""'+$&"+ 

K##$('-+ )';+ $&"+ :#(*+ (:+ $&"+ :J22)$(#'+ #K+ P".$(%)*+ K#.%":+ W;");+ *#);X+ $(2":+ $&"+ %#"KK(%("'$+ #K+ 

K.(%$(#'+3"$M""'+$&"+:#(*+)';+$&"+3):"+#K+$&"+K##$('-C++["+."%#22"';+)+P)*J"+#K+7CQ7+K#.+$&"+ 

%#"KK(%("'$+#K+K.(%$(#'+K#.+%#'%."$"+0*)%";+#'+J';(:$J.3";+')$J.)*+-.)'J*).+:#(*:+#.+0.#0".*?+0*)%";+ 

)';+ %#20)%$";+ -.)'J*).+ :$.J%$J.)*+ "S$"';('-+ ;#M'+ $#+ ')$(P"+ J';(:$J.3";+ :#(*:C+ + @K+ );;($(#')*+ 

*)$".)*+ .":(:$)'%"+ (:+ ."RJ(.";6+ 0)::(P"+ :#(*+ .":(:$)'%"+ K.#2+ "23";;";+ ."$)('('-+ M)**:+ )';\#.+ 

K#J';)$(#':+ 3").('-+ #'+ #.+ 0*)%";+ ('+ ('$(2)$"+ %#'$)%$+ M($&+ J';(:$J.3";+ ')$(P"+ :#(*+ 2)?+ 3"+ 

"P)*J)$";+#'+$&"+3):(:+#K+)'+"RJ(P)*"'$+K*J(;+&)P('-+)+J'($+M"(-&$+#K+5DF+0%KC+ 

["+ ."%#22"';+ $&)$+ $&"+ K##$('-+ "S%)P)$(#':+ 3"+ #3:".P";+ )';+ ;#%J2"'$";+ 3?+ 9=@]:+ 

!"#$"%&'(%)*+ ,'-('"".+ #.+ ;":(-')$";+ $"%&'(%)*+ ."0.":"'$)$(P"+ 0.(#.+ $#+ 0*)%"2"'$+ #K+ :$.J%$J.)*+ 

K(**6+%#'%."$"+#.+."('K#.%('-+:$""*+$#+P".(K?+$&"(.+:J($)3(*($?+K#.+K#J';)$(#'+:J00#.$C+++ 

7.7 Foundation Settlements 

+ 

Z#$)*+:"$$*"2"'$+#K+)'+(';(P(;J)*+K#J';)$(#'+M(**+P).?+;"0"';('-+#'+$&"+0*)'+;(2"':(#':+#K+$&"+ 

K#J';)$(#':+)';+$&"+)%$J)*+*#);+:J00#.$";C++["+":$(2)$"+$&)$+$#$)*+:"$$*"2"'$+J';".+:$)$(%+*#);:+ 

M(**+'#$+"S%"";+#'"+W4X+('%&+K##$('-:+;":(-'";+)%%#.;('-+$#+$&"+."%#22"';)$(#':+;":%.(3";+('+ 

="%$(#'+DCG+)3#P"C++1(KK"."'$()*+:"$$*"2"'$:+)."+"S0"%$";+$#+)00.#)%&+)3#J$+F7+0".%"'$+#K+$&"+ 

":$(2)$";+$#$)*+:"$$*"2"'$+J';".+:$)$(%+%#';($(#':C+++ 

7.8 Adjacent Addition 

+ 

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+8+ 

+ 

)R"+V)I*$C++B#+O)I*$:+)."+(';(%)$";+$#+0)::+$&.#I-&+#.+);L)%"'$+$#+$&"+ 

0.#L"%$+ :($"C+ +

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+I+ 

+ 

7.10.1 Liquefaction Potential 

J&"+ 0.#K"%$+ :($"+ (:+ *#%)$";+ ('+ )'+ ).")+ ;":(-')$";+ ):+ L2#;".)$"M+ ('+ *(NO"P)%$(#'+ 0#$"'$()*C+ + @'+ 

-"'".)*6+ *(NO"P)%$(#'+ (:+ )+ %#';($(#'+ Q&"."+ :#(*:+ *#:"+ ('$".-.)'O*).+ :$."'-$&+ ;O"+ $#+ )3.O0$+ 

('%."):":+('+0#."+Q)$".+0."::O."C++9#."+Q)$".+0."::O."+('%."):":+$?0(%)**?+#%%O.+;O.('-+;?')2(%+ 

*#);('-+:O%&+):+-.#O';+:&)R('-+;O.('-+)+:"(:2(%+"S"'$C++>(NO"P)%$(#'6+:&#O*;+($+#%%O.+#'+)+:($"6+ 

%)'+(';O%"+-.#O';+:"$$*"2"'$+)';+*)$".)*+:0.");('-6+Q&(%&+%)'+.":O*$+('+;)2)-"+$#+:$.O%$O.":C++ 

T#.+*(NO"P)%$(#'+$#+#%%O.6+$&"+P#**#Q('-+%#';($(#':+2O:$+3"+0.":"'$U+ 

!+ J&"+ :#(*+ :";(2"'$:+ 2O:$+ 3"+ ('+ :)$O.)$";+ #.+ '").E:)$O.)$";+ %#';($(#':C+ +

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+47+ 

+ 

)';+&")I?+J:%&##*+3K:":L+$.)MM(%+%#':(:$('-+#M+)3#K$+576777+)';+N76777+,OK(I)*"'$+=('-*"+

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+44+ 

+ 

Table 5:+/(-(;+9)I"2"'$+1":(-'+9).)2"$".:+ 

Pavement Materials Recommended Minimum Thickness (inches) 

J#'%."$"+KL6777+0:(M+ F+ 

!.)'N*).+O):"+J#N.:"+ L+ 

9#.$*)';+ J"2"'$+ J#'%."$"+ N:";+ P#.+ $&"+ 0)I"2"'$+ .(-(;+ 0)I"2"'$+ :"%$(#'+ :&#N*;+ 3"+ )(.+ 

"'$.)('";+Q($&+)00.#R(2)$"*?+P(I"+KFM+0".%"'$+)(.6+)';+$&"+2)R(2N2+)**#Q)3*"+:*N20+:&#N*;+'#$+ 

"R%"";+P#N.+KLM+('%&":C++A#('$:+P#.+$&"+.(-(;+%#'%."$"+0)I"2"'$+:&#N*;+3"+*)(;+('+)+."%$)'-N*).+#.+ 

:SN)."+0)$$".'C++A#('$+:0)%('-+:&#N*;+'#$+"R%"";+$&(.$?+KT7M+$(2":+$&"+$&(%U'"::+#P+$&"+:*)3+)';+ 

:&#N*;+ )%%#22#;)$"+ $&"+ %#'$.)%$(#'+ )';+ "R0)':(#'+ #P+ %#'%."$"C+ + 1"0$&+ #P+ V#('$:+ :&#N*;+ 3"+ 

)00.#R(2)$"*?+W+$(2":+$&"+:*)3+$&(%U'"::C+ 

7.11.1 Pavement Drainage and Maintenance 

9)I"2"'$+ :N3-.);":+ :&#N*;+ 3"+ :*#0";+ $#+ 0.#I(;"+ .)0(;+ :N.P)%"+ ;.)(')-"+ ;N.('-+ )';+ )P$".+ 

%#':$.N%$(#'C+ + X)$".+ )**#Q";+ $#+ 0#';+ #'+ #.+ );V)%"'$+ $#+ 0)I"2"'$+ )."):+ %#N*;+ :)$N.)$"+ $&"+ 

:N3-.);"+#.+0)I"2"'$+:"%$(#'+)';+%)N:"+0."2)$N."+;"$".(#.)$(#'+#P+0)I"2"'$:6+)';+."2#I)*+ 

)';+ ."0*)%"2"'$+ 2)?+ 3"+ ."SN(.";C+ + 9".(#;(%+ 2)('$"')'%"+ #P+ $&"+ 0)I"2"'$+ :&#N*;+ 3"+ 

)'$(%(0)$";C++Y&(:+:&#N*;+('%*N;"+:")*('-+#P+%.)%U:+)';+V#('$:+)';+3?+2)('$)('('-+0.#0".+:N.P)%"+ 

;.)(')-"+$#+)I#(;+0#';('-+#P+Q)$".+#'+#.+'").+$&"+0)I"2"'$+).")C+ 

7.12 Utility Trenches 

+ 

H$(*($?+ $."'%&":+ :&#N*;+ 3"+ U"0$+ P.""+ P.#2+ Q)$".+ ;N.('-+ "R%)I)$(#'6+ P('"+ -.);('-6+ 0(0"+ *)?('-6+ 

V#('$('-6+ )';+ "23";2"'$+ #0".)$(#':C+ + =N.P)%"+ Q)$".+ :&#N*;+ 3"+ 0."I"'$";+ P.#2+ "'$".('-+ 

$."'%&":C++@P+N':$)3*"+:#(*:+)."+"'%#N'$".";+)$+('I".$+"*"I)$(#':6+($+2)?+3"+'"%"::).?+$#+#I".E 

"R%)I)$"+)';+."0*)%"+$&"+N':$)3*"+:#(*:+Q($&+P.""+;.)('('-+-.)I"*+3)%UP(**C++Y&"+;"0$&+#P+#I".E 

"R%)I)$(#'6+(P+'"%"::).?6+:&#N*;+3"+;"$".2('";+3?+P("*;+#3:".I)$(#'C+ 

7.12.1 Utility Trench Backfill 

Y&"+3)%UP(**+0*)%";+('+N$(*($?+$."'%&+"R%)I)$(#':+Q($&('+$&"+*(2($:+#P+$&"+3N(*;('-+)';+0)I";+)."):+ 

:&#N*;+ %#':(:$+ #P+ :)';6+ :)';+ )';+ -.)I"*6+ #.+ %.N:&";+ .#%U+ Q($&+ )+ 2)R(2N2+ :(Z"+ #P+ N0+ $#+ 4[+ 

('%&":6+ )';+ Q($&+ '#$+ 2#."+$&)$+F+0".%"'$+0)::('-+$&"+B#C+577+:("I"+KQ):&";+)')*?:(:MC++Y&(:+ 

3)%UP(**+:&#N*;+3"+N'(P#.2*?+2#(:$N."+%#';($(#'";6+0*)%";+('+2)R(2N2+\+('%&":E$&(%U+*(P$:+K*##:"M+ 

)';+%#20)%$";+N:('-+I(3.)$#.?+%#20)%$(#'+"SN(02"'$+#.+$)20('-+N'($:+$#+)$+*"):$+\F+0".%"'$+#P+ 

$&"+ 2)R(2N2+ ;.?+ ;"':($?+ ):+ ;"$".2('";+ 3?+

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+45+ 

+ 

7.13 Surface Drainage 

+ 

9#:($(I"+:($"+;.)(')-"+)J)?+K.#2+$&"+K#L';)$(#':+)';+;.(I"+)."):+:&#L*;+3"+":$)3*(:&";+;L.('-+ 

$&"+%#':$.L%$(#'+)';+2)('$)('";+$&.#L-&#L$+$&"+*(K"+#K+0.#0#:";+%#':$.L%$(#'C++M)$".+:&#L*;+'#$+ 

3"+ )**#J";+ $#+ %#**"%$+ '").+ $&"+ K#L';)$(#':+ #.+ K*##.+ :*)3+ )."):+ #K+ $&"+ 3L(*;('-+ #.+ ('+ 0)I"2"'$+ 

)."):+ "($&".+ ;L.('-+ #.+ )K$".+ %#':$.L%$(#'C+ + H';".%L$+ #.+ "N%)I)$";+ )."):+ :&#L*;+ 3"+ :*#0";+ 

$#J).;:+ #'"+ %#.'".+ $#+ K)%(*($)$"+ ."2#I)*+ #K+ )'?+ %#**"%$";+ .)('J)$".6+ -.#L';J)$".+ :""0)-"6+ #.+ 

:L.K)%"+ .L'#KKC+ + M)$".+ K.#2+ .##K+ ;#J':0#L$:+ #K+ $&"+ 0.#0#:";+ 3L(*;('-+ :&#L*;+ 3"+ %#'I"?";+ ('+ 

0(0":+$&)$+;(:%&).-"+('+)."):+)+:L($)3*"+;(:$)'%"+)J)?+K.#2+$&"+3L(*;('-C++9=@+."%#22"';:+$&)$+ 

)+2('(2L2+K(I"+OFP+0".%"'$+-.);("'$+:&#L*;+3"+2)('$)('";+K#.+)+;(:$)'%"+#K+)$+*"):$+$"'+O47P+K""$+ 

)J)?+K.#2+)'?+K#L';)$(#'+J)**+('+L'0)I";+)."):C++=($"+0".(2"$".:+:&#L*;+3"+0."0).";+J($&+:(*$+ 

K"'%":+ )';Q#.+ #$&".+ ".#:(#'+ %#'$.#*+ ;"I(%":+ $#+ R""0+ :$#.2+ J)$".+ 0.#0".*?+ %#'$)('";+ )';+ 

%#'$.#**";+J($&('+$&"+:($"+3#L';).(":C+ 

8.0 DESIGN REVIEW AND CONSTRUCTION SERVICES 

9=@+:&#L*;+3"+."$)('";+$#+."I("J+)**+-"#$"%&'(%)*+."*)$";+0#.$(#':+#K+$&"+0*)':+)';+:0"%(K(%)$(#':+ 

$#+"I)*L)$"+J&"$&".+$&"?+)."+('+%#'K#.2)'%"+J($&+$&"+."%#22"';)$(#':+0.#I(;";+('+#L.+."0#.$C++ 

!"#$"%&'(%)*+,'-('"".('-+/"0#.$+ 1"%"23".+456+5778+ 

9.#0#:";+"&(6+H$)&+ 9)-"+4I+ 

+ 

%&)'-":+('+$&"+J#K';)$(#'+)';L#.+#$&".+."%#22"';)$(#':+)."+."MK(.";C++@J+9=@+(:+'#$+."$)('";+$#+ 

0".J#.2+ $&":"+ JK'%$(#':6+ 9=@+ %)''#$+ 3"+ .":0#':(3*"+ J#.+ $&"+ (20)%$+ #J+ $&#:"+ %#';($(#':+ #'+ $&"+ 

0".J#.2)'%"+ #J+ $&"+ 0.#N"%$C+ + O&"+ !"#$"%&'(%)*+ ,'-('"".+ P)..)'$:+ $&)$+ $&"+ J(';('-:6+ 

."%#22"';)$(#':6+ :0"%(J(%)$(#':6+ #.+ 0.#J"::(#')*+ );Q(%"+ %#'$)('";+ &"."('+ &)Q"+ 3""'+ 2);"+ ('+ 

)%%#.;)'%"+P($&+-"'".)**?+)%%"0$";+0.#J"::(#')*+-"#$"%&'(%)*+"'-('"".('-+0.)%$(%":+('+$&"+*#%)*+ 

).")C+ + B#+ #$&".+ P)..)'$(":+ )."+ (20*(";+ #.+ "R0."::";C+ + O&"+ !"#$"%&'(%)*+ ,'-('"".+ :&#K*;+ 3"+ 

."$)('";+ )';+ 0.#Q(;";+ $&"+ #00#.$K'($?+ $#+ ."Q("P+ $&"+ J(')*+ ;":(-'+ 0*)':+ )';+ :0"%(J(%)$(#':+ $#+ 

%&"%S+$&)$+#K.+"'-('"".('-+."%#22"';)$(#':+&)Q"+3""'+0.#0".*?+('%#.0#.)$";+('$#+$&"+;":(-'+ 

;#%K2"'$:C++

! 

APPENDIX A 

Vicinity Map 

Site Plan with Boring Locations

SITE 

Project: 

Proposed Addition to Sego Lily Elementary School 

550 East 900 North 

VICINITY MAP 

Lehi, Utah 

Project No: 710-85060 

Drawn By: MEZ 

Checked By: CTG 

Date: Nov., 2008 

Scale: As Shown 

Figure: A-1 

N

B-1 

Map provided by SL&A Architects - Salt Lake City, UT 

APPROXIMATE BORING LOCATION 

Project: 

Addition to Sego Lily Elementary School 


Lehi, Utah 

Drawn By: MEA 

Checked By: CTG 

SITE MAP WITH BORING 

LOCATIONS 

Scale: As Shown 

Project No: 710 - 85060 

Date: Nov. 2008 

Figure: A-2 

B-2 

B-3 

B-4 

N

! 

APPENDIX B 

Log of Borings 

Summary of Laboratory Test Results

PSI Job No.: 710-85060 

Project: Proposed Addition to Sego Lily Elementary School 

Location: 550 East 900 North 

Lehi, Utah 

Elevation, (feet) 

Depth, (feet) 

0 

5 

10 

15 

20 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 

Recovery (inches) 

1 

2 

25 

Completion Depth: 

Date Drilling Started: 

Date Drilling Completed: 

Logged By: 

Driller & Rig Type: 

3 

4 

-- medium dense 

5 5-12-11 18 

6 

7 

8 


Salt Lake City, Utah 84115 

PH: (801) 484-8827 

Fax: (801) 487-3312 

Surface Elev.: 

ft 

TOPSOIL: 

-- Sandy Lean Clay, dark brown, with 

traces of roots 

Sandy Lean Clay: 

-- hard, brown 

Poorly-Graded Sand with Silt: 

-- dense, brown 

-- very dense 

Silty Sand: 

-- medium dense, light brown 

Silt: 

-- medium stiff, light brown 

Lean Clay: 

-- medium stiff, grayish-brown 

40.0 ft 

11/17/08 

11/17/08 

Tim 

PSI 

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 

Continued Next Page 

Sample Types: 

Auger Cutting 

Split-Spoon (SS) 

Rock Core 

Drilling Method: 

Sampling Method: 

Hammer Type: 

Latitude: 

Longitude: 

USCS Classification 

SM 

ML 

Penetration Resistance 

(per 6-inch) 

7-14-24 

15-30-26 

SP-SM 

3-8-6 

3-4-3 

Shelby (SH) 

3.25-in. I.D. Mud Rotary 

SS, SH 

140-lb/30-in. drop 

N 

W 

Dry Density (pcf) 

Moisture (%) 

24 

3 

7 

10 

22 

30 

34 

Mod. California (MCAL) 

LOG OF BORING: B-1 

1 

0 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Remarks: 

2.0 

WATER LEVELS 

While Drilling 

After Drilling 

PENETRATION 

RESISTANCE 

blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

50 

100 

After 24 Hours 

Qp 

4.0 

>> 

Sheet 1 of 2 

NOTES 

Gradation @ 8.5-ft: 

Granular = 92% 

Fines = 8% 

8.5 FT 



Fines = 48% 


Granular = 7% 

Fines = 93% 

Atterberg Limits @ 23-ft: 

Liquit Limit = 33 

Plastic Limit = 22 

Plasticity Index = 10 

Figure B-1 

N/A 

N/A

PSI Job No.: 710-85060 



Lehi, Utah 


Depth, (feet) 

25 

30 

35 

40 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 





Logged By: 


9 

10 

11 



PH: (801) 484-8827 

Fax: (801) 487-3312 

Lean Clay: 

-- medium stiff, grayish-brown 


-- very stiff, brown 

-- grayish-brown 

Silty Sand: 

-- dense, dark grayish-brown 

Bottom of Boring @ 40-ft 

40.0 ft 

11/17/08 

11/17/08 

Tim 

PSI 


Sample Types: 

Auger Cutting 


Rock Core 



Hammer Type: 

Latitude: 

Longitude: 


CL 


(per 6-inch) 

5-7-9 

9-12-15 

Shelby (SH) 

3.25-in. I.D. Mud Rotary 

SS, SH 


N 

W 


Moisture (%) 

23 

19 

17 



1 

0 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Remarks: 

2.0 



PENETRATION 

RESISTANCE 

blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

50 

100 


Qp 

4.0 

Sheet 2 of 2 

WATER LEVELS 

NOTES 

8.5 FT 



Fines = 57% 

Figure B-1 

N/A 

N/A

PSI Job No.: 710-85060 

Drilling Method: 3.25-in. I.D. HSA 

Project: Proposed Addition to Sego Lily Elementary School Sampling Method: SS, SH 


Hammer Type: 140-lb/30-in. drop 

Lehi, Utah Latitude: 

N 

Longitude: 

W 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

5 

10 

15 

20 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 





Logged By: 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 



PH: (801) 484-8827 

Fax: (801) 487-3312 

Surface Elev.: ft 

TOPSOIL: 

-- Sandy Lean Clay, brown, with roots 


-- medium stiff, brown 


-- medium dense, brown 

Silty Sand: 


Silt: 



20.0 ft 

11/17/08 

11/17/08 

Tim 

PSI 


Sample Types: 

Auger Cutting 


Rock Core 



(per 6-inch) 

12-13-14 

SP-SM 

7-9-8 

5-5-5 

10-13-15 

Shelby (SH) 


6 



Moisture (%) 

1 

0 

PENETRATION 

RESISTANCE 

blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

50 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Remarks: 

2.0 




100 

Qp 

4.0 

Sheet 1 of 1 

WATER LEVELS 

NOTES 

Gradation @ 2-ft: 


Fines = 9% 

16 FT 

14.5 FT 

Figure B-2 

N/A

PSI Job No.: 710-85060 



Lehi, Utah 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

5 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 





Logged By: 


1 

2 

3 



PH: (801) 484-8827 

Fax: (801) 487-3312 


Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete (4"): 






6.0 ft 

11/17/08 

11/17/08 

Tim 

PSI 


Sample Types: 

Auger Cutting 


Rock Core 



Hammer Type: 

Latitude: 

Longitude: 



(per 6-inch) 

8-12-15 

10-11-16 

Shelby (SH) 

3.25-in. I.D. HSA 

SS, SH 


N 

W 




Moisture (%) 

1 

0 

PENETRATION 

RESISTANCE 

blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

50 

100 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Remarks: 

2.0 




Qp 

4.0 

Sheet 1 of 1 

WATER LEVELS 

NOTES 

No GWT 

Figure B-3 

N/A 

N/A

PSI Job No.: 710-85060 



Lehi, Utah 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

5 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 





Logged By: 


1 

2 

3 



PH: (801) 484-8827 

Fax: (801) 487-3312 


Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete (4"): 


-- stiff, brown 




6.0 ft 

11/17/08 

11/17/08 

Tim 

PSI 


Sample Types: 

Auger Cutting 


Rock Core 



Hammer Type: 

Latitude: 

Longitude: 



(per 6-inch) 

7-6-9 

6-8-8 

Shelby (SH) 

3.25-in. I.D. HSA 

SS, SH 


N 

W 




Moisture (%) 

1 

0 

PENETRATION 

RESISTANCE 

blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

50 

100 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Remarks: 

2.0 




Qp 

4.0 

Sheet 1 of 1 

WATER LEVELS 

NOTES 

No GWT 

Figure B-4 

N/A 

N/A

Boring 

ID 

Depth 

(feet) 

Liquid 

Limit (LL) 

Plastic 

Limit (PL) 

Plasticity 

Index (PI) 

Qu 

(psf) 

% < #200 

Sieve 

Water 

Content 

(%) 

B-1 0.0 23.6 

B-1 2.0 2.9 

B-1 4.5 7.4 

B-1 6.5 

9.7 

B-1 8.5 8 18.2 

B-1 13.5 48 22.3 

B-1 18.5 

93 29.6 

B-1 23.0 33 22 10 33.9 

B-1 28.0 

22.8 

B-1 33.5 57 19.2 

B-1 38.5 17.1 

B-2 2.0 

9 5.7 


Salt Lake City, UT 84115 

Phone: (801) 484-8827 

Fax: (801) 487-3312 

% < #4 

Sieve 

PSI Job No.: 

Project: 

Location: 

Dry 

Density 

(pcf) 

Sheet 1 of 1 

Remarks 

Summary of Laboratory Test Results 

710-85060 

Proposed Addition to 

Sego Lily Elementary School 


Lehi, Utah 

Figure B-5

Complete Compiled Specification.pdf - Peck Ormsby Construction

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?